Advanced Financial Reporting PDF

ADVANCED FINANCIAL
REPORTING
STUDY TEXT
ii
A D VA N C E D F I N A N C I A L R E P O R T I N G
Copyright
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of
the copyright owner. This publication may not be lent, resold, hired or otherwise disposed of in anyway of trade
S T U D Y
T E X T
without the prior written consent of the copyright owner.
ISBN NO: 9966-760-27-X

2009 SUP
First Published 2009
SUP
P.O. Box 59857, 00200,
Nairobi, Kenya.
Tel: +254 (0) 20 606155
Fax: +254 (0) 20 607498
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
iii
S T U D Y
We gratefully acknowledge permission to quote from past examination papers of the Kenya
Accounts and Secretaries National Examination Board (KASNEB).
T E X T
Acknowledgment
S T U D Y
T E X T
iv
Table of Contents
Acknowledgment ...................................................................................................................... iii
Table of Contents ...................................................................................................................... v
PART A...................................................................................................................................... vii
CHAPTER ONE .......................................................................................................................... 1

ACCOUNTING FOR GROUPS ................................................................................................... 3
CHAPTER TWO ........................................................................................................................ 75
ACCOUNTING FOR ASSETS AND LIABILITIES (PART A).................................................... 77
CHAPTER THREE .................................................................................................................. 141
CHAPTER FOUR .................................................................................................................... 201

PRESENTATION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (PART A) ...................... 203
CHAPTER FIVE ...................................................................................................................... 291
EFFECTS OF INFLATION ...................................................................................................... 293
CHAPTER SIX ........................................................................................................................ 329
PRESENTATION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (PART B) ...................... 331
PART C ................................................................................................................................... 371
CHAPTER SEVEN .................................................................................................................. 373

PUBLIC SECTOR ACCOUNTING .......................................................................................... 375
CHAPTER EIGHT ................................................................................................................... 443
CURRENT ISSUES ................................................................................................................. 445
CHAPTER NINE...................................................................................................................... 483
SUMMARIES OF INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL REPORTING STANDARDS
(IFRSs), INTERNATIONAL ACCOUNTING STANDARDS (IASs)
AND IFRIC/SIC INTERPRETATIONS AS OF 31st DECEMBER 2005.................................... 485
S T U D Y
PART B ................................................................................................................................... 199
T E X T
ASSETS AND LIABILITIES (PART B) ................................................................................... 143
vi
ANSWERS TO EXAM QUESTIONS....................................................................................... 523

REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................ 559
GLOSSARY............................................................................................................................. 563
S T U D Y
T E X T
INDEX...................................................................................................................................... 575
T E X T
PART A
S T U D Y
vii
S T U D Y
T E X T
viii
S
T
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
CHAPTER ONE
ACCOUNTING FOR GROUPS
S T U D Y
T E X T
CHAPTER ONE
OBJECTIVES
After this chapter the student will be able to:
INTRODUCTION
This chapter begins with the on basic principles of group accounts professional requirements as
set out in IAS 27 Accounting for subsidiary undertakings. It then looks at the requirements of
IFRS 3 business combinations.
Thereafter, we look at the preparation of consolidated accounts where there has been a step-bystep acquisition. As the name suggests, step-by-step acquisitions involve acquiring control of a
company in stages. A discussion on mergers, associates and joint ventures is provided.
DEFINITION OF KEY TERMS

Subsidiary: An entity, including an unincorporated entity such as a partnership that is controlled
by another entity (known as the parent).
Parent: An entity that has one or more subsidiaries.
Group structure: The relationship between the holding company and the subsidiaries.
Associate: An enterprise in which an investor has signicant inuence but not control or joint
control.
T E X T
Understand the basic principles of acquisition and merger accounting.

Explain the principles of measurement relating to the fair value of the consideration and
the net assets acquired.
Discuss the nature of step-by-step acquisitions.
Prepare consolidated nancial statements where including Associate companies, jointly
controlled entities and foreign of subsidiaries.
Prepare consolidated nancial statements on disposal of subsidiaries.
S T U D Y
Joint venture: A contractual arrangement whereby two or more parties undertake an economic
activity that is subject to joint control.
Foreign operation: A subsidiary, associate, joint venture, or branch whose activities are based
in a country other than that of the reporting enterprise.
EXAM CONTEXT
In past examinations, the examiner has tested the students knowledge on the following
topics:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Group structures
Foreign subsidiaries
Merger Vs Acquisition
Disposal of subsidiaries
Students should, therefore, understand these topics.
INDUSTRY CONTEXT
This chapter enables rms to know what kind of investment they have made in another rm. That
is, whether it is a subsidiary, joint venture, merger, foreign subsidiary and so on.
Consolidation assists rms to know how to prepare consolidated nancial statements if they have
acquired subsidiaries, joint ventures, mergers and so on.
The topic on foreign subsidiaries assists rms that have acquired foreign subsidiaries to know
how to translate the foreign subsidiarys nancial statements into the reporting currency of the
holding company.
It also assists the holding company to know how to prepare consolidated nancial statements
with the foreign subsidiary.
1.1
BASIC CONSOLIDATION (IAS 27)
FAST FORWARD: A parent is required to present consolidated nancial statements in which it

consolidates its investments in subsidiaries.
IAS 27 has the objectives of setting standards to be applied in the preparation and presentation
of consolidated nancial statements for a group of entities under the control of a parent; and in
accounting for investments in subsidiaries, jointly controlled entities, and associates when an
entity elects, or is required by local regulations, to present separate (non-consolidated) nancial
statements.

Control: The power to govern the nancial and operating policies of an enterprise so as to obtain
benets from its activities.
Control is presumed when the parent acquires more than half of the voting rights of the enterprise.
Even when more than one half of the voting rights are not acquired, control may be evidenced
by power:
(i)
Over more than one half of the voting rights by virtue of an agreement with other
investors; or
(ii)
To govern the nancial and operating policies of the other enterprise under a statute or
an agreement; or
(iii) To appoint or remove the majority of the members of the board of directors; or
(iv) To cast the majority of votes at a meeting of the board of directors.
S T U D Y
Consolidated nancial statements: The nancial statements of a group presented as those of

a single economic entity.
T E X T
The following are important denitions in IAS 27:
S T U D Y
T E X T
The parent company need not present consolidated nancial statements in the following
circumstances:
The parent is itself a wholly-owned subsidiary, or is a partially owned subsidiary of

another entity and its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote, have
been informed about, and do not object to, the parent not presenting consolidated
nancial statements;
The parent's debt or equity instruments are not traded in a public market;
The parent did not le, nor is it in the process of ling, its nancial statements with a
securities commission or other regulatory organisation for the purpose of issuing any
class of instruments in a public market; and
The ultimate or any intermediate parent of the parent produces consolidated nancial
statements available for public use that comply with International Financial Reporting
Standards.
The consolidated accounts should include all of the parents subsidiaries, both domestic and
foreign.] There is no exception for a subsidiary whose business is of a different nature from the
parents (This is a requirement by the companies Act but it is now not allowed on the grounds that
the rm can present segmental report). Also, as a result of an amendment of IAS 27 by IFRS 5 in
March 2004, there is no exception for a subsidiary for which control is intended to be temporary
because the subsidiary is acquired and held exclusively with a view to its subsequent disposal
in the near future.
Special purpose entities (SPEs) should be consolidated where the substance of the relationship
indicates that the SPE is controlled by the reporting enterprise. This may arise even where the
activities of the SPE are predetermined or where the majority of voting or equity are not held by
the reporting enterprise. Once an investment ceases to fall within the denition of a subsidiary, it
should be accounted for as an associate under IAS 28, as a joint venture under IAS 31 or as an
investment under IAS 39, as appropriate.
1.1.1 The consolidation process

Intra-group balances, transactions, income, and expenses should be eliminated in full. Intragroup losses may indicate that an impairment loss on the related asset should be recognized.
Some of the adjustments requires during consolidation include:
(i)
Elimination of unrealized prot on inventory and Property, plant and equipment that has
been sold within the group.
(ii)
Elimination of inter-company indebtness as a result of inter-company transactions for

example receivables and payments and proposed dividends in subsidiary companies.
The nancial statements of the parent and its subsidiaries used in preparing the consolidated
nancial statements should all be prepared as of the same reporting date, unless it is impracticable
to do so. If it is impracticable a particular subsidiary to prepare its nancial statements as of the
same date as its parent, adjustments must be made for the effects of signicant transactions or
events that occur between the dates of the subsidiarys and the parents nancial statements.
And in no case may the difference be more than three months.
Consolidated nancial statements must be prepared using uniform accounting policies for
transactions and other events in similar circumstances.
1.1.2 Requirements of IFRS 3 Business combination

Cost of a Business Combination
Fair value of consideration given plus costs
The holding company measures the cost of a business combination at the sum of the fair values,
at the date of exchange, of assets given, liabilities incurred or assumed, and equity instruments
issued by the acquirer, in exchange for control of the subsidiary; plus any costs directly attributable
to the combination. If equity instruments are issued as consideration for the acquisition, the
market price of those equity instruments at the date of exchange is considered to provide the
best evidence of fair value. If a market price does not exist, or is not considered reliable, other
valuation techniques are used to measure fair value.
Measurement of acquired assets and liabilities

The acquired identiable assets, liabilities, and contingent liabilities are measured initially by
the acquirer at their fair value at the acquisition date, irrespective of the extent of any minority
interest. In other words, the identiable assets acquired, and liabilities and contingent liabilities
incurred or assumed, must be initially measured at full fair value, including any minority interests
share of the acquired item.
S T U D Y
Where losses applicable to the minority exceed the minority interest in the equity of the relevant
subsidiary, the excess, and any further losses attributable to the minority, are charged to the
group unless the minority has a binding obligation to, and is able to, make good the losses.
Where excess losses have been taken up by the group, if the subsidiary in question subsequently
reports prots, all such prots are attributed to the group until the minoritys share of losses
previously absorbed by the group has been recovered.
T E X T
Minority interests should be presented in the consolidated balance sheet within equity, but
separate from the parents shareholders equity. Minority interests in the prot or loss of the group
should also be separately presented.
Step acquisitions
If a business combination involves more than one exchange transaction, each exchange
transaction shall be treated separately by the acquirer, using the cost of the transaction and
fair value information at the date of each exchange transaction, to determine the amount of any
goodwill associated with that transaction.
Goodwill
Recognition and measurement of goodwill
Goodwill is recognised by the acquirer parent as an asset from the acquisition date and is initially
measured as the excess of the cost of the business combination over the acquirers share of the
net fair value of the subsidiary identiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities.
S T U D Y
T E X T
No amortisation of goodwill
IFRS 3 prohibits the amortisation of goodwill; instead goodwill must be tested for impairment at
least annually in accordance with IAS 36 Impairment of Assets. If the acquirers interest in the net
fair value of the acquired identiable net assets exceeds the cost of the business combination,
that excess (sometimes referred to as negative goodwill) must be recognised immediately in the
income statement as a gain. Before concluding that negative goodwill has arisen, however,
IFRS 3 requires that the acquirer reassess the identication and measurement of the subsidiaries
identiable assets, liabilities, and contingent liabilities and the measurement of the cost of the
combination.
>>> Example 1
Mtito Limited purchased 80% of the ordinary shares of Andei Limited on 1 May 2005. On 30
September 2005, the trial balances of the two companies were as follows:
Mtito Ltd.
Andei Ltd.
Sh.000
Sh.000
11,500
62,300
51,600
4,500
3,000
184,700
123,600
Freehold land and buildings (net book value)
25,500
18,900
Investment in Andei Limited
94,260
Dividend: Interim paid

Expenses (including depreciation of xed assets)
Motor vehicles (net book value)
6,700
4,900
375,400
335,200
Plant and machinery (net book value)
28,900
21,600
Inventory
22,100
17,600
9,100
6,380
813,460
594,280
Purchases
Taxation: installment tax paid

Bank overdraft (secured on land and buildings)
Payables
Sales
Share capital: Authorised, issued and fully paid Ordinary
shares of Sh.10
Retained Prots
6,700
38,200
17,100
586,600
480,000
60,000
20,000
121,960
77,180
813,460
594,280
Additional information:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
Closing inventory was Sh.24, 200,000 in Mtito and Sh.19,200,000 in Andei.

The turnover and expenses in Andei accrued evenly over the year; the rate of gross
prot was constant throughout the year.
Mtito paid its interim dividend on 15th May 2005; Andei paid its interim dividend on 31
March 2005. Mtito has not yet accounted for any dividend receivable from Andei.
Between 1 May 2005 and 30 September 2005, Mtito sold goods to Andei. These goods
had cost Mtito Sh.30 million. Mtito earned a gross prot of 37.5% on the selling price
of these goods. On 30 September 2005, one sixth of these goods were included in the
stock of Andei. Included in the debtors gure for Mtito was Sh. 7,200,000 from Andei:
Mtitos account in Andeis books agreed with this gure.
The self assessment tax returns of Mtito and Andei show the corporation tax charge for
the year at Sh.10,020,000 and Sh.7,980,000 respectively; both companies have paid
installment tax on the preceding year basis.
The directors have proposed that Mtito should pay a nal dividend of Sh.6 million and
Andei Sh.3 million.
Goodwill arising on the acquisition of Andei is considered to be impaired at
sh.1million.
Required:
A consolidated income statement for the year ended 30 September 2005 (including reconciliations
of the retained prot for the year and carried forward) and a consolidated balance sheet as at 30
September 2005.
T E X T
Receivables
S T U D Y
Cash at bank
10
Solution:
Please note that the examiner has not given us the respective nal accounts of the holding
company and the subsidiary. It will be important therefore to prepare the three sets of accounts
on and present them in columnar form for the purpose of presentation. However if possible, only
present the group nal accounts and the individual accounts can be presented as a working.
Mtito Ltd and Andei Ltd

Income statement for year to 30 September 2005
Mtito
Andei
Group
Sh. 000
Sh. 000
Sh. 000
586,600
480,000
738,600
22,100
17,600
Purchases
375,400
335,200
Less closing inventory
397,500
(24,200)
373,300
213,300
352,800
(19,200)
333,600
146,400
467,300
(184,700)
(123,600)
(236,200)
_-___
( 1000)
22,800
34,100
Sales
Cost of sales:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Opening inventory
Gross prot
Expenses
Goodwill impairment
Operating prot
28,600
Dividend income
2,000
Prot before tax
30,600
22,800
34,100
(10,020)
(7,980)
(13,345)
20,580
14,820
__-_____
__-_____
20,580
14,820
20,755
__
(1,235)_
19,520
Dividends: Paid
(4,500)
(3,000)
(4,500)
Dividends: Proposed
(6,000)
(3,000)
132,040
86,000
(6,000)
130,980
Income tax expense

Prot after tax
Less MI
Prot attributable to Shareholders of Mtito
Retained prots:
____
___
Yr
c/f
Holding Co Mtito)
6,080
128,040
Subsidiary Andei)
2,940
2,940
9,020
130,980
Workings for intergroup sales

Sales = (30m X 0.6) +30000 = 48m
Group sales = (586,600 + (5/12 X 480,000)) 48,000 = 738600
Group cost of sales = 373300 + (5/12 X 333600) 48,000 + VP = 467300;
where VP = (1/6 X (48,000 30,000) = 3,000
11
Group expenses = 184700 + (5/12 X 123,600) = 236,200

Dividend income
7 months
5 months
Total dividend payable by Andei = 6,000

Total dividend accountable for by Mtito = 80% X 6,000 = 4,800
Pre acq
post acq
7/12 X 4,800
= 5/12 X 4,800
= 2,800
= 2,000
Dividend receivable = 2,400
Pre acq COC)
= (2,000)
=
400
T E X T
Post acq P&L)
Prot after tax in Andei
14,820
Less pre acq
(8,645)
Amount in Group P & L
6,175
MI 20%)
1,235
S T U D Y
Minority interest:
Statement of retained prots:

Retained prots:
Holding co: Mtito)
b/f
Yr
c/f
Sh. 000
Sh. 000
Sh. 000
121,960
10,080
132,040
(3,000)
(3,000)
(1,000)
(1,000)
121,960
6,080
128,040
77,180
(5,145)
(82,325)
(77,180)
(5,145)
3,675
(82,325)
2,940
2,940
UPCS
Goodwill impaired
Subsidiary: Andei)
Less pre-acq prots
Group share 80%)
3,675
12
Mtito Ltd and Andei Ltd

Balance Sheet as at 30 September 1996
Mtito
Andei
Group
Sh.000
Sh.000
Sh.000
Land and Buildings
25,500
18,900
44,400
Plant and Machinery
28,900
21,600
50,500
6,700
4,900
11,600
61,100
45,400
106,500
Non-Current Assets
Property Plant and Equipment
Motor vehicles
Goodwill
Investments: In subsidiary
11,000
-
93,860
154,960
45,400
117,500
Inventory
24,200
19,200
40,400
Receivables
62,300
51,600
106,700
2,400
11,500
11,500
88,900
82,300
158,600
243,860
127,700
276,100
60,000
20,000
60,000
132,040
86,000
130,980
192,040
106,000
190,980
21,200
192,040
106,000
212,180
38,200
17,100
48,100
920
1,600
2,520
6,000
3,000
6,000
Div to M1
600
Bank o/d
6,700
6,700
51,820
21,700
63,920
243,860
127,700
276,100
S T U D Y
T E X T
Current assets
Dividends recable
Cash at bank
Total Assets
Capital and Reserves
Ordinary shares @ Sh.10
Prot and Loss
MI
Current liabilities
Payables
Tax payable
Proposed dividends
Total Equity and Liabilities
13
1.2 GROUP STRUCTURES
Holding company with more than one subsidiary: This type of situation is straight forward
as the procedure involves consolidating the results of the holding with its subsidiaries
the normal way. However separate computation of goodwill for each subsidiary is
required.
(ii)
Holding company with a subsidiary company and a sub-subsidiary: In these type

of structure, the holding company owns a subsidiary company which owns another
subsidiary company called a sub-subsidiary company: The consolidation process is
also the same as before only that for the purpose of consolidating the sub-subsidiary,
we need to determine the effective shareholding and minority interest for the group.
The following example will help illustrate the accounting approach.

>>> Example 2 Sub-subsidiary
Ademo Limited is a company quoted on the Nairobi Stock Exchange. It distributes a wide variety
of household machinery including sewing machines. On 1 October 1997 it purchased shares in
Afro clothing Limited. The group purchased shares in Piki Limited, a nation wide chain of retail
shops dealing in casual wear on 1 April 1998. All the companies make up their accounts to 31
March each year.
The draft nal accounts for the three companies for the year ended 31 March 2000 are as follows
overleaf:
S T U D Y
(i)
T E X T
The relationship between the holding company and the subsidiaries is referred to as the group
structure. Apart from a situation where the holding company has only one subsidiary, the following
are examples of different types of structures and their accounting approach:
14
Income statements for the year ended 31 March 2000.

Ademo Ltd
Afro Ltd
Piki Ltd
Sh.m
Sh.m
Sh.m
Revenue
1,368
774
685
Cost of sales
(810)
(407)
(355)
558
367
330
Distribution costs
(196)
(64)
(78)
Administration expenses
(112)
(73)
(72)
Finance cost
(50)
(20)
Prot before tax
200
210
180
Income tax expense
(60)
(60)
(50)
Prot after tax
140
150
130
(150)
(100)
(100)
Retained prots for the year
(10)
50
30
Retained prots brought forward
713
610
420
Retained prot carried forward
703
660
450
Ademo Ltd
Afro Ltd
Piki Ltd
Sh.m
853
Sh.m
415
Sh.m
495
Gross prot
S T U D Y
T E X T
Proposed dividends
Balance sheet as at 31 March 2000

Non current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Investment in Afro
702
Investment in Piki
405
1555
820
495
Inventory
368
200
190
Trade receivables
380
230
240
Cash at bank
120
115
91
2,423
1,365
1,016
Ordinary share capital
900
200
100
Retained prots
703
660
450
1,603
860
550
500
200
140
175
346
30
30
20
150
100
100
2,423
1,365
1,016
Current assets
Total assets
Shareholders funds
Noncurrent liabilities
10% loan stock
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Current tax
Proposed Dividends
Total equity and liabilities
15
The following additional information is available:

(i)
On 1 October 1997 Ademo Ltd acquired 16 million sh.10 ordinary shares in Afro Clothing
Ltd. For Kshs 602 million when the retained prots of Afro Ltd was Kshs 490 million.
Ademo also acquired half of the loan stock in Afro on 1 April 1999.
(ii)
On 1 April 1998 Afro Ltd acquired 7.5 million Sh.10 ordinary shares in Piki Ltd for
Sh.405 million when the retained prots of Piki Ltd amounted to sh. 300 million. On this
date the a leasehold property had a fair value of Sh.40 million in excess of the book
value and 10 years remaining on the lease. Depreciation charge on the book value of
the lease is included as part of administration expenses.
(iii) In the year ended 31 March 2000 Piki Ltd sold goods at a price of Sh.80 million. Piki
Ltd had marked up these goods by 100% on cost. Afro Ltd held 50% of these goods in
stock on 31 March 2000.
On 1 April 1999 Ademo Ltd sold sewing machines to Afro Ltd for sh.150 million. Afro Ltd
included these machines in its PPE and charges depreciation of 20% on cost. Ademo
Ltd had marked up these items at 50% on cost. Afro Ltd includes the depreciation of
these machines in its cost of sales.
(vi) On 31 March 200 all the inter company balances are in agreement with Afro Ltd owing
Piki Ltd Sh. million and Ademo Ltd owing Afro Ltd sh.18 million. Meanwhile the group
had not yet paid the interest due on the respective loan stocks, the balances included
in the trade and other payables.
(vii) In the current year the management feels that half of the goodwill has been impaired.
This impairment loss is to be charged as a separate item in the income statement.
Required
The consolidated income statement for the year ended 31 March 2000 and a consolidated
balance sheet as at the same date.
(25 marks)
S T U D Y
(v)
T E X T
(iv) In the year ended 31 March 2000 Afro Ltd sold Ademo Ltd goods at a price of sh.90
million. Afro Ltd had marked up these goods by 80% on cost. Ademo Ltd held 25% of
these goods in stock on 31 March 2000.
16
Solution:
Ademo and Its subsidiaries
Consolidated Income statement for the year ended 31 March 2000
Sh.
Sh.
Revenue
2,507.00
Cost of Sales
(1,322.00)
Gross Prot
1,185.00
Expenses
Distribution Costs
338.00
Administration Expenses
261.00
Goodwill impaired
55.00
Finance costs
60.00
Prot before tax
471.00
Income tax expense
(170.00)
Prot for the period
301.00
Prot attributable to: Holding Company
228.60
Minority interest
S T U D Y
T E X T
(714.00)
72.40
301.00
Consolidated statement of changes

in equity (Extract)
Retained Prots
Sh.
878.60
Balance as at 1 April 1999

Prot for the period
228.60
1,107.20
Less proposed dividends

Balance as at 31 March 2000
Sh
(150.00)
-
957.20
17
Ademo and Its subsidiaries

Consolidated Balance sheet as at 31 March 2000
Non Current Assets
Goodwill
Sh.
Current assets
Inventory
Trade Receivables
Cash at bank
TOTAL ASSETS
728.00
808.00
326.00
Ordinary Share Capital

Retained Prots
1,862.00
3,672.00
900.00
957.20
1,857.20
330.80
2,188.00
Minority Interest
Shareholders funds
Non-Current Liabilities
10% Loanstock
600.00
884.00
3,672.00
b/f
Yr
C/f
Ademo
Share in Afro
Share in Piki
713.00
96.00
69.60
878.60
(25.00)
100.00
3.60
78.60
688.00
196.00
73.20
957.20
Workings
Ademo
As per the accounts
Add Divs receivable
713.00
713.00
(10.00)
80.00
10.00
(50.00)
(55.00)
(25.00)
703.00
80.00
10.00
(50.00)
(55.00)
688.00
610.00
(490.00)
120.00
-
50.00
____50.00
(10.00)
660.00
(490.00)
170.00
(10.00)
10.00
Interest receivable
Less UPPPE
Less Goodwill Impaired
Share in Afro
As per the accounts
Less preacquisition
Less UPCS
Add excess depreciation
Add Divs Receivable
Share of Ademo (80%)
_____120.00
96.00
75.00
125.00
100.00
10.00
75.00
245.00
196.00
420.00
(300.00)
120.00
30.00
___30.00
450.00
(300.00)
150.00
(4.00)
116.00
69.60
(20.00)
(4.00)
6.00
3.60
(20.00)
(8.00)
122.00
73.20
Share in Piki
As per the accounts
Less Preacquisition
Less UPCS
Less depn on FV adjustment
Share of Ademo at 60%
T E X T
609.00
80.00
195.00
S T U D Y
Current Liabilities
Trade & Other payables
Current tax
Proposed dividends
TOTAL EQUITY & LIABILITIES
Statement of retained prots
Sh.
1,755.00
55.00
1,810.00
18
Workings
P & L Items
Revenue
COS
DIST
ADM
FIN
TAX
1,368.00
810.00
196.00
112.00
50.00
60.00
Afrol
774.00
407.00
64.00
73.00
20.00
60.00
Piki
685.00
355.00
78.00
72.00
____-
50.00
2,827.00
1,572.00
338.00
257.00
70.00
170.00
Sales by Pi to Af
(80.00)
(80.00)
Sales by Af to Ad
(90.00)
(90.00)
Sales by Ad to Af
(150.00)
(100.00)
Ademo
Less:
Excess depn (20% x

50)
Interco. Interest
(10.00)
(10.00)
S T U D Y
T E X T
Add:
UPCS: Pi to Af
20.00
UPCS: Af to Ad
10.00
Depreciation due to FV
4.00
2,507.00
1,322.00
338.00
261.00
60.00
170.00
2. Goodwill impaired (separate goodwill gures for Afro and Piki)

Cost of investment
Less:
OSC
P&L
FV adjustment
Afro
602.00
160.00
392.00
_____-
Impairment
(552.00)
50.00
Piki
324.00
60.00
180.00
24.00
25.00
(264.00)
60.00
30.00
3. Prot attributable to Minority Interest in the P & L

Afro
150.00
PAT
Less:
UPCS: Pi to Af
UPCS: Af to Ad
Depreciation due to FV
(10.00)
_____-
(10.00)
140.00
Piki
130.00
(20.00)
(4.00)
(24.00)
106.00
Less:
Excess depreciation
Adjusted PAT
10.00
150.00
____0
106.00
MIs share at 20% and 40%
150.00
106.00
30.00
42.40
19
4. Retained Prot b/f

Sh.
Ademo
Balance b/f
Less pre acquisition
Less depreciation on FV adjustment b/f

Share of Ad @ 80% & 60%
Afro
Piki
Sh.
Sh.
610.00
420.00
(490.00)
(300.00)
120.00
120.00
_____
(4.00)
120.00
116.00
96.00
69.60
165.60
Afro
Piki
Shm
Sh.
Shareholders funds
860.00
550.00
ADD: FV adjustment
40.00
10.00
____-
870.00
590.00
Dividends in Piki (0.75 x 100)

LESS: UPCS
75.00
(10.00)
5.
(20.00)
(8.00)
Depreciation on FV Adju. (2 yrs)

Adjusted shareholders funds
935.00
562.00
187.00
224.80
Less share of Investment in Piki (0.2 x

405)
S T U D Y
Excess depreciation
T E X T
878.60
411.80
(81.00)
330.80
Minority interest in the balance sheet

(i)
The holding company and subsidiary company both have a direct shareholding in subsubsidiary company: he accounting treatment is similar to that discussed in (ii) above
and care should be taken when computing the effective shareholding of the group in the
sub-subsidiary company. The following example illustrates this position:
20
>>> Example 3
Rain Ltd., Storm Ltd. and Thunder Ltd. are in the business of manufacturing tents. Their balance
sheets as at 30 September 2003 were as below:
Rain
Ltd.
Sh.
000
Non-current assets:
Non-current assets (net of
depreciation)
Shares in subsidiaries
Sh.
Storm
Ltd.
Sh.
000
000
Sh.
Thunder
Ltd.
Sh.
Sh.
000
000
000
14,000
6,300
1,700
5,000
1,900
19,000
8,200
1,700
S T U D Y
T E X T
Current assets:
Inventory
2,000
1,200
1,600
Trade payables
4,800
2,000
800
Cash
2,700
1,400
1,100
9,500
4,600
3,500
Trade payables
4,800
2,000
800
Cash
2,700
1,400
1,100
9,500
4,600
3,500
( 5,000 )
( 2,600 )
( 1,800 )
Current liabilities:
Trade payables
Net current assets
4,500
2,000
1,700
23,500
10,200
3,400
15,000
5,000
2,000
3,000
1,000
2,500
( 800 )
400
23,500
10,200
3,400
Financed by:
Authorised and issued
Share capital:
Ordinary shares of Sh.100
Each fully paid
10% preference shares of Sh.
100 each fully paid
Retained Prots
1.
Rain Ltd. purchased 30,000 ordinary shares in Storm Ltd. on 1 October 2001 for Sh.
3,400,000 and 5,000 preference shares on 1 October 2002 for Sh. 600,000. On 1 October
2002, Rain Ltd. purchased 5,000 ordinary shares in Thunder Ltd. for Sh. 1,000,000.
Storm Ltd. purchased 11,000 ordinary shares in Thunder Ltd. for Sh. 1,900,000 on the
same date.
2.
21
Balances are as given below:

Prot and loss account
Storm Ltd.
Thunder Ltd.
1 October 2001
Sh. 500,000 (debit).
1 October 2002
Sh. 600,000 (debit).
1 October 2002
Sh. 300,000 (debit).
General reserve
Storm Ltd.
Thunder Ltd.
Sh. 1,000,000
1 October 2002
Sh. 2,000,000
1 October 2002
Receivables
Rain Ltd.
Sh. 600,000 due from Thunder Ltd.
Thunder Ltd.
Sh. 300,000 due from Rain Ltd.

Sh. 200,000 due from Thunder Ltd.
4.
On 30 September 2003, thunder Ltd. remitted Sh.200,000 to Rain Ltd. which was not
received until 3 October. There were no other inter-company balances.
5.
Rain Ltd. sold goods to Storm Ltd. for Sh.800,000. The goods had originally cost Rain
Ltd. Sh.600,000. Storm Ltd. still had Sh.200,000 worth of these goods (at invoiced
price) in stock as at 30 September, 2003.
Required:
Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of Rain Ltd. and its subsidiaries as at 30 September
2003.
T E X T
The following inter-company balance are included in the balances of trade debtors and
trade creditors:
S T U D Y
3.
1 October 2001
22
Solution:
Rain Ltd and its subsidiaries
Consolidated Balance sheet as at 30 September 2003
Sh.000
Non Current Assets
PPE
Goodwill (W2)
22,000
1,006
23,006
T E X T
Current Assets
Inventory (2 + 1.2 + 1.6 0.05) Receivables (W6)
Cash (2.7 + 1.4 + 1.14 + 0.2)
S T U D Y
Sh.000
4,750
6,500
5,400
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Share capital
Sh.100 ordinary shares fully paid
General reserve (W5)
Retained Prots (W4) (300 + 2,028)
Minority interest (W3)
16650
39656
15,000
7,780
2,328
25,108
6,048
31,156
Payables
TOTAL EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
8500
39,656
Workings
1. Determination of group ownership structure
Storm Ltd
Thunder Ltd
Ordinary
Preference
Rain Ltd:
Direct
Indirect
60%
1/6
Minority Interest
40%
5/6
(60% x 55%)
Ordinary
25%
33%
58%
42%
2.
23
Cost of Control
Sh.000
Investment in Storm:
Ordinary
Preference
Share of retained losses
(60% x 500)
Investment in Thunder
(60% x 1,900) by
Storm
Rain spent in Thunder
3,400
600
300
4,300
1,140
1,000
____
Sh.000
Share of Storm equity
Ordinary share capital (60% x 5000)
General reserves (60% x 1000)
Preference share capital (1/6 x 3,000)
Goodwill I
Share of Thunder equity
Ordinary share capital (58% x 2,000)
Prot b/f (58% x 300)
Goodwill II
6,440
3,000
600
500
200
4,300
1,160
174
806
6,440
Total goodwill on consolidation = 806 + 200 = 1,006

3.
Minority Interest
760
Storm Ltd Prot & Loss

40% x 800)
Consolidated balance
sheet
320
6,048
Storm Ltd: Equity

Preference share capital (5/6 x 3000)
General reserve (40% x 3000)
Thunder Ltd: Equity
Preference share capital
General reserve (42% x 1000)
Thunder Ltd Prot & Loss
(42% x 400)
_____
7,128
4.
Rain Ltd
UPCs (200/800 x 200)
Bal b/f
Thunder ltd:
Cost of control a/c
25% x 300
75
33% x 300
99
Minority interest
(42% x 400)
Consolidated
balance
sheet
Group retained Earnings A/c

Sh.000
Bal b/d: Rain
50 Cost of control a/c
800
(60% x 500)
Minority Interest A/c
(40% x 800)
Bal b/d: Thunder
174
2,000
2,500
1,200
840
420
168
7,128
Sh.000
2,500
300
320
400
168
2,328
____
3,520
3,520
T E X T
Cost of shares in Thunder

(40% x 1900)
Sh.000
S T U D Y
Sh.000
24
5.
Consolidated General reserve
Sh.000
Storm Ltd: COC (60% x 1000)
MI (40% x 3000)
Thunder: MI (42% x 1,000)
Consolidated balance sheet
600
1,200
420
7,780
10,000
Sh.000
Bal b/f
Rain
Storm
Thunder
10,000
Group Receivables A/c
6.
Sh.000
Rain Ltd
Storm Ltd
Thunder Ltd
4,800
2,000
800
____
7,600
T E X T
S T U D Y
6,000
3,000
1,000
7.
Sh.000
Cash in transit (Thunder)
Group creditors: T R
RS
TS
To consolidated balance
sheet
200
400
300
200
6,500
7,600
Group Payables A/c

Sh.000
Group debtors
To consolidated balance sheet
900
8,500
____
9,400
Sh.000
Rain Ltd
Storm Ltd
Thunder Ltd
5,000
2,600
1,800
9,400
(ii)
Multiple group structure: In this type of Structure the holding company has several subsidiaries that
also have sub-subsidiaries. It is not examinable within this scope and applies only in practice.
25
1.3 ASSOCIATES COMPANIES (IAS 28)
FAST FORWARD: A holding of 20% or more of the voting power (directly or through subsidiaries)
will indicate signicant inuence unless it can be clearly demonstrated otherwise.
IAS 28 applies to all investments in which an investor has signicant inuence but not control or
joint control except for investments held by a venture capital organization, mutual fund, unit trust,
and similar entity that (by election or requirement) are accounted for as held for trading under
IAS 39. Under IAS 39, those investments are measured at fair value with fair value changes
recognised in prot or loss.
control.
T E X T
Signicant inuence: Power to participate in the nancial and operating policy decisions but
not control them.
S T U D Y
The following are important denitions in IAS 28:
Equity method: A method of accounting by which an equity investment is initially recorded

at cost and subsequently adjusted to reect the investors share of the net prot or loss of the
associate (investee).
Identication of Associates
If the holding is less than 20%, the investor will be presumed not to have signicant inuence
unless such inuence can be clearly demonstrated. The existence of signicant inuence by an
investor is usually evidenced in one or more of the following ways:
(i)
Representation on the board of directors or equivalent governing body of the investee;

participation in the policy-making process;
(ii)
Material transactions between the investor and the investee; interchange of managerial
personnel; or
(iii) Provision of essential technical information.

(iv) Potential voting rights are a factor to be considered in deciding whether signicant
inuence exists.
26
1.3.1 ACCOUNTING FOR ASSOCIATES (IAS 28)

In its consolidated nancial statements, an investor should use the equity method of accounting
for investments in associates, other than in the following three exceptional circumstances:
(i)
An investment in an associate that is acquired and held exclusively with a view to its
disposal within 12 months from acquisition should be accounted for as held for trading
under IAS 39. Under IAS 39, those investments are measured at fair value with fair
value changes recognised in prot or loss.
(ii)
A parent that is exempted from preparing consolidated nancial statements by

paragraph 10 of IAS 27 may prepare separate nancial statements as its primary
nancial statements. In those separate statements, the investment in the associate
may be accounted for by the cost method or under IAS 39.
(iii) An investor need not use the equity method if all of the following four conditions are
met:
the investor is itself a wholly-owned subsidiary, or is a partially-owned subsidiary of
another entity and its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote,
have been informed about, and do not object to, the investor not applying the equity
method;
b.
the investors debt or equity instruments are not traded in a public market;
c.
the investor did not le, nor is it in the process of ling, its nancial statements with a
securities commission or other regulatory organization for the purpose of issuing any
d.
the ultimate or any intermediate parent of the investor produces consolidated nancial
Standards.
S T U D Y
T E X T
a.
Applying the Equity Method of Accounting

Basic principle: Under the equity method of accounting, an equity investment is initially recorded
at cost and is subsequently adjusted to reect the investors share of the net prot or loss of the
associate.
Distributions and other adjustments to carrying amount:

Distributions received from the investee reduce the carrying amount of the investment. Adjustments
to the carrying amount may also be required arising from changes in the investees equity that
have not been included in the income statement (for example, revaluations).
27
Potential voting rights:

Although potential voting rights are considered in deciding whether signicant inuence exists,
the investors share of prot or loss of the investee and of changes in the investees equity is
determined on the basis of present ownership interests. It should not reect the possible exercise
or conversion of potential voting rights.
Discontinuing the equity method:

Use of the equity method should cease from the date that signicant inuence ceases. The
carrying amount of the investment at that date should be regarded as a new cost basis.
Transactions with associates:

If an associate is accounted for using the equity method, unrealised prots and losses resulting
from upstream (associate to investor) and downstream (investor to associate) transactions should
be eliminated to the extent of the investors interest in the associate. However, unrealised losses
should not be eliminated to the extent that the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of
the asset transferred.
Date of associates nancial statements:

In applying the equity method, the investor should use the nancial statements of the associate
as of the same date as the nancial statements of the investor unless it is impracticable to do so.
If it is impracticable, the most recent available nancial statements of the associate should be
used, with adjustments made for the effects of any signicant transactions or events occurring
between the accounting period ends. However, the difference between the reporting date of the
associate and that of the investor cannot be longer than three months.
S T U D Y
On acquisition of the investment in an associate, any difference (whether positive or negative)

between the cost of acquisition and the investors share of the fair values of the net identiable
assets of the associate is accounted for like goodwill in accordance with IFRS 3, Business
Combinations. Appropriate adjustments to the investors share of the prots or losses after
acquisition are made to account for additional depreciation or amortisation of the associates
depreciable or amortisable assets based on the excess of their fair values over their carrying
amounts at the time the investment was acquired. Any goodwill shown as part of the carrying
amount of the investment in the associate is no longer amortised but instead tested annually for
impairment in accordance with IFRS 3.
T E X T
Implicit goodwill and fair value adjustments:
28
Associates accounting policies:

If the associate uses accounting policies that differ from those of the investor, the associates
nancial statements should be adjusted to reect the investors accounting policies for the
purpose of applying the equity method.
Losses in excess of investment:
S T U D Y
T E X T
If an investors share of losses of an associate equals or exceeds its interest in the associate,
the investor discontinues recognising its share of further losses. The interest in an associate is
the carrying amount of the investment in the associate under the equity method together with any
long-term interests that, in substance, form part of the investors net investment in the associate.
After the investors interest is reduced to zero, additional losses are recognised by a provision
(liability) only to the extent that the investor has incurred legal or constructive obligations or made
payments on behalf of the associate. If the associate subsequently reports prots, the investor
resumes recognising its share of those prots only after its share of the prots equals the share
of losses not recognised.
Impairment:
The impairment indicators in IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, apply
to investments in associates. If impairment is indicated, the amount is calculated by reference
to IAS 36, Impairment of Assets. The recoverable amount of an investment in an associate
is assessed for each individual associate, unless the associate does not generate cash ows
independently.
>>> Example 4 Associate Companies
Amua Limited purchased 80% of the ordinary share capital of Sawana Limited on 31 January
1999 for Sh.496 million and 20% of the ordinary share capital of Ukwala Limited on 31 July 1998
for Sh.56 million. Prots in all companies are deemed to accrue evenly over the year.
The draft accounts for the three companies are shown below:
Amua Limited has not yet accounted for dividends receivable from either its subsidiary or its
associated company.
Goodwill arising in the acquisition of the holding company and associate company is considered
to have been impaired at the rate of 20% per annum on cost.
Required:
The consolidated income statement (which should be in accordance with the International
Accounting Standard No. 1, showing expenses by function) for the year ended 30 April 1999,
and the Consolidated balance sheet as at that date.
29
Current
assets
Inventory
Receivables
Bank
Current
Liabilities
Payables
Tax
Proposed
Divs
Net current
assets
OSC of
Sh.10 each
Retained
earnings
S/holders
Funds
15%
Debentures
Amua Ltd
Sh. million
Sawana
Ltd
Sh .million
414
552
966
280
280
Ukwala
Ltd
Sh.
million
220
220
180
240
28
448
210
140
12
362
70
56
21
147
189
7
109
3
45
2
63
259
189
1,155
40
152
210
490
40
87
60
280
700
175
200
290
490
200
80
280
875
280
1,155
Sales
Cost of
sales
Gross prot
Distribution
costs
Admin
expenses
Prot from
operations
Interest on
debentures
Prot
before tax
Taxation
Prot after
tax
Dividends
proposed
Retained
prots
For the year
Brought
forward
Carried
forward
Amua Ltd
Sh .million
Sawana
Ltd
Sh .million
Ukwala Ltd
Sh. Million
2,346
2,400
1,400
(1,564)
782
(1,620)
780
(840)
560
(310)
(400)
(200)
(240)
(200)
(180)
232
180
-
180
-
190
180
180
(72)
118
(40)
140
(20)
160
63
40
40
55
100
120
120
190
(40)
175
290
80
(42)
T E X T
PPE (NBV)
Investments
Prot and loss accounts

for the year ended 30 April 1999
S T U D Y
Balance Sheet
as at 30 April 1999
30
Solution:
Amua Ltd and its subsidiary co.
Consolidated income statement for the year ended 30 April 1999.
Sh.M
Sales
Cost of sales
Gross prot
Share of prot after tax in associate co
2,946
(1,969)
977
S T U D Y
T E X T
Distribution costs
Administration costs
Finance cost
Prot before tax
Income tax expense
Prot for the period
Prot attributable to : ordinary shareholders
: Minority Interest
410
297.4
42
Retained Prots
Sh.000
120
162.6
63
Dividends:
Final
Bal as at
30.4..99
24
1,001
(749.4)
251.6
(82)
169.6
162.6
7
169.6
Statement of changes in equity extract
Bal as at
30.4..98
Transfer to
reserve
Prot for year
Sh.M
(63)
219.6
31
Amua Ltd and its subsidiary co.

Balance sheet as at 30 April 1999
Sh.M
Non-current assts
Plant, property and Equipment
Goodwill
Investment In associate
Sh.M
694
95
69.6
858.6
Current assets
Inventory
Receivables
Dividend receivable from Ukwala
Bank
390
380
8
40
818
1676.6

Ordinary share @ sh.10
Capital Reserve
Retained prot
98
280
Current liabilities
Payables
Tax payable
Proposed dividends Group
Dividend to MI
298
10
63
8
1,297.6.
379
1676.6
TOTAL EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Minority Interest
Sh.M
Bal C/d
98
____
98
OSC
P& L
Retained Prots
Sh. M
Capital Reserve
Goodwill written off: S
U
Balance c/d
2
5
2.4
217.6
____
227
Pre-acquisition dividend
OSC
P& L
Goodwill: Written off
C/d
Sh.M
40
58
98
Sh.M
175
20
18
8
6
227
S T U D Y
Minority interest
Noncurrent liabilities
15% debentures
T E X T
700
2
217.6
319.6
32
Goodwill (Premium) in Associate

Sh.M.
Investment (56m less
pre acquisition dividend
of Sh. 2m)
OSC
P& L
Sh.M
54
200
(10)
190
Group share (20%)

Full goodwill
Goodwill impaired (for
only 9 months)
38
16
2.4
Investment in associate
Sh.M.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Investment
Group share of past acquisition
prot
Goodwill impaired
18
(2.4)
Sh.M
54
15.6
69.6
Cost of Control
Sh.M
Investment in S
496
____
496
Sh.M
OSC
P& L
Goodwill:Written off
5
C/d
95
24
160
212
100
496
33
1.4 JOINTLY CONTROLLED ENTITIES (IAS 31)

IAS 31 applies to accounting for all interests in joint ventures and the reporting of joint venture
assets, liabilities, income, and expenses in the nancial statements of ventures and investors,
regardless of the structures or forms under which the joint venture activities take place, except
for investments held by a venture capital organisation, mutual fund, unit trust, and similar entity
that (by election or requirement) are accounted for as held for trading under IAS 39.
Important denitions in IAS 31

Joint venture:
A party to a joint venture and has joint control over that joint venture.
Investor in a joint venture:

A party to a joint venture and does not have joint control over that joint venture.
Control:
Refers to the power to govern the nancial and operating policies of an activity so as to obtain
benets from it.
Joint control:
The contractually agreed sharing of control over an economic activity such that no individual
contracting party has control.
IAS 31 deals with three types of joint Ventures

(i)
Jointly Controlled operations,
(ii) Jointly Controlled assets,

(iii) Jointly Controlled Assets
S T U D Y
Venturer:
T E X T
A contractual arrangement whereby two or more parties undertake an economic activity that is
subject to joint control.
34
(i) Jointly Controlled Operations

Jointly controlled operations involve the use of assets and other resources of the venturers rather
than the establishment of a separate entity. Each venturer uses its own assets, incurs its own
expenses and liabilities, and raises its own nance. IAS 31 requires that the venturer should
recognise in its nancial statements the assets that it controls, the liabilities that it incurs, the
expenses that it incurs, and its share of the income from the sale of goods or services by the joint
venture. [IAS 31.15]
(ii) Jointly Controlled Assets
S T U D Y
T E X T
Jointly controlled assets involve the joint control, and often the joint ownership, of assets dedicated
to the joint venture. Each venturer may take a share of the output from the assets and each
bears a share of the expenses incurred. IAS 31 requires that the venturer should recognise in its
nancial statements its share of the joint assets, any liabilities that it has incurred directly and its
share of any liabilities incurred jointly with the other venturers, income from the sale or use of its
share of the output of the joint venture, its share of expenses incurred by the joint venture and
expenses incurred directly in respect of its interest in the joint venture.
(iii) Jointly Controlled Entities

A jointly controlled entity is a corporation, partnership, or other entity in which two or more
venturers have an interest, under a contractual arrangement that establishes joint control over
the entity. Each venturer usually contributes cash or other resources to the jointly controlled
entity. Those contributions are included in the accounting records of the venturer and recognised
in the venturers nancial statements as an investment in the jointly controlled entity.
IAS 31 allows two treatments of accounting for an investment in jointly controlled entities
except as noted below:
(i)
(ii)
Proportionate consolidation.
Equity method of accounting.
Proportionate consolidation or equity method is not required in the following exceptional

circumstances:
(i)
An investment in a jointly controlled entity that is acquired and held exclusively with a
view to its disposal within 12 months from acquisition should be accounted for as held
for trading under IAS 39. Under IAS 39, those investments are measured at fair value
with fair value changes recognised in prot or loss.
(ii)
A parent that is exempted from preparing consolidated nancial statements by paragraph

10 of IAS 27 may prepare separate nancial statements as its primary nancial
statements. In those separate statements, the investment in the jointly controlled entity
may be accounted for by the cost method or under IAS 39.
35
An investor in a jointly controlled entity need not use proportionate consolidation or the equity
method if all of the following four conditions are met:
1.
the investor is itself a wholly-owned subsidiary, or is a partially-owned subsidiary of

another entity and its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote, have
been informed about, and do not object to, the investor not applying proportionate
consolidation or the equity method;
2.
the investors debt or equity instruments are not traded in a public market;
3.
the investor did not le, nor is it in the process of ling, its nancial statements with a
securities commission or other regulatory organization for the purpose of issuing any
4.
the ultimate or any intermediate parent of the investor produces consolidated nancial
Standards.
IAS 31 allows for the use of two different reporting formats for presenting proportionate
consolidation:]
The venturer may combine its share of each of the assets, liabilities, income and expenses of the
jointly controlled entity with the similar items, line by line, in its nancial statements; or
The venturer may include separate line items for its share of the assets, liabilities, income and
expenses of the jointly controlled entity in its nancial statements.
(ii) Equity Method

Procedures for applying the equity method are the same as those described in IAS 28 Investments
in Associates.
S T U D Y
Under proportionate consolidation, the balance sheet of the venturer includes its share of the
assets that it controls jointly and its share of the liabilities for which it is jointly responsible. The
income statement of the venturer includes its share of the income and expenses of the jointly
controlled entity.
T E X T
i) Proportionate Consolidation
36
1.5 MERGER VS ACQUISITION (IFRS 3)

Denition of business combination/Merger
A business combination is the bringing together of separate entities or businesses into one
reporting entity.
Scope exclusions
S T U D Y
T E X T
IFRS 3 applies to all business combinations except combinations of entities under common
control, combinations of mutual entities, combinations by contract without exchange of ownership
interest, and formations of joint ventures.
Method of Accounting for Business Combinations

Purchase method
All business combinations within the scope of IFRS 3 must be accounted for using the purchase
method. The pooling of interests method is prohibited.
Acquirer must be identied

The old IAS 22 had required the pooling method if an acquirer could not be identied. Under the
pooling of interest method/merger accounting no goodwill arose on consolidation, there was no
distinction between the post acquisition and pre acquisition prots and consolidation was carried
out as if the companies have been one entity despite acquisition partway during the year. The
main form of acquisition was by way of share for share exchange in addition to cash payment.
However, the investment in the acquiring company was valued at the par value of shares
issued. The difference between Par value of shares issued plus cash paid and the par value of
shares received was referred to as difference on consolidation or merger reserve. Difference on
consolidation is a debit balance that was written off against the group reserves while a merger
reserve is a credit balance that is shown in the consolidated balance sheet together with the
other group reserves.
The following two examples are comprehensive and include all the companies that have been
covered so far (Subsidiaries, Associates and jointly controlled entities.) he merger method of
accounting has been used for illustrative purpose only and is not to be used. IFRS 3 requires
all mergers to be accounted for using the acquisition or purchase method. Under IFRS 3, an
acquirer must be identied for all business combinations.
>>> Example
37
Embamba Ltd., a company quoted on the Nairobi Stock Exchange, with 200 million shares in
issue on 1 April 1996, has owned 75% of the ordinary share capital and 60% of the preference
share capital of Fanya Limited since 1 April 1990 when the balance on the prot and loss account
of Fanya Ltd. was Sh. 120 million.
On 1 July 1996, Fanya Ltd. purchased 40% of the ordinary share capital of Guvu Ltd. as a longterm investment and appointed two directors to its board.
Revenue
Prot for the year
Dividends received
Taxation
E Ltd
Sh.m
F Ltd
Sh. m
G Ltd
Sh. M
H Ltd
Sh. M
I Lttd
Sh. m
6 000
1,320
74
1.440
280
20
960
290
820
220
7,200
1,600
1394
300
(460)
(100)
(90)
(60)
(600)
934
200
200
160
1,000
(40)
(200)
(40)
(50)
(40)
(300)
(1,014)
(60)
(70)
(60)
(300)
(1,214)
(100)
(120)
(100)
(600)
(280)
60
80
60
400
Prot after tax

Preference divs paid
Ordinary dividends:
Interim paid
Final proposed
Retained prot for year
Statement of retained earnings

At 1 April 1996
2,480
580
360
210
1,200
Retained prot for year
(280)
60
80
60
400
At 31 March 1997
2,200
640
440
270
1,600
S T U D Y
On 2 January 1997, Embamba Ltd., issued 138 million of its ordinary shares of Sh.10 to the
owners of 92 million shares (in exchange for these shares) in Imani Ltd., which has 100 million
ordinary shares u. Sh.10 in issue and which are quoted on the Nairobi Stock Exchange. The
Registrar of Companies has approved the use of the merger method of accounting for this union.
The market values of the shares in Embamba and Imani were Sh.40 and Sh.60 respectively as
at the time. Neither Embamba nor Imani have any reserves other than their balances on the prot
and loss accounts.
T E X T
On 1 October 1996, Embamba Ltd. purchased 50% of the ordinary share capital of Hadithi Ltd.;
the other 50% was purchased by ABC Inc. a multi-national. Embamba and ABC both have joint
control of Hadithi.
38
All companies paid their interim dividends in the month of December 1996. Embamba Ltd.
Considers that all goodwill is impaired at the rate of 20% per annum from the date of acqusition.
The goodwill that had arisen on the purchase of Fanya Ltd. was Sh.80 million. The goodwill
paid by Embamba Ltd. on the purchase of its shares in Hadithi Ltd. was Sh.50 million. The
premium paid by Fanya on the purchase of its shares in Guvu Ltd. was Nil. Embamba Ltd. wishes
to account for the results of Hadithi Ltd. in the same way as ABC Inc. does i.e. proportionate
consolidation combining items on a line-by-line basis.
Required:
A consolidated income statement for the group in accordance with the relevant International
Financial Reporting Standards; include a Statement of Retained Earnings, disclosing how
much of the retained prot for the year and carried forward is included in the holding company,
the subsidiary companies, the joint venture and the associated company.
(20 marks)
Solutions:
T E X T
Embamba Ltd & its subsidiaries

Consolidated prot & loss a/c
For the year ended 31 March 1997
S T U D Y
NB: This is a June 1997 Question four. The format given was that used before ICPAK adopted
International Accounting Standards. The solution is therefore K limited to the format but a few
modications have been made. Pay attention to the workings.
Turnover
Prot for the year: Group Loss
Share of associate co.
Sh.
Taxation: Group Co.
1175
20.25
Share of associate co.

Prot after tax
Minority interest
Prot attributable to Embamba
Dividends: Interim paid
Final proposed
Retained prots: For year
B/f
C/f
Sh.
14845
3250
62.25
3,315.25
(1195.25)
2120
(131)
1989
476
1290
(1766)
223
3389
3612
Retained Prot
Embamba
B/f
Sh.
1940
Imani (Merger)
1104
(235)
368
1472
3044
345
____3389
133
57
18
__15
223
3175
402
18
__15
3612
Fanya (subsidiary)
Goro (Associate)
Hadithi (J.V.)
Group Co.
Yr
Sh.
C/f
Sh.
1705
39
Workings
i)
Turnover:
Embamba
F Ltd
H Ltd (50 x 6 )
12
G Ltd
Sh.
6000
1440
205
Prot for year

1320
280
55
7200
1600
14845
Less: Goodwill amortised H Ltd 50% x 20% X 50
ii) Share of Associate Co.
3255
(5)
3250
Prot for year and Tax

Prot for Year
As per a/c
290
Prorated for nine months

Share (75% x 40%)
Tax
90
217.5
65.25
67.5
20.25
iii) Minority Interest
Preference
PAOS
40%x40
T E X T
200
(20)
180
(40)
140 x 25%
Sh.
80
16
35
131
iv) Retained Prots
E Ltd
Div Receivable F
H
Re-acquisition div
H Ltd
( 50% x 100 x 6 )
12
Goodwill
amortisee F
b/f
Sh.
yr
Sh.
c/f
Sh.
2480
-
(280)
45
2200
45
30
30
(25)
(25)
(80)
b/f
Sh.
yr
Sh.
c/f
Sh.
580
-
60
28
640
28
Re-acquisition div
40% x 120 x 3
12
(12)
(12)
Re-acquisition prots
(120)
(120)
460
76
536
345
57
402
F Ltd
Div Receivable
(40% X 70)
(80)
(5)
(5)
Share of E 75%
(460)
(460)
H Ltd
1940
(235)
1705
60 x 50% x 6
12
15
15
I Ltd
1200
400
1600
Share of E 92%
1104
368
1472
G Ltd
80 x 9 x 40% x 75%
12
18
18
Difference on
Consolidation
S T U D Y
Sh.
8% x 1000
MI in I Ltd
MI in F Ltd:
PAT
Less inter company
40
Difference on Consolidation
Sh.
Par value of shares issued (138 x 10)
Less Par value of share received (92 x 10)
1380
920
460
1.6 FOREIGN SUBSIDIARIES (IAS 21)
S T U D Y
T E X T
FAST FORWARD: The principal issues are which exchange rate(s) to use and how to report the
effects of changes in exchange rates in the nancial statements.
The objective of IAS 21 is to prescribe how to include foreign currency transactions and foreign
operations in the nancial statements of an entity and how to translate nancial statements into
a presentation currency.
Important denitions in IAS 21

Functional currency: The currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity
operates. The term functional currency is used in the 2003 revision of IAS 21 in place of
measurement currency but with essentially the same meaning. Presentation currency: The
currency in which nancial statements are presented.
Exchange difference: The difference resulting from translating a given number of units of one
currency into another currency at different exchange rates.
1.6.1 Foreign Currency Transactions

A foreign currency transaction should be recorded initially at the rate of exchange at the date of
the transaction (use of averages is permitted if they are a reasonable approximation of actual).
At each subsequent balance sheet dates:
41
Foreign currency monetary (Receivable and Payables) amounts should be reported using the
closing rate.
Non-monetary (like property, plant and equipment) items carried at historical cost should be
reported using the exchange rate at the date of the transaction.
Non-monetary items carried at fair value should be reported at the rate that existed when the fair
values were determined.
>>> Examples
A number of examples are worked below to illustrate the accounting requirements for foreign
currency transactions.
(a) Purchase of property, plant and equipment:

Joki Ltd agreed to purchase a piece of plant and machinery from a Dutch company for Guilders
2450 on 31 March 2001 to be paid for on 31 August 2001 at a contract rate of KSh 30.5. The
Exchange rates on 31 March 2001 was G1 = KSh 30.
The plant and machinery will be recorded in the accounts at historic cost. This cost can be
ascertained by reference to the effective xed shilling price of KShs 74,725. Thus, the transaction
would have been recorded as:
KShs
DR
Plant and Machinery (30.5 x 2,450)
CR
Notes payable A/c
KShs
74,725
74,725
This is the true liability for such a purchase and should therefore be used to value the creditor
for the period that the debt is outstanding. No adjustment to this cost should be made in future
period. Similar arguments would apply Joki Ltd had entered into a forward contract to purchase
G2450 at KSh. 30.5 for every G1 on 31 August 2001.
If no contract rate had been agreed the asset would have to be recorded as costing KSh 73,500
(G2450 @ KSh 30) and as before no subsequent translations would be necessary. It is likely that
an exchange difference would have risen on settlement.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Exchange differences arising when monetary items are settled or when monetary items are
translated at rates different from those at which they were translated when initially recognized or
in previous nancial statements are reported in prot or loss in the period, with one exception.
The exception is that exchange differences arising on monetary items that form part of the
reporting entitys net investment in a foreign operation are recognised, in the consolidated
nancial statements that include the foreign operation, in a separate component of equity; they
will be recognised in prot or loss on disposal of the net investment. If a gain or loss on a nonmonetary item is recognised directly in equity (for example, a property revaluation under IAS 16),
any foreign exchange component of that gain or loss is also recognised directly in equity. Prior
to the 2003 revision of IAS 21, an exchange loss on foreign currency debt used to nance the
acquisition of an asset could be added to the carrying amount of the asset if the loss resulted
from a severe devaluation of a currency against which there was no practical means of hedging.
That option was eliminated in the 2003 revision.
42
(b) Payables
A Kenyan company purchases goods from a UK company in July 2001 for Ksh.550. The company
paid off Kshs.200 in August 2001 and the balance was outstanding at the end of the year: i.e. 30
Sept. 2002.
Exchange rates were:

July 2001
August 2001
30 Sept. 2001
Kshs.1 =
Kshs.1 =
Kshs.1 =
KSh 70
KSh 80.1
KSh 82.7
The creditors account would appear as follows:

Payables Account
Aug. 2001 Cash A/c
(200 x 80.1)
S T U D Y
T E X T
Sept. 2001 Bal. c/d

(350 x 82.7)
(c)
KShs
16,020
July 2001 Purchase A/c

(550 x 70)
KShs
38,500
P & L (Bal gure)

28,945
44,965
6,465
44,965
Receivables
A Kenyan company sells goods to a German company for DM 3000. Payment is received in
August 2001. Exchange rates were:
May 2001
August 2001
1 DM = KShs 27.3
1 DM = KShs 26.7
The Kenyan company would make the following entries in the ledger account:
Debtors Account
May 2001 Sales A/c
(27.3 x 3,000)
Kshs
81,900
_____
81,900
Aug. 2001 Cash A/c

(3,000 x 26.7)
P & L (Year End)
Exchange loss
Kshs
80,100
1,800
81,900
Note:
The above example assumes that the Kenyan company invoices the German company in DM. If
the invoicing were in Kenya Shillings, accounting problems would be far simpler.
(d)
43
Long term Loans
Amabera Ltd, a Kenyan company acquired a loan from a Canadian bank on 1 January 2001 of
Kshs.10, 000. The proceeds were converted into shillings and remitted to Kenya. The year-end
for the Amabera Ltd is on 31 December 2001.
The Exchange rates were as follows:

1 Jan 2001
31 December 2001
31 December 2001
1 Kshs. = KSh 35.3

1 Kshs. = KSh 33.4
1 Kshs. = KSh 34.9
The loan account in the books of Amabera Ltd would appear as follows:
Loan Account
Kshs
31.12.02 Bal c/d

(34.9 x 10,000)
1 Jan 2001
334,000
19,000
______
353,000
349,000
______
Cash A/c (35.3 x

10,000)
353,000
______
1.1.02 Bal b/d

P & L A/c
(Exchange loss)
349,000
353,000
334,000
15,000
______
349,000
Notes:
i.
ii.
The amounts outstanding at each year end (Kshs.10, 000) should be translated into
Kenyan shillings at the exchange rate each year end.
Exchange differences (2001 gain of 19,000/-, 2002 loss of 15,000/-) should according
to the requirements of IAS 21 be reported in the prot and loss account as part of the
prot from ordinary operations, but must be disclosed in the notes as an unrealised
holding gain/loss.
1.6.2 The consolidated Financial Statements

This section deals with the second problem which a company may have in foreign currency
translation namely the translation of complete nancial statements of foreign entities (subsidiary,
branches, associate companies).
The major problem is to determine which Currency to be used (determining the functional
currency)
A holding company with a foreign operation must translate the nancial statements of those
operations into its own reporting currency before they can be consolidated into group accounts.
T E X T
Bal c/d (33.4 x 10,000)

P & L A/c
(Exchange gain)
S T U D Y
31 Dec. 2001
Kshs
44
There are two methods normally used and each method depends on whether the foreign operation
has the same functional currency as the parent. IAS 21 requires the rm to consider the following
factors in determining its functional currency:
(i)
The currency that inuences the sales price for goods,
(ii)
The currency of the country, whose competitive forces and regulations mainly determine
the sales price of its goods and services,
(iii) The currency that inuences labor, material and other costs.
Translation Methods
According to IAS 21, the method to be used is determined by the relationship between the
holding company and the foreign entity concerned.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Two methods commonly used are:

(a) The Presentation Currency Method (Formerly called Net investment or Closing rate method)
This approach is normally used if the operations of the operations of the subsidiary company are
different from those of the parent company and therefore the subsidiary is considered to be semi
autonomous from the holding company.
The results and nancial position of an entity whose functional currency is not the currency of
a hyperinationary economy shall be translated into a different presentation currency using the
following procedures:
(i)
Assets and liabilities for each balance sheet presented (i.e. including comparatives)
shall be translated at the closing rate at the date of that balance sheet;
(ii)
Income and expenses for each income statement (i.e. including comparatives) shall be
translated at exchange rates at the dates of the transactions, and
(iii) All resulting exchange differences shall be recognized as a separate component of

equity.
For practical reasons, a rate that approximates the exchange rates at the dates of the transactions,
for example an average rate for the period, is often used to translate income and expense items.
However, if exchange rates uctuate signicantly, the use of the average rate for a period is
inappropriate.
Under such circumstances, it is assumed that changes in the exchange rate has little or no direct
effect on the activities or present and future cash ows from operations of either the parents or
the foreign entity and because the foreign operation is not an integral part of the operations of
the parent.
45
Translation Procedure
Balance sheet of a foreign entity
All balance sheet items should be translated into the reporting currency of the investing company
using the rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date.
Prot and loss account of the foreign entity

Items should be translated at either an average rate for the period, or at the closing rate.
Exchange differences:
The rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date is different from that ruling at the
previous balance sheet date. For example, land and buildings translated last year at
one rate will be included in the consolidated balance sheet this year at a different rate.
The average rate used to translate the prot and loss account differs from the closing
rate.
The exchange differences may also arise out of measurements of cash ow differences (occurring
immediately or in the future).
(b)The functional method (formerly referred to as temporal method)
IAS 21 states that where the operations of the foreign entity is an integral part of the operations
of the parent company i.e. the affairs of a foreign subsidiary company are so closely interlinked
with those of the holding company that the business of the foreign entity is regarded as a
direct extension of the business of the investing company rather than as a separate and quasi
independent business - the functional currency method should be used instead of the closing
rate method.
IAS 21 gives the following as examples of situations where the temporal method should
be used, where:
i.
ii.
iii.
The foreign entity acts as a selling agency receiving stocks of goods from the investing
company and remitting the proceeds back to the company.
The foreign entity produces a raw material or manufactures parts or sub-assemblies
which are then shipped to the investing company for inclusion in its own products.
The foreign entity is located overseas for tax, exchange control or similar reasons to act
as a means of raising nance for other companies in the group.
S T U D Y
T E X T
These may arise for three reasons:
46
Note
Each subsidiary company must be considered separately. The relationship between each
subsidiary and the holding company must be established so that the appropriate translation
method can be determined. The method should then be used consistently from period to period
unless the nancial and other operational relationships which exist between the investing
company and the subsidiary changes.
Translation Procedure
Exchange differences out of translation should be reported either as part of the prot
and loss for the year from ordinary operations or as an extraordinary item as the case
may be.
(b)
Prot and loss items

Item
Sales, cost of sales
Depreciation charge
Expenses
Tax charge
Dividend paid
Dividend proposed
S T U D Y
T E X T
(a)
(c)
Rate
Average
Historical
Average
Average
Actual (at date of payment)
Year end (closing)
Balance sheet items

Fixed assets
(1)
if acquired before subsidiary became part of the group, use exchange rate of date of
acquisition of subsidiary
(2)
If acquired post acquisition, use Historical cost.

Stock Rate on date of acquisition of stock (Year end is usually reasonable, practical
approximation)
NOTE: The most commonly used method of translation is the Presentation method, and
this should be used unless the examiner states otherwise.
Goodwill arising on consolidation is considered to be an asset of the subsidiary company

and should therefore be translated using the closing rate method. Fair value adjustments
are also translated at the closing rate.
47
>>> Example
Kenya Curios (KC) Limited purchased 80% of the ordinary share capital of Tanzan Artefacts
(TA) Limited, a company incorporated in Tanzania; on 1 October 1995 when there was a credit
balance on the prot and Loss Account of Tanzania (T) shillings 630 million. Both companies sell
a range of products to tourists and to the tourist industry.
PPE (Net book value)

Land and buildings
Equipment
780
1,353
832
1,890
Closing inventory
(57)
(702)
Cost of sales
775
1,188
Investment in subsidiary
Gross prot
155
1,023
Current Assets:
Operating expenses
(29)
(99)
Inventory
Depreciation
(18)
(76)
Receivables
(47)
(175)
108
848
Operating prot
Dividend from subsidiary
Motor vehicles
KC
Ksh.
Million
90
60
TA
Tsh.
Million
1,764
84
12
60
162
1,908
312
57
702
160
660
31
264
248
1,626
Payables
91
396
Taxation
132
40
420
Bank
Prot before tax
116
Taxation
(33)
(242)
83
606
(20)
(112)
138
948
(40)
(420)
110
678
(60)
(532)
584
2,586
23
74
Ordinary shares Sh. 10
400
1,400
Retained Prots
184
1,186
584
2,586
Prot after tax

Dividends: Interim paid
Final
proposed
Financed by:
Retained prot:
For the year
Proposed dividend
23
74
Brought forward
161
1,112
Carried forward
184
1,186
1.
In the year ended 30 September 1998, KC Limited sold goods worth Ksh. 98 million to
TA Limited. These goods had cost KC Limited Ksh. 82 million. In the group accounts, the
unrealised prot at the commencement of the year was Ksh. 6 million and Ksh. 8 million
at the end of the year. Group policy is to recover the whole of the unrealised prot from
group stock and from the company which made the prot, the minority interest bearing
its share if appropriate. Dividends payable to minority interests are shown as current
liabilities.
T E X T
purchases
TA
Tsh.
Million
2,211
537
Draft Balance Sheets

as at 30 September 1998
S T U D Y
Draft income statements for the

year ended 30 September 1998
KC
Ksh.
Million
Revenue
930
Opening inventory
52
48
2.
Both companies were established on 1 October 1993. The land, buildings and equipment
of both companies were purchased on this date. All the motor vehicles in both companies
were replaced on 29 September 1997 No depreciation had been charged on these
motor vehicles in the year ended 30 September 1997.
Both companies charge depreciation on the straight line basis at the following rates:
Land and buildings
: 2% per annum on cost (the land is leasehold and had 50 years
S T U D Y
T E X T
remaining at 1 October 1993

Equipment
10% per annum
Motor vehicles
25% per annum
3.
The fair values of TAs assets and liabilities on 1 October 1995 were the same as book
values.
4.
Sales, purchases and expenses occur evenly over the year. In TA, debtors represent
4 months sales; creditors represent 3 months purchases; stock represents 6 months
purchases. At 30 September 1998, TA owed KC Tsh.288 million, whilst KCs books
showed that TA owed Ksh.24 million.
5.
KC has not yet accounted for the dividend receivable from TA. The interim dividend was
paid when the exchange rate was Ksh. 1 = Tsh. 11.2.
6.
Relevant rates of exchange are:
1 October 1993
Ksh.1 = Tsh.6
30 September 1997
Ksh.2 = Tsh.10
1 October 1995
Ksh.1 = Tsh.7
31 March 1998
Ksh.1 = Tsh.11
31 March 1997
Ksh.1 = Tsh.9.3
30 June 1998
Ksh.1 = Tsh.11.7
30 June 1997
Ksh.1 = Tsh.9.6
30 September 1998
Ksh.1 = Tsh.12
Average for the year to 30 September 1998 Ksh.1 = Tsh.11.
The directors of KC Limited have directed you to prepare the consolidated income statement for
the year ended
Required:
The directors of KC Limited have directed you to prepare the consolidated income statement
for the year ended 30 September 1998 and the consolidated balance sheet as at 30 September
1998.
Using the following methods:

(i)
Presentation method (assuming goodwill was not impaired and it is an asset of the
subsidiary)
(ii)
Functional currency method (goodwill is impaired at the rate of 20% per annum and it
is an asset of the holding company).
49
1. Presentation Method
Consolidated income statement
Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross prot
Operating expenses
Prot before tax
Income tax expense
Prot for the period
Attributable to Holding company
Attributable to Minority interest
Ksh
1,033.00
(783.00)
250.00
(63.00)
187.00
(55.00)
132.00
121.00
11.00
132.00
Share of retained prots b/f in TA

Opening net assets in TA (Ksh)
Net assets on acquisition (ksh)
Reduction in net assets ( Loss)
Share of the holding Co@80%
Ksh
251.20
290.00
(38.80)
(31.04)
KC(less UPOI)
Prot for the period

Less dividends
Interim paid
Final proposed
Consolidated balance sheet
Ksh
Non Current assets

Property plant and equipment
321.00
Goodwill
137.00
458.00
Current assets
Inventory
107.50
A/C receivable
191.00
Cash at bank
Total assets
Foreign exchange reserve
Retained prot
Minority
interest
53.00
351.50
809.50
400.00
20.44
184.96
605.40
43.10
648.50
S T U D Y
Retained prot c/f
Ksh
155.00
(31.04)
123.96
121.00
244.96
(20.00)
(40.00)
184.96
Retained prot b/f

Share in TA
T E X T
Statement of changes in equity extract
50
Current
liabilities
Accounts
payable
100.00
Current tax
18.00
Proposed dividends
47.00
165.00
813.50
Balance sheet
TA
Tsh
1,908.00
Exchange
rate
1/12
TA
Ksh
159.00
Inventory
702.00
1/12
58.50
A/C receivable
660.00
1/12
55.00
Bank
264.00
1/12
22.00
PPE
Current assets
1,626.00
135.50
S T U D Y
T E X T
Current liabilities
A/C payables
396.00
1/12
33.00
Current tax
132.00
1/12
11.00
Proposed divs
420.00
1/12
35.00
948.00
79.00
678.00
56.50
Net assets
2,586.00
215.50
Ordinary shares
1,400.00
1/7
200.00
Pre acquisition
630.00
1/7
90.00
Post acquisition
556.00
bal g
(74.50)
Net current assets
Retained prots
2,586.00
215.50
Income statement
2,211.00
537.00
1,353.00
1,890.00
(702.00)
1,188.00
1,023.00
(99.00)
(76.00)
(175.00)
848.00
Sales
Opening stock
Purchases
Closing stock
Cost of sales
Gross prot
Expenses
Depreciation
Operating prot
Income tax
expense
Prot after tax
Dividends:
Retained prot
Interim dividends
Final proposed
(242.00)
606.00
(112.00)
(420.00)
74.00
1/11
201.00
1/11
108.00
93.00
(9.00)
(7.00)
(16.00)
77.00
1/11
1/11
1/11
1/11.2
1/12
(22.00)
55.00
(10.00)
(35.00)
10.00
51
CoC
Ksh
Inv in S
312.00
Ksh
OSC (80%x200)
160.00
P&L(80%x90)
72.00
Goodwill
80.00
312.00
312.00
Goodwill restated (80X12/7)
137.00
Goodwill based on historical rate
(80.00)
57.00
Gain on exchange to Foreign exchange reserve

Gain/Loss on foreign currency exchange translation
Ksh
Net closing assets of TA in KSh
215.50
Net opening assets of TA in KSh(2586-74)/10
251.20
(45.70)
T E X T
S T U D Y
(35.70)
10.00
Less increase in retained prots ( P&L in KSh)

Foreign exchange loss
Group P & L
Ksh
Ksh
Coc
72.00
KC
184.00
MI
12.24
TA
15.50
Dividends receivable
28.00
Forex Loss
45.70
UPCI
8.00
180.96
Balance c/d
273.20
273.20
Foreign Exchange reserve

Ksh
Group P & L
Ksh
45.70
MI (20%x45.7)
Goodwill
Balance c/d
9.14
57.00
20.44
66.14
66.14
MI balance sheet
Ordinary share capital in TA
40.00
Share of prot
12.24
52.24
Less share of forex loss
(9.14)
43.10
52
2. Functional Method
KC Ltc & Its Subsidiary
Consolidated Income Statement for Year Ended 30.9.95
KC
TA
Ksh.
Adjustments
930
(775)
155
201
(117)
84
930 + 201 - 98
775 + 117 98 6+ 8
(47)
-
(19)
-
108
65
8
116
(33)
83
-
65
22
43
-
Group Ksh.
Ksh.
Sales
Cost of Sales
Gross Prot
Expenses (Introducing
Depreciation) 29 + 18
Goodwill Amortized
Exchange Loss
Operating Prot
Investment Income Dividends
Prot before tax
Taxation
Prot after tax
Minority Interest
1033
796
237
47 + 19
See Cost of Control
See Step 3 on
computation
(66)
(16)
(3)
152
Ignore Investment
Income
152
(55)
97
33 + 22
2
20% x (43 3)
(8)
S T U D Y
T E X T
Prot attributable to KC
Dividends;
Interim paid
Final proposal
Retained Prots for the
year
83
(20)
(40)
43
(10)
(35)
23
(2)
89
(20)
(40)
Only for KC (HC)
29
Statement of Retained Prots

KC
TA
Group
Non-Current Assets
PPE
Intangible Goodwill
Current Assets
Inventory
Receivables
Bank
Total Assets
B/fwd
123
37.6
160.6
Year
33
(4)
29
KC and its subsidiary

Consolidated balance sheet as at 30.9.98
Ksh.M
113
191
53

Retained Prots
Shareholders funds
Minority interest workings
Current Liabilities
Payables
Taxation
Proposed Dividends
C/fwd
56
33.6
189.6
Ksh.M
432
32
464
357
821
400
189.6
589.6
66.4
100
18
47
165
821
53
Workings
Translate income statement of subsidiary co. TA
Exchange Rate
TA
Ksh.M
2211
Opening Inventory
Purchases
537
1353
Ksh.M
Average 1
11
201
____
58
1 (Date stock
9.3 was acquired
31/3/98)
Average 1
11
1890
123
181
Closing Inventory
(702)
Cost of Sales
1188
117
Gross Prot
1023
84
Expenses
Depreciation: Land &

buildings
Equipment
Motor Vehicles
Total Expenses
Operating Prot
Taxation
Prots after tax
99
39.2
16.8
20
1 (Date stock was

11 acquired 31/3/98)
1 Average
11
(64)
1 Rate on 1st
7 October 95
5.6
1 Rate on 1st
7 October 95
2.4
1 Rate on 30
10 September 97
175
19
848
65
(242)
1 Average
11
606
22
43
Dividends; interim paid
(112)
1 (Rate on date of
11.2 payment)
Final proposed
(420)
1 Closing rate
12 (Rate at b/s date)
(10)
(35)
____
Retained prot for the
year
74
T E X T
Sales
TA
S T U D Y
Step 1
54
Step 2 Translation of subsidiarys Balance Sheet

TA
Non-current Assets
Land and Buildings
Equipment
Motor Vehicles
Exchange Rate
Ksh.
1764
84
TA
Ksh.
1 Rate on 1.10.95
7
252
1 Rate on 1.10.95
7
12
1 Rate on 1.10.95
7
60
1908
270
S T U D Y
T E X T
Current Assets
Inventory
702
1 Rate stock was acquired

11
64
Receivables
660
1 Rate on b/sheet
12
55
Bank
264
1 Rate on b/sheet
12
22
1626
141
Current Liabilities
Payables
396
1 Rate on b/sheet
12
33
Taxation
132
1 Rate on b/sheet
12
11
Proposed Dividends
420
1 Rate on b/sheet
12
35
948
Net Current Assets
79
678
62
Net Assets
2586
332
Ordinary Shares
1400
1 Rate of acquisition
7 of sub
200
P & L - Pre-acquisition
630
1 Rate of acquisition
7 of sub
90
Post acquisition
556
Balancing Figure
1186 - 630
2586
_42
332
Cost of Control
Ksh.
312
Investment of TA
___
Ksh.
OSC 80% x 200
160
P & L at acq 80% x 90
72
Goodwill Amortized b/f
32
Amortized for year
16
Bal c/d Amortized B/

Sheet
32
___
312
Step 3
55
312
Computation of Exchange Difference

Ksh.
Closing Net assets of subsidiary (translator) as at 30.9.98
332
Opening net assets of subsidiary as at 30.9.97
337.1
Less loss as per translated income statement of subsidiary co.
T E X T
(5.1)
Decrease in Net Assets
S T U D Y
(2)
3.1
Workings for opening Net assets

Workings for opening Net assets
TA M
Non-Monetary
Assets
TA M
Land & Buildings
Equipment
Motor Vehicles
Exchange
Rate
Kshs.
1803.2
257.6
100.8
14.4
80
Stock
Net Monetary
Items
537
Balancing figure
(9)
(0.9)
2512
337.1

KC
B/fwd
58
Year
C/fwd
Exchange Rate
Ks
Stock
56
537
58
Net Monetary
Items
Balancing figure
(9)
(0.9)
2512
337.1

KC
B/fwd
Year
C/fwd
As per the accounts
161
23
184
Less Goodwill amortised
(32)
(16)
(48)
UPCS
(6)
UPCS
(8)
(8)
28
28
123
33
156
Dividends receivable
80% x 35
A Share of post acquired profits
As per the accounts
47
(2)
45
Less exchange loss
(3)
(3)
47
(5)
42
37.6
(4)
33.6
Workings for B/Sheet Continued
KC
TA
PRE;
90
Adjusted past acq. profits
S T U D Y
T E X T
HC HCs share of 80%
Land and Buildings
Equipment
60
Motor Vehicle
12
162
Bal c/d
270
Minority Interest a/c

Sh.M
OSC 20% X 200
66.4 P & L 20%(90
+42)
66.4
Sh.M
40
26.4
66.4
IFRS 5 replaced IAS 35 Discontinuing Operations. The definition of discontinued operations is very much the same as the definition of discontinuing operations in IAS 35. How
depends on when the discontinued operation satisfies the criteria to be classified as held for sale. The same requirement applies to non-current asset held for sale. Further, IFR
operations to be presented as a single amount on the face of the income statement

In general, the following conditions must be met for an asset (or 'disposal group') to be classified as held for sale:
(i)
management is committed to a plan to sell
(ii)
the asset is available for immediate sale
(iii)
an active programme to locate a buyer is initiated
(iv)
the sale is highly probable, within 12 months of classification as held for sale (subject to limited exceptions)
(v)
the asset is being actively marketed for sale at a sales price reasonable in relation to its fair value
(vi)
(v) Actions required to complete the plan indicate that it is unlikely that plan will be significantly changed or withdrawn.
The assets need to be disposed of through sale. Therefore, operations that are expected to be wound down or abandoned would not meet the definition (but may be classified
The following rules apply in measuring and presenting non current assets held for sale:
Immediately before the initial classification of the asset as held for sale, the carrying amount of the asset will be measure
Resulting adjustments are also recognised in accordance with applicable IFRSs.
Non-current assets that are classified as held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to se
57
1.7 DISPOSAL OF SUBSIDIARIES (IFRS 5)
IFRS 5 replaced IAS 35 Discontinuing Operations. The denition of discontinued operations

is very much the same as the denition of discontinuing operations in IAS 35. However the
timing of the classication now depends on when the discontinued operation satises the criteria
to be classied as held for sale. The same requirement applies to non-current asset held for
sale. Further, IFRS 5 requires the results of discontinued operations to be presented as a single
amount on the face of the income statement
1.7.1 Non Current asset held for sale
management is committed to a plan to sell
(ii)
the asset is available for immediate sale
(iii) an active programme to locate a buyer is initiated

(iv) the sale is highly probable, within 12 months of classication as held for sale (subject to
limited exceptions)
(v)
the asset is being actively marketed for sale at a sales price reasonable in relation to its
fair value
(vi) Actions required to complete the plan indicate that it is unlikely that plan will be
signicantly changed or withdrawn.
The assets need to be disposed of through sale. Therefore, operations that are expected to be
wound down or abandoned would not meet the denition (but may be classied as discontinued
once abandoned).
The following rules apply in measuring and presenting non current assets held for sale:
(i)
At the time of classication as held for sale. Immediately before the initial classication
of the asset as held for sale, the carrying amount of the asset will be measured in
accordance with applicable IFRSs. Resulting adjustments are also recognised in
accordance with applicable IFRSs.
(ii)
After classication as held for sale. Non-current assets that are classied as held for
sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell.
S T U D Y
(i)
T E X T
In general, the following conditions must be met for an asset (or disposal group) to be classied
as held for sale:
58
(iii) Impairment. Impairment must be considered both at the time of classication as held
for sale and subsequently:
o
At the time of classication as held for sale. Immediately prior to classifying an asset
as held for sale, measure and recognise impairment in accordance with the applicable
IFRSs (generally IAS 16, IAS 36, IAS 38, and IAS 39). Any impairment loss is recognised
in prot or loss unless the asset had been measured at revalued amount under IAS 16
or IAS 38, in which case the impairment is treated as a revaluation decrease.
After classication as held for sale. Calculate any impairment loss based on the
difference between the adjusted carrying amounts of the asset and fair value less costs
to sell. Any impairment loss that arises by using the measurement principles in IFRS
5 must be recognised in prot or loss, even for assets previously carried at revalued
amounts.
(iv) Assets carried at fair value prior to initial classication. For such assets, the
requirement to deduct costs to sell from fair value will result in an immediate charge to
prot or loss.
S T U D Y
T E X T
(v)
Subsequent increases in fair value. A gain for any subsequent increase in fair value
less costs to sell of an asset can be recognised in the prot or loss to the extent that it is
not in excess of the cumulative impairment loss that has been recognised in accordance
with IFRS 5 or previously in accordance with IAS 36.
(vi) Non-depreciation. Non-current assets that are classied as held for sale shall not be
depreciated.
(vii) Balance sheet presentation. Assets classied as held for sale, and the assets and
liabilities included within a disposal group classied as held for sale, must be presented
separately on the face of the balance sheet.
Disclosures:
Non-current assets classied as held for sale must be disclosed separately from other assets in
the balance sheet.
There are also several other additional disclosures including a description of the nature of assets
held and the facts and circumstances surrounding the sale.
Disposal of a subsidiary
Before we look at the detail requirements of IFRS 5 it is important to remember that the holding
company can dispose partly, the investment held in subsidiary company. Therefore we shall look
at partial disposals and full disposal (which requires consideration of IFRS 5)
59
Partial disposals
(i) From subsidiary to subsidiary:
This means that the holding company will reduce the level of control but still at the subsidiary level
for example from 80% shareholding to 60% shareholding. The subsidiary will still be consolidated
only that in the income statement, care should be taken in computing minority interest. If the
disposal takes place partly during the year then the results of the subsidiary should be split into
two for the purpose of allocating the minority interest share of the prot after tax in subsidiary
company. The respective minority interest percentage share in the subsidiary for each period
will apply. In the consolidated balance sheet only the nal minority interest percentage share will
apply. The group will also report a prot or loss on the sale of the partial investment.
The prot or loss is computed as follows:
Sh
Sh
Cash proceeds on disposal
Less: Share of net assets on disposal
(X)
Add Unimpaired goodwill to date
(X)
Prot/ (loss) on Disposal
(ii)
X / (X)
Method two
Sh
Sh
Prot on disposal reported by the holding company
Less: Group share of post acquisition P&L in Sub

Less Goodwill impaired to date
X
(X)
Prot/ (loss) on disposal
(X)
X
(ii) From subsidiary to a jointly controlled entity:

The holding company reduces its control in the subsidiary to 50% and thus becoming a jointly
controlled entity. Care should be taken especially if the disposal takes place during the year. The
consolidate income statement requires careful approach because, the subsidiaries results will be
split into the respective periods and full consolidation will apply the normal way according to the
requirements of IAS 27 for the period before disposal. In the period after disposal we will use the
requirements of IAS 31 i.e either the partial consolidation or equity method. In the consolidated
balance sheet we shall use the requirements of IAS 31. The group will also report a prot or loss
on the sale of the partial investment.
T E X T
Method one
S T U D Y
(i)
60
(iii) From subsidiary to Associate companies

The holding company reduces its control in the subsidiary to a percentage that is less than 50%
but more than 20%. Care should also be taken especially if the disposal takes place during the
year. The consolidate income statement requires careful approach because, the subsidiaries
results will be split into the respective periods and full consolidation will apply the normal way
according to the requirements of IAS 27 for the period before disposal. In the period after disposal
we will use the requirements of IAS 28 i.e. the equity method. In the consolidated balance sheet
we shall use the requirements of IAS 28. The group will also report a prot or loss on the sale of
the partial investment.
(iv) From subsidiary to an investment
S T U D Y
T E X T
The holding company reduces its control substantially to less than 20%. This means that the
remaining shareholding will be accounted for according to the requirements of IAS 32 and 39:
Financial instruments which we shall see later.
If the disposal takes place during the nancial period then the results of the subsidiary should
be split into the two periods and full consolidation will take place in relation to the period before
disposal as far the consolidated income statement is concerned. In the remaining period and the
balance sheet the requirement of IAS 32 and 39 will apply.
(v) Full disposal (IFRS 5)

We shall now move on to the requirements of IFRS 5 with reference to disposal of subsidiaries
or other major components of the business.
A disposal group is a group of assets, possibly with some associated liabilities, which an entity
intends to dispose of in a single transaction. The measurement basis required for non-current
assets classied as held for sale is applied to the group as a whole, and any resulting impairment
loss reduces the carrying amount of the non-current assets in the disposal group in the order of
allocation required by IAS 36.
The following rules also apply in measurement and presenting discontinued operations:
(i)
After classication as held for sale. Disposal groups that are classied as held for sale
are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell. [IFRS
5.15]
(ii)
Impairment. Impairment must be considered both at the time of classication as held for
sale and subsequently:
At the time of classication as held for sale. Immediately prior to classifying a disposal
group as held for sale, measure and recognise impairment in accordance with the
applicable IFRSs (generally IAS 16, IAS 36, IAS 38, and IAS 39). Any impairment loss
is recognised in prot or loss unless the asset had been measured at revalued amount
61
under IAS 16 or IAS 38, in which case the impairment is treated as a revaluation
decrease.
o
After classication as held for sale. Calculate any impairment loss based on the
difference between the adjusted carrying amounts of the disposal group and fair value
less costs to sell. Any impairment loss that arises by using the measurement principles
in IFRS 5 must be recognised in prot or loss, even for assets previously carried at
revalued amounts. This is supported by IFRS 5 BC.47 and BC.48, which indicate the
inconsistency with IAS 36.
Non-depreciation
Disposal groups that are classied as held for sale shall not be depreciated.
Balance sheet presentation
The assets of a disposal group classied as held for sale must be disclosed separately from other
assets in the balance sheet.
The liabilities of a disposal group classied as held for sale must also be disclosed separately
from other liabilities in the balance sheet.
Additional rules and matters regarding disposal of subsidiaries

Denition
A discontinued operation is a component of an entity that either has been disposed of or is
classied as held for sale, and:
Represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations, is part of a
single co-ordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business or geographical area of
operations, or is a subsidiary acquired exclusively with a view to resale.
Income statement presentation

The sum of the post-tax prot or loss of the discontinued operation and the post-tax gain or
loss recognised on the measurement to fair value less cost to sell or fair value adjustments on
the disposal of subsidiary should be presented as a single amount on the face of the income
statement. Detailed disclosure of revenue, expenses, pre-tax prot or loss, and related income
taxes is required either in the notes or on the face of the income statement in a section distinct
from continuing operations. Such detailed disclosures must cover both the current and all prior
periods presented in the nancial statements.
S T U D Y
Disclosures
T E X T
Assets classied as held for sale, and the assets and liabilities included within a disposal group
classied as held for sale, must be presented separately on the face of the balance sheet.
62
Cash ow statement presentation

The net cash ows attributable to the operating, investing, and nancing activities of a discontinued
operation shall be separately presented on the face of the cash ow statement or disclosed in
the notes.
No retroactive classication
IFRS 5 prohibits the retroactive classication as a discontinued operation, when the discontinued
criteria are met after the balance sheet date.
Disclosures
S T U D Y
T E X T
In addition to the income statement and cash ow statement presentations noted above, the
following disclosures are required:
(i)
Adjustments made in the current period to amounts disclosed as a discontinued

operation in prior periods must be separately disclosed.
(ii)
If an entity ceases to classify a component as held for sale, the results of that component
previously presented in discontinued operations must be reclassied and included in
income from continuing operations for all periods presented.
The formats of the income statements showing the disposal of a group (subsidiaries) is given as
follows:
Continuing
Operations
Discontinued
Operations
Enterprise as
a whole
Shm
Shm
Shm
(X)
(X)
(X)
Gross Prot
Other Incomes
Distribution Costs
(X)
(X)
(X)
Administration Costs
(X)
(X)
(X)
Other Expense
(X)
(X)
(X)
Finance costs
(X)
(X)
(X)
Income tax Expense
(X)
(X)
(X)
Prot for the period
Revenue
Cost of Sales
Prot before tax
63
Alternatively a rm can present the results as follows and the detail break down given by way of
notes to the accounts:
Shm
X
(X)
X
X
X
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
X
(X)
X
X
Revenue
Cost of Sales
Gross Prot
Other Incomes
Distribution Costs
Administration Costs
Other Expense
Finance costs
Prot before tax
Income tax Expense
Prot for the period from continuing operations
Prot for the period from discontinued
operations
Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross prot
Distribution costs
Administration expense
Prot from operations
Dividends received
Finance costs
Prot before tax
Income tax expense
Prot/ (loss) after tax
Dividends:
Interim paid 31 May
Final proposed
Retained prot/ (loss)
Prot and loss accounts for the year ended 31 October 1999
USL
UAL
UCL
UDL
Sh.
Sh. million
Sh. million
Sh. million
million
1,800
840
600
480
(1,350)
(630)
(400)
(200)
450
210
200
280
(100)
(120)
(60)
(70)
(150)
(120)
(40)
(50)
(250)
(240)
(100)
(120)
200
(30)
100
160
44
(50)
194
(30)
100
160
(54)
(20)
(50)
140
(30)
80
110
(50)
(50)
(100)
40
(30)
(20)
(40)
(60)
20
(40)
(40)
(80)
30
S T U D Y
Udi Supermarket Limited (USL) is a company quoted on the Nairobi Stock Exchange. In the early
1990s it diversied its operations by purchasing 100% of the shares of United Autos Limited
(UAL) on 1 November 1990, 80% of the shares of Utility Chemicals Limited (UCL) on 31 October
1991 and 70% of the shares in Uday Drycleaners Limited (UDL) on 30 April 1992. Each company
operates in different business segment. In the year ended 31 October 1999, USL decided to sell
its entire 100% shareholding in UAL, and half of its shareholding in UCL. The sale of shares in
UAL took place in a single transaction on 30 June 1999 for Sh.162 million and the sale of shares
in UCL took place in a single transaction on 31 July 1999 for Sh. 169 million. In both cases
proceeds were credited into the account for the investment in the books of USL. The nancial
statements of the four companies for the year ended 31 October 1999 were as follows.
T E X T
>>> Example
64
Balance sheet as at 31 October 1999

USL
Sh.
UAL
UCL
million
Sh. million
Sh. million
Investments:
UAL
UCL
UDL
Current assets
Current liabilities
Net current assets
640
UDL
Sh. million
220
180
400
140
(60)
80
300
50
250
300
150
(70)
80
260
100
160
260
130
(80)
50
450
200
250
450
6
39
270
300
(210)
90
1,045
500
545
1,045
S T U D Y
T E X T
1.
USL had purchased its shareholding in UAL, UCL and UDL when the balance on the prot
and loss accounts were Sh.38 million.,Sh.110 million and Sh.100 million respectively.
On these dates, the fair values of the identiable net assets of the companies concerned
were equal to their fair values.
2.
USL impairs goodwill that arises on the acquisition of subsidiary or an associate at the
rate of 20% per annum.
3.
USL intends to retain its remaining shareholding in UCL; at 31 October 1999, two of
UCLs ve directors were directors of USL.
4.
There is no tax charge or allowance on the prot or loss on the disposal of shares.
Required:
Prepare the consolidated income statement for the year ended 31 October 1999 and the consolidated
balance sheet as at 31 October 1999 in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards.
65
Solution
Continuing
Sh/Millions
2730
(1850)
880
57
10
(215)
(230)
0
(50)
452
_(121)
33110
Sh/Millions
560
(420)
140
(80)
(80)_
(148)
0
(168)
-__
(168)
Distribution costs
(215)
(230)
Other expenses (loss on disp)
0
(50)
USL ltdFinance
and itscost
subsidiaries
Profit before tax
452
Income tax Expense
_(121)
Consolidated
sheet as at 31st October331
1999
Profit forbalance
the period
(80)
(80)_
(148)
0
(168)
-__
(168)
446
1,590
1,040
Current assets

Investment in associates
104
500
693
446
1,590
135_
Financed by
Share
capital
Current
assets
Prot and loss A/C
Minority interest
Financed by
Share capital
Share
holders
funds
Profit
and loss
A/C
Minority interest
Share holders funds
500
693
1328
135_
1328
Current liabilities
262
Current liabilities
262
1590
Workings
Workings
Structures.
(a)
Before disposal
USL
(b) After disposal
(295)
(310)
(91)
(50)
274
(121)
284
1,040
104

Investment in associates
(i)
Enterprise as
a whole.
Sh. Millions
3290
(2270)
1020
57
10
(295)
(310)
(91)
(50)
274
(121)
284
10
S T U D Y
Sales
Cost of sales
Gross prot
Other incomes(prot on disp)
Share of PBT in Associate
Distribution costs
Other expenses (loss on disp)
Finance cost
Prot before tax
Income tax Expense
ProtShare
for theofperiod
PBT in Associate
Discontinuing
T E X T
USL and its subsidiaries

Consolidated income statement for the year ended 31st Oct 1999
1590
66
(b) After disposal

USL
(ii) Gain / Loss on disposal

(ii)
Gain / Loss on disposal
(a) Sale of shares either cum-dir or ex-dir.

-
Dividends received from UCL

40% x 20%
=
Dividend earned
60% x 9/12 x 40%
(18)
Dividend earned but sold
S T U D Y
T E X T
(b)
Proceeds
Dividends foregone
Less Net assets sold
Share capital
Prot and loss Account B/f
Prot for the period
UAL (30 X 8/12)
UCL (20 X 9/12)
UAL 100% x 310
UCL 40% x 255
Gain (loss on disposal)
10
UAL
Sh/Millions
162
-__
162
50
280
(20)
310
(310)
-__
(148)
UCL
Sh/Millions
169
(10)
159
100
140
15
255
(102)
57
67
OR
Goodwill arising on acquisition
Cost of investment
Net Assets acquired
Share capital
Prot and loss
Account
UAL
Sh/Millions
168
UCL
Sh/Millions
208
50
38
100
110
88
(88)
-__
80
UAL 100%
UCL 80%
UDL 70%
UDL
Sh. Millions
270
200
100
210
(168)
-__
40
300
(210)
60
Cost of investment
Gain/loss as per Holding company
Goodwill amortised
Increase in value of net assets
UAL (260 38)
UCL 40% (155 110)
Minority interest
UCL: 20% x 80 x 9/12
UDL: 30% x 110
Prot attributable to members of
group
Dividend: - Interim paid
Proposed
Retained earnings for
the yr
UCL
Sh/Millions
169
(10)_
159
(104)
55
20
(222)
-__
(148)
(18)_
57
12
33....
(45)
.. 118
.. (50)
.. (50)
.. 18
Retained earnings B/forward

(545 40)
Goodwill amortised
UAL = 250 + 30 38
UCL = 80% (160 20 110)
UDL = 70% (250 30 100
Retained earnings for year
Sh. Millions
505
UAL
UCL
UDL
(80)
(40)
(60)
(180)
325
242
24
84_
675
18_
693
S T U D Y
Proceeds
Dividends sold
UAL
Sh/Millions
162
-__
162
(168)
(6)
80
T E X T
Goodwill
68
Workings:
Loss on sale of shares in UAL
Premium Amortised
COC 70% x 100
Minority Interest 30% x 250
Goodwill amortised
CBS
Consolidated P &L A/C

6 USL
20 Dividend sold
70 Gain on sale of shares UCL
75 Dividend receivable:
60
UCL: 40% x 40
693
UDL: 70% x 40
Investment in:
Associates
______
UDL
545
10
55
16
28
20
250
924
924
S T U D Y
T E X T
CBS
Minority Interest
Share capital: 30% x 200
135 P& L A/C
135
Investment in Associates A/C

Balance B/f
104 Premium Amortised
Post acquisition retained earnings:
40% (160 110)
20 CBS
124
USL
UDL
Dividend from: UCL
UDL
Intra-group trading
CBS
Current Assets
300 Intra group trading
130
16
28 CBS
474
Current Liabilities A/C
28 USL
262 UDL
290
60
75
135
20
104
124
28
446
474
210
80
290
69
CHAPTER SUMMARY
control.
not control them.
Venturer: A party to a joint venture and has joint control over that joint venture.
Investor in a joint venture: A party to a joint venture and does not have joint control over that
joint venture.
Control: The power to govern the nancial and operating policies of an activity so as to obtain
benets from it.
Joint control: The contractually agreed sharing of control over an economic activity such that no
individual contracting party has control.
operates.
CHAPTER QUIZ
1.
2.
3.
4.
What is a subsidiary?
What is a joint venture?
What are the three types of joint ventures dealt with in IAS 31?
What is a foreign operation?
S T U D Y
T E X T

70
ANSWERS TO THE CHAPTER QUIZ

1.
2.
3.
4.
Subsidiary is an entity, including an unincorporated entity such as a partnership that is

controlled by another entity (known as the parent).
A Joint venture is a contractual arrangement whereby two or more parties undertake an
economic activity that is subject to joint control.
IAS 31 deals with three types of joint Ventures
(i) Jointly Controlled operations,
(ii) Jointly Controlled assets,
(iii) Jointly Controlled Assets
Foreign operation is a subsidiary, associate, joint venture, or branch whose activities
are based in a country other than that of the reporting enterprise.
S T U D Y
T E X T
PAST PAPER ANALYSIS

Group structures was tested in the following examinations:
12/07
06/07
12/06
06/06
06/05
12/04
05/02
12/00
07/00
Foreign subsidiaries were tested in the following examinations:
12/05
06/04
12/02
12/01
06/01
Disposal of subsidiaries (IFRS 5) was tested in the following examinations:
06/07
06/03
Merger Vs Acquisition was tested in: 12/03
71
EXAM QUESTIONS
QUESTION ONE
M. Ltd. started operating several years ago. As a strategy to expand its operations, its management
has in the recent past purchased shares from other companies, whose trial balances are given
below:
Ordinary shares of Sh. 10 each

7% non-cumulative preference shares of Sh. 10
each
General reserve
Provision for depreciation
6% debentures
Proposed dividend: Ordinary
Preference
Accrued debenture interest
Trade payable
H. Ltd
Sh. 000
220,000
-
C. Ltd
Sh. 000
200,000
-
A Ltd.
Sh. 000
96,000
-
60,000
5,000
26,100
145,500
651,600
102,000
143,400
465,400
120,000
320,000
50,000
146,000
300,000
50,000
98,500
60,000
30,000
113,100
651,600
100,000
80,000
40,000
44,400
130,000
20,000
10,000
5,600
1,200
34,200
465,400
80,000
40,000
100,000
40,000
60,000
320,000
60,000
6,000
30,000
20,000
10,000
20,000
146,000
1.
2.
The general reserve of all the companies was the same as they were one year ago.
The prot and loss account balances of C. Ltd. and A. Ltd were Sh.16 million and Sh.21
million respectively at the time their shares were purchased, one year previous to the
preparation of the balance sheets provided.
M Ltd. acquired the shares of H Ltd cum-dividend on 1 January 2001. The balance on
the prot and loss account of H Ltd. consisted of the following:
Prot and loss account balance on 31 December 20X0

Net prot for the period ended 31 December 2001
Less proposed dividend
Prot and loss account balance on 31 December 2001
Sh. 000
28,000
32,000
60,000
(15,600)
44,400
S T U D Y
Property and equipment

7,500,000 ordinary shares of Sh. 10 each in H
Ltd
6,000,000 7% non-cumulative preference
shares
Of Sh. 10 each in H Ltd
6% debentures in H Ltd
1,800,000 ordinary shares of Sh. 10 each in A
Ltd
6,400,000 equity shares in C Ltd and Sh. 10
each
Current assets
M. Ltd
Sh. 000
250,000
165,000
T E X T
Trial balance as at 31 December 2001
72
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
S T U D Y
T E X T
8.
9.
The balances on the prot and loss account of H Ltd. at the acquisition date is after
providing for preference dividend of Sh.5.6 million and a proposed ordinary dividend of
Sh.5 million, both of which were subsequently paid and credited to the prot and loss
account of M Ltd.
No entries have been made in the books of M Ltd. in respect of debenture interest due
from, or proposed dividends from two of its investments, except that dividends due from
A Ltd. were credited to M Ltd.s prot and loss account and the corresponding entry
made in its debtor.
The debentures of H Ltd. were purchased at par.
The stock in trade of H Ltd. on 31 December 2001 includes Sh.6 million in respect of
goods purchased from M Ltd. These goods had been sold by M Ltd. at such a price that
M Ltd. earned a prot of 20% on the invoice price.
The group policy is to account for any associate company using the equity method.
Goodwill arising on consolidation is amortized using the straight-line method over
a useful life of ve years, (assuming a zero residual value) a proportionate charge
being made for any period of control of less than a full year. All unrealised prot on
closing stock is removed from the accounts of the company that realized it, giving a
proportionate charge to the minority interest is appropriate.
Dividends to minority interest shareholders are shown as part of minority interest.
H Ltd. sold a xed asset on 31 December 2001 to M Ltd. for Sh.20 million, making a
20% prot on the invoice price. H Ltd. depreciates its assets at 20% using the straightline method. H Ltds accountant erroneously used the selling price for depreciation
purposes, however, the cost of assets reected the correct amounts.
Required:
A consolidated balance sheet of M Ltd. and its subsidiaries as at 31 December 2001. (25 marks)
QUESTION TWO
The draft balance sheet of Aberdare Limited, Batian Limited and Elgon Limited as at 31 March
1999 are as follows:
Balance sheet as at 31 March 1999
B Ltd.
A Ltd.
Sh. million
Sh. million
PPE
1,280
920
Investments in subsidiaries (cost)
840
750
2,120
1,670
Current assets
Inventories
420
410
680
540
Trade receivables
Cash
80
90
1,180
1,040
Current liabilities
390
380
Trade payables
40
20
Taxation
Proposed dividends
300
250
730
650
Net current assets
450
390
2,570
2,060
Issued share capital
Ordinary shares of Sh.10
600
500
Revaluation reserve
260
Retained earnings
1,970
1,300
2,570
2,060
E Ltd.
Sh. million
700
700
210
390
70
700
210
10
200
420
280
980
500
480
980
73
3.
4.
5.
All the shares in all the companies rank equally for voting purposes.
A Ltd. purchased 30 million ordinary shares in B Ltd. on 1 April 1990, when the balance
of retained earnings in B Ltd. was Sh.800 million. On 1 April 1990, the fair values of the
identiable net assets of B Ltd. were approximately the same as book values. By 31
March 19989, some of the xed assets of B Ltd. had depreciated signicantly in value:
the directors commissioned Uptown Estate Agents to revalue the xed assets, which
resulted in the reserve stated in the accounts. The revaluation had been incorporated
in the accounts as at 31 March 1998.
B Ltd. acquired 30 million shares in E Ltd. on 30 September 1998. On this date, the fair
value of the xed assets in E Ltd. was Sh. 60 million in excess of book value and the fair
value of stock was Sh.20 million in excess of book value. In addition, E Ltd. possessed
patent rights of fair value Sh.10 million on 30 September 1998: however, these were
not carried in the books of E Ltd. E Ltd depreciates xed assets at 10% per annum and
intangible assets at 20% per annum (both gures being reduced proportionately for a
period which is less than a year). 80% of the stock in hand on 30 September 1998 in E
Ltd. had been sold by 31 March 1999. Between 30 September 1998 and 31 March 1999,
E Ltd.s sales to A Ltd. and B Ltd. were Sh.240 million and Sh.160 million respectively.
All these goods had been resold by the two companies but at 31 March 1999, A Ltd. and
B Ltd. owed E Ltd. Sh. 36 million and Sh.32 million respectively. E Ltd.s net prot for
the year, after tax but before dividends, was Sh.240 million; this prot accrued evenly
over the year.
Neither A Ltd. nor B Ltd. Has accounted for dividends receivable.
The group accounting policy in relation to goodwill is to recognise it as an intangible
asset and impair it a rate of 33.333% per year, with a proportionate charge for a period
of less than one year. Minority interest is recorded as its proportion of the fair values
of the net assets of the subsidiary: dividends due to minority interest are carried within
current liabilities.
Required:
The consolidated balance sheet of Aberdare Limited and its subsidiaries as at 31 March 1999 in
accordance with the International Accounting Standard 1 presentation of nancial statements
(Revised 2004)
CASE STUDY
In the world of growing economy and globalization, major companies on both domestic and
international markets struggle to achieve the optimum market share possible. Every day business
people from top to lower management work to achieve a common goal being the best at what
you do, and getting there as fast as possible. As companies work hard to beat their competitors
they assume various tactics to do so. Some of their tactics may include competing in the market
of their core competence, thus, insuring that they have the optimal knowledge and experience to
have a ghting chance against their rivals in the same business; hostile takeovers; or the most
popular way to achieve growth and dominance mergers and acquisitions.
S T U D Y
1.
2.
T E X T
74
Mergers and acquisitions are the most frequently used methods of growth for companies in the twenty rst
century.
Mergers and acquisitions present a company with a potentially larger market share and open it up to a
more diversied market. At times, a merger or an acquisition simply makes a company larger, expands its
staff and production, and gives it more nancial and other resources to be a stronger competitor on the
market.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Source: www.google.co.ke- case studies on mergers and acquisition
75
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
CHAPTER TWO
ONE
ACCOUNTING FOR ASSETS

AND LIABILITIES (PART A)
S T U D Y
T E X T
76
77
CHAPTER TWO
ACCOUNTING FOR ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
(PART A)
OBJECTIVES
After this chapter, the student will know how to account for:
Leases (IAS 17)

Impairment of assets (IAS 36)
Assets that are used in exploring Mineral Resources (IFRS 6)
Financial Instruments (IAS 32, 39 and IFRS 7)
Leasing is a unique form of intermediate term nancing. It is also a major form of off balance
sheet nancing, though disclosure of leased assets and corresponding obligations in nancial
statements are now increasingly required internationally.
T E X T
IAS 36 applies to all tangible, intangible and nancial assets except inventories, assets arising
from construction contracts, deferred tax assets, assets arising under IAS 19, employee
benets and nancial assets within the scope of IAS 32, Financial instruments, disclosures and
presentation.
S T U D Y
INTRODUCTION

Lease is an agreement whereby the lessor conveys to the lessee, in return for rent, the right to
use an asset for an agreed period of time.
Impairment: a fall in the value of an asset so that its recoverable amount is now less than its
carrying value in the balance sheet.
Financial instrument: A contract that gives rise to a nancial asset of one entity and a nancial
liability or equity instrument of another entity.
EXAM CONTEXT
In past examinations, the examiner has tested the students knowledge on the following topics:
Leases
Impairment of Assets
Students should therefore understand these topics.
78
INDUSTRY CONTEXT
This chapter shows organisations how to classify leases and account for them.
Organizations learn how to account for impairment of assets and to properly account for nancial
instruments and make adequate disclosures in the nancial statements.
2.1 LEASES (IAS 17)

FAST FORWARD: Leasing is a major form of off balance sheet nancing, though disclosure
of leased assets and corresponding obligations in nancial statements are now increasingly
required internationally.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Introduction
Leasing is a unique form of intermediate term nancing.
Lease is an agreement whereby the lessor conveys to the lessee, in return for rent, the right
to use an asset for an agreed period of time. The lessor remains the owner but lessee has a
right to use the equipment for agreed rentals to be paid over a period. Though the lessee has
an unrestricted right of use of the lease equipment but does not become the owner. The lease
contract will cover lease period, the amount and timing of payments to be made by the lessee,
provision of payment of taxes, insurance, maintenance expenses and provision for renewal of
the lease or purchase of asset at the expiration of the lease period.
Terms used in leasing

Lessor: This is the person, who under an agreement conveys to another person (the lessee) the
right to use in return for rent, an asset for an agreed period of time.
Lessee: this is a person, who under an agreement obtains from another person (the lessor) the
right to use, in return for rent, an asset for an agreed period of time.
Non-cancellable lease: A lease that is cancellable only:
Upon the occurrence of some remote contingency

With the permission of the lessor
If the lessee enters into a new lease for the same or any equivalent asset with the same
lessor, or
Upon payment by the lessee of an additional amount such that at inception continuation
of lease is reasonably certain
ACCOUNTING FOR ASSETS AND LIABILITIES (PART A)
79
Inception of the lease: the earlier of the date of the lease agreement or of a commitment by the
parties to the principal provision of the lease. Thus it is the date that the principal provisions of
the lease are committed to in writing by the parties.
Lease term: the non-cancellable period for which the lessee has contracted to take on lease
the asset together with any further periods for which the lessee has the option to continue the
lease of the asset, with or without further payment which option at the inception of the lease it is
reasonably certain that the lessee will exercise. Thus, the period, which the lessee is required or
expected to make, lease payments include:
Minimum lease payments: the payments over the lease term that the lessee is or can be
required to make (excluding costs for services and taxes to be paid by and be reimbursable to
the lessor) together with the residual value. Thus, it includes the sum of the payments that the
lessee is required or expected to make during the lease term other than amounts representing
taxes, insurance maintenance etc together with:
In case of lessee, any amount generated by him or by a party related to him with any penalty that
the lessee must pay for failure to renew or extend the lease beyond the lease term
In the case of lessor any guarantee by a third party of the residual value or rental payment
beyond the lease terms.
Fair value: the amount for which an asset could be exchanged between a knowledgeable, willing
buyer and a knowledgeable, willing seller in an arms length transaction.
Useful life: In the case of an operating lease either the period over which a xed asset is
expected to be used by the enterprise; or the number of production (or similar) units expected
to be obtained from the asset by the enterprise. In case of a nance lease, the useful life of the
asset is the lease term.
Interest rate implicit in the lease: the discount rate that, at the inception of the lease, cause
the aggregate present value of the minimum lease payments, from the standpoint of the lessor,
to be equal to the fair value of the leased asset, net of any grants or tax credits received by the
lessor. In other words, it is the discount rate that equates the present value of the minimum lease
payments plus the unguaranteed residual value to the fair value of the leased property at the
inception of the lease less any investment tax credit retained and expected to be realised by the
lessor.
Gross investment in the lease: the aggregate of the minimum lease payments under a nance
lease from the standpoint of the lessor.
T E X T
Non-cancellable term of the lease

Any period for which failure to renew the lease results in a penalty to the lease in an
amount, at the inception of the lease
Any period subject to a bargain renewal option or proceeding the date that a bargain
purchase option becomes exercisable and
Any period during which the lease may be renewed or extended at the option of the
lessor
S T U D Y
80
Unearned nance income: the difference between the lessors gross investment in the lease
and its present value.
Net investment in the lease: the gross investment in the lease less unearned nance income.
Bargain option: it is an option that can be exercised by lessee to renew the lease or purchase
the leased property for an amount which is sufciently below the expected future market value.
Such an option appears at the inception of the lease.
Estimated economic life of the leased property: the expected remaining period during which
the property is expected to be economically usable for the purpose for which it was intended at
the inception of the lease.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Unguaranteed residual value: The expected fair value of the leasehold property at the end of
the term (excluding the amount of nay guarantee) included in the minimum lease payments.
Classication of leases
In general lease means allowing a person to use a property on payment of a certain amount
of money in installment as agreed between the lessor and lessee. A contract of lease may be
classied into three types:
Operating lease
Finance lease
Leveraged lease
Operating or (cancellable lease)

A lease is classied as an operating lease if it does not secure for the lessor the recovery of his
capital outlay plus a return on the funds invested during the lease term. Therefore, the asset
should be treated by the lessor as a xed asset and rentals receivable should be included in
income over the lease term.
Costs, including depreciation, incurred in earning the rental income should be charged to income.
Initial direct costs incurred by lessor in negotiating and arranging the lease should be expensed
in the year in which they are incurred.
Lease rentals in the books of the lessee should be accounted for on accrual basis over the lease
term so as to recognise an appropriate charge in this respect in the prot and loss account with
a separate disclosure thereof. The excess of lease rentals paid over the amounts accrued in
respect thereof should be treated as prepaid lease rental and vice versa.
81
Accounting entries in the books of lessee

When rent is paid on the leased property
Dr:
Cr:
Rent A/c
Cash A/c
The entry will be repeated in subsequent years till the lease expires.
Accounting entries in the books of lessor
When rent is received under the lease contract
Dr:
Cash A/c
Cr:
Rental income
Depreciation A/c
Cr:
Accumulated depreciation A/c
When insurance/maintenance/taxes are paid

Dr:
Insurance/maintenance/taxes A/c
Cr:
cash A/c
Finance (or capital) lease

A lease under which the present value of the minimum lease payments at the inception of the
lease exceeds or is equal to substantially the whole of the fair value of the leased asset. This
method of nancing the asset is similar to that of borrowing for acquisition of an asset. The asset
is acquired immediately without making any payment for it. Contract made under this type of
lease is irrevocable or non-cancellable. The lessor will try to recover his original investment of
equipment plus a reasonable return on such investment during the lease term.
Accounting entries in the books of the lessor
When the equipment is purchased on lease
Dr:
Equipment A/c
Cr:
Cash A/c
S T U D Y
Dr:
T E X T
When depreciation is to be charged
82
When the contract is signed and property leased out to the lessee
Dr:
Rent receivable A/c
Cr:
Equipment a/c
When rst installment on lease is received

Dr:
Cash A/c
Cr:
Rent receivable A/c
At end of rst year
S T U D Y
T E X T
When interest becomes receivable
Dr:
Interest receivable a/c
Cr:
Interest a/c
When the amount is received in respect of interest and rent

Dr:
Cash a/c
Cr:
Rent receivable a/c
Cr:
Interest receivable a/c
These entries are repeated in subsequent years

At the end of last year
When the equipment is sold and lease is terminated
Dr:
Cash a/c
Cr:
Income on sale of equipment a/c
At the end of last year

When the equipment is purchased and lease is terminated
Dr:
Equipment a/c
Cr:
Cash a/c
83
When accumulated depreciation is transferred to equipment a/c at the time of termination

of the lease and purchase of the asset
Dr:
Accumulated depreciation a/c
Cr:
Equipment a/c
Accounting entries in the books of the lessee

When contract is signed and property acquired and the liability is assumed
Dr:
Equipment a/c
Cr:
Rent obligation a/c
Rental obligation a/c
Cr:
Cash a/c
At the end of rst year

When interest becomes payable
Dr:
Interest a/c
Cr:
Interest payable a/c
When the payment is made for rental and interest

Dr:
Rental obligation a/c

Interest payable a/c
Cr
Cash a/c
When depreciation at the end of the year is charged

Dr:
Depreciation a/c
Cr:
Accumulated depreciation a/c
When insurance, maintenance, taxes are paid

Dr:
Insurance/maintenance/taxes a/c
Cr:
Cash a/c
The above entries are repeated in each of the subsequent years.
S T U D Y
Dr:
T E X T
When rst installment payment of rental obligation is made
84
Distinction between an operating lease and a nance lease
S T U D Y
T E X T
A lease is classied as a nance lease if it secures for the lessor the recovery of his capital outlay
plus a return on the funds invested during the lease term. On the other hand a lease is classied
as an operating lease if it does not secure for the lessor the recovery of his capital outlay plus a
return on the funds invested during the lease term.
Operating lease
It is usually for a shorter duration and bears
no relation to the useful life of the asset.
Finance lease
It is usually related to the useful life of the
asset
It is a non-revocable contract
It is a revocable contract
The cost of maintenance, repairs, taxes and

insurance etc. are borne by the lessor
The lessee is protected against the risk of
obsolescence
These expenses are borne by the lessee

unless there is a contract to the contrary
The risk of obsolescence has to be taken by
the lessee
The rentals are not sufcient to fully

amortise the cost of the asset
The rentals would cover the lessors original

investment cost plus a reasonable return on
investment
There is no option to review or buy the

lease
It will provide for an option to review the

lease or to buy the asset at a nominal price
at the expiration of the lease period.
Leveraged lease
A leveraged lease is a nance lease and has all the following characteristics:
It involves at least three parties; a lessee, a lessor and one or more long term
creditors
The creditors recourse to the lessor in the event of default is restricted to the proceeds
from the disposal of the leased asset and any unremitted rentals relating thereto; and
The lessors investment in the lease declines in the early years of the lease and rises in
later years before its nal elimination.
This is used in those cases where huge capital outlays are required for acquiring assets. In
this type also, the lessee makes contract for periodical payments over the lease period and in
turn is entitled to use the asset over the period of time. Legal ownership of the leased asset
remains with the lessor who is, therefore, entitled to tax deductions such as depreciation and
other allowances.
It is appropriate therefore, that the method of nance income recognition on leveraged lease
should take account of the cash ows resulting from the tax benets. It is proposed to dene
leveraged leases and require that nance income from such leases should be recognised using
the net cash investment method.
85
Net cash investment method

The net cash investment in the lease is the balance of the cash outows and inows in respect
of the lease, excluding ows relating to insurance, maintenance and similar costs rechargeable
to the lessee. The cash outow includes payments made to acquire that asset, tax payments,
interest and principal on third party nancing. Inows include rentals receipts, receipts from
residual values and grants, tax credits and other savings or repayments arising from the lease.
Under the net cash investment, a lessor recognizes nance income based on a pattern reecting
a constant periodic return on its net cash investment outstanding in respect of the nance lease.
Lease rentals relating to the accounting period, excluding costs for services, are applied against
gross investment in the lease to reduce the principal and the unearned nance income. Hence,
this method usually involves using a net-of-tax basis for the allocation of income.
The net investment in the lease is the gross investment in the lease less any unearned nance
income. Remaining unearned income is allocated to revenue over the lease term so as to produce
a constant periodic rate of return on the net investment in the lease. The use of the net investment
method is usually supported on the basis that the lessor earns income for lending money to the
lessee, which at any particular time is the amount of the outstanding net investment in a lease.
Sale and leaseback

A sale and leaseback transaction involves the sale of an asset by the vendor and the leasing of
the same asset back to the vendor. The rentals and the sale price are usually interdependent as
they are negotiated as a package and may not represent fair values.
If in the case of leaseback, the rentals and the sale price are established at fair value, there has in
effect been a normal sale transaction and any prot or loss is normally recognised immediately.
If the sale price is below fair value, any prot or loss is recognised immediately, except that, if
the loss is compensated by future rentals at below market price, it is deferred and amortised in
proportion to the rental payments over the useful life of the asset. If the sale price is above fair
value, the excess over fair value is deferred and amortised over the useful life of the asset.
S T U D Y
Net investment method
T E X T
The net cash investment method is often considered to be the most appropriate method of
accounting for nance income from lease that have been entered into largely on the basis of the
tax benets that are expected to ow from the lease.
86
Presentation of nancial statements

Financial Accounting Standards Board and International Accounting Standards Committee have
issued a number of guidelines in this regard. The following are the factors to be disclosed in the
nancial statements under operating lease by the lessee:
Future minimum rental payment required as on date on the presentation of the balance
sheet, both as aggregate and year wise for the succeeding 5 years
The total minimum rental from lease to be received in future on sub-leases and
Rental expenses for the period to which the income statement relates, classifying the
amount into minimum rental, consignment rental and sub lease rentals
S T U D Y
T E X T
For nance lease, the gross amount of assets as on the date of balance sheet distinguishing
according to nature and functions disclosed. The amount of accumulated amortisation expenses
should be disclosed in full. Again the total amount of future lease payments due in aggregate and
for each year for the succeeding ve years is to be stated.
Following factors are to be disclosed by the lessor under operating lease in nancial
statements:
The cost of property on lease
The minimum rental receipt from such leases in aggregate and separately for the
succeeding ve years
In the income statement, the contingent rentals included in the income for the period
The total cost of the property on lease must also be shown major category wise together
with the depreciation so far accumulated
In the case of nance lease, the nancial statements should include:
The gross investment in the lease depicted by the sum of the minimum lease payments
and the estimated residual value
The difference between the gross investment and its present value as unearned income
to be recognised as earned over the life of the lease
The sale price will be shown at the present value of the minimum lease payments
deducting from the same, the cost of sale comprising of the cost of the leased property
and other initial direct cost incidental to the same less the present value of the
residual.
87
Disclosures in the nancial statements of lessees

Disclosures should be made of the amount of the assets that are subject of nance leases at
each balance sheet date. Liabilities, differentiating between the current and long-term portions.
Commitments for minimum lease payments under nance leases and under non-cancellable
operating lease with a term of more than one year should be disclosed in summary form giving
the amounts and periods in which the payments will become due.
Disclosures should be made of signicant nancing restrictions, renewal or purchase options,

contingent rentals and other contingencies arising from leases.
Apart from the disclosures recommended above the lessor should disclose the accounting
policies followed with regard to accounting for income under nance lease, valuation of assets
given on the lease and charge for depreciation.
>>> Example 1
(a)
Manufacturing Limited, a company that manufactures a broad range of industrial products
is in a serious cash ow position. Its overseas shareholders have not been paid dividends for
three years; suppliers have threatened to stop supplies and there is a tax bill to pay at the end of
September.
After consultation with the parent company a decision was made to:
Sub-divide the companys large 2 acre plot in the industrial area into two and sell the vacant half
for Sh.3 million.
Sell the other half, the factory and all its contents to a Kenyan investor at the professional valuation
of Shs. 80 million less a discount of 25%. As a condition for sale, the company will enter into a
ve-year lease of the factory and the assets in it for Shs.5 million a year.
The land has a book value of Shs.20 million while the plant and machinery are carried at Sh.79
million. Your discussions with the valuer indicates that annual rents for fully equipped factories
in the same industry approximate 10% of the market value at the time the lease agreement is
entered into.
S T U D Y
When a signicant part of the lessors business comprises operating leases, the lessor should
disclose the mount of assets by each major class of asset together with the related depreciation
at each balance sheet date.
T E X T
Disclosures should be made of the basis used for allocating income so as to produce a constant
periodic rate of return, indicating whether the return relates to the net investment outstanding
or the net cash investment outstanding in the lease. If more than one basis is used, the bases
should be disclosed.
88
Required
Calculate the effect of the prot and loss account of Manufacturing Limited of the above
transactions for each of the ve years.
Solution 1
(a)
Sale of vacant half of the land
Shs 000
Sale proceeds
3,000
Carrying value
(1,000)
Gain on disposal
2,000
Sale of the other half, the factory and its contents
S T U D Y
T E X T
Tutorial note: The lease of the factory and the assets may be classied as an operating lease
since there is no indication that it is a nance lease. This is a sale and lease back transaction.
Since the lease is an operating lease an actual sale has occurred.
As per IAS 17, paragraph 7

If a sale and leaseback transaction results in an operating lease, and it is clear that the transaction
is established at fair value, any prot or loss should be recognised immediately. If a sale price
is below fair value, any prot or loss should be recognised immediately except that, if the loss
is compensated by future lease payments at below market price, it should be deferred and
amortised in proportion to the lease payments over the period for which the asset is expected to
be used. If the sale price is above fair value, the excess over fair value should be deferred and
amortised over the period for which the asset is expected to be used.
In this case the sale price is below fair value. The fair value as per the professional valuation is
sh.80 million yet the selling price is Sh.60 million (Shs. 80 million less 25%). The lease payments
at market value should be 10% 80 million which is Sh. 8 million. The company will enter into
a ve year lease for Sh. 5 million a year. Any loss will be deferred and amortised since the loss
would be compensated by future lease payments.
000
Selling price
60,000
Carrying value
Land
(1,000)
Plant and machinery
(79,000)
Loss on sale
(20,000)
89
Effect on the prot and loss account
Gain on disposal
000
000
000
000
000
2,000
Lease rental
(5,000)
(5,000)
(5,000)
(5,000)
(5,000)
Deferred loss
(4,000)
(4,000)
(4,000)
(4,000)
(4,000)
(7,000)
(7,000)
(7,000)
(7,000)
(7,000)
Introduction
An enterprise should write down the carrying value of an asset to its recoverable amount if the
carrying value of an asset is not recoverable in full. IAS 36 was published in 1998 and puts
in place a detailed methodology for carrying out impairment reviews and related accounting
treatments and disclosures.
IAS 36 applies to all tangible, intangible and nancial assets except inventories, assets arising from
construction contracts, deferred tax assets, assets arising under IAS 19, employee benets and
nancial assets within the scope of IAS 32, Financial instruments, disclosures and presentation.
This is because those IASs already have rules for recognising and measuring impairment.
Carrying amount: is the net value at which the asset is included in the balance sheet (i.e. after
deducting accumulated depreciation and any impairment losses).
The basic principle underlying IAS 36b is relatively straightforward. If an assets value in the
accounts is higher than its realistic value, measured as its recoverable amount, the asset is
S T U D Y
FAST FORWARD: There is an established principle that assets should not be carried at above
their recoverable amount.
T E X T
2.2 IMPAIRMENT OF ASSETS (IAS 36)
90
judged to have suffered an impairment loss. It should therefore be reduced in value, by the
amount of the impairment loss. The amount of the impairment loss should be written off against
prot immediately.
The main accounting issues to consider are therefore as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
How is it possible to identify when an impairment loss may have occurred?

How should the recoverable amount of the asset be measured?
How should an impairment loss be reported in the accounts?
Identifying a potentially impaired asset

An enterprise should carry out a review of its assets at each balance sheet date, to assess
whether there are any indications of impairment to any assets. The concept of materiality applies,
and only material impairment needs to be identied.
If there are indications of possible impairment, the enterprise is required to make a formal estimate
of the recoverable amount of the assets concerned.
(a)
External sources of information:

A fall in the assets market value that is more signicant than would normally be expected
from passage of time over normal use; or
A signicant change in the technological market, legal or economic environment of the
business in which the assets are employed; or
An increase in market interest rates or market rates of return on investments likely to
affect the discount rate used in calculating value in use; or
The carrying amount of the enterprises net assets being more than its market
capitalisation
(b)
Internal sources of information: evidence of obsolescence or physical damage, adverse

changes in the use to which the asset is put, or the assets economic performance.
S T U D Y
T E X T
IAS 36 suggests how indications of a possible impairment of assets might be recognised. The
suggestions are based largely on common sense.
Measuring the recoverable amount of the asset

The recoverable amount of an asset should be measured as the higher value of:
(a)
The assets net selling price, and
(b)
Its value in use
The net selling price of an asset is the amount net of selling costs that could be obtained from the
sale of the asset. Selling costs include sales transaction costs such as legal expenses.
(a)
If there is an active market in the asset, the net selling price should be based on the
market value, or on the price of recent transactions in similar assets.
(b)
91
If there is no active market in the asset it might be possible to estimate a net selling
price using best estimates of what knowledgeable, willing parties might pay in an arms
length transaction.
Net selling price cannot be reduced, however, by including within selling costs any restructuring
or reorganisation expenses, or any costs that have already been recognised in the accounts as
liabilities.
The value in use of an asset is measured as the present value of estimated future cash ows
(inows minus outows) generated by the asset including its estimated net disposal value (if any)
at the end of its expected useful life.
Cash ow projections should be based on reasonable and supportable assumptions
(b)
Projections of cash ows, normally up to a maximum period of ve years, should be

based on the most recent budget or nancial forecasts.
(c)
Cash ow projections beyond this period should be obtained by extrapolating shortterm projections, using either a steady or declining growth rate for each subsequent
year (unless a rising growth rate can be justied). The long-term growth rate applied
should not exceed the average long-term growth rate for the product, market, industry
or country, unless a higher growth rate can be justied.
Composition of estimates of future cash ows

These should include:
(a)
Projections of cash inows from continuing use of the asset.
(b)
Projections of cash outows necessarily incurred to generate the cash inows from
continuing use of the asset
(c)
Net cash ows received/paid on disposal of the asset at the end of its useful life.
There is an underlying principle that future cash ows should be estimated for the asset in its
current condition. Future cash ows relating to restructurings to which the enterprise is not
yet committed, or to capital expenditure that will improve the asset beyond the standard of
performance originally assessed, are excluded.
Estimates of future cash ows should exclude:
(a)
Cash inows/outows from nancing activities
(b)
Income tax receipts/payments
S T U D Y
(a)
T E X T
The cash ows used in the calculation should be pre-tax cash ows and a pre-tax discount rate
should be applied to calculate the present value. Calculating a value in use therefore calls for
estimates of future cash ows and the possibility exists that an enterprise might come up with
over optimistic estimates of cash ows. The proposed IAS therefore states the following:
92
The amount of net cash inow/outow on disposal of an asset should assume an arms length
transaction.
Foreign currency future cash ows should be forecast in the currency in which they will arise and
will be discounted using a rule appropriate for that currency. The resulting gure should then be
translated into the reporting currency at the spot rate at the balance sheet date.
The discount rate should be a current pre-tax rate (or a rate) that reects the current assessment
of the time value of money and the risks specic to that asset. The discount should not include
weighting if the underlying cash ows have already been adjusted for risk.
Recognition and measurement of an impairment loss

The rule for assets at historical cost is: if the recoverable amount of an asset is lower than the
carrying amount, the carrying amount should be reduced by the difference (i.e. the impairment
loss), which should be charged as an expense in the income statement.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The rule for assets held at a revalued amount (such as property revalued under the IAS
16) is:
-
To the extent that there is a revaluation surplus held in respect of the asset, the
impairment loss should be charged to revaluation surplus.
Any excess should be charged to the income statement.
The IAS goes into quite a large amount of detail about the important concept of cash generating
units. As a basic rule, the recoverable amount of an asset should be calculated for the asset
individually. However, there will be occasions when it is not possible to estimate such a value for
an individual asset, particularly in the calculation of value in use. This is because cash inows
cannot be attributed to the individual asset.
If it is not possible to calculate the recoverable amount for an individual asset, the recoverable
amount of the assets cash generating unit should be measured instead.
A cash generating unit is the smallest identiable group of assets for which independent cash
ows can be identied and measured.
If active market exists for the output produced by the asset or a group of assets, this asset or
group should be identied as a cash generating unit, even if some or all of the output is used
internally.
Cash generating units should be identied consistently from period to period for the same type of
asset unless change is justied.
The group of net assets less liabilities that are considered for impairment should be the same as
those considered in the calculation of the recoverable amount.
Goodwill and impairment of assets

In some cases, there may be a carrying amount for goodwill in the balance sheet. The goodwill
will relate to a cash-generating unit. To carry out an exercise to determine whether the value of a
93
cash-generating unit has been impaired, an enterprise should do a bottom-up test and then, in
some cases, a top-down test:
(a)
Bottom-up test: identify the amount of the goodwill in the balance sheet that can be
allocated on a reasonable basis to the cash-generating unit. Measure the recoverable
amount of the cash generating unit. Impairment has occurred if the recoverable amount
is less than the carrying amount of the assets in the cash generating unit plus the
allocated goodwill.
(b)
Top-down test: if there is no reasonable basis for allocating a carrying amount of

goodwill to the cash generating unit, the enterprise should do a top-down test. Identify
the smallest cash generating unit to which the asset belongs and to which a share of
the unallocated goodwill can be apportioned on a reasonable basis. Apportion a share
of the unallocated goodwill to the cash generating unit. Then measure the recoverable
amount of the cash generating unit. Impairment has occurred if the recoverable amount
is less than the carrying amount of the assets in the cash generating unit plus the
allocated goodwill.
Accounting treatment for an impairment loss

If, and only if, the recoverable amount of an asset is less than its carrying amount in the
balance sheet, is an impairment loss deemed to have occurred. This loss should be recognised
immediately.
(a)
The assets carrying amount should be reduced to its recoverable amount in the balance
sheet.
(b)
The impairment loss should be recognised immediately in the income statement.
After reducing an asset to its recoverable amount, the depreciation charge on the asset should
then be based on its new carrying amount, its estimated residual value (if any) and its estimated
useful life.
An impairment loss should be recognised for a cash generating unit if (and only if) the recoverable
amount for the cash generating unit is less than the carrying amount in the balance sheet for all
the assets in the unit. When an impairment loss is recognised for a cash generating unit, the loss
should be allocated between the assets in the unit in the following order.
S T U D Y
Corporate assets are group or divisional assets such as a head ofce building, EDP equipment
or a research centre. Essentially corporate assets are assets that do not generate cash inows
independently from other assets; hence their carrying amount cannot be fully attributed to the
cash generating unit under review. In testing a cash generating unit for impairment, an enterprise
should identify all the corporate assets that relate to the cash generating unit. Then the same test
is applied to each corporate asset for goodwill, that is bottom up or failing that top-down.
T E X T
Corporate assets
94
(a)
First, to the goodwill allocated to the cash generating unit
(b)
Then to all other assets in the cash generating unit, on a pro-rata basis.
In allocating an impairment loss, the carrying amount of an asset should not be reduced below
the highest of:
(a)
Its net selling price (if determined)
(b)
Its value in use (if determined)
(c)
Zero
Any remaining amount of an impairment loss should be recognised as a liability if required by

other IASs.
S T U D Y
T E X T
>>> Example 1
A company that extracts natural gas and oil has a drilling platform in the Caspian Sea. It is
required by legislation of the country concerned to remove and dismantle the platform at the end
of its useful life. Accordingly, the company has included an amount in its accounts for removal
and dismantling costs, and is depreciating this amount over the platforms expected life.
The company is carrying out an exercise to establish whether there has been an impairment of
the platform.
(a)
Its carrying amount in the balance sheet is Kshs.3m
(b)
The company has received an offer of Kshs.2.8m for the platform from another oil
company. The bidder would take over the responsibility (and costs) for dismantling and
removing the platform at the end of its life.
(c)
The present value of the estimated cash ows from the platforms continued use is
Kshs.3.3m
(d)
The carrying amount in the balance sheet for the provision for dismantling and removal
is currently Kshs.0.6m
What should be the value of the drilling platform in the balance sheet, and what if anything is the
impairment loss?
Solution 1
Net sales price
= Kshs.2.8m
Value in use
= PV of cash ows from use less the carrying amount of the
Provision/liability
= Kshs.3.3m - Kshs.0.6m = Kshs.2.7m
Recoverable amount
= Higher of these two amounts, i.e. Kshs.2.8m
Carrying value
= Kshs.3m
Impairment loss
= Kshs.0.2m
95
The carrying value should be reduced to Kshs.2.8m
Reversal of an impairment loss

The annual review of assets to determine whether there may have been some impairment should
be applied to all assets, including assets that have already been impaired in the past.
(b)
The reversal of the impairment loss should be recognised immediately as income in the
income statement; and
The carrying amount of the asset should be increased to its new recoverable amount
Rule: An impairment loss recognised for an asset in the prior years should be recovered if
and only if there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the assets recoverable
amount since the last impairment loss was recognised.
The asset cannot be revalued to a carrying amount that is higher than its value would have
been if the asset had not been impaired originally, i.e. its depreciated carrying value had the
impairment not taken place. Depreciation of the asset should now be based on its new revalued
amount, its estimated residual value (if any) and its estimated remaining useful life.
An exception to the above rule is for goodwill. An impairment loss for goodwill should not be
reversed in a subsequent period unless:
(a)
The impairment loss was caused by a specic external event of an exceptional nature
not expected to recur; and
(b)
Subsequent external events have occurred that reverse the effect of that event.
>>> Example 2
A cash generating unit comprising a factory, plant and equipment etc and associated purchased
goodwill becomes impaired because the product it makes is overtaken by a technologically more
advanced model produced by a competitor. The recoverable amount of the cash generating unit
falls to Kshs.60m, resulting in an impairment loss of Kshs.80m, allocated as follows overleaf:
S T U D Y
(a)
T E X T
In some cases, the recoverable amount of an asset that has previously been impaired might turn
out to be higher than the assets current carrying value. In other words, there might have been a
reversal of some of the previous impairment loss. In such cases:
96
Carrying amounts
Carrying amounts
Before impairment
after impairment
Kshs.m
Kshs.m
40
Patent (with no market value) 20
Tangible long-term assets
80
60
Total
140
60
Goodwill
After three years, the entity makes a technological breakthrough of its own, and the recoverable
amount of the cash generating unit decreases to Kshs.90m. the carrying amount of the tangible
long term assets had the impairment not occurred would have been Kshs.70m.
Required
S T U D Y
T E X T
Calculate the reversal of the impairment loss.
Solution 2
The reversal of the impairment loss is recognised to the extent that it increases the carrying
amount of the tangible long-term assets to what it would have been had the impairment not taken
place, i.e. a reversal of the impairment loss of Kshs.10m is recognised and the tangible long-term
assets written back to Kshs.70m. Reversal of the impairment is not recognised in relation to the
goodwill and patent because the effect of the external event that caused the original impairment
has not reversed the original product is still overtaken by a more advanced model.
Disclosure
IAS 36 calls for substantial disclosure about impairment of assets. The information to be disclosed
include the following:
(a)
For each class of assets, the amount of impairment losses recognised and the amount
of any impairment losses recovered (i.e. reversals of impairment losses).
(b)
For each individual asset or cash generating unit that has suffered a signicant
impairment loss, details of the nature of the asset, the amount of the loss, the events
that led to recognition of the loss, whether recoverable amount is net selling price or
value in use, and if the recoverable amount is value in use, the basis on which this value
was estimated (e.g. discount rate applied).
Property, plant and equipment compensation for the impairment or

loss of items
An enterprise may receive monetary or non-monetary compensation from third parties for the
97
impairment or loss of items of property, plant and equipment. The compensation may be used to
restore the asset. Examples include:
-
Reimbursement by insurance companies after an impairment of items of plant and

equipment.
Physical replacement of an impaired or lost asset
Impairment of items of property, plant and equipment should be recognised under IAS
36; disposals should be recognised under IAS 16
(b)
Monetary or non-monetary compensation from third parties for items of property etc
that were impaired, lost or given up, should be included in the income statement
(c)
The cost of assets restored, purchased, constructed as a replacement or received as

compensation should be determined and presented under IAS 16.
2.3
EXPLORATION FOR AND EVALUATION OF MINERAL

RESOURCES (IFRS 6)
The main objective of IFRS 6 is to recommends the accounting treatment of assets that are
used in exploring mineral resources as they have slight different purpose as compared with
other property, plant and equipment and intangible assets. However an entity can still apply the
requirements of IAS 16 or 38.
IFRS 6 permits an entity to develop an accounting policy for exploration and evaluation assets
without specically considering the requirements of paragraphs 11 and 12 of IAS 8 Accounting
Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors. Thus, an entity adopting IFRS 6 may
continue to use the accounting policies applied immediately before adopting the IFRS. This
includes continuing to use recognition and measurement practices that are part of those
accounting policies.
IFRS 6 requires entities recognising exploration and evaluation assets to perform an impairment
test on those assets when facts and circumstances suggest that the carrying amount of the
assets may exceed their recoverable amount.
IFRS 6 varies the recognition of impairment from that in IAS 36 Impairment of Assets but measures
the impairment in accordance with that Standard once the impairment is identied.
IFRS 6 requires disclosure of information that identies and explains the amounts recognised
in its nancial statements arising from the exploration for and evaluation of mineral resources,
including
i.
Its accounting policies for exploration and evaluation expenditures including the
recognition of exploration and evaluation assets.
S T U D Y
(a)
T E X T
The accounting treatment is as follows:
98
ii.
The amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expense and operating and investing
cash ows arising from the exploration for and evaluation of mineral resources.
2.4 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Financial Instruments has become a very important area in accounting especially because of the
developments in nancial markets as far new derivatives and other nancial instruments. Many
companies had ignored the recording and accounting for such instruments and this has been
disastrous as big companies like Enron collapsed. There has been an issue with IAS 32 which
deals with Presentation, IAS 39 which deals with recognition and measurement and IFRS 7
which deals with Disclosure. IFRS 7 applies to periods commencing from 2007 and supersedes
the presentation part of IAS 32.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The main objectives of the three standards are to ensure that nancial instruments are properly
accounted for and adequate disclosure is made by the companies. The three standards are very
comprehensive especially IAS 39 which includes detailed illustration on how to teat the nancial
instruments in the accounts.
IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation and Disclosure

Please note that the disclosure part of the standards has been superseded by IFRS 7 whose
summary we shall look at later.
The stated objective of IAS 32 is to enhance nancial statement users understanding of the
signicance of nancial instruments to an entitys nancial position, performance, and cash
ows.
IAS 32 addresses this in a number of ways:

-
Clarifying the classication of a nancial instrument issued by an enterprise as a liability

or as equity.
Prescribing the accounting for treasury shares (a companys own repurchased

shares).
Prescribing strict conditions under which assets and liabilities may be offset in the
balance sheet.
Requiring a broad range of disclosures about nancial instruments, including information

as to their fair values.
99
Scope
Interests in subsidiaries, associates, and joint ventures that are accounted for under IAS
27 Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements, IAS 28 Investments in Associates,
or IAS 31 Interests in Joint Ventures. However, IAS 32 applies to all derivatives on
interests in subsidiaries, associates, or joint ventures.
Employers rights and obligations under employee benet plans [see IAS 19].
Rights and obligations arising under insurance contracts (this is the subject of a current
IASB project). However, IAS 32 applies to a nancial instrument that takes the form of an
insurance (or reinsurance) contract but that principally involves the transfer of nancial
risks. Also, IAS 32 applies to derivatives that are embedded in insurance contracts.
Contracts for contingent consideration in a business combination [see IFRS 3].
Contracts that require a payment based on climatic, geological or other physical

variables (weather derivatives) [see IAS 39].
IAS 32 applies to those contracts for buying or selling a non-nancial item that can be settled net
in cash or another nancial instrument, except for contracts that were entered into and continue
to be held for the purpose of the receipt or delivery of a non-nancial item in accordance with the
entitys expected purchase, sale, or usage requirements.
Important denitions
Financial instrument
It is a contract that gives rise to a nancial asset of one entity and a nancial liability or equity
instrument of another entity.
Financial asset:
Any asset that is:
(i) Cash;
(ii) An equity instrument of another entity;
(iii) A contractual right:
- to receive cash or another nancial asset from another entity; or
- to exchange nancial assets or nancial liabilities with another entity under
conditions that are potentially favourable to the entity; or
- a contract that will or may be settled in the entitys own equity instruments and is:
- a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to receive a variable
number of the entitys own equity instruments; or
S T U D Y
T E X T
IAS 32 applies in presenting and disclosing information about all types of nancial instruments
with the following exceptions:
100
a derivative that will or may be settled other than by the exchange of a xed amount of
cash or another nancial asset for a xed number of the entitys own equity instruments.
For this purpose an entitys own equity instruments does not include instruments that
are themselves contracts for the future receipt or delivery of the entitys own equity
instruments.
Financial liability:
Any liability that is a contractual obligation:
o
to deliver cash or another nancial asset to another entity; or
to exchange nancial assets or nancial liabilities with another entity under conditions
that are potentially unfavourable to the entity; or
a contract that will or may be settled in the entitys own equity instruments
Equity instrument:
S T U D Y
T E X T
It as any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all
of its liabilities.
Fair value:
The amount for which an asset could be exchanged or a liability settled, between knowledgeable,
willing parties in an arms length transaction.
The denition of nancial instrument used in IAS 32 is the same as that in IAS 39.
Classication as Liability or Equity

The fundamental principle of IAS 32 is that a nancial instrument should be classied as either a
nancial liability or an equity instrument according to the substance of the contract, not its legal
form.
How should a nancial liability be distinguished from an equity instrument?
The critical featured of a liability is an obligation to transfer economic benet. Therefore a nancial
instrument is a nancial liability if it is an obligation to transfer economic benet. A nancial
instrument is a nancial liability if there is a contractual obligation on the issuer either to deliver
cash or another nancial asset to the holder or to exchange another nancial instrument with the
holder under potentially unfavourable conditions to the issuer.
The nancial liability exists regardless of the way in which the contractual obligation will be settled.
The issuers ability to satisfy an obligation may be restricted, eg. By lack of access to foreign
currency, but this is irrevant as it does not remove the issuers obligation or the holders right
under the instrument. Where the above critical feature is not met, then the nancial instrument
is an equity instrument. IAS 32 explains that although the holder of an equity instrument may
be entitled to a pro rata share of any distributions out of equity, the issuer does not have a
contractual obligation to make such a distribution.
101
Although substance and legal form are often consistent with each other, this is not always the
case. In particular, a nancial instrument may have a legal form of equity, but in substance it is
infact a liability. Other instruments may combine features of both equity instruments and nancial
liabilities.
For example, many entities issue preferred shares which must be redeemed by the issuer for a
xed (or determinable) amount at a xed (or determinable) future date. Alternatively, the holder
may have the right to require the issuer to redeem the shares at or after a certain date for a xed
amount. In such cases, the issuer has an obligation. Therefore the instrument is a nancial
liability and should be classied as such.
The classication of the nancial instrument is made when it is rst recognised and this classication
will continue until the nancial instrument is removed from the entitys balance sheet.
Contingent settlement provisions
The occurrence or non-occurrence of uncertain future events, or
(ii)
The outcome of uncertain circumstances that are beyond the control of both the holder
and the issuer of the instrument. For example, an entity might have to deliver cash
instead of issuing equity shares. In this situation it is not immediately clear whether the
entity has an equity instrument or a nancial liability.
Such nancial instruments should be classied as nancial liabilities unless the possibility of
settlement is remote.
Settlement options
When a derivative nancial instrument gives one party a choice over how it is settled (e.g. the
issuer can choose whether to settle in cash or by issuing shares) the instrument is a nancial
asset or a nancial liability unless all the alternative choices would result in it being an equity
instrument.
Compound nancial instruments

Some nancial instruments contain both a liability and an equity element. In such cases, IAS
32 requires the component parts of the instrument to be classied separately, according to the
substance of the contractual arrangement and the denitions of a nancial liability and an equity
instrument.
One of the most common types of compound instrument is convertible debt. This creates a
primary nancial liability of the issuer and grants an option to the holder of the instrument to
convert it into an equity instrument (usually ordinary shares)of the issuer. This is the economic
equivalent of the issue of conventional debt plus a warrant to acquire shares in the future.
S T U D Y
(i)
T E X T
An entity may issue a nancial instrument where the way in which it is settled depends on:
102
Although in theory there are several possible ways of calculating the split, IAS 32 requires the
following method:
a)
Calculate the value for the liability component
b)
Deduct this from the instrument as a whole to leave a residual value for the equity
component.
The reasoning behind this approach is that an entitys equity is its residual interest in its assets
amount after deducting all its liabilities.
The reasoning behind this approach is that an entitys equity is its residual value for the equity
component after deducting all its liabilities.
The sum of the carrying amounts assigned to liability and equity will always be equal to the
carrying amount that would be ascribed to the instrument as a whole.
S T U D Y
T E X T
>>> Example: Valuation of compound instruments

Rathbone Co. issues 2,000 convertible bonds at the start of 20 x 2. The bonds have a three
year term, and are issued at par with a face value of KSh.1,000 per bond, giving total proceeds
of KSh.2,000,000.interest is payable annually in arrears at a nominal annual interest rate of 6%.
Each bond is convertible at any timeup to maturity into 250 common shares.
When the bonds are issued, the prevailing market interest rate for similar debt without conversion
options is 9%. At the issue date, the market price of one common shares is KSh.3. The dividends
expected over the three year term of the bonds amount to 14c per share at the end of each year.
The risk-free annual interest rate for a three year term is 5%.
Required
What is the value of the equity component in the bond?
Solution
The liability component is valued rst, and the difference between the proceeds of the bond
issue and the fair value of the liability is assigned to the equity component. The present value of
liability the liability component is calculated using a discount rate of 9%, the market interest rate
for similar bonds having no conversion rights, as shown.
KSh.
Present value of the principal: KSh.2,000,000 payable at the end of three years
(KSh.2m x 1 )*
1,544,367
(1.09)3
103
Present value of the interest: KSh.120,000 payable annually in arrears for three years.
(KSh.120,000 x (1-1/(1.09)3)/0.09*
303,755
Total liability component

1,848,122
Equity component (balancing gure)
151,878
Proceeds of the bond issue
2,000,000
Treasury shares
If an entity reacquires its own equity instruments, those instruments (treasury shares) shall
be deducted from equity. No gain or loss shall be recognised in prot or loss on the purchase,
sale, issue or cancellation of an entitys own equity instruments. Consideration paid or received
shall be recognised directly in equity.
Interest, dividends, losses and gains

As well as looking at balance sheet presentation, IAS 32 considers how nancial instruments
affect the income statement (and movements in equity). The treatment varies according to
whether interest, dividends, losses or gains relate to a nancial liability or an equity instrument.
-
Interest, dividends, losses and gains relating to a nancial instrument (or component
part) classied as a nancial liability should be recognised as income or expense in
prot or loss.
Distributions to holders of a nancial instrument classied as an equity instrument

should be debited directly to equity by the issuer.
Transaction costs of an equity transaction shall be accounted for as a deduction

from equity. (unless they are directly attributable to the acquisition of a business, in
which case they are accounted for under IFRS 3).
S T U D Y
The split between the liability and equity components remains the same throughout the term of
the instrument, even if there are changes in the likelihood of the option being exercised. This
is because it is not always possible to predict how a holder will behave. The issuer continues to
have an obligation to make future payments until conversion, maturity of the instrument or some
other relevant transaction takes place.
T E X T
*These gures can be obtained from discount and annuity tables.
104
You should look at the requirements of IAS 1 presentation of nancial statements for further
details of disclosure, and IAS 12 income taxes for disclosure of tax effects.
Offsetting a nancial asset and a nancial liability

A nancial asset and nancial liability should only be offset, with the net amount reported in the
balance sheet, when an entity:
a)
Has a legally enforceable right of set off, and
b)
Intends to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability
simultaneously, i.e. at the same moment.
This will reect the expected future cash ows of the entity in these specic circumstances. In
all other cases, nancial assets and nancial liabilities are presented separately.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Section summary
a)
Financial instruments must be classied as liabilities or equity
b)
The substance of the nancial instrument is more important than its legal form
c)
The critical feature of a nancial liability is the contractual obligation to deliver cash
or another nancial instrument.
d)
Compound instruments are split into equity and liability parts and presented
accordingly
e)
Interest, dividends, losses and gains are treated according to whether they relate to
a nancial asset or a nancial liability.
DISCLOSURE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

(SUPERSEDED BY IFRS 7)
One of the main purposes of IAS 32 is to provide full and useful disclosures relating to nancial
instruments.
The purpose of the disclosures required by this standard is to provide information to enhance
understanding of the signicant of nancial instruments to an entitys nancial position,
performance and cash ows and assist in assessing the amounts, timing and certainly of future
cash ows associated with those instruments.(IAS 32)
105
As well as specic monetary disclosures, narrative commentary by issuers is encouraged by

the standard. This will enable users to understand managements attitude to risk, whatever the
current transactions involving nancial instruments are at the period end.
Different aspects of risk

In undertaking transactions in nancial instruments, an entity may assume or transfer to another
party one or more of different types of nancial risk as dened below. The disclosures required
by the standard show the extent to which an entity is exposed to these different types of risk,
relating to both recognised and unrecognised nancial instruments.
Key terms
Currency risk is the risk that the value of a nancial instrument will uctuate due
to changes in foreign exchange rates.
b)
Interest rate risk is the risk that the value of a nancial instrument will uctuate
due to changes in market interest rates.
c)
Price risk is the risk that the value of a nancial instrument will uctuate as a
result of changes in market prices whether those changes are caused by factors
specic to the individual instrument or its issuer or factors affecting all securities
traded in the market.
The term market risk embodies not only the potential for loss but also the potential
for gain.
Credit risk. The risk that one party to a nancial instrument will fail to discharge an
obligation and cause the other party to incur a nancial loss.
Liquid risk (or funding risk). The risk that an entity will encounter difculty in raising
funds to meet commitments associated with nancial instruments. Liquidity risk may
result from an inability to sell a nancial asset quickly at close to its fair value.
Cash ow interest rate risk. The risk that future cash ows of a nancial instrument
will uctuate because of changes in market interest rates. In the case of a oating
rate debt instrument, for example, such uctuations result in a change in the effective
interest rate of the nancial instrument, usually without a corresponding change in its
fair value.
(IAS 32)
The standard does not prescribe the format or location for disclosure of information. A combination
of narrative descriptions and specic quantied data should be given, as appropriate.
S T U D Y
a)
T E X T
Market risk. There are three types of market risk: current risk, interest rate risk and
price risk.
106
The level of detail required is a matter of judgment. Where a large number of very similar
nancial instrument transactions are undertaken, these may be grouped together. Conversely, a
single signicant transaction may require full disclosure.
Classes of instruments will be grouped together by management in a manner appropriate to
the information to be disclosed.
Risk management
An entity shall describe its nancial risk management objective and policies, including its
policy for hedging each main type of forecast transaction for which hedge accounting is used.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The following information should be disclosed separately for each type of designed hedge
(these are described later in this chapter): a description of the hedge; a description of the
nancial instruments designated as hedging instruments and their fair values at the balance
sheet date; the nature of the risks being hedged; and for cash ow hedges, the periods in which
the cash ows are expected to occur and when they are expected to enter into the determination
of prot or loss.
The following information should be disclosed where a gain or loss on a hedging instrument
has been recognised directly in equity: the amount recognised during the period; and the
amount transferred from equity to prot or loss during the period.
Terms, conditions and accounting policies

The following information should be disclosed for each class of nancial asset, nancial liability
and equity instrument, both recognised and unrecognised.
a)
Information about the extent and nature of the nancial instruments, including
signicant terms and conditions that may affect the amount, timing and certainty of
future cash ows.
b)
Accounting policies and methods adopted, including the criteria for recognition and
the basis of measurement applied.
Interest rate risk

The following information should be disclosed for each class of nancial asset and nancial
liability, both recognised and unrecognised, about an entitys exposure to interest rate risk.
a)
Contractual repricing or maturity dates, whichever are earlier
b)
Effective interest rates, where applicable

In other words, this information shows what interest rate is in force at the moment
and how long it is likely to be before these changes, allowing a full appreciation of
interest rate risk.
107
Credit risk
The following should be disclosed by an entity for each class of nancial asset, both recognised
and unrecognised, about its exposure to credit risk.
a)
The amount that best represents its maximum credit risk exposure at the balance
sheet date, without taking account of the fair value of any collateral, in the event other
parties fail to perform their obligations under nancial instruments.
b)
Signicant concentrations of credit risk
This information allows users of the nancial statements to assess the extent to which failures
by counterparties to discharge their obligations could reduce future cash inows from nancial
assets on hand at the balance sheet date. However, an assessment of the probability of such
losses occurring (which would be recognised in the income statement) is not required.
Fair value information is very important as it is widely used for business purposes in determining an
entitys overall nancial position and in making decisions about individual nancial instruments.
It reects the judgment of the market as to the present value of expected future cash ows
related to the instrument. It permits comparisons of nancial instruments having substantially
the same economic characteristics and it also provides a basis for assessing managements
stewardship by indicating the effects of its decisions to buy, sell or hold nancial assets.
Where investments in unquoted equity instruments are measured at cost under IAS 39 because
their fair value cannot be measured reliably, that fact should be stated together with a description
of the nancial instruments: their carrying amount, an explanation of why fair value cannot be
measured reliably and, if possible, the range of estimates within which value is highly likely to
lie.
In addition, the following information should be disclosed.

a)
For each signicant class of instruments, the methods and signicant assumptions
applied in determining fair value
b)
Whether fair values are determined directly by reference to published price quotations
in an active market or are estimated using a valuation technique
c)
The total amount of the change in fair value estimated using a valuation technique that
was recognised in prot and loss during the period.
S T U D Y
Information about fair value should be disclosed for each class of nancial asset and nancial
liability, in a way that permits it to be compared with the corresponding carrying amount in
the balance sheet.
T E X T
Fair value
108
Other disclosures
IAS 32 requires various other disclosures which are intended to enhance nancial statements
users understanding of nancial instruments. These include material items of income, expense
and gains and losses resulting from nancial assets and nancial liabilities.
IAS 39 RECOGNITION OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

IAS 39 nancial instruments: Recognition and measurement establishes principles for recognising
and measuring nancial assets and nancial liabilities.
Scope
a)
S T U D Y
T E X T
IAS 39 applies to all entities and all types of nancial instruments except those specically
excluded, as listed below.
Investments in subsidiaries, associates, and joint ventures covered by IASs 27, 28
and 31, unless:
i.
These investments are held exclusively with a view to their subsequent disposal in
the near future; or
ii.
They are subsidiaries excluded from consolidation.
b)
Leases covered in IAS 17
c)
Employee benet plans covered in IAS 19
d)
Insurance contracts
e)
Equity instruments issued by the entity e.g options and warrants#
f)
Financial guarantee contracts
g)
Contracts for contingent consideration in a business combination, covered in IAS

22
h)
Contracts requiring payment based on climatic, geological or other physical

variables
i)
Loan commitments that cannot be settled net in cash or another nancial instrument
j)
Financial instruments, contracts and obligations under share-based payment

transactions covered in IFRS 2
109
Initial recognition
Financial instruments should be recognised in the balance sheet when the entity becomes a
party to the contractual provisions of the instrument.
Point to note: an important consequence of this is that all derivatives should be on the balance
sheet.
Notice that this is different from the recognition criteria in the framework and in most other
standards. Items are normally recognised when there is a probable inow or outow of resources
and the item has a cost or value that can be measured reliably.
>>> Example: Initial recognition

An entity has entered into two separate contracts.
b)
A forward contract to buy a specic quantity of iron at a specied date
Contract (a) is a normal trading contract. The entity does not recognise a liability for the iron
until the goods have actually been delivered. (Note that this contract is not a nancial instrument
because it involves a physical asset, rather than a nancial asset).
T E X T
A rm commitment (an order) to buy a specic quantity of iron
Contract (b) is a nancial instrument. Under IAS 39, the entity recognises a nancial liability
(an obligation to deliver cash) on the commitment date, rather than waiting for the closing date
in which the exchange takes place.
S T U D Y
a)
Note that planned future transactions, no matter how likely, are not assets and liabilities of an
entity the entity has not yet become a party to the contract.
Transition and initial recognition

In December 2004 the IASB issued an amendment to IAS 39 Financial Instruments: recognition
and measurement introducing an additional transitional relief that applies on adoption of one
aspect of the revised version of this standard issued in December 2003. Under the standard,
the fair value of a nancial instrument at the date of its acquisition is taken to be the transaction
price unless a different value is available based on observable market prices so in absence of
such prices, no immediate prot (day one prot) can arise. The new amendment means that
no restatement of earlier transactions is required on rst applying this prohibition on recognising
day one prots; the date from which transactions are restated can be either 1 January 2004, or
25 October 2002 (the effective date of similar requirements in US GAAP, thus allowing entities
who also report under US GAAP to adopt the new requirements consistently).
11 0
Derecognition
Derecognition is the removal of a previously recognised nancial instrument from an entitys
balance sheet.
An entity should derecognise a nancial asset when:
a)
The contractual rights to the cash ows from the nancial asset expire; or
b)
It transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the nancial
asset to another party.
Question
S T U D Y
T E X T
Can you think of an example of a situation in which:
An entity has transferred substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership,
An entity has retained substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership,
Answer
IAS 39 includes the following examples:
a)
i) an unconditional sale of a nancial asset

ii) a sale of a nancial asset together with an option to repurchase the nancial asset
at its fair value at the time of repurchase.
b)
i)
a sale and repurchase transaction where the repurchase price is a xed price or
the sale price plus a lenders return
ii) a sale of a nancial asset together with a total return swap that transfers the
market risk exposure back to the entity
The principle here is that of substance over form.
An entity should derecognise a nancial liability when it is extinguished i.e. when the
obligation specied in the contract is discharged or cancelled or expires.
It is possible for only part of a nancial asset or liability to be derecognised. This is allowed if
the part comprises:
a)
only specically identied cash ows; or
b)
only a fully proportionate (pro rata) share of the total cash ows
111
for example, if an entity holds a bond it has the right to two separate sets of cash inows: those
relating to the principal and those relating to the interest. It could sell the right to receive the
interest to another party while retaining the right to receive the principal.
On derecognition, the amount to be included in net prot or loss for the period is calculated as
follows:
Formula to learn
KSh.
KSh.
Any cumulative gain or loss reported in equity
X
(X)
Difference to net prot/loss
Where only part of a nancial asset is derecognised, the carrying amount of the asset should be
allocated between the parts retained and the part transferred based on their relative fair values
on the date of transfer. A gain or loss should be recognised based on the proceeds for the portion
transferred.
Section summary
a)
All nancial assets and liabilities should be recognised on the balance sheet,
including derivatives.
b)
Financial assets should be derecognised when the rights to the cash ows from the
asset expire or where substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are
transferred to another party.
c)
Financial liabilities should be derecognised when they are extinguished.
S T U D Y
Less: proceeds received/paid
T E X T
Carrying amount of asset/liability (or the portion of asset/liability) transferred
11 2
IAS 39 MEASUREMENTS OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Initial measurement
Financial instruments are initially measured at the fair value of the consideration given or
received (i.e. cost) plus (in most cases) transaction costs that are directly attributable to the
acquisition or issue of the nancial instrument.
The exception to this rule is where a nancial instrument is designated as at fair value through
prot or loss (this term is explained below). In this case, transaction costs are not added to
fair value at initial recognition.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The fair value of the consideration is normally the transaction price or market prices. If market
prices are not reliable, the fair value may be estimated using a valuation technique (for example,
by discounting cash ows).
Subsequent measurement
For the purposes of measuring a nancial asset held subsequent to initial recognition, IAS 39
classies nancial assets into four categories dened here.
11 3
A nancial asset or liability at fair value through prot or loss meets either of the following
conditions:
a)
It is classied as held for trading. A nancial instrument is classied as held for trading if
it is:
Acquired or incurred principally for the purpose of selling or repurchasing it in the near
term.
Part of a portfolio of identied nancial instruments that are managed together and for
which there is evidence of a recent actual pattern of short-term prot-taking.
A derivative (unless it is a designated and effective hedging instrument).
a.
b.
c.
b)
Upon initial recognition it is designated by the entity as at fair value through prot or loss.
Any nancial instrument may be so designated when it is initially recognised except for
investments in equity instruments that do not have a quoted market price in an active
market and whose fair value cannot be reliably measured.
Those that the entity upon initial recognition designates as at fair value through prot or
loss.
Those that the entity designates as available for sale
Those that meet the denition of loans and receivables
b)
c)
Key terms
Loans and receivables are non-derivative nancial assets with xed or determinable
payments that are not quoted in an active market, other than:
a)
Those that the entity intends to sell immediately or in the near term, which should be
classied as held for trading and those that the entity upon initial recognition designates
as at far value through prot or loss.
Those that the entity upon initial recognition designates as available for-sale
Those for which the holder may not recover substantially all of the initial investment, other
than because of credit deterioration, which shall be classied as available for sale.
b)
c)
An interest acquired in a pool of assets that are not loans or receivables (for example, an
interest in a mutual fund or a similar fund) is not a loan or a receivable.
Available-for-sale-nancial assets are those nancial assets that are not:
1)
2)
3)
Loans and receivables originated by the entity

Held-to-maturity investments
Financial assets at fair value through prot or loss
(IAS 39)
After initial recognition, all nancial assets should be measured to fair value, without any
deduction for transaction costs that may be incurred on sale of other disposal, except for:
1.
Loans and receivables
S T U D Y
a)
T E X T
Held to-maturity investments are non-derivative nancial assets with xed or determinable
payments and xed maturity that an entity has the positive intent and ability to hold to maturity
other than:
11 4
2.
Held to maturity investments
3.
Investment in equity instruments that do not have a quoted market price in an active
market and whose fair value cannot be reliable measured and derivatives that is
linked to and must be settled by delivery of such unquoted equity instruments.
Loans and receivables and held to maturity investments should be measured at amortised
cost using the effective interest method.
Key term
S T U D Y
T E X T
Amortised cost of a nancial asset or nancial liability is the amount at which the nancial
asset or liability is measured at initial recognition minus principal repayments, plus or minus
the cumulative amortisation of any difference between that initial amount and the maturity
amount, and minus any write-down (directly or through the use of an allowance account) for
impairment or uncollectability.
The effective interest method is a method of calculating the amortised cost of a nancial
instrument and of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the relevant
period.
The effective interest method is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash
payments or receipts through the expected life of the nancial instrument. (IAS 39)
>>> Example: Amortised cost

On 1 January 20 x 1 Biashara Co purchases a debt instrument for its value of KSh.1,000. The
debt instrument is due to mature on 31 December 20 x 5. The instrument has a principal amount
of KSh.1,250 and the instrument carries xed interest at 4.72% that is paid annually.
How should Biashara Co. account for the debt instrument over its ve year term?
Solution
Biashara Co will receive interest of KSh.59 (1,250 x 4.72%) each year and KSh.1,250 when the
instrument matures.
Biashara must allocate the discount of KSh.250 and the interest receivable over the ve year
term at a constant rate on the carrying amount of the debt. To do this, it must apply the effective
interest rate of 10%.
11 5
The following table shows the allocation over the years:

income statement
interest received
Amortised cost at
Year
Beginning of year
KSh.
20 x 1
1,000
interest income for

during year (@10%)
(cash ow)
amortised cost
at end of year
KSh.
KSh.
KSh.
100
(59)
1,041
20 x 2
1,041
104
(59)
1,086
20 x 3
1,086
109
(59)
1,136
20 x 4
1,136
113
1,190
20 x 5
1,190
119
(59)
(1,250 +
59)
Classication
There is a certain amount of exibility in that any nancial instrument can be designated at fair
value through prot or loss. However, this is a once and for all choice and has to be made
on initial recognition. Once a nancial instrument has been classied in this way it cannot be
reclassied, even if it would otherwise be possible to measure it at cost or amortised cost.
In contrast, it is quite difcult for an entity not to remeasure nancial instruments to fair value.
Notice that derivates must be remeasured to fair value. This is because it would be misleading
to measure them at cost.
For a nancial instrument to be held to maturity it must meet several extremely narrow criteria.
The entity must have a positive intent and demonstrated ability to hold the investment to
maturity. These conditions are not met if:
a)
The entity intends to hold the nancial asset for an undened period
b)
The entity stands ready to sell the nancial asset in response to changes in interest
rates or risks, liquidity needs and similar factors (unless these situations could not
possibly have been reasonably anticipated).
c)
The issuer has the right to settle the nancial asset at an amount signicantly below its
amortised cost (because this right will almost certainly be exercised)
S T U D Y
Investments whose fair value cannot be reliably measured should be measured at cost.
T E X T
Each year the carrying amount of the nancial asset is increased by the interest income for the
year and reduced by the interest actually received during the year.
11 6
d)
It does not have the nancial resources available to continue to nance the investment
until maturity.
e)
It is subject to an existing legal or other constraint that could frustrate its intention to
hold the nancial asset to maturity.
In addition, an equity instruments is unlikely to meet the criteria for classication as held to
maturity.
There is a penalty for selling or reclassifying a held-to-maturity investment other than in certain
very tightly dened circumstances. If this has occurred during the current nancial year or during
the two preceding nancial years no nancial asset can be classied as held-to-maturity.
If an entity can no longer hold an investment to maturity, it is no longer appropriate to use amortised
cost and the asset must be re-measured to fair value. All remaining held-to-maturity investments
must also be re-measured to fair value and classied as available-for-sale (see above).
S T U D Y
T E X T
Subsequent measurement of nancial liabilities

After initial recognition, all nancial liabilities should be measured at amortised cost, with the
exception of nancial liabilities at fair value through prot or loss (including most derivatives).
These should be measured at fair value, but where the fair value is not capable of reliable
measurement, they should be measured at cost.
Question: Measurement
Hatari Co issues a bond for KSh.503,778 on 1 January 20 x 2. No interest is payable on the
bond, but it will be held to maturity and redeemed on 31 December 20 x 4 for KSh.600,000. The
bond has not been designated as at fair value through prot or loss.
Required
Calculated the change to the income statement of Hatari Co for the year ended 31 December 20x
2 and the balance outstanding at 31 December 20 x 2.
Answer
The bond is a deep discount bond and is a nancial liability of Hatari Co. It is measured at
amortised cost. Although there is no interest as such, the difference between the initial cost of
the bond and the price at which it will be redeemed is a nance cost. This must be allocated over
the term of the bond at a constant rate on the carrying amount.
To calculate amortised cost we need to calculate the effective interest rate of the bond:
600,000 = 1.191
503,778
11 7
From tables, the interest rate is 6%.

The charge to the income statement is KSh.30,226 (503,778 x 6%)
The balance outstanding at 31 December 20 x 2 is KSh.534,004 (503,778 + 30,226)
Gains and losses

Instruments at fair value through prot or loss: gains and losses are recognised in prot or
loss (i.e. in the income statement).
Available for sale nancial assets: gains and losses are recognised directly in equity through
the statement of changes in equity. When the asset is derecognised the cumulative gain or loss
previously recognised in equity should be recognised in prot and loss.
Financial instruments carried at amortised cost: gains and losses are recognised in prot and
loss as a result of the amortisation process and when the asset is derecognised.
Financial assets and nancial assets that are hedged items: special rules apply (discussed later
in this chapter).
a)
b)
c)
Entered into a speculative interest rate option costing KSh.10,000 on 1 January 20 x 3

to borrow KSh.6,000,000 from AB bank commencing 31 March 20 x 5 for 6 months at
4%. The value of the option at 31 December 20 x 3 was KSh.15,250.
Purchased 6% debentures in FG Co on 1January 20 x 1 (their issue date) for KSh.150,000
as an investment. Ellesmere Co intends to hold the debentures until their redemption
at a premium in 5 years time. The effective rate of interest of the bond is 8.0%.
Purchased 50,000 shares in ST Co on 1 July 20 x 3 for KSh.3.50 each as an investment.
The share price on 31 December 20 x 3 was KSh.3.75.
Required
Show the accounting treatment and relevant extracts from the nancial statements for the year
ended 31 December 20 x 3, Hiza Ltd only designates nancial assets as at fair value through
prot or loss where this is unavoidable.
Solution
BALANCE SHEET EXTRACTS
KSh.
Financial assets:
15,250
Interest rate option (W1)
15,250
4% debentures in MT Co. (W2)
153,000
Shares in EG Co (W3)
187,500
S T U D Y
Hiza Ltd. entered into the following transactions during the year ended 31 December 20 x 3:
T E X T
Question: Types of investment
11 8
INCOME STATEMENT EXTRACTS

KSh.
Financial income:
Gain on interest rate option (W1)
5,250
Effective interest on 6% debentures (W2)
12,000
Workings
a)
interest rate option

This is a derivative and so it must be treated as at fair value through prot or loss
Initial measurement (at cost)
DEBIT
CREDIT
KSh.10,000
KSh.10,000
At 31.12.20 x 3 (re-measured to fair value)

DEBIT
Financial asset
KSh.5,250
CREDIT
Income statement
KSh.5,250
T E X T
S T U D Y
Financial asset
Cash
b)
Debentures
On the basis of the information provided, this can be treated as a held-to-maturity
investment.
Initial measurement (at cost)
DEBIT
CREDIT
Financial asset
Cash
KSh.150,000
KSh.150,000
At 31.12.20 x 3 (amortised cost):

DEBIT Financial asset (150,000 x 8%)
CREDIT
Finance income
KSh.12,000
KSh.12,000
DEBIT
CREDIT
KSh.9,000
KSh.9,000
Cash (150,000 x 6%)

Financial asset
Amortised cost at 31.12.20 x 3

(150,000 + 12,000 9,000)
c)
KSh.153,000
Shares
these are treated as an available for sale nancial asset (shares cannot normally be
held to maturity and they are clearly not loans or receivables).
11 9
Initial measurement (at cost):

DEBIT
CREDIT
Financial asset (50,000 x KSh.3.50)

Cash
KSh.175,000
KSh.175,000
At 31.12. 20 x 3 (re-measured to fair value)

DEBIT
CREDIT
Financial asset ((50,000 x KSh.3.75) - KSh.175,000))

Equity
KSh.12,500
KSh.12,500
Impairment and uncollectability of nancial assets

At each balance sheet date, an entity should assess whether there is any objective evidence that
a nancial asset or group of assets is impaired.
QUESTION: Impairment
IAS 39 lists the following:
Signicant nancial difculty of the issuer
A breach of contract, such as a default in interest or principal payments
The lender granting a concession to the borrowers that the lender would not otherwise
consider, for reasons relating to the borrowers nancial difculty
It becomes probable that the borrower will enter bankruptcy
The disappearance of an active market for that nancial asset because of nancial
difculties.
Where there is objective evidence of impairment, the entity should determine the amount of any
impairment loss.
Financial assets carried at amortised cost

The impairment loss is the difference between the assets carrying amount and its recoverable
amount. The assets recoverable amount is the present value of estimated future cash ows,
discounted at the nancial instruments original effective interest rate.
S T U D Y
Answer
T E X T
Give examples of indications that a nancial asset or group of assets may be impaired.
120
Financial assets carried at cost

Unquoted equity instruments are carried at cost if their fair value cannot be reliably measured.
The impairment loss is the difference between the assets carrying amount and the present
value of estimated future cash ows, discounted at the current market rate of return for a
similar nancial instrument. Such impairment losses cannot be reversed.
Available for sale nancial assets

Available for sale nancial assets are carried at fair value and gains and losses are recognised
directly in equity. Any impairment loss on an available for sale nancial asset should be removed
from equity and recognised in net prot or loss for the period even though the nancial
asset has not been derecognised.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The impairment loss is the difference between its acquisition cost (net of any principal repayment
and amortisation) and current fair value (for equity instruments) or recoverable amount (for debt
instruments), less any impairment loss on that asset previously recognised in prot or loss.
Impairment losses relating to equity instruments cannot be reversed, impairment losses relating
to debt instruments may be reversed if, in a later period, the fair value of the instrument increases
and the increase can be objectively related to an event occurring after the loss was recognised.
>>> Example: Impairment
Broadeld Co purchased 5% debentures in X co at 1 January 20 x 3 (their issue date) for
KSh.100,000. The term of the debentures was 5 years and the maturity value is KSh.130,525.
The effective rate of interest on the debentures is 10% and the company has classied them as
held-to-maturity nancial asset.
At the end of 20 x 4 x Co went into liquidation. All interest had been until the date. On 31
December 20 x 4 the liquidator of X Co announced that no further interest would be paid and only
80% of the maturity value would be repaid, on the original repayment date.
The market interest rate on similar bonds is 8% on that date.

Required
a)
What value should the debentures have been stated at just before the impairment
became apparent?
b)
At what value should the debentures be stated at 31 December 20 x 4, after the

impairment?
c)
How will the impairment be reported in the nancial statements for the year ended 31
December 20 x 4?
121
Solution
6
The debenture are classied a held to-maturity nancial asset and so they would have
been stated at amortised cost:
KSh.
Initial cost
100,000
Interest at 10%
10,000
Cash at 5%
(5,000)
At 31 December 20 x 3
105,000
Interest at 10%
10,500
Cash at 5%
(5,000)
After the impairment, the debentures are stated at their recoverable amount (using the
original effective interest rate of 10%):
80% x KSh.130,525 x 0.751 = KSh.78,419
The impairment of KSh.32,081 (KSh.110,500 - KSh.78,419) should be recorded:

Dr Income statement
Cr Financial asset
KSh.32,081
KSh.32,081
Section summary
a)
Initial recognition, nancial instruments are measured at cost.
b)
Subsequent measurement depends on how a nancial asset is classied.
c)
Financial assets at fair value through prot or loss are measured at fair value; gains
and losses are recognised in prot or loss.
d)
Available for sale assets are measured at fair value; gains and losses are taken to
equity.
e)
Loans and receivables and held to maturity investments are measured at amortised
cost; gains and losses are recognised in prot or loss.
f)
Financial liabilities are normally measured at amortised cost, unless they have been
classied as at fair value through prot and loss.
T E X T
110,500
S T U D Y
At 31 December 20 x 4
122
Hedging
IAS 39 requires hedge accounting where there is a designated hedging relationship between
a hedging instrument and a hedged item. It is prohibited otherwise.
Key term
Hedging, for accounting purposes, means designating one or more hedging instruments so
that their change in fair value is an offset, in whole or in part, by the change in fair value or
cash ows of a hedged item.
S T U D Y
T E X T
A hedged item is an asset, liability, rm commitment, or forecasted future transaction that:

a)
Exposes the entity to risk of changes in fair value or changes in future cash ows, and
that
b)
Is designated as being hedged.
A hedging instrument is a designated derivative or (in limited circumstances) another

nancial asset or liability whose fair value or cash ows are expected to offset changes in the
value or cash ows of a designated hedged item. (A non-derivative nancial asset or liability
may be designated as a hedging instrument for hedge accounting purposes only if it hedges
the risk of changes in foreign currency exchange rates).
Hedge effectiveness is the degree to which changes in the fair value or cash ows of the
hedged item attributable to a hedged risk are offset by changes in the fair value or cash ows
of the hedging instrument.
(IAS 39)
In simple terms, entities hedge to reduce their exposure to risk and uncertainty, such as changes
in prices, interest rates of foreign exchange rates. Hedge accounting recognises hedging
relationships by allowing (for example) losses on a hedged item to be offset against gains on a
hedging instrument.
Generally only assets, liabilities etc that involve external parties can be designated as hedged
items. The foreign currency risk of an intragroup monetary item (eg payable/receivable between
two subsidiaries) may qualify as a hedged item in the group nancial statements if it results in an
exposure to foreign exchange rate gains or losses that are not fully eliminated on consolidation.
This can happen (per IAS 21) when the transaction is between entities with different functional
currencies.
In addition the foreign currency risk of a highly probable group transaction may qualify as a
hedged item if it is in a currency other than the functional currency of the entity and the foreign
currency risk will affect prot or loss.
123
>>> Example: Hedging
A company owns inventories of 20,000 gallons of oil which cost KSh.400,000 on 1 December 20
x 3.
In order to hedge the uctuation in the market value of the oil the company signs a futures contact
to deliver 20,000 gallons of oil on 31 March 20 x 4 at the futures price of KSh.22 per gallon.
The market price of oil on 31 December 20 x 3 is KSh.23 per gallon and the futures price for
delivery on 31 March 20 x 4 is KSh. 24 per gallon.
Required
Explain the impact of the transactions on the nancial statements of the company:
a)
b)
Without hedge accounting

With hedge accounting
The futures contract was intended to protect the company from a fall in oil prices (which would
have reduced the prot when the oil was eventually sold). However, oil prices have actually
risen, so that the company has made a loss on the contract.
T E X T
Without hedge accounting:
S T U D Y
Solution
The futures contract is a derivative and therefore must be remeasured to fair value under IAS 39.
The loss on the futures contract is recognised in the income statement:
DEBIT
Income statement (20,000 x 24 22)
KSh.40,000
CREDIT
Financial liability
KSh.40,000
With hedge accounting

The loss on the futures contract is recognised in the income statement as before.
The inventories are revalued to fair value:
Fair value at 31 December 20 x 4 (20,000 x 23)
KSh.
460,000
Cost
(400,000)
Gain
60,000
124
The gain is also recognised in the income statement

DEBIT
Inventory
KSh.60,000
CREDIT
Income statement
KSh.60,000
The net effect on the income statement is a gain of KSh.20,000 compared with a loss of
KSh.40,000 without hedging.
The standard identies three types of hedging relationship

Key terms
Fair value hedge: a hedge of the exposure to changes in the fair value of a recognised asset
or liability, or an identied portion of such an asset or liability, that is attributable to a particular
risk and could affect prot or loss.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Cash ow hedge: a hedge of the exposure to variability in cash ows that

a)
Is attributable to a particular risk associated with a recognised asset or liability (such as

all or some future interest payments on variable rate debt) or a highly probable forecast
transaction (such as an anticipated purchase or sale), and that
b)
Could affect prot or loss.
Hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation: AS 21 denes a net investment in a

foreign operation as the amount of the reporting entitys interest in the net assets of that
operation.
(IAS 39)
The hedge in the example above is a fair value hedge (it hedges exposure to changes in the fair
value of a recognised asset: the oil).
Conditions for hedge accounting

Before a hedging relationship qualies for hedge accounting, all of the following conditions
must be met.
The hedging relationship must be designated at its inception as a hedge based on

the entitys risk management objective and strategy. The must be formal documentation
(including identication of the hedged item, the hedging instrument, the nature of
the risk that is to be hedged and how the entity will assess the hedging instruments
effectiveness in offsetting the exposure to changes in the hedged items value or cash
ows attributable to the hedged risk).
The hedge is expected to be highly effective in achieving offsetting changes in fair value
125
or cash ows attributable to the hedged risk. (Note: the hedge need not necessarily be
fully effective).
For cash ow hedges, a forecast transaction that is the subject of the hedge must be
highly probable and must present an exposure to variations in cash ows that could
ultimately affect prot and loss.
The effectiveness of the hedge can be measured reliably.
The hedge is assessed on an ongoing basis (annually) and has been effective during
the reporting period.
Accounting treatment
The gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk should adjust the carrying
amount of the hedged item and be recognised in prot or loss.
Cash ow hedges
The portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument that is determined to be an effective
hedge shall be recognised directly in equity through the statement of changes in equity.
The ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instruments should be recognised
in prot or loss.
When a hedging transaction results in the recognition of an asset or liability, changes in the value
of the hedging instrument recognised in equity either:
Are adjusted against the carrying of the asset or liability, or
Affect the income statement at the same time as the hedged item (for example, through
depreciation or sale).
Hedges of a net investment in a foreign operation
The effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised directly
in equity through the statement of changes in equity.
S T U D Y
The gain or loss resulting from re-measuring the hedging instrument at fair value is recognised
in prot or loss.
T E X T
Fair value hedges
126
The ineffective portion is recognised in prot and loss.
On disposal of the foreign operation, gains and losses on the hedging instrument that have been
taken to equity are recycled and recognised in prot or loss.
>>> Example: Cash ow hedge
Alpha Co signs a contract on 1 November 20 x 1 to purchase an asset on 1 November 20 x 2

for 60,000,000. Bets reports in US $ and hedges this transactions by entering into a forward
contract to by 60,000,000 on 1 November 20 x 2 at US$1: 1.5.
Spot and forward exchange rates at the following dates are:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Spot
Forward (for delivery on 1.11.x 2)
1.11 x 1
US$1: 1.45
US$1:1.5
31.12. x1
US$1: 1.20
US$1:1.24
1.11. X 2
US$1: 1.0
US$1:1.0 (actual)
Required
Show the double entries relating to these transactions at 1 November 20 x 1, 31 December 20 x

1 and 1 November 20 x 2.
Solution
Entries at 1 November 20 x 1
The value of the forward contract at inception is zero so no entries recorded (other than any
transaction costs), but risk disclosures will be made.
The contractual commitment to buy the asset would be disclosed if material (IAS 16).
Entries at 31 December 20 x 1
Gain on forward contract:

$
Value of contract at 31.12. x 1 (60,000,000/1.24)
Value of contract at 1.11.x 1 (60,000,000/1.5)
Gain on contract
48,387,097
40,000,000
8,387,097
127
Compare to movement in value of asset (unrecognised):

Increase in $cost of asset
(60,000,000/1.20 - 60,000,000/1.45)
$8,620,690
As this is higher, the hedge is deemed fully effective at this point:

DEBIT
CREDIT
Financial asset (forward a/c)

Equity
$8,387,097
$8,387,097
Entries at 1 November 20 x 2
Value of contract at 1.11.x2 (60,000,000/1.0)
$
60,000,000
Value of contract at 31.12.x1 (60,000,000/1.24)
48,387,097
Gain on contract
11,612,903
S T U D Y
Compare to movement in value of asset (unrecognised):
Increase in $cost of asset

(60,000,000/1.0 - 60,000,000/1.2
Therefore, the hedge is not fully effective during this period, but is still highly effective (and hence
hedge accounting can be used):
$10,000/ $11,612,903 = 86% which is within the 80% - 125% bandings

DEBIT Financial asset (forward a/c)
CREDIT Equity
CREDIT Income statement
$11,612,903
$10,000,000
$1,612,903
Purchase of asset at market price

DEBIT asset (60,000,000/1.0)
CREDIT Cash
$60,000,000
$60,000,000
Settlement of forward contract

DEBIT Cash
CREDIT nancial asset (forward a/c)
T E X T
Additional gain on forward contract
$20,000,000
$20,000,000
128
Realisation of gain on hedging instrument

The cumulative gain of $18,387,097 recognised in equity:
(i)
Is transferred to the income statements as the asset is used, i.e. over the assets useful
life: or
(ii)
Adjusts the initial cost of the asset (reducing future depreciation).
Section Summary
Hedge accounting is permitted in certain circumstances, provided the hedging

relationship is clearly dened, measurable and actually effective.
There are three types of hedge; fair value hedge; cash ow hedge; hedge of a net
investment in a foreign operation.
The accounting treatment of a hedge depends on its type.
T E X T
Hedge accounting means designating one or more instruments so that their change in
fair value is offset by the change in fair value or cash ows of another item.
Please refer to the appendix in IAS 39 for further illustrations on nancial instruments.
S T U D Y
IFRS 7 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS: DISCLOSURES

Overview of IFRS 7
Adds certain new disclosures about nancial instruments to those currently required by
IAS 32;
Replaces the disclosures now required by IAS 30; and
Puts all of those nancial instruments disclosures together in a new standard on

Financial Instruments: Disclosures. The remaining parts of IAS 32 deal only with
nancial instruments presentation matters.
Disclosure Requirements of IFRS 7:
An entity must group its nancial instruments into classes of similar instruments and,
when disclosures are required, make disclosures by class.
129
The two main categories of disclosures required by IFRS 7 are:

1.
Information about the signicance of nancial instruments.
2.
Information about the nature and extent of risks arising from nancial insturments.
Information about the signicance of nancial instruments

Balance Sheet
o
o
o
o
o
o
Financial assets measured at fair value through prot and loss, showing
separately those held for trading and those designated at initial recognition.
Held-to-maturity investments.
Loans and receivables.
Available-for-sale assets.
Financial liabilities at fair value through prot and loss, showing separately those
held for trading and those designated at initial recognition.
Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost.
Special disclosures about nancial assets and nancial liabilities designated to be

measured at fair value through prot and loss, including disclosures about credit risk
and market risk and changes in fair values
Reclassications of nancial instruments from fair value to amortised cost or vice

versa
Disclosures about derecognitions, including transfers of nancial assets for which

derecogntion accounting is not permitted by IAS 39
Information about nancial assets pledged as collateral and about nancial or nonnancial assets held as collatersl
Reconciliation of the allowance account for credit losses (bad debts).
Information about
derivatives.
Breaches of terms of loan agreements.
compound
nancial
instruments
with
multiple
embedded
T E X T
Disclosure of the signicance of nancial instruments for an entitys nancial position

and performance. This includes disclosures for each of the following categories:
S T U D Y
130
S T U D Y
T E X T
Income Statement and Equity
Items of income, expense, gains, and losses, with separate disclosure of gains and
losses from:
o Financial assets measured at fair value through prot and loss, showing
o Held-to-maturity investments.
o Loans and receivables.
o Available-for-sale assets.
o Financial liabilities measured at fair value through prot and loss, showing
o Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost.
Interest income and interest expense for those nancial instruments that are not
measured at fair value through prot and loss
Fee income and expense
Amount of impairment losses on nancial assets
Interest income on impaired nancial assets
Other Disclosures
Accounting policies for nancial instruments
Information about hedge accounting, including:

o Description of each hedge, hedging instrument, and fair values of those
instruments, and nature of risks being hedged.
o For cash ow hedges, the periods in which the cash ows are expected to occur,
when they are expected to enter into the determination of prot or loss, and a
description of any forecast transaction for which hedge accounting had previously
been used but which is no longer expected to occur.
o If a gain or loss on a hedging instrument in a cash ow hedge has been
recognised directly in equity, an entity should disclose the following:
The amount that was so recognised in equity during the period.
The amount that was removed from equity and included in prot or loss for the period.
The amount that was removed from equity during the period and included in the initial
measurement of the acquisition cost or other carrying amount of a non-nancial asset
or non- nancial liability in a hedged highly probable forecast transaction.
o
o
For fair value hedges, information about the fair value changes of the hedging
instrument and the hedged item.
Hedge ineffectiveness recognised in prot and loss (separately for cash ow
hedges and hedges of a net investment in a foreign operation).
131
Information about the fair values of each class of nancial asset and nancial liability,
along with:
o Comparable carrying amounts.
o Description of how fair value was determined.
o Detailed information if fair value cannot be reliably measured.
Note that disclosure of fair values is not required when the carrying amount is a reasonable
approximation of fair value, such as short-term trade receivables and payables, or for instruments
whose fair value cannot be measured reliably.
Nature and extent of exposure to risks arising from nancial

instruments
The qualitative disclosures describe:

o Risk exposures for each type of nancial instrument.
o Managements objectives, policies, and processes for managing those risks.
o Changes from the prior period.
Quantitative disclosures
The quantitative disclosures provide information about the extent to which the entity is
exposed to risk, based on information provided internally to the entitys key management
personnel. These disclosures include:
o Summary quantitative data about exposure to each risk at the reporting date.
o Disclosures about credit risk, liquidity risk, and market risk as further described
below.
o Concentrations of risk.
Credit Risk
Disclosures about credit risk include:

o Maximum amount of exposure (before deducting the value of collateral),
description of collateral, information about credit quality of nancial assets that are
neither past due nor impaired, and information about credit quality of nancial
assets whose terms have been renegotiated.
o For nancial assets that are past due or impaired, analytical disclosures are
required.
o Information about collateral or other credit enhancements obtained or called.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Qualitative disclosures
132
Liquidity Risk
Disclosures about liquidity risk include:

o A maturity analysis of nancial liabilities.
o Description of approach to risk management.
Market Risk
Market risk is the risk that the fair value or cash ows of a nancial instrument will
uctuate due to changes in market prices. Market risk reects interest rate risk, currency
risk, and other price risks.
Disclosures about market risk include:

o A sensitivity analysis of each type of market risk to which the entity is exposed.
o IFRS 7 provides that if an entity prepares a sensitivity analysis for management
purposes that reects interdependencies of more than one component of market
risk (for instance, interest risk and foreign currency risk combined), it may disclose
that analysis instead of a separate sensitivity analysis for each type of market risk.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Application Guidance
An appendix of mandatory application guidance is part of the standard.
There is also an appendix of non-mandatory implementation guidance that describes how an
entity might provide the disclosures required by IFRS 7.
Effective Date
IFRS 7 is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2007, with earlier
application encouraged. Early appliers are given some relief with respect to comparative prior
period disclosures.
Withdrawn and Amended Pronouncements

IFRS 7 supersedes:
IAS 30 Disclosures in the Financial Statements of Banks and Similar Financial

Institutions
The disclosure requirements of IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation and Disclosure.

However the presentation requirements of IAS 32 remain unchanged
133
CHAPTER SUMMARY
Lessee: this is a person, who under an agreement obtains from another person (the lessor) the
S T U D Y
the lessor) together with the residual value.
T E X T
reasonably certain that the lessee will exercise.
134
Equity instrument: Any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after
deducting all of its liabilities.
Currency risk: is the risk that the value of a nancial instrument will uctuate due to changes in
foreign exchange rates.
Interest rate risk: is the risk that the value of a nancial instrument will uctuate due to changes
in market interest rates.
Price risk: is the risk that the value of a nancial instrument will uctuate as a result of changes in
market prices whether those changes are caused by factors specic to the individual instrument
or its issuer or factors affecting all securities traded in the market.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Credit risk: The risk that one party to a nancial instrument will fail to discharge an obligation
and cause the other party to incur a nancial loss.
Liquid risk (or funding risk): The risk that an entity will encounter difculty in raising funds to
meet commitments associated with nancial instruments.
Cash ow interest rate risk: The risk that future cash ows of a nancial instrument will uctuate
because of changes in market interest rates.
135
What is a non-cancelable lease?
2.
Distinguish between a nancial asset and nancial liability.
3.
Give examples of indications that a nancial asset or group of assets may be

impaired.
S T U D Y
1.
T E X T
CHAPTER QUIZ
136

1.
Non-cancelable lease is a lease that is cancelable only:
Upon the occurrence of some remote contingency

With the permission of the lessor
If the lessee enters into a new lease for the same or any equivalent asset with the same
lessor, or
Upon payment by the lessee of an additional amount such that at inception continuation
of lease is reasonably certain
2.
a) Financial asset is any asset that is:
S T U D Y
T E X T
(i) cash;
(ii) an equity instrument of another entity;
(iii) a contractual right:
to receive cash or another nancial asset from another entity; or

that are potentially favourable to the entity; or
a contract that will or may be settled in the entitys own equity instruments and is:
a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to receive a variable number
of the entitys own equity instruments; or
a derivative that will or may be settled other than by the exchange of a xed amount of
cash or another nancial asset for a xed number of the entitys own equity instruments.
For this purpose the entitys own equity instruments do not include instruments that
are themselves contracts for the future receipt or delivery of the entitys own equity
instruments.
b)
Financial liability is any liability that is:
(i)
a contractual obligation:
to deliver cash or another nancial asset to another entity; or
that are potentially unfavourable to the entity; or
o
o
(iii) a contract that will or may be settled in the entitys own equity instruments
3.
IAS 39 lists the following:
Signicant nancial difculty of the issuer

A breach of contract, such as a default in interest or principal payments
The lender granting a concession to the borrowers that the lender would not otherwise
consider, for reasons relating to the borrowers nancial difculty
It becomes probable that the borrower will enter bankruptcy
The disappearance of an active market for that nancial asset because of nancial
difculties.
137
PAST PAPER ANALYSIS

Leases were tested in the following examinations:
12/07
12/04
Impairment of Assets was tested in the following examinations:

12/04
05/02
EXAM QUESTIONS
QUESTION ONE
(a)
In the context of IAS 17 (Leases), briey explain the meaning of the following terms:
(i) Finance lease.
(ii) Guaranteed residual value.
(iii) Contingent rent.
(b)
(2 marks)
(2 marks)
(2 marks)
Silversands Manufacturing Company Ltd. has entered into an agreement with a nance
company, to lease a machine for a four year period. Under the terms of the agreement,
the machine is to be made available to Silversands Manufacturing Company Ltd. on 1
January 2005, when an immediate payment of Sh. 2,550,000 will be made, followed by
seven semi-annual payments of an equivalent amount.
The fair market price of the machine on 1 January 2005 is expected to be Sh. 16,320,000.
The estimated life of this type of machine is four years. The implicit rate of interest in
the transaction is 6.94% payable semi-annually and the corporate tax rate is 30%.
Silversands Manufacturing Company Ltd. has a policy of depreciating machines of this
type over a four year period on the straight line basis.
Assume the lease is to be capitalised.
S T U D Y
T E X T
12/00
138
Required:
(i)
Show how the above transactions will be reected in the prot and loss account of
Silversands Manufacturing Company Ltd. for each of the four years ending 31 December
2005, 2006, 2007 and 2008.
(8 marks)
(ii)
Balance sheet extracts of Silversands Manufacturing Company Ltd. as at 31 December

2005 and 2006.
(6 marks)
(use the actuarial method to allocate the interest charge)
(Total: 20 marks)
(CPA DEC 2004)
QUESTION TWO (ACCA)
S T U D Y
T E X T
(a)
IAS 36 Impairment of assets was issued in June 1998 and subsequently amended in
March 2004. Its main objective is to prescribe the procedures that should ensure that
an entitys assets are included in its balance sheet at no more than their recoverable
amounts. Where an asset is carried at an amount in excess of its recoverable amount,
it is said to be impaired and IAS 36 requires an impairment loss to be recognised.
Required:
(i) Dene an impairment loss explaining the relevance of fair value less costs
to sell and value in use; and state how frequently assets should be tested for
(6 marks)
impairment;
Note: your answer should NOT describe the possible indicators of impairment.
(ii)
Explain how an impairment loss is accounted for after it has been calculated.
(5 marks)
(b) The assistant nancial controller of the Wilderness group, a public listed company, has
identied the matters below which she believes may indicate impairment to one or more
assets:
(i)
Wilderness owns and operates an item of plant that cost Ksh.640,000 and had
accumulated depreciation of Ksh.400,000 at 1 October 2004. It is being depreciated
at 121/2% on cost. On 1 April 2005 (exactly half way through the year) the plant was
damaged when a factory vehicle collided into it. Due to the unavailability of replacement
parts, it is not possible to repair the plant, but it still operates, albeit at a reduced capacity.
Also it is expected that as a result of the damage the remaining life of the plant from the
date of the damage will be only two years. Based on its reduced capacity, the estimated
present value of the plant in use is Ksh.150,000. The plant has a current disposal value
of Ksh.20,000 (which will be nil in two years time), but Wilderness has been offered
a trade-in value of Ksh.180,000 against a replacement machine which has a cost of
Ksh.1 million (there would be no disposal costs for the replaced plant). Wilderness is
reluctant to replace the plant as it is worried about the long-term demand for the product
produced by the plant. The trade-in value is only available if the plant is replaced.
139
Required:
(i)
Prepare extracts from the balance sheet and income statement of Wilderness in
respect of the plant for the year ended 30 September 2005. Your answer should
(7 marks)
explain how you arrived at your gures.
(ii)
On 1 April 2004 Wilderness acquired 100% of the share capital of Mossel, whose only
activity is the extraction and sale of spa water. Mossel had been protable since its
acquisition, but bad publicity resulting from several consumers becoming ill due to a
contamination of the spa water supply in April 2005 has led to unexpected losses in the
last six months. The carrying amounts of Mossels assets at 30 September 2005 are:
Ksh.000
Purifying and bottling plant

Inventories
12,000
8,000
5,000
32,000
The source of the contamination was found and it has now ceased.
The company originally sold the bottled water under the brand name of Quencher, but because
of the contamination it has rebranded its bottled water as Phoenix. After a large advertising
campaign, sales are now starting to recover and are approaching previous levels. The value of the
brand in the balance sheet is the depreciated amount of the original brand name of Quencher.
The directors have acknowledged that Ksh.15 million will have to be spent in the rst three
months of the next accounting period to upgrade the purifying and bottling plant.
Inventories contain some old Quencher bottled water at a cost of Ksh.2 million; the remaining
inventories are labelled with the new brand Phoenix. Samples of all the bottled water have been
tested by the health authority and have been passed as t to sell. The old bottled water will have
to be relabelled at a cost of Ksh.250,000, but is then expected to be sold at the normal selling
price of (normal) cost plus 50%.
Based on the estimated future cash ows, the directors have estimated that the value in use of
Mossel at 30 September 2005, calculated according to the guidance in IAS 36, is Ksh.20 million.
There is no reliable estimate of the fair value less costs to sell of Mossel.
Required:
Calculate the amounts at which the assets of Mossel should appear in the consolidated
balance sheet of Wilderness at 30 September 2005. Your answer should explain how you
arrived at your gures.
(7 marks)
T E X T
Land containing spa
7,000
S T U D Y
Brand (Quencher see below)
140
CASE STUDY
Case Study: An entity has purchased the whole of the share capital of another entity for a
purchase consideration of $20 million. The goodwill arising on the transaction was $5 million.
It was planned at the outset that the information systems would be merged in order to create
signicant savings. Additionally the entity was purchased because of its market share in a
particular jurisdiction and because of its research projects. Subsequently the cost savings on
the information systems were made. The government of the jurisdiction introduced a law that
restricted the market share to below that anticipated by the entity, and some research projects
were abandoned because of lack of funding.
The question is; what are potential indicators of the impairment of goodwill in this case?
T E X T
Therefore, these events may indicate the impairment of goodwill. Goodwill has to be
impairment tested at least annually under IFRS 3.
S T U D Y
The entity would have paid for the goodwill in anticipation of future benets arising there from.
The benet in terms of the cost savings on the information systems has arisen, but the market
share increase and the successful outcome of the research projects has not occurred.
Source: www.google.co.ke- Case Studies on Impairment of Assets
141
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
CHAPTER ONE
THREE
ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

(PART B)
S T U D Y
T E X T
142
143
CHAPTER THREE
ASSETS AND LIABILITIES (PART B)
OBJECTIVES
After this chapter, the student will know how to:
Calculate and account for Corporation Tax
Calculate and account for Deferred Tax
Determine the nature of employee benets and to account for them
Corporation Tax
Deferred Tax
The main bulk of the standard is on deferred tax as it has detailed guidelines on the approach to be
used in computing deferred tax, accounting for the deferred tax and disclosure requirements.
IAS 19 Employee benets:

This is a very difcult area because employee benet costs are inherently complex and their
accounting is both problematic and controversial.
IAS 19 (revised) Employee benets has replaced the previous IAS 19 Retirement benets costs.
Note the increased scope of the new standard, which covers all employee benet costs, except
share based payment, not only retirement benet (pension) costs. Before we look at IAS 19,
we should consider the nature of employee benet costs and why there is an accounting problem
which must be addressed by a standard.

Corporation tax is the tax payable by a company as a result of generating prots from trading.
S T U D Y
IAS 12 on Income Taxes deals with two main types of taxes;
T E X T
INTRODUCTION
144
Deferred tax is the corporation tax that is likely to be incurred on the activities of a company
during a particular period but, because of differences between the way activities are included in
the accounting prot and taxable income, will be paid in another period.
Temporary differences include differences between the fair values and the tax values of assets
and liabilities acquired and the effect of revaluing assets and liabilities acquired and the effect of
revaluing assets for accounting purposes.
Timing Differences are items reported in the accounts in periods different from those in which
they are reected in tax computations. These differences originate in one period and reverse in
one or more subsequent periods.
Employee benets are all forms of consideration given by an entity in exchange for service
rendered by employees.
T E X T
Post-employment benets are formal or informal arrangements under which an entity provides
post employment benets for one or more employees.
S T U D Y
Short-term employee benets are employee benets (other than termination benets) which
fall due wholly within twelve months after the end of the period in which the employees render
the related service.
EXAM CONTEXT
In past examinations, the examiner has tested the students knowledge on:
Corporation tax
Deferred tax
Employee benets
INDUSTRY CONTEXT
Prot making organisations calculate corporation taxes and, therefore, this chapter enables them
to know the various ways to calculate their corporation taxes and also to account for them.
Organisations learn how tocalculate deferred tax which is important in the following ways:
The gures used to calculate stock market indicators such EPS and P/E ratio require
the computation of prot-after tax.
Deferred tax is important in establishing the relationship between shareholders funds
and other sources of nance.
It also ensures compliance with the fundamental accounting concept of accruals.
It reports a tax liability which is likely to arise in the future.
It provides the post-tax prots that can be used to assess a suitable dividend
declaration.
145
3.1 CORPORATION TAX

FAST FORWARD: IAS 12 does not prescribe how this tax should be computed as this is
determined by the various tax rules and regulations of a country.
Corporation tax is the tax payable by a company as a result of generating prots from trading.
>>> Example
Assume that a company had estimated that during the year ended 2004, the corporation tax
payable was Sh 1000,000 and this amount remained unpaid as at 31 December 2004. On 30
June 2005 the company agrees with the tax authorities on the amount due and this is paid on
the same date. Meanwhile during the year ended 31 December 2005, the rm estimates that the
corporation tax payable for the year as sh. 1,200, 000. The company had made installment tax
payments for year 2005 for sh. 800,000.
Required
Compute the income tax expense and the balance sheet liability for the year 2005 assuming that
the actual tax liability for 2004 agreed with the tax authority was:
1.
2.
Sh 1,100,000
Sh.900,000
a)
There is an under provision for previous years tax because the rm had provided for
only Sh.1,100,000 while the amount agreed is Sh.1,100,000. The income tax expense
for 2005 will be given as current years estimate plus the under provision
(Sh.1, 200,000 + 100,000). = 1,300,000.
There is an over provision for previous years tax because the rm had provided for
Sh.1,100,000 while the amount agreed is only Sh.900,000. The income tax expense for
2005 will be given as current years estimate less the over provision
(Sh.1, 200,000 - 100,000). = 1,100,000
The balance sheet liability in both cases will be the current years tax less the installment
taxes for the year 2005 (1,200,000 800,000) = Sh.400,000.
b)
S T U D Y
In practice many rms use an estimate for the corporation tax for the purpose of preparing and
nalizing on the nancial statements. In the next or subsequent nancial period, when the rm
agrees with the tax authorities the actual tax payable, then there may arise an under or over
provision of previous years tax. IAS 12 requires that this under or over provision to be treated like
a change in accounting estimate as per IAS 8. This means that an under provision of previous
years tax will be added to the current years income tax expense while an over provision will be
deducted.
T E X T
Once the tax has been computed the standard gives the specic accounting treatment of the
amount. IAS 12 requires that the tax payable should be shown as a separate item in the income
statement and referred to as income tax expense. If part of the amount is unpaid by the year end
then it should be shown in the balance sheet as a current liability and referred to as current tax.
146
3.1.1 DEFERRED TAX

This section is concerned with the determination of the amount of the charge against income
in respect of an accounting period and the presentation of such an amount in the nancial
statements. We will also discuss accounting for the tax effect of revaluation of assets.
In short, we will explore the accounting principles and practices for deferred taxation.
Provisions of IAS 12 on income taxes

FAST FORWARD: IAS 12 requires that deferred tax should be provided in full for all temporary
difference using the liability method.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The standard adopts the balance sheet approach under which deferred tax is calculated on all
temporary differences, which are differences between the tax and accounting bases of assets
and liabilities.
Current and deferred tax is recognised in the income statement unless the tax arises
from a business combination that is an acquisition or a transaction or event that is
recognized in equity. The tax consequences which accompany a change in the tax
status of an enterprise or its controlling or signicant shareholder should be taken to
income, unless these consequences directly relate to changes in the measured amount
of equity.
Only those tax consequences that directly relate to changes in the measured amount
of equity in the same or different period should be charged or credited to equity and not
taken to the income statement.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities should be measured at the tax rates that are expected
to apply to the period when the asset is realised or the liability is settled, based on tax
rates (and tax laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance
sheet date. Discounting of deferred tax assets and liabilities is not permitted.
The measurement of deferred tax assets and liabilities should reect the tax
consequences that would follow from the manner in which the enterprise expects, at the
balance sheet date, to recover or settle the carrying amount of its assets and liabilities.
When a non-depreciable asset under IAS 16 (PPE) is re-valued, the deferred tax arising
from that revaluation is determined based on the tax applicable to the recovery of the
carrying amount of that asset through sale.
An enterprise should recognise a deferred tax asset for all deductible temporary
differences to the extent that it s probable that taxable prot will be available against
which the deductible temporary difference can be utilized. The same principles apply
to recognition of deferred tax assets for unused tax losses carried forward.
For presentation purposes, current tax assets and liabilities should be offset if and only
if the enterprise has a legally enforceable right to set off and intends to either settle on a
net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. An enterprise is
able to offset deferred tax assets and liabilities if and only if it is able to offset current tax
balances and the deferred balances relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation
authority.
147
Tax expense (income) must be shown separately on the face of the income statement,
with separate disclosure made of its major components and any tax expense (income)
relating to extra ordinary items.
Tax expense (income) relating to the gain or loss on discontinuance for discontinued
operations and to the prot or loss from the ordinary activities of the discontinued
operation for the period must also be disclosed.
An explanation is required of the relationship between tax expense (or income) and
accounting prot either of numerical reconciliation between the average effective tax
rate and the applicable tax rate. An explanation is required of any changes in the
applicable tax rate(s) compared to the previous period.
The aggregate amount of temporary differences for which both deferred tax assets
or liabilities have not been recognized (i.e. for unremitted re-invested earnings of
subsidiaries should be disclosed. For each type of temporary difference and for unused
tax losses and credits, disclosure is required of the amount of deferred tax assets and
liabilities recognized and the amount of deferred tax income or expense recognized.
The amount of any deferred tax asset and evidence supporting its recognition must
be disclosed when its utilization is dependent on future taxable prots in excess of
the prots arising from the reversal of existing taxable temporary differences, and the
enterprise has suffered a loss in the current or previous period in the tax jurisdiction
to which the deferred tax asset relates. Separate disclosure is also required of the
aggregate current and deferred tax relating to items that are charged or credited to
equity.
Flow-through method
Supporters of ow-through accounting also argue that it is the most transparent and intuitively
sensible way of communicating an entitys tax position. The nancial statements show the actual
tax charge for the year in the clearest possible manner, and the associated notes (which would
disclose such matters as accumulated timing differences and the items reconciling the actual tax
charge to a standard rate) would be no more detailed and possibly more intelligible than those
resulting from other possible accounting methods.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Disclosures
148
Some supporters of ow-through accounting further argue that even if, in principle timing
differences did give rise to tax liabilities, in practice such liabilities could not always be measured
reliably. The future tax consequences of current transactions depend upon complex interaction
of future events, such as the protability, investment and nancing transactions of the entity,
and changes in tax rates and laws. Only those that could be measured reliably typically very
short-term discrete timing differences should be provided for. Thus they advocate a modied
ow-through approach.
Full provision method
S T U D Y
T E X T
The full provision method is based on the view that every transaction has a tax consequence
and it is possible to make a reasonable estimate of the future tax consequences of transactions
that have occurred by the balance sheet date. Such future tax consequences cannot be avoided:
whatever happens in future, the entity will pay less or more tax as a result of the reversal of a timing
difference that exists at the balance sheet date than it would have done in the absence of that
timing difference. Deferred tax should, therefore, be provided for in full on timing differences.
Partial provision method

The partial provision method also starts from the premise that the future reversal of timing
differences gives rise to a tax asset or liability. However, rather than focusing on the individual
components of the tax computation, the partial provision method emphasizes the interaction of
those components in a single net assessment. To the extent that timing differences are expected
to continue in future (i.e. the existing timing differences being replaced by future timing differences
as they reverse), the tax is viewed as being deferred permanently.
Where, for example, xed asset expenditure attracts tax deductions before the xed assets are
depreciated, timing differences arise. The timing differences increase with time under conditions
of ination or expansion, with the result that new timing differences more than replace those that
reverse. In consequence, effective tax rates are reduced. The partial provision method allows
the lower effective tax rates to be reected in the prot and loss account, to the extent that the
reduction is not expected to reverse in future years.
The attraction of the partial provision method is that it reects an entitys ongoing effective tax
rate. It results in tax charges that reect the amount of tax that it is expected will actually be paid
and excludes amounts that are expected to be deferred permanently.
Reasons for rejecting the partial provision method

The partial provision method allowed companies to avoid creating provisions for tax that they
argued they were unlikely to pay. However, by the early 1990s, concerns were being expressed
about the method and the way in which it was being applied. It was noted in particular that:
1.
The recognition rules and anticipation of future events were subjective and inconsistent
with the principles underlying other aspects of accounting.
The partial provision method had not been regarded as appropriate for dealing with the
long-term deferred tax assets associated with provisions for post-retirement benets.
As a result, SSAP 15 had been amended in 1992 to permit such assets to be accounted
for on a full provision basis. The amendment introduced inconsistencies into SSAP
15.
3.
There were variations in the way in which SSAP 15 was applied in practice. Different
entities within the same industry and with similar prospects seemed to take quite
different views on the levels of provisions necessary. There was evidence that some
companies provided for deferred tax in full for simplicitys sake rather than because
their circumstances required it. The different approaches being taken reduced the
comparability of nancial statements.
4.
Because of its recognition rules and anticipation of future events, the partial provision
method was increasingly being rejected by standard-setters in other countries. The
US Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) had issued a standard FAS 109
Accounting for Income Taxes requiring full provision. The International Accounting
Standards Committee(IASC) had published proposals for similar requirements and
other standard setters had started to move in the same direction.
When rejecting the partial provision method, the FASB and IASC argued in particular
that:
a.
Every tax timing difference represented a real liability, since everyone would reverse
and, whatever else happened, an entity would pay more tax in future as a result of the
reversal than it would have done in the absence of the timing difference.
b.
It was only the impact of new timing differences arising in future that prevented the
total liability from reducing. It was inappropriate (and inconsistent with other areas of
accounting) to take account of future transactions when measuring an existing liability.
c.
The assessment of the liability using the partial provision method relied on management
intentions regarding future events. Standard setters were uncomfortable with this,
having already embodied in a number of other standards the principle that liabilities
should be determined on the basis of obligations rather than management decisions or
intentions.
In view of the criticisms of the partial provision method, the Board decided to review SSAP 15. In
1995 it published a Discussion Paper, Accounting for Tax. The Discussion Paper proposed that
SSAP 15 should be replaced with an FRS requiring full provision for deferred tax.
Most respondents to the Discussion Paper opposed the move to full provision at that stage,
preferring instead to retain the partial provision method. In the meantime however, IASC had
approved its standard, IAS12 (revised, 1996) Income Taxes, which required use of the full
provision method. The Board reconsidered the arguments and arrived at the view that:
Whilst it did not agree with all of the criticisms of the partial provision method expressed
internationally and could see the logic for all three methods of accounting for tax, it
shared some of the concerns regarding the subjectivity of the partial provision method
and its reliance on future events; and
T E X T
2.
149
S T U D Y
150
As more companies adopted international accounting standards, the partial provision

method would become less well understood and accepted, particularly as it was
regarded as less prudent than the internationally accepted method. Hence, the retention
of the partial provision method in the UK could damage the credibility of UK nancial
reporting.
For these reasons, the Board took the view that deferred tax was not an area where a good
case could be made for departing from principles that had been widely accepted internationally.
Following informal consultation, it developed a draft FRS, FRED 19 Deferred Tax, which
proposed requirements based more closely on a full provision method. The FRED was published
for consultation in August 1999.
The responses to FRED 19 indicated that, whilst many amongst the nancial community remained
disappointed that there had not been international acceptance of the partial provision method,
most accepted the arguments for greater harmonization with international practice and supported
the proposed move to a full provision method.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Reasons for rejecting ow-through accounting

For the reasons outlined in paragraphs 5 7 above, a number of Board members believe that
the clearest and most transparent method of communicating an entitys tax position is by owthrough accounting combined with detailed disclosures. The possibility of moving to ow-through
accounting was therefore suggested in the Boards Discussion Paper.
However, ow-through accounting would not have moved UK accounting more into line with
international practice and received little support from those responding to the Boards Discussion
Paper. Most respondents agree with the view that taxable prot was, in both form and substance,
an adjusted accounting prot and that it was possible to attribute tax effects to individual
transactions. Further, they regarded tax systems as sufciently stable to allow reasonable
estimates to be made of the deferred tax consequences of events reported up to he balance
sheet date. They added their concerns that ow-through accounting would make their results
more volatile, could sometimes understate an entitys liability to tax and that any modication to
it would require arbitrary cut-off points that could be difcult to rationalize.
In view of the lack of support from respondents and the Boards commitment to international
harmonization, Board members who would have preferred ow-through accounting accepted
that the FRS should instead require full provision for deferred tax.
3.1.2 THE NEED FOR DEFERRED TAXATION

Deferred tax is the corporation tax that is likely to be incurred on the activities of a company
151
The need for deferred taxation arises in a number of ways:

i.
The gures used to calculate stock market indicators such EPS and P/E ratio require
the computation of prot-after tax.
ii.
Deferred tax is important in establishing the relationship between shareholders funds

and other sources of nance.
iii.
It also ensures compliance with the fundamental accounting concept of accruals.
iv.
It reports a tax liability which is likely to arise in the future.
v.
It provides the post-tax prots that can be used to assess a suitable dividend
declaration.
3.1.3 THE BASIS OF DEFERRED TAXATION
(b)
Accounting prot - that is the prot reported to the shareholders. This prot is based on
accounting concepts and principles.
Tax-adjusted prot - that is the prot on which tax is assessed - taxable income (tax
loss). This prot is determined in accordance with the rules laid down in the Income
Tax Act upon which the provision for taxes payable is determined. This prot takes into
account capital allowances, stock relief, and disallowable expenditure and so on.
The reasons why these prots may differ fall into two groups of differences.
(a)
Timing Differences - that is items reported in the accounts in periods different from
those in which they are reected in tax computations. These differences originate in
one period and reverse in one or more subsequent periods.
The timing difference originates in 1983 when the interest is accrued and reversed in 1984 when
the interest is taxed (on a cash basis).
There were no interest accruals in the balance sheet at 31.12.83 and 31.12.84.
The movement on deferred tax account over the two years may be calculated as follows:
Deferred Tax Account
KSh
KSh
Bal (31.12.83) c/f
10,500 Balance (1.1.83)
10,500
P & L A/c (1984)
10,500 P & L A/c (31.9.83) (35% x 30,000)

Bal (1.1.84) b/f
10,500
10,500
10,500
10,500
S T U D Y
(a)
T E X T
From the accountants viewpoint there are two quite distinct prot gures:
152
The effect on the nancial statement is

Prot and Loss Account
KShs
Prot on ordinary activities
Tax expense
Corporation tax
Deferred tax
Prot before tax
150,500
(10,500)
Deferred tax provision
KShs
400,000
140,000
260,000
KShs
140,000
10,500
NIL
KShs
430,000
150,500
289,500
KShs 10,500
Let us have an example relating to accelerated capital allowances.
S T U D Y
T E X T
A company purchased a xed asset on 1.1.92 at a cost of KSh 400,000. The residual
value of the asset is assumed to be NIL and it is to be depreciated on a straight line basis
over 4 years. The company claims 100% rst year allowance and the corporation tax
rate for each of the four years is assumed to be 35%. Prot after charging depreciation
is KSh 2,000,000 in each of the four years and there are no other timing differences.
No capital expenditure takes place in 1993, 1994 or 1995.
Assuming deferred tax is to be provided in full, the calculations are as follows.
Year
Prot before
deprecation
and taxes
Depreciation
Capital
Allowance
Taxable
Accounting
Income
(Adjusted)
Taxation
Taxable
Income
KSH
KSH
KSH
KSH
1992
2,100,000
100,000
(400,000)
2,000,000
2,000,000
400,000 +
100,000 =
1,700,000
1993
2,100,000
100,000
2,000,000
2,000,000 +
100,000
=
2,100,000
1994
2,100,000
100,000
2,000,000
2,000,000 +
100,000
=
2,100,000
1995
2,100,000
100,000
2,000,000
2,000,000 +
100,000
=
2,100,000
153
The timing differences can be analysed as follows:
1992
2,000,000
Taxation
Taxable
Income
1,700,000
1993
2,000,000
1994
1995
Year
AI Taxable
Income
Timing Difference
Deferred Tax @ 35% x Timing

Differece
300,000
105,000
2,100,000
(100,000)
(35,000)
2,000,000
2,100,000
(100,000)
(35,000)
2,000,000
2,100,000
(100,000)
(35,000)
AI = Accounting Income
Note that the timing difference originated in 1992 (300,000) and reversed through 1993 - 1995.
1993
(KSh)
1994
(KSh)
1995
(KSh)
2,000,000
2,000,000
2,000,000
2,000,000
595,000
105,000
1,300,000
735,000
(35,000)
1,300,000
735,000
(35,000)
1,300,000
735,000
(35,000)
1,300,000
The journal entries to record the income tax expense and related deferred tax liability for 1992
and 1993 are:
1992
Dr. Income tax Expense (2,000,000 x 35%)
700,000
Cr. Income tax payable (1,700,000 x 35%)
595,000
Cr. Deferred tax liability
105,000
1993
Dr. Income tax liability
700,000
35,000
735,000
1994
Dr. Income tax Expense
(2,000,000 x 35%)
Dr. Deferred tax liability

700,000
35,000
735,000
S T U D Y
Accounting Prot
Income Tax Expense
Corporation tax payable
Deferred Tax
Prot after tax
1992
(KSh)
T E X T
The extracts from nancial statements (P & L) will be:
154
1995
Dr. Deferred tax liability
700,000
35,000
735,000
3.1.4 METHODS OF ACCOUNTING FOR TIMING DIFFERENCES

There is some controversy whether deferred tax should be included in the accounts or just be
ignored. Two schools of thought emerged - leading to two broad methods of accounting for timing
differences.
These are:
Taxes payable method
(b)
Deferred Tax Accounting method
S T U D Y
T E X T
(a)
Taxes Payable Method
It ignores deferred tax and thus the income tax expense is normally equal to the provision
for tax payable. The extent and potential tax effect of timing differences are sometimes
disclosed in notes to the nancial statements.
Deferred Tax Accounting Method
Under this method, income tax is considered to be an expense incurred by the enterprise
in earning income and is accrued in the same periods as the revenue and expenses to
which it relates. The resulting tax effects of timing differences are included in the tax
charge in the income statement and in the deferred tax balances in the balance sheet.
There are two approaches to the calculation of deferred tax:

Full deferral
Partial deferral
These approaches are concerned with whether, and to what extent, deferred tax on
timing differences needs to be provided within the accounts, as opposed to simply
being referred to in a memorandum note.
Full deferral requires that full tax effects of all timing differences are recognised as they
arise. The approach is arithmetically accurate but can lead to the build up of large,
meaningless provisions appearing on the balance sheet.
Partial deferral requires that the income tax expense excludes the tax effects of certain
timing differences when there is reasonable evidence that those timing differences will
TAXATION
ASSETS
OF
AND
INCOMES
LIABILITIES
OF PERSONS
(PART B)
155
not reverse for some considerable period (at least 3 years) ahead. It is also necessary
for there to be indication that after this period, these timing differences are likely to
reverse. (Para. 3.16 & 3.17 - KAS 10).
A further problem is the method used to evaluate the deferred tax account i.e what
corporation tax rate(s) should be applied to the timing differences.
There are two major methods:

(a)
Deferral Method
(b)
Liability Method
Deferral Method
The deferred tax account in the balance sheet is viewed as deferred revenue
(expenditure) and, therefore, subsequent changes in the rate of tax give no cause for
adjustment. The reversal amount will be exactly matched with the original difference.
T E X T
There are two further approaches to deferral method. These are:

i. Average rate
ii. First in First out.
S T U D Y
FAST FORWARD: Originating timing differences are recorded at the rate of corporation tax
ruling in the period in which the timing difference occurred.
The average rate assumes that reversals do come out of the opening balance (when the capital
allowance rst appeared). An average rate of tax is therefore calculated by dividing the balance
in the deferred account with the balance in the timing differences.
In FIFO the reversal is assumed to come from the rst amount credited to the deferred taxation
account. That is the deferred taxation created by the rst year tax rate. So the reversal is
calculated using the rst year rate.
Liability Method
The deferred tax provision in the balance sheet is assessed at the rate of corporation
tax expected to be applicable when the timing differences are expected to reverse.
Unless the rate of corporation tax is known in advance, the most recent rate would
normally be used.
Under this method, it is necessary to make adjustments each time the rate changes.
156
The two methods are illustrated in the following example:

Assume XYZ Co. made the following capital expenditures:
KShs
20X1
31,500
20X2
42,000
20X3
15,750
20X4 - 20X9
No capital expenditure expected
Expenditure qualies for a capital allowance of 25% (reducing balance). Asset life is expected
to be restricted to 3 years, therefore depreciation is charged, on a straight line basis, overtime
period. Assets have no residual value. Corporation tax rates are as follows:
20X1 - 50%
20X2 - 45%
20X3 - 40%
S T U D Y
T E X T
20X4 - 35%
20X5 - 20X9 - 35% (expected)
Required:
Calculate the timing differences using the
(a)
(b)
Liability Method
Deferral Method Accounting that reversals are accounted for
i. On an average method
ii. On FIFO basis
(c) Show the deferred taxation account using the liability method.
Solution:
With different tax rates applying to the annual capital expenditures it is necessary to analyse the
deferred tax by individual expenditures.
20X1
20X2
20X3
20X4
20X5
20X1 Expenditure (31,500)
KSH
KSH
KSH
KSH
KSH
Capital allowance
7,875
5,906 17,719
Depreciation
10,500
10,500 10,500 Timing differences
(2,625)
(4,594)
7,219
Capital allowance
Depreciation
Timing differences
10,500
14,000
(3,500)
7,875
14,000
(6,125)
23,625
14,000
9,625

Capital allowance
Depreciation
Timing differences
3,938
5,250
(1,312)
2,953
5,250
(2,297)
8,859
5,250
3,609
157
The deferred tax account will appear as follows:
Timing
Difference
20X1 origin
(50%)
20X2 origin
20X1
(45%) origin
20X2 Tax rate
7,875
10,500
(2,625)
(2,625)
50%
20X3 (40%)
- Reversal 20X1
- origin - 20X2
- origin - 20X3
Tax rate adj.
(negative 5% x
10,719)
Deferred Tax bal.

(31.12.X4)
16,406
24,500
(8,094)
(10,719)
45%
29,532
29,750
218
10,937
40%
26,578
19,250
7,328
(3,609)
35%
Liability
Method
Deferral
Average
20X5
8,859
5,250
3,609
35%
(2,625)
1,313
1,313
1,313
(4,594)
(3,500)
(8,094)
3,642
2,297
1,575
2,297
1,575
(10,719)
(131)
3,511
4,824
3,872
5,185
3,872
5,185
(218)
87
(3,465)
2,756
525
(3,610)
2,756
525
_____
10,937
(536)
(449)
4,375
(184)
5,001
_____
(329)
4,856
7,338
(2,568)
(4,428)
919
(4,331)
919
3,599
(547)
(3,115)
(3,509)
1,492
(3,412)
1,444
7,219
(6,125)
(1,312)
9,625
(2,297)
Deferred Tax bal.

(31.12.X3)
20X4 (35%)
- Reversal - 1992
- origin - 20X3
Tax rate adj.
(negative 5% x
10,937)
20X4
Cumulative
Timing
Difference
(2,625)
adj. (negative
5% x 2,625)
Deferred tax bal.
(31.12.X2)
20X3
1,260
Deferral
FIFO
T E X T
Total capital allowances

Total Depreciation
Timing differences
Cumulative Timing Difference
Tax rate
20X2
S T U D Y
20X1
158
Notes:
(a)
Liability Method
Overall cumulative timing difference for each year is relevant and not the individual
timing differences.
(b)
Deferral - Average - 20X3 - average rate was computed as follows:

5,185 x 100 = 48%
10,719
Average - 20X4 =
5,001 x 100 = 46%
10,937
(c) Deferral - FIFO - 20X3

50% X 7,219 = 3,610
The deferred taxation account using the liability method is given below:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Deferred Taxation Account (Liability Method)

Kshs
31.12.X1
Bal c/d
31.12.X1
Bal c/d
20X3
31.12.X3
Prot and Loss A/c

Bal c/d
20X4
31.12.X4
P & L A/c
Bal c/d
1,313
4,824
4,824
449
4,375
4,824
3,115
1,260
4,375
Kshs
20 X1
1.1.X2
20 X2
Prot and Loss A/c

Balance b/f
Prot and Loss A/c
1.1.X3
Balance b/f
1,313
1,313
3,511
4,824
4,824
1.1.X4
Balance b/f
4,824
4,375
4,375
3.1.5 TAX LOSSES
A loss for tax purposes which is available to relieve future prots from tax constitutes a
timing difference.
The existence of a credit amount in the deferred tax balance provides evidence that
there is a tax saving relating to a tax loss carry forward can be realised at least in part.
This is especially so if the tax relief attributable to the loss can be included in the period
of the loss and the debit is carried forward as a reduction of the deferred tax credit
balance in the balance sheet.
(Read IAS 12 Para. 3.19 - 3.22)
159
>>> Example:
Omwachi Ltd has no originating or reversing timing difference in 20X1 or 20X2 i.e. reported
accounting prots are equal to the prot on which tax is assessed. The balance on deferred tax
account as at 1.1.X1 was KSh 190,000. Trading losses in 20X1 amounted to KSh 160,000. In
20X2 trading prots amounted to KSh 190,000. The movement on deferred tax account over the
two years would be as follows:
Corporation tax rate is 35%
190,000
134,000
56,000
190,000
DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS - IAS 12

i.
The income tax relating to an item that is charged or credited to shareholders interest
should be accounted for in the same manner as the relevant item and the amount
should be disclosed.
ii.
The tax charge related to income from the ordinary activities of the enterprise.
iii.
The tax charge relating to universal items, to prior period items, and to changes of
accounting policy - IAS8.
iv.
The tax effects, if any, related to assets that have been revalued to amounts in excess
of historical cost or previous revaluation.
v.
The following items in respect to tax losses should be disclosed.
The amount of the tax saving included in net income for the current period as a
result of the realisation of a tax loss carry forward that had not been accounted for
in the year of the loss.
the amount and future availability of tax losses for which the related tax effects
have been included in the net income of any period.
vi.
The method used to account for the deferred tax should also be disclosed.
vii.
The amount of timing differences not accounted for, both current and cumulative should
be disclosed.
T E X T
31.12.X2 Bal c/d
KShs
190,000
S T U D Y
Expected tax Relief

(35% x 160,000)
31.12.X1 Bal c/d
Deferred Tax Account

KShs
1.1.X1 Bal. b/f
56,000
134,000
190,000
1.1.X2 Bal. b/f
Deferred tax reinstated
190,000 (35% x 160,000)
190,000
160
JUNE 20X0
2
(i) Flow-through method
P & L a/c (Extract)
Taxable Prot (Cap allow)

Tax @ 33%
1997
1998
1999
20X0
Sh 000
Sh 000
Sh 000
Sh 000
4,250
4,250
(1,402.50) (1,402.50)
4,250
4,250
(1,402.50
(1,402.50)
2,847.50
2,847.50
2,847.50
Deferred Tax
NIL
2,847.50
NIL
NIL
NIL
Balance Sheet (Extract)
S T U D Y
T E X T
Provision for liabilities & Charges
NIL
NIL
NIL
NIL
(ii) Full Provision Method

P & L a/c (Extract)
Taxable Prots
Tax @ 33%
Deferred Tax
1997
1998
1999
20X0
4,250
4,250
4,250
4,250
(1,402.50)
(1,402.50)
(1,402.50)
(1,402.50)
2,847.50
2,847.50
2,847.50
2,847.50
528
(132)
(264)
660
132
792
Balance Sheet (Extract)

Provision for liabilities & Charges
(iii)
528
396
Partial Provision Method
(Shs. 396,000 of the T/D will reverse in 1998 and 1999)

P & L (Extract)
Taxable Prots
Tax @ 33%
Deferred Tax
1997
1998
1999
20X0
4,250
4,250
4,250
(1,402.50)
(1,402.50)
(1,402.50)
4,250
(1,402.50)
2,847.50
2,847.50
2,847.50
2,847.50
396 i.e (528 132)
(132)
(264)
161
Balance sheet (Extract)

Provision for Liabilities & Charges
396
264
NIL
NIL
Workings
Deferred tax Calculations
Capital allowances
Depreciation
Tax @ 33%
2,000
(400)
1,600
528
400
(800)
(400)
(132)
400
(1,200)
(800)
(264)
2,800
(800)
2,000
660
(a)
(b)
No provision
Full provision
ADVANTAGE
Tax charge in P/L is based on

tax payable and is objective
Recognises full tax charge in

P/L
Calculations are objective
(c) Partial Provision
Realistic - deferred tax

provision takes account of
circumstances of the company
DISADVANTAGES
Ignores reasoned assessment
of what tax effects of
transactions will be.
Inconsistent with Companies Act
and IAS 12
Possible understatement of tax
liabilities
Possible distortion of tax

liabilities in Balance Sheet
Possible ctitious effects
of transactions for remote
occurring in a period
Ignores reasoned assessment
of what tax effects of
transactions will be.
Calculations may depend

on subjective opinions and
estimates.
Difcult to apply to small
companies.
S T U D Y
APPROACH
T E X T
3.1.6 SUMMARY OF APPROACHES TO DEFERRED TAX
162
3.2 SHARE BASED PAYMENTS (IFRS 2)

This is a very controversial area and has not been examined before. It is a recent standards issued
by IASB and deals with the accounting treatment of transactions that have been settled by way
of issuing shares and not for cash or if cash is paid it is tied to the value of the companies share.
This ranges from paying suppliers and employees by way of shares or pegging the payments to
the value of the companies share.
IFRS 2 Provisions
S T U D Y
T E X T
A share-based payment is a transaction in which the entity receives or acquires goods or

services either as consideration for its equity instruments or by incurring liabilities for amounts
based on the price of the entitys shares or other equity instruments of the entity. The accounting
requirements for the share-based payment depend on how the transaction will be settled, that is,
by the issuance of (a) equity, (b) cash, or (c) equity or cash.
Scope
The concept of share-based payments is broader than employee share options. IFRS 2
encompasses the issuance of shares, or rights to shares, in return for services and goods.
Examples of items included in the scope of IFRS 2 are share appreciation rights, employee
share purchase plans, employee share ownership plans, share option plans and plans where
the issuance of shares (or rights to shares) may depend on market or non-market related
conditions.
IFRS 2 applies to all entities. There is no exemption for private or smaller entities. Furthermore,
subsidiaries using their parents or fellow subsidiarys equity as consideration for goods or
services are within the scope of the Standard.
There are two exemptions to the general scope principle.

(i)
First, the issuance of shares in a business combination should be accounted for under
IFRS 3 Business Combinations. However, care should be taken to distinguish sharebased payments related to the acquisition from those related to employee services.
(ii)
Second, IFRS 2 does not address share-based payments within the scope of paragraphs
8-10 of IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation, or paragraphs 5-7
of IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. Therefore, IAS 32 and
39 should be applied for commodity-based derivative contracts that may be settled in
shares or rights to shares.
IFRS 2 does not apply to share-based payment transactions other than for the acquisition of
goods and services. Share dividends, the purchase of treasury shares, and the issuance of
additional shares are, therefore, outside its scope.
163
Recognition and Measurement

The issuance of shares or rights to shares requires an increase in a component of equity. IFRS
2 requires the offsetting debit entry to be expensed when the payment for goods or services
does not represent an asset. The expense should be recognised as the goods or services are
consumed. For example, the issuance of shares or rights to shares to purchase inventory would
be presented as an increase in inventory and would be expensed only once the inventory is sold
or impaired.
The issuance of fully vested shares, or rights to shares, is presumed to relate to past service,
requiring the full amount of the grant-date fair value to be expensed immediately. The issuance
of shares to employees with, say, a three-year vesting period is considered to relate to services
over the vesting period. Therefore, the fair value of the share-based payment, determined at the
grant date, should be expensed over the vesting period.
Company grants a total of 100 share options to 10 members of its executive management team
(10 options each) on 1 January 20X5. These options vest at the end of a three-year period. The
company has determined that each option has a fair value at the date of grant equal to 15. The
company expects that all 100 options will vest and therefore records the following entry at 30
June 20X5 - the end of its rst six-month interim reporting period.
Dr. Share Option Expense 250

Cr. Equity 250
[(100 x 15) / 6 periods] = 250 per period
If all 100 shares vest, the above entry would be made at the end of each 6-month reporting period.
However, if one member of the executive management team leaves during the second half of
20X6, therefore forfeiting the entire amount of 10 options, the following entry at 31 December
20X6 would be made:
Dr. Share Option Expense 150

Cr. Equity 150
[(90 x 15)/ 6 periods = 225 per period. [225 x 4] -[250+250+250] = 150
S T U D Y
Illustration Recognition of Employee Share Option Grant
T E X T
As a general principle, the total expense related to equity-settled share-based payments will equal
the multiple of the total instruments that vest and the grant-date fair value of those instruments. In
short, there is truing up to reect what happens during the vesting period. However, if the equitysettled share-based payment has a market related performance feature, the expense would still
be recognised if all other vesting features are met. The following example provides an illustration
of a typical equity-settled share-based payment.
164
Measurement Guidance
S T U D Y
T E X T
Depending on the type of share-based payment, fair value may be determined by the value of the
shares or rights to shares given up, or by the value of the goods or services received:
1.
General fair value measurement principle. In principle, transactions in which goods

or services are received as consideration for equity instruments of the entity should be
measured at the fair value of the goods or services received. Only if the fair value of
the goods or services cannot be measured reliably would the fair value of the equity
instruments granted be used.
2.
Measuring employee share options. For transactions with employees and others
providing similar services, the entity is required to measure the fair value of the equity
instruments granted, because it is typically not possible to estimate reliably the fair
value of employee services received.
3.
When to measure fair value - options. For transactions measured at the fair value of
the equity instruments granted (such as transactions with employees), fair value should
be estimated at grant date.
4.
When to measure fair value - goods and services. For transactions measured at the
fair value of the goods or services received, fair value should be estimated at the date
of receipt of those goods or services.
5.
Measurement guidance. For goods or services measured by reference to the fair value
of the equity instruments granted, IFRS 2 species that, in general, vesting conditions
are not taken into account when estimating the fair value of the shares or options
at the relevant measurement date (as specied above). Instead, vesting conditions
are taken into account by adjusting the number of equity instruments included in the
measurement of the transaction amount so that, ultimately, the amount recognised for
goods or services received as consideration for the equity instruments granted is based
on the number of equity instruments that eventually vest.
6.
More measurement guidance. IFRS 2 requires the fair value of equity instruments
granted to be based on market prices, if available, and to take into account the terms
and conditions upon which those equity instruments were granted. In the absence of
market prices, fair value is estimated using a valuation technique to estimate what the
price of those equity instruments would have been on the measurement date in an
arms length transaction between knowledgeable, willing parties. The standard does
not specify which particular model should be used.
7.
If fair value cannot be reliably measured. IFRS 2 requires the share-based payment
transaction to be measured at fair value for both listed and unlisted entities. IFRS 2
permits the use of intrinsic value (that is, fair value of the shares less exercise price) in
those rare cases in which the fair value of the equity instruments cannot be reliably
measured. However this is not simply measured at the date of grant. An entity would
have to remeasure intrinsic value at each reporting date until nal settlement.
8.
165
Performance conditions. IFRS 2 makes a distinction between the handling of market

based performance features from non-market features. Market conditions are those
related to the market price of an entitys equity, such as achieving a specied share
price or a specied target based on a comparison of the entitys share price with an
index of share prices of other entities. Market based performance features should
be included in the grant-date fair value measurement. However, the fair value of the
equity instruments should not be reduced to take into consideration non-market based
performance features or other vesting features.
Modications, Cancellations, and Settlements
Disclosure
Required disclosures include:
The nature and extent of share-based payment arrangements that existed during the period;
How the fair value of the goods or services received, or the fair value of the equity instruments
granted, during the period was determined; and
the effect of share-based payment transactions on the entitys prot or loss for the period and on
its nancial position.
Please see the appendix of the standard for more illustrative examples.
S T U D Y
Modication of the terms on which equity instruments were granted may have an effect on the
expense that will be recorded. IFRS 2 claries that the guidance on modications also applies
to instruments modied after their vesting date. If the fair value of the new instruments is more
than the fair value of the old instruments (e.g. by reduction of the exercise price or issuance of
additional instruments), the incremental amount is recognised over the remaining vesting period
in a manner similar to the original amount. If the modication occurs after the vesting period, the
incremental amount is recognised immediately. If the fair value of the new instruments is less
than the fair value of the old instruments, the original fair value of the equity instruments granted
should be expensed as if the modication never occurred.
The cancellation or settlement of equity instruments is accounted for as an acceleration of the
vesting period and therefore any amount unrecognised that would otherwise have been charged
should be recognised immediately. Any payments made with the cancellation or settlement (up
to the fair value of the equity instruments) should be accounted for as the repurchase of an equity
interest. Any payment in excess of the fair value of the equity instruments granted is recognised
as an expense.
New equity instruments granted may be identied as a replacement of cancelled equity
instruments. In those cases, the replacement equity instruments should be accounted for as a
modication. The fair value of the replacement equity instruments is determined at grant date,
while the fair value of the cancelled instruments is determined at the date of cancellation, less
any cash payments on cancellation that is accounted for as a deduction from equity.
T E X T
The determination of whether a change in terms and conditions has an effect on the amount
recognised depends on whether the fair value of the new instruments is greater than the fair
value of the original instruments (both determined at the modication date).
166
3.3 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS

Nature of employee benets
When a company or other entity employs a new worker, that worker will be offered a package of
pay and benets. Some of these will be short-term and the employee will receive the benet at
about the same time as he or she earns it, for example basic pay, overtime etc. Other employee
benets are deferred, however, the main example being retirement benets (i.e. a pension).
S T U D Y
T E X T
The cost of these deferred employee benets to the employer can be viewed in various ways. They
could be described as deferred salary to the employee. Alternatively, they are a deduction from
the employees true gross salary, used as a tax efcient means of saving. In some countries, tax
efciency arises on retirement benet contributions because they are not taxed on the employee,
but they are allowed as a deduction from taxable prots of the employer.
3.3.1 Accounting for employee benet costs

Accounting for short-term employee benet costs tends to be quite straightforward, because they
are simply recognised an expense in the employers nancial statements of the current period.
Accounting for the cost of deferred employee benets is much more difcult. This is because of the
large amounts involved, as well as the long time scale, complicated estimates and uncertainties.
In the past, entities accounted for these benets accounted for these benets simply by charging
the income statements of the employing entity on the basis of actual payments made. This led to
substantial variations in reported prots of these entities and disclosure of information on these
costs was usually sparse.
IAS 19 Employee benets

IAS 19 is intended to prescribe the following:
When the cost of employee benets should be recognised as a liability or an expense.
The amount of the liability or expense that should be recognised.
As a basic rule, the standard states the following:

1.
A liability should be recognised when an employee has provided a service in exchange

for benets to be received by the employee at some time in the future.
2.
167
An expense should be recognised when the entity enjoys the economic benets from
a service provided by an employee regardless of when the employee received or will
receive the benets from providing the service.
The basic problem is therefore fairly straightforward. An entity will often enjoy the economic
benets from the services provided by its employees in advance of the employees receiving all
the employment benets from the work they have done, for example they will not receive pension
benets until after they retire.
3.3.2 Categories of employee benets

The standard recognises ve categories of employee benets, and proposals a different
accounting treatment for each. These four categories are as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
b)
Wages and salaries

Social security contributions
Paid annual leave
Paid sick leave
Paid maternity/Paternity leave
Prot shares and bonuses paid within 12 months of the year end
Paid jury service
Paid military service
Non-monetary benets, e.g. medical care, cars, free goods.
Post-employment benets,
E.g. Pensions and post employment medical care
c)
Other long-term benets

e.g. prot shares, bonuses or deferred compensation payable later than 12months after
the year end, sabbatical leave, long-service benets.
d)
Termination benets
e.g. early retirement payments and redundancy payments.
Benets may be paid to the employees themselves, to their dependants (spouses,
children, etc) or to third parties.
Denitions
IAS 19 has several important denitions. They are grouped together here, but you should refer
back to them where necessary.
T E X T
Short-term benets including:
S T U D Y
a)
168
Employee benets are all forms of consideration given by an entity in exchange for service
Short term employee benets are employee benets (other than termination benets) which
Dened contribution plans are post-employment benet plans under which an entity pays xed
contributions into a separate entity (a fund) and will have no legal or constructive obligation to
pay further contributions if the fund does not hold sufcient assets to pay all employee benets
relating to employee service in the current and prior periods.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Dened benet plans are post-employment benet plans other than dened contribution
plans.
Multi employer plans are dened contribution plans (other than state plans) or dened benet
plans (other than state plans) that:
a.
b.
Pool the assets contributed by various entities that are not under common control,
and
Use those assets to provide benets to employees of more than one entity, on the basis
that contribution and benet levels are determined without regard to the identity of the
entity that employs the employees concerned.
Other long-term employee benets are employee benets (other than post employment
benets and termination benets) which do not fall due wholly within twelve months after the end
of the period in which the employees render the related service.
Termination benets are employee benets payable as a result of either:

a)
An entitys decision to terminate an employees employment before the normal retirement

date, or
b)
An employees decision to accept voluntary redundancy in exchange for those

benets.
Vested employee benets are employee benets that are not conditional on future
employment.
The present value of a dened benet obligation is the present value, without deducting any
plan assets, of expected future payments required to settle the obligation resulting from employee
service in the current and prior periods.
169
Current service cost is the increase in the present value of the dened benet obligation
resulting from employee service in the current period.
Interest cost is the increase during a period in the present value of a dened benet obligation
which arises because the benets are one period closer to settlement.
Plan assets comprise:

a)
Assets held by a long-term employee benet fund; and
b)
Qualifying insurance policies
b)
Are held by an entity (a fund) that is legally separates from the reporting entity and
exists solely to pay or fund employee benets; and
Are available to be used only to pay or fund employee benets, are not available to
the reporting entitys own creditors (even in bankruptcy), and cannot be returned to the
reporting entity, unless either:
i)
The remaining assets of the fund are sufcient to meet all the related employee
benet obligations of the plan or the reporting entity; or
ii) The assets are returned to the reporting entity to reimburse it for employee
benets already paid
A qualifying insurance policy is an insurance policy issued by an insurer that is not a related
policy (as dened in IAS 24) of the reporting entity, if the process of the policy:
a)
Can be used only to pay or fund employee benets under a dened benet plan: or
b)
Are not available to the reporting entitys own creditors (even in bankruptcy) and cannot
be paid to the reporting entity, unless either:
i)
The proceeds represent surplus assets that are not needed for the policy to meet
all the related employee benet obligations of the plan or the reporting entity; or
ii) The assets are returned to the reporting entity to reimburse it for employee
benets already paid.
The return of plan assets is interest, dividends and other revenue derived from the plan
assets, together with realised and unrealised gains or losses on the plan assets, less any cost of
administering the plan and loess any tax payable by the plan itself.
S T U D Y
a)
T E X T
Assets held by a long-term employee benet fund are assets (other than non-transferable
nancial instruments issued by the reporting entity) that:
170
Actuarial gains and losses comprise:

a)
Experience adjustments (the effects of differences between the previous actuarial

assumptions and what has actually occurred), and
b)
The effects of changes in actuarial assumptions.
Past service cost is the increase in the present value of the dened benet obligation for employee
service in prior periods, resulting from the current periods, resulting in the current period from the
introduction of, or changes to, post-employment benets or other long-term employee benets.
Past service cost may be either positive (where benets are introduced or improved) or negative
(where existing benets are reduced).
Asset ceiling amendment
S T U D Y
T E X T
The revisions to IAS 19 in May 2002 seek to prevent what the IASB regards as a counterintuitive result produced by the interaction of two aspects of the existing IAS 19.
a)
Permission to defer recognition of actuarial gains and losses.
b)
Imposition of an upper limit on the amount that can be recognised as an asset (the
asset ceiling)
The issue affects only those entities that have, at the beginning or end of the accounting period,
a surplus in a dened benet plan that, based on the current terms of the plan, the entity cannot
fully recover through refunds or deductions in future contributions
The issue is the impact of the wording of the asset ceiling.
Sometimes a gain is recognised when a pension plan is in surplus only because of the
deferring and amortising of an actuarial loss or added past service cost in the current
period.
Conversely, a loss may be recognised because of a deferral of actuarial gains.
The revisions to IAS 19 introductions a limited amendment that would prevent gains (losses)
from being recognised solely as a result of past services cost or actuarial losses (gains) arising
in the period. No change is currently proposed to the general approach of allowing deferral of
actuarial gains and losses. During its deliberations on the amendments to IAS 19, the IASB
concluded that there were further conceptual and practical problems with these provisions. The
IASB intends to conduct a comprehensive review of these aspects of IAS 19 as part of its work
on convergence of accounting standards across the world.
There are two key issues or problems to consider.

a)
It may be necessary to rely on actuarial assumptions about what the future amount of
benets payable will be.
b)
171
If benets are payable later than 12months after the end of the accounting period, the
future benets payable should be discounted to a present value.
3.3.3 SHORT TERM EMPLOYEE BENEFITS

FAST FORWARD: There are no actuarial assumptions to be made, and there is no requirement
to discount future benets (because they are all by denition, payable no later than 12 months
after the end of the accounting period).
Recognition and measurement
The cost of short-term employee benets should be recognised as an expense in the period
when the economic benets is given, as employment costs (except in so far as employment
costs may be included within the cost of an asset, e.g. property, plant and equipment).
Short term absences

There may be short-term accumulating compensated absences. These are absences for
which an employee is paid, and if the employees entitlement has not been used up at the end of
the period, they are carried forward to the next period. An example is paid holiday leave, where
any unused holidays in one year are carried forward to the next year. The cost of the benets
of such absences should be charged as an expense as the employees render service that
increases their entitlement to future compensated absences.
There may be short-term non-accumulating compensated absences. These are absences

for which an employee is paid when they occur, but an entitlement to the absences does not
accumulate. The employee can be absent, and be paid, but only if and when the circumstances
arise. Examples are maternity/paternity pay, (in most cases) sick pay, and paid absence for
injury service.
S T U D Y
Unpaid short-term employee benets as at the end of an accounting period should be

recognised as an accrued expense. Any short-term benets paid in advance should be
recognised as a prepayment (to the extent that it will lead to, e.g. a reduction in future payments
or a cash refund).
T E X T
The rules for short term benets are essentially an application of basic accounting principles and
practice.
172
>>> Example: Unused holiday leave
A company gives its employees an annual entitlement to paid holiday leave. If there is any
unused leave at the end of the year, employees are entitled to carry forward the unused leave for
up to 12 months. At the end of 20x9, the companys employees carried forward in total 50 days
of unused holiday leave. Employees are paid Sh.100per day.
Required
State the required accounting for the unused holiday carried forward.
Solution
The short-term accumulating compensated absences should be recognised as a cost in the year
when the entitlement arises, i.e. in 20 x 9.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Prot sharing or bonus plans

Prot shares or bonuses payable within 12 months after the end of the accounting period should
be recognised as an expected cost when the entity has a present obligation to pay it, i.e. when
the employer has no real option but to pay it. This will usually be when the employer recognises
the prot or other performance achievement to which the prot share or bonus relates.
>>> Example: Prot sharing plan

Sema co runs a prot sharing plan under which it pays 3% of its net prot for the year to its
employees if none have during the year. Sema co estimates that this will be reduced staff turnover
to 2.5% in 2009.
Required
Which costs should be recognised by Sema co for the prot share?
Solution
Sema co should recognise a liability and an expense of 2.5% of net prot.
Disclosure
There are no specic disclosure requirements for short-term employee benet in the
proposed standard.
173
3.3.4 POST EMPLOYMENT BENEFITS

FAST FORWARD: The post employment benets are paid out of the income from the plan asset
(dividends interest) or from money from the sale of some plan assets.
Many employers provide-employment benets for their employees after they have stopped
working .pension schemes are the most obvious examples, but an employer might provide
post-employment death benets to the dependants of former employees, or post-employment
medical cares
Post-employment benet schemes are often referred to us plans. The plan receives regular
contributions from the employer (and sometimes from current employees as well) and the money
is invested in asset, such as stocks and shares and other investments.
Dened contribution plans. With such plans, the employer (and possibly current
employees too) pay regular contributions into the plan of a given or dened amount
each year. The contribution are invested , and the size of the post employment benets
paid to former employees depends on how well or how badly the plans investment
perform. If the investment performs well, the plan will be able to afford higher benets
than if the investments perform less well.
Dened benet plans. With these plans, the size of the post-employment benet is
predetermined, i.e. the benet are dened (and possibly current employees too) pay
contributions into the plan, and the contributions are invested. The size of the investment
is at an amount that is expected to earn enough returns to meet the obligation to pay the
post-employment benets. If however, it becomes apparent that the assets in the fund
are insufcient, the employer will be required to make additional contributions into the
contributions to make up the expected short fall. On the other hand, if the funds asset
appear to be larger than they need to be, and in excess of what is required to pay the
post employment benets, the employer may be allowed to take a contribution holiday
(i.e. stop paying in contributions for a while).
It is important to make clear distinction between the following:
Funding a dened benet plan, i.e. paying contributions into the plan.
Accounting for the cost of funding a dened benet plan.
Before we examine accounting for both these types of schemed me we need to mention a couple
of other issues addressed by the standard.
S T U D Y
T E X T
There are two types or categories of post employment benet plan, as given in the denition in
section 1 above.
174
Multi-employer plans
FAST FORWARD: IAS 19 requires an entity to classify such a plan as a dened contribution plan
or a dened benet plan, depending on its terms (including any constructive obligation beyond
those terms).
For a multi-employer plan that is a dened benet plan. The entity should account for its
proportionate share of the dened benet obligation, plan assets and cost associated with the
plan in the same as for any other dened benet plan and maker full disclosure.
When there is insufcient information to use dened benet accounting, then the multi employer
benet plan should be accounted for as dened contribution plan and additional disclosures made
(that the plan is a dened benet plan and information about any known surplus or decit).
S T U D Y
T E X T
State plans
This are established by legislation to cover some or all entities and are operated by or its agents.
These plans cannot be controlled or inuenced by the entity. State plans should be treated the
same as multi-employer plans by the entity.
Insurance benets
Insurance premiums paid by an employer to fund an employee post-employment benet plan
should be accounted for as dened contribution to the plan, unless the employer, has legal
or constructive obligation to pay the employee benets directly when they fall due, or to make
further payments in the event that the insurance company does not pay all the post-employment
benets (relating to services given in prior years and the current period) for which insurance has
been paid.
>>> Examples: insurance benets.

a)
For example, Employer pays insurance premiums to fund post-employment medical care
for former employees. It has no obligation beyond paying the annual insurance premiums.
The premium paid each year should be accounted for as dened contribution.
a)
Employer similarly pays insurance premiums for the same purpose, but retains the
liability to pay for the medical benets itself. In the case of employer B, the rights under
the insurance policy should be recognised as an asset, and should account for the
obligation to employees as a liability as if there were no insurance policy.
175
Summary
a)
There are two categories of post-retirements benets:

a. Dened contribution schemes
b. Dened benet scheme.
b)
Dened contribution schemes provide benets commensurate with the fund available
to produce them.
c)
Dened benet schemes provide promised benets and so contributions are based
on estimates of how the fund will perform.
d)
Dened contribution scheme costs are easy to account for and this is covered in the
next section.
The remaining section of the chapter deals with the more difcult question of how dened benet
scheme costs are accounted for.
a. The obligation is determined by the amount paid into the plan in each period.
b. There are no actuarial assumptions to make.
c. If the obligation is settled in the current period (or at least no later than 12 months
after the end of the current period) there is no requirement for discounting.
IAS 19 requires the following
1.
Contribution to a dened contribution plan should be recognised as an expense in the

period they are payable (except to the extent that labour costs may be included within
the cost of assets.
2.
Any liability for unpaid contributions that are due as at the end of the period should be
recognised as a liability (accrued expense).
3.
Any excess contributions paid should be recognised as an asset (prepaid expense),

but only to the extent that the prepayment will lead to, e.g. a reduction in future payments
or a cash refund.
In the (unusual) situation where contributions to a dened contribution plan do not fall due
entirely within 12months after the end of the period in which the employees performed the related
service, then these should be discounted. The discount rate to be used is discussed in the next
paragraphs.
S T U D Y
Accounting for payments into dened contribution plans is straightforward.
T E X T
a) Dened contribution plans
176
b) Dened benet plans: recognition and measurement

Accounting for dened benet plans is much more complex. The complexity of accounting for
dened benet plans stems largely from the following factors.
a)
The future benets (arising from employee service in the current or prior years) cannot
be estimated exactly, but whatever they are, the employer will have to pay them, and
the liability should therefore be recognised now. To estimate these future obligations, it
is necessary to use actuarial assumptions.
b)
The obligations payable in future years should be valued, by discounting, on a present

value basis. This is because the obligations may be settled in many years time.
c)
If actuarial assumptions change, the amount of required contributions to the fund will
change, and there may be actuarial gains or losses. A contribution into a fund in any
period is not necessarily the total for that period, due to actuarial gains or losses.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Outline of the method

An outline of the method used for an employer to account for the expenses and obligation of a
dened benet plan is given below. The stages will be explained in more detail later.
Step 1
Actuarial assumptions should be used to make a reliable estimate
of the amount of future benets employees have earned from service in relation to
the current and prior years. Assumptions include, for example, assumptions about
employee turnover, mortality rates, future increases in salaries (if these will affect the
eventual size of future benets such as pension payments).
These future benets should be attributed to service performed by
Step 2
employees in the current period, and in prior periods, using the
Projected Unit Credit Method. This gives a total present value of future benet
obligations arising from past and current periods of service.
Step 3
The fair value of any plan assets should be established.
Step 4
The size of any actuarial gains or losses should be determined, and the
amount of these that will be recognised.
Step 5
If the benets payable under the plan have been improved, the extra cost
arising from past service should be determined.
Step 6
If the benets payable under the plan have been reduced or Cancelled,
the resulting gain should be determined.
177
Constructive obligation
IAS 19 makes it very clear that it is not only its legal obligation under the formal terms of a dened
benet plan that an entity must account for, but also for any constructive obligation that it may
have. A constructive obligation which will arise from the entitys informal practices, exist when an
entity has no realistic alternative but to pay employee benets, for example if any change in the
informal practices would cause unacceptable damage to employee relationships.
The Projected Unit Credit Method

With this method, it is assumed that each period of service by an employee gives rise to an
additional unit of future benets.
An employer pays a lump sum to employees when they retire. The lump sum is equal to 1% of
their salary in the nal year of service, for every year of service they have given.
An employee is expected to work for 5 years (actuarial assumption)
His salary is expected to rise by 8% pa (actuarial assumption)
His salary in 20 x 1 is Sh.10,000
The discount rate applied is 10%pa
S T U D Y
a)
b)
c)
d)
Required
Calculate the amounts chargeable to each of years 20 x 1 to 20 x 5 and the closing obligation
each year, assuming no change in actuarial assumptions.
Solution
Since his salary in 20 X 1 is Sh.10,000, his salary in 20 x 5 is expected to be Sh.13,605. His lump
sum entitlement is therefore expected to be Sh.136 for each years service, i.e. Sh.680 in total.
Using the Projected Unit Credit Method, and assuming that the actuarial assumptions do not
change over any of 20x1 to 20x5, the calculations are as follows.
Future benet attributable to:
Prior years
Current year
(1% of nal salary)
T E X T
>>> Example: Projected Unit Credit Method
20x1
20x2
20x3
20x4
20x5
Sh.
Sh.
Sh.
Sh.
Sh.
136
272
408
544
136
136
136
136
136
136
272
408
544
680
178
The future benet builds up to Sh.680 over the ve years, at the end of which the employee is
expected to leave and the benet is payable.
These gures, however, are not discounted. The benet attributable to the current year should
be discounted, in this example at 10%, from the end of 20 x 5.
20x1
20x2
20x3
20x4
20x5
Sh
Sh
Sh
Sh
Sh
Opening obligation (note 1)
93
204
336
494
Interest (note 2)
20
34
50
Current service cost (note 3)
93
102
112
124
136
(Closing obligation (note 4)
93
102
112
124
136
93
204
336
494
680
There is a rounding error of Sh.1 in the calculations. To make the total add up to Sh.680,
the interest of Sh.49.4 has therefore been rounded up to Sh.50 in compensation.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Notes
1.
The opening obligation is the closing obligation of the previous period, brought
forward.
2.
Interest is charged on this opening obligation to the current year.
3.
The current service cost is the future obligation attributed to the current period (in this
example Sh.136 in each year).
4.
The closing obligation is the total of the opening obligation brought forward, the interest
charge on that amount and the current year service cost.
5.
The calculations in the example above assume that actuarial forecasts are exactly
correct. If these were to prove incorrect (which is likely in practice), there could be an
adjustment to make, resulting in an actuarial gain or an actuarial loss.
Interest cost
The interest cost in the income statement is the present value of the dened benet obligation
as at the start of the year multiplied by the discount rate.
Note that the interest charge is not the opening balance sheet liability multiplied by the discount
rate, because the liability is stated after deducting the market value of the plan assets and after
making certain other adjustments, for example for actuarial gains or losses. Interest is the
obligation multiplied by the discount rate.
179
The balance sheet

In the balance sheet, the amount recognised as a dened benet liability (which may be a
negative amount, i.e. an asset) should be the total of the following:
a)
The present value of the dened obligation at the balance sheet date, plus.
b)
Any actuarial gains or minus any actuarial losses that have not yet been recognised,
minus
c)
Any past service cost not yet recognised (if any), minus
d)
The fair value of the assets of the plan as at the balance sheet date (if there are
any) out of which the future obligations to current and past employees will be directly
settled.
The gure as calculated above.
b)
The total of the present values of:

a. Any unrecognised actuarial losses and past service costs
b. Any refunds expected from the plan
c. Any reductions in the future contributions to the plan because of the surplus.
The determination of a discount rate is covered below.
The income statement

The expense that should be recognised in the income statement for post-employment benets
in a dened benet plan is the total of the following.
The current service cost
Interest
The expected return on any plan assets
The actuarial gains or losses, to the extent that they are recognised
Past service cost to the extent that is recognised
The effect of any curtailments or settlements
S T U D Y
a)
T E X T
If this total is a negative amount, there is a balance sheet asset and this should be shown in the
balance sheet as the lower of (a) and (b) below.
180
Attributing benet to periods of service

Consider a situation where a dened benet plan provides for annual pension for former
employees retirement. The size of the pension is 2.5% of the employees salary in his/her nal
year, for each full year of service. The pension is payable from the age of 65.
The post-employment benet for each employee is an annual pension of 2.5% of his/her nal
years salary for every full year of service. This annual payment obligation should rst be
converted to a present lump sum value as at the retirement date, using actuarial assumptions.
Having established an obligation as at the expected retirement date, the current service cost
is calculated as the present value of that obligation, i.e. the present value of monthly pension
payments of 2.5% of nal salary, multiplied by the number of years of service up to the balance
sheet date.
S T U D Y
T E X T
For example, if an employee is expected to earn Sh.10,000 in his nal year of employment, and
is expected to live for 15 years after retirement, the benet payable for each year of employment
would be calculated as the discounted value, as at retirement date, of Sh.250 per annum for
15 years. This should then be converted to a present value (as at the balance sheet date) to
determine the current service cost for the year for that employee.
Probabilities should be taken into consideration in the calculations. Suppose that a benet of
Sh.1,000 for every year of service is payable to employees when they retire at the age of 60,
provided that they remain with the employer until they retire (i.e. that they dont leave to work for
someone else). Suppose also that an employee joins the rm at the age of 40, with 20 years to
work to retirement.
The benet attributable to each year of service is Sh.1,000 multiplied by the probability that
the employee will remain with the employer until he/she is 60. Since the benet is payable at
retirement as a lump sum, it should be discounted to a present value as at the balance sheet date
to determine the current service cost for a given year. The obligation should be calculated as the
present value of Sh.40,000 (40years x Sh.1,000) multiplied by the same probability.
No added obligations arise after all signicant post employment benets have vested;
in other words, no extra post benet obligations arise after an employee has already done
everything necessary to qualify in full for the post-employments benet. Suppose for example
that employees have an entitlement to a lump sum payment on retirement of Sh.20,000. The
benet vests after 10 years.
In accounting for this lump sum benet on retirement, a benet of Sh.2,000 should be attributed
to each of the rst ten years of an employees service. The current service cost in each of the ten
years should be the present value of Sh.20,000. if an employee has 25years to go to retirement
form the time he/she joins the rm there should be a service cost in each of the rst ten years,
and none in the 15years thereafter (other than the interest cost on the obligation).
Question: Service periods

Under Huduma co. plan, all employees are paid a lump sum retirement benet of Sh.100,000.
They must be still employed aged 55 after 20years service, or still employed at the age of 65, no
matter what their length of service.
181
Required
State how this benet should be attributed to service periods.
Answer
In the case of those employees joining before age 35, service rst leads to benets
under this plan at the age of 35, because an employee could leave at the age of 30
and return at the age of 33, with no effect on the amount/timing of benets. In addition,
service beyond age 55 will lead to no further benets. Therefore, for these employees
Huduma Co. Should allocate Sh.100,000 20 = Sh.5,000 to each year between the
ages of 35 and 55.
b)
In the case of employees joining between the ages of 35 and 45, service beyond 20
years will lead to no, further benet. For these employees, Huduma Co. should allocate
Sh.100,000 20 = Sh.5,000 to each of the rst 20 years.
c)
Employees joining at 55 exactly will receive no further benet past 65, so Huduma Co
should allocate Sh.100,000 10 = Sh.10,000 to each of the rst 10 years.
The current service cost and the present value of the obligation for all employees reect the
probability that the employee may not complete the necessary period of service.
Actuarial assumptions
Actuarial assumptions are needed to estimate the size of the future (post-employment)
benets that will be payable under a dened benets scheme. The main categories of actuarial
assumptions are as follows:
Demographic assumptions are about mortality rates before and after retirement, the
rate of employee turnover, early retirement, claim rates under medical plans for former
employees, and so on.
Financial assumptions are the discount rate to apply, the expected return on plan
assets, future salary levels (allowing for seniority and promotion as well as ination)
and the future rate of increase in medical costs (not just inationary cost rises, but also
cost rises specic to medical treatments and to medical treatments required given the
expectations of longer average life expectancy).
The standard requires actuarial assumptions to be neither too cautions nor too imprudent: they
should be unbiased. They should also be based on market expectations at the balance
sheet date, over the period during which the obligations will be settled.
The discount rate adopted should be determined by reference to market yields (at the balance
sheet date) on high quality xed-rate corporate bonds. In the absence of a deep market in such
bonds, the yields on comparable government bonds should be used as reference instead. The
S T U D Y
a)
T E X T
This answer is in three parts.
182
maturity that is consistent with the expected maturity of the post employment benet obligations,
although a single weighted average discount rate is sufcient.
The guidelines comment that there may be some difculty in obtaining a reliable yield for longterm maturities, say 30 or 40 years from now. This should not however be a signicant problem:
the present value of obligations payable in many years time will be relatively small and unlikely to
be sensitive to errors in the assumption about the discount rate for long term maturities (beyond
the maturities of long-term corporate or government bonds).
Actuarial gains or losses
S T U D Y
T E X T
Actuarial gains or losses arise because of the following:

a)
Actual events (e.g. Employee turnover, salary increases) differ from the actuarial
assumptions that were made to estimate the dened benet obligations.
b)
Actuarial assumptions are revised (e.g. a different discount rate is used, or a different
assumption is made about future employee turnover, salary rises, mortality rates, and
so on).
c)
Actual returns on plan assets differ from expected returns
Since actuarial assumptions are rarely going to be exact, some actuarial gains or losses are
inevitable. The proposed standard suggests that, given the inevitability of actuarial gains or
losses, they should not be recognised unless they appear signicant. They are not sufcient
to warrant recognition if they fall within a tolerable range or corridor.
The standard requires the following:

a)
An entity should, as a general rule, recognise actuarial gains and losses as an item
of income or expense (income statement), and as a part of the deferred benet liability
(balance sheet).
b)
However, only a portion of such actuarial gains or losses (as calculated above) should
be recognised if the net cumulative actuarial gains/losses exceed the greater of:
i.
ii.
10% of the present value of the dened benet obligation (i.e. before deducting
plan assets), and
10% of the fair value of the plan assets.
A separate calculation should be made for each dened benet plan: two or more plans should
not be aggregated.
The excess calculated under paragraph 5.26(b) should be divided by the expected average
remaining working lives of participating employees and this gives the portion of actuarial
gains and losses to be recognised.
183
IAS 19 allows, however, any systematic method to be adopted if it results in faster recognition
of actuarial gains and losses. The same basis must be applied to both gains and losses and
applied consistently between periods.
Immediate recognition amendment to IAS 19
For all its dened benets plans.
b)
For all its actuarial gains and losses
In addition, the amendment requires improved disclosures, including many also required by
FRS 17, and slightly eases the methods whereby the amounts recognised in the consolidated
nancial statements have to be allocated to individual group companies for the purposes of their
own reporting under IFRSs.
Past service cost

A past service cost arises when an entity either introduces a dened benets plan or improves
the benets payable under an existing plan. As a result, the entity has taken on additional
obligations that it has not hitherto provided for. For example, an employer might decide to
introduce a medical benets scheme for former employees. This will create a new dened
benet obligation that has not yet been provided for. How should this obligation be accounted
for?
A past service cost may be in respect of either current employees or past employee. IAS 19
has introduced a different accounting treatment for past service cost, according to whether they
relate to current employees or past employees.
a)
For current employees, the past service cost should be recognised as part of the
dened benet liability in the balance sheet. For the income statement, the past service
cost should be amortised on a straight line basis over the average period until the
benets become vested.
b)
For past employees (if the change affects them) the past service cost should be
recognised in full immediately the plan is introduced or improved (i.e. because they are
immediately vested), as part of the dened benet liability and as an expense (in full)
to the nancial period.
S T U D Y
a)
T E X T
In December 2004, the IASB issued an amendment to IAS 19. This allows an entity to recognise
actuarial gains and losses immediately in the period in which it arises, outside prot and loss.
These gains and losses need to be presented in the statement of recognised income and
expenses. This statement would be compulsory for entities recognising actuarial gains and
losses in reserves. If the entity adopts this approach, it must do so:
184
Question (past service costs)

Wakili Co operates a pension plan that provides a pension of 2% of nal salary for every year
of service and the benets become vested after ve years service. On 1 January 20 x 6 Wakili
Co improved the pension to 2.5% of nal salary for every year of service starting from 1 January
20x2.
At the date of improvement, the present value of the additional benets for service from 1 January
20x2 to 1 January 20 x 6 is as follows.
Sh.m
Employees with more than 5 years service at 1/11x 6
300
Employees with less than 5 years service at 1/11x6

(average period until vesting = 3years
240
540
Required
S T U D Y
T E X T
State the correct accounting treatment for past service costs.
Answer
Wakili Co. should recognise Sh.300m immediately, because these benets are already vested.
Sh.240m should be recognised on a straight line basis over three years from 1 January 20 x
6.
Plan assets
The contributions into a plan by the employer (and employees) are invested, and the plan builds
up assets in the form of stocks and shares, etc. The fair value of these plan assets are
deducted from the dened benets obligation, in calculating the balance sheet liability. This
makes sense, because the employer is not liable to the dened benets scheme to the extent
that the assets of the fund are sufcient to meet those obligations.
The standard includes the following specic requirements:
a)
The fair value of the plan assets should be net of any transaction costs that would be
incurred in selling them.
b)
The plan assets should exclude any contributions due from the employer but not yet
paid.
185
Return on Plan assets

It is also necessary to recognise the distinction between:
The expected return on the plan assets, which is an actuarial assumption, and
The actual return made by the plan assets in a nancial period.
The expected return on the plan assets is a component element in the income statement, not
the actual returns. The difference between the expected return and the actual return may
also be included in the income statement, but within the actuarial gains or losses. This difference
will only be reported it the actuarial gains or losses are outside the 10% corridor for these gains
or losses, otherwise they will not be included in the expense item because they are not regarded
as signicant.
>>> Example: Plan assets
After these transactions, the fair value of the plans assets at 31 December 20 x 2 was Sh.1.5m.
The present value of the dened benet obligation was Sh.1,479,200 and actuarial losses on the
obligation for 20 x 2 were Sh.6,000.
The expected return on the plan assets (net of investment transaction costs) is 8% per annum.
The reporting entity made the following estimates at 1 January 20 x 2, based on market prices
at that date.
%
Dividend/interest income (after tax payable by fund)
9.25
Realised and unrealised gains (after tax) on plan assets
2.00
(1.00)
10.25
Required
Calculate the expected and actual return on plan assets, calculate any actuarial gain or loss and
state the required accounting.
S T U D Y
On 31 December 20x2, the plan received contributions from the employer of Sh.490,000 and
paid out benets of 190,000.
T E X T
At 1 January 20 x 2 the fair value of the assets of a dened benet plan were valued at Sh.1m.
Net cumulative actuarial gains and losses were Sh.76,000.
186
Solution
The expected and actual return for 20 x 2 are as follows.

Sh.
Return on Sh.1m held for 12months at 10.25%
Return on Sh.(490,000 190,000) = Sh.300,000
For 6months at 5% (i.e. 10.25% annually compounded every 6months)
102,500
15,000
117,500
S T U D Y
T E X T
Sh.
Fair value of plan assets at 31/12/x2
1,500,000
Less fair value of plan assets at 1/1 x 2
1,000,000
Less contributions received
(470,000)
Add benets paid
190,000
Actual return on plan assets
200,000
Actuarial gain = Sh.(200,000 117,500) = Sh.82,500.
Therefore cumulative net unrecognised actuarial gains = Sh.(76,000 + 82,500 6, 000) =

Sh.152,500.
The limits of the corridor are set at the greater of:
10% x Sh.1,500,000 and

10% x Sh.1,479,920.
In 20 x 3, the entity should recognise an actuarial gain of Sh.(152,500 150,000) = Sh.2,500,

divided by the expected average remaining working life of the relevant employees.
For 20 x 3, the expected return on plan assets will be based on market expectations at 1/1 x 3 for
returns over the entire life of the obligation.
The following accounting treatment is required:
In the income statement, an expected return on fund assets of Sh.117,500 will be

recognised, together with an actuarial gain of Sh.2,500 divided by the expected average
remaining useful life of the employees.
187
In the balance sheet, the dened benet liability will adjust the dened benet obligation
as at 31 December 20 x 2. The unrecognised actuarial gain (i.e. the gain within the
10% corridor) should be added, and the market value of the plan assets as at that date
should be subtracted.
Summary
The recognition and measurement of dened benet plan costs are complex issues.
Learn the outline method of accounting
Learn the calculations for the Projected Unit Credit Method
Learn the recognition method for the:

Balance sheet
Income statement
1. Curtailments and settlements

A curtailments occurs when an entity cuts back on the benets available under a dened benet
scheme, so that there is either a signicant reduction in the number of employees eligible for the
post employment benets (e.g. because a large number of staff have been made redundant
due to plant closure), or there is a reduction in the post-employment benets that will be given for
the future service of current employees.
A settlement occurs either when an employer pays off its post employment benet obligations in
exchange for making a lump sum payment, or when an employer reduces the of post-employment
benets payable in future in respect of past service.
A curtailment and settlement might happen together, for example when an employer brings
a dened benet plan to an by settling the obligation with one-of lump sum payment and then
scrapping the plan.
Gains or losses arising from curtailment or settlement of a dened benet plan should be
recognised in full in the nancial year that they occur. These gains or losses will comprise
the following.
Any change in the present value of the future obligations of the entity as a result of the
curtailment or settlement.
Any change in the fair value of the plan asset as consequence of the curtailment or
settlement.
S T U D Y
This section looks at the presentation and disclosure of dened benet plans, but we begin here
by looking at the special circumstances of curtailment and settlements.
T E X T
Dened benet plans: Other matters
188
Any related actuarial gains/ losses and past service cost that had not previously been
recognised.
An entity should remeasure the obligation (and the related plan assets, if any) using current
actuarial assumptions, before determining the effect of curtailment or settlement.
QUESTION
Hossan Co. discontinued a business segment. Employees of the discontinued segment will
earn no further benets (i.e. this is a curtailment without a settlement). Using current actuarial
assumptions (including current market interest rates and other current market prices) immediately
before the curtailment, the Hewsan Co. had a dened benet obligation with a net present value
of Sh.500,000, plan assets with a fair value of Sh.410,000 and net cumulative unrecognised
actuarial gains of Sh.25,000. The entity had rst adopted IAS 19 (revised) one year later. This
increased the net liability by Sh.50,000, which the entity chose to recognise over ve years (this
is permitted under the transitional provisions: see below).
T E X T
Show the required treatment for the curtailment
S T U D Y
Required
Of the previously unrecognised actuarial gains and transitional amounts, 10% (Sh.50,000/
Sh.500,000) relates to the part of the obligation that was eliminated through the curtailment.
Therefore, the effect of the curtailment is as follows.
Answer
Before Curtailment
Net present value of

obligation
Fair value of plan assets
Unrecognised actuarial
gains
Unrecognised
transitional amount
(Sh.50,000 x 4/5)
Net liability recognised in
balance sheet
Curtailment gain
Sh.000
Sh.000
500.0
(50.0)
(410.0)
After curtailment
Sh.000
450.0
(410.0)
90.0
(50.0)
25.0
(2.5)
(40.0)
4.0
75.0
43.5
40.0
22.5
(36.0)
26.5
189
Presentation and disclosure

The standard states that an entity should not offset an set relating to one plan against a liability
relating to a different plan, unless the entity has a legally enforceable right of offset and intends
to use it.
The disclosure requirements given below are substantial and you wont be expected to know
all the details in the exam. Just try to appreciate the reasons for the disclosure and the
general approach.
Exam focus
Accounting policy for recognising actuarial gains and losses.
General description of the type of plan
Reconciliation of the assets and liabilities recognised in the balance sheet, showing
the following as a minimum.
o
o
o
o
o
Present value at the balance sheet date of dened benet obligations that are wholly
unfunded.
Present value (before deducting the fair value of plan assets) at the balance sheet date
of dened benet obligations that are wholly or partly funded.
Fair value of any plan assets at the balance sheet date.
Net actuarial gains or losses not recognised in the balance sheet.
Past service cost not yet recognised in the balance sheet.
Any amount not recognised as an asset, because of the limit.
Amounts recognised in the balance sheet.
Amounts included in the fair value of plan assets for:
Each category of the reporting entitys own nancial instruments, and
Any property occupied by, or other assets used by, the reporting entity
Reconciliation showing the movements during the period in the net liability (or asset)
recognised in the balance sheet.
Total expense recognised in the income statement for each of the following and the
S T U D Y
A reporting entity should disclosure the following information about post retirement dened benet
plans.
T E X T
Point
190
line item(s) of the income statement in which they are included.

o
o
o
o
o
o
Current service cost

Interest cost
Expected return on plan assets
Actuarial gains and losses
Past service cost
Effect of any curtailment or settlement
Actual return on plan assets.
Principal actuarial assumptions used as at the balance sheet date, including, where
applicable:
o
o
Discount rates
Expected rates of return on any plan assets for the periods presented in the nancial
statements.
Expected rates of salary increases (and of changes in an index or other variable specied
in the formal or constructive terms of a plan as the basis for future benet increases.
Medical cost trend rates
Any other material actuarial assumptions used
S T U D Y
T E X T
o
o
o
Disclose each actuarial assumption in absolute terms (e.g. as an absolute percentage) and not
just as a margin between different percentages or other variables.
It would be useful for you to do one last question on accounting for post employment dened
benet schemes. Questions on these are most likely in the exam.
191
CHAPTER SUMMARY
Corporation tax: is the tax payable by a company as a result of generating prots from trading.
Deferred tax: is the corporation tax that is likely to be incurred on the activities of a company
Full deferral: requires that full tax effects of all timing differences are recognised as they arise.
The approach is arithmetically accurate but can lead to the build up of large, meaningless
provisions appearing on the balance sheet.
Partial deferral: requires that the income tax expense excludes the tax effects of certain timing
differences when there is reasonable evidence that those timing differences will not reverse for
some considerable period (at least 3 years) ahead.
Employee benets: are all forms of consideration given by an entity in exchange for service
S T U D Y
Timing Differences: is items reported in the accounts in periods different from those in which
T E X T
that have occurred by the balance sheet date.
192
plans.
S T U D Y
T E X T
a)
Pool the assets contributed by various entities that are not under common control,
and
b)
use those assets to provide benets to employees of more than one entity, on the basis
Other long-term employee benets are employee benets (other than post employment benets
and termination benets) which do not fall due wholly within twelve months after the end of the
period in which the employees render the related service.

a)
an entitys decision to terminate an employees employment before the normal retirement

date, or
b) an employees decision to accept voluntary redundancy in exchange for those benets.

employment.
193
What should be disclosed in relation to taxes?
2.
What were the reasons for rejecting the partial provision method?
3.
What are the categories of employee benets?
4.
Explain the following:

i) Assets held by a long-term employee benet fund
ii) A qualifying insurance policy
iii) The return of plan assets
iv) Actuarial gains and losses
v) Past service cost
S T U D Y
1.
T E X T
CHAPTER QUIZ
194

1.
Disclosures
i.
Tax expense (income) must be shown separately on the face of the income statement,
with separate disclosure made of its major components and any tax expense (income)
relating to extra ordinary items.
Tax expense (income) relating to the gain or loss on discontinuance for discontinued
operations and to the prot or loss from the ordinary activities of the discontinued
operation for the period must also be disclosed.
An explanation is required of the relationship between tax expense (or income) and
accounting prot either of numerical reconciliation between the average effective tax
rate and the applicable tax rate. An explanation is required of any changes in the
applicable tax rate(s) compared to the previous period.
The aggregate amount of temporary differences for which either deferred tax assets
or liabilities have not been recognized (i.e. for unremitted re-invested earnings of
subsidiaries should be disclosed. For each type of temporary difference and for unused
tax losses and credits, disclosure is required of the amount of deferred tax assets and
liabilities recognized and the amount of deferred tax income or expense recognized.
The amount of any deferred tax asset and evidence supporting its recognition must
be disclosed when its utilization is dependent on future taxable prots in excess of
the prots arising from the reversal of existing taxable temporary differences, and the
enterprise has suffered a loss in the current or previous period in the tax jurisdiction
to which the deferred tax asset relates. Separate disclosure is also required of the
aggregate current and deferred tax relating to items that are charged or credited to
equity.
ii.
iii.
S T U D Y
T E X T
iv.
2.
Reasons for rejecting the partial provision method.

The partial provision method allowed companies to avoid creating provisions for tax
that they argued they were unlikely to pay. However, by the early 1990s, concerns were
being expressed about the method and the way in which it was being applied. It was
noted in particular that:
i.
The recognition rules and anticipation of future events were subjective and inconsistent
with the principles underlying other aspects of accounting.
The partial provision method had not been regarded as appropriate for dealing with the
long-term deferred tax assets associated with provisions for post-retirement benets.
As a result, SSAP 15 had been amended in 1992 to permit such assets to be accounted
for on a full provision basis. The amendment introduced inconsistencies into SSAP
15.
There were variations in the way in which SSAP 15 was applied in practice. Different
entities within the same industry and with similar prospects seemed to take quite
different views on the levels of provisions necessary. There was evidence that some
companies provided for deferred tax in full for simplicitys sake rather than because
their circumstances required it. The different approaches being taken reduced the
comparability of nancial statements.
Because of its recognition rules and anticipation of future events, the partial provision
method was increasingly being rejected by standard-setters in other countries. The
ii.
iii.
195
US Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) had issued a standard FAS 109
Accounting for Income Taxes requiring full provision. The International Accounting
Standards Committee (IASC) had published proposals for similar requirements and
other standard setters had started to move in the same direction.
When rejecting the partial provision method, the FASB and IASC argued in particular that:
Every tax timing difference represented a real liability, since everyone would reverse
and, whatever else happened, an entity would pay more tax in future as a result of the
reversal than it would have done in the absence of the timing difference.
(ii) It was only the impact of new timing differences arising in future that prevented the
total liability from reducing. It was inappropriate (and inconsistent with other areas of
accounting) to take account of future transactions when measuring an existing liability.
(iii) The assessment of the liability using the partial provision method relied on management
intentions regarding future events. Standard setters were uncomfortable with this,
having already embodied in a number of other standards the principle that liabilities
should be determined on the basis of obligations rather than management decisions or
intentions.
The standard recognises four categories of employee benets. These are:
(i)
Short-term benets including:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Wages and salaries

Social security contributions
Paid annual leave
Paid sick leave
Paid maternity/Paternity leave
Prot shares and bonuses paid within 12 months of the year end
Paid jury service
Paid military service
Non-monetary benets, e.g. medical care, cars, free goods.
(ii)
Post employment benets e.g. Pensions and post employment medical care
(iii) Other long-term benets e.g. prot shares, bonuses or deferred compensation payable
later than 12months after the year end, sabbatical leave, long-service benets.
(iv) Termination benets e.g. early retirement payments and redundancy payments.
4.
(i) Assets held by a long-term employee benet fund are assets (other than nontransferable nancial instruments issued by the reporting entity) that:
a)
b)
Are held by an entity (a fund) that is legally separates from the reporting entity and
exists solely to pay or fund employee benets; and
Are available to be used only to pay or fund employee benets, are not available to
the reporting entitys own creditors (even in bankruptcy), and cannot be returned to the
reporting entity, unless either:
i)
the remaining assets of the fund are sufcient to meet all the related employee benet
S T U D Y
3.
T E X T
(i)
196
ii)
(ii)
a)
b)
obligations of the plan or the reporting entity; or

the assets are returned to the reporting entity to reimburse it for employee benets
already paid
A qualifying insurance policy is an insurance policy issued by an insurer that is not a
related policy (as dened in IAS 24) of the reporting entity, if the process of the policy:
Can be used only to pay or fund employee benets under a dened benet plan: or
Are not available to the reporting entitys own creditors (even in bankruptcy) and cannot
be paid to the reporting entity, unless either:
i)
The proceeds represent surplus assets that are not needed for the policy to meet all the
related employee benet obligations of the plan or the reporting entity; or
ii) The assets are returned to the reporting entity to reimburse it for employee benets
already paid.
(iii) The return of plan assets is interest, dividends and other revenue derived from the
plan assets, together with realised and unrealised gains or losses on the plan assets,
less any cost of administering the plan and loess any tax payable by the plan itself.
(iv) Actuarial gains and losses comprise:
S T U D Y
T E X T
a)
b)
(v)
Experience adjustments (the effects of differences between the previous actuarial

assumptions and what has actually occurred), and
The effects of changes in actuarial assumptions.
Past service cost is the increase in the present value of the dened benet obligation
for employee service in prior periods, resulting the in the current periods, resulting in the
current period from the introduction of, or changes to, post-employment benets or other
long-term employee benets. Past service cost may be either positive (where benets
are introduced or improved) or negative (where existing benets are reduced).
PAST PAPER ANALYSIS

Corporation tax was tested in the following examinations:
06/03
12/01
06/01
Deferred tax was tested in the following examinations:
06/06
06/03
12/01
06/01
197
Employee benets was tested in the following examinations:

12/07
06/06
12/03
EXAM QUESTIONS
(a)
Explain the following terms with reference to International Accounting Standard 19

(Employee Benets):
(i) Current service cost
(2 marks)
(ii) Past service cost
(2 marks)
(iii) Vested employee benets
(2 marks)
(b)
ABC Ltd. contributes sh.30 million per annum to a pension scheme and treats the
amount as current service cost pension expense.
T E X T
On 1 July 1998, the actuarial valuation of the scheme showed a decit of sh.600 million.
The actuary recommended that the decit be cleared within four years by paying sh.150
million per year in addition to the annual service costs. The average remaining service
life of employees in the scheme on 1 July 1998 was eight years.
S T U D Y
QUESTION ONE
Required:
For each of the remaining eight service years of the employees, calculate the pension expense
and pension expense and pension liability or prepayment. (6 marks)
(c)
XYZ Ltd. contributes sh.60 million annually to a pension scheme and treats the amount
as being `equivalent to annual service cost.
On 1 January 1996, the actuarial valuation showed that the scheme had a surplus of
sh.320 million. The actuary
recommended non-contribution to the scheme for
three years then a resumption of annual contribution of sh.40 million per annum for
the following seven years before reverting to the standard
annual contribution of
sh.60 million.
The average remaining service years of employees, calculate the pension expense and
pension liability or prepayment.
(8 marks)
(Total: 20 marks)
(CPA 2006)
198
CASE STUDY
Case Study: Abbey
2009-02-01
As a nancial institution, Abbey regards nancial education as being paramount to the wellbeing
of its 16,000 employees, particularly during the current economic climate.
S T U D Y
T E X T
It is planning to launch a workplace nancial education programme to help staff cope with the
credit crunch, following on from an initiative built around its sharesave scheme last year.
Maria Strid, head of reward, says: We feel it is important to keep investment in nancial education
high. The companys intranet site is also used for updating staff on perks. To ensure employees
can easily access all benets, we have invested in an online benets communication platform.
This has made it easy for staff to see what Abbey offers that can make a difference to take-home
pay, for example, discounted retail vouchers.
Source: www.google.com- case studies on employee benets
T E X T
PART B
S T U D Y
199
S T U D Y
T E X T
200
201
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
CHAPTER FOUR
PRESENTATION AND
ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS (PART A)
S T U D Y
T E X T
202
203
CHAPTER FOUR
PRESENTATION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS (PART A)
OBJECTIVES
Prepare cashow statements
Calculate earnings per share
Prepare segmental reports
INTRODUCTION
A trading and prot account is the usual method of describing what has happened in a business
during the past year, and it incorporates many adjustments in order to show a more true and fair
view of the prot.
EPS is the amount of earnings for a period that is attributable to each ordinary/equity share. As
per IAS 33 Earnings per share, enterprises whose ordinary shares or potential ordinary shares
are publicly traded and those enterprises that are in the process of issuing ordinary shares or
potential ordinary shares in public securities market should calculate and disclose earnings per
share.
Potential ordinary shares are securities, which are not presently equity shares but, which have
the potential of causing additional equity shares to be issued in the future.
IAS 24 is about companies disclosing requirements about transactions with related companies or
parties. It is one of the shortest standard and therefore not difcult to comprehend.

Free Cash ows: Is the Cash from operations less the amount of capital expenditures required
to maintain the rms present productive capacity.
Rights issue is regarded as an issue for cash at full market price and partly a bonus issue on the
combined number of original and assumed rights shares.
S T U D Y
T E X T
After this chapter, the student will be able to:
204
Parties are considered to be related if one party has the ability to control the other party or to
exercise signicant inuence or joint control over the other party in making nancial and operating
decisions.
A related party transaction is a transfer of resources, services, or obligations between related

parties, regardless of whether a price is charged.
EXAM CONTEXT
S T U D Y
T E X T
In past examinations, the examiner has tested the students knowledge on the following topics:
Cashow statements
Earnings per share
Related parties
Segmental reports
INDUSTRY CONTEXT
This chapter will enable rms to know how to prepare cashow statements which are necessary
to:
a.
Assess the enterprises ability to generate positive future cash ows;
b.
Assess the enterprises ability to meet its obligations, pay dividends and meet its needs
for external reporting;
c.
Assess the reasons for differences between net income and related cash receipts and
payments; and
d.
Assess the effects on the enterprises nancial position of both cash and non-cash
investing and nancing transactions during the period.
Firms will also be able to calculate their earnings per share and prepare segment reports.
PRESENTATION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (PART A)
205
4.1 INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (1AS 34)

4.1.0. Introduction and scope
IAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting prescribes the minimum content for an interim nancial
report, and the principles for recognition and measurement in complete and condensed nancial
statements for an interim period. The Standard has been effective since 1 January 1999, and
was most recently amended as a consequential amendment of IAS 1(2007) Presentation of
Financial Statements, resulting in changes in terminology, and in the titles and layout of certain
of the nancial statements to be included in interim nancial reports. These amendments are
effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2009.
IAS 34 applies to interim nancial reports that are described as complying with International
Financial Reporting Standards. [IAS 34.3]
Interim nancial reports are nancial reports containing either a complete set of nancial
statements (as described in IAS 1) or a set of condensed nancial statements (as described later
in this guide) for an interim period. An interim period is a nancial reporting period shorter than
a full nancial year. [IAS 34.4]
4.1.2 No requirement to prepare Interim Financial Reports

IAS 34 does not contain any rules as to which entities should publish interim nancial reports, how
frequently, or how soon after the end of an interim period. The Standard notes that governments,
securities regulators, stock exchanges, and accountancy bodies often require entities with
publicly-traded debt or equity to publish interim nancial reports, and that those regulations will
generally specify the frequency and timing of such reports. However, IAS 34 encourages publiclytraded entities:
[IAS 34.1]
to provide interim nancial reports at least as of the end of the rst half of their nancial
year; and
to make their interim nancial reports available no later than 60 days after the end of the
interim period.
S T U D Y
4.1.1 Scope of IAS 34
T E X T
IFRS 8 Operating Segments, which supersedes IAS 14 Segment Reporting and is effective
for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2009, has expanded the segment information to
be disclosed in interim nancial reports. In this guide, it is assumed that the interim accounting
period under consideration begins on or after 1 January 2009 no reference is made to the
requirements of IAS 34 applicable to earlier periods.
206
4.1.3 No requirement for Interim Financial Reports to comply with IAS 34

Each nancial report, annual or interim, is evaluated on a stand-alone basis for compliance with
IFRSs. It is important to note that entities that prepare annual nancial statements in accordance
with IFRSs are not precluded from preparing interim nancial reports that do not comply with
IFRSs, provided that the interim report does not state that it is IFRS-compliant. The fact that an
entity has not published interim nancial reports during a nancial year, or that it has published
interim nancial reports that do not comply with IAS 34, does not prevent the entitys annual
nancial statements from conforming to IFRSs, if they are otherwise IFRS-compliant. [IAS 34.1
& 2]
S T U D Y
T E X T
4.1.4 Preliminary Announcements

IAS 34 does not address the content of preliminary interim earnings announcements (i.e. those
earnings announcements issued shortly after the end of an interim period that disclose abbreviated
preliminary nancial information for the interim period just ended). IAS 34.3 does state, however,
that if an interim nancial report is described as complying with IFRSs, it must comply with all of
the requirements of IAS 34.
Therefore, if any reference to IFRSs is made in a preliminary interim earnings announcement,
the following sentences (or something substantively similar) should be included in that earnings
release.
While the nancial gures included in this preliminary interim earnings announcement
have been computed in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards
(IFRSs) applicable to interim periods, this announcement does not contain sufcient
information to constitute an interim nancial report as that term is dened in IFRSs. The
directors expect to publish an interim nancial report that complies with IAS 34 in March
20X2.
4.2. CONTENT OF AN INTERIM FINANCIAL REPORT

4.2.1 General principles underlying the preparation of nancial
statements
If an entity presents a complete set of nancial statements for interim reporting purposes (as
described in IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements see chapter 3 of this guide), it must
apply IAS 1 in full. If an entity presents a condensed set of nancial statements for interim
reporting purposes, IAS 1.4 contains the following guidance.
This Standard does not apply to the structure and content of condensed interim nancial
statements prepared in accordance with IAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting. However,
207
paragraphs 15-35 apply to such nancial statements.

Paragraphs 15-35 of IAS 1, which therefore apply when preparing all interim nancial reports
(whether condensed or complete), deal with:
Fair presentation and compliance with ifrss;
Going concern;
Accrual basis of accounting;
Materiality and aggregation; and
Offsetting.
[IAS 34.8]
a condensed statement of nancial position;
a condensed statement of comprehensive income, presented as either:
a condensed single statement; or
a condensed separate income statement and a condensed statement of comprehensive

income;
a condensed statement of changes in equity;
a condensed statement of cash ows; and
Selected explanatory notes.
If, in its annual nancial statements, an entity presents the components of prot or loss in a
separate income statement as described in IAS 1.81, it should also present interim condensed
information in a separate statement. [IAS 34.8A]
Note that the titles of the nancial statements listed above have been amended as a consequential
amendment of IAS 1(2007). Entities are permitted to use titles for these statements other than
those set out above. An entity would be expected to use the same titles in its interim nancial
report as are used in its annual nancial statements.
These amendments are effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2009 and entities
should describe their effect on the nancial statements in the rst interim nancial report for that
year.
S T U D Y
Entities reporting in accordance with IAS 34 are required to include in their interim nancial
reports, at a minimum, the following components:
T E X T
4.2.2 Minimum components
208
4.3
PERIODS REQUIRED TO BE PRESENTED
4.3.1 Entities that report half-yearly

Based on the requirements of IAS 34.20, example 2.3.1 illustrates the statements required to be
presented in the interim nancial report of an entity that reports half-yearly, with a 31 December
20X9 year end.
>>> Example 2.3.1
S T U D Y
T E X T
Statements required for entities that report half-yearly
Statement
Current
Comparative
Statement of nancial position at
30 June 20X9
31 December 20X8
30 June 20X9
30 June 20X8
30 June 20X9
30 June 20X8
30 June 20X9
30 June 20X8
Statement of comprehensive income (and,

where applicable, separate income statement)
6 months ended
Statement of changes in equity
6 months ended
Statement of cash ows
6 months ended
Content of an interim nancial report 3
4.3.2 Entities that report quarterly

Based on the requirements of IAS 34.20, example 2.3.2 illustrates the statements required to be
presented in the half-yearly interim nancial report of an entity that reports quarterly, with a 31
December 20X9 year end.
209
>>> Example 2.3.2
Statements required for entities that report quarterly

Statement
Current
Comparative
30 June 20X9
31 December 20X8
6 months ended
30 June 20X9
30 June 20X8
3 months ended
30 June 20X9
30 June 20X8
30 June 20X9
30 June 20X8
30 June 20X9
30 June 20X8
Statement of nancial position at

Statement of comprehensive income (and, where
applicable, separate income statement)
Statement of changes in equity

6 months ended
4.3.3 Entities with seasonal businesses

The requirements of IAS 34.20, as discussed above, specify the minimum periods for which
interim nancial statements are to be presented.
However, entities may wish to provide additional information. For example, an entity whose
business is highly seasonal is encouraged to disclose nancial information relating to the twelve
months up to the end of the interim period, and comparative information for the equivalent
twelvemonth period in the prior year. [IAS 34.21]
4.3.4 Change of nancial year end

>>> Example 2.3.4
Comparative interim period when nancial year end changes

Company As nancial year ends on 31 March. It reports half-yearly. It prepared annual nancial
statements for the year ended 31 March 20X1.
Subsequently, it published a half-yearly report for the six months ended 30 September 20X1.
Company A changes its nancial year end to 31 December and prepares annual nancial
statements for the nine months ended 31 December
20X1. Its half-yearly interim report for 20X2 will be for the six months ended 30 June 20X2. What
comparative period should be used for the
June 20X2 interim nancial report?
S T U D Y
6 months ended
T E X T
Statement of cash ows
210
IAS 34 does not consider the circumstances where there is a change in the nancial year end. IAS
34.20 requires the presentation of comparative information for the statement of comprehensive
income, statement of changes in equity, and statement of cash ows, for comparable interim
periods. In many circumstances, using the period from 1 January 20X1 to 30 June 20X1 as
the comparative period may be preferable to using the amounts previously reported for the
period from 1 April 20X1 to 30 September 20X1, because this would enable users to compare
trends over time, particularly in a seasonal business. However, based on the particular facts and
circumstances, other periods may be appropriate (e.g. where local regulations prescribe the
comparative period(s) to be presented following a change in nancial year end).
Content of an interim nancial report 5
S T U D Y
T E X T
4.3.5 Comparative nancial statements when interim nancial reports

are produced for the rst time
When an entity is preparing its rst interim nancial report under IAS 34, unless the report relates
to the rst period of operation, it should generally include comparatives as discussed in the
previous sections. In the exceptional circumstances where the entity does not have available
in its accounting records the nancial information needed to prepare the comparative interim
nancial statements, the entity has no choice but to omit prior period comparative nancial
statements.
In the circumstances described, however, the omission of the comparative nancial statements
represents a non-compliance with IAS 34.
Therefore, the interim nancial report cannot be described as complying with IAS 34 without an
except for statement regarding the omission of prior period comparative gures. Both the fact
of, and the reason for, the omission should be disclosed.
4.4
CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
If the entitys most recent annual nancial statements were consolidated statements, then the
interim nancial report should also be prepared on a consolidated basis. If the entitys annual
nancial report included the parents separate nancial statements in addition to consolidated
nancial statements, IAS 34 neither requires nor prohibits the inclusion of the parents separate
statements in the entitys interim report. [IAS 34.14]
Where the entity has disposed of all of its subsidiaries during the interim period, such that it has
no subsidiaries at the end of the interim reporting period, it should prepare its interim nancial
report on a consolidated basis because it had subsidiaries at some point during the interim
period. The statement of comprehensive income, statement of changes in equity and statement
of cash ows will include the impact of the subsidiaries up to the date(s) of disposal and the
effects of the disposal.
4.5
2 11
MATERIALITY
Materiality is dened in IAS 1.7 as follows.

Omissions or misstatements of items are material if they could, individually or collectively;
inuence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the nancial statements.
Materiality depends on the size and nature of the omission or misstatement, judged in
the surrounding circumstances. The size or nature of the item, or a combination of both,
could be the determining factor.
4.6. CONDENSED OR COMPLETE INTERIM FINANCIAL

STATEMENTS
Where the minimum required information for interim nancial statements prescribed by IAS 34.8
(as listed in section 2.2 above) is presented, the resultant nancial statements are described
as condensed. However, entities also have the option of including a complete set of nancial
statements in their interim nancial reports. Where an entity takes this alternative, the form and
content of the nancial statements must conform to the requirements of IAS 1 Presentation of
Financial Statements for a complete set of nancial statements, in addition to complying with the
requirements of IAS 34. [IAS 34.7 & 9] Therefore, the measurement and disclosure requirements
of all relevant Standards apply. These include all measurement and disclosure requirements
of IAS 34 and, in particular, the selected explanatory note disclosures listed in IAS 34.16 (see
chapter 4 of this guide).
The requirements of IAS 1 (other than the general principles referred to in section 2.1 above) are
not generally applicable to condensed interim nancial statements.
S T U D Y
While materiality judgments are always subjective, the overriding concern is to ensure that
an interim nancial report includes all of the information that is relevant to understanding the
nancial position and performance of the entity during the interim period. Therefore, it is generally
inappropriate to base quantitative estimates of materiality on projected annual gures.
T E X T
IAS 34.23 requires that, in deciding how to recognise measure, classify, or disclose an item for
interim nancial reporting purposes, materiality should be assessed in relation to the interim
period nancial data. In making assessments of materiality, it should be recognised that interim
measurements may rely on estimates to a greater extent than measurements of annual nancial
data.
212
4.6.1 Items to appear on the face of condensed nancial statements

IAS 34 requires, for each component (statement of nancial position, statement of comprehensive
income, statement of changes in equity, and statement of cash ows), that each of the headings
and subtotals that were included in the entitys most recent annual nancial statements should be
disclosed. Additional line items are required if their omission would make the condensed interim
nancial statements misleading. [IAS 34.10]
In prescribing the minimum content, IAS 34 uses the phrase each of the headings and
subtotals, thereby seeming to imply that not all of the line items that were presented in the most
recent annual nancial statements are necessarily required. Such an interpretation would do a
disservice, however, to a user of the nancial statements who is trying to assess trends in the
interim period in relation to nancial years.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Therefore, the phrase should be interpreted, in nearly all cases, to mean the line items that
were included in the entitys most recent annual nancial statements. The line items in most
published nancial statements are already highly aggregated and it would be difcult to think of a
line item in the annual statement of comprehensive income, in particular, that would not also be
appropriate in an interim statement of comprehensive income.
For the statement of nancial position, a too literal interpretation of each of the headings and
subtotals might lead to an interim statement of nancial position that presented lines only for
total current assets, total non-current assets, total current liabilities, total non-current liabilities
and total equity, which would generally be insufcient for trend analysis.
For the statement of changes in equity, all material movements in equity occurring in the interim
period should be disclosed separately.
In the case of the statement of cash ows, some aggregation of the lines from the annual
statement may be appropriate, but subtotals for operating, investing and nancing only are
unlikely to be sufcient.
If a particular category of asset, liability, equity, income, expense or cash ows was so material
as to require separate disclosure in the nancial statements in the most recent annual nancial
statements, such separate disclosure will generally be appropriate in the interim nancial
report.
Further aggregation would only be anticipated where the line items in the annual statements are
unusually detailed.
Under IAS 34.10, additional line items should be included if their omission would make the
condensed interim nancial statements misleading.
Therefore, a new category of asset, liability, income, expense, equity or cash ow arising for
the rst time in the interim period may require presentation as an additional line item in the
condensed nancial statements.
A category of asset, liability, income, expense, equity or cash ow may be signicant in the
context of the interim nancial statements even though it is not signicant enough to warrant
separate presentation in the annual nancial statements. In such cases, separate presentation
in the condensed interim nancial statements may be required.
213
4.6.2 Use of the term condensed

The requirements discussed in the previous section will result in the presentation of at least
some statements that include all of the line items, headings and subtotals that were presented
in the most recent annual nancial statements. The question then arises as to whether such
statements should, in practice, be described as condensed.
SELECTED EXPLANATORY NOTES
IAS 34 species that an interim nancial report should contain selected explanatory notes.
4.7.1 Required disclosures

The disclosure requirements of IAS 34 are based on the assumption that anyone reading the
interim nancial report will have access to the most recent annual nancial statements. Therefore,
not all of the supplementary notes in the annual nancial statements are required for interim
reporting purposes, because this would result in repetition, or the reporting of relatively insignicant
changes. The explanatory notes included with the interim nancial information are intended to
provide an explanation of events and transactions that are signicant to an understanding of
the changes in nancial position and performance of the entity since the end of the last annual
reporting period. [IAS 34.15]
The list below sets out the minimum explanatory notes required by IAS 34. The information is
generally presented on a nancial year-to-date basis.
However, the entity is also required to disclose any events or transactions that are material to an
understanding of the current interim period.
[IAS 34.16]
The following information should be disclosed in the notes to the interim nancial statements, if
material to an understanding of the interim period and if not disclosed elsewhere in the interim
nancial report: [IAS 34.16]
S T U D Y
4.7
T E X T
Given that the notes supplementing the interim nancial statements are limited, the presentation
package taken together is condensed from what would be reported in a complete set of nancial
statements under IAS 1 and other Standards. In such circumstances, the information presented in
the statement of nancial position, statement of comprehensive income, statement of changes in
equity and statement of cash ows is condensed even if the appearance of the statements has
not changed. These interim statements should therefore be described as condensed, because
otherwise a user might infer that they constitute a complete set of nancial statements under IAS
1, which they do not. A complete set of nancial statements must include a full note presentation
consistent with the annual presentation.
214
(a)
A statement that the same accounting policies and methods of computation are followed
in the interim nancial statements as were followed in the most recent annual nancial
statements or, if those policies or methods have been changed, a description of the
nature and effect of the change (see chapter 5 of this guide);
(b)
Explanatory comments about the seasonality or cyclicality of interim operations;
(c)
The nature and amount of items affecting assets, liabilities, equity, net income or cash
ows, that is unusual because of their size, nature or incidence;
(d)
the nature and amount of changes in estimates of amounts reported in prior interim
periods of the current nancial year, or changes in estimates of amounts reported
in prior nancial years, if those changes have a material effect in the current interim
period;
Issuances, repurchases and repayments of debt and equity securities;
(e)
(f)
(g)
Dividends paid (aggregate or per share), separately for ordinary shares and other
shares;
The following segment information (see 4.3 below):
T E X T
(i) Revenues from external customers, if included in the measure of segment prot or
loss reviewed by the chief operating decision maker or otherwise regularly
provided to the chief operating decision maker;
S T U D Y
(ii) Intersegment revenues, if included in the measure of segment prot or loss

reviewed by the chief operating decision maker or otherwise regularly provided to
the chief operating decision maker;
(iii) A measure of segment prot or loss;
(iv) Total assets for which there has been a material change from the amount
disclosed in the last annual nancial statements;
(v) A description of differences from the last annual nancial statements in the basis
of segmentation or in the basis of measurement of segment prot or loss; and
(vi) A reconciliation of the total of the reportable segments measures of prot or
loss to the entitys prot or loss before tax expense (tax income) and discontinued
operations. However, if an entity allocates to reportable segments items such
as tax expense (tax income), the entity may reconcile the total of the segments
measures of prot or loss to prot or loss after those items. Material reconciling
items should be separately identied and described in that reconciliation;
(h)
Material events subsequent to the end of the interim period that have not been reected
in the interim nancial statements;
(i)
The effect of changes in the composition of the entity during the interim period, including
business combinations (see 4.4 below), obtaining or losing control of subsidiaries and
long-term investments, restructurings and discontinued operations; and
(j)
215
Changes in contingent liabilities or contingent assets since the end of the last reporting
period.
4.8 ACCOUNTING POLICIES FOR INTERIM REPORTING

4.8.1 Same accounting policies as annual nancial statements
The accounting policies applied in the interim nancial statements should be consistent with those
applied in the most recent annual nancial statements, except for accounting policy changes
made after the date of the most recent annual nancial statements that are to be reected in the
next annual nancial statements. [IAS 34.28]
4.8.2 Changes in accounting policies
T E X T
Preparers of interim nancial reports in compliance with IAS 34 are required to consider any
changes in accounting policies that will be applied for the next annual nancial statements,
and to implement the changes for interim reporting purposes. Such changes will generally
encompass:
S T U D Y
Entities are required to disclose in their interim nancial reports that this requirement has been
met. [IAS 34.16(a)]
Changes required by an IFRS that will be effective for the annual nancial statements;
and
Changes that are proposed to be adopted for the annual nancial statements, in
accordance with the requirements of IAS 8 Accounting
Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, on the basis that they will result in the
nancial statements providing reliable and more relevant information.
If there has been any change in accounting policy since the most recent annual nancial
statements, the interim nancial report is required to include a description of the nature and effect
of the change. [IAS 34.16(a)]
If a new Standard that is effective in the current nancial year requires disclosures in annual
nancial statements, those disclosures would not ordinarily be required in a condensed interim
nancial report, unless specically required by IAS 34 or by the new Standard. For example,
IFRS 7
Financial Instruments: Disclosures would not generally affect an entitys interim nancial report
because disclosures in accordance with IFRS 7 are not required unless their omission would
make the condensed interim nancial statements misleading. In contrast, IFRS 8 Operating
Segments resulted in consequential amendments to IAS 34, which require more detailed segment
information in the interim nancial report (see section 4.3 above).
216
If a new Standard or Interpretation has been published during the rst interim period but it is not
effective until after the end of the annual reporting period, an entity may decide in the second
interim period to adopt this Standard or Interpretation early for its annual nancial statements.
The fact that the new Standard or Interpretation was not early adopted in its rst interim nancial
statements does not generally preclude the entity from adopting a new policy in the second interim
period or at the end of the annual reporting period. The requirements for restating previously
reported interim periods are discussed at section 5.3.
4.8.3 Restatement of previously reported interim periods

A change in accounting policy, other than one for which the transitional provisions are specied
by a new IFRS, should be reected by:
S T U D Y
T E X T
[IAS 34.43]
*
restating the nancial statements of prior interim periods of the current nancial year,
and the comparable interim periods of prior nancial years that will be restated in annual
nancial statements in accordance with IAS 8; or
when it is impracticable to determine the cumulative effect at the beginning of the nancial
year of applying a new accounting policy to all prior periods, adjusting the nancial
statements of prior interim periods of the current nancial year, and comparable interim
periods of prior nancial years, to apply the new accounting policy prospectively from
the earliest date practicable.
IAS 8 states that retrospective application of a new accounting policy is impracticable when an
entity cannot apply it after making every reasonable effort to do so.
IAS 34.44 states that an objective of these principles is to ensure that a single accounting policy
is applied to a particular class of transactions throughout an entire nancial year. That is not to
say that voluntary changes in accounting policy part-way through the year are prohibited.
Such changes are permitted, provided that the conditions of IAS 8 are met. What IAS 34.44
requires is that, where a change in accounting policy is adopted at some point during the year,
the amounts reported for earlier interim periods should be restated to reect the new policy.
(Source: www.iasplus.com- IAS 34) -Read the full report
217
4.9 FIRST TIME ADOPTION OF IFRS (IFRS 1)

FAST FORWARD: It is a very important standard as it explains what assets or liabilities should
be recognized or derecognized by adopting IFRSs and what adjustments may be required if this
happens.
This standard is important for entities adopting IFRS for the rst time and it was an important
project for IASB as it tried to make the transition from local standards to IFRS for many European
countries smooth.
The standard has provided detailed guidance on the transition by way of illustrative examples.
Denition of rst-time adoption

A rst-time adopter is an entity that, for the rst time, makes an explicit and unreserved statement
that its general purpose nancial statements comply with IFRSs.
An entity may be a rst-time adopter if, in the preceding year, it prepared IFRS nancial statements
for internal management use, as long as those IFRS nancial statements were not and given to
owners or external parties such as investors or creditors. If a set of IFRS nancial statements
was, for any reason, given to an external party in the preceding year, then the entity will already
be considered to be on IFRSs, and IFRS 1 does not apply.
An entity can also be a rst-time adopter if, in the preceding year, its published nancial statements
asserted:
Compliance with some but not all IFRSs.
Included only a reconciliation of selected gures from previous GAAP to IFRSs.

(Previous GAAP means the GAAP that an entity followed immediately before adopting
to IFRSs.)
However, an entity is not a rst-time adopter if, in the preceding year, its published
nancial statements asserted:
Compliance with IFRSs even if the auditor's report contained a qualication with respect
to conformity with IFRSs.
Compliance with both previous GAAP and IFRSs.
S T U D Y
IFRS 1, First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards, sets out the procedures
that an entity must follow when it adopts IFRSs for the rst time as the basis for preparing its
general purpose nancial statements.
T E X T
Objective
218
Effective date of IFRS 1

IFRS 1 applies if an entitys rst IFRS nancial statements are for a period beginning on or after
1 January 2004. Earlier application is encouraged.
T E X T
Overview for an entity that adopts IFRSs for the rst time in its annual nancial statements for the
year ended 31 December 2005.
1.
Accounting policies. Select its accounting policies based on IFRSs in

force at 31 December 2005. (The exposure draft that preceded IFRS
1 had proposed that an entity could use the IFRSs that were in force
during prior periods, as if the entity had always used IFRS. That option
is not included in the nal standard.)
2.
IFRS reporting periods. Prepare at least 2005 and 2004 nancial

statements and restate retrospectively the opening balance sheet
(beginning of the rst period for which full comparative nancial
statements are presented) by applying the IFRSs in force at 31
December 2005.
Since IAS 1 requires that at least one year of comparative prior period
nancial information be presented, the opening balance sheet will be 1
January 2004 if not earlier.
If a 31 December 2005 adopter reports selected nancial data (but not
full nancial statements) on an IFRS basis for periods prior to 2004, in
addition to full nancial statements for 2004 and 2005, that does not
change the fact that its opening IFRS balance sheet is as of 1 January
2004.
a.
S T U D Y
b.
Adjustments required to move from previous GAAP to IFRSs at the

time of rst-time adoption
1.
Derecognition of some old assets and liabilities. The entity should eliminate
previous-GAAP assets and liabilities from the opening balance sheet if they do not
qualify for recognition under IFRSs. For example:
a. IAS 38 does not permit recognition of expenditure on any of the following as an
intangible asset:
research
start-up, pre-operating, and pre-opening costs
training
advertising and promotion
moving and relocation

If the entity's previous GAAP had recognised these as assets, they are eliminated
in the opening IFRS balance sheet.
219
b. If the entitys previous GAAP had allowed accrual of liabilities for general
reserves, restructurings, future operating losses, or major overhauls that do not
meet the conditions for recognition as a provision under IAS 37, these are
eliminated in the opening IFRS balance sheet.
c. If the entitys previous GAAP had allowed recognition of reimbursements and
contingent assets that are not virtually certain, these are eliminated in the opening
IFRS balance sheet.
2.
Recognition of some new assets and liabilities. Conversely, the entity should
recognise all assets and liabilities that are required to be recognised by IFRS even if
they were never recognised under previous GAAP. For example:
a. IAS 39 requires recognition of all derivative nancial assets and liabilities,
including embedded derivatives. These were not recognised under many local
GAAPs.
T E X T
3.
c. IAS 37 requires recognition of provisions as liabilities. Examples could include

an entitys obligations for restructurings, onerous contracts, decommissioning,
remediation, site restoration, warranties, guarantees, and litigation.
d. Deferred tax assets and liabilities would be recognised in conformity with IAS 12.
S T U D Y
b. IAS 19 requires an employer to recognise its liabilities under dened benet plans.
These are not just pension liabilities but also obligations for medical and life
insurance, vacations, termination benets, and deferred compensation. In the
case of over-funded plans, this would be a dened benet asset.
Reclassication. The entity should reclassify previous-GAAP opening balance sheet

items into the appropriate IFRS classication. Examples:
a. IAS 10 does not permit classifying dividends declared or proposed after the
balance sheet date as a liability at the balance sheet date. In the opening IFRS
balance sheet these would be reclassied as a component of retained earnings.
b. If the entitys previous GAAP had allowed treasury stock (an entitys own shares
that it had purchased) to be reported as an asset, it would be reclassied as a
component of equity under IFRS.
c. Items classied as identiable intangible assets in a business combination
accounted for under the previous GAAP may be required to be classied as
goodwill under IAS 22 because they do not meet the denition of an intangible
asset under IAS 38. The converse may also be true in some cases. These items
must be reclassied.
d. IAS 32 has principles for classifying items as nancial liabilities or equity. Thus
mandatorily redeemable preferred shares and puttable shares that may have
been classied as equity under previous GAAP would be reclassied as liabilities
in the opening IFRS balance sheet.
220
Note that IFRS 1 makes an exception from the split-accounting provisions of IAS 32.
If the liability component of a compound nancial instrument is no longer outstanding at
the date of the opening IFRS balance sheet, the entity is not required to reclassify out of
retained earnings and into other equity the original equity component of the compound
instrument.
e. The reclassication principle would apply for the purpose of dening reportable
segments under IAS 14.
f.
The scope of consolidation might change depending on the consistency of the

previous-GAAP requirements to those in IAS 27. In some cases, IFRS will require
consolidated nancial statements where they were not required before.
S T U D Y
T E X T
g. Some offsetting (netting) of assets and liabilities or of income and expense items
that had been acceptable under previous GAAP may no longer be acceptable
under IFRS.
4.
Measurement. The general measurement principle there are several signicant

exceptions noted below is to apply IFRS in measuring all recognised assets and
liabilities. Therefore, if an entity adopts IFRS for the rst time in its annual nancial
statements for the year ended 31 December 2005, in general it would use the
measurement principles in IFRSs in force at 31 December 2005.
5.
Adjustments required to move from previous GAAP to IFRS at the time of rsttime adoption. These should be recognised directly in retained earnings or other
appropriate category of equity at the date of transition to IFRSs.
How to recognise adjustments required to move from previous GAAP

to IFRSs
Adjustments required to move from previous GAAP to IFRSs at the time of rst-time adoption
should be recognised directly in retained earnings or, if appropriate, another category of equity
at the date of transition to IFRSs.
Exceptions to the basic measurement principle in IFRS 1

1.
Optional exceptions. There are some important exceptions to the general restatement
and measurement principles set out above. The following exceptions are individually
optional, not mandatory:
Business combinations that occurred before opening balance sheet date

a. An entity may keep the original previous-GAAP accounting, that is, not restate:
1. previous mergers or goodwill written-off from reserves;
2. the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities recognised at the date of acquisition
or merger;
3. how goodwill was initially determined (do not adjust the purchase price allocation
on acquisition).
221
a. IFRS 1 includes an appendix explaining how a rst-time adopter should account

for business combinations that occurred prior to transition to IFRS.
b. However, should it wish to do so, an entity can elect to restate all business
combinations starting from a date it selects prior to the opening balance sheet
date.
c. In all cases, the entity must make an initial IAS 36 impairment test of any
remaining goodwill in the opening IFRS balance sheet, after reclassifying, as
appropriate, previous GAAP intangibles to goodwill.
d. IFRS 1 includes an appendix explaining how a rst-time adopter should account
for business combinations that occurred prior to transition to IFRS.
These assets may be measured at their fair value at the opening IFRS balance sheet
date (this option applies to intangible assets only if an active market exists). Fair value
becomes the deemed cost going forward under the IFRS cost model. (Deemed cost
is an amount used as a surrogate for cost or depreciated cost at a given date.)
b.
If, before the date of its rst IFRS balance sheet, the entity had revalued any of these
assets under its previous GAAP either to fair value or to a price-index-adjusted cost,
that previous-GAAP revalued amount at the date of the revaluation can become the
deemed cost of the asset under IFRS.
c.
If, before the date of its rst IFRS balance sheet, the entity had made a one-time
revaluation of assets or liabilities to fair value because of a privatisation or initial public
offering, and the revalued amount became deemed cost under the previous GAAP,
that amount (adjusted for any subsequent depreciation, amortisation, and impairment)
would continue to be deemed cost after the initial adoption of IFRS.
IAS 19 - Employee benets: actuarial gains and losses

An entity may elect to recognise all cumulative actuarial gains and losses for all dened benet
plans at the opening IFRS balance sheet date (that is, reset any corridor recognised under
previous GAAP to zero), even if it elects to use the IAS 19 corridor approach for actuarial gains
and losses that arise after rst-time adoption of IFRS. If an entity does not elect to apply this
exemption, it must restate all dened benet plans under IAS 19 since the inception of those
plans (which may differ from the effective date of IAS 19).
IAS 21 - Accumulated translation reserves

An entity may elect to recognise all translation adjustments arising on the translation of the
nancial statements of foreign entities in accumulated prots or losses at the opening IFRS
balance sheet date (that is, reset the translation reserve included in equity under previous GAAP
to zero). If the entity elects this exemption, the gain or loss on subsequent disposal of the foreign
S T U D Y
a.
T E X T
Property, plant, and equipment, intangible assets, and investment

property carried under the cost model
222
entity will be adjusted only by those accumulated translation adjustments arising after the opening
IFRS balance sheet date. If the entity does not elect to apply this exemption, it must restate the
translation reserve for all foreign entities since they were acquired or created.
2.
Mandatory exceptions. There are also three important exceptions to the general
restatement and measurement principles set out above that are mandatory, not optional.
These are:
IAS 39 - Derecognition of nancial instruments

A rst-time adopter is not permitted to recognise nancial assets or nancial liabilities that had
been derecognised under its previous GAAP in a nancial year beginning before 1 January 2001
(the effective date of IAS 39). This is consistent with the transition provision in IAS 39.172(a).
However, if an SPE was used to effect the derecognition of nancial instruments and the SPE is
controlled at the opening IFRS balance sheet date, the SPE must be consolidated.
S T U D Y
T E X T
IAS 39 - Hedge accounting

The conditions in IAS 39.122-152 for a hedging relationship that qualies for hedge accounting
are applied as of the opening IFRS balance sheet date. The hedge accounting practices, if any,
that were used in periods prior to the opening IFRS balance sheet may not be retrospectively
changed. This is consistent with the transition provision in IAS 39.172(b). Some adjustments
may be needed to take account of the existing hedging relationships under previous GAAP at
the opening balance sheet date.
Information to be used in preparing IFRS estimates retrospectively

In preparing IFRS estimates retrospectively, the entity must use the inputs and assumptions that
had been used to determine previous GAAP estimates in periods before the date of transition
to IFRS, provided that those inputs and assumptions are consistent with IFRS. The entity is not
permitted to use information that became available only after the previous-GAAP estimates were
made except to correct an error.
Changes to disclosures
For many entities, new areas of disclosure will be added that were not requirements under the
previous GAAP (perhaps segment information, earnings per share, discontinuing operations,
contingencies, and fair values of all nancial instruments) and disclosures that had been required
under previous GAAP will be broadened (perhaps related party disclosures).
223
Disclosure of selected nancial data for periods before the rst

IFRS balance sheet
IAS 1 only requires one year of full comparative nancial statements. If a rst-time adopter wants
to disclose selected nancial information for periods before the date of the opening IFRS balance
sheet, it is not required to conform that information to IFRS, conforming that earlier selected
nancial information to IFRSs is optional.
If the entity elects to present the earlier selected nancial information based on its previous GAAP
rather than IFRS, it must prominently label that earlier information as not complying with IFRS
and, further, it must disclose the nature of the main adjustments that would make that information
comply with IFRS. This latter disclosure is narrative and not necessarily quantied.
Of course, if the entity elects to present more than one year of full comparative prior period
nancial statements at the time of its transition to IFRSs, that will change the date of the opening
IFRS balance sheet.
1.
Reconciliations of equity reported under previous GAAP to equity under IFRS both (a)
at the date of the opening IFRS balance sheet and (b) the end of the last annual period
reported under the previous GAAP. For an entity adopting IFRSs for the rst time in its
31 December 2005 nancial statements, the reconciliations would be as of 1 January
2004 and 31 December 2004.
2.
Reconciliations of prot or loss for the last annual period reported under the previous
GAAP to prot or loss under IFRSs for the same period.
3.
Explanation of material adjustments that were made, in adopting IFRSs for the rst
time, to the balance sheet, income statement, and cash ow statement.
4.
If errors in previous-GAAP nancial statements were discovered in the course of

transition to IFRSs, those must be separately disclosed.
5.
If the entity recognised or reversed any impairment losses in preparing its opening
IFRS balance sheet, these must be disclosed.
6.
Appropriate explanations if the entity has availed itself of any of the specic recognition
and measurement exemptions permitted under IFRS 1 - for instance, if it used fair
values as deemed cost.
S T U D Y
IFRS 1 requires disclosures that explain how the transition from previous GAAP to IFRS affected
the entitys reported nancial position, nancial performance, and cash ows. This includes:
T E X T
Disclosures in the nancial statements of a rst-time adopter
224
Disclosure of an impending change to IFRS

If an entity is going to adopt IFRS for the rst time in its annual nancial statements for the year
ended 31 December 2005, certain disclosure are required in its interim nancial statements
prior to the 31 December 2005 statements, but only those interim nancial statements purport to
comply with IAS 34. Explanatory information and a reconciliation are required in the interim report
that immediately precedes the rst set of IFRS annual nancial statements. The information
includes changes in accounting policies compared to those under previous GAAP.
Compliance in interim reports in the year of rst-time adoption

of IFRS
S T U D Y
T E X T
If an entity that adopts IFRS for the rst time in its annual nancial statements for the year
ended 31 December 2005, it is required to apply IFRS 1 in its interim nancial reports for periods
within the year ended 31 December 2005 if those interim reports are described as conforming
to International Financial Reporting Standards. It would not be required to apply IFRS 1 if those
interim reports are described as conforming to previous GAAP.
Different IFRS adoption dates of investor and investee

A parent or investor may become a rst-time adopter earlier than or later than its subsidiary,
associate, or joint venture investee. In these cases, IFRS 1 is applied as follows:
1.
If the subsidiary has adopted IFRSs in its entity-only nancial statements before the
group to which it belongs adopts IFRS for the consolidated nancial statements, then
the subsidiarys rst-time adoption date is still the date at which it adopted IFRS for the
rst-time, not that of the group. However, the group must use the IFRS measurements
of the subsidiarys assets and liabilities for its rst IFRS nancial statements except for
adjustments relating to the business combinations exemption and to conform group
2.
If the group adopts IFRSs before the subsidiary adopts IFRSs in its entity-only nancial
statements, then the subsidiary has an option either (a) to elect that the group date of
IFRS adoption is its transition date or (b) to rst-time adopt in its entity-only nancial
statements.
3.
If the group adopts IFRSs before the parent adopts IFRSs in its entity-only nancial
statements, then the parents rst-time adoption date is the date at which the group
adopted IFRSs for the rst time.
4.
If the group adopts IFRSs before its associate or joint venture adopts IFRSs in its entityonly nancial statements, then the associate or joint venture should have the option
to elect that either the group date of IFRS adoption is its transition date or to rst-time
adopt in its entity-only nancial statements.
225
Conclusion
IFRS 1 is a complex accounting standard consisting of three parts (as do all IFRS):
(a)
(b)
(c)
the standard itself

a basis for conclusions which summarises the IASBs considerations in arriving at the
requirements of the standard
an implementation guide which explains, with the aid of many practical examples, how
the standards requirements should be implemented and how IFRS 1 interacts with
other IFRS.
>>> Example
Required:
(i)
(ii)
Describe the circumstances where the presentation of an entitys nancial statements

is deemed to be the rst-time adoption of IFRSs and explain the main nancial reporting
implementation issues to be addressed in the transition to IFRSs.
(7 marks)
Describe IFRS 1s accounting requirements where an entitys previous accounting
policies for assets and liabilities do not comply with the recognition and measurement
requirements of IFRSs.
(8 marks)
(b) Transit, a publicly listed holding company, has a reporting date of 31 December each
year. Its nancial statements include one years comparatives. Transit currently applies
local GAAP accounting rules, but is intending to apply IFRSs for the rst time in its
nancial statements (including comparatives) for the year ending 31 December 2005.
Its summarised consolidated balance sheet (under local GAAP) at 1 January 2004 is:
(i) Transits depreciation policy for its property, plant and equipment has been based on tax rules
set by its government. If depreciation had been based on the most appropriate method under
IFRSs, the carrying value of the property, plant and equipment at 1 January 2004 would have
been $800,000.
(ii) The development costs originate from an acquired subsidiary of Transit. They do not qualify
for recognition under IFRSs. They have a tax base of nil and the deferred tax related to these
costs is $100,000.
(iii) The inventory has been valued at prime cost. Under IFRSs it would include an additional
$30,000 of overheads.
(iv) The restructuring provision does not qualify for recognition under IFRSs.
(v) Based on IFRSs, the deferred tax provision required at 1 January 2004, including the effects
of the development expenditure, is $360,000.
T E X T
IFRS 1 First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards was

issued in June 2003. Its main objectives are to ensure high quality information that is
transparent and comparable over all periods presented and to provide a starting point
for subsequent accounting under International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
within the framework of a cost benet exercise.
S T U D Y
(a)
226
Required:
Prepare a summarized balance sheet for Transit at the date of transition to IFRSs
(1 January 2004) applying the requirements of IFRS 1 to the above items.
Note: Reconciliation to previous GAAP is not required.
(10 marks)
(25 marks)
Solution
(a)
S T U D Y
T E X T
(i)
It is important to determine which nancial statements constitute the rst-time adoption

of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) because IFRS 1 only applies to
those nancial statements. It does not apply to subsequent nancial statements that
are prepared under IFRSs as these must be prepared under the whole body of IFRSs
(including IASs). A rst time adopter is an entity that makes an explicit and unreserved
statement that its nancial statements comply with (all) IFRSs. Compliance with some,
but not all, IFRSs is insufcient as is compliance with all IFRSs without the inclusion of
an explicit statement of compliance.
The main issues to be addressed in the transition to IFRSs are:
deciding the date of transition.
selecting accounting policies that comply with IFRSs.
preparing (but not presenting) an opening balance sheet at the date of transition to
IFRSs as a basis for subsequent accounting. The date of transition to IFRSs is the
beginning of the earliest comparative period. If the companys reporting date for its
rst IFRS nancial statements is say 31 December 2005 and it intends to disclose one
years comparatives, then the date of transition is 1 January 2004.
determining estimates of values for both the opening IFRS balance sheet and all other
presented comparative balance sheets; and nally
presenting IFRS nancial statements (including the required disclosures relating to the
transition).
Note: some credit would be given for references to practical issues such as required
changes to information systems and the recruitment of personnel with IFRS
experience.
(ii)
When a company adopts IFRSs for the rst time it must use the IFRSs that are in force
at the reporting date. These IFRSs should be applied throughout all of the periods
presented normally two years. This means that comparative nancial statements
must comply with the IFRSs in force at the reporting date even if they were not in issue
at the date of the comparatives (or different from those that were in issue).
The general principle is that the adoption of IFRSs should be applied retrospectively i.e.
as if the entity had always applied each IFRS. This is contrary to the specic transitional
requirements contained in some individual IFRSs (they often allow prospective
application). More specically an entity must:
recognise all assets and liabilities that fall to be recognised by IFRSs (e.g. IFRSs require
deferred tax to be recognized on a full provision basis)
not recognise assets and liabilities if IFRSs do not permit their recognition (e.g. IFRSs
do not permit general provisions to be made and some proposed dividends are not
treated as liabilities)
reclassify certain items under IFRSs (e.g. convertible debt must be split between its
equity and debt components under IFRSs, but in some jurisdictions it may have been
classed entirely as debt)
apply IFRS rules to measure the value of all recognised assets and liabilities. This may
mean for example using a no discounted value to measure an item whereas under
previous GAAP it may have been discounted
give specied reconciliations for equity and reported prots between previous GAAP
and IFRSs, together with details of any recognition or reversals of impairments when
implementing rst time reporting. The resulting adjustments arising from the above
must be recognised directly in equity at the date of transition.
The Standard contains some specic exemptions and exceptions to the above in
the areas of values of property, plant and equipment, employee benets, translation
differences for net investments in foreign operations and derivative instruments. In
essence the exemptions and exceptions allow the use of alternative value measures
in limited circumstances and where the cost or effort required in determining the value
measurements under IFRSs would be excessive.
The exemptions are permitted but not required and can be applied in full or individually,
whereas exceptions (to retrospective application) are mandatory.
A particularly important exemption is that the IFRS rules governing business combinations
are not applied retrospectively. However any intangible that was recognised under
previous GAAP that cannot be recognised under IFRSs should be reclassied as
goodwill and the entity must test for impairment of goodwill at the date of transition.
(b)
As Transit intends rst-time adoption for the year ended 31 December 2005 and to
disclose one years comparatives, the date of transition to IFRSs is 1 January 2004.
Transit summarised balance sheet at 1 January 2004
$000
Property, plant and equipment (w (i))
Goodwill (450 + 300 (w (ii)))
Development costs (w (ii)) nil
Current assets
Inventory (150 + 30 (w (i)))
Receivables
Bank
Total asset
Retained earnings (w (v))
Current liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Restructuring provision (w (iii))
Deferred tax (w (iv))
180
250
20
$000
800
750
1550
450
2,000
500
1320
320
nil
360
680
2000
T E X T
227
S T U D Y
228
In addition the goodwill will be tested for impairment and if there is any indication of impairment
to the other identiable assets, they too must be tested for impairment.
Workings (all gures in $000)

(i)
Property, plant and equipment and inventory are restated to their IFRS base valuations
of $800,000 and $180,000 respectively.
(ii)
Acquired intangible assets that do not qualify for recognition under IFRSs must be
reclassied as goodwill after allowing for the effect of deferred tax. Thus an amount of
$300 (400 100 re deferred tax) is transferred to goodwill and $100 debited to deferred
tax.
(iii) The restructuring provision does not qualify for recognition under IFRSs.
(i) Summarising the effect on deferred tax:
Per question
Re development costs
(100)
200
T E X T
S T U D Y
300
(v)
Required balance
(360)
Charge to retained earnings
(160)
Summarising the effect on retained earnings:
per question
property, plant and equipment
Inventory
elimination of restructuring provision
deferred tax
900
(200)
30
250
(160)
820
229
4.10 SMALL AND MEDIUM-SIZED ENTITY FINANCIAL

REPORTING FRAMEWORK
Scope (www.googlo.co.ke small and medium sized entity nancial
reporting framework)
1.
The Small and Medium-sized Entity Financial Reporting Framework (SME-FRF) sets
out the conceptual basis (paragraphs 2-15) and qualifying criteria (paragraphs 16-26)
for the preparation of nancial statements in accordance with the Small and Mediumsized Entity Financial Reporting Standard (SME-FRS).
Users of nancial statements generally include present and potential investors,

employees, lenders, suppliers and other trade creditors, customers, governments and
their agencies and, in some cases, the public. For SMEs, the most signicant users
are likely to be owners, government and creditors, who may have the power to obtain
information additional to that contained in the nancial statements. Management is also
interested in the information contained in the nancial statements, even though it has
access to additional management and nancial information.
Objective
3.
The objective of nancial statements is to provide information about the nancial position
and performance of an entity that is useful to users of such information. Financial
statements show the results of managements stewardship of and accountability for the
resources entrusted to it.
Underlying Assumptions
4.
Financial statements are prepared on the accrual basis of accounting. They are
normally prepared on the assumption that an entity is a going concern and will continue
to operate for at least the foreseeable future.
Qualitative Characteristics
5.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Qualitative characteristics are the attributes that make the information provided in
nancial statements useful to users. The four principal characteristics are:
Understandability: It is essential that information provided in nancial statements is
readily understandable by users.
Relevance: To be useful, information must be relevant to the needs of users. The
relevance of information is affected by its nature and materiality.
Reliability: Information is reliable when it is free from material error and bias and can
be depended on by users to represent faithfully that which it is said to represent. In
assessing reliability, substance over form, prudence, neutrality and completeness are
also considered.
S T U D Y
2.
T E X T
Users
230
(d)
Comparability: Users must be able to compare the nancial statements of an entity over
time in order to identify trends in the entitys nancial position and performance.
6.
Constraints: The balance between benet and cost is a pervasive constraint rather
than a qualitative characteristic. The benets derived from information should exceed
the cost of providing it. The evaluation of benets and costs is, however, substantially a
judgmental process. Users of nancial statements should be aware of this constraint.
7.
In practice, trade-offs between qualitative characteristics are often necessary.

Determining the relative importance of the characteristics in different cases is a matter
of professional judgment.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Elements
8.
An asset is a resource controlled by the entity as a result of past events and from
which future economic benets are expected to ow to the entity.
9.
A liability is a present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the settlement
of which is expected to result in an outow from the entity of resources embodying
economic benets.
10. Equity is the residual interest in the assets of the entity after all its liabilities have been
deducted.
11. Income encompasses both revenue and gains. It includes increases in economic
benets during the accounting period in the form of inows or enhancements of assets
as well as decreases of liabilities that result in increases in equity, other than those
relating to contributions from equity participants.
12. Expenses encompass losses as well as those expenses that arise in the course of the
ordinary activities of the entity. Expenses are decreases in economic benets.
Recognition
13. An item that meets the denition of an element should be recognised if (a) it is probable
that any future economic benet associated with the item will ow to or from the
entity; and (b) the item has a cost or value that can be measured with reliability. The
interrelationship between the elements means that an item that meets the denition
and recognition criteria for a particular element, for example, an asset, automatically
requires the recognition of another element, for example, income or a liability.
Measurement
14. The measurement base most commonly adopted by entities in preparing their nancial
statements is historical cost. This may be combined with other measurement bases
for certain specic items, as referred to in the SME-FRS (for example, Section 15 The
Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates).
15. Under the historical cost convention:
(a) assets are recorded at the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair value
231
of the consideration given to acquire them at the time of their acquisition; and
(b)
Liabilities are recorded at the amount of proceeds received in exchange for the
obligation, or in some circumstances (for example, income taxes), at the amounts of
cash or cash equivalents expected to be paid to satisfy the liability in the normal course
of business.
Assets should not be revalued nor should future cash ows be discounted in the
measurement of assets and liabilities except when required or permitted by the SMEFRS.
Qualifying Entities
(a)
All of its owners agree to prepare the nancial statements in accordance with the SMEFRS; and
(b)
The entity is considered to be an SME in terms of its size under paragraph 24.
18. An entity which is a subsidiary or an intermediate holding company of an entity qualies

for reporting under the SME-FRF for its own nancial statements if it also satises the
conditions set out in paragraph 17.
19. Unless the law requires otherwise, it is presumed that, once an agreement is made by
all owners to prepare the nancial statements in accordance with the SME-FRS, the
agreement will remain valid until there is a change in the ownership or the agreement is
revoked by an owner or an entity no longer qualies for reporting under the SME-FRF.
20. When an entity has not been considered to be an SME in terms of its size under
paragraph 24 and subsequently becomes an SME, the entity will not qualify for reporting
under the SME-FRF in terms of paragraph 17(b) until the entity has been determined to
be an SME for two consecutive reporting periods.
21. Where an entity has previously qualied for reporting under the SME-FRF in terms of
paragraph 17, the entity will no longer qualify for reporting under the SME-FRF in terms
of paragraph 17(b) until the entity is no longer an SME for two consecutive reporting
periods.
S T U D Y
17. An entity, other than a company incorporated under the Companies Ordinance, subject
to any specic requirements imposed by the law of the entitys place of incorporation
and subject to its constitution, qualies for reporting under the SME-FRF when the
entity does not have public accountability (paragraphs 22 23), and:
T E X T
16. A company incorporated under the Companies Ordinance qualies for reporting under
the SME-FRF if it satises the criteria set out in section 141D of that Ordinance.
Compliance with the SME-FRF and SME-FRS is necessary in order for nancial
statements to give a true and correct view when a Hong Kong incorporated company
prepares its nancial statements in accordance with section 141D of the Companies
Ordinance.
232
Public Accountability
22. An entity has public accountability for the purposes of the SME-FRF if:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
at any time during the current or preceding reporting period, the entity (whether in the
public or private sector) is an issuer of securities, that is, its equity or debt securities
are publicly traded or it is in the process of issuing publicly traded equity or debt
securities;
the entity is an institution authorised under the Banking Ordinance;
the entity is an insurer authorised under the Insurance Companies Ordinance; or
the entity is a corporation which is granted a license under the Securities and Futures
Ordinance to carry on business in a regulated activity in Hong Kong.
23. An entity does not have public accountability, for the purposes of the SME-FRF, solely
by reason of receiving public funds from another entity that has the power to tax, rate
or levy to obtain public funds.
Size
T E X T
(a)
(b)
(c)
S T U D Y
24. An entity is considered to be an SME if it does not exceed any two of the following:
25. For the purposes of paragraph 24, the total revenue and total assets are determined
after the application of the SME-FRS and, in the case where the reporting period is
shorter or longer than a year, the total revenue is determined on an annualised basis.
Total annual revenue of HK$50 million.

Total assets of HK$50 million at the balance sheet date.
50 employees.
26. For the purposes of paragraph 24, the number of employees is the average number of
persons employed by the entity during the reporting period (irrespective of whether in
full-time or part-time employment) determined on a monthly basis as follows:
(a) Determine the number of employees as at the end of each calendar month.
(b) Add together all the monthly numbers in (a).
(c) Divide the number in (b) by the number of months in the reporting period.
Transitional Provisions
27. The transition to the SME-FRF and SME-FRS is accounted for as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
All items recognised previously under a different GAAP (for example, deferred tax
liability) which do not meet the recognition criteria under the SME-FRF and SME-FRS
are to be derecognised and dealt with as a change of accounting policy under the SMEFRS.
All items not recognised previously under a different GAAP which do meet the recognition
criteria under the SME-FRF and SME-FRS are to be recognised in accordance with the
relevant section of the SME-FRS and dealt with as a change of accounting policy under
the SME-FRS.
All items recognised previously under a different GAAP, which do meet the recognition
criteria under the SME-FRF and SME-FRS, but which were previously measured
233
on a basis inconsistent with the SME-FRF and SME-FRS are to be re-measured in

accordance with the relevant section of the SME-FRS and dealt with as a change of
accounting policy under the SME-FRS.
Effective Date
28. The SME-FRF becomes effective for a Qualifying Entitys nancial statements that
cover a period beginning on or after 1 January 2005. Earlier application is permitted.
Denitions
The following terms are used in the SME-FRS with the meanings specied:
Accounting policies are the specic principles, bases, conventions, rules and practices applied
by an entity in preparing and presenting nancial statements.
The items traded within the market are homogeneous;
(b)
Willing buyers and sellers can normally be found at any time; and
(c)
Prices are available to the public.
Amortisation is the systematic allocation of the depreciable amount of an intangible asset over
its useful life.
An asset is a resource:
(a)
Controlled by an entity as a result of past events; and
(b)
from which future economic benets are expected to ow to the entity.
An associate is an entity over which the investor has signicant inuence and that is neither a
subsidiary nor an interest in a joint venture.
Borrowing costs are interest and other costs incurred by an entity in connection with the borrowing
of funds.
Carrying amount is the amount at which an asset or a liability is recognised in the balance
sheet after the deduction of (if applicable) any accumulated depreciation (amortisation) and
accumulated impairment losses thereon, or any write-down to net realisable value.
Cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits.
Cash equivalents are short-term, highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to known
amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignicant risk of changes in value.
Cash ows are inows and outows of cash and cash equivalents.
Close members of the family of an individual are those family members who may be expected to
inuence, or be inuenced by, that individual in their dealings with the entity. They may include:
S T U D Y
(a)
T E X T
An active market is a market in which all the following conditions exist:
234
(a)
(b)
(c)
The individuals spouse and children;

Children of the individuals spouse; and
Dependants of the individual or the individuals spouse.
The closing rate is the spot exchange rate at the balance sheet date.
A construction contract is a contract specically negotiated for the construction of an asset or

a combination of assets that are closely interrelated or interdependent in terms of their design,
technology and function or their ultimate purpose or use. Construction contracts include: contracts
for the rendering of services which are directly related to the construction of the asset, for example,
those for the services of project managers and architects; and contracts for the destruction or
restoration of assets, and the restoration of the environment following the demolition of assets.
S T U D Y
T E X T
A constructive obligation is an obligation that derives from an entitys actions where:

(a)
by an established pattern of past practice, published policies or a sufciently specic

current statement, the entity has indicated to other parties that it will accept certain
responsibilities; and
(b)
as a result, the entity has created a valid expectation on the part of those other parties
that it will discharge those responsibilities.
A contingent asset is a possible asset that arises from past events and whose existence will be
conrmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not
wholly within the control of the entity.
A contingent liability is:
(a)
A possible obligation that arises from past events and whose existence will be conrmed
only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not
wholly within the control of the entity; or
(b)
A present obligation that arises from past events but is not recognised because:
(i) It is not probable that an outow of resources embodying economic benets will
be required to settle the obligation; or
(ii) The amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufcient reliability.
Contingent rent is that portion of the lease payments which is not xed in amount but is based on
a factor other than the passage of time (e.g. percentage of sales, amount of usage, price indices,
and market rates of interest).
Control (of an asset) is the power to obtain the future economic benets that ow from the
asset.
Control (of an entity) is the power to govern the nancial and operating policies of an entity so as
to obtain benets from its activities.
235
Cost is the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair value of the other consideration
given to acquire an asset at the time of its acquisition, production or construction.
A cost-plus contract is a construction contract in which the contractor is reimbursed for allowable
or otherwise dened costs, plus a percentage of these costs or a xed fee.
Current tax is the amount of income taxes payable (recoverable) in respect of the taxable prot
(tax loss) for a period.
Depreciable amount is the cost of an asset less its residual value.
Economic life is either:

(a)
The period over which an asset is expected to be economically usable by one or more
users; or
(b)
The number of production or similar units expected to be obtained from the asset by
one or more users.
Events after the balance sheet date are events, both favourable and unfavorable, that occur
between the balance sheet date and the date when the nancial statements are authorised for
issue. Two types of events can be identied:
(a)
Those providing evidence of conditions that existed at the balance sheet date (adjusting
events after the balance sheet date); and
(b)
Those indicative of conditions that arose after the balance sheet date (non-adjusting
events after the balance sheet date).
Exchange difference is the difference resulting from translating a given number of units of one
currency to another currency at different exchange rates.
Exchange rate is the ratio of exchange for two currencies.
Fair value is the amount for which an asset could be exchanged, or a liability settled, between a
knowledgeable, willing buyer and a knowledgeable, willing seller in an arms length transaction.
S T U D Y
Development is the application of research ndings or other knowledge to a plan or design for the
production of new or substantially improved materials, devices, products, processes, systems or
services prior to the commencement of commercial production or use.
T E X T
Depreciation is the systematic allocation of the depreciable amount of an asset over its useful
life.
236
A nance lease is a lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to
ownership of an asset. Title may or may not eventually be transferred.
A xed price contract is a construction contract in which the contractor agrees to a xed contract
price, or a xed rate per unit of output, which in some cases is subject to cost escalation
clauses.
Foreign currency is a currency other than the reporting currency of an entity.
Government refers to government, government agencies and similar bodies, whether local,
national or international.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Government assistance is action by government designed to provide an economic benet specic

to an entity or range of entities qualifying under certain criteria. Government assistance does not
include benets provided only indirectly through action affecting general trading conditions, such
as the provision of infrastructure in development areas or the imposition of trading constraints on
competitors.
Government grants are assistance by government in the form of transfers of resources to an entity
in return for past or future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of
the entity. They exclude those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a
value placed on them and transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the
normal trading transactions of the entity.
Grants related to assets are government grants whose primary condition is that an entity qualifying
for them should purchase, construct or otherwise acquire long-term assets. Subsidiary conditions
may also be attached restricting the type or location of the assets or the periods during which
they are to be acquired or held.
Grants related to income are government grants other than those related to assets.
Guaranteed residual value is:

(a)
(b)
in the case of the lessee, that part of the residual value which is guaranteed by the
lessee or by a party related to the lessee (the amount of the guarantee being the
maximum amount that could, in any event, become payable); and
in the case of the lessor, that part of the residual value which is guaranteed by the lessee
or by a third party unrelated to the lessor who is nancially capable of discharging the
obligations under the guarantee.
Historical cost is:

(a)
in the case of assets, the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair value of
the consideration given to acquire them at the time of their acquisition; and
(b)
237
in the case of liabilities, the amount of proceeds received in exchange for the obligation,
or in some circumstances (for example, income taxes), at the amounts of cash or
cash equivalents expected to be paid to satisfy the liability in the normal course of
business.
Historical cost convention is the measurement basis whereby:

(a)
Assets are recorded at the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair value of
the consideration given to acquire them at the time of their acquisition; and
(b)
Liabilities are recorded at the amount of proceeds received in exchange for the obligation,
or in some circumstances (for example, income taxes), at the amounts of cash or cash
equivalents expected to be paid to satisfy the liability in the normal course of business;
and whereby:
Assets should not be revalued nor should future cash ows be discounted in the measurement
of assets and liabilities except when required or permitted by the SME-FRS.
The lessees incremental borrowing rate of interest is the rate of interest the lessee would have to
pay on a similar lease or, if that is not determinable, the rate that, at the inception of the lease, the
lessee would incur to borrow over a similar term, and with a similar security, the funds necessary
to purchase the asset.
An intangible asset is an identiable non-monetary asset without physical substance.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is the discount rate that, at the inception of the lease, causes
the aggregate present value of:
(a)
the minimum lease payments; and
(b) the unguaranteed residual value

to be equal to the fair value of the leased asset.
Inventories are assets:
(a)
held for sale in the ordinary course of business;
(b)
in the process of production for such sale; or
(c)
in the form of materials or supplies to be consumed in the production process or in the

rendering of services.
S T U D Y
The inception of the lease is the earlier of the date of the lease agreement or the date of
commitment by the parties to the principal provisions of the lease.
T E X T
An impairment loss is the amount by which the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its recoverable
amount.
238
Investment (in a security) is a nancial asset (such as a bond or share or other negotiable
instrument evidencing debt or ownership) held by an entity for trading, the accretion of wealth
through distribution (such as interest and dividends), for capital appreciation or for other benets
to the investing entity such as those obtained through trading relationships. Current investments
are those that would satisfy the criteria for being classied as current in accordance with paragraph
1.16 of the SME-FRS.
Joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of control over an economic activity, and exists
only when the strategic nancial and operating decisions relating to the activity require the
unanimous consent of the parties sharing control (the venturers).
A joint venture is a contractual arrangement whereby two or more parties undertake an economic
S T U D Y
T E X T
Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning,
directing and controlling the activities of the entity, directly or indirectly, including any director
(whether executive or otherwise) of that entity.
A lease is an agreement whereby the lessor conveys to the lessee in return for a payment or
series of payments the right to use an asset for an agreed period of time.
The lease term is the non-cancellable period for which the lessee has contracted to lease the
asset together with any further terms for which the lessee has the option to continue to lease the
asset, with or without further payment, when at the inception of the lease it is reasonably certain
that the lessee will exercise the option.
A legal obligation is an obligation that derives from:

(a)
(b)
(c)
A contract (through its explicit or implicit terms);

Legislation; or
Other operation of law.
A liability is a present obligation of an entity arising from past events, the settlement of which is
expected to result in an outow from the entity of resources embodying economic benets.
Minimum lease payments are the payments over the lease term that the lessee is or can be
required to make, excluding contingent rent, costs for services and taxes to be paid by and
reimbursed to the lessor, together with, in the case of the lessee, any amounts guaranteed by
the lessee or by a party related to the lessee. However, if the lessee has an option to purchase
the asset at a price that is expected to be sufciently lower than fair value at the date the option
becomes exercisable, and if, at the inception of the lease, it is reasonably certain that the option
will be exercised, then the minimum lease payments comprise the minimum payments payable
over the lease term and the payment required to exercise this purchase option.
239
Monetary items are money held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in xed or
determinable amounts of money.
Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less the
estimated costs of completion and the estimated costs necessary to make the sale.
Upon the occurrence of some remote contingency;
(b)
With the permission of the lessor;
(c)
If the lessee enters into a new lease for the same or an equivalent asset with the same
lessor; or
(d)
upon payment by the lessee of an additional amount such that, at inception, continuation
of the lease is reasonably certain.
An obligating event is an event that creates a legal or constructive obligation that results in an
entity having no realistic alternative to settling that obligation.
An onerous contract is a contract in which the unavoidable costs of meeting the obligations under
the contract exceed the economic benets expected to be received under it.
Operating activities are the principal revenue-producing activities of the entity and other activities
that are not investing or nancing activities.
An operating lease is a lease other than a nance lease.
Prior period errors are omissions from, and misstatements in, the entitys nancial statements for
one or more prior periods arising from a failure to use, or misuse of, reliable information that:
(a)
was available when nancial statements for those periods were authorised for issue;
and
(b)
Could reasonably be expected to have been obtained and taken into account in the
preparation and presentation of those nancial statements.
Such errors include the effects of mathematical mistakes, mistakes in applying accounting
policies, oversights or misinterpretations of facts, and fraud.
Property, plant and equipment are tangible assets that:

(a)
Are held by an entity for use in the production or supply of goods or services, for rental
to others, for investment potential, or for administrative purposes; and
S T U D Y
(a)
T E X T
A non-cancellable lease is a lease that is cancellable only:
240
(b)
Are expected to be used during more than one period.
A provision is a liability of uncertain timing or amount.
A qualifying asset is an asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for
its intended use or sale.
Recoverable amount is the greater of an assets net selling price and future net cash ow expected
from the continued use of that asset.
Related party: A party is related to an entity if:

(a)
Directly, or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, the party:
T E X T
(b)
The party is an associate of the entity;
(c)
The party is a joint venture in which the entity is a venturer;
S T U D Y
(i) Controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with, the entity (this includes
parents, subsidiaries and fellow subsidiaries);
(ii) Has an interest in the entity that gives it signicant inuence over the entity; or
(iii) Has joint control over the entity;
(d)
The party is a member of the key management personnel of the entity or its parent;
(e)
The party is a close member of the family of any individual referred to in (a) or (d); or
(f)
The party is an entity that is controlled, jointly controlled or signicantly inuenced by,
or for which signicant voting power in such entity resides with, directly or indirectly, any
individual referred to in (d) or (e).
A related party transaction is a transfer of resources, services or obligations between related

Research is original and planned investigation undertaken with the prospect of gaining new
scientic or technical knowledge and understanding.
Residual value is the estimated amount that an entity would currently obtain from disposal of the
asset, after deducting the estimated costs of disposal, if the asset were already of the age and in
the condition expected at the end of its useful life.
Revenue is the gross inow of economic benets during the period arising in the course of
the ordinary activities of an entity when those inows result in increases in equity, other than
increases relating to contributions from equity participants.
241
Signicant inuence is the power to participate in the nancial and operating policy decisions of
an entity, but is not control or joint control over those policies.
A subsidiary is an entity that is controlled by another entity.
Tax expense (tax income) is the aggregate amount included in the determination of prot or loss
for the period in respect of current tax.
Taxable prot (tax loss) is the prot (loss) for a period, determined in accordance with the rules
established by the taxation authorities, on which income taxes are payable (recoverable).
Useful life is:
The period of time over which an asset is expected to be available for use by an entity;
or
(b)
The number of production or similar units expected to be obtained from the asset by an
entity.
4.11 CASHFLOW STATEMENTS (IAS 7)

FAST FORWARD: A Cashow Statement simply records monies passing into and out of the
bank, and is not blurred by estimates of accruals, e.t.c.
A trading and prot account is the usual method of describing what has happened in a business
during the past year, and it incorporates many adjustments in order to show a truer and fair view
of the prot. These adjustments have a number of disadvantages:
They are often estimates, and the prot is consequently an estimate;
The underlying cash ow becomes blurred by the adjustments and it becomes difcult
to focus on the liquidity position of the organisation.
It is generally felt in many quartersespecially in USA, that these very adjustments mask other
happenings of the year, notably the changes in the liquidity of the business. Depending on the
circumstances of the business, and the particular needs of various users, it may be that a report
which focuses on liquidity will be of more use - cash ow statement.
The cash ow statements should assist the users to:
Assess the enterprise's ability to generate positive future cash ows;
S T U D Y
T E X T
(a)
242
Assess the enterprise's ability to meet its obligations, pay dividends and meet its needs
payments; and
Assess the effects on the enterprise's nancial position of both cash and non-cash
This statement is mostly recommended because of its objectivity and veriable nature.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Note that the cash ow statement is somehow different from the statements of source and
application of funds. The essential difference is the cashow statements are concentrating
strictly on monies passing into and out of the bank account. In contrast, statements of source
and application of funds conventionally focuses on the movement in working capital; i.e.
they incorporate not only movements in stocks, debtors and creditors, but also accruals and
prepayments which we identied as being a prime cause of the subjective nature of the trading
and prot and loss account. Statements of source and application of funds certainly adjust for
items not involving movements of funds such as depreciation but they do not accrue the full
objective simplicity of cashow statements.
4.11.1 REASONS WHY PROFITS AND THE FLOW OF FUNDS MIGHT

DIFFER
A company might have to buy xed asserts, and the purchase costs of view xed assets
will differ from the depreciation charge in the year. (Depreciation, in fact does not
represent a ow of funds at all.)
Prots are calculated on the accruals concept. This means that a company might:-
Spend money on the purchase of stocks which are unsold during the period, and their
not charged against prots;
Sell goods on credit, thereby making a prot on sales without receiving the cash from
the debtors before the end of the accounting period;
Incur development expense which is capitalized and not charged against prots until
later periods;
Charge taxation and dividends payable against prots, whereas the cash ows are
affected by taxation and dividends actually paid.
o
o
o
A company might be able to obtain funds from sources other than Prots - eg by
issuing new shares or raising a loan. On the other hand, the company might have to
nd the cash to redeem some preference shares or debentures or to repay a loan.
243
Relationship between Balance Sheet changes and Cashows:
Increases (decreases) in assets represent net cash outows (inows) if an asset

increases, the rm must have paid cash in exchange.
For example, when accounts receivable increase, the periods sales revenues must
have exceeded cash collections. Thus the increase in receivables must be deducted
from the accrued sales revenues to derive the cash collected from customers during the
period.
Increases (decreases) in liabilities represent net cash inows (outows) when a liability
increases, a rm must have received cash in exchange.
For instance, when interest payable increases, that means the rm did not pay all the interest
expense accrued during the period hence, the increase in interest payable must be deducted
from the interest expense to compute the amount of interest paid during the period.
The cash ow for inputs is not affected by the inventory valuation (FIFO, LIFO) method used by
the rm, facilitating comparison for rms.
Differences between Cash-Flow Statement (CFS) and Funds Flow

Statement (FFS)
Treatment of changes in operating accounts (working capital). FFS equals net income
adjusted only for the non-cash income statement items. No adjustment is made for the
changes in the current operating accounts.
Treatment of short-term debt. FFS retains short term debt as a component of working
capital and is not removed to CFF.
FFO is not a true measure of cash generated from operating activities.
FFO does not add information value to net income, but CFO does.
4.4.2 METHODS OF PREPARING CASHFLOW STATEMENTS

The indirect method:
This method starts with the periods net income and makes two adjustments to arrive at the Cash
Flow from Operations (CFO):
All non-cash expense (revenue) components of the income statement are added
(subtracted)
S T U D Y
Debt nancing for the period is the sum of the changes in short and long-term debt accounts.
T E X T
Components of nancing cash ow include inows from additional borrowing and equity nancing
and outows for repayment of debt, dividend payments, and equity repurchases.
244
Changes in operating account are added/subtracted as follows:
Increases (decreases) in the balances of operating asset accounts are subtracted

(added).
Increases (decreases) in the balances of operating liability accounts are added
(subtracted).
The discrepancies between the changes in accounts reported on the balance sheet and those
reported in the cash ow statement are due to two factors
Acquisitions and divestitures.
Foreign subsidiaries.
Changes in the level of investments in short-term nancing instruments are reported NET one
of the few exceptions to he gross reporting requirements of SFAS 95. Under that standard,
changes in b/s assets and liabilities that turn over frequently (another example is credit receivable)
may be reported net.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Investments that are long-term, less liquid and riskier (e.g stocks or long-term bonds) should
be treated differently.
Drawback of indirect Method:
Because of the indirect format, it is not possible to compare operating cash inows and outows
by function with the revenue and expense activities that generated them, as is possible from cash
ow statement prepared using the direct method.
In the absence of acquisitions, divestitures and signicant foreign operations, the indirect method
simply recasts the income statement and the balance sheet, providing little new or no insight into
a rms cash-generating ability.
Direct Method
This method uses a transactional analysis in preparing Cashow Statements.
Transactional analysis is a technique that can be used to create a cashow statement for rms
that do not prepare such statements in accordance with IAS 7, FRS 1(UK) or SFAS 95(USA).
It can also be used to convert the indirect method cashow to the direct method.
One objective of the transactional analysis is to understand the relationship between the accrual
of revenues, expenses, assets and liabilities and their cashow consequences. Another goal is
to classify cashows among operating, investing and nancing activities.
4.4.3 ANALYSIS OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION

The CSF is intended to help predict the rms ability to sustain (and increase) cash from current
operations. In so doing, the statement provides more objective information about:
A rms ability to generate cash ows from operations.
Trends in cash ow components and components and cash consequences of investing

and nancing decisions.
Management decisions regarding such critical areas as nancial policy (leverage),

dividend policy, and investment for growth.
245
Free Cash ows

Is the Cash from operations less the amount of capital expenditures required to maintain the
rms present productive capacity?
Growth oriented capital expenses and acquisitions.
Debt reduction
Stockholder payments (dividends and stock repurchase).
The larger the rms FCF, the healthier it is because it has more cash available for growth, debt
payment, and dividends.
In valuation models, required outows are dened as operating cash ows less capital expenditures
to replace current operating capacity as well as capital expenditure necessary to nance the
rms growth opportunities. Growth opportunities are dened as those in which the rm can
make above normal returns. FCF is generally measured as CFO less capital expenditures.
Relationship of income and cash ows:
Accrual accounting can be affected by managements choice of accounting policies and

estimates. It fails to provide adequate information about the liquidity of the rm and
long-term solvency.
Cash ow is less likely to be affected by variations in accounting principles and estimates,

making it more useful than reported income in assessing liquidity and solvency.
FCF patterns have to be monitored carefully for growth coys to ensure that they are not
growing too fast, which can cause liquidity problems. Lack of sales growth, coupled
with increases in working capital growth, reduces CFO, and reects slow receivable
collections and inventory build-up.
Cash ow statements should be used together with information from the Prot and Loss,
Balance Sheet and footnotes to assess the cash-generating ability of the rm. This
assessment should consider the rms liquidity, the viability of income as a predictor of
future cash ows, and the effect of timing and recognition differences.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Discretionary measures include:
246
Accrual a/c is generally presumed to be a good indicator of future cashow. That

predictive ability is subject to a number of implicit assumptions, one of which is the
going concern.
S T U D Y
T E X T
>>> Examples
The classication of inventories as assets rather than expenses implicitly assumes that
they will be sold in the normal course of business.
The accrual of revenue from credit sales and the valuation of receivables assume that
the rm will continue to operate normally; failing rms may nd that customers are
unwilling to pay.
When the going concern assumption is subject to doubt, revenue recognition and asset
valuation can no longer be taken for granted. CFS acts as a check on the assumptions
inherent in the Prot & Loss account.
To nd out why income can fail as a predictor of cash-generating ability (uncollected

receivables or unsold inventories) requires a comparison of amounts recorded as sales
and cost of goods sold on the Prot and Loss with the pattern of cash collections from
customers and cash paid for inventories on the CFS.
A direct method CFS is helpful in this regard.
The periodic net income differs because account methods and assumptions of mangers
differ, not because their economic activities differ.
The CFS allows the analyst to distinguish between the actual events that have occurred
and the account assumptions that have been used to report these events.
Nonetheless, assumptions made by management may provide useful information.
Problems affecting Cash Flow Classication Issues
Cash ows involving Property, Plant and Equipment.
Differences due to some accounting methods.
Interest and dividends received.
Interest paid.
Non cash transactions.
247
Problems
1. Classication of Cash Flows for Property, Plant and Equipment
Example
Kshs.
Net income
Add non cash items: depreciation
30,000
5,000
15,000
50,000
CFO
The CFS adds both depreciation expense (a non-cash expense) and the decrease in
inventory (change in operating accounts) to net income to arrive at CFO. Their differing
classications suggest that the reason for these add backs are not identical. On the
other hand, both adjustments reect cash outows that occurred in Prior Periods but
are recognized in income in the current period.
Depreciation allocates the cost of xed assets to the current period, the period in which
they are used. Similarly, the cost of goods sold allocates the cost of inventory to the
current period, when the inventory is actually sold.
The difference between the two adjustments is the classication of the initial cash
outlays. In one sense, both initial outlays were for investment. In one case, the rm
invested in xed assets; in the other, it invested in inventories. The latter, however is
classied as an operating cash outow, deducted from CFO in the period of the initial
outlay and added back to income when expensed to avoid double counting.
The original investment in xed assets was reported as an investment cash outow and its
allocation (depreciation expense) is added back to income because it is never classied as
an operating ow, but always as an investment ow. For inventory, no adjustment to current
period cash ows is required. But the current period allocation of the investment in plant assets
(depreciation expense) must be added back as the outow has been recorded as an investing
cash outow avoiding double counting.
Implication of this classication issue

CFO does not include a charge for use of the rms operating capacity. Cash required replacing
the productive capacity or physical plant used during operations is not included in CFO. A rm
reporting positive CFO may not thrive unless the CFO (generated and retained) is sufcient to
replace the productive capacity used to generate the operating cash ow.
Identical rms with equal capital intensity will report different CFOs when one rm leases plant
assets and the other owns its assets. The rm that leases reports lower CFO because lease
rentals are operating expenditures (operating cash ows), whereas the other rms expenditure
are reported as investment cash ows.
S T U D Y
Add change in operating accounts decrease in inventory
T E X T
35,000
248
Cash payments for inventory may also be excluded from CFO. When an acquired rm has
inventories, the cash paid for those inventories is included in investing cash ow. However, the
proceeds from the subsequent sale of such purchased inventory are included in CFO, distorting
reported CFO because its purchase cost is never reported in CFO.
Another problem is that investment is not precisely dened e.g:Hertz classies its investment in rental cars as inventory, and purchases are included in CFO.
In this case, CFO is understated relative to a rm that classies its operating assets as property.
Media companies consider Programming Purchases as long-term xed assets. Although
amortization impacts reported earnings, purchase costs are never reported in CFO. Yet nancial
markets seem to value such rms based on multiples of CFO Per share rather than EPS.
2. Effects of Differences in Accounting Methods
S T U D Y
T E X T
CFO is not affected by the timing differences generated by revenue and expense recognition
methods.
CFO is less affected by differing accounting policies. However, CFO is affected by reporting
methods that after the classication of cash ows among operating, investing and nancing
categories. If one accounting method results in the classication of a cash ow as investing and
an alternative results in its classication as operating, then the reported CFOs will differ.
Moreover, unlike revenue and expense differences in account policies that reverse over time,
the differences in CFO classication caused by reporting methods are permanent and do not
reverse.
The classication of expenditures such as computer software leads to the classication of cash
outows as investing cash ows. However they are reported as operating cash ows when
expensed immediately. Lease classication also affects cash ow components for both le lessors
and lessees
3. Interest and Dividends Received

Interest income and dividends received from investments in other rms are classied under
SFAS 95 as operating cash ows. As a result, the return on capital is separated from the return
of capital combining these returns to reported cash ow to and from investees facilitates analysis.
Moreover, the reclassication of after-tax dividend and interest from operating to investing cash
ows has the advantage of reporting operating cash ows that reect only the operating activities
of the rms core business.
NB
Only the nominal (cash) return (dividend or interest received) is reported as an operating cash
ow; the real (total) return (which includes capital gain or loss) is split between operating and
investing cash ow.
However, some investments and joint ventures are operating in nature. Such investments may
assist in current and future operations, require signicant nancing commitments, and provide
some control over the cash ows generated by the investee.
249
4. Interest paid
Is classied as operating cash ow under SFAS 95. Such payment is the result of capital structure
and leverage decisions and they reect nancing rather than operating risk. The reported CFOs
of two rms with different capital structures are not comparable because returns to creditors
(interest) are included in CFO, whereas returns to shareholders (dividends) are reported as
nancing cash ows.
For analytic purposed, therefore, interest payments (after tax to reect the cash ow benets of
tax deductibility) should be reclassied as nancing cash ows.
The resulting operating cash ow is independent of the rms capitalization, facilitating the
comparison of rms with different capital structures.
5. Non cash transactions
The usefulness of cash ow statements may be summarized as follows:
Prot is not necessarily a measure of solvency and may mislead as to the underlying
cashows, which if adverse may affect the ability of the rm to survive.
Prot is a measure based on the concept of accrual accounting and matching. When
these concepts are applied the effect may be to smooth out peaks and troughs in the
business cycle, which when applied over-indulgently has been referred to as creative
accounting. The reporting of the raw data (cash ow) may be a useful adjunct to accrualbased accounts.
Cash ow may be a better guide to the ability of a rm to pay dividends than prot since
dividends are paid in cash.
It may be argued that forecast data is more useful than historical data and that cash
ow forecasts are better based on cash ow statements rather than on prot and loss
accounts.
S T U D Y
For analytical purposes, however, this transaction is identical to the issuance of a bond to a third
party, using the proceeds to acquire the building. The non-cash transaction reects both a
nancing and investing activity and should be included in each category Both entries cancel
out each other.
T E X T
Some investing and nancing activities do not require direct outlays of cash eg. a building may
be acquired on mortgage. Such transactions are not treated as nancing or investing but as
footnotes.
250
Chakula Kitamu Ltd

Cash ow Statement for the year ended 31 December 1997
Sh. 000
Cash ow from operating activities

Group Prot before tax & extra-ordinary items
2,718,000
Adjustments
Depreciation
Share of prot in associated Coy
560,000
(80,000)
Working Capital changes

Increase in stock
Decrease in Debtors
Increase in Bills Receivable
Increase in creditors
Increase in sundry recoverable on tax
(950,000)
392,000
(15,000)
110,000
(95,000)
T E X T
Taxation paid (wk 1)
S T U D Y
Sh. 000
Extra ordinary items

Net cash ow from operations
Cash ow from investing activities
Purchase of xed assets (wk 2)
Purchase of subsidiary
Proceeds from the sale of xed assets
Dividend received from associated Coy (W3)
Loan advance
Net cash inow from investing activities
Cash ow from nancing activities
Redemption of debenture(390,000 412,000)
Dividend paid
Net cash out ow on nancing activities
Net increase in cash and cash
equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at
beginning
- at end
480,000
3,198,000
(558,000)
2,640,000
(1,471,000)
1,169,000
(33,000)
1,136,000
(777,000)
(200,000)
80,000
15,000
980,000
98,000
(22,000)
(900,000)
(922,000)
312,000
340,000
652,000
Working 1
Taxation A/c
Shs 000
Bank
Deferred tax
Bal c/d
1,471,000 Bal b/d

680,000 Deferred tax
Shs 000
6
1,370,000
649,000
1,310,000 P&L
1,442,000
3,461,000
3,461,000
251
Working 2
Fixed Assets A/c
Bal b/d
Subsidiary
Bank (purchases)
4,548,000 Depreciation
460,000 Disposal
777,000 Bal c/d
5,785,000
560,000
80,000
5,145,000
5,785,000
550 Bal b/d
650
Bal c/
550 P&L
650
Bal b/d
P&L (prot)
400,000 P&L (tax)
30,000
80,000 Dividend
15,000
Bal c/d
480,000
43,500
480,000
S T U D Y
Bank
T E X T
Div
252
Working 3
>>> EXAMPLE 2 (ACQUSITION OF A SUBSIDIARY)
The following draft nancial statement relate to Baraka Group Ltd.:
Assets:
Intangible assets (goodwill)
Tangible assets
Investments
Group balance sheet as at 31 May 2001

2001
2000
Sh. million
Sh. million
Current assets:
Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
S T U D Y
T E X T
Total assets
Equity and Liabilities:
Capital and reserves
Called-up capital-ordinary shares of Sh.10
Share premium account
Revaluation reserves
Accumulated prots
Minority interest
Non-current liabilities
7% redeemable preference shares
interest bearing borrowings
90
1,239
780
2,109
83
1,010
270
1,363
750
660
45
1,455
3,564
588
530
140
1,258
2,621
100
85
30
200
415
250
70
15
10
103
198
150
136
1,262
130
930
1,398
1,501
3,564
1,060
1,213
2,621
253
Group income statement for the year ended 31 May 2001

Sh.million
Sh.milliom
7,310
(5,920)
1,390
(772)
618
98
15
Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross prot
Distribution and administrative expenses
Prot from operations
Income from associates
Prot on sale of tangible non-current assets
Interest receivable
Interest payable
Prot before taxation
Income tax expense(including tax on income
from associates of Sh.15 million)
Prot after taxation
Minority interests
34
(37)
(3)
728
(213)
515
(97)
Net prot from ordinary activities
418
1.
Baraka Group Ltd. acquired an 80% holding in Neema Ltd. on 1 June 2000. The fair
value of the assets of Neema Ltd. on 1 June 2000 were as follows:
Non-current assets (tangible)

Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade payables
Taxation
S T U D Y
Sh. million
60
30
25
35
(20)
(30)
100
The purchase consideration was Sh.97 million and comprised 2 million ordinary shares
of Sh.10 each in Baraka Group Ltd valued at Sh.40 per share and Sh.17 million in
cash.
The group amortises goodwill over 10 years.
2.
The movement in tangible non-current assets for the year ended 31 May 2001, comprised
the following amounts at net-book value:
Sh. million
Balance as at 1 June 2000

Additions (including Neema Ltd.)
Revaluation of properties
Disposals
Depreciation
Balance as at 31 May 2001
T E X T
1,010
278
20
(30)
(39)
1,239
254
3.
Interest receivable included in trade receivables was Sh.15 million as at 31 May 2000
and Sh.17 million as at 31 May 2001.
4.
Included in non-current liabilities is a bill of exchange for Sh.100 million (raised on

30 June 2000) which was given to a supplier on the purchase of non-current tangible
assets and which is payable on 1 July 2002.
5.
There have been no sales of non-current investment in the year. The investments
included under non-current assets comprised the following items:
2001
Sh. Million
S T U D Y
T E X T
Investment in associated company

Trade investment (including foreign equity
investment of Sh.400 million as at 31 May
2001)
2000
Sh. Million
300
220
480
780
50
270
6.
The preference share dividends are always paid in full on 1 July each year, and are
included in interest payable in the income statement. Additionally, a charge of Sh.6
million has been made in the interest payable gures to provide for a premium payable
on the preference shares on redemption.
7.
Current liabilities comprised the following items:
Trade payables (including interest payable,

Sh. 9 million in 2001, nil in year 2000)
Taxation
Dividends (dividends charges in the
income statement for the year 2001
amounted to Sh.126 million)
2001
Sh. million
2000
Sh.million
1,193
203
913
200
105
1,501
100
1,213
8.
Baraka Group Ltd allotted 1 million
9.
There was an exchange loss on re-translation ordinary shares of Sh.10 at a price of

Sh.20 upon the exercise of directors option during the year. of foreign equity investment
of Sh.205 million and a gain on the loan to nance the foreign equity investment of
Sh.10 million. A loan of Sh.300 million was taken out in 2000/2001 to nance a foreign
equity investment of Sh.400 million in Paka Ltd.
10. Baraka Lts acquired a debenture note of 10% at Shs 121 million.
Required:
Group cash ow statement in accordance with IAS 7 as at 31 May 2001
(20 marks)
255
Solution
Baraka Group
Consolidated Cash ow Statement for the year to 31 May 2001
Cash ows from investing activities

Acquisition of subsidiary (net cash received = 17 -35)
Investment in Associate company
Interest received (15 + 34 17)
Dividend from associated company (WK2)
Purchase of tangible non-current assets (278 60 100)
Sale of tangible non-current assets (30 + 15)
Purchase of trade investments
728
6
10
39
(3)
(15)
(98)
103
(132)
251
(22)
(225)
(61)
667
16
683
(247)
436
18
80
32
3
(118)
45
(635)
Net cash used in investing activities

Cash ows from nancing activities
Proceeds of issuance of share capital (directors options)
Proceeds from long term borrowing (1,262 930-100+10)
10 % Debenture
Dividends paid to minority interests (150+97-250+20)
Net cash from nancing activities
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period.
Sh.
million
T E X T
Net prot before tax

Adjustments for:
Preference share appropriation
Goodwill amortization (WK1)
Depreciation
Interest income (net)
Prot on disposal of tangible noncurrent assets
Prot from associated company
Operating prot before working capital charges
Increase trade receivable (660 -530 25 17 + 15)
Increase in inventories (750 588 30)
Increase in trade payables (1, 193-913-20-9)
Cash generated from operations
Interest paid (37 6 9)
Income taxes paid (200 + 198 + 30 203)
Net cash from operating activities
Sh.
million
S T U D Y
Cash ow from operating activities:
(655)
20
242
(121)
(17)
124
(95)
140
45
256
WORKINGS:
1.
Purchase of subsidiary:
Sh
million
Net assets acquired

Group share of net assets (80%)
Purchase consideration (shares + cash)
Goodwill
Sh
million
100
80
97
17
Goodwill account: Opening balance

Goodwill on Neema
83
17
100
(10)
90
Amortization (10 years)

Closing balance
2.
Balance as at 1 June 2000

Income for the period (98 15) net of tax
Dividends received Cash ow
Balance as at 31 May 2001
T E X T
S T U D Y
Associated company:
3.
Investments and non-current liabilities:

(a) Trade investments balance 31 May 2000
Foreign equity investment
Exchange difference
Purchase in year other
Trade investments balance
31 May 2001
(b)
Sh
million
Sh
million
50
605
(205)
Cash
ow
605
450
30
480
30
635
Non-current liabilities Interest bearing

borrowing:
Balance 31 may 2001

Loan taken out to nance equity
Investment
Exchange difference
Bill of exchange
Cash paid
Balance at 31 may 2001
a.
220
83
(3)
300
930
310
310
(10)
300
100
(68)
1,262
(68)
242
Note as the purchase of tangible non-current assets is being nanced by the supplier in
part, and the bill of exchange of Sh.100 million has not been paid, then the purchase of
tangible non-current assets in terms of its cash effect is reduced.
257
4.12 SEGMENTAL REPORTS (IAS 14)

Many businesses operate in different geographical locations and also offer several products or
services. A segmental report provides information about the performance of the different units
of business to enable users have a wider perspective of the company and allow for even more
informed decision making. For example users can be able to understand the risk and return
prole of each segment of the business.
IAS 14 is a detailed standard and has numerous denitions that are very important. It is also a
popular topic with the examiner.
The objective of IAS 14 (Revised 1997) is to establish principles for reporting nancial information
by line of business and by geographical area. It applies to enterprises whose equity or debt
securities are publicly traded and to enterprises in the process of issuing securities to the public.
In addition, any enterprise voluntarily providing segment information should comply with the
requirements of the Standard.
If an enterprise that is not publicly traded chooses to report segment information and claims that
its nancial statements conform to IAS, then it must follow IAS 14 in full.
Segment information need not be presented in the separate nancial statements of a (a) parent,
(b) subsidiary, (c) equity method associate, or (d) equity method joint venture that are presented
in the same report as the consolidated statements.
Important denitions
Business segment: A component of an enterprise that:
(a)
Provides a single product or service or a group of related products and services and
(b)
That is subject to risks and returns that are different from those of other business
segments.
Geographical segment: A component of an enterprise that:

(a)
(b)
Provides products and services within a particular economic environment and

That is subject to risks and returns that are different from those of components operating
in other economic environments.
Reportable segment: A business segment or geographical segment for which IAS 14 requires
segment information to be reported.
S T U D Y
IAS 14 must be applied by enterprises whose debt or equity securities are publicly traded and
those in the process of issuing such securities in public securities markets.
T E X T
Applicability
258
Segment revenue: Revenue, including inter-segment revenue that is directly attributable or

reasonably allocable to a segment. This includes interest and dividend income and related
securities gains only if the segment is a nancial segment (bank, insurance company, etc.).
Segment expenses: Expenses, including expenses relating to inter-segment transactions,
that:
(a) Result from operating activities and
(b) Are directly attributable or reasonably allocable to a segment. This includes interest
expense and related securities losses only if the segment is a nancial segment (bank,
insurance company, etc.). Segment expenses never include:
extraordinary items;
losses on investments accounted for by the equity method;
income taxes;
general corporate administrative and head-ofce expenses.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Segment result: Segment revenue minus segment expenses, before deducting minority
interest.
Segment assets and segment liabilities: Are operating assets (liabilities) that are directly
attributable or reasonably allocable to a segment.
Identifying a Business segment and a geographical Segment

An enterprise must look to its organizational structure and internal reporting system to identify
reportable segments. In particular, IAS 14 presumes that segmentation in internal nancial
reports prepared for the board of directors and chief executive ofcer should normally determine
segments for external nancial reporting purposes. Only if internal segments arent along either
product/service or geographical lines is further disaggregation appropriate. This is a management
approach to segment denition. The same approach was recently adopted in Canada and the
United States.
Geographical segments may be based either on where the enterprises assets are located or
on where its customers are located. Whichever basis is used, several items of data must be
presented on the other basis if signicantly different.
Primary and Secondary Segments

For most enterprises one basis of segmentation is primary and the other is secondary, with
considerably less disclosure required for secondary segments. The enterprise should determine
whether business or geographical segments are to be used for its primary segment reporting
format based on whether the enterprises risks and returns are affected predominantly by the
products and services it produces or by the fact that it operates in different geographical areas.
The basis for identication of the predominant source and nature of risks and differing rates of
return facing the enterprise will usually be the enterprises internal organisational and management
structure and its system of internal nancial reporting to senior management.
259
Segments to be reported
The enterprises reportable segments are its business and geographical segments for which a
majority of their revenue is earned from sales to external customers and for which:
(i)
revenue from sales to external customers and from transactions with other segments is
10% or more of the total revenue, external and internal, of all segments; or
(ii)
segment result, whether prot or loss, is 10% or more the combined result of all segments
in prot or the combined result of all segments in loss, whichever is greater in absolute
amount; or assets are 10% or more of the total assets of all segments.
Vertically integrated segments (those that earn a majority of their revenue from inter-segment
transactions) may be, but need not be, reportable segments. If not separately reported, the
selling segment is combined with the buying segment.
IAS 14.42-43 contains special rules for identifying reportable segments in the years in which a
segment reaches or loses 10% signicance.
Accounting policies to be followed by segments

Segment accounting policies must be the same as those used in the consolidated nancial
statements.
If assets used jointly by two or more segments are allocated to segments, the related revenue
and expenses must also be allocated.
Information to be disclosed
IAS 14 has detailed guidance as to which items of revenue and expense are included in segment
revenue and segment expense. All companies will report a standardised measure of segment
result -- basically operating prot before interest, taxes, and head ofce expenses. For an
enterprises primary segments, revised IAS 14 requires disclosure of:
-
Sales revenue (distinguishing between external and intersegment);

Result;
Assets;
S T U D Y
If total external revenue attributable to reportable segments identied using the 10% thresholds
outlined above is less than 75% of the total consolidated or enterprise revenue, additional
segments should be identied as reportable segments until at least 75% of total consolidated or
enterprise revenue is included in reportable segments.
T E X T
Segments deemed too small for separate reporting may be combined with each other, if related,
but they may not be combined with other signicant segments for which information is reported
internally. Alternatively, they may be separately reported. If neither combined nor separately
reported, they must be included as an unallocated reconciling item.
260
The basis of intersegment pricing;

Liabilities;
Capital additions;
Depreciation;
Non-cash expenses other than depreciation; and
Equity method income.
Segment revenue includes sales from one segment to another. Under IAS 14, these
intersegment transfers must be measured on the basis that the enterprise actually used to price
the transfers.
S T U D Y
T E X T
For secondary segments, disclose:
Revenue;
Assets; and
Capital additions.
Other disclosure matters addressed in IAS 14:

Disclosure is required of external revenue for a segment that is not deemed a reportable segment
because a majority of its sales are inter-segment sales but nonetheless its external sales are
10% or more of consolidated revenue.
Special disclosures are required for changes in segment accounting policies.
Where there has been a change in the identication of segments, prior year information should
be restated. If this is not practicable, segment data should be reported for both the old and new
bases of segmentation in the year of change.
Disclosure is required of the types of products and services included in each reported business
segment and of the composition of each reported geographical segment, both primary and
secondary.
An enterprise must present a reconciliation between information reported for segments and
consolidated information. At a minimum:
Segment revenue should be reconciled to consolidated revenue
Segment result should be reconciled to a comparable measure of consolidated operating

prot or loss and consolidated net prot or loss
Segment assets should be reconciled to enterprise assets
Segment liabilities should be reconciled to enterprise liabilities.
261
>>> Example
Sh.000
11,759
28,200
3,290
18,390
30,600
14,856
31,750
3,658
17,775
41,820
3,290
1,227
1,481
4,073
7,227
5,004
2,117
5,200
2,430
44,620
21,660
14,921
2,442
5,916
821
4,873
3,127
487
8,978
8,047
Required:
(a)
An industry and geographical segmental report in accordance with IAS 14 (reporting

Financial Information by Segment) for inclusion in the annual report to give the maximum
information to the shareholders.
(12 marks)
(b)
Using Gawanya Ltd.s gures as illustrations, discuss items for which you consider
there is need for further information to assist the reader to interpret the segmental
data.
(3 marks)
(c)
Identify the problems associated with segmental reporting.
(5 marks)
S T U D Y
Sales to customers outside the group by stationery division

Sales to customers outside the group by Kenyan companies
Sales not derived from stationery, tissue or packaging activities
Sales made to customers outside the group by tissue division.
Assets used by the Ugandan subsidiary companies
Assets not allocable to stationery, tissue or packaging activities
Assets used by the stationery division
Sales by the tissue division to other group members
Assets used by the packaging division
Assets used by the Kenyan companies
Sales not allocated to Kenya, Uganda or other areas
Sales by the stationery division to other group members
Sales made by the group to other areas of the world.
Expenses not allocated to Kenya, Uganda or other areas
Sales to customers outside the group by Ugandan companies
Expenses not allocated to stationery, tissue or packaging services
Sales by Ugandan companies to group members
Sales to customers outside the group for bureau service
Sales by Kenyan companies to other group members
Assets used by the tissue division
Assets used by the group in other areas.
Assets not allocated to Kenya, Uganda or other areas.
Segmental net prot by industry
- Stationery
- Tissue
- Packaging
Segmental net prot by geographical area
- Kenya
Uganda
Other areas
Consolidated net prot by industry
Consolidated net prot by geographical area
T E X T
Gawanya Ltd is preparing segmental report for inclusion in its nancial accounts for the year
ended 31 December 2001. The gures given below relate to Gawanya Ltd. And its subsidiaries
but exclude information on associated companies
262
4.12 RELATED PARTIES (IAS 24)

IAS 24 is about companies disclosing requirements about transactions with related companies or
parties. It is one of the shortest standard and, therefore, not difcult to comprehend.
The objective of IAS 24 is to ensure that an entitys nancial statements contain the disclosures
necessary to draw attention to the possibility that its nancial position and prot or loss may have
been affected by the existence of related parties and by transactions and outstanding balances
with such parties.
Who Are Related Parties?
S T U D Y
T E X T
decisions.
A party is related to an entity if:

(a)
directly, or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, the party:
(i)
controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with, the entity (this includes
(ii) has an interest in the entity that gives it signicant inuence over the entity; or
(iii) has joint control over the entity;
(b)
the party is an associate (as dened in IAS 28 Investments in Associates) of the

entity;
(c)
the party is a joint venture in which the entity is a venturer (see IAS 31 Interests in Joint
Ventures);
(d)
the party is a member of the key management personnel of the entity or its parent;
(e)
the party is a close member of the family of any individual referred to in (a) or (d);
(f)
the party is an entity that is controlled, jointly controlled or signicantly inuenced by or

for which signicant voting power in such entity resides with, directly or indirectly, any
individual referred to in (d) or (e); or
(g)
the party is a post-employment benet plan for the benet of employees of the entity, or
of any entity that is a related party of the entity.
Prior to the 2003 revision of IAS 24, state-controlled entities were exempted from the
related party disclosures. That exemption has been removed in the 2003 revision.
Therefore, prot-oriented state-controlled entities that use IFRS are no longer exempted
from disclosing transactions with other state-controlled entities.
263
The following are deemed not to be related:

(i)
two enterprises simply because they have a director or key manager in common; two
venturers who share joint control over a joint venture;
(ii)
providers of nance, trade unions, public utilities, government departments and agencies
in the course of their normal dealings with an enterprise; and
(iii) a single customer, supplier, franchiser, distributor, or general agent with whom an
enterprise transacts a signicant volume of business merely by virtue of the resulting
economic dependence.
What Are Related Party Transactions?

Management compensation. Disclose key management personnel compensation in total and

for each of the following categories:
Short-term employee benets;
Post-employment benets;
Other long-term benets;
Termination benets; and
Equity compensation benets.
Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning,
directing, and controlling the activities of the entity, directly or indirectly, including all directors
(whether executive or otherwise).
Related party transactions. If there have been transactions between related parties, disclose
the nature of the related party relationship as well as information about the transactions and
outstanding balances necessary for an understanding of the potential effect of the relationship
on the nancial statements. These disclosures would be made separately for each category of
related parties and would include:
S T U D Y
Relationships between parents and subsidiaries. Regardless of whether there have been
transactions between a parent and a subsidiary, an entity must disclose the name of its parent and,
if different, the ultimate controlling party. If neither the entitys parent nor the ultimate controlling
party produces nancial statements available for public use, the name of the next most senior
parent that does so must also be disclosed.
T E X T
Disclosure
264
The amount of the transactions.
The amount of outstanding balances, including terms and conditions and guarantees.
Provisions for doubtful debts related to the amount of outstanding balances.
Expense recognised during the period in respect of bad or doubtful debts due from
related parties.
Examples of the Kinds of Transactions that Are Disclosed If They Are with a Related
Party
S T U D Y
T E X T
Purchases or sales of goods.

Purchases or sales of property and other assets.
Rendering or receiving of services.
Leases.
Transfers of research and development.
Transfers under license agreements.
Transfers under nance arrangements (including loans and equity contributions in cash or
in kind).
Provision of guarantees or collateral.
Settlement of liabilities on behalf of the entity or by the entity on behalf of another party.
A statement that related party transactions were made on terms equivalent to those that prevail
in arms length transactions should be made only if such terms can be substantiated. ]
>>> Example
Purchaser
Seller
TPL
TTL
TPL
MDFL
Amount
Sh.38
million
Sh.32
million
Basis of price charged
Comparable uncontrolled price
MHSL
TPL
BCL
MDFL
BCL
MHSL
MDFL
Sh.49
million
Sh.2
million
Sh.1
million
Sh.66
million
Sh.4 million
Cost plus 100% other consumers

are charged cost plus 80%
TPL
Outstanding
at 30
November
2000
Sh.3 million
Comparable uncontrolled price

Plus 10%
Sh.5 million
Normal market price
Sh.2 million
Normal market price
Nil
Comparable uncontrolled price plus

10%
Sh.6 million
265
Tourists Paradise Limited, TPL is a company quoted on the Nairobi Stock exchange. Its managing
directors, Mr. Tamiba, own 52% of the share capital of the company. Mr. Tamiba is a director of
Tourists Travels Limited (TTL), an 80% subsidiary of Tourists Paradise Limited, of Mombasa
Deep-sea Fishing Limited (MDFL), a 40% associate of Tourists Paradise Limited, and of Mombasa
Hotel Supplies Limited (MHSL). TPL owns and runs 6 tourist hotels along the coast, both north
and South of Mombasa. TTL is a travel and transport company. All TPLs travel and transport
needs are outsourced to TTL, MDFL, markets a wide variety of sh products parts of its output
is exported and the rest is sold to a large number of hotels and restaurants both in the coastal
region and inland. MHSL supplies many hotels in the coast region with an assortment of different
products. Mr. Tamiba owns 40% of the share capital of MHSL, his wife owns 20%, the owners of
the 4 other hotels in the coastal region each own 10% of the ordinary share capital. In addition to
being a director of these companies, Mr. Tamiba is a director of Bamburi Cement Limited (BCL)
from which company all the other companies named above buy cement at the normal market
price. All 5 companies prepare their annual nancial statements to 30 November each year.
Transactions between the companies in the year ended 30 November 2000 are as follows
Dene the terms related party and related party transaction as laid down in IAS 24:
Related party Disclosures
(2 marks)
(b)
IAS 24 deals only with certain related party relationships. State the 5 related party
relationships dealt with.
(5 marks)
(c)
Disclose the information required by IAS 24 in the consolidated nancial statements of

TPL, and in the individual nancial statements of TTL, MDFL and MHSL. (10 marks)
(Total: 17 marks)
Solution
(a)
i).
ii).
Related party parties are considered to be related if one party has the ability to control
the other party or exercise signicant inuence over the other party making nancial
and operating decision.
Related party transaction- A transfer of resources or obligations between related parties,
regardless of whether a price is charged.
(b)
The standard deals only with the following relationships: (a) Enterprises that directly or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, control or are
controlled by, or one under common control with the reporting enterprise. (This includes
holding companies, subsidiaries and fellow subsidiaries).
(b) Associates
(c) Individuals owning, directly or indirectly an interest in the power of the reporting
enterprise that gives them signicant inuence over the enterprise and close members
of the family of any such individual.
S T U D Y
(a)
T E X T
Required:
266
(d)
(e)
Key management personnel, i.e. those persons having authority and responsibility
for planning, directly and controlling the activities of the reporting enterprise, including
directors and ofcers of companies and close members of the families of such
individuals.
Enterprises to which a substantial interest in the rotting power is owned, directly or
indirectly by any person described in (c) or (d) or over such a person is able to exercise
signicant inuence. This includes enterprises owned by directors or major shareholders
of the reporting enterprises and enterprises that have a member or key management in
common with the reporting enterprises.
DISCLOSURES REQUIRED UNDER IAS 24

(c)
TPL and MHSL are both under the control of Mr. Tamibar the managing director of the
company. TPL makes purchases from MDFL, an associate of TPL.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Transactions with the related parties.

Related
party
Types of
transaction
Amount
Pricing policy
Outstanding
balance
MDFL
Purchase of
goods
Sh.32 million
11% above normal

selling price
Due to MDFL
Sh.3 million
MHSL
Purchase of
goods
Sh.49 million
10% above normal

selling prize
Due to MHSL
Sh.5 million
TTL is controlled by TPL, its holding company transactions with TPL

Type of
transaction
Amount
Pricing policy
Outstanding balance
Sale of services
Sh.38 million
Firms length price
Receivable from TPL Sh.4

million
MDFL is an associate of TPL, TPL and MHSL are both under the control of Mr. Tamiba, a
director
Transaction with related parties
Related
party
Type of
transaction
Amount
Pricing policy
Outstanding
balance
Receivable from
TPL
Sh.3 million.
Receivable from
MHSL
Sh.3 million
TPL
Sale of goods
Sh.42 million
11% above
normal selling
price
MHSL
Sale of goods
Sh.66 million
10% above
normal selling
price
267
MHSL and TPL are both under the control of Mr. Tamiba, a director of MHSL, MDFL is an
associate of TPL
Related
party
Type of transaction
Amount
Pricing policy
Outstanding
balance
TPL
Sale of goods
Sh.49 million
10% above
normal selling
price
Receivable
from TPL
Sh.3 million.
MDFL
Purchase of goods
Sh.66 million
10% above
normal selling
price
Due to MDFL.
Sh.6 million
INTRODUCTION
EPS is the amount of earnings for a period that is attributable to each ordinary/equity share. As
per IAS 33 Earnings per share, enterprises whose ordinary shares or potential ordinary shares
are publicly traded and those enterprises that are in the process of issuing ordinary shares or
potential ordinary shares in public securities market should calculate and disclose earnings per
share.
Potential ordinary shares are securities, which are not presently equity shares but, which have
the potential of causing additional equity shares to be issued in the future.
Examples include:
Debt or equity instrument including preference shares that are convertible into ordinary
shares
Share warrants and options
Employee plans that allow employees to receive ordinary shares as part of their
remuneration and other share purchase plans and
S T U D Y
FAST FORWARD: When both parents and consolidated nancial statements are presented, the
information called for in respect of earnings per share need be presented only on the basis of
consolidated nancial statements.
T E X T
4.13 EARNINGS PER SHARE (IAS 33)
268
Shares which would be issued upon satisfaction of certain conditions resulting from
contractual arrangements such as the purchase of a business or other asset
The term Earnings Per Share should be used without qualifying language (e.g. diluted) when no
potential ordinary shares exist.
Earnings per share to be calculated are:
Basic earnings per share
Diluted earnings per share
S T U D Y
T E X T
Basic Earnings Per Share

Basic =
Net prot/loss attributable to ordinary shares

Weighted average no. of ordinary shares outstanding (WANOS)
(issued during the period)
Where:
net prot/loss attributable to ordinary shares =

Net prot/loss for the period
xx
Less: preference dividend
(xx)
xx
Note:
All items of income and expense which are recognised in a period including tax expense,
extra ordinary items and minority interest are included in the determination of net prot
(loss) for the period
The amount of preference dividend that is deducted from the net prot for the period
is
The amount of any preference dividend on non-cumulative preference shares declared
in respect of the period and
The full amount of the required preference dividend for cumulative preference shares
for the period whether or not the dividends have been declared.
The amount of preference dividend deducted for the period does not include the amount
of any preference dividend for cumulative preference shares paid or declared during
the current period in respect of previous periods. This is so because such dividends
have already been considered in the prior periods earnings per share computation.
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding (issued during the period) is:
the number of ordinary shares outstanding at the beginning of the period adjusted by
the number of shares issued during the period multiplied by a time weighting factor.
The time weighting factor is the number of days or months that the specic shares are
outstanding as a proportion of the total number of days or months in the period.
o
o
o
>>> Example 1
Assume that a company had 2m ordinary shares outstanding as at 1.1.2001. On 31.5.2001, the
company issued 800,000 new ordinary shares for cash.
269
Required
Calculate the weighted average number of shares outstanding during the period ended
31.12.2001.
Solution 1
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding (issued during the period)
1 January 31 May
2,000,000 5/12
833,333
1 June 31 December
2,800,000 7/12
1,633,333
2,466,666
>>> Example 2
Prot from ordinary activities after tax

Less: Minority interest
Less: Extra ordinary loss
Less: Preference dividend
Less: ordinary dividends
Retained earnings for the year
456,500
(17,500)
439,000
(50,000)
389,000
(7,500)
381,500
(17,500)
364,000
The company has 750m Sh.5 ordinary shares outstanding throughout the accounting period.
Required
Calculate the Earnings Per Share
Solution 2
Earnings per share =
381,500 = Sh. 0.509 or 50.9 cents

750,000
Notes to the accounts (Disclosure requirements)

The calculation of Earnings Per Share is based on earnings pf Sh. 381,500,000 and on the
weighted average of 750,000,000 ordinary shares in issue during the period.
S T U D Y
Sh 000
T E X T
The consolidated income statement of ABC ltd for the year ended 30 June 2002 is as follows:
270
Negative Earnings Per Share

Where a loss is incurred or where the amount earned for ordinary shares (after deducting
preference dividend) is a negative gure, Earnings Per Share should be calculated in the usual
way and the result described as a loss per share.
CHANGES IN EQUITY CAPITAL DURING THE CURRENT YEAR
Issue of new shares for cash at full market price ranking for dividend during the year
>>> Example 3
The issued and fully paid share capital of company ABC Ltd on 1st of January 01 comprised:
400,000 7% per shares of Sh.1 per share
3,000,000 ordinary shares of Sh.1 per share
400,000
3,000,000
T E X T
On 1 September 2001 a further 600,000 ordinary shares were issued and fully paid for in cash.
The post tax net prot for the period to 31st December 2001 was Sh.197,600
S T U D Y
3,400,000
Required
Compute the Earnings Per Share
Solution 3
1.
Shs
Net prot attributable to ordinary shares
197,600
Post tax net prot for the period
(28,000)
169,600
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding

1 January 31 August:
3,000,000 X 8/12
1 September 31 December:
2,000,000
1,200,000
3,200,000
Earnings per share =
169,600 X = Sh. 0.053 or 5.3 cents

3,200,000
271
Notes to the accounts

The calculation of earnings Per Share is based on earnings of Sh.169,500 and on the weighted
average of Sh.3.2 m ordinary shares in issues during the year.
2.
Issue of new shares as part of a capitalization scheme (bonus issue)

In a capitalization or bonus issues, ordinary shares are issued to existing shareholders
for no additional consideration. Therefore, the numbers of ordinary shares outstanding
is increased without an increase in resources.
The number of ordinary shares outstanding before the bonus issues is adjusted as
if the bonus issue has occurred at the beginning of the earlier reported period. The
corresponding Earnings Per Share disclosed in respect of all earlier periods should
be adjusted proportionately in respect of the capitalisation issue. In other words the
earnings Per Share should be based on the increased number of shares ranking for
dividend after the capitalisation issue.
Sh. 000
Prot after taxation
Less: Minority interest
Add: Extra ordinary item
Less: Preference dividend (including arrears)
Less: Ordinary dividends
Retained earnings for the year
Retained earnings brought forward
Retained earnings carried forward
1,020
(18)
1,002
198
1,200
(315)
885
(750)
135
665
800
The company had as at 1.1.01 an issued share capital of 500,000 ordinary shares and Sh.
1,500,000 7% preference shares. The company made a bonus issue of 1 for 5 ordinary shares
on 31.3.2001.
Required
Compute Earnings per share
S T U D Y
The summarised prot and loss account of ABC ltd for the year ended 31 December 2001 is as
follows:
T E X T
>>> Example 4
272
Solution 4
1.

Net prot for the period
1,200
Less: preference dividend (7% 1,500)
105
1,095
2.
Weighted average number of shares

Sh.
As at 1.1.2001
500,000
Add: Bonus 1/5 500,000
100,000
600,000
S T U D Y
T E X T
Earnings per share = 1,095,000 = Sh. 1,825

600,000
Assume that the earnings for 20X0 after deducting preference dividend was sh. 1,005,000 and
that the ordinary shares outstanding throughout the period were 500,000.
Required
Compute the restated earnings per share taking into account the effect of the bonus issue
Solution
Earnings per share = 1,005 = Sh. 1,615
600
Notes to the accounts
The calculation of earnings per share is based on earnings of sh. 1,095,000 (20X0: 1,005,000)
and on the weighted average of 600,000 ordinary shares (20X0: 600,000) in issue during the
year.
Ordinary shares issued as part of the purchase consideration of a business combination, which
is accounted for as an acquisition
The ordinary shares issued are included in the weighted average number of shares as from the
date of acquisition because the acquirer incorporates the results of the operations of the acquiree
as from the date of acquisition.
Note
Ordinary shares issued as part of a business combination which gives rise to a merger are
included in the calculation of the weighted average number of shares for all periods presented
because the nancial statements of the combined enterprise are prepared as if the combined
enterprise had always existed.
273
>>> Example 5
The issued and fully paid share capital of the company

Sh
On 1.1.01 comprised
80,000 7% preference shares of sh. 1 per share
80,000
4,200,000 ordinary shares of sh.1 per share
4,200,000
4,280,000
On 1.8.01 the company issued 20,000 7% preference shares and 600,000 ordinary shares as
consideration of an 80% controlling interest in another company, which had become a subsidiary
on 1.1.01. The post tax net prot for the year to 31.12.01 was shs. 273,200 for the group of which
sh. 7,400 was attributable to minority interest in the subsidiary. The prot had been consolidated
for the whole year. All shares in issue at 31.12.01 ranked for dividend.
Required
Solution 5
1.

Shs
Shs
273,200
273,200
Less: minority interest
(7,400)
265,800
Less: preference dividend 100,000 0.07
(7,000)
258,800
As at 1.1.01
Issued on 1.8.01
(Assumed to be issued as at date of acquisition)
Earnings per share
4,200,000
4,800,000
600,000
258,800 = Sh. 0.054 or 5.4 cents

4,800,000
Note to the account

The calculation of earnings per share is based on earnings of sh. 258,800 and on the weighted
average of 4,800,000 ordinary shares in issue during the year.
4.13.1 ISSUE OF SHARES THROUGH A RIGHTS ISSUE

In a rights issue, the exercise price is often less than the fair value of the shares. Thus, the
concessionary price at which the shares are issued reects a bonus element in the rights issue.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Compute earnings per share
274
The rights issue is therefore regarded as an issue for cash at full market price and partly a bonus
issue on the combined number of original and assumed rights shares.
>>> Example 6
A company has 4m ordinary shares of sh. 1 in issue. The market value of which were sh. 3.5 per
share. It then decided a 1 for 4 rights issue at the concessionary price of sh. 2.8 per share.
Required
Determine the bonus element in rights issue.
Solution 6
Number of shares to be acquired through the rights issue
S T U D Y
T E X T
= 4,000,000 = 4
1,000,000
Less: Shares to be issued at full market price
1,000,000 x 2.8 = 3.5
(800,000)
Bonus shares
Therefore Bonus
i.e.
200,000
=
200,000 ____
(4,000,000 + 800,000)
1 for 24 (for every 24 shares 1 share is free)
In calculating the current earnings per share gure the weighted average number of shares is
computed as follows:
(Number of shares before the rights issue) period Actual cum-rights price =
Theoretical ex-rights price
Add: (number of shares after the rights issue) period
The previous years earnings per share will be adjusted/computed as follows:
Earnings per share Theoretical ex-rights price
Actual cum-rights price
Where:
The actual cum-rights price is the fair value of the shares prior to the exercise of rights
xx
xx
xx
275
Theoretical ex-rights is given by:

(No. of ord. Shares outstanding prior to the rights issue fair value of shares)
+ (No. of shares issued through rights issue rights price)
No. of ord. Shares outstanding prior to the rights issue + No. of shares issued through a rights
issue
>>> Example 7
The issued and fully paid capital of ABC Company on January 01 comprised:
100,000 7% preference shares of Sh 10 per share

4,000,000 ordinary shares of sh. 10 per share
Required
(i)
(ii)
Compute the earnings per share of the current year where the post tax net prot for the
year to 31 December 01 was sh. 1,155,400
Adjust the previous years earnings per share where the earnings per share for the
previous year was 28 cents.
Solution 7
1.
2.
Earnings
Net prot after tax
(7% 1,000,000)
Shs
1,155,400
(70,000)
1,085,400
Theoretical Ex-rights price

4,000,000 (24) + 1,000,000 (14)
4,000,000 + 1,000,000
3.
= Ksh. 22

January 1 September 30
October 1 December 31
4,000,000 9/12 24/22

5,000,000 3/12
Earnings per share 2001

1,085,400
=
=
4,522,727
0.24 or 24 cents
3,272,727
1,250,000
4,522,727
S T U D Y
T E X T
On 1st October 2001, the company decided a 1 for 4 rights issue of ordinary shares at sh.14 per
share. The market price of ordinary shares on the last day of quotation on a cum-rights basis was
sh.24 per share.
276
Earnings per share 20X0 = 28 22/24 = 25.6 or 26 cents
Bonus element in the rights issue

Number of shares to be acquired through a rights issue =
Less: number of shares issued at full market price
(1,000,000 14/24)
Bonus
416,667
4,000,000 + 583,333
1,000,000
583,333
416,667
1
11
(i.e. for every 11 shares 1 share is bonus/free)

January 1 September 30 WANOS (4,000,000 9/12)
Add: bonus 3,000,000/11
3,000,000
272,727
3,272,727
S T U D Y
T E X T
4.13.2 DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE

At the balance sheet date a company may have entered previously into commitments, which
would result in the issue at some future date of further ordinary shares. Such an issue could
adversely affect the interest of existing shareholders in terms of reduction or dilution in earnings
per share.
For this reason International Accounting Standard 33 requires that a listed company should be
required to publish its diluted EPS in addition to its Basic EPS, if it has dilutive potential ordinary
shares. A potential ordinary share is treated as dilutive when and only when their conversion to
ordinary shares would decrease EPS.
Potential ordinary shares are anti-dilutive when their conversion to ordinary shares would
increase EPS. The effects of anti-dilutive potential ordinary shares are ignored in calculating
diluted EPS.
When a separate class of equity shares being issued do not rank for dividend in the current year
diluted EPS should be calculated on the assumption that this class of shares ranked for dividend
from the start of the year or such a later date as they were issued or assumed to be issued.
>>> Example 8
The issued and fully paid share capital of a company on 31.12.00 comprised:
800,000 ordinary class A shares of Ksh. 25 each
On 1.1.01 the company issued 2000,000 ordinary shares of Sh.30 each which do not
rank for dividend until December 31 2002.
The post tax net prot for the year ended to 31 December 01 was 2,480,000.
277
Required
1.
2.
Calculate basic EPS

Calculate diluted EPS
Solution 7
Basic EPS
2,480,000
Sh. 3.1
Sh. 2.48
800,000
Diluted EPS
2,480,000
1,000,000
Any dividends on diluted potential ordinary shares, which have been deducted in arriving
at the net prot attributable to ordinary shareholders.
Interest recognised in the period for the dilutive potential ordinary shares and,
Any other changes in income or expense that would result from the conversion of the
diluted potential ordinary shares.
>>> Example 8
The issued and fully paid share capital of a company on 31.12.01 was:
400,000 7% preference shares of Sh.1 per share

4,000,000 ordinary shares of Sh.1 per share
The post tax net prot for the year ended 31.12.01 was Sh. 372,000
On 1st October 1999, the company had issued Sh.1.2. m 6% convertible loan stock, 2002/2005
convertible per Sh 100 of loan stock into ordinary shares of Shs. 1 per share as follows:
30th September 2002 120
S T U D Y
The terms of issue of convertible securities specify the date and the number of equity shares to be
issued. If the conversion rate varies according to the date of occurrence, it should be assumed for
the purpose of calculating diluted EPS that the conversion takes place at the most advantageous
conversion rate from the standpoint of the holder of the potential ordinary shares. For the purpose
of calculating diluted EPS, the net prot (loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders as calculated
in basic earnings should be adjusted by the after tax effect of;
T E X T
4.13.3 CONVERTIBLE SECURITIES
278
The tax rate for 2001 was 35%.
Required
1.
2.
Compute the basic earnings per share

Solution 8
Basic earnings
Shs
Post net prot
372,000
Less: preference dividends (7% 400,000)
(28,000)
344,000
S T U D Y
T E X T
Equity shares in issue

4,000,000
=
344,000
4,000,000
0.086 = 8.6 cents

Shs
Basic earnings
Add: Interest on 6% convertible loan stock
Adjusted for after tax effects(6% 1,200,000 0.65)
344,000
46,800
390,800

Shs
For basic earnings per share
Convertible loan stock equivalent
1,200,000 120
/100
4,000,000
1,440,000
5,440,000
Diluted earnings per share =
390,800 = 7.2 cents

5,440,000
Partial Conversion
If a partial conversion of loan stock has taken place during the year, basic EPS is calculated on
the weighted average number of shares in issue during the year. Diluted EPS is calculated on the
adjusted earnings and on the total number of shares in issue at the yearend plus the maximum
number of ordinary shares issuable under the conversion terms.
279
>>> Example 9
Details as in example 8 with the exception of details relating to nancial year 2002.
On 30th September 2002, the company converted Sh. 400,000 of 6% convertible loan stock into
480,000 ordinary shares which ranked for dividend in the year 2002.
Required
(i)
(ii)
Calculate the basic EPS

Calculate the diluted EPS
Solution 9
Basic EPS
Basic earnings
372,000
Less: preference dividends
(28,000)
344,000
1 January September 30 =
1 October December 31 =
Basic EPS
4,000,000 9/12
4,480,000 3/12
=
=
344,000 = 0.083 or 8.3 cents

4,120,000
Diluted EPS
Diluted earnings
Basic earnings
Add back 6% interest:
In respect of converted loan stock
6% 400,000 9/12 0.65
In respect of unconverted loan stock
6% 800,000 0.65
Sh. 344,000
11,700
31,200
386,900

Outstanding throughout the year
6% convertible loan stock equivalent
800,000 115/100
4,480,000
920,000
5,400,000
3,000,000
1,120,000
4,120,000
S T U D Y
Net prot after tax
T E X T
Shs
280
Diluted EPS =
386,900
5,400,000
7.2 cents
Where nal conversion takes place

>>> Example 10
Details as example 9 with the exception that on 30th September 2003, the remainder of 6%
convertible loan stock was converted into 920,000 ordinary shares which ranked for dividend in
2003.
Required
Compute the basic earnings per share
Solution 10
S T U D Y
T E X T
Basic EPS
January 1 September 30 4,480,000 9/12
October 1 December 31 5,400,000 3/12
Basic EPS
344,000
4,710,000
=
=
3,360,000
1,350,000
4,710,000
7.3 cents
Assume that the converted shares did not rank for dividend, calculate diluted EPS
Basic EPS
Basic earnings
Net prot after tax
372,000
(28,000)
344,000
WANOS
4,480,000
Since the shares are not ranking for dividend the basic EPS would have been
344,000
=
7.7 cents
4,480,000
Diluted EPS
Basic earnings
Add: 6% interest on converted loan stock
6% 800,000 9/12 0.65
344,000
23,400
367,400
Equity shares in issue as at year end
5,400,000
Diluted EPS =
6.8 cents
367,400
5,400,000
281
4.13.4 Options/Warrants to Subscribe For Ordinary Shares

Options and other share purchase arrangements are dilutive when they would result in the issue
of ordinary shares for less than their fair value. The amount of the dilution is fair value less the
issue price.
A contract to issue a certain number of ordinary shares at their average fair value
during the period. The shares so to be issued are fairly priced and are assumed to
be neither dilutive nor anti-dilutive. Therefore, they are ignored in the computation for
diluted earnings per share.
b)
A contract to issue the remaining ordinary shares for no consideration. Such ordinary
shares generate no proceeds and have no effect on the net prot attributable to ordinary
shares outstanding. Therefore, such shares are dilutive and are added to the number of
ordinary shares outstanding in the computation of diluted EPS.
S T U D Y
a)
>>> Example 12
The net prot for 2001
Sh. 1,200,000
Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during 2001

Average fair value of 1 ordinary share during 2001
Weighted average number of shares under option during 2001
Exercise price for shares under option during 2001
Required
Compute the basic earnings per share and diluted earnings per share.
Solution 12
Basic EPS =
T E X T
Therefore, in order to calculate diluted EPS, each of such arrangement is treated as comprising
of:
1,200,000
500,000
2.4
Diluted EPS
Number of shares issued for no consideration
=
Total number of shares to be issued
Less: Number of shares issued at full market price
100,000 15/20
100,000
(75,000)
25,000
500,000
Sh. 20
100,000 shares
Sh. 15
282
Diluted EPS =
1,200,000
(500,000 + 25,000)
Sh. 2.29
Determining the order in which to include dilutive securities in the calculation of the
weighted average number of shares
In considering whether potential ordinary shares are dilutive or anti-dilutive, each issue or series
of potential ordinary shares is considered separately rather than in aggregate. The sequence
in which potential ordinary shares are considered may affect whether or not they are dilutive.
Therefore, in order to maximise the dilution of basic EPS, each issue or series of potential ordinary
shares is considered in sequence from the most dilutive to the least dilutive.
S T U D Y
T E X T
CHAPTER SUMMARY
decisions.


(a)
provides a single product or service or a group of related products and services and
(b)
that is subject to risks and returns that are different from those of other business
segments.

(a)
provides products and services within a particular economic environment and
(b)
that is subject to risks and returns that are different from those of components operating
283
Segment revenue: Revenue, including inter-segment revenue that is directly attributable or


that:
(b)
are directly attributable or reasonably allocable to a segment. This includes interest

insurance company, etc.). Segment expenses never include:
a. extraordinary items;
b. losses on investments accounted for by the equity method;
c. income taxes;
d. general corporate administrative and head-ofce expenses.
interest.
T E X T
result from operating activities and
Segment assets and segment liabilities: Those operating assets (liabilities) that is directly
S T U D Y
(a)
CHAPTER QUIZ
1.
What is the purpose of a cashow statement?
2.
Why would prots and the ow of funds differ?
3.
When is a party said to be related to an entity?
284
ANSWERS TO QUIZ QUESTIONS

1.
Cash ow statements should assist the users to:
Assess the enterprise's ability to generate positive future cash ows;

Assess the enterprise's ability to meet its obligations, pay dividends and meet its needs
payments; and
Assess the effects on the enterprise's nancial position of both cash and non-cash
S T U D Y
T E X T
2.
Reasons why prots and the ow of funds might differ:
A company might have to buy xed asserts, and the purchase costs of view xed assets
will differ from the depreciation charge in the year. (Depreciation, in fact does not
represent a ow of funds at all.)
Prots are calculated on the accruals concept. This means that a company might:Spend money on the purchase of stocks which are unsold during the period, and their
not charged against prots;
Sell goods on credit, thereby making a prot on sales without receiving the cash from
the debtors before the end of the accounting period;
Incur development expense which is capitalized and not charged against prots until
later periods;
Charge taxation and dividends payable against prots, whereas the cash ows are
affected by taxation and dividends actually paid.
A company might be able to obtain funds from sources other than Prots - eg by
issuing new shares or raising a loan. On the other hand, the company might have to
nd the cash to redeem some preference shares or debentures or to repay a loan.
o
o
o
o
3.
A party is related to an entity if:
(a)
directly, or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, the party:
(i)
controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with, the entity (this includes
(ii) has an interest in the entity that gives it signicant inuence over the entity; or
(iii) has joint control over the entity;
(b)
the party is an associate (as dened in IAS 28 Investments in Associates) of the

entity;
(c)
the party is a joint venture in which the entity is a venturer (see IAS 31 Interests in Joint
Ventures);
(d)
the party is a member of the key management personnel of the entity or its parent;
(e)
the party is a close member of the family of any individual referred to in (a) or (d);
(f)
the party is an entity that is controlled, jointly controlled or signicantly inuenced by or

for which signicant voting power in such entity resides with, directly or indirectly, any
individual referred to in (d) or (e); or
(g)
the party is a post-employment benet plan for the benet of employees of the entity, or
of any entity that is a related party of the entity.
285
PAST PAPER ANALYSIS

Cashow statements was tested in the following examinations:
12/07
12/06
12/05
06/05
06/02
Segmental reports was tested in the following examinations:
12/06
12/05
12/04
12/03
06/02
07/00
Earnings per share was tested in the following examinations :
06/07
06/06
06/04
12/02
07/00
Related parties was tested in the following examinations:

06/05
06/01
S T U D Y
06/03
T E X T
06/04
286
EXAM QUESTIONS
QUESTION ONE (disposal of a subsidiary)
S T U D Y
T E X T
Great Mountain Estates Limited is the holding company for a group of tea growing subsidiary
companies. In the year to 31 March 2003, it sold one of its subsidiaries so that the groups area
of operations could be conned to a single area of the country. The directors have made this
decision as part of cost cutting exercise. The proceeds of the sale of the subsidiary were used to
repay debt. In spite of the reduction in interest rates in the country, the directors are of the view
that the interest cost of loans is excessive.
Consolidated Profit and Loss
Account for the year ended 31
March 2003
Sh.
Sh.
million
milli
Sales
on
Cost of sales
Gross profit
596
Other operating
(417)
income
179
Distribution
12
costs
(48)
Administrative
(154)
expenses
(19)
Other operating
(30)
expenses
(35)
Operating loss
19
Finance
cost:
(46)
Interest expense
(2)
Profit
on
13
disposal
of
subsidiary
Loss before tax
11
Tax:
(35)
Current
4
Deferred tax
(31)
Net Loss
Minority interest
Net
loss
attributable
to
shareholders.
Consolidated Balance Sheet as at 31 March
Capital employed
Share capital
Share premium
Retained earnings
Shareholders funds
Minority interest
Non-current
liabilities
Bank loans
Deferred
tax
liabilities
Provisions
for
liabilities
and
charges
Finance
lease
liabilities
Represented by:
Non-current asset:
Property, plant and
equipment cost:
Depreciation
Intangible
assets:
Goodwill cost
Amortization
Deferred tax assets
Current assets:
Inventories
Trade and other
receivables
Tax recoverable
Cash
and
cash
equivalents
Current liabilities
Trade and other
payables
Current tax
Finance
lease
liabilities
Bank overdrafts
Net
current
assets/(liabilities)
2003
Sh.
million
400
112
64
576
13
589
29
18
18
65
654
705
(161)
544
40
(24)
16
16
576
158
103
11
3
275
112
2
83
197
78
654
2003
Sh
million
300
84
95
479
21
500
52
17
19
2
90
590
769
(135)
634
50
(50)
25
2
661
225
134
9
5
373
188
2
8
246
444
(71
590
287
The assets and liabilities in the subsidiary (which was sold on 31 December 2002) were as
follows:
Property, plant, equipment cost
Depreciation
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and bank balances
Bank overdraft
Bank loans
Current tax payable
Sh. million
118
(31)
87
27
41
Sh. million
3
(61)
(38)
(18)
(1)
40
Great Mountain Estates Limited had purchased 90% of the ordinary share capital of this subsidiary
on 1 April 1997 for Sh.28 million when the fair value and the carrying value of the net assets were
Sh.20 million. The bank overdraft is dealt with as part of the cash equivalents.
There was an issue of ordinary shares at a premium of 30%, issue costs were charged against
the share premium.
The loss before tax is arrived at after charging the following items:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Amortization of goodwill
Staff costs (2,433 members of staff at year end)
Auditors remuneration
Directors remuneration
Sh. million
65
4
227
3
2
The interest expense charged in the prot and loss account is made up of Sh.2 million on nance
leases and Sh.33 million on bank loans and overdrafts. At 31 March 2003, included in trade and
other payables is accrued interest of Sh.1 million on 31 March 2002 the gure had been Sh.5
million.
Share issue costs are shown as cashows from nancing activities.
There were no purchases of property, plant and equipment using new nance leases.
Required:
Prepare the consolidated cashow statement for the year ended 31 March 2003 using the indirect
method in IAS 7. Great Mountain Estates Limited shows interest paid as an operating activity and
wants the cashow from operating activities to start with the loss before tax. Do not include the
detailed disclosure requirements in respect of the disposal of the subsidiary, but you should show
the total disposal consideration and the amount of cash and cash equivalents in the subsidiary
disposed of. A reconciliation of the cash equivalents in the cashow statement with the equivalent
items reported in the balance sheet should be disclosed.
(25 marks)
S T U D Y
The gures for provisions for liabilities and charges are made up entirely of amounts due in
respect of staff retirement gratuities.
T E X T
The other companies in the group sold property, plant and equipment which had cost Sh.11
million for Sh.9 million.
288
CASE STUDY
Case study Advising using Cash Flow Statements
This is the solution to the case study found at the end of:
Chapter 10 Cash Flow
Dezzies: cash ow statement for the year ending 31 March 20X4
S T U D Y
T E X T
Operating prot
Add back: depreciation on buildings
2000
Depreciation on xtures and ttings
1829
Depreciation on delivery vehicles

Prot on sale of delivery vehicle
4763
(520)
78 578
8 072
86 650
Changes in working capital

Stock (6 186 5 630) (cash outow)
Debtors (5 914 7 419) (cash inow)
Creditors (8 510 6 340) (cash inow)
(556)
1505
2170
Net change in working capital

Net cash inow from operating activities
Interest
Interest received (cash inow)
Interest paid (cash outow)
Capital expenditure (103 000 + 2039 + 15 183) (120
(cash outow)
222)
Sale of delivery vehicle sale proceeds
Proprietors drawings (cash outow)

Mortgage loan (cash inow)
Net cash outow
Change in cash balance:
Cash at 1 April 20X3
Cash at 31 March 20X4
Decrease in cash net cash outow
3119
89 769
280
(4 617)
2120
(4 337)
(118
102
(53000)
73750
(11920)
15 160
3240
(11 920)
289
Advice to Delroy Desmond

Delroys business has suffered a net outow of cash in the course of the year. The cash ow
statement shows where the outows have occurred. The principal items of outow are, of course,
the expenditure on new xed assets. Delroy obtained a mortgage loan for some of the major
expenditure on new premises, but nanced part of it (103 000 73 750 = 29 250) from the
businesss own resources. In addition, over 15 000 was spent on acquiring new delivery vehicles
and a further 2000 on xtures and ttings. The second largest item of cash outow is Delroys
own drawings, which have increased substantially (42 500 increasing to 53 000).
However, Delroys business is protable (net prot margin for the year ending 31 March 20X4 is
21.8%), and it has generated net cash inows from operating activities of 89 769.
Over 15 000 has been spent on new delivery vehicles; this investment may address some of the
problems noted by the customers of bikes breaking down and long waits for delivery. However,
there could also be a problem with stafng, and it certainly appears to be the case that Delroys
managers are less effective than they should be. Delroy will have to arrange to employ higher
paid staff. The obvious implication for cash and prots is that stafng expenses will increase.
Also, he may have to spend extra cash on making existing staff redundant and could face legal
problems if the staff consider themselves to have been unfairly dismissed.
However, if Delroy can sort out his stafng problems there are potential gains to be made in:
Increased customer satisfaction (leading to word-of-mouth recommendations, and an

increased rate of return visits)
Better control of the delivery service, resulting in fewer complaints
Improved quality of service within the restaurants

All of these factors could lead to increased turnover, and/or reduced costs.
Delroys restaurants are protable and bring in substantial sums of cash. The second restaurant
has been open for only part of the year (we do not know from the details how long it has been
open), and it could be expected to produce higher turnover and prots in the year ending 31 March
20X5. Delroy should prepare forecasts for at least the next following year, to show how much
cash is likely to be available for spending on restaurant improvement and additional/replacement
stafng.
Business Accounting and Finance 2nd Edition
Catherine Gowthorpe 2005
Thomson Learning
Source: www.google.co.ke-case studies on cashow statements.
S T U D Y
It appears that Delroy will be obliged to invest more money in restaurant t out, new tables and
so on, in order to keep the customers happy. He should be advised to do a thorough appraisal
of the restaurant ttings and decoration, possibly in conjunction with an interior design expert
(given that Delroy obviously has a blind spot in all matters relating to the appearance of his
restaurants).
T E X T
Delroy accepts the consultants analysis of the operating problems the business faces. The
accounting information suggests that Delroy is happy to make investments in bricks and mortar,
but is quite prepared to skimp on the furnishing of his restaurants. We can see from the gures that
the xtures and ttings are quite old (this shows up in the relatively high gures for accumulated
depreciation), and that only around 2000 was spent on new xtures and ttings. Customers
have obviously noticed Delroys cheapskate approach to these matters, and are not happy about
the appearance of the restaurants.
S T U D Y
T E X T
290
291
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
CHAPTER FIVE
EFFECTS OF INFLATION
S T U D Y
T E X T
292
293
CHAPTER FIVE
OBJECTIVES
After this chapter, the student will have knowledge of:
Capital maintenance and accounting models
Ination accounting and approaches to ination accounting
Adjustments to current cost accounting

Depreciation adjustment is the additional depreciation arising due to increase in prices of
goods.
Monetary working capital adjustment represents the amount of additional (or reduced) nance
needed for the monetary working capital as a result of changes in the input prices of goods and
services used and nanced by the business.
Cost of sales adjustment (COSA) is the additional cost of sales arising due to ination.
Gearing Adjustment
This is the gain due to the shareholders as a result of nancing the assets through loans.
S T U D Y
Accounting for ination has been covered in this text because it appears in the syllabus. The
main standard is IAS 15 Price level changes which was withdrawn in 2004. In future, candidates
may not be required to prepare ination adjusted accounts. The important standard here is IAS
29 Hyperinationary economies for which we shall only mention the summary accounting
requirements. Ensure that you understand the effects of ination on nancial statements.
T E X T
INTRODUCTION
294
EXAM CONTEXT
In past examinations, the examiner has tested the students knowledge on the following
topics:
Current purchasing power (CPP) accounting

Current Cost Accounting (CCA)
The student should therefore understand these topics.
INDUSTRY CONTEXT
This topic assists organizations to know how to treat ination.
S T U D Y
T E X T
It explains how to prepare nancial statements and to reect the impact of ination in the nancial
statements.
5.1 NEED FOR INFLATION ACCOUNTING
The major reason why ination accounting or accounting for price level changes has
been a hot topic in the academic literature is because of the deciencies of the historical
cost accounting (HCA) approach.
HCA is a well established method of accounting all over the world because it is able to
meet the legal requirements of nancial reporting i.e fullling the stewardship function
assigned to nancial reports. HCA has been able to provide information about the
nancial position, performance and changes in nancial position of an enterprise to a
wide range of users especially during periods of stable prices.
However, most economics in the world are characterized with environments of nonstable prices ination. Under such circumstances, it is unlikely that HCA can be able
to satisfy the informational demands of users whose academic needs are dependent on
estimates of future cashows. HCA is likely to fail because:
(a)
The balance sheet gures for assets, based on cost at time of acquisition are unlikely
to reect present day values since they lack additivity. The balance sheet includes
a conglomerate of costs incurred on different dates which will not enable users to
realistically predict future cashows related to those assets.
(b)
If prot (income) is dependent on measure of capital at different dates, then prot

measurement can be considered to be the result of comparing two fairly meaningless
totals. In addition the prot that results is usually considered to be overstated and any
ratio, including return on capital employed, will also be overstated.
(c)
Historic cost prot give a misleading impression of the ability of a company to continue
to operate at the same level of operation and/or maintain capital in `real terms - problem
of capital maintenance.
(d)
A series of historic cost accounts can give a misleading impression of the nancial
trends of a company.
295
5.2 CAPITAL MAINTENANCE

FAST FORWARD: There is a relationship between prot and capital.
I = D + (K2 - K1)
Where I
D
K2
K1
=
=
=
=
Income for the period

Dividends or distribution
Capital at the end of the period
Capital at the beginning of the period
If
K2 = K1, I = D, i.e. all the income has been distributed
K2 > K1, I > D, i.e. retained prots which form part of the capital at the beginning of next year
K2 < K1, I < D i.e. dividends have been paid out of capital or reserves brought forward
As can be seen from the above equations, income is only recognised after the capital at the
beginning of the year is maintained at the end of the year. Thus, capital maintenance is thus a
minimum concept. Capital represents the absolute minimum funding that must be retained to
provide security for creditors, and to keep the business at least at the level of activity that was
originally determined by the owner(s).
In order to keep track of essential capital, accountants have traditionally made a clear distinction
between capital and revenue funds.
The value of income will also depend on the manner in which the capital is measured. A number
of models are available to measure income. These can be broadly categorised into two:
(a)
Economic income model
(b)
Accounting models
S T U D Y
Thus the relationship between prot (income) and capital can best be expressed by the following
equation:
T E X T
Conventionally, prot is calculated by setting expenses against revenues in a formal statement

known as a prot and loss account. An alternative view of prot is to see it, in the absence of
fresh capital inputs or drawings, as the increase in the net worth of a business.
296
Economic Income Model

It can be measured using the following equation
I = C + (K2 - K1)
Where I
Realised cashow in the period
K2
Capital at the year-end measured in terms of present value of

future cashows.
K1
Capital at the beginning of the year measured in terms of present
S T U D Y
T E X T
value of future cashows.
This equation is based on Hicks model of ideal income and he denes the income as being
the amount a man can spend and still be as well off at the end of the period as he was at the
beginning.
This approach to measurement of income sidesteps all the problems associated with yearend
adjustment to prot. The estimations of accruals and prepayments, the assumptions about xed
assets lives etc that are embodied in the traditional prot and loss account are entirely avoided.
However, the main disadvantage is probably that the calculation of well-offness, or capital, is
similarly subject to estimates and professional judgments. Remember the value of capital at
the beginning and the end of the period is dened as the discounted present value of the future
income stream. This income is measured from changes in capital, by contract to the accrual
concept where capital is the residual after measuring income.
Future cash ows are discounted at the entitys cost of capital and the maximum one can spend
to maintain the welloffness is I and not C. An essential feature of the model is that the denition
of income takes account of consumption and saving and dis-saving. The sums saved should
be reinvested and should earn interest, which will ensure capital maintenance and a constant
income.
297
5.3 ACCOUNTING MODELS

This includes:
(a)
Classical school - Historical cost accounting the capital is maintained by money terms.
If the entity has a historical cost of Shs 1,000 at the beginning of the year and Shs
1,000 at the end of the year (assuming no distributions and no injections or withdrawal
of capital):
Income = Sh 1,500 - Sh 1,000 = Shs 500
This is the traditional approach to prot measurement.
Modern School - Current Value Accounting

This model tries to maintain the operating capability of the entity. The operating
capability of the business entity is its ability to replace assets as they are consumed or
worn out or its ability to produce the same volume or value of goods i.e. the next year
as in the current year.
S T U D Y
(c)
T E X T
(b) Neo-classical
This includes the Historical cost accounting adjusted for changes in general purchasing
power. This model makes sure that the purchasing power of the capital is maintained.
5.4
APPROACHES TO INFLATION ACCOUNTING
HCA does not reect the impact of changing prices on the net assets and earnings of a
company, but to date no agreement has been reached on a system that will do that and
provide users with the information they require to make decisions in an environment of
moving price levels.
However, there are two main approaches to ination accounting. These are:
(a) Current purchasing power accounting system and
(b) Current value systems
298
5.5
CURRENT PURCHASING POWER (CPP)

ACCOUNTING
S T U D Y
T E X T
FAST FORWARD: Current Purchasing Power (CPP) Accounting requires that historical cost
based amounts be translated to the current purchasing power equivalent using the general price
level index.
It is also referred to as the General Price Level Approach.
The CPP accounts attempts to maintain the shareholders capital in terms of the general
or consumer purchasing power. This is known as the proprietorship concept of capital
maintenance.
According to the CPP, all items in the prot and loss account are expressed in terms of
current (year-end) purchasing power, while the same will be true in the balance sheet.
Thus all items in the balance sheet will have to be converted in terms of year-end
purchasing power except the so called monetary items (assets and liabilities) which are
automatically expressed in such terms.
>>> Example - CPP Accounts
Nyumba Ltd engages in real estate business owning only one property. The companys main
income is rental income.
The balance sheet of the company as at the end of the year 1 and year 2 is as follows:
Year 1
KShs
Year 2
KShs
Assets
Building (net)
Cash
150,000
105,000
45,000
90,000
95,000
195,000
The comparative income statements for both year 1 and year 2 are given below:
Revenue
Expense
Depreciation
Net Income
Year 1
Kshs
Year 2
Kshs
82,500
90,755
(45,000)
37,500
(45,000)
45,755
299
Additional Information
The company was formed on January 1st, Year 1 through a cash investment of KSh
195,000.
The building was acquired on January 1st Year 1 at a cost of 195,000. Expected useful
life is 4 1/3 years.
All revenue is received at the end of the year.
There are no operating expenses except depreciation.
All net income is paid out as a dividend. The balance of cash is banked at no interest
return.
The price indexes for Year 1 and Year 2 are as follows:
1st Jan
year 1
100
31st Dec
Year 1
105
31st Dec
Year 2
110
Required:
Solution:
NYUMBA LTD
Income Statement for Period ending
Revenue
Depreciation (W1)
Purchasing power
Loss (W2)
Net Income
Year 1
KShs
Year 2
KShs
82,500
(47,250)
35,250
90,755
(49,500)
41,255
_____
35,250
(2,250)
39,005
Balance Sheet as at end of

Year 1
Kshs
Year 2
Kshs
Buildings (net) (W3)

Cash (W4)
157,500
47,250
204,750
117,750
96,750
214,500
Capital (W5)
204,750
214,500
Assets
Workings
W1 - Depreciation Expense
Year 1
105 x 195,000 = KShs 47,250

100
4 1/3
S T U D Y
T E X T
Prepare the balance sheet and income statements for Nyumba Ltd for the two years using the
current purchasing power approach.
300
Year 2
110 x 195,000 = KShs 49,500

100
4 1/3
W2
Purchasing Power Loss
Year 1 -
No loss/gain as there was no monetary item at the beginning of the year.
Year 2 -
Monetary assets-cash = 47,250 at beginning of Year 2.
Thus the PP loss

=
47,250 x 110 - 47,250

105
KSh. 2,250
W3 - Buildings
S T U D Y
T E X T
Year 1 -
Adjusted cost (105 x 195,000) =

100
Less Acc. Depreciation
Year 2 -
204,750
( 47,250)
157,500
Adjusted cost (110 x 19,500) =
KSh 214,500
100
96,750
117,750
Acc. Depreciation (47,250 + 49,500)

W4 - Cash
Year 1 Year 2 -
Amount of depreciation retained

Amount of depreciation retained
to date (47,250 + 49,500)
KShs 47,250
KShs 96,750
W5 - Capital
Year 1 -
195,000 x 105 =
100
KShs 204,250
Year 2 -
195,000 x 110 =
100
KShs 214,500
Purchasing Power Gain and Losses

-
Purchasing power gains and losses arise as a result of holding non monetary assets or
liabilities during a period when the price level changes.
Purchasing power gains and losses arise because monetary items, which are xed in
terms of the number of shillings to be received or paid, gain or lose purchasing power
as the price level changes.
Monetary assets - assets receivable at xed amounts either currently or in the future
include cash, accounts receivable, notes receivable.
Monetary liabilities - liabilities payable in xed number of shillings either currently or in

the future include both short term liabilities like LTD, notes payable etc.
He potential for gains and losses is summarised in the table below where net monetary
assets refers to total monetary assets exceeding monetary liabilities and the converse
is true for net monetary liabilities.
301
PURCHASING POWER GAINS AND LOSSES

State of the Economy
Deation
Net monetary assets position
Purchasing power loss
Purchasing power gain
Net monetary liabilities position
Purchasing power loss
Advantages of CPP
Current Purchasing Power accounts provide a monetary unit of valuing all items in the
nancial statements for proper comparisons.
Since CPP accounts are based on historical cost accounts the raw data is easily veried
and can be edited
The restatement of results enhances entities comparability.
Prot is measured in real terms as a result more accurate forecasts can be made of
future prots.
CPP accounts avoid the subjective valuations of CCA.
Problems and criticisms of CPP

Although the CPP restores the additivity of the gures, it has its own problems.
(a)
Balance sheet treatment of non-monetary assets.

It is normally regarded as an extension of the historical cost approach. The resultant
gures bear little resemblance to current values of such assets.
(b)
The nature of CPP prot

The CPP prot consists of trading prots and losses, and monetary gains and losses.
Some critics were concerned that a highly geared and illiquid company, with substantial
liabilities, could show a trading loss and yet a substantial monetary gain. CPP prot
could give a misleading impression of its ability to pay a dividend.
T E X T
Ination
S T U D Y
State of the Enterprise
302
(c) Difculty of understanding the purchasing power unit concept.

It has been argued that users of CPP statements may nd the current purchasing power concept
difcult to understand and explain. Items in the balance sheet and prot and loss account may
appear rather abstract to non-accountants compared with the basic principles of, say, current
value accounting.
5.6 CURRENT VALUE ACCOUNTING

FAST FORWARD: There is no such thing as a current value accounting system, but rather
several systems which can be regarded as members of the current value family.
T E X T
(a)
The economic value method
(b)
The net realisable (or exit value) method
S T U D Y
Three possibilities include:
(c)
The current replacement cost (or entry value) method
The Economic Value Method

Under this method, the current value of an individual asset is based on the present value of the
future cashows that are expected to arise as a result of owning the asset. This method requires
information concerning the following:
i.
the amount of future benets in cash terms;
ii.
The timing of those benets (for discounting purposes);
iii.
A suitable discount factor - the cost of capital over the future lifetime of the asset.
The method is soundly based from a theoretical viewpoint but can nevertheless be criticised on
several grounds of a practical nature.
The criticisms include:
It is difcult to see how cash ow information and estimated discount rates will be
capable of verication by auditors, so that users of accounts may be unwilling to place
reliance on the resulting nancial statements.
The method is highly subjective and the gures required to operate this method could
be extremely difcult to produce e.g estimating cashows that can be attributed to
individual assets.
Under this method it would be impossible to provide a detailed analysis of the year's
prot gure. Prot for the year would be based on the difference between opening and
closing net asset valuation gures (aggregated) adjusted for capital introduced and
dividends.
303
The Net Realisable Method (NRV)

Under the NRV method, asset values in the balance sheet would be based on the net price
that could be obtained in the open market if assets (stock and xed assets) were sold in an
orderly way at the balance sheet date. This method is sometimes referred to as the exit value
approach.
Accounts prepared on this basis show the rms total position in terms of its net liquidity.
This information will be useful to users of nancial statements such as management,
shareholders, creditors, bankers etc. For example, it may assist bankers in making
lending decisions and managers in deciding the best use to which particular assets
should be put.
It also restores the additivity of balance sheet gures.
Disadvantages of NRV include:
The method places a great emphasis on liquidation. This is inconsistent with the goingconcern assumption.
The method would be costly and time consuming, involving individual assessment of
individual assets.
It is also possible that some company assets may lack realisable/market values.
It may also produce very unrealistic xed assets values, for example, specialised plant
could have a high value to a particular business, but still have a very low NRV in the
market place. In the absence of liquidation, such a NRV would be meaningless.
In the case of stocks, for example, prot is taken before goods are sold thus infringing
the realisation concept.
The Replacement Cost Method
The method is also referred to as the "Entry Value" approach.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Advantages of NRV include:
304
The method requires that the value of items be adjusted to reect the cost at which it
could have been replaced in the normal course of business either at the date of sale
goods or at the balance sheet date.
The method seems to represent the value of the rm.
>>> Example
The net realisable value method and the replacement cost method are illustrated below:
Assume the example in section 4.2.1 - Nyumba Ltd
S T U D Y
T E X T
Additional Information:
i.
Replacement cost for a new building of the same type is KShs 180,000 at the end of
Year 1 and KShs 210,000 at the end of Year 2.
ii.
Net realisable value for the building is KSh 135,000 and KSh 120,000 a the end of Year
1 and Year 2 respectively.
Required:
Prepare the accounts for Nyumba Ltd using
(a)
The Replacement Cost approach
(b)
The Net Realisable Value approach
Replacement Cost Approach

Nyumba Ltd -
Income Statement for Period ending

Year 1
Revenue
Depreciation Expense (W1)
Year 2
KShs
KShs
82,500
90,755
(41,538)
(48,462)
40,962
42,293
305
Balance Sheet as at end of

Year 1
Kshs
Year 2
Kshs

Cash
138,462
41,538
180,000
113,076
90,000
203,076
Capital
180,000
203,076
Assets
Workings:
(W1) - Depreciation Expense
Year 1 - 180,000 = KSh 41,538

4 1/3
Year 1 - (180,000 - 41,538) = KSh 138,462

Year 2 - (210,000 - 2(48,462) = KSh 113,076
Net Realisable Value (NRV) Method

Nyumba Ltd- Income Statement For Year Ending
Revenue
Depreciation
(W1)
Expense
Year 1
KShs
82,500
(60,000)
22,500
Year 2
KShs
90,755
(15,000)
75,755
Balance Sheet as at End of

Cash (W3)
Capital
Year 1
KShs
135,000
60,000
195,000
Year 2
KShs
120,000
75,000
195,000
195,000
195,000
Workings:
W1 - Depreciation Expense
W2 - Buildings (net)
Year 1 - (195,000 - 135,000) = KSh 60,000

Year 2 - (135,000 - 120,000) = KSh 15,000
Year 1 - 135,000
Year 2 - 120,000
as given
S T U D Y
(W2) - Buildings (net)
T E X T
Year 2 - 210,000 = KSh 48,462

4 1/3
306
W3 - Cash
Year 1 - Amount of acc. depreciation = KShs 60,000

Year 2 - Amount of acc. depreciation = KSh (60,000 + 15,000)
to date
= KSh 75,000
HOLDING GAINS AND LOSSES

Just as monetary items are subject to a gain or loss as the price level changes, non-monetary
assets (also called real assets) are subject to a gain or loss as a result of change in their value.
Holding gains or losses on real assets can be divided into two parts:
Monetary holding gains and losses - arise purely because of the change in the general
price level during the period and
Real holding gains and losses - these are the differences between general price-leveladjusted amounts and current values.
Monetary gains and losses are capital adjustments only. They are not a component of income.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Holding gains and losses can also be classied from the standpoint of being realized or unrealized
in the conventional accounting sense.
>>> Example
Assume a piece of land was acquired for KSh 5,000 on Jan 2nd 20X0, when the general price
index was 100. One-tenth of the land was sold on December 31, 20X0 for KSh 575. The entire
parcel of land was valued at KSh 5,750 on Dec. 31 20X0. The total real and monetary holding
gains are computed below:
Current value (31.12.X0)
General price-level adjusted
Historical cost on 31.12.X0
(5,000 x
110)
100
Total real holding gain
General price-level adjusted
Historical cost on 31.12.X0
Historical cost
Total monetary holding gain
KShs 5,750
5,500
250
KShs 5,500
5,000
KShs 500
Holding gains and losses are realized by the process of selling the asset or in the case of a
depreciable asset using it up over time. The division of the holding gains in the above example
is summarized below:
307
Analysis of Holding Gains

Holding Gain Type
Realized
Unrealized
Total
KShs
KShs
KShs
25
50
75
225
450
675
250
500
750
>>> Example
KAMUTI Ltds nancial statements for the year 20X0 are given below:
Selling and Administration

Depreciation expense
Net prot
Dividends
Retained prots
KShs
(100,000)
(40,000)
Kshs
400,000
(240,000)
160,000
(140,000)
20,000
(10,000)
10,000
Kamuti Ltd - Balance Sheet As at:
Fixed Assets
Equipment
Acc. Depreciation
Current Assets Inventory
Accounts Receivable
Cash
Equity
Ordinary Shares
Retained Earnings
Liabilities
Bonds payable
Accounts payable
31.12.20X0
KShs
31.12.1999
KShs
400,000
(140,000)
260,000
160,000
20,000
110,000
550,000
400,000
(100,000)
300,000
100,000
40,000
20,000
460,000
200,000
30,000
230,000
200,000
20,000
220,000
300,000
20,000
550,000
200,000
40,000
460,000
S T U D Y
Sales
Cost of goods sold
Gross prot
Less: Operating expenses
T E X T
Kamuti Ltd : Income Statement for the period ended 31.12.20X0
308
The equipment consists of three lots acquired at different times and each has a useful
life of 10 yrs. Cost information is as follows:
At 31.12.1999
Initial cost Age (yrs)
KShs
Current cost
KShs
Lot 1
240,000 3
260,000
Lot 2
120,000 2
140,000
Lot 3
40,000 1
60,000
400,000
460,000
At 31.12.1990
S T U D Y
T E X T
Initial cost Age (yrs)
Current cost
Lot 1
240,000 4
300,000
Lot 2
120,000 3
180,000
Lot 3
40,000 2
80,000
400,000
560,000
Depreciation is to be charged using the straight-line method. The residual value is zero
for lots of equipment.
Inventory is accounted for using FIFO basis with an inventory turnover of approximately
four times per annum. In the year 20X0, 12,000 units were sold.
Current cost of inventory was KSh 104,000 as at Jan 1st 20X0. KSh 166,000 on Dec
31. 20X0. The unit cost of stock was KSh 20 and KSh 25 on 1.1.00 and 31.12.00
respectively.
Interim dividend amounts to KSh 10,000 was paid on July 1st 20X0.
The price indexes at relevant dates are as given below:
January
1st 20X0
250
December
31st 20X0
270
Average for
20X0
260
Last Quarter - 20X0
245
Last Quarter - 20X0
265
Equipment
Lot 1
200
Lot 2
225
Lot 3
240
309
Required
(a)
(b)
Income statement for period ending 31.12.90 for KAMUTI Ltd adjusted for price level
changes.
Balance Sheet as at 31.12.00 for Kamuti Ltd adjusted for price level changes.
SOLUTION
KAMUTI Ltd: Income Statement
For the year ended 31.12.20X0
KShs
Sales
Cost of sale (W1)
Gross prot
Operating Expenses
Selling and
Administration
Depreciation Expense
(W2)
Net income from normal
operations
Add: Purchasing power Gain
(W3)
KShs
400,000
(249,140)
150,860
(100,000)
(49,000)
149,400
1,460
14,240
T E X T
(A)
15,700
(10,000)
5,700
S T U D Y
Net income for the year

Dividends
Retained prots
Workings:
W1 - Cost of sales
Amount HCA Adjustment factor
KShs
KShs
Opening inventory (1.1.00)
100,000
260/245
Add purchases
300,000
260/260
Cost of goods available for sales 400,000
less: closing inventory (31.12.00) (160,000)
260/245
240,000
Cost of sales
W2.
Adjusted amount
KShs
106,120
300,000
406,120
(156,980)
249,140
Depreciation Expense
Lot 1
240,000 x
260
200
x 10% =
KShs
31,200
Lot 2
120,000 x
260
220
x 10% =
13,866
Lot 3
40,000 x
260
240
x 10% =
4,334
Total
49,400
310
W3.
Purchasing Power Gain/Losses
Monetary Assets
Monetary Liabilities
Net Monetary Liabilities
31/12/99
KShs
60,000
(240,000)
180,000
1.1.00- Purchasing power equivalent
187,200
10,000 x 260/200
10,000
Less
31.12.00- Purchasing power equivalent (190,000 x 260/270)
182,960
14,240
KAMUTI Ltd -
Balance Sheet As at 31.12.20X0

Kshs
T E X T
Fixed Assets
S T U D Y
KShs
130,000
320,000
190,000
(180,000 x 260/250)
Add net charge during 10 years
(B)
31/12/00
Equipment
Acc. Depreciation
(W1)
(W2)
Current Assets
Inventory
Accounts Receivable
Cash
(W3)
(W4)
(W4)
Equity
Ordinary Shares
Retained Earning
Holding Gain
(W5)
(W6)
(W7)
Liabilities
Bonds Payable
Accounts Payable
(W4)
(W4)
Kshs
513,000
(145,390)
367,610
293,020
980,630
163,020
20,000
110,000
340,630
660,630
216,000
31,160
93,470
300,000
20,000
980,630
Workings
W1 - Equipment
Initial cost
Lot 1 240,000
Lot 2 120,000
40,000
Lot 3
400,000
Adjust Factor
(270/200)
(270/225)
(270/240)
Adjusted Amount
324,000
144,000
45,000
513,000
W2 - Accumulated Depreciation - Equipment

(140,000 x 270)
260
KShs 145,390
3 11
W3 - Inventory - 31.12.90
(160,000 x 270)
265
KShs 163,020
W4 - Monetary Assets and liability remain the same

W5 - Ordinary Shares
(200,000 x 270)
250
KSh 216,000
KShs 31,160
W6 - Retained Earnings
(30,000
x 270)
260
W7 - Holding Gain/Loss
Historical
Cost
KShs
KShs
Difference
Amount
KShs
Equipment
513,000
400,000
113,000
Accumulation Depreciation
145,390
(140,000)
(5,390)
Inventory
163,020
160,000
3,020
Ordinary Shares
216,000
200,000
(16,000)
31,160
30,000
1,160
Retained Earnings
Holding Gain
93,470
5.7 ADJUSTMENTS TO CURRENT COST ACCOUNTING

Current cost accounts are usually produced by making adjustments to Historical cost accounts.
The following adjustments are incorporated in current cost accounts:
Depreciation adjustment (DA)

Cost of sales adjustment (COSA)
Monetary working capital adjustment (MWCA)
Gearing adjustment (GA)

goods. It is calculated as follows:
T E X T
General
Price
S T U D Y
Non Monetary Items

Level Adjusted
312
Apply the depreciation rate to the current value of the asset. From the resultant gure, deduct
depreciation already charged in the prot and loss account (HCA). The DA should be treated as
follows:
Dr. Current cost P/L Account
Cr. Provision for Depreciation
xx
xx
Cost of sales adjustment (COSA) is the additional cost of sales arising due to ination. There
are two ways of computing the COSA.
i.
If one or many items are involved, then the cost of the items sold is deducted from the
current value of those items to get the COSA.
Example:
Assume 100 items were purchased at KShs 250 each and were sold at 400 each during
the period. Extra stock was purchased at 310/= each. Then the COSA will be
S T U D Y
T E X T
=
=
ii.
Change in cost of item

(310 - 250)
x
100
x
=
No. of units sold

KShs 6,000
Averaging Method
- Under this method, opening stock and closing stock are reinstated at the average
price.
The procedure is as follows:
Restate both the opening and closing stock to average price.
Compute the difference between the value of opening stock and closing stock on
historical basis. This difference is made up of two elements - volume change and price
change.
Compute the difference between opening and closing stock - both stated to average
price - the difference is due to volume change.
The difference between (b) and (c) above is the COSA.
(see example below).

-
MWCA = Debtors - Creditors

Does not include cash unless it is directly linked to movement in working capital
MWCA represents the amount of additional (or reduced) nance needed for the monetary
working capital as a result of changes in the input prices of goods and services used
and nanced by the business.
Monetary working capital includes the following elements:-
313
Trade debtors
Trade bills receivable
Prepayments
VAT recoverable
Any part of the bank balance (or overdraft) arising from uctuations in the level of stock,
debtors, creditors, etc.
Any part of the cash oats required to support day to day operations of the business.
Certain stocks not subject to COSA e.g

- Seasonal purchases
- Dealing stocks
- Unique contracts
Monetary Liabilities
i.
Trade creditors
ii.
Trade bills payable
iii.
Accruals and expense creditors
iv.
VAT payable
NOTE:
(a)
(b)
Creditors or debtors relating to xed assets bought or sold under construction should
be treated as part of borrowings rather than MWC.
Advance Corporation Tax, Mainstream Corporation Tax (MCT), and deferred tax should
be treated as borrowings.
Gearing Adjustment
This is the gain due to the shareholders as a result of nancing the assets through loans. The
acquired assets increase in value during periods of ination while the amount of loan remains the
same. Borrowings are usually xed in monetary amount, irrespective of changes in the prices
in the various parts of operating capability. If prices rise, the value to the business of assets
exceeds the borrowing that has nanced them. The excess (less interest on the borrowings)
accrues to the shareholders and is realised as the assets are used or sold in the ordinary course
of business.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Monetary Assets
314
Gearing Adjustment (GA)

=
(DA + COSA + MWCA)* Borrowing (Average)

Borrowing + Shareholders Funds
(Average)
(Average)
Borrowing comprises of all monetary liabilities less all monetary assets. In particular, convertible
loan stock, debentures and deferred taxation should be included in borrowing.
>>> Example
The following are extracts from the historical cost accounts of Inac PLC for the year ending
31.Dec. 20X9
S T U D Y
T E X T

Operating prot (after depreciation of Kshs.
150,000)
Interest
Prot before tax
Tax
Prot after tax
Dividends
Retained prot
Balance Sheet
Fixed Assets-cost
- acc. Depreciation
Current Assets stock
- debtors
- cash
Total Assets
Ordinary shares
Retained prot
Debentures
Deferred tax
Current liabilities
Creditors
Overdraft
Taxation
Proposed dividends
Total Equity and Liabilities
Kshs.
000
500
(100)
400
(70)
330
(30)
300
31/12/20X9
Kshs 000
31/12/20X8
Kshs 000
2,000
(1,150)
850
2,000
(1,000)
1,000
800
1,050
300
3,000
600
900
200
2,700
600
700
1,300
600
600
400
1,000
600
100
100
600
300
70
30
3,000
500
400
75
25
2,700
315
Transactions occur evenly throughout the year.
The price index for stock (and used for monetary working capital) was as follows:
At date closing stock - 20X8 were purchased

31 December 20X8
Average for 20X9
At date closing stock - 20X9 were purchased
31 December 20X9
173.3
177.4
190.7
197.9
202.4
Cost of sales for 20X9 was Kshs. 2,200,000
Fixed assets were purchased four years ago when the relevant index was 130. This
index had moved to 195 by 31. December 20X8 and 227.5 by 31. December 20X9.
Straight line depreciation of 7.5 per cent per annum.
Required
Calculate the following adjustments for current cost accounts
(b)
Depreciation Adjustment
Cost of sales adjustment
Monetary working capital adjustment
Gearing Adjustment
T E X T
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Prepare the current cost accounts for Inac Ltd for the year ending 31.12. 20X9.
Solution
i.
ii.
Depreciation Adjustment
Kshs`000
Historic cost depreciation - 1999
Current cost depreciation (150 x 227.5)
130
Depreciation adjustment
150.0
262.5
112.5
Cost of sales adjustment (COSA)

Historic cost Index Adj.
Closing stock
Opening stock
Current cost
Kshs`000
800
(600)
200
Kshs`000
190.7/197.9
190.7/173.3
770.9
(660.3)
110.6
Of the total increase of Kshs.200,000 in stock value Kshs.110,600 can be attributed to volume
increases. The balance of Kshs.89,400 is considered to result from changing price levels and it
is this amount which constitutes the COSA.
S T U D Y
(a)
316
iii.

Historic cost
Kshs`000
Closing MWC
Opening MWC
Index Adj.
450
(400)
50
190.7/202.4
190.7/177.4
Current cost
Kshs`000
424
(430)
(6)
There has been a volume decrease of Kshs6,000. The increase of Kshs.50,000 results
from a price increase of Kshs.56,000. This is the value of the MWCA.
iv.
Gearing Adjustments (GA)

20X9
Kshs. 000
20X8
Kshs. 000
600
100
300
70
(300)
700
600
100
400
75
(200)
975
S T U D Y
T E X T
Net borrowings:
Debentures
Deferred Tax
Overdraft
Tax
Cash
Simple average
770 + 975 = Kshs.872,500

2
Shareholders funds: it is not convenient to calculate the capital and reserves at this
point. The gures are calculated by reference to the current cost net assets.
Fixed Assets
Stocks
Debtors
Creditors
Cash less overdraft
Tax
Deferred Tax
Debentures
Simple Average =
20X9
Ksh 000
1,487.5
818.2
1,050
600
(70)
(100)
(600)
985.7
1,985.7 + 1,539.2
2
20X8
Ksh 000
1,500
614.2
900
500
200
(75)
(100)
(600)
1,539.2
Kshs.1,762,450
Gearing Adjustment =
Kshs. (Kshs.112,500 + Kshs. 89,400 + Kshs. 56,000) *
872,500___________
Kshs.872,500+ Kshs.1,762,450
872,500 + 1,762,450
GA
= Kshs. 85,400
(b)
317
In order to prepare the current cost accounts, the following workings are necessary
W1 - Fixed Assets
Accumulated .Depreciation.(1.1.X9) =Kshs 1,000,000 x
195
=
130
Accumulation .Depreciation.(31.12.X9) =Kshs.1,000,000 x 227.5 =
130
Backlog depreciation charge
Kshs.1,500,000
Kshs.1,750,000
250,000
Accumulated current cost depreciation

= Acc. Dep (1.1.99) +
Depreciation charge
= Kshs. 1,750,000 +
262,500
=
Kshs. 2,012,500
Gross current cost of xed assets
= Kshs. 2,000,000 x
227.5 =
130
Net current cost of xed assets =
Kshs.3,500,000
Kshs. 1,487,500
T E X T
W2 - Stock
Closing stock should be based on the index on 31.12.X9
202.4 =
197.9
Kshs. 818,200
S T U D Y
Thus Kshs.800,000 x
Opening stock should be based on the index on 31.12.X8

Thus Kshs.600,000 x
177.4 =
173.3
Kshs.614,200
Thus an adjustment (Kshs.818,200 - Kshs.614,200) = Ksh.6,000

Should be reected in the reserves
W3 -
Current Cost Reserve

Kshs.`000
Kshs.`000
Backlog depreciation
250 Balance b/f
514.2
Gearing adjustment
85.4 Asset revaluation
500.0
COSA
89.4 MWCA
Balance cf
828.2 Stock increase

1,163.6
56.0
4.0
1,163.6
318
Current cost prot and loss account for the year ended 31 December 1999
Ksh. 000
Operating prot
Current cost adjustment
Depreciation
COSA
MCWA
Current cost operating
prot
Gearing adjustment
Less: interest payable
Current cost prot before
tax
Taxation
Current cost prot after tax
Dividends
Retained prot-current cost
Kshs. 000
500
(112.5)
(89.4)
(56.0)
(257.9)
242.1
(14.6)
227.5
(70.0)
157.5
30.0
127.5
85.4
(100.0)
S T U D Y
T E X T
Current Cost Balance Sheet As at 31.12.20X9

Fixed Assets (NBV)
Net Current assets
Stock
Trade debtors less trade creditors
Other current liabilities
Total assets less current liabilities
Deferred tax
Debentures
Ordinary Shares
Current cost Reserves
Retained prot
KSHS.`000
1,487.5
818.2
450.0
(100)
2,655.7
(100.0)
(600.0)
1,955.7
600
828.2
527.5
1,955.7
5.8 CURRENT COST ACCOUNTING (CCA)

Merits of CCA (also called Current Cost Deprival Value Model)
1.
It is relevant to the needs of users of nancial statements in;

Assessing the stability and sustainability of the business entity.
Assessing the vulnerability of a business against take over predators.
Evaluating the performance of management in maintaining and increasing the
operating capacity of the business.
319
Evaluating future performance.
2.
CCA can be implemented easily by making adjustments to cost.
3.
By excluding holding gains from prots CCA can be use to indicate whether or not a
dividend should be paid.
4.
Assets are valued not only at their current costs but after management has evaluated
the opportunity cost of holding them and the benet of their future use to the business.
WEAKNESS OF CCA
The inclusion of a monetary working capital adjustment and a gearing adjustment:
Causes problems of denition particularly in relation to cash and overdrafts.
Treats preference share capital like equity, although it is in reality nearer to borrowings
in terms of sources of nance. This is due to the need to show prot attributable to all
shareholders, ordinary and preference as required by the Companies Act.
The guidance notes suggest that where a company has material amount of preference
shares with xed repayment rights, it may wish to show in a note the effect of including
preference share capital in net borrowings.
Includes in borrowings such disparate items as taxation and debentures. While the
latter might be expected to be maintainable in a constant ratio to equity (excluding
preference shares) the former will IAS 12 vary in relation to taxable prot.
(b)
It can be regarded that monetary working capital and gearing adjustments reect some
of the benet of borrowing in a period of ination, by allowing for the netting off or adding
back of that portion of the realized holding gains nanced by monetary liabilities.
However, there is still no indication given of the real effect, in general purchasing power
terms, of ination on the investors stake.
(c)
Prots are not comparable in real terms from year to year, nor from company to company
within one year.
(d)
Treatment of backlog depreciation: It is debited to current cost reserve (reducing the

unrealized holding gain on xed assets). Would it be better to treat it as under-provision
for depreciation in earlier years and it set against cumulative retained current cost
prots? Otherwise cumulative retained current cost prots? Otherwise cumulative
retained current cost prot will not represent the amount which can be distributed
without depleting the operating capability.
S T U D Y
(a)
T E X T
IAS 15 has been criticised on a number of grounds;
320
Practical problems in operating current cost accounting

Amongst the practical problems encountered in operating current cost accounting are the
following:
Selection of a suitable index

It is not always easy to obtain an index which is perfectly suitable for measuring the movement in
the current cost of a particular type of asset. This need not be an insuperable problem because
the company may be able to construct its own index or to apply one which gives results which
do not materially distort result.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Overseas assets
It is often difcult to obtain a suitable index for use with overseas assets. Once again a proxy is
often possible.
Valuation of specialist plant and buildings

It is often difcult to obtain a suitable market value for specialist items, but indices may be
constructed as an alternative.
d)
There may be no intention to replace an asset, possibly due to a change in the

nature of the business
In such a case the current cost of the existing asset was not given relevant adjustments.
Where a company is trying to maintain its operating capacity in a different area it should
use a suitable index base on a possible replacement in the new eld of activity.
e)
There may be no modern equivalent asset due to the advance of technology

In such a case it is necessary to calculate what proportion of the cost of a new asset
is required in order to maintain the volume of output and determine the current cost of
the old equivalent there from. That part of the charge which gives added output or cost
advantages should be disregarded.
f)
It may be difcult to audit some of the adjustments

In practice it is generally no more difcult to verify these areas than other subjective
aspects of accounting.
In addition to the above penalties, any person guilty of insider trading is liable to pay
Compensation to any person who in the transaction for the purchase or sale of securities, entered
into with the insider, or with a person acting on his behalf, suffers loss, by reason of the difference
between the price at which securities were transacted and the price at which they would have
321
likely have transacted if the offence had not been committed. In the event the harm is done on
the market as a whole, or those harmed cannot be reasonably and practicably determined, the
payment shall be made to the Compensation Fund of the CMA. The amount of compensation to
be paid is the amount of loss sustained by the person claiming compensation.
5.9 SUMMARY
The history of the development of a system of accounting for price level changes is important to an
understanding of why most companies still report nancial results using historic cost accounting
principles. Therefore, it is highly recommended that you need chapters 4,5,6 and 7 of Lewis/
Pendrill -before you attempt the reinforcing questions that follow.
Its simplicity relative to ination-adjusted systems makes it faster and cheaper to use
It is widely understood as a basis for accounting, even among non-accountants. The

same cannot be said for much of the ination accounting that has been proposed.
It is more objective than ination-adjusted accounting, since most ination-adjusted

statements make debatable changes to the Historical Cost accounts.
The tax authorities in most countries, Kenya included, has historically continued to
make assessments on the historical cost prots.
It is a tried and tested system, requiring no major, radical shifts in our traditional
understanding of the theory and practice of accounting.
The relative simplicity and objectivity make it more valuable for purposes of comparison
than statements prepared on other bases.
REQUIREMENTS OF IAS 29 Financial Reporting in

Hyperinationary Economies
The objective of IAS 29 is to establish specic standards for enterprises reporting in the currency
of a hyperinationary economy, so that the nancial information provided is meaningful.
Restatement of Financial Statements

The basic principle in IAS 29 is that the nancial statements of an entity that reports in the currency
of a hyperinationary economy should be stated in terms of the measuring unit current at the
S T U D Y
T E X T
In general, HCA it preferred because of the following reasons:
322
balance sheet date. Comparative gures for prior period(s) should be restated into the same
current measuring unit. Restatements are made by applying a general price index. Items such
as monetary items that are already stated at the measuring unit at the balance sheet date are not
restated. Other items are restated based on the change in the general price index between the
date those items were acquired or incurred and the balance sheet date.
A gain or loss on the net monetary position is included in net income. It should be disclosed
separately.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The Standard does not establish an absolute rate at which hyperination is deemed to arise
- but allows judgment as to when restatement of nancial statements becomes necessary.
Characteristics of the economic environment of a country which indicate the existence of
hyperination include:
The general population prefers to keep its wealth in non-monetary assets or in a relatively
stable foreign currency. Amounts of local currency held are immediately invested to
maintain purchasing power;
The general population regards monetary amounts not in terms of the local currency but
in terms of a relatively stable foreign currency. Prices may be quoted in that currency;
sales and purchases on credit take place at prices that compensate for the expected
loss of purchasing power during the credit period, even if the period is short; and
The cumulative ination rate over three years approaches, or exceeds, 100%.
IAS 29 describes characteristics that may indicate that an economy is hyperinationary. However,
it concludes that it is a matter of judgment when restatement of nancial statements becomes
necessary.
When an economy ceases to be hyperinationary and an enterprise discontinues the preparation
and presentation of nancial statements in accordance with IAS 29, it should treat the amounts
expressed in the measuring unit current at the end of the previous reporting period as the basis
for the carrying amounts in its subsequent nancial statements.
Disclosure
Gain or loss on monetary items
The fact that nancial statements and other prior period data have been restated for
changes in the general purchasing power of the reporting currency
Whether the nancial statements are based on an historical cost or current cost
approach
Identity and level of the price index at the balance sheet date and moves during the
current and previous reporting period
323
CHAPTER SUMMARY
Classical school-Historical cost accounting: the capital is maintained by money terms.
Neo-classical: This includes the Historical cost accounting adjusted for changes in general
purchasing power. This model makes sure that the purchasing power of the capital is
maintained.
Modern School - Current Value Accounting: This model tries to maintain the operating
capability of the entity.
Operating capability of the business entity is its ability to replace assets as they are consumed
or worn out or its ability to produce the same volume or value of goods i.e. the next year as in
the current year.
There are two main approaches to ination accounting. These are:
The CPP accounts attempts to maintain the shareholders capital in terms of the general or
consumer purchasing power. This is known as the proprietorship concept of capital
maintenance.
goods.
Cost of sales adjustment (COSA) is the additional cost of sales arising due to ination.
Gearing Adjustment
This is the gain due to the shareholders as a result of nancing the assets through loans.
CHAPTER QUIZ
1.
What is the relationship between prot and capital?
2.
What models are used to measure income?
3.
Explain Accounting models.
4.
What are the arguments against Historical Cost Accounting?
T E X T
Current purchasing power accounting system and

Current value systems
S T U D Y
(a)
(b)
324

1.
Thus the relationship between prot (income) and capital can best be expressed by the
following equation:
I = D + (K2 - K1)
Where
=
=
=
=

Dividends or distribution
Capital at the end of the period
Capital at the beginning of the period
2.
These can be broadly categorised into two:

(a) Economic income model
(b) Accounting models
3.
Accounting models include:
(a)
Classical school - Historical cost accounting the capital is maintained by money terms.
If the entity has a historical cost of Shs 1,000 at the beginning of the year and Shs
1,000 at the end of the year (assuming no distributions and no injections or withdrawal
of capital):
T E X T
S T U D Y
I
D
K2
K1
Income = Sh 1,500 - Sh 1,000 = Shs 500

This is the traditional approach to prot measurement.
(b) Neo-classical
This includes the Historical cost accounting adjusted for changes in general purchasing
power. This model makes sure that the purchasing power of the capital is maintained.
(c)
Modern School - Current Value Accounting

This model tries to maintain the operating capability of the entity. The operating
capability of the business entity is its ability to replace assets as they are consumed or
worn out or its ability to produce the same volume or value of goods i.e. the next year
as in the current year.
4.
Historical cost accounting is likely to fail because:
(a)
The balance sheet gures for assets, based on cost at time of acquisition are unlikely
to reect present day values since they lack additivity. The balance sheet includes
a conglomerate of costs incurred on different dates which will not enable users to
realistically predict future cashows related to those assets.
(b)
If prot (income) is dependent on measure of capital at different dates, then prot

measurement can be considered to be the result of comparing two fairly meaningless
totals. In addition the prot that results is usually considered to be overstated and any
ratio, including return on capital employed, will also be overstated.
(c)
Historic cost prot give a misleading impression of the ability of a company to continue
to operate at the same level of operation and/or maintain capital in `real terms - problem
of capital maintenance.
(d)
A series of historic cost accounts can give a misleading impression of the nancial
trends of a company.
325
PAST PAPER ANALYSIS

Current purchasing power (CPP) accounting was tested in the following examinations:
06/07
06/04
Current Cost Accounting (CCA) was tested in the following examinations:
S T U D Y
12/04
12/03
12/02
12/00
EXAM QUESTIONS
QUESTION ONE
Ination accounting is an element but a useless creature with a prodigious appetite for extra
data. It is the sterile offspring of a scandalous marriage between high nancial economics and
mismanaged economics.
Required:
a)
T E X T
12/01
In light of the above statement, summarise some of the arguments that can be advanced
to defend Historical cost accounting.
(8 marks)
326
b)
c)
What aws exist under Historical cost accounting that can encourage setting of an
accounting standard for rms operating under inationary conditions.
(8 marks)
Provide the criteria that should be used in the selection of appropriate accounting
measurements in business reports.
(4 marks)
(Total: 20 marks)
QUESTION TWO
Zetoxide Limited is a small chemical manufacturing company which supplies zetoxide to a number
of major manufacturers in the rubber industry in the East African region. It operates a single
production line in rented premises situated in the industrial area of Nairobi. On 1 April 20X0 it
took advantage of falling rents in Nairobi to move into spacious premises at the same rent as it
was paying previously. On the same date it sold its previous production line to a competitor and
purchased a new cost-efcient production line that could be operated independently of electricity.
The historic cost balance sheets as at 30 September 19X9 and 20X0 and the historic cost income
statement for the year ended 30 September 20X0 as follows:-
S T U D Y
T E X T
Balance sheets as at 30 September
Property, plant
equipment: Cost
Depreciation
19X9
20X0
6,000
116,000
(800)
and
Current assets:
Inventory
Trade receivables
Cost at bank
(4,200)
1,800
15,200
7,200
5,100
6,300
8,000
1,200
14,700
13,100
Bank overdraft
Trade payables
2,900
900
4,200
Current tax
2,300
5,200
5,100
9,500
8,000
Net current assets
11,300
200,000 ordinary share
of Sh.10
Retained earnings
2,000
23,200
12,000
10,400
14,000
Deferred tax
900
3,200
Debentures
-__
6,000
Non-current liabilities:
900
11,300
Staff costs
Depreciation
Other
operating
expenses
9,200
23,200
(46,900)
(36,600)
(800)
(7,600)
(91,900)
Prot from
operations
Prot on sale
of plant
Finance costs
4,100
2,100
(300)
5,900
Taxation:
Current
Deferred
2,000
8,400
Shareholders funds
Income Statement for the year ended

30 September 20X0
Sh. 000
Sh. 000
Sales
Revenue
96,000
Raw
(49,000)
materials
Changes in
2,100
inventory
Nil
(2,300)
(2,300)
Net prot
retained
3,600
327
The directors of the company produce current cost accounts each year in addition to
the historic cost accounts.
Sales, purchases and expenses have occurred evenly over the year.
Opening stock represents two months purchases closing stock represents one months
purchases.
Debtors and creditors at each balance sheet date represent one months sales and
purchases.
Zetoxide Ltd. depreciates property, plant and equipment, both for historic cost and
current cost purposes, from the date of purchase of the asset pro-data with time at 10%
per annum no depreciation is charged in the year of sale. The old plant sold on 1 April
19X0 had been purchased on 1 October 19X2.
New Plant
1 October 1992
120
Stock Debtors
Creditors
-
1 August 1999
238
360
1 September 1999
239
363
1 October 1999
240
366
1 April 20X0
250
384
1 August 20X0
267
395
1 September 20X0
271
398
1 October 20X0
Average for year ended 30
September 20X0
275
402
384
Zetoxide Ltd. bases its current cost depreciation charge on the year end value of
property, plant and equipment. Any current cost prot or loss on disposal is based on
the depreciated current cost at the date of disposal. The cost of sales adjustment and
the monetary working capital adjustment are both computed on the average method.
No part of the bank balance or bank overdraft should be included in monetary working
capital. The gearing adjustment is always computed on the simple arithmetic average
gearing for the year.
Zetoxide Ltds current cost reserve as at 30 September 19X9 was Shs. 3,680,000
Required:
Zetoxide Ltds Current Cost Prot and Loss Account starting with the historic cost prot before
nance costs for the year ended 30 September 20X0. Its Current Cost Balance Sheet as at
30 September 20X0 and the reconciliation of the Current Cost Reserve for the year ended 30
(20 marks)
September 20X0. Round all gures to nearest Sh. 000.
S T U D Y
Old Plan
T E X T
The following price indices are appropriate:
328
CASE STUDY
Recent evidence in Australian current value accounting practices: is
the Phoenix rising from the ashes?
Article Abstract:
In Australian accounting regulations, there has been a perceptible trend towards current
value accounting. A survey of 176 public Australian companies reveals that there is increasing
acceptance and usage of current value accounting. However, large-scale corporate acceptance
of current value accounting practices is likely to be hindered by business concerns over its
implementation.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Source: www.google.co.ke- case studies on current value accounting.
329
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
CHAPTER SIX
PRESENTATION AND
ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS (PART B)
S T U D Y
T E X T
330
331
CHAPTER SIX
PRESENTATION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL
STATEMENTS (PART B)
OBJECTIVES
After this chapter, the student will be able to:
Tackle capital reductions and reconstructions problems
INTRODUCTION
When the whole of the paid-up capital is not represented by valuable assets. (for
example, xed assets may have become obsolete, or stock-in-trade depreciated by
market conditions).
When substantial trading losses have accumulated.
When the company is over- capitalized , it being impossible to remunerate adequately

all the existing capital.
A scheme may take the form of:
Capital reduction (C.A. 1948 s.66) or
External reconstruction (C.A. 1948 s. 287)

Capital Reorganizations - this is a plain reorganization involving the internal alterations of a
companys capital, usually to make the company more appealing, for the issuing of new capital to
raise funds and/or to avoid liquidation. Such a re-organization will leave the company in existence
but with a different capital structure with the old shareholders and possibly some creditors having
different rights.
S T U D Y
These may be summarized as follows:-
T E X T
Reasons for reduction of capital
332
Capital Reconstruction - these are capital change schemes involving the formation of a new
company with a different capital structure to salvage the assets of the existing company, which
is then wound up.
Capital reduction utilizes the credit released in a reduction of the share capital to write down
asset values and write of accumulated losses
External reconstruction formation of a new company to take over all or part of the assets and
liabilities of a company possibly in nancial difculties.
EXAM CONTEXT
In past examinations, the examiner has tested the students knowledge in Capital reductions and
reorganizations.
S T U D Y
T E X T
INDUSTRY CONTEXT
Capital Reductions and External Reconstructions show rms how to account for the same.
Managements Discussion and Analysis gives the governments management team the opportunity
to explain the results of the nancial decisions made during the year and their impact.
6.1
CAPITAL REDUCTIONS AND REORGANIZATIONS

(RECONSTRUCTIONS)
LEGAL ASPECTS
Capital reduction
C.A 1948 s.66 requires the following:a)
Authority in the articles
b)
Special resolution
c)
Approval of the court.
PRESENTATION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (PART B)
333
A capital reduction usually occurs where losses have been incurred and the share capital is no
longer represented by available assets. It may also occur if:a)
The company nds it has surplus cash funds and wishes to repay a part of the capital
to the members.
b)
The company has issued shares as partly paid and does not intend to cal up the uncalled
capital.
External reconstruction
The company resolves to wind up voluntarily
b)
A special resolution is passed giving the liquidator authority to sell the undertaking to
another company usually formed for the purpose.
c)
When the liquidator sells the undertaking, he will receive shares or other securities
in the new company for distribution to the members and possibly creditors of the old
company.
A reconstruction may take place for any of the following objects:a)
Raising fresh capital by issuing partly paid shares in the new company in exchange for
fully paid shares in the old company.
b)
Amalgamating two or more companies.
c)
Rearranging capital and rights of members as between themselves.
d)
Effecting a compromise with creditors, or the allotment to them of shares or debentures

in settlement of their claims.
Sundry matters
Two cases where capital reduction occurs without consent of the court:o Where shares are forfeited.
o Where shares are surrendered to avoid forfeiture
Two cases of apparent capital reduction when in fact no actual reduction occurs:o Redemption of redeemable preference shares under 1948 s. 58
o Unmissed shares cancelled under 1948 s.61.
S T U D Y
a)
T E X T
Under s. 287 of the Companies Act 1948 a reconstruction can be effected under the following
procedure:-
334
6.1.1 CAPITAL REDUCTION - Double entry

Transaction
Debit
Share capital
account
Amount written off share capital

Amount written off share premium (if any)
Share premium
account
Amount written off debentures (if any)
Debentures account
Amount by which company assets are

written down
Debt balance on prot and loss account
written off
Capital reduction
account
Capital reduction
account
Capital reduction
account
Preliminary expenses written off
Credit
Capital reduction
account
Capital reduction
account
Capital reduction
account
Preliminary expenses
account.
T E X T
FAST FORWARD: In an external reconstruction, the company to be reconstructed sells its assets
less liabilities to a newly formed company.
S T U D Y
6.1.2 EXTERNAL RECONSTRUCTION
The purchase consideration may be in the form of shares in the new company.
From an accounting point of view, an external reconstruction is merely in form of acquisition,
requiring the closing of the vendors books and the opening of the purchasers books.
Entries in the purchasers books are exactly the same as any other acquisition.
Entries in the vendors books are dealt with below as there are slight variations in the accounts
although the principles involved remain exactly the same.
Double entry
Transaction
Debit
Credit
Book value of assets being

sold to new company
Realization and reconstruction

accounts (above the line)
Sundry asset accounts
Debit balance on prot and

loss account

account (below the line)
Preliminary expenses not yet

written off

Preliminary expenses
account
Book value of creditors taken

over by new company
Creditors account
Purchasers account
Premium (if any) given to

creditors in new company
Realisation and reconstruction

Purchasers account
Debentures account
Purchasers account
Premium (if any) given to

debenture holders in new
company

Purchasers account
Preference share capital in

old company
Preference shares account
Sundry members
account
Ordinary share capital in old

company
Ordinary shares account
Sundry members
account
Shares issued by new

company to preference
shareholders of old company
at agreed value
Sundry members account
Purchasers account
Reconstruction costs paid by

new company

account(below the line)
Purchasers account
Balance on purchasers
account being purchase
consideration
Purchasers account
Realisation and
reconstruction
account(above the line)
Balance on realization and

reconstruction account
(above the line) being loss on
realization

Realization and
(above the line)
Balance on realization and

(below the line) being capital
reduction
Realization and
(below the line)
CAPITAL REDUCTIONS AND REORGANIZATIONS

Broadly there are three types of circumstances where a company may seek approval for a capital
reduction or reorganization. These are:
(a)
Where there is partly paid share capital and the company wishes to reduce the liability
for the unpaid portion.
(b)
Where the company has excess capital and wishes to repay part of it.
(c)
Where the company wishes formally to acknowledge that capital has been lost typically
as a result of adverse trading or the loss of value of assets.
(These circumstances are discussed and explained on Pages 356-358 - Lewis/Pendrill)
T E X T
Book values of debentures

taken over by new company
335
S T U D Y
336
The legal requirements necessary for one to carry out a capital reduction of any of the three types
given above include:
Authorization in the articles and
A special resolution of the company; and
Conrmation by the High Court (with an opportunity for the creditors to object).
>>> Illustration - A given Scheme of Capital Reduction
The following example will highlight the accounting requirement of any given Scheme of Reduction
over the years ended 31 May 20X7 and 20X8 Seito Ltd has suffered heavy losses.
Accumulated costs to date on the development which are to be written off because the
project has had to be abandoned largely due to lack of nancial resources.
T E X T
value of trademarks has been re-assessed at Kshs.24,000.
Goodwill no longer possesses an attributable value and is to be written off.
S T U D Y
The board of directors formulated a scheme of reorganization, for which a special resolution was
subsequently approved by the High Court. The consequences are shown below:
Tangible assets have been revalued as follows

Land and buildings Kshs. 33,000
Plant and machinery Kshs. 138,600
Investment are to be sold at an estimated loss on disposal of Kshs.6,250 on book value

(Kshs.62,670) which is to be regarded as part of the cost of the scheme.
Following the abandonment of the development project, certain of the stock items are
now unusable and cannot be used for other purposes. Amounts to be written off are as
follows:
Raw material and consumables

Work in progress
Finished goods
Kshs.
13,240
22,480
11,100
Provision for bad debts deducted in arriving at trade debtors (Kshs.33,180) is to be

increased by a further Kshs.2,600.
Recoverable Tax has been carried forward since 20X6 and should be written off.
No dividends have been declared on the 7% preference shares in the nancial years
20X7 and 20X8
337
The preference shareholders have agreed to receive new ordinary shares of Kshs.1 per
share, fully paid, at par, as follows:
Trade creditors have agreed to accept `5,000 new ordinary shares of Kshs.1 per share,
fully paid, at par, in full settlement of part of their claims against the company.
The debit balance on prot and loss account is to be written off, together with the credit
balance on share premium account (Kshs.15,000).
The ordinary share capital is to be written down to Kshs.0.07 per share and then
converted into new ordinary shares of Kshs.1 per share fully paid.
An issue of new ordinary Kshs.1 shares at par is to be made for cash in such quantities
as to raise the issued new ordinary share capital to an aggregate of 250,000 shares.
The bank loans would then be repaid.
S T U D Y
T E X T
(a) In exchange for their preference shareholding:2 new ordinary shares for every 3
existing preference shares
b) As compensation for non-payment of 20X7 and 20X8 dividends. 1 new ordinary
share for every existing preference shares.
338
S T U D Y
T E X T
339
These costs have been incurred in the development of a new high security
communications system.
This is the purchase of the Hermus trade mark when Seito acquired all the assets of
Hermes and Company for cash in 20X3.
Goodwill arose on the occasion of the acquisition referred to in Note 2 (above), the
unamortised portion of which is Kshs. 62,700.
Seitos tangible xed assets were revalued in 20X3 and the following amounts were
credited to revaluation reserve:
Kshs.
Land and Buildings
70,000
6,400
Plant and Machinery
76,400
The share capital of Seito consisted of:
50,000 7% preference shares of Kshs.1

per share fully paid
760,000 ordinary shares of Kshs.1 per share, 75p paid
Authorised
Issued
Kshs.
Kshs.
50,000
760,000
810,000
30,000
570,000
600,000
Required:
(a)
Prepare the Accounting Journals that could be necessary to reect the scheme.
(b)
Prepare the capital deduction account
(c)
Prepare the summarised balance sheet after reconstruction, assuming that all the
reconstruction events occured after close of business on 31 May 20X8.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The Balance Sheet of Seito Ltd as at 31 May 20X8 appeared as

follows:
340
S T U D Y
T E X T
(b)
The Capital Deduction A/c is as follows:

(a)
REF
341
CAPITAL REDUCTIONS A/C
PARTICULARS
DEVELOPMENT COSTS
KSHS. REF
PARTICULARS
191,800 PREFERENCE SHARE CAPITAL
KSHS.
10,000
TRADEMARKS
30,000 SHARE PREMIUM A/C
GOODWILL
62,700
ORDINARY SHARE
REDUCTION
15,000
LAND AND BUILDINGS
62,700
ORDINARY SHARE
REDUCTION
516,800
LAND AND BUILDINGS
70,000 REVALUATION RESERVE
PLANTAND MACHINERY
56,000
LOSS ON INVESTMENTS
6,250
WORK-IN-PROGRESS
22,480
FINISHED GOODS
11,100
TRADE DEBTORS
2,600
TAX RECOVERABLE
PREFERENCE SHARE CAPITAL
PROFIT & LOSS A/C
Share premium
(2 x 7% x 30,000 - 1/10 x
30,000)
T E X T
13,240
17,630
3,000
130,200
S T U D Y
Raw material &

CONSUMABLES
76,400
1,200
618,200
618200
342
(c)
SEITO LTD
BALANCE SHEET AS AT 31 MAY 20X8
Kshs.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Non Current assets

Intangible (at valuation)
Trade Marks
Tangible (at valuation)
Land and Buildings
Plant and Machinery
Fixtures, ttings, tools & equipment
Current Assets
Inventory:
Raw materials and consumables
Work in progress (46,510 22,480)
Finished goods (27,070 11,100)
Receivables
Trade (38,180 2,600)
Other
Cash at bank and in hand
Payables (amounts due in less than one year)
Debentures loans
Trade (127,230 15,000)
Bills of exchange payable
Other creditors (including taxation)
Net Current Assets
Payables(amounts due in more than one year):
Debenture loans
Called-up Share Capital
Share premium
Kshs.
24,000
33,000
138,600
82,580
24,720
24,030
15,970
64,720
35,580
10,550
143,650
(254,500)
45,000
112,230
5,040
29,210
191,480
63,020
341,200
(90,000)
251,200
250,000
1,200
251,200
254,180
278,180
343
Note:
The practical effects of most capital reduction schemes is a weakening of the formal position of
participants other than the ordinary shareholders. For instance, in the example above - Seito Ltd
- the position of preference shareholders is apparently severely weakened by the implementation
of the scheme of capital reduction. Before the capital reduction the preference shareholders
owned shares with a nominal value of Kshs.30,000 plus arrears of dividends, apparently worth
Kshs.4,200. After the reduction they have ordinary shares with nominal value Kshs.23,000 and
a book value of Kshs.23,092 (i.e 23,000/250,000 x 251,200) this is an apparent loss in value of
Kshs.11,108 (Kshs.34,200 - Kshs.23,092).
The Shires Property Construction Co. Ltd Journal entries
(1)
Ordinary shares of Kshs.1 each

Ordinary shares of 25p each
Reconstruction account
200,000
50,000
150,000
5% Cumulative preference shares of Kshs.1 each

8% Cumulative preference shares of Kshs.1 each
Ordinary shares of 25p each
70,000
35,000
35,000
Exchange of 5% preference shares for 8% preference shares and 25p ordinary

shares.
(3)
Cash
Ordinary shares of 25p each 200,000
Share premium account 5p 200,000
60,000
50,000
10,000
Issue of 200,000 25p ordinary shares at a premium of 5p to present ordinary

shareholders.
(4)
(a) Interest payable on debentures

Reconstruction account difference
12,800
5,000
7,800
Capitalization of unpaid debenture interest

(b) 8% Debentures 19X12
9.5% Debentures 19X12
80,000
80,000
Increase in interest rate on 19X12 Debentures to 9.5%

(c)
Cash
8,100
Reconstruction
900
9.5% Debenture 19x12
9,000
Issue of Kshs.9,000 debentures at a discount of 0%
(Note the Kshs.900 could have been debited to share premium account)
S T U D Y
(2)
T E X T
Redesignation of issued ordinary share capital as 25p shares (formerly Kshs.1 shares)
and transferring excess nominal value to reconstruction account.
344
(5)
Loans from directors

16,000
Share premium
Reconstruction account (amount of loans cancelled)
2,500
7,500
6,000
Capitalisation and writing off of directors loans

(6)
Goodwill
99,821
60,000
39,821
Writing off of goodwill and debit balance on prot and loss account
(7) Cash
Investment in shares quoted
60,000
27,000
33,000
(8)
No journal entry required
T E X T
(9)
Trade creditors
Cash
S T U D Y
Sales of shares at a prot of Kshs.33,000
(10)
Debtors
46,000
46,000
7,069
7,069
Writing off of bad debts.
(11)
Land
Building
Equipment
Stock and work-in-progress
Revaluation of xed assets
66,000
52,754
754
70,247
84,247
Kshs.137,001
______
Kshs.137,001
The Shires Property Construction Co. Ltd

Balance Sheet as at 1 January 20X0 (after reconstruction)
Non Current assets

Land at valuation
Building at valuation
Equipment at valuation
Kshs.
Kshs.
90,000
80,000
10,000
180,000
Payables: amounts falling due within one year Trade

Net current assets
9.5% Debenture 20X12
Called up share capital
Issued ordinary shares of 25p each
Issued 8% cumulative preference shares of Kshs.1
each
Trade creditors
50,000
63,623
45,387
159010
(50,247)
108,763
288763
(90000)
199,763
142,500
35,000
17,500
4,763
199,763
(c) Division of pre-tax prot

Interested parties before reconstruction After reconstruction
Kshs.
Debenture holders
Gross interest (W2)
5,000 ords (W4)
Kshs.
6,400
6,400
Preference shareholders
Dividend (W3)
35,000 ords (W4)
3,500
Kshs.
8,455
1,360
9,815
2,800
12316
9,516
Directors (W4)
Ordinary shareholders
Balance (W4)
680
40,100
Kshs. 50,000
(d)
Comments on the capital structure
Gearing is Kshs.35,000 +Kshs.89,000 = 43%

Kshs.288,763
27,189
Kshs.
50,000
T E X T
Current assets
Inventory
Receivables
Cash
S T U D Y
(b)
345
346
Whether gearing is viewed as high or not depends upon the current economic climate. It will
however reduce when the large debenture s paid off in 20X2. Indeed, dividends on ordinary
shares will have to be very restrained if cash is to be available to redeem the debentures.
Alternatively, debenture holders might agree to exchange them for ordinary shares.
The shareholders funds cover the cost of the xed assets. The capital structure is reasonably
satisfactory.
The debenture holders have done very well. Their interest has been increased by 1% but the
redemption date has not been changed. The 10% capital gain over a period of less than three
years is another advantage.
WORKINGS
S T U D Y
T E X T
(W1)
Trial balance after reconstruction
Land
Building
Equipment
Stock
Debtors
Cash
Ordinary shares of
8% Cumulative preference shares of
Kshs.1
9.5% Debenture 20X12
Trade creditors
(W2)
Cr.
Kshs
Dr.
Kshs
90,000
80,000
10,000
50,000
63,623
45,387
______
339,010
142,500
35,000
89,000
50,247
17,500
4,763
339,010
Debenture interest gross

Before
8% x Kshs.80,000 = Kshs.6,400
After
9.5% x Kshs.89,000 = Kshs.8,455
This does of course include interest on capitalized interest
(W3)
Preference dividends
Before 5% x Kshs.70,000 = Kshs.3,500
After 8% x Kshs.35,000 = Kshs.2,800
(W4)
The balance of the prots of Kshs.50,000 belongs to ordinary shareholders

Kshs.
Before Interest
50,000
Less: Debenture
(6,400)
Kshs.
Available for ordinary Shareholders
Kshs.
50,000
Interest
Preference div.
Kshs.
(8,455)
(3,500)
(9,900)
40,100
(2800)
11,255
38,745
347
After
Shares
Debenture holders
20,000
140,000
10,000
Directors shares
Other shareholders
400,000
570,000
Prots available to pay dividends

Kshs.
Debenture holders
20,000/570,000 x Kshs.38,745
1,360
140,000/570,000 x Kshs.38,745
9,516
Directors
10,000/570,000 x Kshs.38,745
27,189
The Legal Requirements

To put a company into voluntary liquidation requires only a special resolution to be passed by
members. Once a company has taken the necessary legal steps to effect the liquidation, any
assets left after satisfying the claims of creditors may legally be transferred to shareholders. The
distinction between one part of the shareholders claim and another becomes irrelevant since on
liquidation all of the shareholders claim becomes distributable.
The Procedure in the liquidated company

1.
The assets of the old company are sold to the new company for a value based on
their market price. The new company typically undertakes to issue shares (in the new
company) to satisfy the consideration for this transaction.
2.
The old company will then use the consideration to pay off creditors (including loan
stock/debenture holders) and, if anything is left, to satisfy, partially or fully, the claims
of the preference and ordinary shareholders of the company. The absence of cash
may mean that the creditors will need to be persuaded to become creditors of the new
company so that the reconstruction can proceed. To do this the creditors may need to
be offered an inducement such as an increased claim.
S T U D Y
6.1.3 LIQUIDATION OF A COMPANY
T E X T
38,745
348
Accounting entries in the books of the liquidated company

FAST FORWARD: The liquidation of a company is very similar to the dissolution of a partnership
(Read Chapter 6 - Jennings).
S T U D Y
T E X T
It involves the opening of the following accounts in the books of the old company.
The Sundry Members A/c - takes all shareholders claim (share capital plus various
reserves).
Realisation account - the assets to be sold to the new company are transferred to this
account and their disposal proceeds are credited to it. The account is also charged with
any costs of liquidation and realisation to be borne by the old company. The balance
will represent a surplus or decit on disposal which must be transferred to the sundry
members account.
Purchasers account - this is the personal account of the purchases of the old companys
assets i.e. the new company. This account is debited with the amount of the consideration
and credited with the actual payment in whatever form it takes.
Lets briey look at the required bookkeeping entries involved with liquidating the old
company.
Dr.
Realisation account
xxx
Cr. Various asset account
xxx
(To transfer the book value of all assets to be sold to the new company)
Dr.
Realisation account
xxx
Cr. Cash account
xxx
(Being the cost of liquidation or Realisation expenses incurred)
Dr.
Realisation account
xxx
Cr. Creditors account
xxx
(Being any enhancement/premium given to creditors (e.g. debenture holders) to encourage

acceptance of the reconstruction scheme).
Dr.
Realisation account
xxx
Cr. Purchaser account
xxx
(Being the value of the consideration for the assets sold to the new company)
The balance in the realisation account should now be transferred to the Sundry members
account.
Dr.
Creditors account
349
xxx
Cr. Cash account
xxx
(Being cash paid to discharge creditors)
Dr.
Creditors account
xxx
Cr. Purchaser account
xxx
(Being any shares or debentures in the new company which the creditors have agreed to accept
to discharge their claim against the old company).
Dr.
Sundry members
xxx
Cr. Purchasers account
xxx
(Being any shares in the new company which the old company shareholders have agreed to
accept under the liquidation).
>>> Example:
The summarised Balance Sheet of ERIOKI Ltd on 31 December 20X1 was as follows:
Kshs.
PPE (net of depreciation)
Current assets
Inventory
Trade receivables
Cash
Less: Creditors: amounts falling due within one year
Trade payables
22,000
15,000
20,000
57,000
18,000
Less: Creditors: amounts falling due after more than

one year
10% debentures
Ordinary shares of Kshs. 1 each fully paid
Kshs.
76,000
39,000
115,000
(60,000)
55,000
80,000
15,000
(40,000)
55,000
The necessary special resolution to liquidate the company at 31 December 20X1 has been
passed and a new company ERIOKI (20X2) Ltd is formed.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Lets use the following example to illustrate the above procedure.
350
The following has been established.
The trade creditors insist on full payment in cash.
The 10% debenture holders have agreed to accept Kshs.66,000, 12% debentures in
ERIOKI (20X2) Ltd in full discharge of their claim against ERIOKI Ltd.
The shareholders claim will be settled by the issue, at par, of ordinary Kshs.1 shares of
ERIOKI (20X2) Ltd, sufcient to meet the claim in full.
The assets of ERIOKI Ltd, after settlement of the creditors are all to be acquired by
ERIOKI (20X2) Ltd at the following valuations:
Fixed Assets
Stock
Trade debtors
Kshs.
70,000
21,000
15,000
Required:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Write up the following accounts in the books of ERIOKI Ltd to record the transactions specied
above:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Cash account
Realisation account
Purchaser (ERIOKI (20X2)) Ltd account
10% debentures account
Solution
BOOKS OF ERIOKI LTD
(a) CASH ACCOUNT

KSHS.
31.12.X1 BALANCE C/D
20,000
KSHS.
31.12.X1 TRADE CREDITORS
31.12.X1
20,000
Kshs.
____
20,000
2,000
REALISATION
20,000
31.12.X1 Balance c/d 20,000
18,000
Kshs.
31.12.X1 Trade creditors
31.12.X1 Realisation
18,000
2,000
20,000
351
(b) REALISATION ACCOUNT

Kshs.
31.12.X1 Cash
PPE
Inventory
Trade receivables
Premium on debentures
Cash
76,000
22,000
15,000
6,000
2,000
_____
121,000
Kshs.
31.12X1 Stock
Trade debtors
Fixed Assets
21,000
15.000
70,000
Sundry members
(decit on realisation)
15,000
121,000
(c) SUNDRY MEMBERS ACCOUNT

31.12.X1 Prot loss
40,000
31.12.X1 Ordinary shares
80,000
Kshs
Kshs
15,000 Share Premium
15,000
Purchaser
40,000
_____
95,000
95,000
(d) PURCHASER (ERIOKI (20X2)) ACCOUNT

Kshs.
31.12.X1
Realisation
Kshs.
106,000 31.12.X1
10% debentures
66,000
Ordinary Kshs.1 shares
40,000
106,000
(e)
106,000
10% DEBENTURES ACCOUNT

Kshs.
31.12.X1
Purchaser 12%
debentures in ERIOKI
(1992) Ltd
66,000 31.12.X1
___
66,000
Kshs.
Balance c/d
60,000
Realisation
6,000
66,000
Accounting Treatment in the books of the new company
This is well covered in Jennings Chapter 1 Pages 245-265 otherwise it is relatively

straightforward. As is typically the case where a company takes over an existing
business as a going concern, the consideration for the share issue and debentures is
in the form of assets generally, not just cash.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Realisation
352
Any shortfall in the nominal value of the shares issued by the new company below the
value of the assets to be taken over, net of any debentures issued by the new company
as part of the consideration, will be share premium. This must be treated as such in the
accounts of the new company.
Generally, one should debit the asset accounts with the assets taken over, credit the
liability accounts (including debentures) with the liabilities assumed and credit the share
capital account and possible share premium account with the nominal value of the
shares issued.
Closing entries in the books of the old company should be made. The following
transactions will be found in practice (and in examinations).
Dr. Various asset accounts
Cr. Vendor (old company) account
With the assets to be acquired at the agreed value). Note that the agreed value is not
necessarily the book value of the assets in the accounts of the old company.
Vendor (old company) account
xxx
Cr.
Various creditors accounts
xxx
(With the creditors taken over by the new company at the agreed value)
T E X T
Dr.

xxx
Cr.
Share capital account
xxx
(With the nominal value of the shares to be issued. If the shares are to be issued partly
paid, the paid up portion of the nominal value will be the appropriate gure)
S T U D Y
Dr.
Dr.

xxx
Cr.
xxx
(With any excess of the agreed value of net assets agreed value less agreed liability
values) over the nominal (or paid up) value of the shares issued.
Note:
If there were an excess of nominal (or paid up) value over net asset values, it would amount to a
share issue at a discount. This would be illegal.
>>> Example:
Consider the previous example - ERIOKI Ltd. Open all the relevant accounts in the books of
ERIOKI (20X2) Ltd and make the appropriate entries to record the opening transactions. Also
show the balance sheet of the new company immediately following these transactions.
Solutions
353
Books of ERIOKI (20X2) Ltd
Fixed Assets
Kshs.
Kshs.
31.12.X1 Vendor
70,000
Stock in Trade
31.12.X1 Vendor
Kshs.
Kshs.
21,000
Kshs.
Kshs.
15,000
Trade Debtors
31.12.X1 Vendor
Vendor (ERIOKI Ltd)
66,000
Ordinary Shares of Kshs.1 each

31.12.X1
Vendor
Kshs.
42,000
Kshs.
Cash
31.12.X1
Kshs.
2,000
Kshs.
Vendor
Kshs.
Kshs.
31.12.X1 12% Debentures
66,000 31.12.X1 Fixed Assets
70,000
Ordinary shares
42,000 Stock in Trade
21,000
Trade debtors
15,000
______ Cash
2,000
108,000
108,000
ERIOKI (20X2) LTD

Balance Sheet
As at 31 December 20X1
PPE (at valuation)

Current Assets:
Stock in trade
Trade debtors
Cash
Less: creditors: amounts falling due after more than
one year
Ordinary shares of Kshs. 1 each, fully paid
Kshs.
21,000
15,000
2,000
Kshs.
70,000
38,000
108,000
(66,000)
42,000
42,000
T E X T
Vendor
S T U D Y
31.12.X1
354
6.1.4 SUMMARY
Remember, there are almost limitless variations on the precise arrangements of the bookkeeping
entries involved in accounting for capital reconstructions. It is not, therefore, practical to cover them
all and we have only considered the basic ones. Provided you understand the principles of what
you are doing it should be easy for you to deduce the correct treatment of any variations.
Also the examiner may require you to design the reconstruction scheme especially for capital
reorganization. It should not be difcult if you note the following points - steps to follow.
(a)
Determine losses to be written off which includes:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Debit balance in the prot and loss account

Fictitious assets
Under provisions for liabilities
Arrears of dividends - for preference share capital
(b)
Evaluate the asset cover for different parties in the event of liquidation
(c)
Ensure that the scheme you design is
Fair in its own right.

Creditors should be secured, unless the value of security is inadequate.
Preferential creditors should normally be ranked high.
Then followed by debenture holders secured by a oating charge who may be induced
to accept a reduction of their claim if there is a possibility of a loss in the event of a
liquidation or compensate them by increasing the interest rate or allot them ordinary
shares.
Unsecured creditors may be forced to make sacrices if the company is insolvent and
most likely compensate them by issue of equity shares.
Also the preference shareholders may be willing to sacrice if they cannot be paid in
full. Most probably, they may be compensated by increasing the rate of their dividends
or an issue of equity shares or bonds whichever is appropriate.
The equity shareholders normally bear the major sacrice. Usually, the existing
shareholders would be required to subscribe for additional shares so that they can raise
working capital for the company being reconstructed.
(d)
A Balance Sheet after a scheme of reconstruction is effected to reect reconstruction

is effected to reect the nancial position of the company reconstructed or the new
company formed.
(e)
Future estimates of prot and how it can be shared among the various parties concerned
is also necessary.
Otherwise, the following points should always be considered where one is effecting or
implementing an already designed scheme of - Capital Reorganization.
It is an alternative to liquidation/winding up
It must meet the legal requirements i.e. the parties must pass a special resolution,
355
be permitted by the articles, and must pass a special resolution, be permitted by the
articles, and must be conrmed and registered by the court
There should be prospects of the company pulling through i.e there should be prospects
of making prots in the future
It must be essential to do a reconstruction
The scheme should be equitable
The scheme should maintain the existing control
There should be sufcient provision for working capital
Any pressing loans or claims and liabilities should be carefully catered for
6.2 MANAGEMENTS DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
The purpose is to provide introduction to the basic nancial statements and provide analytical
overview of the governments nancial activities.
Managements Discussion and Analysis should be prepared by the governmental unit and not
the auditors.
6.2.1 Overview of MD&A

MD&A should help the reader of the nancial statements understand whether the governments
nancial position has improved as compared to the prior year. This is from managements
perspective and with the insight available from that perspective.
6.2.2 Basic Guidelines

MD&A is included in RSI Impact of this:
Only required elements can be included.
Other management discussion items can be included in Letter of Transmittal
Required for CAFRs and AFR
Location: Precedes the basic nancial statements.
Included in Financial Section of the nancial statements
S T U D Y
Source: Milestone Professional Services
T E X T
FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
356
Generally follows the Letter of Transmittal (if included ) and auditors opinion
Analysis of Basic Financial Statements

- Objective
- Easy to read
- Based on currently known information
- Both short and long term focused
- Based on managements understanding of nancial report and scal policy
- Comparative both negative and positive
- Use of charts and graphs to enhance the readers understanding
- Focus is on primary government
- Avoid boilerplate approach
6.2.3 Specic requirements
Discussion of basic nancial statements and their relationship to each other including
signicant differences in the information they provide.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Purpose is to help readers of MD&A understand the relationship of the results

reported in the governmental funds nancial statements and those reported for
governmental activities
The cause of these differences should be evident in the reconciliations
accompanying the fund nancial statements.
What types of questions should this address?
How are the statements similar and how are they different?
What activities are accounted for?
How are these activities similar and how are they different, and how is this evident in
the statements?
Condensed nancial information derived from government-wide nancial statements.

-
Should compare current to prior year

Should include specic elements
Total assets, distinguishing between capital and other assets
Total liabilities, distinguishing between long-term and other liabilities
Total Net Assets, distinguishing among amounts invested in capital assets, net of related
debt; restricted amounts and unrestricted amounts
357
Sample Table
CITY OF CASSELBERRY, FLORIDA
STATEMENT OF NET ASSETS
September 30, 2006
City of Casselberry
Stmt of Changes in Net Assets
September 30, 2006
Governmental Activities
Business-type Activities
2006
2006
2005
2005
Total
2006
2005
Revenues
$
2,743,289
$
11,603,865
$
10,775,251
$
14,499,573
748,768
1,770,817
71,833
748,768
1,842,650
274,244
67,294
691,008
115,148
965,252
182,442
,351,781
5,156,690
6,452,127
5,122,524
4,667,290
639,250
365,741
5,761,774
5,033,031
21,314,796
20,857,507
12,934,123
11,327,973
34,248,919
32,185,480
5,212,638
11,037,425
1,342,321
2,299,073
94,551
1,992,179
615,250
3,351,170
10,248,677
171,731
4,351,339
144,327
1,451,166
238,546
5,212,638
11,037,425
1,342,321
2,299,073
94,551
1,992,179
615,250
3,351,170
10,248,677
171,731
4,351,339
144,327
1,451,166
238,546
22,593,437
19,956,956
8,932,310
8,932,310
8,641,538
8,641,538
8,932,310
31,525,747
8,641,538
28,598,494
900,551
4,001,813
2,686,435
2,723,172
3,586,986
1,907,843
629,202
30,719,659
1,384,264
2,284,815
29,084,243
(1,907,843)
2,093,970
31,695,120
(1,384,264)
1,302,171
30,392,949
2,723,172
62,414,779
3,586,986
59,477,192
$ 31,348,861
$ 31,369,058
$ 33,789,090
$ 31,695,120
$ 65,137,951
$ 63,064,178
6,921,771
5,351,781
5,156,690
6,452,127
6,921,771
Other
Total Revenues
Total
Expenses
(1,278,641)
Transfers
For
MD&A
Content
$ 31,348,861
$ 30,719,659
$
629,202
2.0%
$ 33,789,090
$ 31,695,120
$ 2,093,970
6.2%
2,723,172
3,586,986
(863,814)
T E X T
Other Taxes
$ 2,895,708
S T U D Y
Charges for
services
Operating grants
and contributions
Capital grants
and contributions
General
Revenues
Property Taxes

Contributions
Special and extraordinary items
Transfers
A D VA N C E D F I N
ANCIAL REPORTING
Change in Net Assets
Ending Net Assets
358
Elements of the condensed nancial information cont.
Program revenues, by major source

General revenues, by major source
Total Revenues
Program expenses at least by function
Total expenses
Excess (deciency) before contributions
Contributions
Special and extraordinary items
Transfers
Change in Net Assets
Ending Net Assets
Sample Table (Part 1)
S T U D Y
T E X T
City of Casselberry
September 30, 2006
2006
2005
2006
2005
2006
Total
2005
Revenues
Program Revenues
Charges for services

Operating grants
and contributions
Capital grants and
contributions
$ 2,895,708
$ 2,743,289
748,768
1,770,817
274,244
67,294
$
11,603,86
5
$
10,775,251
$
14,499,573
$
13,518,540
71,833
748,768
1,842,650
691,008
115,148
965,252
182,442
General Revenues
Property Taxes
5,351,781
5,156,690
5,351,781
5,156,690
Other Taxes
6,921,771
6,452,127
6,921,771
6,452,127
Other
5,122,524
Total Revenues
4,667,290
21,314,796 20,857,507
639,250
12,934,123
365,741
11,327,973
5,761,774
5,033,031
34,248,919
32,185,480
359

September 30, 2006
5,212,638
3,351,170
11,037,425
10,248,677
1,342,321
171,731
2,299,073
4,351,339
94,551
144,327
2006
Human Services
Culture/Recreati 1,992,179
1,451,166
on
Interest on Long-Term
Debt
615,250
238,546
Water and
Wastewater
Total
Expenses
2005
5,212,638
3,351,170
11,037,425
10,248,677
1,342,321
171,731
2,299,073
4,351,339
94,551
144,327
1,992,179
1,451,166
238,546
-
615,250
8,641,538
8,932,310
8,641,538
8,932,31
0
28,598,494
22,593,437
19,956,95
6
8,932,310
8,641,53
8
31,525,747

September 30, 2006
Governmental
Activities
2006
2005
Change in Net
Assets - before
transfers
Transfer
s
Change in Net
Assets
Net Assets
Beginning
Net Assets
Ending
Total
2006
2006
(1,278,641)
900,551
4,001,813
1,907,843
1,384,264
(1,907,843)
629,202
2,284,815
2,093,970
30,719,659
29,084,243
31,695,120
$ 31,348,861
$ 31,369,058
$ 33,789,090
2005
2,686,435
2005
2,723,172
3,586,986
1,302,171
2,723,172
3,586,986
30,392,94
9
62,414,779
59,477,192
(1,384,264)
$ 31,695,120 $ 65,137,951 $ 63,064,178
Specific requirements cont.

Analysis of governments overall financial position and results of operations
Purpose is to assist users to evaluate whether financial position has
improved or deteriorated
Analysis should address governmental and business-type activities
Information should be from the government-wide statements
Reasons should be included not just amount and percentage changes

Sample Table
T E X T
Physical
Environment
Transportation
2005
Total
S T U D Y
Expenses
General
Government
Public Safety
2006
Business-type
Activities
2006
2005
360
Specic requirements cont.

Analysis of governments overall nancial position and results of operations
Purpose is to assist users to evaluate whether nancial position has improved or
deteriorated
Analysis should address governmental and business-type activities
Information should be from the government-wide statements
Reasons should be included not just amount and percentage changes
Sample Table
Governmental
Functions/Programs
Expenses
S T U D Y
T E X T
General Government
5,212,638
% of
Total
Program
Revenues
23.1%
314,424
% of
Total
8.0%
Net (Expense)
Revenue
$
(4,898,214)
Public Safety
Physical
Environment
11,037,425
48.9%
1,448,769
37.0%
(9,588,656)
1,342,321
5.9%
1,713,987
43.7%
371,666
Transportation
Economic
Environment
2,299,073
10.2%
132,962
3.4%
(2,166,111)
Human Services
Culture/Recreation
Interest on Long-Term
Debt
0.0%
4,318
0.1%
4,318
94,551
0.4%
481
0.0%
(94,070)
1,992,179
8.8%
303,779
7.8%
(1,688,400)
615,250
2.7%
0.0%
(615,250)
100.0%
$ (18,674,717)
$
22,593,437
100.0%
3,918,720
Business-Type
Functions/Programs Expenses
$
Water & Wastewater
8,932,310
Net
(Expense)
Revenue
$
3,362,563
Program
Revenues
$ 12,294,873
For use in MD&A

Govt funds
revenues
21,459,682
CY
22,410,111
PY
(950,429)
Change
-4.2%
Govt funds expend
22,560,973
CY
27,227,591
PY
(4,666,618)
-17.1%
Change
Utility Net Assets
33,789,090
361
CY
31,695,120
PY
2,093,970
Change
6.6%
GF Total FB
GF Unrestricted FB
GF total expend
6,642,830
5,946,450
20,122,077
29.6%
33.0%
Govt Fund Balances
$ 16,806,627
15,800,664
Sample Table
Program Revenues
$
Capital grants and contributions
2,895,708
12.5%
748,768
3.2%
274,244
1.2%
General Revenues
Property Tax
5,351,781
23.0%
Infrastructure Surtax
1,269,348
5.5%
Public Service Tax
3,281,645
14.1%
Gas Tax
Unrestricted State Revenue
Sharing
437,584
Franchise Fees
Unrestricted Intergovernmental
Revenues
1.9%
3,065,326
13.2%
1,933,194
8.3%
418,749
1.8%
Interest Revenue
791,070
3.4%
Miscellaneous
847,379
3.6%
1,907,843
8.2%
23,222,639
100.0%
Transfers
$
Change
S T U D Y
Governmental
Charges for services

Operating grants and
contributions
PY
T E X T
1,005,963
CY
362
Specic requirements cont.
What types of questions should be answered here?

Did overall assets of the entity change and why?
Did expenses exceed revenues for the governmental programs?
Were there major changes in the governments operation and what was the
nancial impact of these decisions?
Analysis of balances and transactions of individual funds that addresses:

Reasons for signicant changes in fund balance or fund net assets
Whether restrictions, commitments or other limitations signicantly affect
availability of fund resources for future use
Analysis of signicant variations between original and nal budget, and between nal
budget and actual
For general fund (or equivalent)
Include currently known reasons for variations that are expected to have a
signicant effect on future services or liquidity
Description of signicant capital asset and long-term debt activity including discussion
of :
Commitments made for capital expenditures
Changes in credit ratings
Debt limitations that may affect nancing of planned facilities or services
Footnotes where more information is available
S T U D Y
T E X T
Government-wide nancial analysis cont.
Sample Capital Asset Table

Governmental
Business-type
Activities
Activities
Land
11,882,919
1,738,685
Total
$
13,621,604
Building and Improvements
22,961,671
43,218,956
66,180,627
Machinery and Equipment
5,421,141
4,131,094
9,552,235
Vehicles
3,876,781
Infrastructure
19,218,417
Construction in Progress
Accumulated Depreciation
Capital Assets, Net
3,876,781
19,218,417
802,837
1,972,424
64,163,766
51,061,159
(15,913,070)
(21,445,521)
48,250,696
29,615,638
2,775,261
115,224,925
(37,358,591)
$
77,866,334
Revenue and Other Notes

Capital Lease
Compensated absences
Total Long-term liabilities
Sample Debt Table

Governmental
Business-type
Activities
Activities
$
13,958,395
$
13,777,656
402,811
113,884
903,912
178,712
$
15,265,118
$
14,070,252
363
Total
27,736,051
516,695
1,082,624
29,335,370
Governments that use modied approach for infrastructure reporting must discuss:
Changes in assessed condition of assets
Comparison of current assessed condition to established condition level
Signicant differences in actual amounts spent to maintain assets from estimated
annual amount
Description of currently known facts, decisions or conditions that are expected to have
a signicant effect on nancial position or results of operations
Currently known means to have been aware of at the auditors report date
Must have already occurred, been enacted, adopted, agreed upon or contracted
Currently known facts cont.
This discussion should highlight but not repeat information in the footnotes (such as in
a subsequent events or contingencies note)
Discussion should address both governmental and business-type activities
Examples of discussions not allowed:
Predicting sales tax increase based on new mall being built
Predicting that data-processing system will pay for itself over a certain time period
Speculation of events or upcoming trends or projects
Questions and Answers

Q:
A:
How do you handle comparative nancial statements for MD&A?

Comparative nancial statements would address both years in one MD&A presentation.
Comparative data included in the basic nancial statements would require only one
MD&A analysis for current to prior year information.
Q:
Are governments allowed to discuss other issues in MD&A that are not required
elements?
No. However, the manner in which the required elements are addressed may allow
governments to provide additional information that directly relates to a required
element.
A:
Q:
A:
How should the Letter or Transmittal be modied to avoid duplication with MD&A?
Required elements must be in MD&A thus Letter of Transmittal should be modied to
avoid duplicity. Transmittal letter can refer to MD&A or provide additional insights of
future impact or other discussions outside limitations of MD&A.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Special requirements cont.
364
Q:
A:
Can charts and graphs be used to meet some of the required elements?
No, charts and graphs by themselves cannot meet the required elements. Use of
charts and graphs to enhance the discussion is encouraged but these cannot replace
narrative discussion.
Q:
A:
Should component units be addressed in the MD&A?

MD&A should focus on the primary government. The size and nature of the relationship
with the primary government will determine whether a component unit is discussed. If
included, then the MD&A must distinguish between the two.
Q:
Is the analysis of balances and transactions of individual funds that is required limited
to a discussion of major funds?
Normally, this would be conned to major funds but a government is not precluded from
including relevant discussion regarding non-major funds.
A:
Q:
S T U D Y
T E X T
A:
Q:
A:
Q:
A:
Should the discussion of long-term debt include special assessment debt for which the
government is not obligated?
No, such debt is not debt of the government and is not required to be included in
the discussion. It might be included in the capital asset discussion if used to build or
acquire infrastructure for the government.
Can Service Efforts and Accomplishments (SEA) and performance data be included in
MD&A?
No. Generally, SEA would not be included since it is not a required element per GASB.
However, if it provides additional information directly related to a required element, it
might be included as additional analysis.
When discussing signicant general fund budget variances, is it sufcient to state that
the original budget was increased to cover higher-than-expected expenditures?
No, the analysis needs to discuss the reasons for these variances and the impact on
future services or liquidity.
Practical Suggestions
Where possible, link tables to nancial statements
Dont duplicate information
If rounding to 000s, make sure that narratives are written from this perspective
Double check totals and percent calculations if rounding to 000s to make sure they foot
and equal 100%
Make sure to update the words increase and decrease if using prior year template
so that the proper descriptive term is used for the change you are analyzing
Read through for clarity and to evaluate if the analysis makes sense.
365
CHAPTER SUMMARY
companys capital, usually to make the company more appealing, for the issuing of new capital to
raise funds and/or to avoid liquidation. Such a re-organization will leave the company in existence
but with a different capital structure with the old shareholders and possibly some creditors having
different rights.
is then wound up.
S T U D Y
T E X T
CHAPTER QUIZ
1.
What are the reasons for capital reduction?
2.
What are the three types of circumstances where a company may seek approval for a
capital reduction or reorganization?
366
ANSWERS TO QUIZ QUESTIONS

1.
Reasons for reduction of capital:
(1)
When the whole of the paid-up capital is not represented by valuable assets. (for
example, xed assets may have become obsolete, or stock-in-trade depreciated by
market conditions).
When substantial trading losses have accumulated.
When the company is over- capitalized , it being impossible to remunerate adequately
all the existing capital.
(2)
(3)
2.
Three types of circumstances where a company may seek approval for a capital
reduction or reorganization are:
(a)
Where there is partly paid share capital and the company wishes to reduce the liability
for the unpaid portion.
Where the company has excess capital and wishes to repay part of it.
Where the company wishes formally to acknowledge that capital has been lost typically
as a result of adverse trading or the loss of value of assets.
S T U D Y
T E X T
(b)
(c)
PAST PAPER ANALYSIS

Capital reductions and was tested in the following examinations:
12/07
06/04
12/02
12/00
External Reconstruction was tested in the following examinations:
06/07
12/06
06/05
12/04
367
EXAM QUESTION
Shida Ltd. reported favourable trading results until three years ago when it started reporting
successive trading losses.
Provided below is the balance sheet of the company as at 30 September 2004:
Non-currency liability:
6% debentures
Creditors
Bank overdraft
18,000
6,500
50,000
30,000
10,000
(30,000)
130,000
24,500
154,500
60,000
70,000
14,500
10,000
24,500
154,500
1.
Both the ordinary and preference shares are of Sh.l0 each and are all fully paid.
2.
On 30 September 2004, preference dividends were three years in arrears.
3.
Debentures are secured on a oating charge over the assets of the company. Debenture
holders who are also suppliers of goods to the company are owed Sid 3 million. This
amount is included in the creditors account.
4.
The bank overdraft is secured on a xed charge on motor vehicles.
5.
The articles of association of the company give preference shareholders priority over
ordinary shareholders on repayment of the capital contributed. The articles of association
also provide for repayment of contributed capital only after settlement of any preference
dividend arrears outstanding.
T E X T
20,000
48,000
37,000
25,000
S T U D Y
Assets:
Non-current assets:
Goodwill
Land and buildings
Motor vehicles
Furniture and equipment
Current assets:
Stock
Debtors
Total assets
Equity and liabilities:
Capital and reserves:
10% preference share capital
Share premium
Prot and loss account balance
Balance sheet as at 30 September

2004
Sh. 000
Sh. 000
368
6.
Due to successive trading losses that the company has reported in the past three years,
the directors have decided either to liquidate or reconstruct the company.
The realisable values of the companys assets as at 30 September 2004 were as
follows:
Sh. 000
Land and buildings
60,000
Motor vehicles
32,000
15,000
Stock
12,500
Debtors
5,200
S T U D Y
T E X T
On liquidation of the company, dissolution costs of Sh. 5 million would be incurred.

7.
On reconstruction of the company, the following measures would be effected:
The authorised capital of the company would be increased from Sh.80 million to Sh.150
million composed of ordinary shares of Sh.l0 each.
6% debentures of nominal value Sh 50 million would be settled by the issue of ordinary

shares at par fully paid. The balance of the 6% debentures would be exchanged for 8%
debentures of the same nominal value. The trade debt due to debenture holders would
be settled immediately in cash.
The 10% preference shareholders would be issued with two fully paid ordinary shares
of Sh.l0 each for every ve 10% preference shares held.
Preference dividend arrears would be settled by the issue of ve fully paid ordinary
shares for every Sh.l00 of the arrears.
Present ordinary shareholders would be issued with one fully paid ordinary share of
Sh.10 for every ten ordinary shares held.
It is estimated that in order to effect the scheme of reconstruction, a cost of Sh.4 million
would be incurred.
On reconstruction of the company, 4,850.000 ordinary shares of Sh.10 par value and
paid for immediately, would be issued to the present ordinary shareholders and 10%
preference shareholders in the ratio of four to one respectively. The cash received
from the issue of the shares wou1d be used to purchase trading stock valued at Sh.12
million, settle the bank overdraft and pay the trade debt due to the debenture holders.
The balance would be used as working capital.
10
It is anticipated that on reconstruction, the company would make an annual prot before
interest and tax of Sh.9,100,000. The tax rate is expected to be 30%.
In order to compensate the present shareholders for the loss they would incur on
reconstruction of the company, the directors have decided to retain only 20% of the
anticipated net prot.
369
11. Assume that all the transactions on reconstruction were completed on 1 October
2004.
Required:
(a)
The amount the present ordinary and preference shareholders would receive on
liquidation of Shida Ltd.
(6 marks)
(b)
The opening balance sheet of Shida ltd. as at 2 October 2004, after completion of the
reconstruction.
(14 marks)
(Total: 20 marks)
(CPA 2005)
orm 10-K Part II

The economic impact of our acceleration of tax deductions will also affect how we view future
asset transactions with Genesis.
Transactions which are not sales for tax purposes, such as the $175 million nancing lease on
the NEJD CO2 Pipeline (see
Overview Genesis Transactions above) would not be affected provided that they meet other
necessary tax criteria. Those transactions which constitute a sale for tax purposes, such as the
$75 million sale and associated long-term transportation service agreement entered into with
Genesis on our Free State CO2 Pipeline (see Overview Genesis Transactions above), will be
less advantageous from a tax perspective.
Sale of Louisiana Natural Gas Assets. In February 2008, we received the $48.9 million remaining
portion (30%) of the proceeds from the sale of our Louisiana natural gas assets, the prior 70%
of which closed in December 2007. Production attributable to the sold properties averaged 302
BOE/d (approximately 81% natural gas) during the rst quarter of 2008, representing production
prior to the closing date for the portion of the sale that closed in February.
Recent 2009 Transactions Purchase of Hastings Field. On February 2, 2009, we closed the $201
million acquisition of the Hastings Field, which is located near Houston, Texas, and is a potential
tertiary oil eld to be supplied by the Green CO2 Pipeline which has commenced construction. In
August 2008, we exercised our option with a subsidiary of Venoco, Inc. (Venoco) to purchase
Hastings Field, and in consideration of our exercising the option in 2008 rather than 2009, Venoco
agreed to extend the deadlines for capital expenditures, commencement of CO2 injections and
certain other contractual requirements by one year.
Management Succession Plan. On February 5, 2009, our Board of Directors adopted a
management succession plan under which our current executive ofcers will assume new roles
S T U D Y
Managements Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and

Results of Operations
T E X T
CASE STUDY
370
on or about June 30, 2009. Gareth Roberts, the Companys founder, will relinquish his position
as President and CEO and become Co-Chairman of the Board of Directors and will assume a
non-ofcer role as the Companys Chief Strategist. Phil Rykhoek, currently Senior Vice President
and Chief Financial Ofcer, will become CEO; Tracy Evans, currently Senior Vice President
Reservoir Engineering, will become President and Chief Operating Ofcer; and Mark Allen,
currently Vice President and Chief Accounting Ofcer, will become Senior Vice President and
Chief Financial Ofcer.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Subordinated Debt Issuance. On February 13, 2009, we issued $420 million of 9.75% Senior
Subordinated Notes due 2016 (the Notes). The Notes were sold to the public at 92.816% of par,
plus accrued interest from February 13, 2009, which equates to an effective yield to maturity of
approximately 11.25% (before offering expenses). Interest on the Notes will be paid on March 1
and September 1 of each year, beginning September 1, 2009. The Notes will mature on March
1, 2016. We used the net proceeds from the offering of approximately $381 million to repay most
of the then outstanding debt on our bank credit facility.
Capita l Resources and Liquidity During the last six months, we have taken several steps to
improve our liquidity as a result of the deterioration in the capital markets and the decrease
in oil and natural gas commodity prices. These included a $400 million increase to our bank
commitment amount (see Increased Bank Credit Line below for more details), cancellation
of the $600 million acquisition of Conroe Field, purchase of oil derivative contracts covering
approximately 80% of our currently estimated 2009 oil production, and reduction of our capital
budget for 2009. Also, in February 2009, we issued $420 million of Senior Subordinated Notes
(see Overview Recent 2009 Transactions Subordinated Debt Issuance).
Prior to the decline in economic conditions, we had intended, in a tax free exchange, to exchange
the Barnett Shale properties for the Conroe and Hastings Fields, both of which are future tertiary
ood candidates located near Houston, Texas. However, because of the deterioration in capital
market conditions, we believed that the sale of our Barnett Shale properties at a price that we
would consider reasonable was doubtful, and without the certainty of a Barnett Shale property
sale, we did not feel comfortable increasing our leverage. As such, we cancelled our $600 million
contract to purchase Conroe Field, forfeiting a $30 million non-refundable deposit which we
expensed in the third quarter. To further protect our liquidity in the event that commodity prices
continued to decline, in October 2008 we purchased oil derivative contracts for 2009 with a oor
price of $75 / Bbl and a ceiling price of $115 / Bbl for total consideration of $15.5 million. The
collars cover 30,000 Bbls/d representing approximately 80% of our currently anticipated 2009 oil
production. See Oil and Natural Gas Derivative Contracts below in this section for information
regarding the counterparties for these collars. We further signicantly increased our liquidity in
February 2009 by issuing $420 million of subordinated debt. We used net proceeds from that
offering ($381 million) to repay most of our then outstanding bank debt, freeing-up most of our
bank credit line for future capital needs, as our total bank commitment amount of $750 million
was not reduced because of the offering.
T E X T
PART C
S T U D Y
371
S T U D Y
T E X T
372
373
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
CHAPTER SEVEN
PUBLIC SECTOR
ACCOUNTING
S T U D Y
T E X T
374
375
CHAPTER SEVEN
PUBLIC SECTOR ACCOUNTING
OBJECTIVES
State the accounting concepts, bases and policies of relevance to government

accounting.
Prepare, analyse and interpret nancial statements of government units.
Public sector accounting; the development of accounting standards and their applicability
to the public sector.
Fund accounting and its relationship to entity theory
Income measurement and valuation in the public sector.
Prepare the accounts of state corporations and similar organisations.
INTRODUCTION TO THE INTERNATIONAL PUBLIC SECTOR

ACCOUNTING STANDARDS
The International Federation of Accountants International Public Sector Accounting Standards
Board (IPSASB) develops accounting standards for public sector entities referred to as
International Public Sector Accounting Standards (IPSASs).
The IPSASB recognizes the signicant benets of achieving consistent and comparable nancial
information across jurisdictions and it believes that the IPSASs will play a key role in enabling
these benets to be realized.
The IPSASB strongly encourages governments and national standard-setters to engage in the
development of its Standards by commenting on the proposals set out in its Exposure Drafts.
The IPSASB issues IPSASs dealing with nancial reporting under the cash basis of accounting
and the accrual basis of accounting. The accrual basis IPSASs are based on the International
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs), issued by the International Accounting Standards Board
(IASB) where the requirements of those Standards are applicable to the public sector. They also
deal with public sector specic nancial reporting issues that are not dealt with in IFRSs.
The adoption of IPSASs by governments will improve both the quality and comparability of
nancial information reported by public sector entities around the world. The IPSASB recognizes
the right of governments and national standard setters to establish accounting standards and
guidelines for nancial reporting in their jurisdictions.
S T U D Y
T E X T
After this chapter, the student should have knowledge of the following:
376
The IPSASB encourages the adoption of IPSASs and the harmonization of national requirements
with IPSASs. Financial statements should be described as complying with IPSASs only if they
comply with all the requirements of each applicable IPSAS.

Fund is a distinct accounting entity with a self balancing set of accounts which has objectives
set out to be met.
Accounting theory refers to the nancial reporting that may be adopted by the organisation.
A fund accounting system is a collection of distinct entities or funds in which each fund reects
nancial aspects of a particular segment of the organisations activities.
S T U D Y
T E X T
General funds are funds established to account for resources devoted to nancing the general
services which the governmental unit performs for its citizens.
A budget may be dened as a nancial and quantitative statement prepared prior to a denite
period of time of the policy to be perused during that time for the purposes of attaining a given
objective.
EXAM CONTEXT
This topic has not been tested before in this section.
INDUSTRY CONTEXT
Public sector accounting is applied by organizations to prepare, analyse and interpret nancial
statements of government units.
Public sector accounting enables organizations to prepare the accounts of state corporations.
This chapter enables organizations to know Fund accounting and its relationship to entity theory
and also Income measurement and valuation in the public sector.
377
7.1 DEVELOPMENT OF IPSASS

The mission of the International Federation of Accountants (IFAC), as set out in its constitution, is
to serve the public interest, strengthen the accountancy profession worldwide and contribute to
the development of strong international economies by establishing and promoting adherence to
high quality professional standards, furthering the international convergence of such standards,
and speaking out on public interest issues where the professions expertise is most relevant. In
pursuing this mission, IFAC established the IPSASB.
The IPSASB (formerly Public Sector Committee (PSC)) is a Board of IFAC formed to develop
and issue under its own authority International Public Sector Accounting Standards (IPSASs).
IPSASs are high quality global nancial reporting standards for application by public sector
entities other than Government Business Enterprises (GBEs).
All Consultative Group members are invited to these meetings. In addition, a full meeting of all
members of the Consultative Group may be held if considered necessary.
7.1.1 Objectives of IPSASB

The objectives of the IPSASB are to serve the public interest by developing high quality public
sector nancial reporting standards and by facilitating the convergence of international and
national standards, thereby enhancing the quality and uniformity of nancial reporting throughout
the world. The IPSASB achieves its objectives by:
Issuing International Public Sector Accounting Standards (IPSASs);
Promoting their acceptance and the international convergence to these standards;

and
Publishing other documents which provide guidance on issues and experiences in

nancial reporting in the public sector.
The IPSASs are the authoritative requirements established by the IPSASB.

Apart from developing IPSASs, the IPSASB issues other non-authoritative publications including
studies, research reports and occasional papers that deal with particular public sector nancial
reporting issues.
S T U D Y
The Consultative Group is chaired by the Chair of the IPSASB. The Consultative Group is primarily
an electronic forum. However, regional chapters of the Consultative Group meet with the IPSASB
in conjunction with any IPSASB meetings in their region.
T E X T
The IPSASBs Consultative Group is appointed by the IPSASB. The Consultative Group is a
non-voting group. It provides a means by which the IPSASB can consult with and seek advice as
necessary from a broad constituent group.
378
7.2
SCOPE AND AUTHORITY OF INTERNATIONAL

PUBLIC SECTOR ACCOUNTING STANDARDS
7.2.1 Scope of the Standards

The IPSASB develops IPSASs which apply to the accrual basis of accounting and IPSASs which
apply to the cash basis of accounting.
S T U D Y
T E X T
IPSASs set out recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure requirements dealing
with transactions and events in general purpose nancial statements.
The IPSASs are designed to apply to the general purpose nancial statements of all public sector
entities. Public sector entities include national governments, regional governments (for example,
state, provincial, territorial), local governments (for example, city, town) and their component
entities (for example, departments, agencies, boards, commissions), unless otherwise stated.
The Standards do not apply to GBEs. GBEs apply International Financial Reporting Standards
(IFRSs) which are issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). IPSASs
include a denition of GBEs.
Any limitation of the applicability of specic IPSASs is made clear in those standards. IPSASs are
not meant to apply to immaterial items.
The IPSASB has adopted the policy that all paragraphs in IPSASs shall have equal authority, and
that the authority of a particular provision shall be determined by the language used. To avoid
any unintended consequences the IPSASB has determined to apply this policy prospectively as
it reviews and reissues previously issued IPSASs.
7.2.2 General Purpose Financial Statements

Financial statements issued for users that are unable to demand nancial information to meet their
specic information needs are general purpose nancial statements. Examples of such users
are citizens, voters, their representatives and other members of the public. The term nancial
statements used in this preface and in the standards covers all statements and explanatory
material which are identied as being part of the general purpose nancial statements.
When the accrual basis of accounting underlies the preparation of the nancial statements, the
nancial statements will include the statement of nancial position, the statement of nancial
performance, the cash ow statement and the statement of changes in net assets/equity.
When the cash basis of accounting underlies the preparation of the nancial statements, the
primary nancial statement is the statement of cash receipts and payments.
In addition to preparing general purpose nancial statements, an entity may prepare nancial
statements for other parties (such as governing bodies, the legislature and other parties who
perform an oversight function) who can demand nancial statements tailored to meet their
specic information needs.
Such statements are referred to as special purpose nancial statements. The IPSASB
379
encourages the use of IPSASs in the preparation of special purpose nancial statements where
appropriate.
7.2.3 IPSASs for the Accrual and Cash Bases
Are converged with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) issued by the
International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) by adapting them to a public sector
context when appropriate. In undertaking that process, the IPSASB attempts, wherever
possible, to maintain the accounting treatment and original text of the IFRSs unless
there is a signicant public sector issue which warrants a departure; and
Deals with public sector nancial reporting issues that are either not comprehensively
dealt with in existing IFRSs or for which IFRSs have not been developed by the IASB.
As many accrual based IPSASs are based on IFRSs, the IASBs Framework for the
Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements is a relevant reference for users
of IPSASs.
The IPSASB has also issued a comprehensive Cash Basis IPSAS that includes
mandatory and encouraged disclosures sections.
Moving from the Cash Basis to the Accrual Basis

The Cash Basis IPSAS encourages an entity to voluntarily disclose accrual based information,
although its core nancial statements will nonetheless be prepared under the cash basis of
accounting.
An entity in the process of moving from cash accounting to accrual accounting may wish to
include particular accrual based disclosures during this process. The status (for example, audited
or unaudited) and location of additional information (for example, in the notes to the nancial
statements or in a separate supplementary section of the nancial report) will depend on the
characteristics of the information (for example, reliability and completeness) and any legislation
or regulations governing nancial reporting within a jurisdiction.
The IPSASB also attempts to facilitate compliance with accrual based IPSASs through the use
of transitional provisions in certain standards. Where transitional provisions exist, they may allow
an entity additional time to meet the full requirements of a specic accrual based IPSAS or
provide relief from certain requirements when initially applying an IPSAS.
An entity may at any time elect to adopt the accrual basis of accounting in accordance with
IPSASs. At this point, the entity shall apply all the accrual based IPSASs and could choose to
apply any transitional provisions in an individual accrual based IPSAS.
Having decided to adopt accrual accounting in accordance with IPSASs, the transitional provisions
would govern the length of time available to make the transition. On the expiry of the transitional
provisions, the entity shall report in full in accordance with all accrual based IPSASs.
International Public Sector Accounting Standard (IPSAS) 1, Presentation of Financial Statements
includes the following requirement:
S T U D Y
T E X T
The IPSASB develops accrual IPSASs that:
380
An entity whose nancial statements comply with International Public Sector Accounting
Standards should disclose that fact. Financial statements should not be described as
complying with International Public Sector Accounting Standards unless they comply
with all the requirements of each applicable International Public Sector Accounting
Standard.
IPSAS 1 also requires disclosure of the extent to which the entity has applied any transitional
provisions.
7.2.4 Authority of International Public Sector Accounting Standards
S T U D Y
T E X T
Within each jurisdiction, regulations may govern the issue of general purpose nancial
statements by public sector entities. These regulations may be in the form of statutory reporting
requirements, nancial reporting directives and instructions, and/or accounting standards
promulgated by governments, regulatory bodies and/or professional accounting bodies in the
jurisdiction concerned.
The IPSASB believes that the adoption of IPSASs, together with disclosure of compliance with
them will lead to a signicant improvement in the quality of general purpose nancial reporting
by public sector entities.
This, in turn, is likely to lead to better informed assessments of the resource allocation decisions
made by governments, thereby increasing transparency and accountability.
The IPSASB acknowledges the right of governments and national standard setters to establish
accounting standards and guidelines for nancial reporting in their jurisdictions. Some sovereign
governments and national standard setters have already developed accounting standards that
apply to governments and public sector entities within their jurisdiction.
IPSASs may assist such standard-setters in the development of new standards or in the revision
of existing standards in order to contribute to greater comparability.
IPSASs are likely to be of considerable use to jurisdictions that have not yet developed accounting
standards for governments and public sector entities.
The IPSASB strongly encourages the adoption of IPSASs and the harmonization of national
requirements with IPSASs.
Standing alone, neither the IPSASB nor the accounting profession has the power to require
compliance with IPSASs. The success of the IPSASBs efforts is dependent upon the recognition
and support for its work from many different interested groups acting within the limits of their own
jurisdiction.
381
7.3 PUBLIC SECTOR ACCOUNTING

FAST FORWARD: Public sector accounting is necessary because of the central rule it plays both
politically and in economic terms.
Central Government
Local government
Parastatals
Charitable organisations
All public sector organisations have one characteristic, namely they derive their specic power
from Parliament, and as a result they are represented in Parliament. The accountability of public
sector to Parliament takes a variety of forms. For example, under central government, the
department heads are directly accountable to Parliament for the activities of their organisation,
such as the PS of a given ministry is accountable to Parliament through what is known as
Parliamentary Accounts Committee for the proper management of his ministry. The Parastatals
are accountable through their ministries, while local authorities are partially accountable to
Parliament, and to some extent, to the local electorate. Typically a local authority can set out
policies necessary for the improvement of services to the local population, and will look for funds
either directly or from Parliament.
The accountability to Parliament will then set the basis for objectives for different organisations.
For the central government, the objectives are directly set by Parliament, while the parastatals
(e.g. KPLC) will have general objectives set by Parliament, but specic operational objectives
are to be set by the Board of Directors appointed by the minister to oversee the operations of the
Parastatal.
The following are objectives of Public Sector Accounting:
To provide nancial information useful for the determination and predicting of the
cash inows, the balances and nancial requirements to meet the short term needs of
the organisation, i.e. the accounting information should be able to provide adequate
information regarding the tax base as the main source of income to the organisation.
To provide nancial information useful for determination and predicting the economic
condition of the organisation.
To provide information useful for determining and evaluating the performance of the
organisation in terms of legal, contractual and statutory requirements, i.e. the nancial
S T U D Y
T E X T
The public sector is composed of the following:
382
statements should be able to indicate whether the transactions of the organisation have
been carried out legally and in accordance with statutory requirements and contractual
terms.
To provide nancial information necessary for the preparation of the budget-planning and
to predict the impact of the acquisition and allocation of resources to the organisation.
To provide information necessary for evaluating the managerial performance of the

organisation.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The users of public sector accounts can be summarised as follows:
Parliament for control purposes
Government departments to evaluate performance.
Tax payers to conrm how tax has been used
Voters to decide whether to elect a parliament back and evaluate government

performance.
Investors and persons giving grants such as donors.
7.4 FUND ACCOUNTING

A fund is dened as a distinct accounting entity with a self balancing set of accounts which has
objectives set out to be met. In commercial accounting, a fund may be equated to a specic
division of the company; that division being charged with specic responsibilities or given specic
objectives, such as would be the case for a production department.
In government accounting the emphasis is based on the fund as a part of an entity contributing
to the overall objectives of the organisation. For this reason, a fund account will be set to receive
cash inows, record expenditures, show assets, as well as liabilities. An example would be a
library fund A/C.
An organisation may be composed of various fund entities; each fund will have its own books of
account as if it was completely independent from the whole organisation.
Accounting Theory
Accounting theory refers to the nancial reporting that may be adopted by the organisation. It is
necessary to note that fund accounting is the representation of the entity accounting theory as
used in commercial accounting. This means a fund will be considered a distinctive unit separate
383
from the people related to it. The nancial statements prepared for each fund will be for use of
those who are interested in the fund. The parallel in commercial accounting is that a company is
a separate entity from shareholders, directors, debtors and creditors. The nancial statements
of the company are prepared to be used by such people.
In public sector accounting, the main accounting concepts used are that of stewardship and
accountability. Under the stewardship accounting concept, the steward is charged with the
responsibility of making sure that the assets of an organisation are not misappropriated. Under
accountability, the head of department is accountable for his actions regarding the management
of the organisation as whole.
Financial Accounting Techniques
Budgetary Accounting
2)
Cash Accounting
3)
Accruals Accounting
4)
Commitment Accounting (encumbrances)
5)
Fund Accounting
1) Budgetary Accounting
Refers to the preparation of operating accounts in form of budgets. A budget is a management
plan that has been transformed into gures necessary to evaluate the achievement of the
organisations objectives.
Under budgetary accounting, the concept is based on the forecasted cash ows, and operations
must be limited to the budget estimates. The organisation cannot overspend above budget
restrictions without Parliamentary approval.
Budgetary accounting therefore, aims at achieving the following:

(a)
Ensure efciency of managers.
(b)
Communicate the objectives of the organisation to the employees
(c)
Provide controls
(d)
Provide a yardstick for measuring performance of employees.
S T U D Y
1)
T E X T
Public sector organisations may adopt different accounting techniques; the most important listed
are below:
384
2) Cash Accounting
Under this system only cash inows and outows are recognised and recorded. The system does
not recognise any revenue or expenditure that has not been received or paid. (i.e. accrued)
3) Accrual Accounting
FAST FORWARD: The accruals concept states that revenues and costs are recognised as they
are earned and incurred.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Most of the organisations in the private sector prefer this method. However, under public
sector accounting, both cash and accrual accounting can be used by different entities or kinds
of organisations; e.g. if a part of an organisation is charged with the responsibility of running
activities on the same basis as commercial organisations, such an entity may adopt accrual
accounting irrespective of the accounting techniques adopted by the main organisation.
4) Commitment Accounting
This accounting system recognises transactions when the organisation is committed to them. It
means the transaction is not recognised when cash is paid or received, nor when an invoice is
received or issued, but at an early stage where orders are received and placed. This accounting
method is meant to ensure that government units do not overspend because transactions will
only be entered into after checking committed balances.
5) Special funds
Some specic departments of a governmental organisation may adopt special fund accounting
according to the set objectives they have to meet. The following are some common special funds
to governmental organisations:
(a)
Trust funds: These are those funds where the government receives money in the
capacity of a trustee. They are also referred to as Agency funds, or Fiduciary funds.
Examples of such funds include NSSF and NHIF. The governmental organisation does
not have absolute title to the assets held; there are statutory restrictions upon their
use.
(b) Sinking funds: These are funds created to account for the accumulation of resources
for retiring term bonds at their maturity. Thus their main purpose is the repayment of
public debts. Such funds are set up through the approval by the Parliament, and some
appropriation may be made from these funds. The amounts appropriated are invested
to earn interest; when public debt matures, the sinking fund is used to redeem this
debt.
(c)
385
Working capital funds/Revolving funds: They are also known as internal service
funds and enterprise funds. They are used to account for services provided to other
departments (internal departments internal service funds, external services =
Enterprise funds) for a fee usually cost-reimbursement basis. They are set up through
the approval of Parliament to have the necessary resources for achieving their specic
objectives.
(d) Capital Project Funds: This provides resources for the completion of some specic
capital projects. The main sources of nancing such funds include proceeds from
treasury bonds, grants, and transfers from other ministries and funds. This category
excludes any capital projects under trust funds or revolving funds.
(e)
Specic Revenue funds or special funds: Funds of this class are created and
operated to account for revenue designated by law for specic purpose. An example of
this would be library services.
(f)
General funds: These are funds established to account for resources devoted to
nancing the general services which the governmental units perform for its citizens.
These include general administration, protection of life and property etc.
Recurrent expenditure income;

Development expenditure income.
Recurrent expenditure income can be equated to operating income in nancial accounting.

Development expenditure income can be equated to capital income in commercial accounting.
7.5 CONSOLIDATED FUND

FAST FORWARD: All Revenues for the government are recorded into a fund known as a
consolidated fund. The consolidated fund account is kept by the treasury under the ministry of
nance, and all revenues and grants received by the Government are paid into this account.
No money can be withdrawn from this account without approval of Parliament, i.e. Parliament
is the sole signatory to this account. This is necessary to ensure that all government incomes
are used to carry out activities of public interest; and interests are represented in such decision
making through the MPs. It is also important to note that each governmental unit may be in a
position to raise funds from its local activities (e.g. Ministry of Education Fees from students,
Ministry of Health Hospital fees).
Money realised in this manner is called Appropriations-In-Aid (A-I-A). Each governmental unit
is expected to make a budget of its estimated Appropriation-In-Aid and submit the budget to
Parliament through the relevant ministry. Appropriations-In-Aid is supposed to be retained by the
government unit that generated it. It will be added to the appropriation (allocation by Parliament)
S T U D Y
1)
2)
T E X T
Note: In government accounting, sources of income can be divided into two, namely
386
to cover the expenditure of the governmental unit.

The following books of accounts are kept by each department (governmental unit) to record the
transactions of the organisation:
1. Cash Book
The cash book is that book in which all receipts and payments are recorded. Each accounting
unit will maintain a cash book. There are different types of receipts and payments in different
ministries, and the general point is that all receipts whether in cash or cheque will be recorded
in the cash book.
>>> Illustration
The following cash transactions (cash) took place for a government unit for the month of January
19X8
Sh.
S T U D Y
T E X T
02/01/119X8
Opening balance: Cash

Bank
4,000
25,000
02/01/19X8
Received cheque in respect of trading license
62,500
03/01/19X8
Paid Peter and Sons (cheque for goods supplied)
20,000
05/01/19X8
Cash received in respect of fees
2,500
05/01/19X8
Paid telephone charges (cheque)
8,700
06/01/19X8
Paid AB Ltd by cheque
06/01/19X8
Paid cash to James Burton
08/01/19X8
Received cheque for Licenses
09/01/19X8
Paid wages in cash
10/01/19X8
Kept a cash balance 10,000 and banked rest together

with all cheques in hand.
Required: Prepare a cash book for the governmental unit.
52,000
2,800
210,000
5,000
387
Solution
Balance
b/d
Trade
Licenses
Licenses
Cash
4,000
62,500
210,000
CASHBOOK
BANK Jan
Shs. 19X8
25,000
261,200
4,500
10
Jan
11
Jan
Balance
c/d
279,000
290,700
10,000
Balance
b/d
3 Jan
5 Jan
6 Jan
6 Jan
9 Jan
10
Jan
10
Jan
11Jan
CASH
Shs.
Peter &
Sons
Telephone
chg.
AB Ltd
James
Burton
Wages
Bank
Balance
c/d
Balance
b/d
2,800
5,000
261,200
10,000
BANK
Shs.
20,000
8,700
52,000
-__
279,000
290,700
4,500
Note: In the illustration, the government unit has a debit balance in the bank meaning they
have an overdrawn account with the bank. For control purposes and using the cash accounting
technique, such a situation is not allowed. The accounting ofcer should only release government
cheques when there is at least an equivalent amount in the bank, otherwise such cheques may
be dishonored.
2. Vote book
In commercial accounting, ledgers are a set of accounts; entries being recorded in such accounts.
Under public sector accounting, ledgers are substituted with an equivalent called the vote book.
In this book, various accounts are opened. These accounts relate to various expenditure heads
and sources of revenue. In the vote book, the vote number of any particular department or
ministry is used. This is an equivalent to a folio number under commercial accounting. The
common head numbers include:
110 Travelling and accommodation
120 Postal and telegram expenses
121 Telephone expenses
130 Ofcial entertainment
174 Stationery etc.
T E X T
2 Jan
2 Jan
8 Jan
10
Jan
CASH
Shs.
S T U D Y
Jan
19X8
388
These vote heads are necessary to speed up the processing and posting of various
expenditures.
Note: The vote book accounts are not to be balanced off as would be in the case of commercial
accounting (personal or real accounts) but is a statement to indicate the total amount committed
together with the payments that have been made against a given vote. It is presented generally
in the form of a T- Account with commitments indicated on the left hand side, and actual payments
and balances on the right thereof, i.e.
Commitments
Payment
Balance
>>> Illustration
T E X T
A I E (Authority to incur expenditure) No. 225 35.
S T U D Y
Vote head Ministry of Public Works
Transactions (Dec 19X6)
A I E (Authority to incur expenditure) K5,000 (or Ksh100,000)
1 Dec Ordered for iron sheets and cement from Ton & Co. for Sh.25,000; L.P.O. No. 5213
6 Dec Paid Sh.3,000 for lorry hire to transport cement; PV No. 357
Transactions (Jan 19X7)
10 Jan Paid Ton & Co. Sh.15, 000 being part payment for goods ordered through LPO No. 5213;
PV No. 358.
15 Jan Purchased goods from AB & Co. for Sh.5,000 (timber); PV No. 359
20 Jan Issued LPO No. 5214 to Patel & Sons for windows and doors for Sh.20,000.
25 Jan Part payment to Patel & Sons Sh.7,000; PV No. 360.
389
Solution
Commitment
Date
19X6
1
Dec
Tom
Co.
Ref
&
L P O
5213
Estimated
Cost
Shs.
25,000
19X7
20th
Payment
Date
19X6
6 Dec
th
PV
No.
Amount
Balance
357
Shs.
3,000
Shs.
100,000
97,000
358
359
360
15,000
5,000
7,000
82,000
77,000
70,000
19X7
Patel
Co.
&
L P O
5214
20,000
1 0
Jan
1 5
Jan
2 5
Jan
t h
t h
t h
Every governmental unit will prepare nancial statements to account for the money allocated to
them. The nancial statements differ according to the nature of the activities undertaken by the
governmental unit. However, the following types of accounts are common among government
units:
1)
Income and expenditure accounts;
2)
Statement of assets and liabilities,
3)
General Accounts of Vote (GAV)
4)
The exchequer account
5)
Paymaster General Account (PMG)
6)
Appropriation account
7)
Revenue Account
The techniques involved in preparation of the account shall be given by means of the following
worked examples:
S T U D Y
Annual Accounts
T E X T
On 25th January the balance on the vote book will indicate Sh.70,000 with a commitment of
Sh.23,000. (Tom = 10,000; Patel = 13,000) Any other commitment must take into account the
only expendable amount in the vote is Sh.70,000 23,000 = Sh47,000.
390
1) Income & Expenditure A/C

This is similar to income and expenditure accounts for non-prot making organisations. It is
however prepared by governmental units, which provide commercial services e.g. a staff canteen
or students welfare canteen (at governmental colleges).
>>> Illustration
S T U D Y
T E X T
The following account balances were extracted form the books of a pension fund for the year
ended 30th June 19X7:
Payments to members
Members contributions
Payment for management expenses
Interest on investment by fund
Fund Account
Cash balance (PMG)
Investment A/C
Dr (Shs)
500,000
Cr (Shs)
800,000
150,000
400,000
1,800,000
350,000
2,000,000
3,000,000
________
3,000,000
Requitred: Prepare an income and expenditure account for the year ended 30th June 19X7 and
a balance sheet as at that date.
Note: The fund is the amount set aside to meet the specic objectives of the governmental unit.
It is equal to the capital in a business in commercial accounting.
Solution
Income and Expenditure account for the year ended 30th June 19X7
Income
Members contribution
Interest income from investments
Payments to members
Expenses of management
Sh.000
500
150
(650)
550
Surplus
Balance Sheet as at 30 June 19X7

Assets
Investment A/C
Cash balance
Sh.000
800
400
1,200
Sh.000
Sh.000
2,000
_350
2,350
Fund Account B/F

Add Surplus
1,800
550
2,350
2,350
391
2) General Account of Vote (GAV)

During a budget speech, the Minister for Finance will give detailed appropriations (allocations) of
funds to different governmental units. Through an appropriation bill, The Parliament will approve
different estimates to individual governmental units. The amount approved to each governmental
unit by Parliament is then recorded into a particular account known as General Account of Vote
(GAV). This account therefore records funds allocated to various governmental units.
All incomes of the government are received and recorded into an account called the Exchequer
account. The total amount available in the exchequer represents the consolidated fund, i.e. the
consolidated fund operates an account called exchequer.
>>> Illustration
The approved estimates and actual details of the Ministry of Culture and Social Services for the
year 19X6/19X7 were as follows:
Estimated Appropriation-In-Aid
K 40,000
Drawings from exchequer
K530,000
Gross Expenditure
K480,000
Actual appropriations in aid
K30,000
Required: Prepare
a)
i) The General Account of Vote
ii) The exchequer account
iii) Paymaster General Account
b)
A statement of assets and liabilities as at 30-6-19X7
Solution
Note:
(i)
The exchequer account records the amount accrued by the consolidated fund to a
particular government unit
(ii)
The GAV account will record amounts approved by Parliament to a particular

governmental unit. However, the consolidated fund will issue different amounts for
a given period of time to a particular government unit subject to the maximum, which
was approved by Parliament. E.g. Parliament may approve K600,000 for a particular
governmental unit, but due to various reasons, the consolidated fund may issue a
different amount to the unit, but not exceeding K600,000.
T E X T
K640,000
S T U D Y
Gross estimated expenditure
392
(iii) The Paymaster General Account (PMG) is the cash account operated by the individual
governmental units. It records amounts so far withdrawn from the exchequer.
All money approved for a governmental unit is intended to meet a specic purpose. This means
each governmental unit will maintain an expenditure account, in which shall be recorded debits for
various expenses incurred. The corresponding credit is in the PMG account (cash account). The
expenditure account will then be closed to GAV. The difference between the amount approved by
Parliament and total expenditure will then represent a fund balance, that should be surrendered
back to the treasury at year end if not used.
GENERAL ACCOUNT OF VOTE
K
30 June 19X7
Expenditure
30 June 19X7
Balance c/d
480,000
1 July 19X6 Exchequer

30 June 19X7 Appropriation in Aid
190,000
670,000
K
640,000
30,000
670,000
1 July 19X7 General Account

for vote
K
640,000
30 June 19X7 PMG A/C

30 June 19X7 Balance c/f
_______
640,000
S T U D Y
T E X T
EXCHEQUER ACCOUNT
K
530,000
110,000
640,000
PAYMASTER GENERAL ACCOUNT

30 June 19X7 Exchequer
30 June 19X7Appropriation
In Aid
K
530,000
30 June 19X7 Expenditure

30 June 19X7 Balance c/d
30,000
560,000
K
480,000
80,000
560,000
EXPENDITURE ACCOUNT
30 June 19X7 PMG A/C
480,000
30 June 19X7 General Account of Vote 480,000
Notes:
1)
Appropriation-In-Aid (AIA) is the amount to be generated by the governmental unit from

its internal activities. It is subtracted from the gross estimate (gross vote) to arrive at
net estimate of (net vote) which is approved by Parliament to be released from the
consolidated fund. An A-I-A account may be maintained,
Where: When A-I-A is received from own operations:
Dr PMG Account
Cr A-I-A Account
At the year end:
Dr A-I-A Account
Cr GAV Account
2)
393
At the beginning of each year, each governmental unit has an estimated AppropriationIn-Aid which will guide them on the total amount expected to be generated internally.
Thus the sum of net estimates approved and actual appropriation in aid will constitute
the total funds allocated to each governmental unit. This sum constitutes the credit side
of the GAV account.
STATEMENT OF ASSETS AND LIABILITIES AS AT 30-6-19X7
Assets
Exchequer (Amount not yet drawn)
Paymaster General (PMG)
Funded by
General Account of Vote
K
110,000
80,000
K
______
190,000
190,000
Thus funds allocated have been adequately accounted for and the balance of K190,000 will be
surrendered back to the Treasury.
The following information relates to a governmental unit for the scal year 19X6/19X7.
Gross estimates:
K720,000
Appropriation-In-Aid estimated:
K90,000
Drawings from the exchequer
K450,000
Actual gross expenditure
K520000
Actual appropriation-in-aid
K120,000
Required:
a)
Prepare the following accounts:

i)
General Account of vote (GAV)
ii) Exchequer A/C
iii) PMG A/C
b)
Statement of assets and liabilities as at 30 June 19X7.
Solution:
For clear accounting procedure it is necessary to distinguish between the proportion of gross
estimate that will be generated internally and that proportion that is expected from the treasury
after Parliamentary approval.
S T U D Y
>>> Illustration:
T E X T
In this case, the government unit will surrender the Sh80,000 from the PMG, while the exchequer
will surrender Sh 110,000 on behalf of the ministry.
394
GENERAL ACCOUNT OF VOTE

30 June 19X7 Excess in A-I-A
K
30,000
52,000
20,000
1 July 19X6Exchequer A/C

30 June 19X7 A-I-A
750,000
K
630,000
120,000
______
750,000
Note: To simplify accounting entries, the A-I-A is recorded in the GAV at the end of the scal
year. This will enable us to determine whether there was a shortfall (deciency) in A-I-A from the
expected amount, or there was a surplus.
EXCESS APPROPRIATION-IN-AID
K
30,000
30 June 19X7 GAV A/C
K
30,000
S T U D Y
T E X T
EXCHEQUER ACCOUNT
K
1 July 19X6 General Account of vote 630,000
______
630,000
30 June 19X7 PMG

K
450,000
180,000
630,000
PMG ACCOUNT
30 June 19X7 Exchequer A/C
30 June 19X7 A-I-A
K
450,000
120,000
570,000
30 June 19X7 Exchequer A/C

30 June 19X7 Balance
K
520,000
50,000
570,000
APPROPRIATION IN AID ACCOUNT

K
30 June 19X7 GAV
120,000
K
30 June 19X7 PMG
120,000
Note: amounts to be surrendered back to the exchequer will be 230,000. The governmental
unit is also expected to remit any A-I-A to the consolidated fund This is more apparent in a
statement of appropriation. (also known as appropriation A/C).
STATEMENT OF ASSETS AND LIABILITIES AS AT 30th June 19X7
Assets
Exchequer A/C
Paymaster General (PMG)
K
180,000
50,000
K
______
230,000
Funded by
Excess in AIA
30,000
200,000
______
230,000
395
Appropriation Accounts
These may be drawn in two different ways (one being a slight variation from the other).
An example of an appropriation account would be as follows:
APPROPRITATION ACCOUNT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30TH JUNE 19X4 (K)
Net Appropriation
80,000
8,000
22,000
(2,000)
Actual
Expenditure
88,000
15,000
5,000
90,000
13,000
4,500
20,000
6,000
50,000
23,000
6,500
40,000
184,000
(15,000)
177,000
(12,000)
169,000
165,000
Amount
underspent
Amount
overspent
2,000
2,000
500
10,000
3,000
500
_____
12,500
5,500
Note:
1)
Net estimate exceeds actual expenditure by K4,000. This indicates that there was no
over expenditure for the governmental unit as a whole. However, there are some overexpenditures on individual items; but since these are not signicant, no explanations
are required by the accounting ofcer.
2)
The gross estimates and gross actual expenditures are recorded before taking into
account the effect of A-I-A. In this case gross expenditure estimate exceeds the gross
actual expenditure by K7,000. But in order to determine the surplus to be returned
to the treasury or over-expenditure, we must take into account the effects of either
surplus AIA or deciency of AIA. In this case, there is a shortage in AIA of K3,000.
The deciency must be netted off from the surplus of approved estimates and actual
expenditure:
Surplus of estimates over actual expenditure

Less deciency in A-I-A
Expendable balance
K7,000
(3,000)
K4,000
Therefore, there is no net over-expenditure by the ministry.
T E X T
Personal emoluments:
- original estimate
- supplementary
estimate
House allowance
Passage and Leave
Travelling expenses:
- original estimate
- supplementary
estimate
Electricity & Water
Purchase of plant &
mach.
Gross Appropriation
Appropriation-In-Aid
Approved estimate
S T U D Y
Details
396
>>> Illustration
The approved estimates and actual expenditure details of the Ministry of Agriculture for the year
19X7/19X8 were as follows:
CODE
S T U D Y
T E X T
000
050
080
100
110
120
190
196
230
620
Details
Approved
estimates K
Actual
Expenditure K
123280
19,550
41,040
1,334
16,100
4,600
17,480
5,980
21,000
1,000
97,520
14,260
667
1,656
13,593
3,312
16,882
4,738
39,800
5,560
Personal emoluments
House Allowance
Passage and Leave
Travelling and accommodation
Transport and maintenance
Postal and Telecom expenses
Miscellaneous charges
Training expenses
Purchase of equipment
AIA (Realised income)
The ministry made fair equal withdrawals from the exchequer in July 19X7, October 19X7,
January 19X8 and May 19X8. In total, the ministry had drawn K200,000 by the year-end.
Required:
a)
b)
c)
d)
The general account of vote

The exchequer account
The PMG account
Statement of assets and liabilities as at 30th June 19X8.
Solution
It would help if an appropriation account is drawn up. In this illustration it is drawn in a slightly
varied version:
CODE
Details
000
050
080
100
110
120
190
196
230
Personal emoluments
House Allowance
Passage and Leave
Travelling and
accommodation
Transport and
maintenance
Postal and Telecom
expenses
Miscellaneous charges
Training expenses
Purchase of equipment
Gross Appropriation
A-I-A
620
Net Appropriation
Approved
Estimates
K
123280
19,550
41,040
1,334
16,100
4,600
17,480
5,980
21,000
Actual
Expenditure
K
97,520
14,260
667
1,656
13,593
3,312
16,882
4,738
39,800
Over/Under
Expenditure
K
25,760
5,290
40,373
(322)
2,507
1,258
598
1,242
(18,800)
250,364
(1,000)
192,428
(5,560)
249,364
186,868
57,936
4,560
62,496
397
GAV ACCOUNT
30 June 19X8 Excess AI A A/C
30 June 19X8 Expenditure A/c
K
4,500
192,428
57,936
1 July 19X7 Exchequer A/c

30 June 19X8 A I A A/C
254,924
K
249,364
5,560
_______
254,924
Excess Appropriation in Aid Account

K
4,560
4,560
Exchequer Account
249,364
K
200,000
49,364
249,364
PMG Account
30 June 19X8 Exchequer (Total)
30 June 19X8 A I A A/C
K
200,000
5,560
205,560
30 June 19X8 PMG (Total)

K
192,428
13,132
205,560
Expenditure
30 June 19X8 PMG
K
192,428
K
192,428
Appropriation-In-aid Account
30 June 19X8 GAV
K
5,560
30 June 19X8 PMG
STATEMENT OF ASSETS AND LIABILITIES AS AT 30 JUNE 19X8

Assets
Exchequer A/C
Paymaster General A/C
K
49,364
13,132
Funded by
Excess appropriation-in-aid
57,936
4,560
K
_____
62,496
______
62,496
K
5,560
T E X T
K
249,364
GAV A/C
S T U D Y
1 July 19X7
398
Revenue Accounts
A revenue account records only the estimated revenue and actual revenue from each particular
revenue source for the governmental unit. The difference between the two, if signicant must
be explained by the accounting ofcer. Alternatively the signicant difference between the two
can be used to correct future estimations by the governmental unit. It could also represent new
factors emerging during the year which were not taken into account during the previous budget.
>>> Illustration
From the following data, prepare a statement of revenue for the year ended 30th June 19X7.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Estimated Revenue
Actual Receipts
Renting building and equipment
K850,000
K870,000
Fee for trading licenses
K430,000
K400,000
Fees for import/export licenses
K470,000
K480,000
Other receipts
K235,000
K210,000
The following additional details are available:(i)

(ii)
Balance on hand on 30th June 19X6

Balance on hand on 30th June 19X7
K247,000
K160,000
REVENUE A/C FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30TH JUNE 19X7

Details
Balance b/d
(30-June-19X6)
Rent for building/
machinery
Fees for trading
licenses
Fees for import/export
Others
Estimate
850
430
470
235
Actual
247
870
400
480
210
1,985
1,960
2,207
Details
Payment to Treasury
Balance c/f (30.6.19X7)
2,047
160
2,207
Note:
There are no serious differences between estimate and actual receipts; hence no explanation is
required by the accounting ofcer.
399
>>> Illustration:
The following are extracts from the trial balance for revenue head No. 180 240, Airport revenue
collection for the year ended 30th June 19X8:
Code
Details
Dr()
630
Renting building and equipment
631
Rent from land
651
Aviation landing fee
3,542,221
652
Airport passenger tax
3,991,029
670
Other airport receipts
798,144
Payment of revenue to exchequer
13,288,687
Cr ()
807,456
3,796,205
The following additional details are made available:

Balance in hand at 30th June 19X7 2,568,242.
Estimated receipts for the year:
AMOUNT
630
1,000,000
631
2,500,000
651
3,000,000
652
3,600,000
670
1,100,000
T E X T
CODE
S T U D Y
i)
ii)
Required:
a)
b)
A statement of revenue for the year ended 30th June 19X6

Give appropriate footnotes for material differences between estimates and the actual
receipts.
Solution
REVENUE ACCOUNT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30TH JUNE 19X8
Details
Estimate
Actual
Balance b/d (30-June-19X7)

Renting building/machinery
Rent for land
Aviation landing fees
Airport passenger tax
Other airport receipts
1,000,000
2,500,000
3,000,000
3,600,000
1,100,000
11,200,000
2,568,242
807,456
3,796,205
3,542,221
3,991,029
798,144
12,935,055
15,503,297
Details
Payment to
Treasury
Balance c/f
30.6.19X8
K
13,288,687
2,214,610
160
_________
15,503,297
Note: There may have been a signicant increase in the volume of business at the airport. It is
possible that a new airline (previously not operational to Kenya) has decided to make Kenya one
of its destinations/stopovers. It is also possible that some land and buildings have been sold,
thus leading to a fall in rental income.
400
7.6 GENERAL AND SPECIAL FUNDS ACCOUNTS

In carrying out its functions to meet both economic and political needs of the country, the
government sets out various funds that are charged with specic governmental units, ministries
or departments that will oversee the operations of the fund.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Note: A fund is an entity with self-balancing books to meet specied objectives. For proper
accounting, different funds are named in accordance with the activities they are supposed to
undertake. For example, the general fund of a governmental unit is the entity that accounts for
all resources and assets used for nancing the general administration of the unit. The general
administration of the unit is for traditional services provided to the people, such as security,
health, education and eradication of poverty.
In some cases, the government may set aside funds to meet special duties or activities which
are different from ordinary traditional services being offered to the people. This means whenever
a tax or other revenue source is authorised by Parliament to be used for a specied purpose,
then a governmental unit avails itself of that source, and may create what is known as a Special
Revenue Fund.
The purpose of a special revenue fund is to show that the revenue from such sources was used
for a specic purpose only; and the governmental unit will then operate what is known as a
special fund account to record the resources and liabilities for such an entity.
The general fund and special funds are commonly known as revenue funds of a governmental
unit. Thus, where there is no specication, the revenue fund of a governmental unit may refer
either to the general fund or the special fund.
It is important to note that the general fund as well as special revenue fund only record current
assets and current liabilities of the governmental unit. Long term assets as well as long term
liabilities for governmental units are covered under different funds e.g. property funds. The
difference between current assets and current liabilities of a general or special fund constitute
what is known as fund equity. Fund equity would thus be an equivalent of net working capital
in commercial accounting. However from the governmental accounting point of view, fund equity
represents the fund balance that has not been directly used or committed. The fund equity can
further be divided into two parts:
i)
Fund balance
ii)
Reserves
The reserves part of a fund equity represents funds that have been committed but the liability not
yet incurred. For example, where a contract has been entered into, and the contractor has been
issued with an LPO, but he has not yet supplied or provided the service; the amount committed
to the LPO will be represented in form of a reserve to indicate that it is fund balance which cannot
be distributed/utilised. The other distributable amounts are listed under fund balance.
401
Budgetary Accounting
All funds set up by the government to meet different objectives will have a budget as a source of
control with regard to estimated revenue as well as estimated expenditure (appropriations). In
order to record transactions of a governmental unit, the following general ledger control accounts
are recommended:
i)
ii)
iii)
Estimated revenue A/C

Appropriation A/C
Encumbrances A/C
These three accounts are general ledger control accounts which must be supported by the
relevant subsidiary accounts as illustrated below:
>>> Illustration
T E X T
The expected revenue source of a particular governmental unit was as shown below:
Taxes
882,500
Licenses and permits
125,500
Intergovernmental revenues
200,000
Charges for services rendered
90,000
Fines and forfeitures
32,500
Miscellaneous revenues
19,500
Total Expected Revenue
S T U D Y
Revenue Ledger
1,350,000
The Expected revenue would be recorded in the general ledger control accounts as 1,350,000;
being the sum of individual expected revenue. The journal entry to record this transaction is:
Estimated Revenue
Fund balance
To record approved revenue to a governmental unit
Dr
1,350,000
Cr
1,350,000
Subsidiary ledgers will however record details of individual sources of revenue.
Note: Estimated revenues are potential assets for the non-governmental organisation and are
comparable to debtors in commercial accounting; hence the debit entry in the estimated revenue
control account. On the other hand, appropriations are potential liabilities and are recorded
through credit entries in the appropriations control A/C.
402
Estimated revenues represent what the government unit expects from various sources. At the
end of year, the actual revenue realised may be different from the estimated revenue. The
revenue realised is recorded through the following entries:
Debit Cash
Credit Revenue A/c (This also acts as a control A/C)
The revenue account is then closed to estimated revenue account to indicate whether estimated
revenue exceeds actual revenue or vice versa.
Expenditure Account
This account records actual liability incurred as opposed to the appropriation account which
records estimated or potential liability. The corresponding credit is in the individual liability
accounts, e.g.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Expenditure Account
Wages payable
Postage payable
60,000
14,000
74,000
Appropriations A/C
74,000
74,000
The total expenditures incurred will then be compared with appropriations (or estimated
expenditure). For this reason, the expenditure account is closed to appropriations A/C.
Wages Payable
Cash
60,000
Expenditure A/C
60,000
Postage payable
Cash
14,000
Expenditure A/C
14,000
Encumbrances
Encumbrances record the commitments that have been entered into but services are yet to be
received. The purpose of recording the commitments is to ensure that the budgeted appropriations
are not exceeded. In this way, accounting ofcers may guard against over expenditure.
E.g. assume that approved estimates for a governmental unit was Sh1,000,000, and so far during
the year Sh800,000 had already been incurred. Also assume that LPOs amounting to Sh120,000
have been committed to vote books. This therefore means that out of the Sh1,000,000, only
Sh80,000 is available either to be retained to the treasury or to be expended by the governmental
unit.
403
The commitments are recorded in:

i)
ii)
Encumbrances accounts;
Fund balance reserved for encumbrances A/C
In the above example, the encumbrances of Sh.120,000 will be recorded as follows:

Encumbrance
Fund balance reserved...
Sh
120,000
Sh
Fund balance reserved for encumbrance

Encumbrance
Sh
120,000
Sh
120,000
Fund balance reserved
Sh
120,000

Encumbrance
Sh
120,000
Encumbrance
Sh
120,000
Expenditure A/C
Pool Chlorine
120,000
Appropriations
120,000
Pool Chlorine A/C

Cash
Sh
120,000
Expenditure
Sh
120,000
Sometimes there is an overlap between the end of the accounting period and when the
commitments are fullled. Assume that the governmental unit accounting period ends on 30th
June every year, and a commitment entered into during the month of April for Sh250,000 have
been partially services to the tune of Sh210,000 at the end of the accounting period to 30th June
19X7. From the point when commitment was entered into, the following entries shall be made:
S T U D Y
Encumbrance A/C
T E X T
After the expenditure has been incurred (commitments have been fullled). The above entries
are reserved. At the same time, the expenditure is fully recorded. Assume the encumbrance of
Sh120,000 was in respect of pool chlorine for training governmental unit forces; and the supplier
has already fullled the commitment and has been paid:
404
Encumbrance A/C
Sh
250,000
_____
250,000
Fund balance reserved

Fund balance
Sh
210,000
40,000
250,000
This account is not to be balanced but closed to fund A/C
Encumbrance
Balance c/d

Sh
210,000
Encumbrance
40,000
250,000
Balance b/d
Sh
250,000
______
250,000
40,000
The fund balance reserve for encumbrances will then appear in the statement of assets and
liabilities at the end of the period.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Comprehensive illustration
The city of Westcycle scal period ends on 30th June. The trial balance of the general fund as
on 1 July 19X7 was as follows:
Dr
Cash Balance
12, 600
Savings A/C
66,800
Property tax receivable
Cr
480,600
Accounts payable
7,300
Wages payable
4,450
Fund balance
548,250
560,000
560,000
less by 600
The operations for the year ended 30th June 19X8 are summarised as follows:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Estimated revenues: 2,400,000; Appropriations: 2,350,000

Revenues from property taxes levy: 1,925,500
Cash received from property taxes: 2,005,600; and other revenues: 485,700
Expenditures encumbered and evidenced by purchase orders: 1,760,000
Liquidation of encumbrances and vouchers prepared for purchase order billings:
1,755,000.
vi) Expenditure for payroll 602,000
vii) Cash disbursed for vouchers: 1,740,000
Cash for payment of wages: 598,000
Cash transferred to savings A/C: 150,000.
405
Open the ordinary T accounts for the accounts appearing in the trial balance and enter
the balances as at 1 July 19X7.
b)
Open T accounts for: Fund balance reserves for encumbrances

: Estimated revenues
: Revenues
: Appropriations
: Expenditure
: Encumbrances
c)
Prepare journal entries to post the foregoing summarised operations.
d)
Post the entries recorded in (c) above into the accounts.
e)
Record appropriate entries to dwell the accounts as at 30th June 19X8.
f)
Prepare a balance sheet as at 30th June 19X8.

Cash
Balance b/d
Property tax
Other revenue
12,600
2,005,600
485,700
________
2,503,900
Accounts payable
Wages
Savings
Balance c/d
174,000
598,000
150,000
15,900
2,503,900
Savings
Balance b/d
Cash
Sh
66,800
150,000
216,800
Sh
Balance c/d
216,800
216,800
Fund Balances
Appropriations
Encumbrance
Appropriation
Balance c/d
Sh
2,350,000
5,000
7,000
597,450
Sh
Balance b/d
548,250
Estimated revenue
2,400,000
Estimated revenue
11,200
________
2,959,450
2,959,450
Balance b/d
597,450
S T U D Y
a)
T E X T
Required:
406
Fund Balance reserved for encumbrances

Encumbrances
Balance c/d
Sh
1,755,000
5,000
1,760,000
Encumbrances
Balance b/d
Sh
1,760,000
________
1,760,000
5,000
Estimated revenue
Fund balance
Fund balance
Sh
2,400,000
11,200
2,411,200
Revenue
Sh
2,411,200
________
2,411,200
Property taxes
S T U D Y
T E X T
Balance b/d
Revenue A/C
Balance b/d
Sh
480,600
1,925,500
2,406,100
Cash
Balance c/d
Sh
2,005,600
400,500
2,406,100
405,500
Wages payable
Cash
Balance c/d
Sh
598,000
8,450
606,450
Balance b/d
Expenditure
Sh
4,450
602.000
606,450
Balance b/d
8,450
Accounts payable
Cash
Balance c/d
Sh
1,740,000
22,300
1,762,300
Balance b/d
Expenditure
Sh
7,300
1,755,000
1,762,300
Balance b/d
22,300
Encumbrances
Fund reserved
Sh
1,760,000
________
Fund reserved
Fund balance
1,760,000
Sh
1,755,000
5,000
1,760,000
Appropriations
Expenditure A/C
Sh
2,357,000
________
2,357,000
Fund balance
Fund balance
Sh
2,350,000
7,000
2,357,000
407
Revenue A/C
Sh
Estimated revenue
2,411,200
Sh
1,925,500
485,700
Property tax
Other revenue
2,411,200
2,411,200
Expenditure A/C
Wages payable
Accounts payable
Sh
602,000
1,755,000
Sh
Appropriations
2,357,000
2,357,000
2,357,000
Revenue account
485,700
The Journal
Sh
485,700
Cash
Dr (Sh)
Estimated Revenue A/C

Fund Balance A/C
Fund Balance A/c
Appropriations A/C
2,400,000
Property Taxes receivable A/C

Revenue A/C
Cash
Property taxes receivable A/C
1,925,500
2,400,000
2,350,000
2,350,000
1,925,500
2,005,600
2,005,600
Cash
485,700
Other Revenue A/C

Other revenue A/c
Revenue A/C
485,700
Encumbrances
Fund balance reserved for encumbrances
Encumbrances
Fund balance
Encumbrances
Expenditure A/C
Wages Payable
Cr (Sh)
485,700
485,700
1,760,000
1,760,000
1,755,000
1,755,000
5,000
5,000
602,000
602,000
S T U D Y
Sh
T E X T
Other revenue
408
Wages payable
Accounts payable
Savings bank A/C
Cash
598,000
1,740,000
150,000
Expenditure A/C
Accounts payable
Revenue A/C
Estimated Revenue A/C
Estimated Revenue
Fund Balance
1,755,000
Appropriations A/C
Expenditure
Fund Balance
Appropriations
2,357,000
2,488,000
2,411,200
1,755,000
2,411,200
11,200
11,200
2,357,000
7,000
7,000
Balance Sheet as at 30th June 10X8
S T U D Y
T E X T
Assets
Cash
Savings A/C
Property taxes receivable
Sh
15,900
216,800
400,500
_______
Liabilities
Wages payable
Accounts payable
Fund Balance
Sh
8,450
22,300
597,450
Reserve for encumbrances
5,000
633,200
633,200
>>> Illustration
The following data relates to the city of Kababwe:

Trial Balance As At 1 7 19x7
Cash
Savings A/C
Investment in government Treasury Bills
Accounts payable
Wages payable
Fund Balances
Dr (Shs)
242,500
250,000
185,000
350,000
________
1,027,500
Cr (Shs)
162,600
30,000
834,900
1,027,500
The transactions completed during the year for the general fund are summarised and recorded
as follows for the year ended 30 June 19X8.
Sh
Estimated Revenue A/c

Appropriations
Fund Balance
b) Property Taxes receivable
Revenue
c) Cash
Property taxes receivable A/C
Other revenue
d) Expenditure
Wages payable
Encumbrances
Fund balance reserved for
encumbrances
Encumbrances
Expenditure
Accounts payable
Accounts payable
Wages payable
Cash
9,100,000
9,070,000
30,000
9,105,000
6,470,000
2,635,000
3,280,000
3,280,000
5,800,000
5,800,000
5,785,000
5,785,000
5,785,000
5,785,000
5,800,000
3,270,000
9,100,000
38,000
Estimated Revenue
Fund balances
9,070,000
Appropriations
9,065,000
5,000
Expenditure
Fund Balance
15,000
Fund balance
15,000
Encumbrances
Required:
a)
b)
c)
Open appropriate accounts, post entries therein, and balance them at the year end
Draw a trial balance as at 30.6.19X8
Prepare a statement of assets and liabilities.
Solution
Cash A/C
Balance b/d
Property taxes
Other revenue
Sh
242,500
6,470,000
2,635,000
9,347,500
Accounts payable
Wages payable
Balance c/d
Sh
5,800,000
3,270,000
277,500
9,347,500
T E X T
a)
Sh
S T U D Y
JOURNAL
409
410

Balance b/d
Revenue
Sh.
185,000
6,500,000
6,685,000
Cash
Balance c/d
Sh.
6,470,000
215,000
6,685,000
Wages payable
Cash
Balance c/d
Sh.
3,270,000
40,000
3,310,000
Balance b/d
Expenditure
Sh.
4,450
602.000
3,310,000
Revenue A/C
Sh.
9,135,000
________
9,135,000
Property tax
Other revenue Cash
Sh.
6,500,000
2,635,000
9,135,000
Encumbrances
Fund reserved
S T U D Y
T E X T
Estimated revenue
Sh.
5,800,000
________
5,800,000
Fund reserved
Fund balance
Sh.
5,785,000
15,000
5,800,000
Fund reserved for encumbrances

Encumbrances
Balance c/d
Sh.
5,785,000
15,000
5,800,000
Encumbrances
Sh.
5,800,000
________
5,800,000
Savings A/C
Balance b/d
Sh.
250,000
Balance c/d
Sh.
250,000
Treasury Bills A/C

Balance b/d
Sh.
350,000
Balance c/d
Sh.
350,000
Accounts payable
Cash
Balance c/d
Sh.
5,800,000
147,600
5,947,600
Balance b/d
Expenditure
Sh.
162,600
5,785,000
5,947,600
4 11
Fund Balances
Sh.
Appropriations
Encumbrance
Appropriation
Balance c/d
9,070,000
5,000
7,000
889,450
Sh.
Balance b/d
Estimated revenue
Estimated revenue
Appropriations
834,900
9,100,000
35,000
5,000
9,974,900
9,974,900
Expenditure A/C
Wages payable
Accounts payable
Sh.
3,280,000
5,785,000
9,065,000
Sh.
Appropriations
9,065,000
9,065,000
Appropriations
Fund balance
9,070,000
________
9,070,000

Fund balance
Fund balance
Sh.
9,100,000
35,000
9,135,000
Trial Balance As At 30 6 19x8

Cash
Savings A/C
Treasury Bills
Accounts payable
Wages payable
Fund balance
Sh.
9,135,000
________
9,135,000
Revenue
Dr
Cr
277,500
250,000
350,000
215,000
________
147,600
40,000
15,000
889,900
1,092,500
1,092,500
T E X T
Sh.
S T U D Y
Expenditure A/C
Fund balance
Sh.
9,065,000
5,000
9,070,000
412
Balance Sheet as at 30 6 19X8

ASSETS
Cash
Savings A/C
Treasury Bills
Shs.
Shs.
LIABILITIES
Wages payable
Accounts payable
40,000
147,600
FUND EQUITY
Unreserved fund balance
Shs.
277,500
250,000
350,000
215,000
1,092,500
(187,600)
904,900
889,900
15,000
904,900
S T U D Y
T E X T
>>> Illustration:
The citys general fund trial balance as at 1 June 19X7 is as follows:

Cash
Savings A/C
Investment in treasury bills
Accounts payable
Wages payable
Fund balance
Dr
225,000
80,000
122,500
100,000
Cr
52,700
19,200
455,600
527,500
527,500
The following data summarises operations for the current scal year that ends operations on
30 6 19X8:
a) Estimated: Revenues
: Appropriations
2,180,000
2,115,000
b) Revenue from property tax levy

Cash received from property taxes
Other revenues received
1,450,000
1,460,000
760,000
c) Expenditure on payroll
Expenditure encumbered and evidenced by LPOs
Liquidation of encumbrance vouchers for order billings
1,150,000
1,210,000
1,050,000
413
d) Cash disbursed: for vouchers

: for payment of wages
: for savings A/C
1,065,000
1,155,800
40,000
Cash A/C
Balance b/d
Property taxes
Other revenue
225,000
1,460,000
760,000
________
2,445,000
Accounts payable
Wages payable
Savings A/C
Balance c/d
1,065,000
1,155,800
40,000
184,200
2,445,000
Savings A/C
Balance c/d
120,000
120,000

Balance b/d
Revenue
122,500
1,450,000
1,572,500
Cash
Balance c/d
1,460,000
112,500
1,572,500
Accounts payable
Cash
Balance c/d
1,065,000
37,700
1,102,700
Balance b/d
Expenditure
52,700
1,050,000
1,102,700
Wages payable
Cash
Balance c/d
1,155,800
13,400
1,169,200
Balance b/d
Expenditure
19,200
1,150,000
1,169,200

Fund balance
Fund balance
2,180,000
30,000
2,210,000
Revenue A/C
________
2,210,000
2,210,000
T E X T
80,000
40,000
120,000
S T U D Y
Balance b/d
Cash
414
Revenue A/C
Estimated revenue
2,210,000
2,210,000
Property tax
Cash (other revenue)
1,450,000
760,000
2,210,000
Appropriations
Expenditure A/C
2,200,000
________
2,200,000
Fund balance
Fund balance
2,115,000
85,000
2,200,000
Encumbrances
S T U D Y
T E X T
Fund reserved
1,210,000
________
1,210,000
Fund reserved
Fund balance
1,050,000
160,000
1,210,000
Fund Balances
Appropriations
Appropriations
Encumbrance
Balance c/d
2,115,000
85,000
160,000
305,600
2,665,600
Balance b/d
Estimated revenue
Estimated revenue
455,600
2,180,000
30,000
________
2,665,600
Expenditure A/C
Wages payable
Accounts payable
1,150,000
1,050,000
2,200,000
Appropriations
2,200,000
2,200,000
Fund reserved for encumbrances

Encumbrances
Balance c/d
1,050,000
160,000
1,210,000
Encumbrances
1,210,000
________
1,210,000
415
BALANCE SHEET AS AT 30 6 19X8

Assets
Cash
Savings A/C
Treasury bills
Property Taxes receivable
Liabilities
Accounts payable
Wages payable
37,700
13,400
184,200
120,000
100,000
112,500
516,700
(51,100)
465,600
Financed by
Unreserved fund B/F
305,600
160,000
465,600
Once a particular activity is identied, a special fund account is created to ensure that revenues
allocated to this account are properly received and accounted for; and that expenditure from this
fund must be incurred in respect of activities associated with the special fund.
Once identied, the special operation necessitating creation of special fund will be treated exactly
in the same way as general fund accounting, i.e. estimated revenue, revenue, appropriations
and expenditure will be recorded in the same way as was done with the general fund. This also
applies to encumbrances.
Common examples of activities that require creation of special funds are:
1)
Construction and maintenance of streets, roads and bridges
2)
Libraries
3)
Grants received either from foreign countries or specic government bodies that are
geared towards specied operations.
Note: Grant accounting requires a slightly different approach in the sense that the grantor would
require the grantee to use the grants for a specied purpose; and in order to attain this objective,
grant accounting is on the basis of reimbursement. This means that grant revenue will only be
recognised as having been received after actual expenditure has been incurred.
It is only then the grantor will release the grant revenue. However, for any given period it is
possible for the grantee to account for any grant receivable by creating an account known as
deferred revenue.
S T U D Y
FAST FORWARD: Special fund accounts are created by governmental units to account for the
revenues and expenditures of specialised governmental unit operations, which are outside the
traditional services offered by the government.
T E X T
7.6.1 SPECIAL FUNDS
416
The deferred revenue account is a liability account showing that there is a potential revenue
which will only be recognised upon meeting certain conditions. Relevant entries are as follows:
Assume that Town X was given a grant of Sh.50,000,000 for construction of streets in a particular
region of the town. Upon receiving this information, the governmental unit will record the
transaction as follows:
Dr Grant receivable 50,000,000
Cr Deferred Revenue A/C
50,000,000
The basis of this entry is that the recognised accounting principles under special funds/general
funds in the modied accrual basis of accounting. Under this principle, both revenues and
expenditures are only recognised when the possibility of their realisation is certain.
Grants will normally be released under specied conditions are being met; and under modied
accrual basis of accounting such revenues cannot be recognised until the conditions required
have bee fullled.
S T U D Y
T E X T
In the above example, assume that 3 months later, Town X has identied the contractor and
given out contracts to construct streets in the required region to the tune of Sh.30,000,000.
When this is done, then the specied conditions have been met and the grant receivable revenue
is recognised. The following entries are then made:
1.
Dr Deferred Revenue
30,000,000
Cr Revenue Account
30,000,000
2.
Dr Expenditure
30,000,000
Cr Accounts payable
30,000,000
The second entry is required to enter the liability incurred when the contract is entered into while
the rst entry is now to recognise part of the grant revenue as receivable revenues under the
modied accrual basis. However, where the contract has been entered into but the work is not
yet performed, the encumbrance entries will be recorded instead of (2) above.
The concept of modied accrual basis of accounting is used in many other governmental units
funds that will require the revenue to be recognised when there is uncertainty regarding their
realisation.
One such fund is the capital projects fund. The capital projects fund is a fund created to cater/
account for revenues and resources that are associated with capital projects of a governmental
unit. The capital projects fund is an equivalent to capital budgeting/ nancing under commercial
accounting.
General funds and special funds are not normally used to nance capital projects. Major sources
of nancing capital projects of a governmental unit are as follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Long-term debt
Governmental treasury bonds
Grants from other governmental units or foreign governments.
Transfer from other funds within the government.
Gifts (from individuals or organisations) that are specied to be used in particular
projects.
417
Once the sources of funds have been identied and set aside, a special account called the capital
project fund account will be created to ensure proper utilisation of resources. The capital project
fund will then operate on the basis of modied accrual principles of accounting, whereby related
revenues and expenditures are recognised when there is a certainty of their occurrence.
Assume that a governmental unit gets authority to issue long-term bonds to nance a particular
capital project. Once authority is granted, the concerned governmental unit will only record the
requests acceptance, but the revenue arising thereon will only be recognised when bonds are
issued and sold to the public.
Under capital project funds, contracts will be entered into, and there may be a time lapse from
when the contract is granted and when services are received. Such activities will be recorded
as encumbrances in respect of the particular capital project. Actual expenditure incurred will be
recorded against account payable. At the conclusion of the capital project comparison will have
to be carried to between:
The difference between (1) and (2) represents the excess/decit of funds arising from a particular
project; and is transferred to the governmental units fund balance in the year in which the
project was completed, e.g. suppose a particular capital project was to last 5 years, the nancial
statements for the interim period (1 4) will not include the balance in the capital project fund
account. The surplus/decit will be transferred to fund account at the end of year 5. Such
transfers are known as equity transfers.
7.6.2 FUND ACCOUNTING

The accounts of a government unit are partitioned into segments called funds, and separate
nancial statements are prepared for each fund. A fund accounting system is a collection of
distinct entities or funds in which each fund reects nancial aspects of a particular segment
of the organisations activities. Separate funds are used to aggregate activities by functions
because of the diverse nature of the services offered and because it is necessary to comply with
legal provisions regarding activities of the government unit. Although funds are separate entities,
the structure of funds is such that a single transaction may occasion entries in the accounts of
several funds.
Denition
A fund is dened as a distinct accounting entity with a self-balancing set of accounts recording
cash and other nancial resources together with all related liabilities and residual equities or
balances and charges therein.
In other words, a fund is a segregated collection of both assets and equity accounts, together with
related revenue and expenditure accounts that describe a particular aspect of the organisation.
Each fund is established to account for specic activities or objectives in accordance with applicable
regulations and restrictions. Since each fund represents a distinct reporting entity, separate
T E X T
Sources of funds identied to nance the project;

Total expenditure including the encumbrance incurred.
S T U D Y
1)
2)
418
nancial statements are prepared for each fund, in addition combined nancial statements may
also be prepared.
Types of funds
The types of funds recommended for use by central and local governments are classied in three
categories:
(i) Government funds;
(ii) Proprietary funds; and
(iii) Fiduciary funds.
In the rst group, governmental funds, are:-
1. General Funds
S T U D Y
T E X T
These include general administration, protection of life and property, sanitation and similar broad
services. The general fund is sometimes described as the one use to account for all nancial
transactions not properly accounted for in another fund. Some activities, such as governmentally
supported liberties, are often of sufcient importance and magnitude to have a special fund;
when this is not true they become a function and responsibility of the general fund.
2. Special Revenue, or Special, Funds

Funds of this class are created and operated to account for revenue designated by law for a
particular purpose. For the specic purpose of function to which it is devoted, a special revenue
fund is much in the nature of a general fund. Some of the governmental services for which
special funds are frequently established are education, libraries, streets and bridges, welfare,
etc.
3. Capital Projects Funds

The receipt and disbursements of all nancial resources to be used for the acquisition of capital
facilities other than those nanced by special assessment funds, proprietary funds and trust
funds is accounted for by capital projects funds.
4. Debt Service Funds (Sinking funds)

A debt service fund is created to account for the resources devoted to the payment of interest and
principal on long-term general obligation debt other than that payable from special assessments
and that serviced by governmental enterprises.
419
5. Special Assessment Funds

Special assessment funds are designed to account for the construction, or purchase through
contract, of public improvements-streets, sidewalks and sewer systems, for example which
are nanced in whole or in part by special levies against property owners adjudged to receive
benets from the improvements materially in excess of benets received by the general body of
taxpayers, and for the maintenance and upkeep of such assets.
The following two fund types are referred to as proprietary funds:-
6. Internal Service Funds (Working capital/Revolving funds)

Internal service funds are established by governmental units as a means of providing services
to other funds or departments of the same unit, or to other governmental units, on a costreimbursement.
8. Fiduciary Funds (Trust/Agency funds) E.g. NSSF, NHIF

Fiduciary funds are used to account for transactions related to assets held by a governmental
unit as a trustee or agent. In most cases the governmental unit does not have absolute title to
the assets held; and in the remainder, they are owned with specic restrictions upon their use.
In addition to the eight generally recognised types of funds, governmental units employ two
self-balancing groups of accounts which are accounting entities, but which are not scal entities
and therefore, are not funds. These groups are called the general xed assets group and the
general long-term debt group. General xed assets are those not used exclusively by any
one fund, and general long-term debt is that long-term debt which is presently a liability of the
municipality as a whole and not of individual funds.
Although funds are employed extensively and effectively to promote the use of governmental
resources for their intended purposes, the practice can be carried to extremes. In the opinion
of many, accounting and reporting are facilitated through use of the minimum number of funds
consistent with legal and operating requirements.
S T U D Y
Internal service funds are established to provide services for governmental customers, but
enterprise funds are operated to provide electric, water, gas, or other services to the general
public. Except for ownership, they bear a close resemblance to investor-owned utility or other
service enterprises. Enterprise funds are also used to account for activities for which the
governmental body desires periodic computation of revenues earned, costs incurred, or net
income. The third category of funds recommended for use by state and local governmental units
is duciary funds.
T E X T
7. Enterprise Funds
420
Integration of budgetary Accounts

A second distinctive characteristic of governmental accounting resulting from the need to
demonstrate compliance with laws governing the sources of revenues available to governmental
units, and laws governing the utilisation of those revenues, is the formal recording of the legally
approved budget in the accounts of funds operated on annual basis.
Briey, Budgetary accounts are opened as of the beginning of each scal year and closed as
of the end of each scal year; therefore they have no balances at year-end. During the year,
however the budgetary accounts of a fund are integrated with its proprietary accounts. Proprietary
accounts, in the governmental sense, include accounts similar to the real and nominal groups
found in accounting for prot-seeking entities that is, asset, liability, net worth, revenue, and
expense (or expenditure) accounts.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The Basis of Accounting

Use of the accrual basis of accounting is considered appropriate for proprietary funds, nonexpendable trust funds, and pension trust funds of governmental units. Accrual accounting
means: 1.
That revenues should be recorded in the period in which the service is given, although
payment is received in a prior or subsequent period, and
2.
That expenses should be recorded in the period in which the benet is received, although
payment is made in a prior or subsequent period.
In business enterprise accounting, the accrual basis is employed to obtain a matching of costs
against the revenue owing from those costs, thereby producing a more useful income statement.
In governmental entities, however, even for those funds which do attempt to determine net income,
only certain trust funds have major interest in the largest possible amount of gain. Internal
service and enterprise funds are operated primarily for service; they make use of revenue
and expense accounts to promote efciency of operations and to guard against impairment of
ability to render the services desired. For these reasons, operating statements of proprietary
funds, non-expendable trust funds, and pension trust funds are called statements of revenue and
expenses, rather than income statements.
Funds of other types (general funds, special revenue funds, capital projects funds, debt service
funds, special assessments funds, and expendable trust funds) are not concerned with income
determination. These funds are concerned with matching expenditure of legal appropriations,
or legal authorisations, with revenues available to nance expenditures. Accordingly, the
governmental funds and expendable trust funds should use the modied accrual basis. The
modied accrual basis is dened as:
Revenues should be recognised in the accounting period in which they become available and
measurable. Expenditures should be recognised in the accounting period in which the fund
liability is incurred, if measurable, except for unmatured interest on general long-term debt and
on special assessment in-debtness secured by interest-bearing special assessment levies,
which should be recognised when due.
421
The modied accrual basis is accepted by the American Institute of Certied Public Accountants
as being consistent with generally accepted accounting principles. The AICPA recognises that it
is not practicable to account on an accrual basis for revenues generated on a self assessed basis
such as income taxes, gross receipts taxes, and sales taxes. For such taxes, determination of
the amount of revenue collectible is ordinarily made at the time of the collection, thus placing the
fund partially on the cash basis.
Number of Funds
Government units should establish and maintain those funds required by law and sound
nancial administration. Only the minimum number of funds consistent with legal and operating
requirements should be established, since unnecessary funds result in inexibility, undue
complexity, and inefcient nancial administration.
(A) Fund xed assets and general xed assets; and

(B) Fund long-term liabilities and general long-term debt
(i)
(ii)
Fixed assets related to specic proprietary funds or Trust Funds should be accounted for
through those funds. All other xed assets of a governmental unit should be accounted
for through the General Fixed Assets Accounts Group.
Long-term liabilities of proprietary funds, special assessment funds, and Trust Funds
should be accounted for through those funds.
All other unmatured general long-term liabilities of the governmental unit should be accounted for
through the General long-term debt account group.
Valuation of Fixed Assets

Fixed assets should be accounted for at cost or, if the cost is not practicably determinable, at
estimated cost. Donated xed assets should be recorded at their estimated fair value at the time
received.
Depreciation of Fixed Assets

(a)
Depreciation of general xed assets should be recorded in the accounts of governmental

funds. Depreciation of General Fixed Assets may be recorded in cost accounting
systems or calculated for cost nding analysis; and accumulated depreciation may be
recorded in the General Fixed Assets Account Group.
S T U D Y
A clear distinction should be made between;
T E X T
Accounting for Fixed Assets and Long-term Liabilities
422
(b)
Depreciation of xed assets accounted for in a proprietary fund should be recorded in

the accounts of that fund. Depreciation is also recognised in those Trust Funds where
expenses, net income and/or capital maintenance are measured.
Accrual Basis in Governmental Accounting
S T U D Y
T E X T
The modied accrual or accrual basis of accounting as appropriate should be utilised in measuring
nancial position and operating results.
(a)
Governmental fund revenues and expenditures should be recognised on the modied

accrual basis. Revenues should be recognised in the accounting period in which they
become available and measurable. Expenditures should be recognised in the accounting
period in which the fund liability is incurred, if measurable, except for unmatured interest
on general long-term debt and on special assessment indebtness secured by interestbearing special assessment levies, which should be recognised when due.
(b)
Proprietary fund revenues and expenses should be recognised on the accrual basis.
Revenues should be recognised in the accounting period in which they are earned
and become immeasurable; expenses should be recognised in the period incurred, if
measurable.
(c)
Fiduciary fund revenues and expenses or expenditures (as appropriate) should be

recognised on the basis consistent with funds accounting measurement objective. Non
expendable Trust and Pension Trust Funds should be accounted for on the accrual
basis; Expendable Trust Funds should be accounted for on the modied accrual basis.
Agency Fund assets and liabilities should be accounted for on the modied accrual
basis.
(d)
Transfer should be recognised in the accounting period in which the interfund receivable
and payable arise.
Budget and Budgetary Controls

Budgets are key elements of legislative control over government units. The executive branch of
a government unit proposes the budget, the legislative branch reviews, modies and enacts the
budgets and nally the executive branch implements the budget. The two basic classications
of budgets for governmental units are the same as for commercial enterprises;
(i)
Annual budgets which include the estimated revenues and Appropriations for a
specic scal year end;
(ii)
Capital budgets which are used to control the expenditures for construction projects
or other planned asset acquisitions.
The operations of the two proprietary funds (i.e. enterprise and internal service) are similar to
those of business enterprises. Consequently, annual budgets are used by these funds as a
managerial planning and control rather than a legislative control tool. Thus, annual budgets
of enterprise funds and internal service funds are NOT Recorded in ledger accounts by these
funds.
423
7.7 PUBLIC SECTOR ACCOUNTING

The Consolidated fund
FAST FORWARD: This is the main fund operated by the government. The Exchequer and Audit
Act states that all government revenue excluding income which a ministry is allowed to keep
a cover part of its own expenses (i.e. Appropriation-In- Aid) must be put into this fund, and no
money may be withdrawn from this fund without the authority of parliament.
The estimated total revenue of the government for the coming scal year (1st July 30th
June) and;
b)
The amount of money which each ministry expects to be allocated for its needs in that
scal year.
Thus the Appropriation Act for 1986/1987 Parliament authorised a gross sum f K95,002,150
for the Ministry of Health in respect of recurrent expenditure. This was described in the 1986/87
estimates of recurrent expenditure as follows:
Gross vote
K
95,002,150
Appropriations-In-Aid
(2,280,250)
Net Vote
K 92,721,900
The above description means that the Ministry was authorised to spend K92,721,900 being
supplied form the consolidated fund, and the remainder coming from the ministrys own
Appropriations-In-Aid. Examples of Appropriations-In-Aid within Ministry of Health would include
Hospital Boarding fees, X-ray fees, Lab fees etc.
Consolidated Fund Services

Certain government expenditure does not have to be voted every year by Parliament because
Parliament has already given its approval for the specic items concerned in the past. These items
are known as consolidated fund services, and include salaries and allowances of the Judiciary,
subscriptions to international organisations, such as OAU, UN etc., payment of pension to civil
servants, payments of national debt, etc.
S T U D Y
a)
T E X T
Each year, the Parliament votes on the appropriations bill, which sets out:
424
Sources of Government Revenue

Government revenue falls into two categories:
a)
b)
Recurrent
Development
The main sources of revenue are taxes, government borrowings (both domestic and foreign) and
grants.
An example of revenue estimates for the year 1986/87 is:
Recurrent Revenue Estimates
(K Millions)
Customs and excise duty
298.5
Income tax
370.0
Sales tax
/Value Added Tax
437.0
Export duty and other taxes
107.4
Miscellaneous (15 categories)
160.9
T E X T
The development revenue estimates were
S T U D Y
1,373.8
The annual estimates of expenditure for the scal year 1986/1987 were:
64.5
1,438.3
Recurrent expenditure
1,420.8
Development expenditure
292.6
1,713.4
There is a shortfall of K275.1m expected for the 1986/87 scal year. The gap is normally closed
by borrowing either from abroad or from the domestic market. Domestic borrowings usually take
the form of Treasury Bills.
Government Expenditure
As with revenue, expenditure falls into two categories
(i)
(ii)
Recurrent expenditure
Development expenditure
Recurrent Expenditure
This is expenditure on the day to day business of the government. In commercial accounting, it
could be called revenue expenditure.
425
Recurrent expenditure may be referred to as maintenance expenditure as it covers items

concerning the maintenance and operation of existing government services e.g. salaries to
government ofcers, electricity, water, telephone etc.
Development Expenditure
This is expenditure concerning new projects e.g. construction of hospitals, roads, bridges etc.
Government accounting is cash-based i.e. limits itself to transactions which have been
entered in the cash book. Thus government accounting has no personal accounts
for debtors/creditors, nor does it have accruals/prepayments. The only debtor-creditor
relationship arises in transactions between the government and the ministries, but not
third parties.
(2)
Government Accounting does not make any distinction between xed assets and a dayto-day expense. Both are treated as expenditure in the period in which they are paid
(properly classied as either recurrent or development expenditure) and hence there
are no xed asset accounts.
(3)
Since there are no xed asset accounts, there is no such thing as depreciation in
governmental accounting. The effect of passing xed assets through the usual
expenditure accounts is to write them off in the year of purchase.
The reason for this treatment of xed assets is that the government is not aiming at realizing
prots or quantifying losses, and hence does not need to divide the benets of capital expenditure
over the nancial years, nor to assess the loss of value in that asset in a given year.
There is also the difculty of trying to value assets such as Nairobi-Mombasa Road etc.
Accounting for and individual ministry

In accordance with the normal rules of double entry book-keeping cash received is debited to the
cash account (PMG) and the revenue account is credited. Thus in the books of Ministry X, the
receipt of Ksh5,000 will be recorded as:
Pay Master General A/C (Cash)
Revenue
5,000
A/C
Exchequer
5,000
S T U D Y
(1)
T E X T
Recording Government expenditure and revenues:
426
Revenue
Pay Master General
5,000
The paymaster General is the cash account of all ministries. Since all revenue (apart from
Appropriation-In-Aid) must be transferred immediately to the consolidated fund, funds received
will be paid over immediately to the Treasury which administers the consolidated fund on behalf
of the government. The Account within which the Treasury administers the consolidated fund is
called the Exchequer Account.
Exchequer A/C
Pay Master General
5,000
At the end of each nancial year, each ministry which has collected funds on behalf of the
government makes out a statement of revenue.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Expenditure
A ministry operates within the strict limits of the vote allocated to it by Parliament. The Accounting
system is merely used to reveal whether the ministry is keeping within the limits of voted
expenditure or not. The ministry has no authority to spend over parliamentary allocations, and
the authority to spend is only for the duration of the nancial year.
If a ministry under spends in a nancial year, or if there are any excess receipts, it may not retain
the available funds, but must surrender them to the exchequer to be reincorporated into the
consolidated fund and eventually re-distributed to the ministries as determined by Parliament.
If the ministry overspends, the only body empowered to ratify this overspending is Parliament. In
the subsequent nancial year the matter is presented in Parliament in the form of excess vote
and Parliament decides whether to approve the excess vote or to recover it from the ofcers
responsible for exceeding the vote.
The Pay Master General (PMG)

FAST FORWARD: The PMG is an ofce rather than an ofcer, and no person bears the title
Pay-Master General. The functions of the PMG are carried out by a section of the treasury.
The PMG is subordinate to the treasury and has the following functions: (which are regulated by
the Minister of Finance)
1)
It is the principal paying agent for the government and banker of all government
departments as regards voted expenditures and payments on consolidated fund
services.
2)
It arranges with the treasury at regular intervals (usually twice a month) for funds to be
withdrawn from the exchequer and put to the credit of the PMGs account in the Central
Bank of Kenya;
3)
It allows authorised signatures from these ministries to draw cheques on this account;
4)
It keeps a record of the above transaction and sends statements on a monthly basis to
the accounting ofcers (i.e. the Permanent Secretaries) of each accounting unit together
with supporting vouchers;
5)
It receiver monthly reconciliations of these statements from accounting ofcers;
6)
It supplies the treasury with the following:

a) A monthly statements and balance sheet
b) Annual statements and balance sheet.
427
It should be noted that the PMG is just a single account kept at the Central Bank of Kenya and
administered by the PMGs ofce in the treasury.
All ministries are authorised to draw on this single PMG account. The PMGs ofce is able to
analyse the different payments and receipts to allocate to various ministries, and to send them
monthly statements.
These are: (1)
Restricted analysis The government cash book makes an analysis between cash
and bank only, i.e. there is no further analysis into categories/classes of expenditure.
(2)
The usage of the cash column Cheques received are considered cash until they are
banked. The book-keeping entry is: -
Debit Cash (Cash column of cash book)

Credit Revenue (or Appropriation- In-Aid)
When a cheque is banked,
Debit Bank Column
Credit Cash Column
A dishonoured cheque can be recorded as:
Debit Cash Column
Credit Bank Column
Three cash books are maintained:
(i) Current revenue and expenditure cash book.
(ii) Development revenue and expenditure cash book
(iii) Deposits cash book.
S T U D Y
There are signicant differences between commercial accounting and government accounting as
regards operation of the cash book.
T E X T
Cash book
428
Vote books:The cash book and vote book from the bank-bone of the accounting system. The vote book is
essentially a book of prime entry, and does not form part of the double entry system. The totals
of the vote book are transferred to the ledger:
Debit Expenditure item (as per vote book)
Credit Cash book
Year-end Accounts: -
S T U D Y
T E X T
By 31 October each year, 4 months after the end of the nancial year, each ministry must present
its nal accounts to the Auditor General. These consist of
(a)
Statements of Revenue
(b)
Appropriation Accounts
(c)
Final Accounts These refer to the various funds administered by different ministries
and require an income and expenditure A/C as well as a statement of assets and
liabilities for each fund.
>>> Illustration 1:
Prepare a statement of revenue for the year ended 30.6.97 for Ministry of Domestic Affairs:
Exchange Control fees (Code 740) Estimated receipts
K300,000
Actual receipts
K3,460,968
Insurance premiums (Code 750)
- Estimated receipts
K130,000
- Actual receipts
K174,000
- Estimated receipts
K20,000
- Actual receipts
K10,334
Other income (Code 679)
Extra exchequer income (Code 999) Estimated receipts

Actual receipts
K1,055,000
K6,843,238
Payments to exchequer
K8,68,422
Balance due to exchequer (1 July 96)
K249,529
429
Public Sector Accounting: Theory

This part of the lesson has been built up using the question and answer approach.
QUESTION ONE
Discuss the role and functions of the Treasury and its relationship with other Government
department, in planning and controlling government expenditure.
Solution
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Advising on the setting of objectives for economic policy.

Coordinating government expenditure towards the achievement of economic policy.
Ensuring the execution of Policies in the most economic fashion by Government
Departments.
The overall supervision of national nance.
Involvement in the process of settlement of levels of national expenditure and the raising
of revenue.
Controlling Government borrowing.
Management of pensions
Administration of contingency funds e.g. disbursements, distaden funds etc.
Payments forward chief cashier to the government debts, incomes expenditures etc.
Links with other Government Departments

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Involvement in scrutinizing of annual estimates

Consultation on possible revisions of estimates.
Ensuring adequate nancial controls exists within departments including adequate
stafng and accounting procedures.
Involvement jointly in preparation of annual budget.
Further points for Discussion

(1)
(2)
(3)
Importance of Treasury control during periods of economic stringency.

Financial specialisation and expertise needed in dealing with estimates and nancial
control.
Criticism of Treasury
- Too much Treasury Control and interference stiing departmental initiative.
- Stafng by career civil servants and injection of specialists from outside often
resented.
- Too narrow a view taken by Treasury is often over-cautious.
S T U D Y
(1)
(2)
(3)
T E X T
The role and functions of the treasury include:
430
QUESTION TWO
Discuss the role of the Controller and Auditor General.
Solution
The Controller and Auditor General is an ofcer of Parliament (not a civil servant) who has two
main functions:(1)
(2)
As controller, he acts as Paymaster, controlling receipts and payments of public money

through various accounts.
As External Auditor, he audits the various departmental accounts reporting on the
Appropriation Account, etc. to the parliament, which refers them to the Public Accounts
Committee. This is a Select Committee whose duty is to consider the report and issues
arising from it.
From Audit point of view, his work covers the following:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Financial and Regularity Audit

(a)
Financial: - to ensure that accounting and nancial control systems operate correctly
so that all nancial transactions are both properly authorised and properly accounted
for.
(b) Regularity: - to ensure that expenditure is incurred on approved matters and is legal.
(c) Value for money audit: - an examination based on economy and efciency to curb
extravagance expenditure and maximise receipts. The Public Accounts Committee
also tends to concentrate on this question.
(d) Effectiveness of audit: - An examination to assess whether programmes undertaken
to meet established policy objectives have achieved those objectives.
QUESTION THREE
Explain the main functions of an annual Budget for a public sector organisation with which you
are familiar.
Solution
A budget may be dened as a nancial and quantitative statement prepared prior to a denite
period of time of the policy to be perused during that time for the purposes of attaining a given
objective.
A statement of the organisations intention against which its achievement can be measured.
Main function of an annual budget of local authority:
1.
To assist in xing the general rate, local authority is required to levy a rate sufcient to
cover the needs of the year.
2.
3.
4.
5.
431
To assist Policy making - to help members to making decisions on the provision of

services.
To assist control or Income and expenditure.
To authorise expenditure authority to incur the expenditure or collect the income.
To provide a standard against which to judge performance.
In accounting for Central Government and Local Government units, a fund called Capital
Project Fund is usually created. What is the purpose of this fund?
(5 marks)
(b)
The City Council of Matopeni authorises the construction of a new city hall on 1 January
1991. This hall is expected to cost sh.100,000,000. Financing for the project is to
beSh50,000,000 from 6 per cent serial bond issue, Sh.40,000,000 from a Government
Grant, and Sh.10,000,000 from the general fund (GF). Transactions and events during
1991 are as follows:
(i)
The city transfers Sh.10,000,000 from the GF to the City Hall Capital Project Fund (a
CPF created for the construction).
Planning and architects fees are paid in the amount of Sh.4,000,000.
The contract is awarded to the lowest bidder for Sh.95,000,000.
The bonds are sold for Sh.50,200,000.
The amount of the premium is transferred to the debt service fund.
The construction is certied to be 50 percent compete and a bill for Sh.47,500,000 is
received from the contractor.
Contracts payable, less a 10 percent retained percentage, is paid.
The books are closed and nancial statements are prepared.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
Required:
(i)
(ii)
Journal entries to record the above transactions.

Financial statement of the capital project fund for the year 1991.
(10 marks)
(5 marks)
(20 marks)
Solution
(a) Capital project fund (CPF)

The purpose of capital project fund is to provide resources for the completion of some specic
capital project. The main sources of nancing include the proceeds of bond issues, grants and
transfers from other funds. A separate capital project fund is created for each major project.
S T U D Y
(a)
T E X T
>>> Example 1
432
(b)
(i)
JOURNAL ENTRIES
NO.
1.
2.
S T U D Y
T E X T
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
PARTICULARS
Transfers to city call CPF
General Fund
Cash A/C
(Being the transfer to city hall
CPF)
Capital project fund (CPF):
Cash account
General Fund (GF) A/C
(Being the receipt of funds from
G.F)
CPF
Planning and architects fees
A/C
Cash A/C
(Being the payment of planning
and architects fees)
CPF
Encumbrances
Reserve for encumbrances
(Being the recording of
encumbrances for the amount
of contract)
CPF
Cash account
Bonds account
Premium on bonds etc.
Being the proceeds from the
issue of bonds)
Premiums on bonds A/C
Cash A/C
(Being the transfer of premium
bonds to City Hall debt service
fund)
Dr
(Sh 000)
10,000
Cr
(Sh 000)
10,000
10,000
10,000
4,000
4,000
95,000
95,000
50,200
50,000
200
200
200
Reserve for encumbrances A/C

Encumbrances A/C
(Being the transfer of half of the
amount encumbered)
47,500
Contract expenditures A/C

Contract payable A/C
Contract payable retention
A/C
(Being the expenditure on the
City Hall contraction recorded)
42,500
47,500
42,750
4,750
11.
CPF Adjusting entry due from

government grant
Revenue A/C
(Being the accrued revenue
from the government grant.)
CPF (Closing Entries)
Revenue A/C
General Fund A/C
Proceeds from issue
Expenditures
Encumbrances
Fund balance
(To close the books at the end
of 1994)
42,750
42,750
40,000
40,000
40,000
10,000
50,000
46,750
47,500
5,750
T E X T
10.
Contract payable A/C

Cash A/C
(Being the partial payment to
the contractor)
(ii) CITY COUNCIL OF MATOPENI

A statement of Revenue and Expenditure and charges in the Fund Balance for the year
ended 31st December 1991.
(Sh 000)
Project authorisation
Sources of Financial Funds
Revenue from government grant
100,000
40,000
Transfers:
Proceeds from fund issue
50,000
Transfers from general fund
10,000
100,000
Use of Financial Resources

Expenditures
51,500
Excess of Revenue and Transfers over expenditure
48,500
Less: Increase in encumbrances
47,500
Fund Balances as at 31st December 1994
1,000
S T U D Y
9.
433
434
CITY OF MATOPENI
City Hall Capital Project Fund
Balance Sheet as at December 31, 1991
(Sh 000)
(Sh 000)
Assets
Cash
13,250
Due from government grant
40,000
53,250
Contracts payable retention money
4,750
Fund equity:
Reserve for encumbrance
Fund balance
47,500
1,000
48,500
53,250
S T U D Y
T E X T
>>> Example 2
The Ministry of Trade and Commerce had the following estimated revenues to collect during the
nancial year ended 30 June 1993.
Sh.
Hotel and Restaurant licenses
Cattle traders licenses
900,000
1,000,000
Licenses under Trade Licensing Act
765,000
Liquor licenses
500,000
Professional Licenses
Licenses for registration of Insurance Companies
75,000
320,000
During the year and prior to any issue of Licenses, it was found necessary to suspend the
issue of liquor Licenses and professional Licenses. The Receiver of Revenue further found
out that more people were interested in scrap metal business. The Treasury authorised the
Receiver of Revenue to open a new head for scrap metal Licenses with an estimated collection
of Sh.955,000.
At the close of the nancial year, the Receiver of Revenue had collected the following amounts:
Hotel and Restaurant Licenses
Cattle traders Licenses
Licenses under Trade Licensing Act
Liquor Licenses
Professional licenses
Registration of insurance companies
Scrap metal Licenses
Sh.
1,131,250
2,261,250
705,000
255,000
1,117,500
435
The Receiver of Revenue had provided the following additional information:

(i)
(ii)
The ministry had a balance of Sh.33,750 at the beginning of the nancial year.
An amount of Sh.335,000 in respect of scrap metal Licenses was still in the hands of
agents as at 30 June 1993.
(iii) A sum of Sh.8,750 was due to the Exchequer at the end of the year.
Required
(a)
A Statement of Assets and Liabilities for the year ended 30 June 1993
(5 marks)
Ministry Of Trade and Commerce

Statement of Assets and Liabilities as at 30 June 1992
Sh.
5,503,750
335,000
5,838,750
Fund Balance and Liabilities

Fund balance (brought forward)
Fund balance (current year) (W 1)
Payable to the exchequer
T E X T
33,750
5,796,250
8,750
5,838,750
(b) STATEMENT OF REVENUE

For the year ended 30 June 1993
Head
Estimates
Sh.
011 Hotel & Restaurants
900,000
012 Cattle traders Licenses
1,000,000
013 Licenses under Trade
Licensing Act
765,000
014 Liquor Licenses
500,000
021 Professional Licenses
75,000
022 Registration of Insurance
Companies
320,000
031 Scrap metal Licenses
955,000
4,515,000
Balance b/f from previous year
Amount payable to the exchequer
Amount transferred to exchequer (Bal. Fig)
Amount due to exchequer
(W 1) Fund Balance Current year:
Amount transferred to exchequer
Add: Amount receivable from agents
Less: Balance b/f from previous year
Actual
Sh.
1,131,250
2,261,250
Over (under)
Estimated
Sh.
(231,250)
(1,261,250)
705,500
-
60,000
500,000
75,000
255,000
1,117,500
5,470,000
65,000
(162,500)
(955,000)
33,750
5,503,750
5,495,000
8,750
5,495,000
335,000
5,830,000
- 33,750
5,796,250
S T U D Y
Assets
Cash balance
Receivable from agents
436
(c)
Footnotes:
1. Introduction of a new source of revenue i.e. scrap metal Licenses.
2. Withdrawal of two revenue sources i.e. liquor Licenses and professional Licenses.
3. Reasons for material variations in actual receipts.
4. Details about revenue with collectors agents.
>>> Example 3
The following data were taken from the accounting records of the Town of Ole Meka General
Fund after the accounts had been closed for the scal year ended 30 September 1991.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Balances
Fiscal Year 1991
1 October 1990
Assets
Sh.
Cash
180,000
Taxes Receivable
20,000
Estimated uncollected tax (4,000)
196,000
Liabilities, Reserves & Funds
Balances:
Vouchers payable
44,000
Due to intra governmental
Service fund
2,000
Due to Debt Service Fund 10,000
Reserve for encumbrances 40,000
Fund balance
100,000
19,000
Changes
Balances
Debit
Sh.
955,000
809,000
6,000
Credit
Sh.
880,000
781,000
9,000
30 Sept. 1991
Sh.
225,000
48,000
(7,000)
296,000
880,000
889,000
53,000
7,000
60,000
40,000
20,000
2,777,000
10,000
10,000
47,000
61,000
2,777,000
5,000
50,000
47,000
141,000
296,000
The following additional data is available:

(i)
The budget for scal year 1991 provided for estimated revenues of Sh.1,000,000 and
appropriations of Sh.965,000.
(ii)
Expenditure totaling sh.895,000 in addition to those chargeable against Reserve for

Encumbrances, were made.
(iii) The actual expenditure chargeable against Reserve for Encumbrances was
Sh.37,000.
Required:
Show journal entries to record the above transactions in the books of Town of Ole Meka General
Fund.
(20 marks)
437
Solution
----Journal Entries
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
Cash
Revenue
(Being revenue received)
Expenditure
Encumbrances
Bank
(Being the record of payment made)
Tax receivable
Fund Balance
(Being the record of the increase in tax receivable)
Dr
Sh.
995,000
995,000
858,000
22,000
880,000
28,000
28,000
Fund Balance
Incollectable taxes
3,000
Fund Balance
Vouchers
(Being increase of vouchers payable)
9,000
Fund Balance
Intra: government
(Being the record of the net increase)
3,000
3,000
9,000
3,000
Fund Balance
Debt Servicing Fund
(Being the record of net appropriation to debt service
fund).
40,000
Encumbrances
Fund
Fund
Encumbrances
(Being the record of net changes in encumbrances)
15,000
Revenue
Expenditure
(Being the record of expenditure incurred against the
revenue).
Revenue
Fund
(Being the transfer of net revenue to the Fund A/C).
Cr
Sh.
40,000
15,000
44,000
44,000
858,000
858,000
97,000
97,000
T E X T
S. No
S T U D Y
TOWN OF OLE MEKA GENERAL FUND
438
FINANCIAL STATEMENT
Town of Ole Meka
Assets
Cash
Sh.
225,000
Tax received
Estimated uncollected tax
48,000
( 7,000)
296,000
Fund Balances
3,000
9,000
3,000
40,000
44,000
141,000
240,000
Sh.
Balance b/f
Tax receivable
Reserve for Encumbrances
Reserve
100,000
28,000
15,000
97,000
______
240,000
S T U D Y
T E X T
Sh.
Uncollected Tax
Voucher
Intra
Debt fund
Encumbrances
Balance c/d
CHAPTER SUMMARY
The objectives of the IPSASB are to serve the public interest by developing high quality public
sector nancial reporting standards and by facilitating the convergence of international and
national standards, thereby enhancing the quality and uniformity of nancial reporting throughout
the world.
The public sector is composed of the following:
Central Government
Local government
Parastatals
Charitable organisations
439
All Revenues for the government are recorded into a fund known as a consolidated fund. The
consolidated fund account is kept by the treasury under the Ministry of Finance, and all revenues
and grants received by the Government are paid into this account.
The purpose of a special revenue fund is to show that the revenue from such sources was
used for a specic purpose only; and the governmental unit will then operate what is known as a
special fund account to record the resources and liabilities for such an entity.
Encumbrances record the commitments that have been entered into but services are yet to be
received. The purpose of recording the commitments is to ensure that the budgeted appropriations
are not exceeded.
CHAPTER QUIZ
1.
The independence of Internal Audit in a public sector organisation is considered to be

essential to its effectiveness.
Explain what is meant by independence in this context and give examples of
circumstances which might impair independence.
2.
Discuss the main reasons for the growth in public expenditure.
3.
(a)
Explain the role and objectives of internal audit in a public sector organisation.
(b)
What factors inuence the size and organisation of an internal audit section in a Public
Sector organisation?
S T U D Y
T E X T
440
ANSWER TO QUIZ QUESTIONS

1.
As the internal auditor is appointed within the organisation he cannot be completely

independent of the organisation but he must be sufciently independent to allow
him to carry out his duties in a manner which allows his professional judgment and
recommendations to be effective and impartial.
S T U D Y
T E X T
In order to operate effectively, the internal auditor should:

2)
Be independent of all staff whose operations are under review.
3)
Not be involved in routine nancial systems.
4)
Have direct access to all department heads, chief executive and the management
board.
5)
Have full rights of access to records, assets and personnel and receive such information
and explanation as are necessary for the performance of their duties.
The chief internal auditor should have the right to report under his own name on any aspect of
the nancial work including that of nance department.
Impairment of Independence
(a)
Having an interest in business which is involved in any way with the audit.
(b)
Having been previously involved e.g. as accountant in the operations; or
(c)
Personal relationship e.g. a spouse or other relative of persons being audited.
2.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
3.
Increase in range and volume of state activity ination.

The effect of economic ideas and political theories use of public expenditure by state
as a weapon of economic control.
The effects of wars and social crises.
With the development of the state there tends to come an increased expectation by
the public of more state activities: - Roads, transport, energy, water and sewerage
services.
The introduction and maintenance of the Welfare State.
External involvement such as membership of OAU etc.
Internal involvement in industry and commerce including nationalisation and control of
socially signicant industries and commerce and support for industries incurring heavy
research and development costs, particularly new technology industries.
The role and objectives of internal audit may vary between different parts of the Public
Sector, depending on attitudes, statutory requirements, size etc. Denition of internal
audit Statement of internal audit practice.
441
An independent appraisal function within an organisation for the review of activities

as a service to all levels of management. It is a control which measures, evaluates
and reports upon the effectiveness of internal controls, nancial and otherwise as a
contribution to the effective use of resources within an organisation.
It is the responsibility of internal audit to review, appraise and report upon the following matters:
a)
The soundness, adequacy and application of internal controls internal controls can be
said to comprise the whole system of controls established by management in order to
1)
2)
3)
4)
Safeguard its assets

Ensure reliability of records
Promote operational efciency and
Monitor adherence to policies and directives.
b)
The extent to which the organisations assets and interests are accounted for and
safeguarded from losses of all kinds from:
3)
Fraud and other offences and

Waste, extravagance and inefcient administration, poor value for money and other
causes. In recent years, increasing emphasis has been put on audits role in connection
with avoidance of waste and obtain value for money.
The suitability and reliability of nancial and other management data developed within
the organisation.
Detailed procedures should exist for initiating, authorising, carrying through and recording
transactions. These procedures will allow the principles of internal check and will be kept under
review by internal auditor.
Factors:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Type of organisation
The size
The scope and objectives of internal audit
Managerial attitude to internal audit
The adequacy of internal control system
S T U D Y
1)
2)
T E X T
Factors:
442
EXAM QUESTIONS
QUESTION ONE
Outline the differences between the nancial objectives of:
1)
2)
Public Corporation i.e. state owned corporations, nationalised industries, and

Limited companies
QUESTION TWO
Outline the role played in Government accounting by:
(a)
(b)
(c)
The Public Accounts Committee

The controller and auditor general
The government Ministries Accounting Ofcers.
S T U D Y
T E X T
QUESTION THREE
In relation to fund accounting, explain what is meant by the following special funds and explain
fully how they are operated.
a)
b)
c)
Revolving funds
Trust funds
Sinking funds
QUESTION FOUR
One of the principle differences between non-prot and commercial organisations is that they
have different reasons for their existence. Consequently, non-prot making organisations follow
some accounting principles which differ from accounting principles followed by commercial
organisations.
You are asked to state which are the principles followed by non-prot making organisations and
why you think they are more appropriate than corresponding principles applicable to commercial
organisations.
QUESTION FIVE
(a)
Without the prot motive there is an inevitable lack of budget motive. Do you agree?
(b)
Explain the administrative and accounting controls used to achieve the budgeted level
of expenditure by the Government Ministries.
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
443
CHAPTER EIGHT
CURRENT ISSUES
S T U D Y
T E X T
444
445
CHAPTER EIGHT
CURRENT ISSUES
OBJECTIVES
At the end of this chapter, the students should be able to understand:
Accounting principles and conventions and desirable characteristics of good accounting

information.
Accounting regulation and standard setting
Social responsibility accounting and environmental reports
Accounting theory has been dened as logical reasoning in the form of a set of broad principles
that
T E X T
Provide a general frame of reference by which accounting practice can be evaluated

and
Guide the development of new practices and procedures
S T U D Y
INTRODUCTION
In general the function of a theory is to assist in the resolution of practical problems. Accounting
theory embodies a system of rules, procedures and assumptions used to produce the nancial
statements. It tries to answer the following questions.
What is the nature and purpose of nancial reports?

What are the corporate nancial reports designed to achieve?
What is the nancial accounting theory that underlies the production of such
statements?
Note that the above three questions are not easy to answer and that is why there is no single
universally accepted basic accounting theory, it does not exist today and will never exist in the
future.
A number of problems exist in selecting an accounting objective. These include:
The selection of goals is a subjective decision based on certain perceived preference.

Accountants have no universally accepted goal among themselves.
Where such goals are identied, they tend to be too generalised to be of any protable
use.
446
However, the fundamental objective of corporate nancial reports is to communicate economic

measurements of information about the resources and performance of the reporting entity useful
to those having reasonable rights to such information. Elsewhere, it has been stated that the basic
objective of nancial reports is to provide useful information for making economic decisions.
From above, the following questions should be adhered to when deciding on the objective of any
nancial report.
Who are the users of the nancial report?

What decision does such people (users) make based on such nancial reports?
What type of information in those statements do they use?
Can the information (e.g. protability, cash ows, or liquidity) they use be improved?
Can the information be provided cost effectively?
S T U D Y
T E X T
Financial statements are a structured nancial representation of the nancial position of and
the transactions undertaken by an enterprise.
Accounting principles refer to the fundamental beliefs, guides to action and a settled ground or
basis of accounting conduct and practice.
Accounting policies are the specic accounting principles and the methods of applying
those principles that are considered by a business concern to be the most appropriate in the
circumstances to present nancial statements.
EXAM CONTEXT
In past examinations, the examiner has tested the students knowledge in the following
topics:
Concepts of capital and capital maintenance
Social responsibility accounting
Environmental reports
INDUSTRY CONTEXT
This chapter is important because it tackles accounting principles and conventions which are
necessary in preparation of nancial statements.
Firms use these accounting principle and conventions to prepare their nancial statements.
Firms also utilize the social responsibility accounting concept if they are involved in socially
responsible activities.
CURRENT ISSUES
8.1
447
MEASUREMENT OF INCOME, CAPITAL AND THE

VALUATION OF ASSETS
FAST FORWARD: Financial statements form part of the process of nancial reporting.
Financial statements
A balance sheet
An income statement
A statement showing either:

- All changes in equity; or
- Changes in equity other than those arising from capital transactions with owners
and distribution to owners
Cash ow statement and
Accounting policies and explanatory notes
The board of directors and/or other governing body of an enterprise is responsible for the
preparation and presentation of the nancial statements.
Elements of nancial statements

These are the broad classes into which nancial effects of transactions and other events are
grouped.
Financial position measurement elements in the balance sheet include:
Assets: an asset is recognised in the balance sheet when it is probable that the future
economic benets will ow to the enterprise and the asset has a cost or value that can
be measured reliably.
Liabilities: a liability is recognised in the balance sheet when it is probable that an
outow of resources embodying economic benets will result from the settlement of
S T U D Y
T E X T
They are a structured nancial representation of the nancial position of and the transactions
undertaken by an enterprise. The objective of general purpose nancial statements is to provide
information about the nancial position, performance and cash ows of an enterprise that is
useful to a wide range of users in making economic decisions. Financial statements also show
the results of the managements stewardship of the resources entrusted to it. A complete set of
nancial statements normally includes:
448
a present obligation and the amount at which the settlement will take place can be
measured reliably.
Equity: This refers to the residual interests in the assets of the business .The amount
at which equity is shown in the balance sheet is dependent on the measurement of
assets and liabilities. Normally, the aggregate amount of equity only by coincidence
corresponds with the aggregate market value of the shares of the entity or the sum that
could be raised by disposing of either the net assets on a piecemeal basis or the entity
as a whole on a going concern basis.
Performance measurements elements in the income statement include:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Income: income is recognised in the income statement when increase in future economic
benets related to an increase in an asset or a decrease of a liability has arisen that can
Expenses: expenses are recognised in the income statement when a decrease in
future economic benet related to a decrease in an asset or an increase of a liability
has arisen that can be measured reliably.
Expenses are recognised in the income statement on the basis of a direct association between
the costs incurred and the earning of specic items of income. This process, commonly referred
to as the matching of costs with revenues, involves the simultaneous or combined recognition
of revenues and expenses that result directly and jointly from the same transactions or other
events.
The statement of changes in nancial position usually reects income statement elements and
changes in balance sheet elements.
Measurements of the elements of nancial statements

Measurement is the process of determining the monetary amounts at which the elements of
the nancial statements are to be recognised and carried and carried in the balance sheet and
income statement. This involves the selection of the particular basis of measurement.
Measurement bases include:
Historical cost: Assets are recorded at the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or
the fair value of the consideration given to acquire them at the time of their acquisition.
of business.
Current cost: assets are carried at the amount of cash or cash equivalents that would
have to be paid if the same or an equivalent asset was acquired currently. Liabilities are
carried at the undiscounted amount of cash or cash equivalents that would be required
to settle the obligation currently.
Realisable (settlement) value: assets are carried at the amount of cash or cash
equivalents that could currently be obtained by selling the asset in an orderly disposal.
Liabilities are carried at their settlement values; that is, the undiscounted amounts of
CURRENT ISSUES
449
cash or cash equivalents expected to be paid to satisfy the liabilities in the normal
course of business.
Present value: assets are carried at the present discounted value of the future net cash
inows that the item is expected to generate in the normal course of business. Liabilities
are carried at the present discounted value of the future net cash outows that are
expected to be required to settle the liabilities in the normal course of business.
The historical cost base is the most common measurement basis adopted by enterprises when
preparing their nancial statements. This is usually combined with other measurement bases.
For example, inventories are usually carried at lower of cost and net realisable value, marketable
securities and pension liabilities are carried at their present value.
8.2 CONCEPTS OF CAPITAL AND CAPITAL MAINTENANCE
Financial concept of capital: under a nancial concept of capital, such as invested

money or invested purchasing power, capital is synonymous with the assets or equity
of the enterprise. Usually adopted by many enterprises.
Physical concept of capital: under a physical concept of capital, such as operating
capability, capital is regarded as the productive capacity of the enterprise based on, for
example, units of output per day.
Concepts of capital maintenance and determination of prot

The concept of capital maintenance is concerned with how an enterprise denes the capital it
seeks to maintain.
Financial capital maintenance: a prot is earned only if the nancial (or money) amount
of the net assets at the end of the period exceeds the nancial (or money) amount
of net assets at the beginning of the period, after excluding any distributions to, and
contributions from, owners during the period.
Physical capital maintenance: a prot is earned only if the physical productive capacity
(or operating capability) of the enterprise (or the resources or funds needed to achieve
that capacity) at the end of the period exceeds the physical productive capacity at the
beginning of the period, after excluding any distributions to, and contributions from,
owners during the period.
The concepts of capital maintenance dene prot as the residual amount that remains after
expenses (including capital maintenance adjustments, where appropriate) have been deducted
from income. If expenses exceed income the residual amount is a net loss.
The physical capital maintenance concept requires the adoption of the current cost basis of
measurement. The nancial capital maintenance concept however does not require the use of a
particular basis of measurement.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Concepts of capital
450
8.3 ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES AND CONVENTIONS

FAST FORWARD: Accounting statements are prepared in conformity with accounting principles
in order to place more reliance on them.
Accounting is the language of business. To make the language convey the same meaning to all
people, accountants all over the world have developed certain rules, procedures and conventions,
which represents a consensus view by the profession of good accounting practices and procedures
and are generally referred to as Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP).
Accounting principles can be classied into two categories:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Accounting concepts, and

Accounting conventions
Accounting concepts
Accounting concepts may be considered as postulates i.e. basic assumptions or conditions upon
which the science of accounting is based.
Accounting concepts
Business entity concept
This concept implies that a business is separate and distinct from the person who supplies
capital to it. Irrespective of the form of organisation, a business unit has got its own individuality
as distinguished from the person who own or control it. The accounting equation (i.e. assets =
liabilities + capital) is an expression of the entity concept because it shows that the business
itself owns the assets and in term owns the various claimants. Business is kept separate from the
proprietor so that transactions of the business may also be recorded with him.
Money measurement concept

Money is the only practical unit of measurement that can be employed to achieve the homogeneity
of nancial data, accountants records only those transactions which can be expressed in terms
of money though quantitative records are also kept. The advantages of expressing business
transactions in terms of money is that money serves as a common denominator by means of
which heterogeneous facts about a business can be expressed in terms of numbers (i.e. money)
which are capable of additions and subtractions.
CURRENT ISSUES
451
Going concern concept

It is assumed that a business unit has a reasonable expectation of continuing business at a prot
for an indenite period of time. A business unit is deemed to be a going concern and not a gone
concern. It will continue to operate in the future. Transactions are recorded in the books keeping
in view the going concern aspect of the business unit.
This assumption provides much of the justication for recording xed assets at original cost
(i.e. acquisition cost) and depreciating them in a systematic manner without reference to their
current realisable value. It is useless to show xed assets in the balance sheet at their estimated
realisable values if there is no immediate expectation of selling them. Fixed assets are acquired
for use in the business for earning revenues and are not meant for resale, so they are shown at
their book values and not at their current realisable values. But when the concern is not a going
concern and is to be liquidated, current realisable values of xed assets become relevant.
Dual aspect concept

There must be a double entry to have a complete record of each business transaction, an entry
being made in the receiving account and an entry of the same amount in the giving account.
Every debit must have a corresponding credit and vice versa and upon this dual aspect has been
raised the whole super structure of Double Entry System of accounting. The accounting equation
(i.e. assets = equities (or liabilities + capital)) is based on dual aspect concept.
Accounting period concept

Under the going concern concept it is assumed that a business entity has a reasonable expectation
of continuing business for an indenite period of time. This assumption provides much of the
justication that the business will not be terminated, so it is reasonable to divide the life of the
business into accounting periods so as to be able to know the prot or loss of each such period
and the nancial position at the end of such a period. Normally accounting period adopted is
one year as it helps to take any corrective action, to pay income tax, to absorb the seasonal
uctuations and for reporting to the outsiders. A period of more than one year reduces the utility
of accounting data.
S T U D Y
A fundamental concept of accounting closely related to the going concern concept, is that an
asset is recorded in the books at the price paid to acquire it and that this cost is the basis for
all subsequent accounting for the asset. This concept does not mean that the asset will always
be shown at cost but it means that cost becomes basis for all future accounting for the asset.
Asset is recorded at cost at the time of its purchase but is systematically reduced in its value by
charging depreciation.
T E X T
Cost concept
452
Matching concept
This concept is based on the accounting period concept. The most important objective of running
a business is to ascertain prot periodically. The determination of prot of a particular accounting
period is essentially a process of matching the revenue recognised during the period and the
costs to be allocated to the period to obtain the revenue. It is, thus, a problem of matching
revenues and expired costs, the residual amount being the net prot or net loss for the period.
Realisation concept
According to this concept, revenue is considered as being earned on the date at which it is
realised i.e. on the date when the property in goods passes to the buyer and he becomes legally
liable to pay.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Objective evidence concept

Objectivity connotes reliability, trustworthiness and veriability, which means that there is some
evidence in ascertaining the correctness of the information reported. Entries in accounting records
and data reported in nancial statements must be based on objectively determined evidence,
without close adherence to this principle; the condence of many users of the nancial statements
could not be maintained. Invoices and vouchers for purchases and sales, bank statements for
amount of cash at bank, physical checking of stock in hand etc. are examples, of objective
evidence, which are capable of verication. As far as possible, some objective evidence should
support every entry in accounting records.
Accrual concept
Under this basis, the effects of transactions and other events are recognised when they occur
(and not as cash or its equivalent is received or paid) and they are recorded in the accounting
records and reported in the nancial statements of the periods to which they relate.
The essence of the accrual concept is that revenue is recognised when it is realised, that is
when sale is complete or services are given and it is immaterial whether cash is received or not.
Similarly, according to this concept, expenses are recognised in the accounting period in which
they help in earning the revenue whether cash is paid or not. Thus to ascertain correct prot or
loss for an accounting period and to show the true and fair nancial position of the business at
the end of the accounting period, we make record of all expenses and incomes relating to the
accounting period whether actual cash has been paid or received or not. Therefore, as a result of
the accrual concept, outstanding expenses and outstanding incomes are taken into consideration
while preparing nal accounts of a business entity.
CURRENT ISSUES
453
Convention of consistency
Accounting rules, practices and conventions should be continuously observed and applied
i.e. these should not change from one year to another. The results of different years will be
comparable only when accounting rules are continuously adhered to from year to year.
Consistency also implies external consistency i.e. the nancial statements of one enterprise should
be comparable with one another. It means that every enterprise should follow same accounting
methods and procedures of recording and reporting business transactions. The development of
international and national standards is due to the convention of consistency.
Convention of full disclosure
Convention of conservatism or prudence
T E X T
It is a policy of caution or playing safe and had its origin as a safeguard against possible losses
in a world of uncertainty. It compels the businessman to wear a risk-proof jacket, for the working
rule is: anticipate no prots but provide for all possible losses. For example;
S T U D Y
According to this convention, all accounting statements should be honestly prepared and to that
end full disclosure of all signicant information should be made. All information which is of material
interest to proprietors, creditors and investors should be disclosed in accounting statements. An
obligation is placed on the accounting profession to see that the books of accounts prepared on
behalf of others are as reliable and informative as circumstances permit.
Closing stock is valued at cost or market price whichever is lower. If the market price is
higher than the cost, the higher amount is ignored in the accounts and closing stock will
be valued at cost and vice versa.
Research and development expenses are usually charged as expenses of the period
in which they are incurred but benets of research and development will be realised in
the future.
Under the completed contract method, revenue from long term construction contract is
recognised only when the contract is completed substantially
In case of cash or delivery sales, revenue is recognised when cash is received by the
seller or his agent and not on delivery of goods to the buyer.
Convention of materiality
Whether something should be disclosed or not in the nancial statements will depend on whether
it is material or not. Materiality depends on the nature and size of the amount involved in the
transaction.
The term materiality is a subjective term. The accountant should record an item as material even
though it is of small amount if its knowledge seems to inuence the decision of the proprietors or
auditors or investors.
454
Fundamental accounting assumptions

The following are recognised by the International Accounting Standards Committee as
fundamental accounting assumptions as per International Accounting Standards. They are
reproduced below:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Going concern: the enterprise is normally viewed as a going concern, that is, it is
continuing in operation for the foreseeable future. It is assumed that the enterprise has
neither the intention nor the necessity of liquidation or of curtailing materially the scale
of its operations.
Consistency: it is assumed that the accounting policies are consistent from one period
to another
Accrual: revenues and costs are accrued, that is, recognised as they are earned or
incurred (and not as money is received or paid) and recorded in the nancial statements
of the periods to which they relate.
If fundamental accounting assumptions are not followed in the preparation and presentation of
nancial statements, the fact should be disclosed. If these are followed, no specic disclosure is
necessary. These are called fundamental because these are to be followed and their disclosure
in the nancial statements is required if these are not followed. Otherwise there is no conict
between accounting concepts and fundamental accounting assumptions. In fact, fundamental
accounting assumptions are part of the basic accounting concepts.
Accounting policies
circumstances to present nancial statements. Accounting policies represent choices among
different accounting methods that can be used in recording nancial transactions and preparing
nancial statements. International Accounting Standards Committee denes accounting policies
thus:
Accounting policies encompass many principles, bases, conventions, rules and
procedures adopted by managements in preparing and presenting nancial statements.
There are many different accounting policies in use even in relation to the same subject
and judgment is required in selecting and applying those which are appropriate to the
circumstances of the enterprises and are best suited to present properly its nancial
position and the results of its operation.
Three considerations should govern the selection and application by management of the
appropriate accounting policies and the preparation of nancial statements:
Prudence: uncertainties inevitably surround many transactions. This should be

recognised by exercising prudence in preparing nancial statements. Prudence does
not, however, justify the creation of secret or hidden reserves.
CURRENT ISSUES
455
Substance over form: transactions and other events should be accounted for and
presented in accordance with their substance and nancial reality and not merely with
their legal form.
Materiality: nancial statements should disclose all items which are material enough to
affect evaluations or decisions.
Five principles are laid down in the Companies Act Cap 486, and conventions to mean all other
principles, which are conventionally recognised. The concepts include:
The concepts and conventions may be thought of as the pieces of a Jigsaw. Although we can
dene the shape of each piece (as we can do for each in the list above), it does not necessarily
follow that the pieces will either t together or result in a complete picture even if we can put
them all together. Nevertheless, if it could be done such a picture would amount to a complete
and consistent theory of accounting, which could then be used as a basis for determining `good
accounting practice. In other words, we would, for the rst time, have agreed guidelines on how
to do nancial accounting, with a consequent improvement in the consistency and hence in the
usefulness of nancial statements. The whole picture is usually referred to as a CONCEPTUAL
FRAMEWORK OF ACCOUNTING.
The conceptual framework has been dened as a constitution, a coherent system of interrelated
objectives and fundamentals that can lead to consistent standards and that prescribe the nature,
functions and limits of nancial accounting and nancial statements.
A number of advantages might arise from using a conceptual framework. For example:
The conceptual framework might provide a "written constitution" for the professional
standard committee that would help if set consistent IASs, and could help the standard
setting programme to proceed in a coherent manner.
It might provide a frame of reference for those who prepare nancial statements, when
dealing with a topic that was not subject of an IAS.
The preparation of nancial statements requires knowledge of specic accounting
techniques and the exercise of judgment. A conceptual framework may be useful in
distinguishing between areas of judgment and areas where rules should be followed.
The existence of a conceptual framework might win the condence of the users of
nancial statements by increasing their understanding of how and why they have been
produced.
Although there may be substantial benets to be gained through the use of a conceptual
framework, it is not necessarily easy to apply such a tool in practice. Not only is it fragmentary,
but it can often be internally inconsistent. There can be conicts between different concepts
and conventions when we try to use them. For example, the accrual and prudence of the Going
Concern and Prudence. Note that according to IAS1, where the operation of the accruals
concept is inconsistent with prudence then the latter prevails. Although it is only implied, the
same prudence override applies the going concern and consistency.
T E X T
Prudence
Accruals
Consistency
Going Concern
Separate valuation
S T U D Y
456
However desirable a conceptual framework, might be, there are several problems that inhibit its
development.
8.4
T E X T
S T U D Y
The variety of users that nancial statements serve is so wide that no one framework is
likely to meet all their needs.
Accounting conventions that underlie nancial reporting cannot be proved to be correct;
they depend on consensus. Without consensus there cannot be an agreed conceptual
framework, and it may not be possible to achieve consensus on wide issues, without
falling to the level of platitudes.
Whilst it may be argued that it would be desirable for the IASB to develop standard
in accordance with an agreed conceptual framework, in reality thus may not happen.
The development of an accounting standard may be inuenced by factors other than
a conceptual framework, for example existing practice and political pressures. An IAS
that departs too far from existing practice may not be acceptable and the pressure
exerted by interest groups may prevail over the arguments based on theoretical ideas.
USERS OF FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING REPORTS AND

THEIR NEEDS
The framework identies the following users of nancial statements:
Investors: concerned with the risk inherent in, and return provided by, their
investments.
Employees: concerned with their employers stability and protability and their ability to
provide remuneration and other benets
Lenders: interested in information that enables them to determine whether their loans,
and the interest attaching to them, will be paid when due.
Suppliers and other trade creditors: information to determine whether amounts owing to
them will be paid when due.
Customers: information about the continuance of an enterprise.
Government and their agencies: have interests in resource allocation and thus the
activities of an enterprise. Also to be able to regulate activities of an enterprise, determine
taxation policies etc.
Public: needs information about trends and recent developments in the prosperity of the
enterprise and the range of its enterprise.
Usually when nancial statements meet the needs of investors, who are providers of risk capital,
the needs of other users are also met. The management has the primary responsibility of
preparing and presentation of nancial statements of the enterprise about the nancial position,
performance and changes in the nancial position of the enterprise.
CURRENT ISSUES
8.5
457
DESIRABLE CHARACTERISTICS OF GOOD
Understandability: information provided in nancial statements should be comprehensible

and understandable to its users. For this purpose, users are assumed to have a
reasonable knowledge of business and economic activities and accounting and a
willingness to study the information with reasonable diligence.
Relevance: information has the quality of relevance when it inuences the economic
decisions of users by helping them evaluate past, present or future events nor conrming,
or correcting their past evaluations.
Materiality: the relevance of information is affected by its nature and materiality.
Information is material if its omission or misstatement could inuence the economic
decisions of users taken on the basis of the nancial statements.
Reliability: information has the quality of reliability when it is free from material error
and bias and can be depended upon by users to represent faithfully that which it either
purports to represent or could reasonably be expected to represent.
Faithful representation: to be reliable, information must represent faithfully the
transactions and other events it either purports to represent or could reasonably be
expected to represent.
Substance over form: if information is to represent faithfully the transactions and other
events that it purports to represent, it is necessary that they are accounted for and
presented in accordance with their substance and economic reality and not merely their
legal form.
Neutrality: to be reliable, the information contained in nancial statements must be
neutral, that is, free from bias.
Prudence: prudence is the inclusion of a degree of caution in the exercise of the
judgments needed in making the estimates required under conditions of uncertainty,
such that assets or income are not overstated and liabilities or expenses are not
understated.
Completeness: to be reliable, the information in nancial statements must be complete
within the bounds of materiality and cost. An omission can cause information to be false
or misleading and thus unreliable and decient in terms of its relevance.
Comparability: users must be able to compare the nancial statements of an enterprise
through time in order to identify trends in its nancial position and performance. Users
must also be able to compare the nancial statements of different enterprises in order
to evaluate their relative nancial position, performance and changes in nancial
position.
8.6 ACCOUNTING REGULATION AND STANDARD SETTING

FAST FORWARD: The accounting profession is regulated worldwide. In many countries it is
regulated by a private body, which is usually supported by the government.
S T U D Y
T E X T
ACCOUNTING INFORMATION
458
In the USA, the Securities and Exchange Commission set up in 1934 after the great depression
regulates the nancial reporting. The SEC delegated such regulation to the Financial Accounting
Standard Board (FASB) and the American Institute of Certied Public Accountants (AICPA).
In Kenya, the Institute of Certied Public Accountants of Kenya (ICPAK) regulates the accounting
profession through the Professional Standards Committee that issue the accounting standards.
In general, any regulatory framework derives from several sources.
include:
These sources
Legislation
Accounting standards
Accounting principles and conventions
Stock exchange rules
S T U D Y
T E X T
(a) Legislation
All companies incorporated in Kenya must comply with the requirements of the Companies Act
(Cap 486), irrespective of their size. The Act imposes a requirement for all companies to prepare
regular accounts and provides detailed rules on minimum information, which must be disclosed
on production of nancial reports.
The accounting obligation imposed upon companies is contained in section 149 of the Companies
Act. Every company is required to prepare and submit the following nancial statements to the
Registrar of Companies and the general body of shareholders;
Prot and Loss account
Balance sheet
Subsection 1 of section 149 (Cap 486) states that, every balance sheet of a company must
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company as at the end of its nancial year
and every prot and loss of a company must give a true and fair view of the prot or loss for the
nancial year.
All listed companies must comply with the provisions of the Public Offers, Securities and Disclosure
Regulations, 2002 of the Capital Markets Authority and the requirements of the Listing Manual
of the Nairobi Stock Exchange. Broadly, the rules require the provisions of both greater and
more frequent information that that required by law e.g. those companies listed on the NSE are
required to publish an interim report which contains some minimum information. These interim
reports must comply with the provisions of IAS 34 and the Regulations.
In addition, a company must comply with rules stipulated in the specic Acts under which it
is operating, such as the Banking Act for banking companies, Insurance Act for insurance
companies, Building Societies Act for Building Societies etc.
CURRENT ISSUES
459
Accounting Standards
Companies must also comply with the requirements contained in the statement of accounting
standards in their respective countries. Companies and their accountants in their reporting
practices not only need to meet the requirements of the law but in order to satisfy the statutory
external auditors need to follow the Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and
accounting standards.
Accounting standards are methods of or approaches to preparing accounts which have been
chosen and established by the bodies overseeing the accounting profession. They are essentially
working rules established to guide accounting practices. Accounting standards usually consists
of three parts:
A description of the problem to be tackled

A reasonable discussion of ways of solving the problem
The described solution in line of decision or theory
To narrow the areas of differences and variety in accounting practice, especially because
there are a variety of methods of preparing nancial reports due to the diversity and
complexity of business.
To disclose accounting bases used because of a number of items reported in nancial
reports require subjective judgment or estimates.
To disclose departures from established denitive accounting standards so that its
effects can be isolated and analysed.
Advantages of Accounting Standards
They reduce or eliminate confusing variations in the methods used to prepare

accounts.
They provide a focal point for debate and discussions about accounting practice.
They oblige companies to disclose the accounting policies used in the preparation of
accounts.
They are a less rigid alternative to enforcing conformity by means of legislation.
They have obliged companies to disclose more accounting information than they would
otherwise have done if accounting standards did not exist.
Disadvantages of Accounting Standards include the following:
A set of rules, which give backing to one method of preparing accounts, might be
inappropriate in some circumstances.
Standards may be subject to lobbying or government pressure.
Some standards are not based on a conceptual framework of accounting.
Until now, setting of standards has not directly involved user groups in the creation of
such accounting standards.
They tend to encourage rigidity in accounting practice.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The purpose of accounting standards has been narrowed to the following:
460
Regulation of accounting profession

The question that has been extensively debated is whether or not the accounting profession
should be regulated. This has been argued on the basis that companies have certain incentives
that force them to report to interested parties without necessarily making them to do so through
regulation. This necessitates the need to unregulated the accounting profession. The argument
for and against an unregulated accounting profession is discussed here below:
Arguments for Unregulated Accounting Profession

1. Agency theory
S T U D Y
T E X T
It argues that since management is engaged in agency contracts with the owners of the company,
they must ensure that information is supplied to the shareholders regularly.
Since the shareholders would like to monitor management and such monitoring costs like audit
fees may have a direct bearing on the compensation paid to management; management is
compelled to report regularly so as to enhance their image and improve their compensation.
Thus rms will disclose all information voluntarily.
2. Competitive Capital Market

Because rms have to raise capital funds from a competitive environment in the capital markets,
they will be compelled to disclose voluntarily so as to attract such funds from investors.
It is generally accepted that rms that report regularly in the capital market have an enhanced
image and could easily attract funds from investors. Thus rms have an incentive to give regular
nancial reports otherwise they cannot secure capital at a lower cost. Thus regulating accounting
will be imposing rules in a self-regulating profession.
3. Private contracting opportunities theory

It has been argued that users who need information may enter into a contract with private
organizations that can supply them with such information. This will ensure users get detailed and
specic information suiting their requirement instead of the general-purpose information provided
by nancial reports as regulated by the legislation. Such all-purpose data may be irrelevant to
the users needs. Under such circumstances there is no need to regulate accounting profession.
Arguments Against Unregulated Accounting Reporting

Arguments in support of accounting regulation are usually based on the doctrine of `market
failure. Market failure refers to a situation where the market is unable to efciently allocate
resources because of imperfections that exist in that market or because the way the market is
structured is poor.
Market failure occurs when the market is unable to provide information to those who are in need
of it. Because of the existence of market failure in providing accounting information, it has been
CURRENT ISSUES
461
argued that the accounting profession should be regulated so as to serve its users effectively
and efciently.
Specic reasons why market failure occurs include the following:
The monopoly in the supply of such information:

The existence of monopoly in the supply of information about itself i.e. it is the only in control
of the supply of the internal information, this introduces certain imperfections in the supply of
such information. There will be restriction in the supply of absolute information and it may not be
available to those who need it. Even if suppliers of such accounting information were to charge
prices fears have been expressed that such prices will be prohibitive for most people.
Further doubts have been expressed on whether rms can supply all the necessary information,
both positive and negative, especially where such rms operate in a competitive environment.
This will be common in countries like Kenya where the capital markets are not developed. Thus
there is an urgent need to make nancial reporting mandatory through a regulatory framework.
Auditing itself has been inadequate and not geared towards detection of fraud because auditors
hardly ever carry out 100% examination of records and transactions. Thus there is a serious
need to control accounting practice through stringent standardization guidelines. This calls for a
regulated accounting profession.
Public good characteristics of Accounting Information

Accounting information has characteristics of a public good. The moment accounts are released
to one person; it cannot be restricted from getting to other persons. This implies that buying
accounting information through private contracting will be virtually impossible because its supply
cannot be restricted and thus they cannot make money out of it and it will be difcult to decide
on the price to charge.
Problems created by the regulation of the accounting profession

In practice, regulation of any eld leads to misallocation of resources because production is not
geared towards the market forces of demand and supply.
S T U D Y
Financial reporting standards have failed to correct instances of public fraud through fraudulent
reporting and this has been so because of laxity in regulating accounting practices. The existence
of a variety of methods of doing one thing and too much exibility in accounting practice, have
enabled the management of rms to manipulate accounts to suit their needs.
T E X T
Failure of Financial Reporting and Auditing
462
Regulating accounting profession has led to the following problems:
1. Standard Overload
Because of overstatement of demand for standards, there has been a tendency to over produce
standards. Many people who contribute during the standard setting process may not be active
demanders of information to be supplied by such standards and very often, the professional
standard committee takes into account the view of such people leading to the misallocation of
resources.
This was the case in the USA prompting the SEC to exempt small companies from complying to
certain standard requirements.
2. Politicisation of standard setting

Regulation is a political process intended to protect the conicting interests of various user
groups. This leads to dilution of accounting standards as they are compromised by being based
on bargaining instead of technical suitability.
S T U D Y
T E X T
3. Social legitimacy
The standard setting process requires social legitimacy in order to be effective i.e. the regulating
bodies should consist of persons representing various user groups of nancial reports. The
professional standard committee lacks the social legitimacy to set standards as most of its
members are drawn from the accounting profession and not from the business and public
community.
It is perceived that these accounting professionals know the needs of the business and public
communities when using nancial reports.
4. Economic consequences
Sometimes, regulations overburden companies with unnecessary regulations, which might have
negative economic consequences. This is especially so when companies devise ways and
means of avoiding certain regulations for one reason or another.
For instance, when IAS 17 on Accounting for leases was issued, requiring companies to capitalize
certain leases and reect it on the balance sheet as both asset and liabilities, so companies
tended to restructure their leases so as to improve the debt structure. This means incurring
unnecessary legal costs due to regulation.
Regulators
The accounting profession in the world (and even for individual countries) is governed or regulated
by various bodies. These include:
CURRENT ISSUES
463
The IASB
The IASB is an independent Private sector body. It was established in 2001 as part of The
IASC Foundation. 19 trustees, who are responsible for appointing members of the IASB and
securing its funding govern the foundation. The IASB comprises of twelve fulltime and two parttime members. IASB is responsible for the development and approval of International Financial
reporting Standards and related documents. The objectives of IASB are:
o
o
o
To develop, in the public interest, a single set of high quality, understandable and
enforceable global accounting standards that require high quality, transparent and
comparable nancial statements and other nancial reporting to help participants in
the various capital markets of the world and other users of the information to make
economic decisions,
To promote the use and rigorous application of those standards,
And to work actively with national standard setters to bring about convergence of
national accounting standards and IFRSs to high quality solutions.
The IFRIC comprises twelve members and a non-voting chairman, all appointed by the Trustees.
The role of the IFRIC is to prepare interpretations of IFRSs for approval by the IASB and provide
timely guidance on nancial reporting issues not specically addressed in IFRSs. The IFRIC
replaced the former Standings interpretations committee in 2002.
The Standards Advisory Council (SAC)

The Standards Advisory Council is appointed by the Trustees. It provides a formal Vehicle for
participation by organizations and individuals with interest in international nancial reporting.
The objective of SAC is to give guidance to the IASB on priorities and on major standard setting
project.
International Organization of Securities Commissions (IOSCO)

IOSCO has appointed a technical committee to review the work of the IASB, which has produced
a comprehensive set of high quality standards for the purpose of cross border listing. Cross border
listing is when a company in one country lists its share on another countrys stock exchange.
Many stock exchanges now accept IASs for cross border listing.
S T U D Y
(IFRIC)
T E X T
The International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee
464
The European Commission (EC)

The European Commission is uniquely the only organization to produce international standards of
accounting practice that are legally enforceable, in the form of directives which must be included
in the national legislation of member states. The EC directed that by 2005 consolidated accounts
of listed companies would be required to comply with international accounting standards. This
means that most of the European countries (including UK) will adopt IASs and IFRSs. The EC
works closely with IASB and has also set up a committee to investigate where there are conicts
between EU directives and IASs so that compatibility can be achieved. In turn the IASB has used
the EC directives in its work.
International Federation of Accountants (IFAC)
S T U D Y
T E X T
IFAC represents the worldwide accountancy profession. The mission of IFAC is the development
and enhancement of the profession to enable it to provide services of a consistently high quality
in the public interest. It is non-prot making organization not attached to any government and
members include most accountancy bodies in various countries. The IASB is an afliate of
IFAC.
The IASB also woks closely with the other intergovernmental bodies e.g. the United Nations
Working group of experts on International Standards of Accounting and Reporting (UN IASR) and
the working group in Accounting Standards of the Organization for Economic Co-operation and
Development (OECD). The IASB also invites comments from national standard setting bodies on
exposure drafts and some joint work projects have been carried out together.
The stock exchange rules

Where companies are listed on the stock exchange, they must comply with additional requirements
laid down by the stock exchange. The rules require the provision of both greater and more frequent
information than that required by law. For example, those companies listed on the Nairobi Stock
Exchange, publish an interim report, which contains certain minimum information. The interim
report must either be circulated to shareholders or published in at least one newspaper.
The development of International Financial Reporting Standards

Board representatives, member bodies, members of the consultative group, other organisations
and individuals and the IASC staff are encouraged to submit suggestions for new topics which
might dealt with in International Accounting Standards.
The procedure for the development of an IAS is as follows:
The Board sets up a Steering Committee. Each Steering Committee is chaired by a

board representative and usually includes representatives of the accountancy bodies
in at least three other countries. Steering Committees may also include representatives
of other organisations that are represented on the Board or the Consultative Group or
that are expert in the particular topic.
The Steering Committee identies and reviews all the accounting issues associated
with the topic. The Steering Committee considers the application of IASCs framework
for the preparation and presentation of nancial statements to those accounting issues.
The Steering Committee also studies national and regional accounting requirements
and practice, including the different accounting treatments that may be appropriate in
different circumstances. Having considered the issues involved, the Steering Committee
may submit a point outline to the Board.
After receiving comments from the Board on the point outline, if any, the Steering
Committee normally prepares and publishes a Draft Statement of Principles or other
discussion document. The purpose of this statement is to set out the underlying
accounting principles that will form the basis for the preparation of the Exposure Draft. It
also describes the alternative solutions considered and the reasons for recommending
their acceptance or rejection. Comments are invited from all interested parties during
the exposure period, usually around three months. For revisions to an existing IAS, the
Board may instruct the Steering Committee to prepare an Exposure Draft without rst
publishing a Draft Statement of Principles.
The Steering committee reviews the comments on the Draft Statement of Principles
and normally agrees to a Final Statement of Principles, which is submitted to the Board
for approval and used as the basis for preparing an Exposure Draft of a proposed
IAS. The Final Statement of Principles is available to the public on request, but is not
formally published.
The Steering Committee prepares a draft Exposure Draft for approval by the Board.
After revision, and with the approval of at least two-thirds of the Board, the Exposure
Draft is published. Comments are invited from all interested parties during the exposure
period, a minimum of one month and usually at least three months, and
The Steering Committee reviews the comments and prepares draft IAS for review by
the board. After revision, and with the approval of at least three-quarters of the Board,
the standard is published.
Consultative Documents
These are documents relating to accounting issued by the body overseeing the profession and
they include the following:
Discussion papers: this is a paper which sets out a discussion of the issues involved
on an accounting topic as means of seeking public comment. Unlike exposure drafts,
which must always be issued prior to a standard, discussion papers are optional. They
are exploratory in nature and do not set out the text of a proposed standard.
Statement of intent: this is a public statement issued by the accounting profession
setting out a brief summary of how the profession intends to deal with a particular
matter. It is intended to be much less detailed than an exposure draft. It attempts to
focus its attention on the issues relating to a particular topic and on the accounting
policies which are proposed.
Exposure drafts: these are compulsory before introducing a standard. They set out accounting
procedures to be followed in a format similar to that of similar to that of the proposed standard.
T E X T
465
S T U D Y
CURRENT ISSUES
466
8.7 SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY ACCOUNTING
The concept of social responsibility underlies the debate about social responsibility accounting.
Accounting is a way of measuring and reporting values that enable sound decision making. The
question of for whom, how and when social responsibility report should be prepared is yet to be
answered.
Like its parent social responsibility, there is little agreement as to what constitutes social
responsibility accounting.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The corporate report of 1975, issued by the Accounting Standard Committee of UK which
identied seven groups of users of nancial information as having a reasonable right to receive
information from corporation, did recognise indirectly the need for social accounting. However,
it did not specify the decision models of these several groups nor did it consider it practical to
publish information of a social accounting in nature due to the absence of a generally accepted
measurement technique.
The scope of corporate social responsibility

Ernest and Ernest (1975) identied six areas of corporate social responsibility.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Environment
Energy
Fair business practices
Human resources
Community involvement
Product
Environment
This area involves the environmental aspect of production covering pollution control in the
conduct of business operations, prevention or repair of damage to the environment resulting from
processing resources of the national environment and conservation of the natural resources.
The main emphasis is on the negative aspects of the organisations activities. Thus, corporate
social objectives are to be found in the reduction of the negative external social effect of industrial
production and in adopting more efcient technologies to minimise the use of irreplaceable
resources and the production of wastes.
Energy
This area covers conservation of energy in the conduct of business operations and increasing
the energy efciency of the companys product.
CURRENT ISSUES
467
Fair business practices

This area is concerned with the relationship of a company to special interest groups, in particular
it deals with employment and advancement of minorities, the use of clear English in legal terms
and conditions to suppliers and customers and display of information on its product.
Human resources
This area is concerned with the impact of organisations activities on the people who contribute
the human resources of the organisation.
Community involvement
It considers the impact of organisations activities on individuals or groups of individuals outside
the company. It involves solving of community problems, manpower support, health related
activities, education and the arts and training and employment of handicapped persons.
Products
This area concerns the qualitative areas of a product e.g. the utility, durability, safety and
serviceability as well as the effect on pollution. Moreover, it includes customers satisfaction,
truthfulness in advertising, completeness and clarity in labeling and packaging.
S T U D Y
Recruiting practices
a) training programmes
b) experience building (job rotation)
c) job enrichment
d) wage and salary levels
e) fringe benet plans
f)
congruence of employees and organisations goals
g) mutual trust and condence
h) job security
i)
stability of work force
j)
layoffs and recall practices
k) transfer and promotion policies
l)
occupational health
T E X T
These include:
468
MODES OF DISCLOSURES
Descriptive approach
This approach merely lists corporate social activities and is the simplest and least informative.
They are easy to prepare. However, most of the information discussed is of a qualitative nature
rather than a nancial nature. As such it would be subjected to value judgment about the rms
social responses. It provides little scope for analysis and verications due to the information
being least informative. This appears to be the most prevalent form of social responsibility
accounting.
Comparability of nancial commitments to social activities overtime and across rms is impaired
when rms adopt this approach.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Critical voices also have argued that many social descriptive are nothing but public relations
gestures meant to ward off grass root attack by social activists and are adopted by companies
which believe useful measurements of corporate social reporting cannot be developed or is
difcult to develop.
Cost of outlay approach

In this approach corporate expenditure is listed on each social activity undertaken. It offers a
contrast to the descriptive report in the sense that the descriptions of activities are quantied. It
expands the scope of analysing the nancial commitments to social activities and veriability of the
amounts recorded relative to the descriptive approach. Comparability of nancial commitments
to social activities over time and across rms is enhanced but limited to expenditure incurred.
The main disadvantage to this approach is that no mention of the resulting benet is made.
This is because corporate expenditure is recorded in terms of the cash outlay, which is easily
determined unlike social benet, which is difcult to measure.
Cost benet approach

This is an extension of cost of outlay approach. It discloses both costs and benets associated
with corporate social responsibility. It is assumed that rms employing this approach make use
of shadow prices developed by economists in evaluating the social costs and social benets of
proposed projects from the point of view of all losers and all beneciaries within a nation.
This approach is the most informative approach but suffers from difculties which exist in the
measurement of the benets. Critics argue that output measures in monetary terms are contrived
(forced) and are not meaningful because the benets are mainly of a qualitative nature because
they are concerned with the quality of life.
In Kenya, it appears, companies highlight their social activities in their annual reports but few do
so in nancial terms.
CURRENT ISSUES
469
The concept of social responsibility accounting raises initial problems of dening not
only the users of such information but also their objectives in receiving such information.
In identifying users of information as having different objectives from those identied in
the Corporate Report (1975), poses complex problems of identifying what objectives
such groups will have in social accounting information. The problem is aggravated by
the inability to establish patterns of value judgments about the activities reported upon,
and stability in the opinions of the individuals, using social information, forming a group
of users. If the objective is to maximise some form of public utility based upon sets of
value judgments, it may be impossible to achieve that objective.
Due to the inability to develop measurements of performance which everyone will
accept that capture data in form permissive to social disclosure and analysis presents
a problem. Thus, many disclosures are narrative form and often reect only personal
opinion of the chief executive ofcer.
In the present institutional environment, most social responsibility disclosures are
voluntary and unaudited. Although disclosures may be readily available or identiable
in rms annual reports, management is free to use its own discretion in selecting
information to be reported. It is possible for poorer performance to bias their selections
in order to appear like better performers. Thus, social information becomes nebulous
and highly subjective.
Uncertainty to the meaning and extent of social responsibility appears to hinder
agreement on the dimensions of measurement problem as the beginning stage in search
for an appropriate measure. In Kenya, the Companies Act (CAP 486) which governs
and regulates the activities of corporations makes no provision for the requirement
of social disclosures in the annual reports of corporations. Neither does the Nairobi
Stock exchange require the listed companies to le with them reports relating to social
responsibility nor has ICPAK developed any standard that deals with the measurement
and reporting of social responsibilities assumed by individual enterprises.
Implications of social accounting
Presentation of accounting data is subject to two major parameters: the cost of providing
such data and the benets that accrue to the rm as a result of providing such data.
In providing accounting data relating to social responsiveness, corporations will incur
additional costs as a result of such an undertaking. Costs will manifest themselves
in the form of additional personnel employed (competent in social accounting) or the
training of existing personnel to equip them with the necessary skills and knowledge
or replacement of existing staff with new staff that is knowledgeable as far as social
accounting is concerned. Time used in the preparation of social disclosures, stationery
and the cost of a social audit to verify the information as being true and fair are among
many costs that the corporation will incur.
Increased costs of providing accounting information have a negative effect on the
earning ability of the corporations. This will result in the reduction of dividends and the
price of common stock. Thus, maximisation of shareholders wealth will cease to be the
primary goal rather it would be substituted by the objectiveness of satisfying all parties
needs which inuxes the shareholders payout may decrease.
It has been argued that social involvement benets both the enterprises and the society.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Problems of social accounting (disclosure)
S T U D Y
T E X T
470
Providing information reecting the degree of social involvement of an organisation

would provide a base upon which the public can evaluate the corporations social
responsiveness. Where in the eyes of the society, a corporation is socially responsible,
the corporate image of the rm would improve and the society would appreciate the
enterprises existence and would support it. On the other hand, a corporation that
is socially irresponsible would see it gradually sinking into customers and public
disfavour.
Investment decisions will in future be inuenced by the social involvement of

organisations. As societys value and expectations change, so do the values of investors.
Investors that are socially responsible would measure the performance of organisation
not only in terms of the ability of the organisation to maximise shareholders wealth but
also in terms of the degree to which the rm is socially responsible. Thus, measures
of success will tend largely to be inuenced by the extent to which organisations are
socially responsible.
Firms would have to ensure that in order for the objective of providing social disclosure
to be realised, social information will be of value to the readers. Various approaches
have been adopted by rms in making social disclosures. These includes the descriptive
approach, the cost outlay approach and the cost benet approach. Critics argue that
output measures in monetary terms are contrived and are not meaningful, because the
benets are mainly of a qualitative nature for they are concerned with the quality of life.
Thus, rms will have to strike a balance in using the approaches in such a manner that
will ensure public understandability of social information.
Adoption of measures that are used by economists in the measurement of social costs
and social benets would be an approach towards the economists measurements
of output and the calculation of Gross Domestic Product. This would ensure that
accounting data is compatible in satisfying the needs of economist in the calculation
of GDP. Such a calculation would not only be easy but there would always exist a
reference (accounting data) that can be used to conrm the gures resulting form the
calculation by the economist.
In an effort to encourage social involvement, the government through the income tax
department may provide special incentives and write offs for expenditure incurred as a
result of social activities. Tax minimization through charitable contributions are among
the effects that might be considered. Presently, donations made to research institutes
are tax allowable in Kenya.
The government, as the custodian of societys resources may in future forcefully

require the disclosure of the efforts the organisation will have on the society. The
Kenya government has shown concern in those rms that adopt technologies that not
environment friendly.
All in all, businesses cannot afford to ignore the broader public demands. They must not only
provide quantities of goods and services, but also contribute to the quality of life. In light of changing
conditions and society expectations and despite the remoteness of some of the benets, it is in
the business interest as articial citizens to recognise both economic and social obligations.
CONCLUSION
Social responsibility accounting stems from the concept of corporate social responsibility. It
widens the scope for shareholders by recognising the society at large as being important users
of nancial statements. Supporters of social accounting argue that business is part of a large
CURRENT ISSUES
471
society (social system). As the public increasingly accepts this view, it judges each social unit as
a business in terms of its contribution to society as a whole.
Like its parent social responsibility, there is little agreement as to what constitutes social
responsibility accounting. To undertake social accounting, accountants must reach a consensus
as to what constitutes social responsibility. This maybe, in past, decided for the accountants by
those to whom the information is directed. Once the problem of what accountants are measuring
is settled, accountants must confront the question of how this behaviour can be measured.
Costs may easily be quantied (although opportunity costs are not easily measured), but the
more concern is that of the benets of socially responsible behaviour. These are often not easily
reduced to monetary terms. Accountants may choose to borrow the concept of shadow pricing
from the economists in an attempt to reduce the benets of socially responsible behaviour to
monetary term.
Introduction
The major areas of impact on (any) accountants job caused by consideration of environmental
matters includes:
Management accountant
Investment appraisal: evaluation of environmental costs and benets
Incorporating new costs, capital expenditure and so on, in to budgets and business
plans
Undertake cost/benet analysis of any environmental improvements
Financial accountant
The effect of revenue costs: site cleanup costs, waste disposal or waste treatment
costs and so on, which will affect the prot and loss account
Gauging balance sheet impacts, particularly liabilities, contingencies, provisions and
valuations of assets
The effect of environmental matters, and particularly potential liabilities, on a companys
relationship with bankers, insurers and major shareholders (institutional shareholders)
Environmental performance evaluation in annual reports
Project accountant
Environmental audit of proposed takeovers, mergers and other planning matters
Investment appraisal
Internal auditor: environmental audit
Systems accountant: effect on, and required changes to management and nancial
information systems
S T U D Y
8.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REPORTS
T E X T
Enterprises need to be aware that social accounting like social responsibility is a new phenomenon
in Kenya. They need to develop their own guidelines to assist in the reporting of their environment
performance to the society. With the change in society values, businesses may nd themselves
compelled to undertake social accounting. Currently, we may have to satisfy ourselves with
representing benets in qualitative terms. However, this area shows much potential for progress
and will undoubtedly become an important part of the audit eld
472
What is environmental accounting?

The following list encompasses the major aspects of environmental accounting.
Recognising and seeking to mitigate the negative environmental effects of conventional

accounting practices
Separately identifying environmentally related costs and revenues within the conventional
accounting systems
Devising new forms of nancial and non-nancial accounting systems, information
systems and control systems to encourage more environmentally benign management
decisions
Developing new forms of performance measurement, reporting and appraisal for both
internal and external purposes
Identifying, examining and seeking to rectify areas in which conventional (nancial)
criteria and environmental criteria are in conict
Experimenting with ways in which, sustainability may be assessed and incorporated
into organisational orthodoxy
The means of codifying a companys attitude towards the environment is often the creation of a
published environment policy document or charter. This may be internally generated or it may be
adopted from a standard environmental charter such as the Valdez principles.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The whole environmental agenda is constantly changing and businesses therefore need to
monitor the situation closely.
The Valdez principles

We adopt, support and will implement the principles of:
Protection of the biosphere

Sustainable use of natural resources
Reduction and disposal of waste
Wise use of energy
Risk reduction
Marketing of safe products and services
Damage compensation
Disclosure
Environmental directors and managers
Assessment an annual audit
The problem here, as with other similar principles or charters, is that the commitment required
from companies is generally too high and the fear exists that the principles may have legal status
which could have a sever effect on a companys liability. Adopting such a charter is one thing;
implementing and monitoring it are more important and generally more difcult to achieve.
CURRENT ISSUES
473
Environmental audit
Environmental auditing is exactly what it says: auditing a business to assess its impact on the
environment or the systematic examination of the interactions between any business operation
and its surroundings.
The audit will cover a range of areas and will involve the performance of different types of
testing. The scope of the audit must be determined and this will depend on each individual
organisation.
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIAs) are required, under EC directive, for all
major projects which require planning permission and have a material effect on the
environment. The EIA process can be incorporated into any environmental auditing
strategy.
Environmental surveys are a good way of starting the audit process, by looking at the
organisation as a whole in environmental terms. This helps to identify areas for further
development, problems, potential hazards and so forth.
Environmental SWOT analysis. A strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, threats
analysis is useful as the environmental audit strategy is being developed. This can only
be done later in the process, when the organisation has been examined in much more
detail.
Environmental quality management. This is seen as part of TQM (Total Quality
Management) and it should be built in to an environmental management system.
Eco-audit. The European commission has adopted a proposal for a regulation for a
voluntary community environmental auditing scheme, known as the eco-audit scheme.
The scheme aims to promote improvements in company environmental performance
and to provide the public with information about these improvements. Once registered,
a company will have to comply with certain on-going obligations involving disclosure
and audit.
Eco-labelling. Developed in Germany, this voluntary scheme will indicate those EC
products, which meet the highest environmental standards, probably as the result of
an EQM system. It is suggested that eco-audit must come before an eco-label can be
given.
BS 7750 environmental management systems. BS 7750 also ties in with eco-audits and
eco-labelling and with the quality BSI standard BS 5750. achieving BS 7750 is likely to
be a rst step in the eco-audit process.
Supplier audits, to ensure that goods and services bought in by an organisation meet
the standards applied by that organisation.
Financial reporting
There are no international disclosure requirements relating to environmental matters, so any
disclosures tend to be voluntary unless environmental matters happen to fall under standard
accounting principles (e.g. recognising liabilities).
S T U D Y
T E X T
There are, however, some aspects of the approach to environmental auditing, which are worth
mentioning especially within the European Countries.
474
In most cases disclosure is descriptive and unquantied

There is little motivation to produce environmental information and many reasons for
not doing so, including secrecy.
The main factor seems to be apathy on the part of businesses but more particularly on
the part of shareholders and investors. The information is not demanded, so it is not
provided.
Environmental matters may be reported in the accounts of companies in the following

areas:
Contingent liabilities
Exceptional charges
Operating and nancial review comments
Prot and capital expenditure forecasts
S T U D Y
T E X T
The voluntary approach contrast with the position in the United States, where the SEC/FASB
accounting standards are obligatory.
8.9
APPLICATION OF ACCOUNTING RESEARCH
Accounting research can be applied to determine solutions to various accounting problems

and to aid in improving the current methods applied in accounting. Research can be applied in
many situations including nding solutions to the accounting treatment of certain transactions
in the nancial statements, nancial reporting for specialized institutions and improvements
to accounting standards. One of the applications of accounting research has been the use of
various models to predict company failures.
>>> Consider the following example on the Altmans Z score model.
One of the directors of Uwezo Ltd. had recently read an article on methods of predicting corporate
failure. He was particularly interested in one of the methods, which combined ve variables and
calculated a Z-score by multiplying each variable by a discriminant coefcient.
The ve variables (labelled X1, X2, X3, X4, X5) were as follows:
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
=
=
=
=
=
net working capital/total assets

retained earnings/total assets
earnings before interest and taxes/total assets
market value of equity/book value of total debt securities
sales/total assets
(%)
(%)
(%)
(%)
(times)
CURRENT ISSUES
475
The Z score was calculated using the following formula

Z score = 0.012 X 1 + 0.014 X 2 + 0.033 X 3 + 0.006 X 4 + 0.999 X 5
The score was interpreted on the basis that all companies with a score less than 1.81 were likely
to fail; all companies with a score greater than 2.99 were unlikely to fail; companies with scores
between 1.81 and 2.99 were likely to consist of companies that may fail.
The director avails to you the following information of Uwezo ltd.
Ordinary shares of Sh. 10 each

10% cumulative preference shares
of Sh. 10 each
General reserve
Prot as at 1.1.99
8% debentures
Prot for the year
Capital redemption reserve
Accounts payable
Accrued expenses
Deferred taxation1.1.1999
Investment income
Investments
Inventories
Installment tax paid
Accounts receivable
Bank
Dr
Cr
000
000
72,000
20,000
36,400
45,000
10,000
75,600
5,800
82,600
14,000
33,100
280
220,000
5,020
131,600
15,000
14,600
8,560
394,780
394,780
(b)
Prots accrued evenly throughout the year
(c)
Provision is to be made for

(i) The preference dividend
(ii) The proposed ordinary dividend of 10%
(d)
Tax on the current years prot is estimated at Sh.38,000,000
(e)
A transfer of Sh. 3,400,000 is to be made to the general reserve
(f)
Sales for the year totalled Sh. 420,000,000 of which Sh. 20,000,000 was value added
tax
(g)
The market value of equity is calculated using a PE ratio of 5:1 applied to

earnings before tax and investment income, but after debenture interest
T E X T
Trial balance as at 31st December 1999
S T U D Y
(a)
476
Subsequently, he requests you:

(a)
To briey explain the possible reasons for the selection of each of the ve variables that
have been included in the formula.
To calculate the Z score for Uwezo ltd, using the formula provided (round to two decimal
places.
To briey give your own views, with supporting calculations of the company liquidity.
(b)
(c)
Solution
(a)
X1
Net working capital

Total assets
100
S T U D Y
T E X T
Net working capital is a measure of liquidity. Where current assets are more than current liabilities,
it is assumed that an enterprise is able to meet its short-term obligations when they fall due.
By expressing net working capital as a percentage of the total assets, one is determining the
proportion of working capital to total assets where the percentage is high; this implies that the
enterprise is highly liquid and least likely to go into liquidation. Conversely, if the percentage is
low, this may imply that the rm is less liquid and more likely to go into liquidation since a high
proportion of its assets are xed assets.
X2
Retained earnings
Total assets
100
This variable measures the extent to which total assets have been nanced by retained earnings.
Firms that demonstrate high nance of their assets by equity through retention of earnings
rather than borrowings are low geared and are more likely to survive than those that are highly
geared.
X3
Earnings before interest and taxes

Total assets
100
This measures the return on capital employed. Enterprises that have a good return on their
assets will most likely have funds available to nance their assets activities and are therefore
unlikely to have liquidation problems.
X4
Market value of equity

Book value of total debt
100
This ratio measures the relative proportion by which the assets are nanced by the owners and
outsiders. Those rms that rely heavily on debt to nance their assets will have a low ratio and
hence prone to liquidation.
X5
Sales
Total assets
This ratio measures the efciency with which assets are utilised to generate sales. Firms that
have a high turnover ratio are assumed to use their assets efciently and are more likely to
survive than those that have a low turnover.
CURRENT ISSUES
(i) Net working capital

Current assets
Inventories
Accounts receivable
Bank
Sh 000
131,600
14,600
8,560
154,760
Current liabilities
Accounts payable
Accrued expenses
Dividends Preference
- Ordinary
Tax payable (38,000 15,000)
82,600
14,000
2,000
7,200
23,000
(128,800)
25,960
Net working capital

Total Assets
Investments
Current assets
220,000
5,020
154,760
379,780
(iii) Retained earnings

Prot 1.1.99
General reserve
Prot for the year
Investment income
Tax
Dividends
45,000
36,400
75,600
280
(38,000)
(9,200)
T E X T
(ii)
28,680
110,080
(iv) Earnings before interest and taxes

Tutorial note: since the return on total assets is being measured and total assets include
investment income is included.
Prot for the year
Interest:
8% 10,000
75,600
800
76,400
280
76,680
Investment income
(v)
Market value of equity

75,600 5
378,000
Z score
X1: 0.012 25,960
379,780
X2: 0.014 110,080
379,780
100
100
0.08
0.41
S T U D Y
(b)
477
478
X3: 0.033 76,680

379,780
100
= 0.67
100
X4: 0.006 378,000
20,000 + 10,000
= 7.56
X5: 0.999 400,000

379,780
= 1.05
100
9.77
(c)
Current ratio
Acid-test ratio
1.20:1
0.18:1
S T U D Y
T E X T
From the above two short-term liquidity ratios, the enterprise is at risk of being forced into
liquidation. This is in contrast with the implication of the Z score which suggest that the risk of the
enterprise failing is very remote.
CHAPTER SUMMARY
Assets: an asset is recognised in the balance sheet when it is probable that the future economic
benets will ow to the enterprise and the asset has a cost or value that can be measured
reliably.
Liabilities: a liability is recognised in the balance sheet when it is probable that an outow of
resources embodying economic benets will result from the settlement of a present obligation
and he amount at which the settlement will take place can be measured reliably.
Equity: This refers to the residual interests in the assets of the business.
CURRENT ISSUES
479
income statement.
chosen and established by the bodies overseeing the accounting profession.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Environmental auditing: auditing a business to assess its impact on the environment or

the systematic examination of the interactions between any business operation and its
surroundings.
CHAPTER QUIZ
1. What are the nancial position measurement elements in the balance sheet?
2. What are the performance elements in the income statement?
3. What are the measurement bases?
4. Identify the users of nancial accounting reports.
480

1.
Financial position measurement elements in the balance sheet include:

Assets: an asset is recognised in the balance sheet when it is probable that the future
economic benets will ow to the enterprise and the asset has a cost or value that can
S T U D Y
T E X T
Liabilities: a liability is recognised in the balance sheet when it is probable that an

outow of resources embodying economic benets will result from the settlement of
a present obligation and the amount at which the settlement will take place can be
measured reliably.
Equity: This refers to the residual interests in the assets of the business .The amount
at which equity is shown in the balance sheet is dependent on the measurement of
assets and liabilities. Normally, the aggregate amount of equity only by coincidence
corresponds with the aggregate market value of the shares of the entity or the sum that
could be raised by disposing of either the net assets on a piecemeal basis or the entity
as a whole on a going concern basis.
2.
Performance measurements elements in the income statement include:
(i)
Income: income is recognised in the income statement when an increase in future

economic benets related to an increase in an asset or a decrease of a liability has
arisen that can be measured reliably.
(ii)
Expenses: expenses are recognised in the income statement when a decrease in future
economic benets related to a decrease in an asset or an increase of a liability has
arisen that can be measured reliably.
Expenses are recognised in the income statement on the basis of a direct association
between the costs incurred and the earning of specic items of income. This process,
commonly referred to as the matching of costs with revenues, involves the simultaneous
or combined recognition of revenues and expenses that result directly and jointly from
the same transactions or other events.
3.
Measurement bases include:
Historical cost: Assets are recorded at the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or
the fair value of the consideration given to acquire them at the time of their acquisition.
of business.
Current cost: assets are carried at the amount of cash or cash equivalents that would
have to be paid if the same or an equivalent asset was acquired currently. Liabilities are
carried at the undiscounted amount of cash or cash equivalents that would be required
to settle the obligation currently.
Realisable (settlement) value: assets are carried at the amount of cash or cash
equivalents that could currently be obtained by selling the asset in an orderly disposal.
Liabilities are carried at their settlement values; that is, the undiscounted amounts of
cash or cash equivalents expected to be paid to satisfy the liabilities in the normal
course of business.
Present value: assets are carried at the present discounted value of the future net cash
inows that the item is expected to generate in the normal course of business. Liabilities
are carried at the present discounted value of the future net cash outows that are
expected to be required to settle the liabilities in the normal course of business.
4.
The framework identies the following users of nancial statements:
(a)
Investors: concerned with the risk inherent in, and return provided by, their
investments.
Employees: concerned with their employers stability and protability and their ability to
provide remuneration and other benets
Lenders: interested in information that enables them to determine whether their loans,
and the interest attaching to them, will be paid when due.
Suppliers and other trade creditors: information to determine whether amounts owing to
them will be paid when due.
Customers: information about the continuance of an enterprise.
Government and their agencies: have interests in resource allocation and thus the
activities of an enterprise. Also to be able to regulate activities of an enterprise, determine
taxation policies etc.
Public: needs information about trends and recent developments in the prosperity of the
enterprise and the range of its enterprise.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
PAST PAPER ANALYSIS

Concepts of capital and capital maintenance was tested in: 06/07
Social responsibility accounting was tested in the following examinations:

12/06
06/05
02/02
Environmental reports was tested in: 06/05
T E X T
481
S T U D Y
CURRENT ISSUES
482
EXAM QUESTION
S T U D Y
T E X T
QUESTION ONE
(1)
The elements of nancial statements are normally carried in the balance sheet and
income statements at some predetermined monetary amount. Discuss the most
common bases an enterprise may adopt in preparing their nancial statements.
(2)
The concept of capital maintenance is primarily concerned with how an enterprise

denes the capital that it seeks to maintain.
(3)
Explain clearly the concepts of nancial capital maintenance and physical capital
maintenance.
(4)
How is prot earned under each of the two concepts above?
483
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
CHAPTER NINE
SUMMARIES OF
INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS
AND INTERPRETATIONS
[(IFRSs), (IASs) AND (IFRIC/
SIC)]
S T U D Y
T E X T
484
485
SUMMARIES
OF INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL REPORTING
STANDARDS (IFRSs), INTERNATIONAL
ACCOUNTING STANDARDS (IASs) AND IFRIC/SIC
INTERPRETATIONS AS OF 31st DECEMBER 2005
OVERVIEW OF INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL REPORTING STANDARDS
(IFRSS)
The Interpretations of International Accounting Standards issued by the International Financial

Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) (formerly, the Standing Interpretations Committee
(SIC)) do not have the same status as IAS, but, in accordance with IAS 1, Presentation of
Financial Statements, paragraph 11, nancial statements should not be described as complying
with International Accounting Standards unless they comply with all the requirements of
each applicable Standard and each applicable interpretation of the Standing Interpretations
Committee.
IFRS and IAS Summaries

IASB publishes its Standards in a series of pronouncements called International Financial
Reporting Standards (IFRS). It has also adopted the body of Standards issued by the Board of
the International Accounting Standards Committee (IASC). Those pronouncements continue to
be designated International Accounting Standards (IAS). This section provides summaries of
the Standards issued and in force.
S T U D Y
The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) announced in April 2001 that its accounting
standards would be designated International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Also in April
2001, the IASB announced that it would adopt all of the International Accounting Standards
issued by the IASC.
T E X T
Statements of International Accounting Standards issued by the Board of the International

Accounting Standards Committee (IASC) between 1973 and 2001 are designated International
Accounting Standards (IAS).
486
I. IFRS SUMMARIES
IFRS 1: First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting
Standards
Introduction:
IFRS 1 First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards was issued in June
2003 and applies to an entity whose rst IFRS nancial statements are for a period beginning on
or after 1 January 2004. IFRS 1 also applies to each interim nancial report, if any, that the entity
presents under IAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting for part of the period covered by its rst IFRS
nancial statements.
IFRS 1 applies when an entity adopts IFRSs for the rst time by an explicit and unreserved
statement of compliance with IFRSs.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Summary of IFRS 1:
In general, IFRS 1 requires an entity to comply with each IFRS effective at the reporting date
for its rst IFRS nancial statements. In particular, in its opening IFRS balance sheet an entity
must:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Recognise all assets and liabilities whose recognition is required by IFRSs;

Not recognise items as assets or liabilities if IFRSs do not permit such recognition;
Reclassify items that it recognised under previous GAAP as one type of asset, liability
or component of equity, that are a different type of asset, liability or component of equity
under IFRSs; and
Apply IFRSs in measuring all recognised assets and liabilities. The transition provisions
in other IFRSs do not apply to a rst-time adopters transition to IFRSs.
IFRS 1 grants limited exemptions from these requirements in specied areas where the cost of
complying would be likely to exceed the benets to users of nancial statements. Exemptions
exist in the following areas:
Business combinations;
Fair value or revaluation as deemed cost for certain non-current assets;
Dened benet employee benet plans;
Cumulative translation differences;
Compound nancial instruments;
Assets and liabilities of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures;
Designation of previously recognised nancial instruments;
Share-based payment transactions; and
Insurance contracts.
The IFRS also prohibits retrospective application of IFRSs in some cases, particularly where
retrospective application would require judgments by management about past conditions after
the outcome of a particular transaction is already known.
SUMMARIES OF INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS AND INTERPRETATIONS
487
IFRS 1 requires disclosures that explain how the transition from previous GAAP to IFRSs affected
the entitys reported nancial position, nancial performance and cash ows.
IFRS 2: Share Based Payment

Introduction:
IFRS 2 Share-based Payment was issued in February 2004 and applies to annual periods
beginning on or after 1 January 2005.
IFRS 2 prescribes the nancial reporting by an entity when it undertakes a share-based payment
transaction. It applies to grants of shares, share options or other equity instruments made after
7 November 2002 that had not yet vested at the effective date of the IFRS. IFRS 2 applies
retrospectively to liabilities arising from share-based payment transactions existing at the effective
date.
For equity-settled share-based payment transactions with employees (and others providing
similar services), the measurement of the transaction amount is based on the fair value of the
equity instruments granted. Fair value is measured at grant date. The valuation focuses on the
specic terms and conditions of a grant of shares or share options to employees. In general,
vesting conditions are not taken into account in the grant date valuation but the number of equity
instruments included in the measurement of the transaction amount is adjusted so that, ultimately,
the transaction amount is based on the number of equity instruments that vest.
The IFRS sets out requirements if the terms and conditions of an option or share grant are modied
or if a grant is cancelled, repurchased or replaced with another grant of equity instruments. IFRS
2 also contains requirements for equity-settled transactions with other parties (i.e. other than
employees and those providing similar services).
For cash-settled transactions, the good or services received and the liability incurred are measured
at the fair value of the liability. The liability is remeasured to fair value at each reporting date and
at the date of settlement, with changes in fair value recognised in prot or loss.
IFRS 2 also species requirements for transactions in which the terms of the arrangement provide
either the entity or the supplier of goods or services with a choice of whether the entity settles the
transaction in cash (or other assets) or by issuing equity instruments.
IFRS 2 species disclosures about share-based payment transactions.
S T U D Y
IFRS 2 requires an entity to reect in its prot and loss and nancial position the effects of
share-based payment transactions, including expenses associated with share options granted
to employees.
T E X T
Summary of IFRS 2:
488
IFRS 3: Business Combinations (Replaced IAS 22 Business

Combinations)
Introduction:
IFRS 3 Business Combinations was issued in March 2004 and is applicable for business
combinations for which the agreement date is on or after 31 March 2004.
IFRS 3 prescribes the nancial reporting by an entity when it undertakes a business combination.
A business combination is the bringing together of separate entities or businesses into one
reporting entity. IFRS 3 does not apply to:
T E X T
Summary of IFRS 3:
S T U D Y
Business combinations in which separate entities or businesses are brought together to

form a joint venture;
Business combinations involving entities or businesses under common control;
Business combinations involving two or more mutual entities; and
Business combinations in which separate entities or businesses are brought together
to form a reporting entity by contract alone without the obtaining of an ownership
interest.
The acquirer measures the cost of a business combination as the aggregate of:
All business combinations are accounted for by applying the purchase method, which views the
business combination from the perspective of the acquirer. The acquirer is the combining entity
that obtains control of the other combining entities or businesses (the acquiree).
The fair values, at the date of exchange, of assets given, liabilities incurred or assumed,
and equity instruments issued by the acquirer, in exchange for control of the acquiree;
plus
Any costs directly attributable to the business combination. Any adjustment to the cost
of the combination, that is contingent on future events, is included in the cost of the
combination at the acquisition date if the adjustment is probable and can be measured
reliably.
The acquirer allocates the cost of the business combination by recognising the acquirees
identiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities at their fair value at the date of acquisition,
except for non-current assets that are classied as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5
Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations. Such assets held for sale are
recognised at fair value less costs to sell.
Goodwill, being the excess of the cost over the acquirers interest in the net fair value of the
identiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities, is recognised as an asset. Goodwill is
subsequently carried at cost less any accumulated impairment losses in accordance with IAS
36 Impairment of Assets. If the acquirers interest in the net fair value of the identiable assets,
liabilities and contingent liabilities exceeds the cost of the combination, the acquirer:
Reassesses the identication and measurement of the acquirees identiable assets,
489
liabilities and contingent liabilities and the measurement of the cost of the combination;
and
Recognises immediately in prot or loss any excess remaining after that
reassessment.
For business combinations that are achieved in stages;
IFRS 3 species the accounting treatment:
Where fair values can only be determined provisionally in the period of acquisition;
Where deferred tax assets are recognised after the accounting for the acquisition is
complete; and
For previously recognised goodwill, negative goodwill and intangible assets.
IFRS 3 also species disclosures about business combinations and any related goodwill.
IFRS 4: Insurance Contracts
IFRS 4 prescribes the nancial reporting for insurance contracts by any entity that issues such
contracts. It applies to insurance contracts issued, reinsurance contracts held and nancial
instruments issued with a discretionary participation feature. It does not apply to:
Product warranties issued directly by a manufacturer, dealer or retailer (IAS 18 Revenue

and IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets);
Employers assets and liabilities under employee benet plans (IAS 19 Employee
Benets) and retirement benet obligations reported by dened benet retirement plans
(IAS 26 Accounting and Reporting by Retirement Benet Plans);
Contractual rights or obligations that are contingent on the future use of or right to use
a non-nancial item, as well as lessees residual value guarantees on nance leases
(IAS 17 Leases; IAS 18 Revenue and IAS 38 Intangible Assets);
Financial guarantees entered into or retained on transferring nancial assets or nancial
liabilities within the scope of IAS 39;
Contingent consideration payable or receivable in a business combination (IFRS 3
Business Combinations);
Direct insurance contracts that an entity holds as a policyholder.
An entity need not apply some aspects of IFRS 4 to comparative information that relates to
annual periods beginning before 1 January 2005.
Summary of IFRS 4:
IFRS 4 is phase I of the IASBs project on insurance contracts. An entity is temporarily exempt
from some requirements of other IFRSs, including the requirement in IAS 8 to consider the
S T U D Y
IFRS 4 Insurance Contracts was issued in March 2004 and is applicable for annual periods
beginning on or after 1 January 2005.
T E X T
Introduction:
490
Framework in selecting accounting policies for insurance contracts. However, IFRS 4:
Prohibits recognition as a liability of provisions for possible future claims under insurance
contracts that are not in existence at the reporting date (such as catastrophe provisions
and equalisation provisions);
Requires assessment of the adequacy of recognised insurance liabilities and recognition
of any impairment of reinsurance assets;
Requires an entity to keep insurance liabilities in its balance sheet until they are
discharged or cancelled, or expire, and to present insurance liabilities without offsetting
them against related reinsurance assets.
An entity may change its accounting policies for insurance contracts only if, as a result, its
nancial statements are more relevant and no less reliable, or more reliable and no less relevant.
In particular, an entity must not introduce any of the following practices, although it may continue
using accounting policies that involve them:
S T U D Y
T E X T
a)
b)
c)
d)
Measuring insurance liabilities on an undiscounted basis;

Measuring contractual rights to future investment management fees at an amount that
exceeds their fair value as implied by a comparison with current fees charged by other
market participants for similar services;
Using non-uniform accounting policies for the insurance contracts of subsidiaries;
Measuring insurance liabilities with excessive prudence.
There is a rebuttable presumption that an insurers nancial statements will become less relevant
and reliable if it introduces an accounting policy that reects future investment margins in the
measurement of insurance contracts. When an insurer changes its accounting policies for
insurance liabilities, it may reclassify some or all nancial assets as at fair value through prot
or loss.
IFRS 4 species the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
An entity need not account for an embedded derivative separately at fair value if the
embedded derivative meets the denition of an insurance contract.
An entity is required to unbundle (ie account separately for) deposit components of
some insurance contracts.
An entity may apply shadow accounting (that is, account for both realised and unrealised
gains and losses on assets in the same way relative to measurement of insurance
liabilities).
Discretionary participation features contained in insurance contracts or nancial
instruments may be recognised separately from the guaranteed element and classied
as a liability or as a separate component of equity.
IFRS 4 also species disclosures about:

a)
b)
The amounts in the entitys nancial statements that arise from insurance contracts;
and
The amount, timing and uncertainty of future cash ows from insurance contracts.
491
Some Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) on IFRS 4 Insurance

Contracts-July 2004
2.
a)
b)
3.
4.
Why did the Board split this project into two phases?
Few insurers report under IFRSs at present, but many more are expected to do so from
2005, particularly in the European Union and Australia. To enable insurers to implement
some aspects of the project in 2005, the Board split the project into two phases. The
Board completed phase I in March 2004 by issuing IFRS 4 Insurance Contracts. The
Boards objectives for phase I were:
to make limited interim improvements to accounting for insurance contracts;
To require any entity issuing insurance contracts (an insurer) to disclose information
about those contracts.
How do IFRSs treat nancial assets that insurers hold to back their insurance
contracts?
IFRS 4 does not change the measurement of nancial assets held by insurers to back
insurance contracts. These assets are within the scope of IAS 39, which identies four
categories of nancial asset. In summary:
nancial assets classied as at fair value through prot or loss (including all nancial
assets held for trading and all derivatives) are measured at fair value, and all changes
in their fair value are included in prot or loss.
Available-for-sale assets (i.e. those that do not fall into any of the other categories) are
measured at fair value and changes in their fair value are reported in equity until the
asset is derecognised or becomes impaired.
Assets with a xed maturity (held-to-maturity investments) may be measured at
amortised cost if the entity intends to hold them to maturity and shows that it has the
ability to do so.
Most loans and receivables may be measured at amortised cost.
What is accounting mismatch?
Accounting mismatch arises if changes in economic conditions affect assets and
liabilities to the same extent, but the carrying amounts of those assets and liabilities
do not respond equally to those economic changes. Specically, accounting mismatch
occurs if an entity uses different measurement bases for assets and liabilities.
It is important to distinguish accounting mismatch from economic mismatch. Economic
mismatch arises if the values of, or cash ows from, assets and liabilities respond
differently to changes in economic conditions.
T E X T
Why do we need an IFRS on insurance contracts?

The Board decided to develop an International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) on
insurance contracts because:
Before IFRS 4, there was no IFRS on insurance contracts, and insurance contracts were
excluded from the scope of existing IFRSs that would otherwise be relevant (IFRSs on
provisions, nancial instruments, and intangible assets).
Accounting practices for insurance contracts were very diverse, and also often differed
from practices in other sectors.
S T U D Y
1.
492
Is the IASB alone in not eliminating the accounting mismatch?

Extending the use of amortised cost would have created an inconsistency with US GAAP.
The accounting mismatch described above has existed for some years in US GAAP, which
requires insurers to account for their nancial assets in broadly the same way as under IAS 39.
Furthermore, the US Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) decided in January 2004
not to add to its agenda a project to reconsider US GAAP for investments held by life insurance
companies.
Does the separate measurement of assets and liabilities ignore the

importance of asset and liability management?
S T U D Y
T E X T
Asset and liability management is an important part of an insurers risk management. IFRS
4 underlines this by requiring disclosures about it. However, the fact that an insurer invests
premiums received in particular assets does not affect the fair value of the liability (unless the
cash ows from the asset determine the amounts paid to policyholders).
A simple analogy may help to explain this. Three entities each issue one-year bonds for proceeds
of 100. The bonds require a single payment of 105 in one year. The rst entity invests the
proceeds in one-year government securities bearing interest at 5%, payable annually. The
second entity invests the proceeds in traded equity investments. The third entity invests the
proceeds in a diversied portfolio of venture capital investments. The second and third entities
believe (probably quite rationally) that the most likely outcome is that their assets will grow by
more than 5% in 12 months. However, the fair value of the assets at inception is no more than
100. Similarly, the fair value of the liability is no less than 100 (assuming that the possibility of
default is negligible).
Some insurers use asset-liability management programmes that involve investing in assets to
provide the optimal risk-return trade-off for the package of assets and liabilities. Such programmes
do not necessarily eliminate economic mismatch. For example, as discussed in paragraph 12,
economic mismatch exists if an insurer acquires equity securities to back insurance liabilities
providing benets that are not contractually linked to those securities, even if those securities form
part of a portfolio that provides an optimal trade-off between risk and return for those liabilities.
Can insurers nd a way to explain the effect of the accounting

mismatch?
IAS 1 and IAS 32 do not preclude a presentation identifying a separate component of equity to
report a portion of the change (and cumulative change) in the carrying amount of xed-maturity
available-for-sale nancial assets. An insurer could use such a presentation to highlight the effect
on equity of changes in interest rates that (a) changed the carrying amount of assets but (b)
did not change the carrying amount of liabilities that respond economically to changing interest
rates.
Insurers may be particularly sensitive to equity reported in general purpose nancial statements
in some countries where this amount is used in assessing compliance with regulatory capital
493
requirements. However, although insurance supervisors are important users of general purpose
nancial statements, those nancial statements are not directed at specic needs of insurance
supervisors that other users do not share. Furthermore, supervisors generally have the power to
obtain additional information that meets their specic needs. In the Boards view, creating new
exemptions from IAS 39 in this area would not have been the best way to meet the common needs
of users (including insurance supervisors) of an insurers general purpose nancial statements.
What is shadow accounting?

In some accounting models, realised gains or losses on an insurers assets have a direct effect
on the measurement of some or all of its insurance liabilities. When many of those models
were constructed, unrealised gains and most unrealised losses were not recognised in nancial
statements. Some of those models were extended later to require some nancial assets to be
measured at fair value, with changes in fair value recognised directly in equity (i.e. the same
treatment as for available-for-sale nancial assets under IAS 39).
In principle, gains and losses on an asset should not inuence the measurement of an
insurance liability (unless the gains or losses on the asset alter the amounts payable
to policyholders). Nevertheless, the Board decided that it was not feasible to eliminate
this practice in phase I.
Shadow accounting permits all recognised gains and losses on assets to affect the
measurement of insurance liabilities in the same way, regardless of whether:
o the gains and losses are realised or unrealised and
o unrealised gains and losses are recognised in prot or loss or directly in equity.
This is a logical application of a feature of some existing models.
Because the Board does not expect that feature of existing models to survive in phase
II, insurers should not be required to develop temporary systems to apply shadow
accounting.
If an unrealised gain or loss on an asset triggers a shadow accounting adjustment to a
liability, that adjustment should be recognised in the same way as the unrealised gain
or loss.
In some cases and to some extent, shadow accounting might mitigate accounting
mismatch caused by using different measurement bases for assets and insurance
liabilities. However, that is a by-product of shadow accounting and not its primary
purpose.
When this happened, a practice sometimes known as shadow accounting was developed with
the following two features:
A recognised but unrealised gain or loss on an asset affects the measurement of the
insurance liability in the same way that a realised gain or loss does.
If unrealised gains or losses on an asset are recognised directly in equity, the resulting
change in the carrying amount of the insurance liability is also recognized in equity.
S T U D Y
T E X T
The Boards conclusions in relation to shadow accounting were as follows:
494
IFRS 5: Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued

Operations (Replaced IAS 35 Discontinued Operations)
Introduction:
IFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations was issued in March
2004 and is applicable for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2005.
IFRS 5 prescribes the accounting for assets held for sale, and the presentation and disclosure of
discontinued operations. The measurement provisions of IFRS 5 apply to all non-current assets
and disposal groups, except for:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Deferred tax assets (IAS 12 Income Taxes);

Assets arising from employee benets (IAS 19 Employee Benets);
Financial assets within the scope of IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and
Measurement;
Non-current assets that are accounted for in accordance with the fair value model in
IAS 40 Investment Property;
Non-current assets that are measured at fair value less estimated point-of-sale costs in
accordance with IAS 41 Agriculture; and
Contractual rights under insurance contracts as dened in IFRS 4 Insurance
Contracts.
Summary of IFRS 5:
Assets held for sale
A non-current asset (or disposal group) is classied as held for sale if its carrying amount will be
recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use. That is, the
asset (or disposal group) is available for immediate sale and its sale is highly probable.
A non-current asset (or disposal group) classied as held for sale is measured at the lower of fair
value less costs to sell and its carrying amount.
Any impairment loss on write-down of the asset (or disposal group) to fair value less costs to sell
is recognised in prot or loss. Any gain on subsequent increase in fair value less costs to sell
is also recognised in prot or loss, but not in excess of the cumulative impairment loss already
recognised on the asset either in accordance with IFRS 5 or IAS 36 Impairment of Assets.
Discontinued Operations
A discontinued operation is a component of an entity that either has been disposed of or is held
for sale. It may be a subsidiary, or a major line of business or geographical area. It will have
been a cash-generating unit (or group of cash-generating units) as dened in IAS 36 Impairment
of Assets.
495
Disclosures of discontinued operations include:
Analysis of the post-tax prot or loss into revenue, expenses, pre-tax prot or loss, and
the related income tax expense;
The gain or loss recognised on measurement to fair value less costs to sell or on
disposal, and the related income tax expense;
Net cash ows attributable to operating, investing and nancing activities;
Assets held for sale separately from all other assets; and
Liabilities of a disposal group held for sale separately from all other liabilities.
IFRS 6 Exploration for and Evaluation of Mineral Resources

Effective Date Annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2006.
Objective To prescribe the nancial reporting for the exploration for and evaluation of mineral
resources.
An entity is permitted to develop its accounting policy for exploration and evaluation
assets under IFRSs without specically considering the requirements of paragraphs 11
and 12 of IAS 8 which specify a hierarchy of sources of IFRS GAAP in the absence
of a specic standard. Thus an entity adopting IFRS 6 may continue to use its existing
Requires an impairment test when there is an indication that the carrying amount of
exploration and evaluation assets exceeds recoverable amount.
Allows impairment to be assessed at a level higher than the cash generating unit under
IAS 36, but measures impairment in accordance with IAS 36 once it is assessed.
II. IAS SUMMARIES

Framework for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial
Statements
The Framework is a conceptual accounting Framework that sets out the concepts that underlie
the preparation and presentation of nancial statements for external users. It was approved in
1989 by the IASBs predecessor, the board of IASC, and adopted by the IASB in April 2001. The
Framework assists the IASB:
(i)
(ii)
in the development of future International Financial Reporting Standards and in its

review of existing Standards; and
in promoting the harmonisation of regulations, nancial reporting standards and
procedures relating to the presentation of nancial statements by providing a basis for
reducing the number of alternative accounting treatments permitted by International
Financial Reporting Standards.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Summary
496
In addition, the Framework may assist:

National standard-setting bodies in developing national standards;
Preparers of nancial statements in applying International Financial Reporting Standards
and in dealing with topics that have yet to form the subject of an International Financial
Reporting Standard;
Auditors in forming an opinion as to whether nancial statements conform with
International Financial Reporting Standards;
Users of nancial statements in interpreting the information contained in nancial
statements prepared in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards;
and
Those who are interested in the work of IASB, providing them with information about its
approach to the formulation of International Financial Reporting Standards.
The Framework is not an International Financial Reporting Standard and does not dene standards
for any particular measurement or disclosure issue. In a limited number of cases there may be
a conict between the Framework and a requirement within an International Financial Reporting
Standard. In those cases where there is a conict, the requirements of the International Financial
Reporting Standard prevail over those of the Framework.
S T U D Y
T E X T
IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements (revised 2003)

Effective Date: Annual periods beginning on or after 1 January2005.
Objective: To set out the overall framework for presenting general-purpose nancial statements,
including guidelines for their structure and the minimum content.
Summary:
Fundamental principles underlying the preparation of nancial statements, including going
concern assumption, consistency in presentation and classication, accrual basis of accounting,
and materiality.
Assets and liabilities, and income and expenses, may not be offset unless offsetting is
permitted or required by another IFRS.
Comparative prior-period information must be presented for amounts shown in the
nancial statements and notes.
A complete set of nancial statements should include a balance sheet, income
statement, statement of changes in equity, cash ow statement, accounting policies
and explanatory notes.
The statement of changes in equity must show either:
- all changes in equity; or
- changes in equity other than those arising from transactions with equity holders
acting in their capacity as equity holders.
Financial statements generally to be prepared annually. If the date of the year end
changes, and nancial statements are presented for a period other than one year,
disclosure thereof is required.
Current/non-current distinction for assets and liabilities is normally required. In general
post-balance sheet events are not considered in classifying items as current or noncurrent.
497
IAS 1 species minimum line items to be presented on the face of the balance sheet,
income statement, and statement of changes in equity, and includes guidance for
identifying additional line items.
IAS 1 species minimum note disclosures.
These must include information about:
- accounting policies followed;
- the judgments that management has made in the process of applying the entitys
accounting policies that have the most signicant effect on the amounts
recognised in the nancial statements;
and
- the key assumptions concerning the future, and other key sources of estimation
uncertainty, that have a signicant risk of causing a material adjustment to the
carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next nancial year.
Interpretations SIC 29, Disclosure Service Concession
Disclosure is required if an entity agrees to provide services that give the public access to major
economic and social facilities.
T E X T
IAS 2 Inventories (revised 2003)
S T U D Y
Arrangements
Effective Date: Annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2005.
Objective: To prescribe the accounting treatment for inventories, including cost determination
and expense recognition.
Summary:
Inventories are required to be stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
Costs include purchase cost, conversion cost (materials, labour, and overhead), and
other costs to bring inventory to its present location and condition, but not foreign
exchange differences.
For inventory items that are not interchangeable, specic costs are attributed to the
specic individual items of inventory.
For interchangeable items, cost is determined on either a FIFO or weighted average
basis. LIFO is not permitted.
When inventories are sold, the carrying amount should be recognised as an expense in
the period in which the related revenue is recognised.
498
IAS 7 Cash Flow Statements (revised 1992)

Effective Date: Periods beginning on or after 1 January 1994.
Objective: To require the presentation of information about historical changes in an entitys cash
and cash equivalents by means of a cash ow statement, which classies cash ows during the
period according to operating, investing, and nancing activities.
Summary:
Cash ow statement must analyse changes in cash and cash equivalents during a
period.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Cash equivalents include investments that are short term (less than 3 months from
date of acquisition), readily convertible to a known amount of cash, and subject to an
insignicant risk of changes in value.
Generally exclude equity investments.
Cash ows from operating, investing, and nancing activities must be separately
reported.
Cash ows for operating activities are reported using either the direct (recommended)
or indirect methods.
Cash ows arising from taxes on income are classied as operating unless they can
be specically identied with nancing or investing activities.
The exchange rate used for translation offshore transactions denominated in a foreign
currency and the cash ows of a foreign subsidiary should be the rate in effect at the
date of the cash ows.
Aggregate cash ows relating to acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries and other
business units should be presented separately and classied as investing activities,
with specied additional disclosures.
Investing and nancing transactions that do not require the use of cash should be
excluded from the cash ow statement, but they should be separately disclosed.
IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates, and

Errors (revised 2003)
Objective: To prescribe the criteria for selecting and changing accounting policies, together with
the accounting treatment and disclosure of changes in accounting policies, changes in estimates,
and errors.
499
Summary:
IASB standards and interpretations, taking into account any relevant IASB implementation
guidance.
In the absence of a standard, look to the requirements and guidance in IASB standards
and interpretations dealing with similar and related issues; and the denitions, recognition
criteria and measurement concepts for assets, liabilities, income and expenses in the
Framework.
Management may also consider the most recent pronouncements of other standardsetting bodies that use a similar conceptual framework to develop accounting standards,
other accounting literature, and accepted industry practices.
Apply accounting policies consistently to similar transactions.
Make a change in accounting policy only if it is required by a standard or interpretation
or results in more relevant and reliable information.
If a change in accounting policy is required by a standard or interpretation, follow that
pronouncements transition requirements. If none are specied, or if the change is
voluntary, apply the new accounting policy retrospectively by restating prior periods. If
restatement is impracticable, include the cumulative effect of the change in prot or loss.
If the cumulative effect cannot be determined, apply the new policy prospectively.
Changes in accounting estimates (for example, change in useful life of an asset) are
accounted for in the current year, or future years, or both (no restatement).
All errors should be corrected by restating comparative prior period amounts and, if the
error occurred before the earliest period presented, by restating the opening balance
sheet.
Disclosures are required about accounting changes, changes in estimates, and error
corrections.
Interpretations None.
IAS 10 Events After the Balance Sheet Date (revised 2003)

Objective: To prescribe when an entity should adjust its nancial statements for events after the
balance sheet date.
Disclosures about the date when the nancial statements were authorised for issue and about
events after the balance sheet date.
Summary: Events after the balance sheet date are those events, both favourable and unfavourable,
that occur between the balance sheet date and the date when the nancial statements are
authorised for issue.
Adjusting events adjust the nancial statements to reect those events that provide
evidence of conditions that existed at balance sheet date (such as resolution of a court
case after balance sheet date).
S T U D Y
T E X T
Prescribes a hierarchy for choosing accounting policies:
500
Non-adjusting events do not adjust the nancial statements to reect events that
arose after the balance sheet date (such as a decline in market prices after year end,
which does not change the valuation of investments at balance sheet date).
Dividends proposed or declared on equity instruments after the balance sheet date should
not be recognised as a liability at the balance sheet date. Disclosure is required.
An entity should not prepare its nancial statements on a going concern basis if
events after the balance sheet date; indicate that the going concern assumption is not
appropriate.
An entity must disclose the date its nancial statements are authorised for issue.
IAS 11 Construction Contracts (revised 1993)

Effective Date Periods beginning on or after 1 January 1995.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Objective To prescribe the accounting treatment for revenue and costs associated with
construction
contracts in the nancial statements of the contractor.
Summary Contract revenue should comprise the amount agreed in the initial contract together
with variations in contract work, claims, and incentive payments to the extent that it is probable
that they will result in revenues and can be measured reliably.
Contract costs should comprise costs that relate directly to the specic contract, costs
that are attributable to general contract activity and that can be reasonably allocated to
the contract, together with such other costs as are directly attributable to the customer
under the terms of the contract.
Where the outcome of a construction contract can be estimated reliably, revenue and
costs should be recognised by reference to the stage of completion of contract activity
(the percentage of
Completion method of accounting).
If the outcome cannot be estimated reliably, no prot should be recognised. Instead,
contract revenue should be recognised only to the extent that contract costs incurred
are expected to be recovered, and contract costs should be expensed as incurred.
If it is probable that total contract costs will exceed total contract revenue, the
expected
loss should be recognised immediately.
501
IAS 12 Income Taxes (revised 2000)

Effective Date Periods beginning on or after 1 January 1998. Certain revisions effective for
periods beginning on or after 1 January 2001.
Objective To prescribe the accounting treatment for income taxes. To establish the principles
and provide guidance in accounting for the current and future income tax consequences related
to:
-
the future recovery (settlement) of carrying amounts of assets (liabilities) in an entitys

balance sheet, and
current period transactions recognised in the income statement or directly through
equity.
Summary Current tax liabilities and assets should be recognised for current and prior period
A temporary difference is a difference between the carrying amount of an asset or

liability and its tax base.
Deferred tax liabilities must be recognized for the future tax consequences of all taxable
temporary differences with three exceptions:
liabilities arising from the initial recognition of goodwill;
liabilities arising from the initial recognition of an asset/liability other than in a business
combination which, at the time of the transaction, does not affect either the accounting
or the taxable prot; and
liabilities arising from undistributed prots from investments where the enterprise is
able to control the timing of the reversal of the difference and it is probable that the
reversal will not occur in the foreseeable future.
A deferred tax asset must be recognized for deductible temporary differences, unused
tax losses, and unused tax credits to the extent that it is probable that taxable prot
will be available against which the deductible temporary differences can be utilized,
with this exception:
the deferred tax asset arises from the initial recognition of an asset/liability, other than
in a business combination, which at the time of the transaction, does not affect the
accounting or the taxable prot.
Deferred tax liabilities (assets) should be measured at the tax rates expected to apply
when the liability is settled or asset is realised, based on tax rates/laws that have been
enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.
Discounting of deferred tax assets and liabilities is prohibited.
Deferred taxes must be presented as noncurrent items in the balance sheet.
IAS 12 species detailed disclosure requirements for income taxes.
S T U D Y
T E X T
taxes, measured at the rates applicable for the period.
502
Interpretations SIC 21, Income Taxes Recovery of Revalued NonDepreciable Assets

Measure the deferred tax liability or asset arising from revaluation based on the tax consequences
from the sale of the asset rather than through use.
SIC 25, Income Taxes Changes in the Tax

Status of an Enterprise or its Shareholders
The current and deferred tax consequences of the change should be included in net prot or loss
for the period unless those consequences relate to transactions or events that were recognised
directly in equity.
S T U D Y
T E X T
IAS 14 Segment Reporting (revised 1997)

Effective Date Periods beginning on or after 1 July 1998.
Objective To establish principles for reporting nancial information by line of business and by
geographical area.
Summary IAS 14 applies to entities whose equity or debt securities are publicly traded and to
entities in the process of issuing securities to the public. Also, any entity voluntarily providing
segment information must comply with the requirements of IAS 14.
An enterprise must look to its organisational structure and internal reporting system for
the purpose of identifying its business segments and geographical segments.
If internal segments are not geographical or products/service-based, then look to next
lower level of internal segmentation to identify reportable segments.
Guidance is provided on which segments are reportable (generally 10% thresholds).
One basis of segmentation is primary and the other secondary.
Segment information should be based on the same accounting policies as the
consolidated group or entity.
IAS 14 sets out disclosure requirements for primary and secondary segments, with
considerably less disclosure for the secondary segments.
503
IAS 16 Property, Plant & Equipment (revised 2003)

Objective To prescribe the principles for the initial recognition and subsequent accounting for
property, plant, and equipment.
Initial recognition at cost, which includes all costs necessary to get the asset ready for
its intended use. If payment is deferred, interest must be recognised.
In accounting subsequent to acquisition, IAS 16 allows a choice of accounting model:
- Cost model: The asset is carried at cost less accumulated depreciation and
impairment.
- Revaluation model: The asset is carried at revalued amount, which is fair value at
revaluation date less subsequent depreciation.
Under the revaluation model, revaluations must be done regularly. All items of a given
class must be revalued (for instance, all buildings). Revaluation increases are credited
to equity. Revaluation decreases are charged rst against the revaluation surplus in
equity, and any excess against prot and loss. When the revalued asset is disposed of,
the revaluation surplus inequity remains in equity and is not recycled through prot and
loss.
If the cost model is used, components of an asset with differing patterns of benets
must be depreciated separately.
Under the cost model, depreciation is charged systematically over the assets useful
life. The depreciation method must reect the pattern of benet consumption.
The residual value must be reviewed at least annually. If operation of an item of property,
plant, and equipment (for example, an aircraft) requires regular major inspections, when
each major inspection is performed, its cost is recognised in the carrying amount of the
asset as are placement if the recognition criteria are satised.
Impairment of property, plant, and equipment must be assessed under IAS 36.
All exchanges of property, plant, and equipment should be measured at fairvalue,
including exchanges of similar items, unless the exchange transaction lacks commercial
substance or the fair value of neither the asset received nor the asset given up is reliably
measurable.
Disclosures include accounting policies; depreciation methods and lives; acquisitions,
disposals, impairments, and reversals; amounts and details of revaluations; and
commitments.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Summary Items of property, plant, and equipment should be recognised as assets when it is
probable that the future economic benets associated with the asset will ow to the entity, and
the cost of the asset can be measured reliably.
504
IAS 17 Leases (revised 2003)

Effective Date Annual periods beginning on or after 1 January2005.
Objective To prescribe, for lessees and lessors, the appropriate accounting policies and
disclosures to apply in relation to nance and operating leases.
Summary A lease is classied as a nance lease if it transfers substantially all risks and rewards
incident to ownership. Examples:
S T U D Y
T E X T
Lease covers substantially all of the assets life.

Present value of lease payments is substantially equal to the assets fair value.
All other leases are classied as operating leases.
A lease of both land and buildings should be split into land and building elements.
Land element is generally an operating lease. Building element is an operating or
nance lease based on the criteria in IAS 17. However, separate measurement of the
land and buildings elements is not required if the lessees interest in both land and
buildings is classied as an investment property under IAS 40 and the fair value model
is adopted.
Finance leases Lessees Accounting:
- Recognise asset and liability at the lower of the present value of minimum lease
payments and the fair value of the asset.
- Depreciation policy as for owned assets.
- Finance lease payment apportioned between interest and reduction in liability.
Finance leases Lessors Accounting:
- Recognise as a receivable at an amount equal to the net investment in the lease.
- Recognise nance income based on a pattern reecting a constant periodic rate
of return on the lessors net investment.
Operating leases Lessees Accounting:
- Recognise lease payments as an expense in the income statement on a straightline basis over the lease term, unless another systematic basis is more
representative of the pattern of benet.
Operating leases Lessors Accounting:
- Assets held for operating leases should be presented in the lessors balance
sheet according to the nature of the asset.
- Lease income should be recognised on a straight-line basis over the lease term,
unless another systematic basis is more representative of the pattern of benet.
Lessors must spread initial direct costs over the lease term (immediate expensing
prohibited).
Accounting for sale and leaseback transactions depends on whether these are
essentially nance or operating leases.
Interpretations SIC 15, Operating Leases Incentives

Lease incentives (such as rent-free periods) should be recognised by both the lessor and the
lessee as a reduction of rental income and expense, respectively, over the lease term.
505
SIC 27, Evaluating the Substance of Transactions Involving the Legal Form of a
Lease
If a series of transactions involves the legal form of a lease and can only be understood
with reference to the series as a whole, then the series should be accounted for as a single
transaction.
IFRIC 4, Determining Whether an Arrangement Contains a Lease

Arrangements that depend on a specic asset or convey the right to control a specic asset
generally are leases under IAS 17.
IAS 18 Revenue (revised 1993)
Summary Revenue should be measured at the fair value of the consideration received/
receivable.
Recognition:
- From sale of goods: When signicant risks and rewards have been transferred to
buyer, loss of effective control by seller, and amount can be reliably measured.
- From sale of services: Percentage of completion method.
- For interest, royalties, and dividends:
Recognised when it is probable that economic benets will ow to the entity:

Interest on a time proportion basis, taking into account the effective yield on the asset.
Royalties on an accrual basis in accordance with the substance of the agreement.
Dividends when shareholders right to receive payment is established.
Disclosure requirements include revenue recognition accounting policies.
Interpretations SIC 31, Revenue Barter Transactions Involving

Advertising Services
Recognise revenue from barter transactions involving advertising services only if substantial
revenue is also received from non-barter transactions.
S T U D Y
Objective To prescribe the accounting treatment for revenue arising from certain types of
transactions and events.
T E X T
506
IAS 19 Employee Benets (revised 2000)

Certain revisions effective on or after 1 January 2001; other revisions effective for periods ending
31 May 2002.
Objective: To prescribe the accounting and disclosure for employee benets, including shortterm benets (wages, annual leave, sick leave, annual prot sharing, bonuses, and non-monetary
benets); pensions; post-employment life insurance and medical benets; and other long-term
employee benets (long-service leave, disability, deferred compensation, and long-term protsharing and bonuses).
Summary: Underlying principle: the cost of providing employee benets should be recognised
in the period in which the benet is earned by the employee, rather than when it is paid or
payable.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Short-term employee benets (payable within 12 months) should be recognised as an

expense in the period in which the employee renders the service.
Prot-sharing and bonus payments are to be recognised only when the entity has a
constructive obligation to pay them and the costs can be reliably estimated.
Post-employment benet plans (such as pensions and health care) are categorized as
either dened contribution plans or dened benet plans.
Under dened contribution plans, expenses are recognised in the period the contribution
is payable.
Under dened benet plans, a liability is recognised in the balance sheet equal to the
net of:
- the present value of the dened benet obligation (the present value of expected
future payments required to settle the obligation resulting from employee service
in the current and prior periods);
- deferred actuarial gains and losses and deferred past service cost; and
- the fair value of any plan assets at the balance sheet date.
Plan assets include assets held by a long term employee benet fund and qualifying
insurance policies.
Long-term employee benets should be recognised and measured the same way as
post-employment benets under a dened benet plan. However, unlike dened benet
plans, the deferral of actuarial gains or losses and past service costs is prohibited.
Termination benets should be recognized when the entity is demonstrably committed
to the termination of one or more employees before the normal retirement date or
to provide termination benets as a result of an offer made to encourage voluntary
redundancy.
Equity compensation benets are covered by IFRS 2, not IAS 19.
507
IAS 20 Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of

Government Assistance
Effective Date Periods beginning on or after 1 January 1984
Objective To prescribe the accounting for, and disclosure of, government grants and other forms
of government assistance.
Summary Recognise government grants only when there is reasonable assurance that the
entity will comply with the conditions attached to the grants, and the grants will be received.
Apply the income approach systematically (recognise income over periods necessary
to match it with the related costs), and not the capital approach (credited directly to
shareholders equity).
Income-related grants may either be presented as a credit in the income statement or
deduction in reporting the related expense.
Asset-related grants may be presented as either deferred income in the balance sheet,
or deducted in arriving at the carrying amount of the asset.
Repayment of a government grant is accounted for as a change in accounting estimate
with different treatment for income and asset-related grants.
Interpretations SIC 10, Government Assistance No Specic Relation

to Operating Activities
Government assistance to entities that is aimed at encouragement or long-term support of
business activities either in certain regions or industry sectors should be treated as a government
grant under IAS 20.
IAS 21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates (revised

2003)
Objective To prescribe the accounting treatment for an entitys foreign currency transactions and
foreign operations.
Summary: First, determine reporting entitys functional currency.
Then translate all foreign currency items into the functional currency:
- At date of transaction, record using the transaction-date exchange rate for initial
recognition and measurement.
- At subsequent balance sheet dates: use closing rate for monetary items; use
S T U D Y
T E X T
Non-monetary grants are usually recognized at fair value, though recognition at nominal value
is permitted.
508
S T U D Y
T E X T
transaction-date exchange rates for non-monetary items carried at historical cost;

and use valuation-date exchange rates for non-monetary items that are carried at
fair value.
- Exchange differences arising on settlement of monetary items and on translation
of monetary items at a rate different than when initially recognised are included
in net prot or loss, with one exception: exchange differences arising on monetary
items that form part of the reporting entitys net investment in a foreign operation
are recognised in the consolidated nancial statements that include the foreign
operation in a separate component of equity; they will be recognised in prot or
loss on disposal of the net investment.
The results and nancial position of an entity whose functional currency is not the
currency of a hyperinationary economy are translated into a different presentation
currency using the following procedures:
- assets and liabilities for each balance sheet presented (including comparatives)
are translated at the closing rate at the date of that balance sheet;
- income and expenses for each income statement (including comparatives) are
translated at exchange rates at the dates of the transactions; and
- all resulting exchange differences are recognised as a separate component of
equity.
Special rules for translating into a presentation currency the results and nancial position
of an entity whose functional currency is hyperinationary.
Interpretations SIC 7, Introduction of the Euro

Explained how to apply IAS 21 when the Euro was rst introduced.
IAS 23 Borrowing Costs

Objective: To prescribe the accounting treatment for borrowing costs.
Summary: Borrowing costs include interest, amortisation of discounts or premiums on borrowings,

and amortisation of ancillary costs incurred in the arrangement of borrowings.
Two accounting models are allowed:

- Expense model: Charge all borrowing costs to expense when incurred.
- Capitalisation model: Capitalise borrowing costs directly attributable to the
acquisition or construction of a qualifying asset, but only when it is probable that
these costs will result in future economic benets to the entity, and the costs can
be measured reliably. All other borrowing costs that do not satisfy the conditions
for capitalization are to be expensed when incurred.
A qualifying asset is one that requires a substantial period of time to make it ready for
its intended use or sale. Examples include manufacturing plants, investment properties,
and some inventories.
If funds are borrowed generally and used for the purpose of obtaining the qualifying
asset, apply a capitalisation rate (weighted average of borrowing costs applicable to the
general outstanding borrowings during the period) to expenditure incurred during the
period, to determine the amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation.
Disclosure includes the accounting policy adopted for borrowing costs.
509
Interpretations None
IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures (revised 203)
Requires disclosure of:

Relationships involving control, even when there have been no transactions.
Related party transactions.
Management compensation.
Examples of related party transactions that must be disclosed:

- Purchases or sales of goods.
- Purchases or sales of assets.
- Rendering or receiving of services.
- Leases.
- Transfers of research and development.
- Transfers under license agreements.
- Transfers under nance arrangements (including loans and equity
contributions).
- Provision of guarantees or collateral.
- Settlement of liabilities on behalf of the entity or by the entity on behalf of another
party.
S T U D Y
Summary: Related parties are parties that control or have signicant inuence on the reporting
entity, including parent companies, subsidiaries, joint ventures, owners and their families, key
management personnel, and post-employment benet plans.
T E X T
Objective: To ensure that nancial statements draw attention to the possibility that nancial
position and results of operations may have been affected by the existence of related parties.
510
IAS 26 Accounting and Reporting by Retirement Benet Plans

Objective: To specify the measurement and disclosure principles for the nancial reports of
retirement benet plans.
Summary: Sets out the reporting requirements for both dened contribution and dened benet
plans, including a statement of net assets available for benets and disclosure of the actuarial
present value of promised benets (split between vested and non-vested).
Species the need for actuarial valuation of the benets for dened benets and the use
of fair values for plan investments.
S T U D Y
T E X T
IAS 27 Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements (revised

2003)
Objective: To prescribe requirements for preparing and presenting consolidated nancial

statements for a group of entities under the control of a parent. To prescribe how to account
for investments in subsidiaries, jointly controlled entities, and associates in separate nancial
statements.
Summary: A subsidiary is an entity controlled by another entity, known as the parent. Control is
the power to govern the operating and nancial policies.
Consolidated nancial statements are nancial statements of a group (parent and

subsidiaries) presented as those of a single economic entity.
Consolidated nancial statements must include all subsidiaries. No exemption for

temporary control or subsidiary that operates under severe long-term funds transfer
restrictions.
All entities in the group must use the same accounting policies.
Reporting dates of subsidiaries cannot be more than three months different from the
group reporting date.
Minority interest is reported in equity in the balance sheet and is not deducted in
measuring the groups prot or loss. However, group prot or loss is allocated between
minority and the parents shareholders on the face of the income statement.
5 11
In the parents separate nancial statements: account for all of its investments in
subsidiaries either at cost or as investments under IAS 39.
Interpretations SIC 12, Consolidation Special Purpose Entities.
An enterprise should consolidate a special purpose entity (SPE) when, in substance, the
enterprise controls the SPE.
IAS 28 Investments in Associates (revised 2003)

Effective: Date Annual periods beginning on or after 1 January2005.
Investor must use the equity method for al investments in associates over which it has
signicant inuence.
Rebuttable presumption of signicant inuence if investment held, directly and indirectly,
is more than 20% of associate. Under the equity method, the investment is initially
recorded at cost. It is subsequently adjusted by the investors share of the investees
post acquisition change in net assets. Investors income statement reects its share of
the investees post-acquisition prot or loss.
Associates accounting policies must be the same as those of the investor.
Equity accounting is required in the separate nancial statements of the investor even
if consolidated accounts are not required, for example, because the investor has no
subsidiaries. However, the investor does not apply the equity method when presenting
separate nancial statements prepared in accordance with IAS 27. Instead, the investor
accounts for the investment either at cost or as investments under IAS 39.
Requirement for impairment testing in accordance with IAS 36, Impairment of Assets.
The impairment indicators in IAS 39 apply.
IAS 29 Financial Reporting in Hyperinationary Economies

Effective: Date Periods beginning on or after 1 January 1990.
Objective: To prescribe specic standards for entities reporting in the currency of a hyperinatio
naryeconomy, so that the nancial information provided is meaningful.
S T U D Y
Summary: Applies to all investments in which investor has signicant inuence unless investor
is venture capital rm, mutual fund, or unit trust, in which case IAS 39 must be followed.
T E X T
Objective: To prescribe the investors accounting for investments in associates over which it has
signicant inuence.
512
Summary: The nancial statements of an entity that reports in the currency of a hyperinationary
economy should be stated in terms of the measuring unit current at the balance sheet date.
Comparative gures for prior period(s) should be restated into the same current
measuring unit.
Generally an economy is hyperinationary when there is 100% ination over 3 years.
IAS 31 Interests in Joint Ventures (revised 2003)

S T U D Y
T E X T
Objective: To prescribe the accounting treatment required for interests in joint ventures (JVs),
regardless of the structure or legal form of the JV activities.
Summary: Applies to all investments in which investor has joint control unless investor is venture
capital rm, mutual fund, or unit trust, in which case IAS 39 must be followed.
The key characteristic of a JV is a contractual arrangement to share control. JVs may be

classied as jointly controlled operations, jointly controlled assets, or jointly controlled
entities. Different recognition principles for each type of JV:
Jointly controlled operations: Venturer recognises the assets it controls, and expenses
and liabilities it incurs, and its share of income earned, in both its separate and
consolidated nancial statements.
Jointly controlled assets: Venturer recognises its share of the joint assets, any liabilities
that it has incurred directly, and its share of any liabilities incurred jointly with the other
venturers, income from the sale or use of its share of the output of the joint venture,
its share of expenses incurred by the joint venture, and expenses incurred directly in
respect of its interest in the joint venture.
Jointly controlled entities: Two accounting policy choices are permitted:
- Proportionate consolidation. Under this method the venturers balance sheet
includes its share of the assets that it controls jointly and its share of the liabilities
for which it is jointly responsible.
Its income statement includes its share of the income and expenses of the jointly
controlled entity
- Equity method as described in IAS 28.
In the ventures separate nancial statements, interests in joint ventures should be
accounted for either at cost or as investments under IAS 39.
Interpretations SIC 13, Jointly Controlled Entities Non- Monetary Contributions by

Venturers
Recognition of proportionate share of gains or losses on contributions of non-monetary assets is

generally appropriate.
513
IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation (revised

2003)
Objective: To enhance users understanding of the signicance of on-balance sheet and offbalance sheet nancial instruments to an entitys nancial position, performance, and cash
ows.
Based on substance, not form of the instrument.

Classication is made at the time of issuance and is not subsequently altered.
An instrument is a nancial liability if the issuer may be obligated to deliver cash or
another nancial asset or the holder has a right to demand cash or another nancial
asset. An example is mandatorily redeemable preferred shares.
An instrument that does not give rise to such a contractual obligation is an equity
instrument.
Interest, dividends, gains, and losses relating to an instrument classied as a liability
should be reported as income or expense as appropriate.
At issuance, an issuer must classify separately the debt and equity components of a
single compound instrument such as convertible debt and debt issued with detachable
rights or warrants.
A nancial asset and a nancial liability should be offset and the net amount reported
when, and only when, an entity has a legally enforceable right to set off the amounts,
and intends either to settle on a net basis or simultaneously.
Cost of treasury shares is deducted from equity, and re-sales of treasury shares are
equity transactions.
Costs of issuing or reacquiring equity instruments (other than in a business combination)
are accounted for as a deduction from equity, net of any related income tax benet.
Disclosure requirements include:
- Risk management and hedging policies.
- Hedge accounting policies and practices, and gains and losses from hedges.
- Terms and conditions of, and accounting policies for, all nancial instruments.
- Information about exposure to interest rate risk.
- Information about exposure to credit risk.
- Fair values of all nancial assets and nancial liabilities, except those for which a
reliable measure of fair value is not available.
- Information about derecognition, collateral, impairment, defaults and breaches,
and reclassications.
Interpretations IFRIC 2 Members Shares in Co-operative Entities and Similar

Instruments
These are liabilities unless the co-op has the legal right not to redeem on demand.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Summary: Issuers classication of an instrument either as a liability or an equity instrument:
514
IAS 33 Earnings per Share (revised 2003)

Objective: To prescribe principles for determining and presenting earnings per share (EPS)
amounts in order to improve performance comparisons between different entities in the same
period and between different accounting periods for the same entity. Focus of IAS 33 is on the
denominator of the EPS calculation.
Summary: Applies to publicly traded entities, entities in the process of issuing such shares, and
any other entity voluntarily presenting EPS.
T E X T
S T U D Y
Present basic and diluted EPS on the face of the income statement:
For each class of ordinary shares.
With equal prominence.
For all periods presented.
In consolidated nancial statements, EPS reects earnings attributable to the parents
shareholders.
Dilution is a reduction in EPS or an increase in loss per share on the assumption that
convertible instruments are converted, that options or warrants are exercised, or that
ordinary shares are issued when specied conditions are met.
Basic EPS calculation:
Earnings numerator: Should be after deduction of all expenses including tax and
minority interests, and after deduction of preference dividends.
Denominator: Weighted average number of shares outstanding during the
period.
Diluted EPS calculation:
Earnings numerator: The net prot for the period attributable to ordinary shares
is increased by the after-tax amount of dividends and interest recognised in
the period in respect of the dilutive potential Ordinary shares (such as options,
warrants, convertible securities, and contingent insurance agreements), and
adjusted for any other changes in income or expense that would result from the
Conversion of the dilutive potential ordinary shares.
Denominator: Should be adjusted for the number of shares that would be issued
on the conversion of all of the dilutive potential ordinary shares into ordinary
shares.
Anti-dilutive potential ordinary shares are to be excluded from the calculation.
IAS 34 Interim Financial Reporting

Objective: To prescribe the minimum content of an interim nancial report (IFR) and the
recognition and measurement principles for an IFR.
515
Local regulators (not IAS 34) mandate

which entities should publish interim nancial reports;
how frequently; and
how soon after the end of an interim period.
An IFR is a complete or condensed set of nancial statements for a period shorter than
an entitys full nancial year.
Minimum components of an IFR are a condensed balance sheet, income statement,
statement of changes in equity, cash ow statement, and selected explanatory notes.
Prescribes the comparative periods for which interim nancial statements are required
to be presented.
Materiality is based on interim nancial data, not forecasted annual amounts.
The notes in an IFR should provide an explanation of events and transactions signicant
to understanding the changes since the last annual nancial statements.
Same accounting policies as annual.
Revenue and costs to be recognised when they occur, not anticipated or deferred.
Change in accounting policy restate previously reported interim periods.
Interpretations None
IAS 36 Impairment of Assets (revised 2004)

Effective Date 1 April 2004.
Objective To ensure that assets are carried at no more than their recoverable amount, and to
prescribe how recoverable amount is calculated.
Summary: IAS 36 applies to all assets except inventories (see IAS 2, Inventories), assets arising
from construction contracts (see IAS 11, Construction Contracts), deferred tax assets (see IAS
12, Income Taxes), assets arising from employee benets (see IAS 19, Employee Benets),
nancial assets (see IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement), investment
property measured at fair value (see IAS 40, Investment Property), biological assets related
to agricultural activity measured at fair value less estimated point-of-sale costs (see IAS 41,
Agriculture).
Impairment loss to be recognised when the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its
recoverable amount.
Recognise impairment loss through income statement for assets carried at cost; treat
as a decrease in the revaluation surplus for assets carried at revalued amount.
Recoverable amount is the higher of an assets net selling price and its value in use.
Value in use is the present value of estimated future cash ows expected to arise from
the continuing use of an asset, and from its disposal at the end of its useful life.
Discount rate is the pre-tax rate that reects current market assessments of the time
value of money and the risks specic to the asset. The discount rate should not reect
S T U D Y
T E X T
Summary: Applies only when the entity is required or elects to publish an IFR in accordance
with IFRSs.
516
risks for which future cash ows have been adjusted and should equal the rate of return
that investors would require if they were to choose an investment that would generate
cash ows equivalent to those expected from the asset.
At each balance sheet date, review assets to look for any indication that an asset may
be impaired. If impairment is indicated, calculate recoverable amount.
Goodwill and other intangibles with indenite useful life must be tested for impairment
at least annually, and recoverable amount calculated.
If it is not possible to determine the recoverable amount for the individual asset, then
determine recoverable amount for the assets cash-generating unit. The impairment
test for goodwill should be performed at the smallest group of cash generating units to
which goodwill can be allocated on a reasonable and consistent basis.
Reversal of prior years impairment losses allowed in certain instances (prohibited for
goodwill).
Disclose impairment losses by class of assets and by segment (if applying IAS 14,
Segment Reporting).
Disclose reversal of impairment losses.
T E X T
Effective Date: Periods beginning on or after 1 July 1999.
S T U D Y
IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets
Objective: To prescribe appropriate recognition criteria and measurement bases for provisions,
contingent liabilities, and contingent assets and to ensure that sufcient information is disclosed
in the notes to the nancial statements to enable users to understand their nature, timing and
amount.
IAS 37 thus aims to ensure that only genuine obligations are dealt with in the nancial statements.
Planned future expenditure, even where authorised by the board of directors or equivalent
governing body, is excluded from recognition, as are accruals for self-insured losses, general
uncertainties, and other events that have not yet taken place.
Summary: Recognise a provision only when a past event has created a legal or constructive
obligation, an outow of resources is probable, and the amount of the obligation can be estimated
reliably.
Amount recognised as a provision is the best estimate of settlement amount at balance

sheet date.
Requires a review of provisions at each balance sheet date to adjust for changes in
estimate.
Utilise provisions only for original purposes. Examples of provisions may include
onerous contracts, restructuring provisions, warranties, refunds, and site restoration.
Comprehensive disclosures, including descriptions and amounts, are required for each
class of provision.
Contingent liability arises when:
there is a possible obligation to be conrmed by a future event that is outside the control
of the entity; or
a present obligation may, but probably will not, require an outow of resources; or
517
a sufciently reliable estimate of the amount of a present obligation cannot be made

(this is rare).
Contingent liabilities require disclosure only (no recognition). If the possibility of outow
is remote, then no disclosure.
Contingent asset arises when the inow of economic benets is probable, but not
virtually certain, and occurrence depends on an event outside the control of the entity.
Contingent assets require disclosure only. If the realisation of income is virtually certain,
the related asset is not a contingent asset and recognition is appropriate.
Interpretations IFRIC 1 Changes in Existing Decommissioning, Restoration and Similar

Liabilities
Adjust the provision for changes in the amount or timing of future costs and for changes in the
market-based discount rate.
IAS 38 Intangible Assets (revised 2004)
Summary: Requires an entity to recognise an intangible asset, whether purchased or selfcreated, if:
it is probable that the future economic benets that are attributable to the asset will ow
to the entity, and
the cost of the asset can be measured reliably.
Additional recognition criteria for internally generated intangible assets.
All research costs are charged to expense when incurred.
Development costs are capitalized only after technical and commercial feasibility of the
resulting product or service have been established.
Intangible assets, including in-process research and development (IPR&D), acquired in
a business combination should be recognised separately from goodwill if they arise as
a result of contractual or legal rights or are separable from the business.
Internally-generated goodwill, brands, mastheads, publishing titles, customer lists,
start-up costs, training costs, advertising costs, and relocation costs should not be
recognised as assets.
If an intangible item does not meet both the denition and the recognition criteria for
an intangible asset, expenditure on the item is recognised as an expense when it is
incurred, except if the cost is incurred as part of a purchase business combination,
in which case it should form part of the amount attributed to goodwill at the date of
acquisition.
For the purpose of accounting subsequent to initial acquisition, intangible assets are
classied as:
S T U D Y
Objective: To prescribe the accounting treatment for recognising, measuring, and disclosing all
intangible assets that are not dealt with specically in another IFRS.
T E X T
Effective Date: 1 April 2004.
518
Indenite life: No foreseeable limit to the period over which the asset is expected to
generate net cash inows for the entity. Indenite does not mean innite.
Finite life: A limited period of benet to the entity.
Intangible assets with indenite useful lives are not amortised but must be tested for
impairment at each reporting date. If recoverable amount is lower than the carrying
amount, an impairment loss is recognised. The assessment must also consider whether
the intangible continues to have an indenite life.
Generally, the cost (residual value is normally zero) of an intangible asset with a nite
useful life is amortised over that life. If the intangible asset has a quoted market price
in an active market, an accounting policy choice of a revaluation model is permitted.
Under the revaluation model, the asset is carried at revalued amount, which is fair value
at revaluation date less subsequent depreciation.
Normally, subsequent expenditure on an intangible asset after its purchase or completion
is recognised as an expense. Only rarely can the asset recognition criteria be met.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Interpretations SIC 32, Intangible Assets Web Site Costs

Certain initial infrastructure development and graphic design costs incurred in web site
development may be capitalised.
IFRIC 3 Emission Rights

Tradable emissions allowances are intangible assets under IAS 38.
IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement (revised 2003 and 2004)
Objective: To establish principles for recognising, de-recognising, and measuring nancial

assets and nancial liabilities.
Summary: All nancial assets and nancial liabilities, including all derivatives and certain
embedded derivatives, must be recognized on the balance sheet.
Financial instruments are initially measured at fair value on date of acquisition or

issuance. Usually this is the same as cost, but sometimes an adjustment is required.
An entity has an option of recognizing normal purchases and sales of securities in the
market place consistently either at trade date or settlement date. If settlement date
accounting is used, IAS 39 requires recognition of certain value changes between trade
and settlement dates.
For the purpose of measuring a nancial asset subsequent to initial recognition, IAS 39
classies nancial assets into four categories:
1. Loans and receivables not held for trading.
2. Held-to-maturity (HTM) investments, such as debt securities and mandatorily
519
redeemable preferred shares, that the entity intends and is able to hold to maturity. If
an entity sells any HTM investments (other than in exceptional circumstances), all of its
other HTM investments must be reclassied as available-for-sale (category 4 below) for
the current and next two nancial reporting years.
Subsequent to initial recognition:

All nancial assets in categories 1 and 2above are carried at amortised cost subject to
a test for impairment.
All nancial assets in category 3 above are carried at fair value, with value changes
recognised in prot or loss.
All nancial assets in category 4 above (AFS) are measured at fair value in the balance
sheet, with value changes recognised in equity, subject to impairment testing. If the fair
value of an AFS asset cannot be measured reliably, the asset is carried at cost.
After acquisition, most nancial liabilities are measured at original recorded amount
less principal repayments and amortisation. Three categories of liabilities are measured
at fair value with value changes recognised n prot and loss:
derivative liabilities;
liabilities held for trading (short sales); and
any liabilities that the entity designates, at issuance, to be measured at fair value through
prot and loss (the fair value option).
Fair value is the amount for which an asset could be exchanged, or a liability settled,
between knowledgeable, willing parties in an arms length transaction. The IAS 39 fair
value hierarchy:
Best is quoted market price in an active market.
Otherwise use a valuation technique that makes maximum use of market inputs and
includes recent arms length market transactions, reference to the current fair value of
another instrument that is substantially the same, discounted cash ow analysis, and
option pricing models. IAS 39 establishes conditions for determining when control over
a nancial asset or liability has been transferred to another party and, therefore, it should
be removed from the balance sheet (derecognised). Derecognition is not permitted to
the extent to which the transferor has continuing involvement in an asset or a portion of
an asset it has transferred.
Hedge accounting (recognising the offsetting effects of fair value changes of both the
hedging instrument and the hedged item in the same periods prot or loss) is permitted
in certain circumstances, provided that the hedging relationship is clearly dened,
measurable, and actually effective. IAS 39provides for three types of hedges:
Fair value hedge: If an entity hedges a change in fair value of a recognised asset or
liability or rm commitment, the change in fair values of both the hedging instrument
and the hedged item are recognised in prot or loss when they occur.
Cash ow hedge: If an entity hedges changes in the future cash ows relating to a
recognised asset or liability or a probable forecast transaction, then the change in fair
T E X T
4.
Financial assets measured at fair value through prot and loss, which includes those
held for trading (short-term prot taking) and any other nancial asset that the entity
designates (the fair value option). Derivative assets are always in this category unless
they are designated as hedging instruments.
Available-for-sale nancial assets (AFS) all nancial assets that do not fall into one of
the other three categories. This includes all investments in equity instruments that are
not measured at fairvalue through prot and loss. Additionally, an entity may designate
any loans and receivables as AFS.
S T U D Y
3.
520
value of the hedging instrument is recognised directly in equity until such time as those
future cash ows occur.
A hedge of foreign currency risk in a rm commitment may be accounted for as a fair
value hedge or as a cash ow hedge.
Hedge of a net investment in a foreign entity: This is treated as a cash ow hedge.
IAS 39 Guidance
IAS 40 Investment Property (revised 2004)
S T U D Y
T E X T
Objective: To prescribe the accounting treatment for investment property and related
disclosures.
Summary: Investment property is land or buildings held (whether by the owner or under a nance
lease) to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both.
IAS 40 does not apply to owner-occupied property or property that is being constructed
or developed for future use as investment property, or property held for sale in the
ordinary course of business.
Permits an entity to choose either the fair value model or cost model.
Fair value model: Investment property is measured at fair value, and changes in fair
value are recognised in the income statement.
Cost model: Investment property is measured at depreciated cost less any accumulated
impairment losses. Fair value of the investment property must still be disclosed.
The chosen measurement model must be applied to all of the entitys investment
property.
If an entity uses the fair value model but, when a particular property is acquired, there
is clear evidence that the entity will not be able to determine fair value on a continuing
basis, the cost model is used for that property and it must continue to be used until
disposal of the property.
Change from one model to the other is permitted if it will result in a more appropriate
presentation (highly unlikely for change from fair value to cost model).
A property interest held by a lessee under an operating lease can qualify as investment
property provided that the lessee uses the fair value model of IAS 40. In this case, the
lessee accounts for the lease as if it were a nance lease.
Disclosures include:
Method of determining fair value.
Extent of use of independent valuer in determining fair value.
Criteria that were used to classify property as investment property or not.
Amounts recognised in prot and loss.
521
IAS 41 Agriculture
Objective: To prescribe accounting for agricultural activity the management of the biological
transformation of biological assets (living plants and animals) into agricultural produce.
Measure agricultural produce at fair value at the point of harvest less expected pointof sale costs. Because harvested produce is a marketable commodity, there is no
measurement reliability exception for produce.
Change in fair value of biological assets during a period is reported in net prot or
loss.
Exception to fair value model for biological assets: if there is no active market at time
of recognition in the nancial statements, and no other reliable measurement method,
then apply the cost model to the specic biological asset only. The biological asset
should be measured at depreciated cost less any accumulated impairment losses.
Quoted market price in active market generally represents the best measure of fair
value of a biological asset or agricultural produce. If an active market does not exist,
IAS 41 provides guidance for choosing another measurement basis.
Fair value measurement stops at harvest.

IAS 2, Inventories, applies after harvest.
Disclosures include:
Description of an entitys biological assets, by broad category.
Carrying amount of each category.
Change in fair value during the period.
Reconciliation of changes in the carrying amount of biological assets, showing separately
changes in value, purchases, sales, harvesting.
Basis for determining fair value
S T U D Y
T E X T
Summary: Measure all biological assets at fair value less expected point-of-sale costs at each
balance sheet date, unless fair value cannot be measured reliably.
S T U D Y
T E X T
522
523
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
CHAPTER TEN
ANSWERS TO EXAM
QUESTIONS
S T U D Y
T E X T
524
525
ANSWERS TO EXAM
QUESTIONS
CHAPTER ONE
QUESTION ONE
Structure
M Ltd
75%
H Ltd
S T U D Y
A Ltd
T E X T
30%
80%
C Ltd
Holdings in C Ltd
Group
75% x 80%
60%
Minority
Direct
Indirect 25% x 80%
20%
20%
100%
526
Cost of control
Investment in H Ltd
165,000
______
165,000
______
102,000
Ordinary share capital 75% x 100,000

Ordinary 75% x 5,000
Preference 75% x 5,600
Prot & Loss A/C 75% x 28,000
General reserve 75% x 40,000
Goodwill
75,000
3,750
4,200
21,000
30,000
31,050
165,000
Minority interest
20% x 10,200
60% x 80,000
General reserve
Prot & Loss A/C 60% x 16,000
20,400
48,000
24,000
9,600
102,000
S T U D Y
T E X T
Consolidated Prot & Loss Account

UPS 20% x 6,000
COC H Ltd
UPS (PPE)
Minority Interest H Ltd
(25% x 40,400)
COC C LTD
Minority Interest- C Ltd
40% x 100,000
Good will amortized
31,050 x 20%
C.B.S
1,200
2,100
4,000
10,100
9,600
40,000
6,210
7,950
158,140
258,200
M Ltd
Dividend receivable
ordinary H Ltd 75% x 10,000
Preference
Debenture interest
H Ltd
C Ltd
Investment in A Ltd
(30% x 30,000 21,000)
98,500
7,500
4,200
300
600
44,400
100,000
2,700
______
258,200
Minority Interest
Investment in C Ltd
C.B.S
20,400
136,800
157,200
H Ltd Ordinary share

Preference shares
General reserve
Prot & Loss A/C
Dividends Ordinary
Preference
(25% x 800)
C Ltd
Share capital
General reserve
Prot & Loss A/C
25,000
20,000
10,000
10,100
2,500
1,400
200
32,000
16,000
40,000
______
157,200
ANSWERS TO EXAM QUESTIONS
527
Current assets
M Ltd
H Ltd
C Ltd
145,500
143,400
120,000
408,900
UPS
C.B.S
1,200
407,700
______
408,900
Property, Plant and equipment

M Ltd
H Ltd
C Ltd
250,000
220,000
200,000
670,000
UPS (20% x 20,000)

C.B.S
4,000
666,000
______
670,000
800
229,200
230,000
M Ltd
H Ltd
C Ltd
60,000
130,000
40,000
230,000
Premium on acquisition
Cost of investment
Net Assets acquired
Ordinary shares
General reserve
Prot & Loss A/C
30% x
26,100
60,000
6,000
21,000
87,000
26,100
NIL
j
Balance
Post-acquisition reserve
26,100
2,700
28,800
S T U D Y
Overcharge
(20% x 4000)
C.B.S
T E X T
528
M Limited and its Subsidiaries

Consolidated Balance sheet
As at 31 December 2001
Non Current Assets
Property and equipment
Goodwill
Amortization
Sh. Million
Sh. Million
666,000
(229,200)
436,800
31,050
(6,210)
24,840
S T U D Y
T E X T
28,800
Investment in Associate
Current Assets
Current liabilities
Trade payables
Accrued debenture interest
Proposed dividends
Net current Assets
Ordinary share of Sh. 10 each

General reserve
Minority interest
Non Current Liabilities
6% debentures (20,000----5,000)
407,700
207,300
900
30,000
238,200
169,500
659,940
300,000
50,000
158,140
508,140
136,800
15,000
659,940
529
QUESTION TWO
Aberdare Ltd & its subsidiaries
Consolidated balance sheet as at 31.3.99
Non-current Assets
Sh.
Sh.
2957
Intangibles: Patents (10-1)
9
30
Goodwill
39
2996
Current Assets
Inventory
1074
Accounts receivable
1542
Cash
240
600
Revaluation reserve (60% x 260)
156
Retained Earnings
2390
Shareholders Funds
3146
Minority Interest
1244
T E X T
5852
S T U D Y
TOTAL ASSETS
2856
4390
Current Liabilities
Accounts payable
912
Taxation
70
Proposed dividends
480
1462
5852
TOTAL EQUITY & LIABILITIES
Workings:
Group PPE
Sh.
Sh.
1280
Depreciation FV adj:
920
Group P & L (36 X 3)
108
700
MI (64% X 3)
192
Coc: FV adj
21.6
Bal c/d
MI: FV adj
38.4
____
2960
2960
2957
530
GROUP A/c Receivable

Sh.
A
680
540
390
Sh.
Due from E A
B
Bal c/d
1610
36
32
1542
1610
COC
Sh.
840
Inv. in B
Sh.
B: OSC (60% x 500)
300
P & L (60% x 800)
480
G/will -amortised
Inv. In E (60% x 750)
450
60
E OSC (36% x 500)
180
P & L (36% x 460)
165
T E X T
FV adj
S T U D Y
PPE (36% X 60)
____
21.6
Inv. (36% x 20)
7.2
Int. (35% x 10)

Pre-acquisition due
(36% x 100)
Goodwill Amortized
3.6
Bal c/d
30
1290
36
6
1290
MI
Sh.
Sh.
B: OSC (40% x 500)
200
P & L (40% X 1300)
520
RR (40% X 260)
104
Inv. In E Ltd
300
E: OSC (64% X 500)
320
Depreciation - PPE
1.92
P & L (64% x 480)
307
0.64
FV Adjustment
Int
Inventory sold
10.24
PPE (64% X 60)
38.4
Inv. (64% x 20)
12.8
Int. (64 x 10)
6.4
Dividend from E
Bal c/d
_1244
1556.8
(40% x 60% x 200)
___48
1556.8
531
Group Inventory
Sh.
420
410
240
72
12.8
1090
A
B
E
Coc: FV adj
MI: FV adj
Group net Prot (36% x 16)

MI (64% x 16)
Bal c/d
Sh.
576
10.24
1074
1090
Group A/c Payable

Due to
Bal c/c
A
B
Sh.
36
32
912
980
A
B
E
Sh.
390
380
210
980
Sh.
48
150
36
36
480
750
A
B
E
Sh.
300
250
200
___
750
Revaluation Revenue
MI (40% X 260)
Bal c/d
Sh.
104
156
260
Bal b/d
Sh.
260
___
260
Group Retained Prot

COC: P & L - B
MI: P & L
COC Goodwill Amount B
COC P & L - E
MI: P & L E
Depn. FV adj
PPE
Intangible
Inventory sold
Goodwill Amortised
Bal c/d
Sh.
480
520
60
165.6
307.2
1.08
0.36
5.76
6
2390
3936
A
B
E
Dividends Receivable
From B
From E
Sh.
1970
1300
480
150
36
____
3936
S T U D Y
MI 46% X 60%
Group Net Prot
Pre acq (30% x 100) E
Post acq (36% x 100) E
Bal c/d
T E X T
Group Proposed Dividends
532
Patents
Sh.
3.6
6.4
COC
MI
__
10
Sh.
Depreciation
Group Net Prots
MI
Bal c/d
0.36
0.64
9
10
Retained Prots at Acquisition for E Ltd:

Bal c/d
Add back dividends
S T U D Y
T E X T
Less: Prots for year

Bal b/d
Prots for the year
Retained prots at acq.
Sh.
480
200
680
(240)
440
20
460
CHAPTER TWO
QUESTION ONE
(a)
In IAS 17 context:
Finance lease
This is a lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incident to ownership
(2 marks)
of an asset. Title may or may not eventually be transferred.
Guaranteed residual value is:
In the case of the lessee, that part of the residual value which is guaranteed by the lessee
or by a party related to the lessee (the amount of the guarantee being the maximum
amount that could, in any event become payable).
In the case of the lessor, that part of the residual value which is guaranteed by the lessee
or by a third party unrelated to the lessor who is nancially capable of discharging the
obligations under the guarantee.
(2 marks)
Contingent rent
This is that portion of the lease payments that is not xed in amount but is based on a
factor other than just the passage of time (e.g. percentage of sales, amount of usage,
price indices, market rates of interest).
(2 marks)
533
Alternatively: (Assuming interest quoted is paid).

(b) Using actual method.
Shs. m
16,320
(2,550)
13,770
Fair value of leased asset

Initial payment
Balance
Year
Bal b/f
Interest
Installment
Depr.
Bal c/f
Sh. m
Sh. m
Sh. m
Sh. m
Sh. m
2005 1
13,770
478
2,250
1772
11,998
2005 2
11,998
416
2,250
1834
10,164
2006 1
10,164
353
2,250
1897
8,267
2006 2
8,267
287
2,250
1963
6,304
2007 1
6,304
219
2,250
2031
4,273
2007 2
4,273
148
2,250
2102
2,171
2008 1
2,171
75
2,250
2175
(4)
1 (1 + 0.0347)-7
0.0347
S T U D Y
Payable (instalment) = 13,770

= 2250
Change to P & L AC.

Year
Expenses Cost
Depreciation
Total
2005
894
4080
4974
2006
640
4080
4720
2007
367
4080
4447
2008
75
4080
4155
Balance Sheet Extract

Non Current Assets
Cost
Depreciation
Obligations under nance lease
Non-current liability
Current liability
T E X T
Remaining installments over 7 months interest of 3.47 (6.94 x )
Sh. m
16,320
4,080
12,240
Sh. m
16,320
8,160
8,160
6,304
3,860
2,177
4,133
(6 marks)
534
(b) Silversands Manufacturing Company Ltd.

(i) Actuarial method
Fair value of leased asset
Initial payment
Amount borrowed
Installment value
Number of installments
Year
2005
2006
S T U D Y
T E X T
2007
2008
Sh. 000
16,320
2,550
13,770
2,550
7
Liabilities at
beginning
Sh. 000
Rental
Payment
Shs. 000
16,320
14,725.57
13,020.64
11,197.22
9,247.32
7,162.27
4,932.38
2,547.62
2,550
2,550
2,550
2,550
2,550
2,550
2,550
2,550
20,400
Fair value of leased asset =

Estimated useful life
Sub-total
Sh. 000
13,770
12,175.57
10,470.64
8,647.22
6,697.32
4,612.27
2,382.38
(2.38)
Finance
charge at
6.94%
Sh. 000
955.57
845.07
726.58
600.10
464.95
320.11
165.24
2.38
4,080
Liability at end
Shs. 000
14,725.57
13,020.64
11,197.22
9,246.32
7,162.27
4,932.38
2,547.62
NIL
16,320 gives Sh.4,080,000 depreciation P.A.

4
Charge to the prot and loss account
Year
2005
2006
2007
2008
Finance
charge
Sh. 000
1,800.64
1,326.68
785.06
167.62
4,080__
Depreciation
Total
Sh. 000
4,080
4,080
4,080
4,080
16,320
5,880.64
5,406.68
4,865.06
4,247.62
20,400
Charge
against
taxable
prots Sh.
000
5,100
5,100
5,100
5,100
20,400
Timing
Difference
Sh. 000
780.64 O
306.68 O
(234.94) R
(852.38) R
NIL
535
Non-current assets
Cost
Depreciation to date
Net book value
Leasing Commitments
Minimum leasing commitments
2005
2006
2007
Less: Finance allocated to future periods
Current obligations under nance leases
* Non-current obligations under nance leases
* Contingent liability
2006
(b) (ii)
Shs. 000
406.13
135.32
4,080
1,800.64
4,080
589.9
406.13
589.90
16,320
4,080
12,240
16,320
8,160
8,160
5,100
5,100
5,100
15,300
2,279.36
13,206.64
3,603.32
9,417.32
2,279.36
5,100
5,100
10,200
905.42
9,294.58
4,371.55
4,922.52
905.42
Based on amount on premature cancellation of contract = Interest allocated to future periods or

otherwise specically stated in terms of the lease.
CHAPTER THREE
QUESTION ONE
(i)
Current service cost

This is apart of a pension cost incurred due to the services rendered by employees in
the current year.
It is calculated by the following formula
Service cost = pension % x 1 year x salary on date of retirement
The amount calculated above is discounted to the present date at an appropriate interest
rate. Service is treated as an expense of the current period.
S T U D Y

Provision for deferred tax
Operating prots stated after charging:
Depreciation on leased assets under nance leases
Interest payable on nance leases
Balance sheet
Deferred taxation account
2005
(b)(i)
Sh. 000
T E X T
(ii) Extracts from published accounts
536
(ii)
Past service cost

This is an increase in projected pension liability resulting from service already provided
by employees. It is brought about by change in the way pension are determined
especially change in pension benets.
The whole amount is not treated as pension expense in the year it is determined but is
expensed over the remaining average service years of the employees beneting from
the scheme.
(iii) Vested employee benets

These are pension benets employees have a right to receive even if their services were
immediately terminated. Pension benets that are not conditional on employment.
For benets to be vested, employees must have served for some minimum number of
years.
S T U D Y
T E X T
(b)
Calculation of annual pension expense
NB. The accounting treatment of actuarial gains and losses has changed due to the
revisions on IAS 19 Employee benets. This is because IASB felt that, due to actuarial
assumptions made in arriving at values of pension obligations and plan assets, actuarial
gains and losses must arise. Therefore they are only recognized if they are signicant.
Signicance is measured by using the 10% corridor rule. This rule requires only the
actuarial gains and losses that exceed the higher of 10% of either Fair value of the plan
assets or the Present Value of obligation at the start of the year.
In December 2004 additional amendments were made on the standard and this allows
rms to recognize the full actuarial gains and losses but in a statement outside the
income statement i.e. the statement of recognized gains and losses.
In summary this example requires the treatment of actuarial gains and losses using the
old IAS 19 on Retirement benet costs.
The solution is therefore prepared for information only but the example has been overtaken by
events.
Deciency = Sh. 600 million
Service life of employees = 8 years.
Therefore amortization of deciency = Sh. 600m : 8 =
Annual service cost
Therefore total annual pension expense =
Sh. 75 million
Sh. 30 million
Sh. 75m + Sh. 30m =
Sh. 105m
537
Calculation of prepaid or accrued pension cost
75
75
1999
180
105
75
150
2000
180
105
75
225
2001
180
105
75
300
2002
30
105
(75)
225
2003
30
105
(75)
150
2004
30
105
(75)
75
Sh m
Sh m
Sh m
Sh m
1998
180
105
75
75
1999
180
105
75
150
2000
180
105
75
225
2001
180
105
75
300
2002
30
105
(75)
225
2003
30
105
(75)
150
2004
30
105
(75)
75
2005
30
105
(75)
Hint
It is the cumulative period pension cost that would appear in the balance sheet prepared at the
end of each year.
Calculation of annual pension expense
Surplus
Sh. 320 million
Remaining service life employees
10 years
Therefore amortization of surplus per year
Sh. 320 million : 10 = Sh. 32 million
Annual service cost
Sh. 60 million
Therefore net pension expense
Sh. 60m Sh. 32m= 28 m
T E X T
1998
Cumulative
S T U D Y
Contribution
Pension expense
Prepaid
(Accrued)
Prepaid/(accrued)
180
105
Year
538
Calculation of pre-paid or accrued pension cost
Year
Contribution
Pension
Expense
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
Sh.m
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Sh.m
(28)
(28)
(28)
(28)
(28)
(28)
(28)
(28)
(28)
(28)
Cumulative/Prepaid
(accrued) pension
cost
Prepaid
(accrued)
Pension
Cost
Sh m
(28)
(28)
(28)
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Sh.m
(28)
(56)
(84)
(72)
(60)
(48)
(36)
(24)
(12)
NIL
S T U D Y
T E X T
It is the cumulative accrued pension cost that would appear in the balance sheet.
CHAPTER FOUR
QUESTION ONE
(1)
Share capital and Premium
Cash book issue cost 2
Bal b/d share capital

Bal. b/d share premium
Bal c/d
C.B
300
84
130
Share capital
400
Share premium
112
______
514
514
(2)
Dividend paid to minority

Minority interest
Subsidiary
Bal b/d
10% x 40
Shareholders
Bal c/d
21
13
21
21
539
(3)
Bank loan
Subsidiary
18
Cash book
Bal c/d
Bal c/d
52
29
52
52
(4)
Tax paid
Deferred Tax Interest b/d
Deferred liability b/d
Tax recoverable
Current tax b/d
Current tax
Tax for the year
Deferred tax liability balance c/d 18
Tax recoverable
Subsidiary
Deferred tax Asset c/d
Deferred tax
17
16
13
48
__ 48___
Finance lease
Balance brought down
Balance brought down
Cash book
Balance c/d
2
10
Disposal
Subsidiary
Balance c/d
2
8
____
10
Accumulated depreciation Account

8
Balance b/d
13
For the year
161
200
135
65
______
200

Balance b/d
Cash
769
65
834
Disposal b/d
11
Subsidiary
118
Balance c/d
705
834
T E X T
S T U D Y
Cash
540
20% x 90

= 18
Paid
Goodwill on
subsidiary
28
10
Prot on disposal on property, plant and equipment

9
Proceed
Net book value
Cash
11
Depreciation
8 -3
Prot
Inventories
225
S T U D Y
T E X T
Balance b/d
_____
Subsidiary
27
Decrease
40
Balance
158
225
225
Trade and other receivables

134
Subsidiary
Balance b/d
Increase
10
41
Balance c/d
103
144
144

Subsidiary
38
Decrease
34
Balance
112 1
Balance
188 5 =183
111
183
183
Interest paid
C-B- Finance lease

CB other
2
37
Balance b/d
P&L
5
35
1
40
40
541
Amortisation of goodwill
10
Amortisation
Unamortized
5
Amortisation
Subsidiary
Balance c/d
Balance b/d
25
For the year
24
____
29
29
Proceed from disposal of subsidiary
90% X 40
36
Goodwill unamortized
Prot on sale of subsidiary
19
T E X T
Net assets
60
Proceeds from sale of subsidiary net of cash & cash equivalent disposable.
Subsidiary cash & bank balance
Bank overdraft
60
3
S T U D Y
Proceeds
(61) 58
118
Great Mountain consolidated cash ow statement for the period ended 31st
March 2003
Sh.
Sh.
million
million
Cash ow from operating activities
Loss before tax
(46)
Adjusted for:
Depreciation
65
Amortisation
Prot on sale of property, plant and equipment
(6)
Interest expense
35
Prot on sale of subsidiary
(19)
Operating prot before working capitals changes
(79)
33
Working capitals changes

Decrease in inventory
40
Trade and other receivable (increase)
(10)
Trade and other payables (decrease)
(34)
Decrease in provision for liabilities and changes
(1)
(5)
542
Cash generated from operations

Interest on nance lease paid
Interest on bank overdraft and other loans
(2)
(37)
(39)
(11)
Tax paid
(5)
Net cash ow from operating activities
(16)
Cash ow from investing activities

Proceeds from sale of subsidiary
Proceeds from sale of property plant and equipment
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
118
9
(65)
Net cash from investing activities
62
Cash ow nancing Activities

Proceeds from issues of shares
130
Repayment of bank loan
(5)
Repayment of nance lease
(8)
Net cash from nancing activities
115
T E X T
(2)
Changes in cash and cash equivalent
161
Cash and cash equivalent
161
S T U D Y
Payment of issue cost
Cash and cash equivalent beginning

Bank overdraft
5
(246)
Cash and cash equivalent ending

Bank overdraft
(241)
(80)
3
(83)
(80)
CHAPTER FIVE
QUESTION ONE
(a)
1.
2.
3.
Historical costs are presumed to represent objective measurement of prices in an arms

length transactions.
Historical costs are assumed to be veriable since they represent the exchange value
of goods and services at the time they were acquired by the enterprise. It is the price
in a realized transaction.
Historical cost is usually used in computing gains or losses that reect increases in
retained earnings rather than an increase that represents a restatement of capital due
in part to the changing value of the monetary unit.
4.
5.
543
Historical cost nds its foundation on the unit of measure assumption. Under this
assumption money is assumed to be a stable unit of measure capable of acting as a
common denominator of values.
Financial statements prepared under this convention provide a basis for determining
the outcome of agency agreements with reasonable certainty and predictability because
the data are relatively objective.
(b)
Failure to disclose the current worth of an accounting entity.

This is because nancial statements prepared under historical cost accounting are
merely statements of historic facts.
b)
Containing non-comparable items

The nancial statements contain items, which are usually a composite of historical costs
and current costs. For example, if a company constructed a building for a sum of Sh 5
million in 1985 and constructed a similar building in 2002 at a cost of Sh 40 million, the
total cost of the buildings will be Sh 45m, thus two amounts are not comparable since
Sh 5 million is a historical cost and Sh 40 million is a current cost.
The effect of non-comparative items can also be proved by looking at items in the
income statement. For example from the following sales gures, there seems to be an
increase in sales over a period of 3 years.
Year
Sales (Sh.)
Average Price Index
20X0
100,000,000
100
2001
150,000,000
200
2002
200,000,000
275
If the same gures are adjusted for price level change using 20X0 as the base year, the situation
would be different assuming a price index of 300 at the end of 2002, the revised sales gures
would be:
Year
Sales adjustments
Average Price Index
20X0
100,000,000 x 300/100
300,000,000
2001
150,000,000 x 300/200
225,000,000
2002
200,000,000 x 300/275
218,181,181
When the sales are adjusted for price level changes, there appears to be a constant decline in
the sales trend.
c)
Creation of problems at the time of replacement of assets.

According to conventional accounting, depreciation is charged on historical cost of
S T U D Y
a)
T E X T
Financial statements prepared under the historical cost convention do not have regard
for changes in price levels. It has thus been argued that they do not reect nancial
realities. This has introduced some limitations to the utility that may be derived from the
use of such statements. These limitations include:
544
d)
the asset. Problems may therefore arise when the asset is to be replaced and larger
funds may be required on account of inationary conditions. Thus the main purpose of
providing for depreciation is defeated.
Mixing of holding and operating gains.
In conventional accounting, gains on account of holding inventories may be mixed up
with operating gains. For example, a business purchased 100 units of a product at Sh.
6 per unit in 2001. It could sell only a half of these units in 2001. In the year 2002, it
purchased another 100 units at Sh. 8 per unit and sold all 150 units at Sh. 10 per unit.
Under historical cost accounting, the prot for 2002 would be calculated as follows:
Shs
Sales (150 x 10)
1,500
Less: cost of sales

500 x 6
(300)
100 x 8
(800)
Gross prot for the year
400
Of the Sh. 400 prot, however, Sh. 100 (50 x Sh. 2) is on account of holding the inventory.
This is because if the units sold in the year 2002 were all bought in the year 2002, the
cost of sales would be Sh 1,200 and the prot would have been Sh 300.
T E X T
S T U D Y
(1,100)
Historical cost accounting fails to make this distinction.

e)
Failure to disclose gains on holding monetary liabilities and losses on holding net
monetary assets.
Holders of xed monetary assets loose in periods of ination while holders of xed
monetary liabilities gain in periods of ination.
Historical cost accounting does not make any attempt to recognize such losses and
gains.
f)
May lead to overtaxing of companies.

Under inationary conditions, the reported prots are overstated and assets understated
when accounts are prepared under historical cost convention. Over reporting of prots
gives rise to a number of problems which includes heavy taxes, heavy dividends resulting
ultimately to heavy nancial strain on the company thus draining capital. Peter Drucker
observed There are costs of today and costs of tomorrow. I know of no business
today that operates at a rate of return to meet the cost of tomorrow, with todays rate of
ination businesses are not making prots but only destroying capital.
(c)
The choice of the appropriate accounting measurement must be guided by the objectives
of nancial reporting derived from either the structure of accounting, the desire to be
able to interpret nancial statements in economic terms or from its value to users.
The selection of the measurement bases exhibit different degrees of relevance and
reliability. Management must seek a balance between relevance and reliability.
545
QUESTION TWO
Workings:
1.
DEPRECIATION ADJUSTMENT
Sh. 000
Current cost depreciation (800 x 275/250)

Historical cost depreciation
880
(800)
80
2.
DISPOSAL OF PLANT ADJUSTMENT
Proceeds from sale
Sh. 000
3,900
Current cost value (6000 x 264/120) 13,200

Depreciation (4,200 x 264/120)
(9,240)
Loss on disposal
Historical cost gain recognized
(3,960)
(60)
(2100)
COST OF SALES ADJUSTMENT
Sh. 000
Total change in value of stock

Ending inventory
Beginning inventory
5,000
(7,200)
(2,100)
Less: change due to volume

Ending inventory 5,100 x 384/400
Beginning inventory (7,200) x 384/363
4,896
(7,617)
621
4.
MONETARY WORKING CAPITAL ADJUSTMENT
Total change in monetary working capital
30.9.20X0 Trade receivables
Trade payables
30.9.19X9 Trade receivables
Trade payable
Change due to operations

30.9.20X0 (3,800 x 384/400)
30.9.19X9 (3,400 x 384 x 384/364.5)
Sh. 000
8,000
(4,200)
3,800
6,300
(2,900)
3,400
400
3,648
(3,582)
66
334
S T U D Y
3.
T E X T
2,160
546
GEARING ADJUSTMENT
19X9 (Sh)
20X0 (Sh)
000
000
2,300
900
3,200
6,000
Average net borrowings

Current tax
Deferred tax
Debentures
Bank overdraft
900
3,200
Cash at bank
(1,200)
10,100
2,000
10,100
20X0
20X0
Retained earnings
8,400
12,000
Average shareholders funds
INCREASE IN NON-MONETARY ASSETS
S T U D Y
T E X T
Production plant
1999: 1,800 x 240/120 1,800
1,800
20X0: 15,200 x 275/250 15,200
1,520
Stock
1999: 7,200 x 366/363 7,200
60
20X0: 5,100 x 402/400 5,100
12,260
26
15,546
Therefore Average net borrowings 2,000 + 10,100

2
= 6,050
Average shareholders funds = 12,260 + 15,546
2
= 13,903
Gearing adjustment
6,050
x (80 + 2,160 + 621 + 334)
6,050 + 13,903
= 969
Stock decrease
Gearing adjustment
Balance c/d
34
969
5,592
6,595
Balance b/d
Old plant (3,960 3,600)
Monetary working capital adjustment
New plant
Balance b/d
3,680
80
360
621
334
1,520
6,595
5,592
547
TCurrent Cost Prot and Loss Account

For the year ended 30 September 20X0
969
(300)
(3,195)
3,005
669
3,674
(2,300)
1,374
Zetoxide Limited
Current Cost Balance Sheet As at 30 September
19X9
20X0
Sh.
Sh. 000
000
Property plant & equipment
Current cost: 6,000 x 240/120
12,000 16,000 x 275/250 = 17,600
Depreciation: (4,200) x 240/120
(8,400) (800) x 275/250 =
(880)
1,800 x 240/120
(3,600) 15,200 x 275/250 = 16,720
Current Assets:
Inventory 7,200 x 366/363
7,269 5,100 x 402/400 =
5,126
Trade receivable
6,300
8,000
Cash at bank
1,200
14,760
13,126
Current Liabilities:
Bank overdraft
900
Trade payables
2,900
4,200
Current tax
2,300
5,200
5,100
9,560
8,026
13,160
24,746
Ordinary share capital:
200,000 ordinary shares of Sh.10
2,000
2,000
3,680
5,592
Current Cost Retained Earnings
6,580
7,954
Shareholders Funds
12,260
15,546
Non-Current Liabilities:
Deferred tax
900
3,200
Debentures
6,000
900
9,200
13,160
24,746
T E X T
Gearing Adjustment
Deduct: Finance costs
Current cost prot before tax
Taxation
Retained Prot
(80)
(2,160)
(621)
(334)
Sh 000
6,200
S T U D Y
Sh 000
Net prot before nance costs
Adjustment on sale plant
Monetary working Capital Adjustment
548
CHAPTER SIX
(a)
(i)
Calculation of amount that would be received by the shareholders.

Statement showing how proceeds from sale of assets would be distributed.
Proceeds from:
Sh. 000
Land and buildings
Sh. 000
60,000
Motor vehicles
32,000
Less: Bank overdraft
10,000
22,000
Fixtures and equipment
15,000
Stocks
12,500
Debtors
5,200
114,700
Less: Liquidation costs
5,000
S T U D Y
T E X T
109,700
70,000
Less: Debentures secured on oating charge
39,700
Less: creditors
14,500
Less: Preference dividend arrears
9,000
10 x Sh.30m x 3yrs
100
16,200
Less: Payment to preference shareholders
16,200
NIL
(ii)
Amount received by shareholders

- Dividend arrears
- Payment for capital
9,000
16,200
25,200
Ordinary shareholders would receive no payment as preference shareholders having

priority over them would not be fully paid due to insufcient proceeds from sale of
assets.
Determination of income that would be earned:
(i)
Calculation of the number of ordinary shares that would be issued on reconstruction of

the company.
Shares-issued to:
549
No. of shares
000
Debenture holders
5,000
(Shs. 50,000,000 Shs. 10)

1,200
[Shs. (30,000,000 Sh. 10) x 2:5]

450
( 10 x Sh.30,000,000 x 3yrs x 5 100 )

100
Ordinary shareholders
[(Shs. 50,000,000 sh. 10] 10)
500
No. of shares
Shares issued for cash to:
x Sh.4,850,000 )
- Present ordinary shareholders

( 4
5
3,880
x Sh.4,850,000 )
S T U D Y
( 1
5
970
T E X T
- Present preference shareholders
12,000
Summary of shares received
Shares issued for capital

Shares issued in settlement of dividend
arrears
Shares issued for cash
(ii)
Debenture
Holders
000
5,000
____
5,000
Preference
Shareholders
000
1,200
450
970
2,620
Prot and loss account extract
Expected prot before interest and tax

Less: Debenture interest
8 x Sh.20,000,000 )
100
Prot before tax
Tax (30%)
Prot after tax
Dividends (80% of Shs. 5.25m)
Retained prot
Shs. 000
9,100
1,600
____
7,500
2,250
5,250
4,200
1,050
Ordinary
shareholders
000
500
3,880
4,380
550
Dividend per share

=
Sh. 4,200,000
20,000,000 shares
=
Shs. 0.35
(6 marks)
(b)
Shida Ltd
Balance sheet as at 2/10/2004
(After Reconstruction Scheme)
ASSETS
Non-Current assets
Land and buildings
Motor vehicles
Shs. 000
60,000
32,000
15,000
S T U D Y
T E X T
Current assets
Stocks
Debtors
Bank
EQUITY AND LIABILITY
Capital and reserves
Capital reserves
24,500
5,200
19,500
120,000
4,700
Non-current liability
8% Debentures
Current liability
Creditors
Shs. 000
107,000
49,200
156,200
124,700
20,000
11,500
156,200
Workings
Goodwill
Motor vehicles
Stocks
Debtors
Reconstruction costs
Ordinary shares to:
- ordinary shareholders
- Preference shareholders
-Preference shareholders
- Debenture holders
8% debentures
Capital reserve (balancing)
CAPITAL REDUCTION A/C

Shs. 000
20,000 Land and buildings
5,000 Ordinary shares
10,000 Preference shares
5,500 Share premium
1,300 Debentures
30,000
Shs. 000
12,000
50,000
30,000
10,000
70,000
4,000
5,000
12,000
4,500
50,000
20,000
4,700
172,000
______
172,000
ORDINARY SHARES ACCOUNT

Shs. 000
120,000
Balance b/d
50,000
Capital reduction A/C
71,500
Bank A/c
48,500
170,000
Ordinary shares A/C
Balance b/d
Bank A/c
Bank A/c
Balance c/d
170,000
BANK ACCOUNT
Shs. 000
48,500 Balance b/d
Reconstruction costs
Creditors A/c
Stock A/c
_____ Balance C/d
48,500
Shs. 000
10,000
4,000
3,000
12,000
19,500
48,500
STOCK ACCOUNT
Shs. 000
18,000 Capital reduction A/c
12,000 Balance c/d
30,000
Shs. 000
5,500
24,500
30,000
CREDITORS A/C
Shs. 000
30,000 Balance b/d
11,500
14,500
Shs. 000
14,500
_____
14,500
(14 marks)
(Total: 20 Marks)
CHAPTER SEVEN
QUESTION ONE
Financial objectives of commercial concerns:
-
To maximise the value of the rms to its owners

Determined by management team
More nancial than theoretical objective
Management is concerned with rms and share valuation as an indication of the level
of reward to shareholders group.
T E X T
Balance c/d
50,000
Shs. 000
S T U D Y
Capital reduction A/C
551
552
Management concentrate on the theoretical objectives reporting on rm and share

valuation helps management in decision making and policy formation process.
Public Corporations
Financial objectives are specied by government rather than determined by management.
Such objectives are difcult to specify in value terms as:

-
There is usually no observable market value of claims on, or right to participate in the
entity.
It is difcult to identify the ownership group, whose value should be maximised.
Financial objectives are usually specied in non-value nancial terms such as target, sometimes
better described as nancial constraints.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Main difference in objectives of Commercial/Public Corporations:

1.
2.
The freedom of the entitys management determine the rm objectives.

The nature of objectives set value or accounting measures.
Financial management should be integrated with the rm and designed to assist in meeting the
rms objectives.
Difference is due to considerable differences in the operation of rm.

-
Technology
Type of market
QUESTION TWO
Accounting has been described as a process whereby transactions of an operating entity are
documented, classied and recorded for the purposes of accumulating and providing nancial
information essential to the conduct of designated activities. Government accounting is an
essential element of the nancial management function of government. In the main government
accounting is directed towards satisfying the accountability and management requirements
of ofcials responsible for the conduct of government activities and operations. It is therefore
concerned with the proper recording of all receipts of government, with the maintenance of
records that reect the propriety of transactions and give evidence of accountability for assets
and other resources available for use and with the classication of data in a way that provides
useful information for control and effective and efcient management of government programme
operations. Amongst the features of government accounting, are the specic roles played by
the Public Accounts committee, the Controller and Auditor-General and the Ministries Accounting
Ofcers to which we turn.
The Public Accounts Committee
A standing committee of a few selected members of Parliament.

Charged with reviewing nancial matters of government.
This is in line with the constitutional requirement that all nancial matters in government
are subject to consideration, approval and review by the legislature.
The deliberations and recommendations of the Public Accounts Committee are based
on the report on funds and accounts by the Auditor-General.
The proceedings at the meeting are recorded verbatim, the Auditor-Generals staff and
those of accounting unit responsible for the deliberations reacting to the points raised
in the report.
Matters deliberated upon include serious ones concerning losses on a large scale,
cases of thefts and Misappropriation, failure to observe regulations and ensure propriety
of expenditure, cases of waste and other administrative inefciencies which have led to
wastage of funds and failure to obtain value for money.
These serious matters require proper explanation on the part of the Accounting Ofcer
and the reaction of the Public Accounts Committee in recommending surcharge of the
principle of personal accountability of government ofcers handling public funds.
The Public Accounts Committees recommendations are then debated in Parliament
which often insists that the government takes necessary corrective action which often
is done.
The role played by the Public Accounts Committee ensures that the government be made
accountable for nancial matters to the legislature. It is a control measure ensuring that
public funds are protected and used only for purposes intended by Parliament. It curbs
any tendency by public ofcers to be lax and wasteful in their handling and management
of public funds. It ensures that proper accounting methods and procedures and controls
are instituted to safeguard public funds.
b)
The Controller and Auditor General is appointed by the President and reports to
Parliament.
He functions independently of executive council.

He controls issues of funds from exchequer that is funds voted for use by Parliament and
intended for by spending units to be withdrawn from the exchequer, must be sanctioned
for by the controller who satises himself that there are adequate funds and that they
will be used for the purpose intended by Parliament.
He carries out both statutory and non statutory audit.
The more serious audit queries known reference sheets are compiled in an audit
report which is presented to Parliament for reviewing the governments nancial
management.
The institution of the ofce of the Controller and Auditor-General plays a very effective
role in the management of public funds.
The Controller and Auditor-General plays the role of a watchdog and the fact that he
reports to Parliament ensures that spending units are not lax in handling public funds.
His independence in performance of his duties ensures that he is not subjected to
undue inuence by the executive. He carries out his duties without fear or favour, he
expresses his opinion, qualies his report and on the whole the powers conferred upon
him by the exchequer and Audit Act, ensures the accountability of the executive to the
legislature. Without any doubt, the role of the Controller and Auditor-General is very
essential in ensuring proper nancial management.
T E X T
a)
553
S T U D Y
554
Although the role may be that of making of the report to Parliament, his ofcers carry
out continuous audit inspection on the records of accounting units of the government,
this minimises incidents of fraud, thefts and other misappropriations.
The recent creation of the Auditor-General for statutory boards underscores the
importance the government attaches to the auditing function, it is indispensable.
c)
-
S T U D Y
T E X T
The voted funds or the grants given by Parliament for use by the accounting ofcer
should be properly handled to ensure regularity and propriety of expenditure.
The accounting ofcer is appointed by the Permanent Secretary Treasury personally
and under the principle of personal accountability.
The letter of appointment spells out his duties and functions, emphasizing the fact
he is answerable to the Public Accounts Committee on serious matters raised by the
controller and Auditor-General.
His responsibilities in management of public funds, safeguarding public property and
running his accounting unit must be carried out with diligence, dedication, with due
regard for efciency and effectiveness.
Amongst his duties are to organise his accounting unit to ensure that functions are
carried out properly, to ensure that public property are safeguarded, to ensure that staff
under him have the necessary technical skills for the proper performance of their duties,
to plan and budget for the nancial requirements of his unit as directed by Treasury, to
instill cost-consciousness in the at all levels of management, to answer audit queries,
to sign the appropriation accounts and so on.
The accounting ofcer

-
The salient point of the role of the Accounting Ofcer is that he is personally held
responsible for any undue happenings affecting public funds in his control. For example,
should he differ with the Minister, his political head, on how to spend certain funds he
has to obey the Ministers directives but should write to Treasury, giving details of the
dispute. This will absolve him of blame should a query arise.
Public servants handling public funds should be held wholly responsible. As head of
his accounting unit, this requirement ensures that funds are not handled with laxity, that
services are provided efciently and effectively, that evidence is produced on how the
funds were spent and last but not least, the taxpayers have got value for money with
regard to the taxes they pay.
QUESTION THREE
One basic feature amongst others, of government accounting, is the concept of fund entities,
which has its origin in the fact that nancial powers of the executive are subject to the control of
the legislature. There is for example, a constitutional requirement that government receipts from
revenue and borrowing should be accumulated into a general fund (consolidated fund) for use
of the government as a whole, and any withdrawals from fund be subjected to sanction by the
legislature.
555
Sinking Funds are also entities set up by legislative action with the purpose of eventual liquidation
or extinction of public debt. This requires annual appropriations into the fund thus building up the
fund as maturation of the debt approaches, until the principal sum is repaid. There is necessity of
investing the appropriations on a special account as the Sinking Fund is built up. Debt requiring
such fund is known as Funded Debt. There is less use of these Funds these days as they entail
tying down funds which would have been used elsewhere.
QUESTION FOUR
Types of non-prot making organisations are the Central Government. Local Authorities, Trade
associations, welfare clubs, religious organisations, and so on, whose motive of existence is not
prot but to advance the welfare of the members or some other.
Take the example of the government accounting system (which includes Local Government
accounting). The accounts are maintained on a receipts and payments basis. Actual receipts
of revenues and actual expenditures incurred are the basis of the nancial statements. These
statements are produces by each accounting unit, not by the government as a whole. Each unit
is charged with the task of providing a service, a function during a nancial year, of a current or
development nature. Since authority to raise revenue and spend public funds is vested in the
legislature, the accounting unit merely has to satisfy accountability requirements while assuming
that services were actually rendered. Any shortfalls in revenue collections or amounts owed to
or by the accounting unit are not debtors or creditors per se but are a mere reection on the
performance of the unit. Its nancial position at the end of the year is known as a statement of
assets and liabilities vis a vis other units or balances held on hand (its assets) and any unused
funds (its liabilities).
S T U D Y
Revolving Funds are also entities set up by legislative action to provide agencies with resources
for the attainment of specied objectives. Government enterprises are usually set up in this
manner. The initial appropriation is made out of the consolidated fund. The receipts generated
in such funds are automatically used by the agency in accordance with the law that set up the
fund. Annual legislative appropriations are not therefore required for the operation of such funds.
However, the original nancing required to the nancing of a programme increase or an incurred
decit would be appropriated out of the central funds of the government. Similarly, any surplus
that may result from the operations carried out under such authority should be deposited in the
central fund as receipts of the government.
T E X T
Provision has also been made for separate treatment of monies received by the government in a
trustee capacity. These are known as trust funds from which withdrawals are made in accordance
with specic statutory provisions. Funds may also be established by law from the proceeds
of earmarked taxes, with provisions for using such receipts to attain specied programme
objectives either with or without prior grant of authority from the legislature. Additionally, in
some cases a contingency fund may be created to enable advances to be made for meeting
necessary and unforeseen expenditures, subject to subsequent authorisation by the legislature.
Funds are also established by legislative action which grants authority to spend for specied
purposes and objectives. Such funds are legal entities. Like the National Social Security Fund
and the National Hospital Insurance Fund, they have their own resources which include property,
receivables, investments and other accountable assets. Any liabilities are set off against the
assets to determine the network of the fund. Such a fund therefore is an independent accounting
entity. An example of a trust fund is the Widows and Childrens Pension Fund to which all married
Civil Servants must contribute a certain amount of their monthly salaries and on retirement or
leaving the service, refunds are made.
556
Revenues to be collected by way of taxes, fees and charges, rates borrowing etc. are estimated
for, and also how those revenues will be expended are also estimated for. It would be difcult to
single out individual taxpayers as debtors or some unpaid bill at the end of the year as a creditor,
since the functions of the state do not stop, but are continuous. The reason for having a nancial
year is to emphasize the constitutional requirement that Parliament is supreme in nance matters
and the government must receive annual authority (by way of the Appropriation Act) to raise
and expend public funds). In this case, it would appear that the receipts and payments basis of
accounting is appropriate.
The other non-prot accounting system is the income and expenditure system of accounting.
Welfare clubs, Members clubs and religious organisations and trade associations rely mainly
on members contributions and necessarily some members will default payment of their dues or
the members may sometimes pay in advance. This is a clear case of creditors and debtors or
accruals. A surplus or decit may be reect and a balance sheet drawn.
S T U D Y
T E X T
This income and expenditure accounting system would appear to be appropriate for such
organisations in view of the fact that their area and scope of activities is limited, its assets are
identiable, and liabilities can be ascertained.
Although we have outlined the differences in approach between accounting in commercial and
non commercial organisations, the dividing line is not straight and clear. It should be remembered
that public sector accounting includes government commercial enterprises with a prot motive.
More over, accounting by non-prot organisations is increasingly adopting practices similar to
those employed in private industry. Such an operation involves setting up a business type
nancial system in which the relationship of receipts and expenditures and the nancial results
obtained continuously are highlighted for the attention of agency management and legislative
review.
QUESTION FIVE
(a)
Planning and control are two important management functions and accounting in the
present day conceptions lays emphasis on these two functions.
In this sense, accounting is described as management accounting, which is any form of
accounting which enables a business to be conducted more efciently. This emphasis
on accounting for efciency, is in every area where accounting must be used, whether
in an organisation with the prot motive or in non-prot motive organisations like the
government.
Budgetary control refers to the use of budgets to control the activities of an organisation.
Take the case of the government, the idea of budgetary control is in fact extensively
used. Finance being such a scarce resource, no government can afford not to budget.
Basically, the annual budget consists estimates of revenue and expenditure and each
accounting unit or cost centre has to show its operational costs being limits beyond
which no expenditure should be incurred without Treasury or Parliamentary approval.
The government budget as whole should not be exceeded without parliamentary
approval. All the estimates are broken up into minor budgets for ministries and/or
departments. Vote control is in essence budgetary control and this is carried on without
prot motive.
Therefore, we can emphasize that the prot motive is not necessary for the use of
budgetary control.
(b)
557
Budgeted levels of expenditure normally represent ceilings over and above which
spending units of government must not go, without approval either by Parliament or
Treasury.
It is both legally and administratively binding for the government to present expenditure estimates
to Parliament.
The expenditure estimates are both of recurrent and development nature and pertain to one
nancial year.
Sitting as a committee of supply, parliament approves the estimates by way of the appropriation
bill which is signed by the President to become an act.
CHAPTER EIGHT
A number of different measurement bases are employed to different degrees and in

varying combination in nancial statements. They include the following:
(i)
Historical Cost
Assets are recorded at the amount of cash or cash equivalents paid or the fair value of
the consideration given to acquire them at the time of their acquisition. Liabilities are
recorded at the amount of proceeds received in exchange for the obligation, or in some
circumstances (for example, income taxes), at the amounts of cash or cash equivalents
expected to be paid to satisfy the liability in the normal course of business.
(ii)
Current cost
Assets are carried at the amount of cash or cash equivalents that would have to be paid
if the same or an equivalent asset was acquired currently. Liabilities are carried at the
undiscounted amount of cash or cash equivalents that would be required to settle the
obligation currently.
(iii) Realisable (settlement) value

Assets are carried at the amount of cash or cash equivalents that would currently
be obtained by selling the asset in an orderly disposal. Liabilities are carried at their
settlement values; that is the undiscounted amounts of cash or cash equivalents
expected to be paid to satisfy the liabilities in the normal course of business.
(iv) Present value
Assets are carried at the present discounted value of the future net cash inows that
the item is expected to generate in the normal course of business. Liabilities are carried
at the present discounted value of the future net cash outows that are expected to be
required to settle the liabilities in the normal course of business.
S T U D Y
(a)
T E X T
QUESTION ONE
558
(b)
Concepts of capital
(i)
A nancial concept of capital is adopted by most enterprises in preparing their nancial

statements. Under a nancial concept of capital, such as invested money or invested
purchasing power capital is synonymous with the net assets or equity of the enterprise.
Under a physical concept of capital, such as operating capability, capital is regarded
as the productive capacity of the enterprise based on, for example, units of output per
day.
(ii)
Financial capital maintenance

Under this concept, a prot is earned only if the nancial (or money) amount of the net
assets at the end of the period exceeds the nancial (or money) amount of net assets at
the beginning of the period, after excluding any distributions to, and contributions from
owners during the period. Financial capital maintenance can be measured in either
normal monetary units or units of constant purchasing power.
S T U D Y
T E X T
(iii) Physical capital maintenance

Under this concept, a prot is earned only if the physical productive capacity (or operating
capability) of the enterprise (or the resources or funds needed to achieve that capacity)
at the end of the period exceeds the physical productive capacity at the beginning of the
period after excluding any distributions from owners, during the period.
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
559
REFERENCES
S T U D Y
T E X T
560
S T U D Y
T E X T
561
REFERENCES
S T U D Y
T E X T
562
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
563
GLOSSARY
S T U D Y
T E X T
564
INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND FINANCE
565
GLOSSARY
Accountants report in a prospectus: These are reports prepared by independent reporting
accountants as required by the appointing authority or by legislation
Amalgamations occur where two or more companies wish to combine their businesses and a
new identity for the combined business is sought.
Assets: an asset is recognised in the balance sheet when it is probable that the future economic
benets will ow to the enterprise and the asset has a cost or value that can be measured
reliably.
control.
Borrowing costs: interest and other costs incurred by an enterprise in connection with the
borrowingof funds.

(a)
provides a single product or service or a group of related products and services and
(b)
that is subject to risks and returns that are different from those of other business
segments.
is then wound up.
S T U D Y
chosen and established by the bodies overseeing the accounting profession.
T E X T
Accounting prot: is the prot reported to the shareholders. This prot is based on accounting
concepts and principles.
566

companys capital, usually to make the company more appealing, for the issuing of new capital
to raise funds and/or to avoid liquidation.
Cash ow interest rate risk: The risk that future cash ows of a nancial instrument will uctuate
because of changes in market interest rates.
S T U D Y
T E X T

Contingent asset: a possible asset that arises from past events, and whose existence will be
conrmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not
wholly within the control of the enterprise.
Contingent liability: a possible obligation depending on whether some uncertain future event
occurs, or a present obligation but payment is not probable or the amount cannot be measured
reliably.
Control: The power to govern the nancial and operating policies of an activity so as to obtain
benets from it.
Constructive obligation: arises if past practice creates a valid expectation on the part of a third
party, for example, a retail store that has a long-standing policy of allowing customers to return
merchandise within, say, a 30-day period.
Corporation tax: is the tax payable by a company as a result of generating prots from trading.
Cost of sales adjustment (COSA) is the additional cost of sales arising due to ination. Currency
risk: is the risk that the value of a nancial instrument will uctuate due to changes in foreign
exchange rates.
Current service cost is the increase in the present value of the dened benet obligation
resulting from employee service in the current period.
GLOSSARY
567
Credit risk: The risk that one party to a nancial instrument will fail to discharge an obligation
and cause the other party to incur a nancial loss.
Deferred tax: is the corporation tax that is likely to be incurred on the activities of a company
Deferred Tax Accounting Method: Under this method, income tax is considered to be an
expense incurred by the enterprise in earning income and is accrued in the same periods as
the revenue and expenses to which it relates. The resulting tax effects of timing differences
are included in the tax charge in the income statement and in the deferred tax balances in the
balance sheet.

goods.
Depreciation base: cost less estimated residual value.
Employee benets: are all forms of consideration given by an entity in exchange for service
Environmental auditing: auditing a business to assess its impact on the environment or

the systematic examination of the interactions between any business operation and its
surroundings.
Equity: This refers to the residual interests in the assets of the business.
Equity instrument: Any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after
deducting all of its liabilities.

S T U D Y
plans.
T E X T
568
Fair value: the amount for which an asset could be exchanged between a knowledgeable, willing
buyer and a knowledgeable, willing seller in an arms length transaction.
S T U D Y
T E X T
Full deferral: requires that full tax effects of all timing differences are recognised as they arise.
The approach is arithmetically accurate but can lead to the build up of large, meaningless
provisions appearing on the balance sheet.
operates.
Gearing Adjustment: This is the gain due to the shareholders as a result of nancing the assets
through loans.

(a)
(b)
provides products and services within a particular economic environment and

that is subject to risks and returns that are different from those of components operating
GLOSSARY
569
Identiability: An intangible asset is identiable when it is separable (capable of being separated

and sold, transferred, licensed, rented, or exchanged, either individually or as part of a package)
or arises from contractual or other legal rights, regardless of whether those rights are transferable
or separable from the entity or from other rights and obligations.
Intangible asset: An identiable non-monetary asset without physical substance.
Interest cost is the increase during a period in the present value of a dened benet obligation
which arises because the benets are one period closer to settlement.
Investor in a joint venture: A party to a joint venture and does not have joint control over that
joint venture.
Joint control: The contractually agreed sharing of control over an economic activity such that no
individual contracting party has control.
reasonably certain that the lessee will exercise.
Lessee: this is a person, who under an agreement, obtains from another person (the lessor) the
S T U D Y
Inventories: assets held for sale in the normal course of business.
T E X T
Interest rate risk: is the risk that the value of a nancial instrument will uctuate due to changes
in market interest rates.
570
Liability: Present obligation as a result of past events. Settlement is expected to result in an

outow of resources (payment)
Liquid risk (or funding risk): The risk that an entity will encounter difculty in raising funds to
meet commitments associated with nancial instruments.
income statement.
the lessor) together with the residual value.
S T U D Y
T E X T
a)
b)
Pool the assets contributed by various entities that are not under
common control, and
use those assets to provide benets to employees of more than one entity, on the basis
Net Realizable Value: This is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less
the estimated costs of completion and processing costs.
Obligating event: is an event that creates a legal or constructive obligation and, therefore,
results in an enterprise having no realistic alternative but to settle the obligation.
Operating capability of the business entity is its ability to replace assets as they are consumed
or worn out or its ability to produce the same volume or value of goods i.e. the next year as in
the current year.
Other long-term employee benets are employee benets (other than post employment
benets and termination benets) which do not fall due wholly within twelve months after the end
of the period in which the employees render the related service.
GLOSSARY
571
Partial deferral: requires that the income tax expense excludes the tax effects of certain timing
differences when there is reasonable evidence that those timing differences will not reverse for
some considerable period (at least 3 years) ahead.
Plan assets comprise:

a)
b)
Assets held by a long-term employee benet fund; and

Qualifying insurance policies
Provision: A liability of uncertain timing or amount.
Qualifying asset: this is an asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready
for its intended use or sale.
Related party transaction is a transfer of resources, services, or obligations between related

Related parties: parties are considered to be related if one party has the ability to control the
other party or to exercise signicant inuence or joint control over the other party in making
nancial and operating decisions.
Segment assets and segment liabilities: Those operating assets (liabilities) that are directly
S T U D Y
Prospectus is a statement issued to prospective shareholders and debenture holders inviting

them to subscribe for securities in the company.
T E X T
Price risk: is the risk that the value of a nancial instrument will uctuate as a result of changes in
market prices whether those changes are caused by factors specic to the individual instrument
or its issuer or factors affecting all securities traded in the market.
572

that:
(a) result from operating activities and
(b) are directly attributable or reasonably allocable to a segment. This includes interest
insurance company, etc.).
interest.
Segment revenue: Revenue, including inter-segment revenue, that is directly attributable or

S T U D Y
T E X T
not control them.

Tax-adjusted prot: is the prot on which tax is assessed - taxable income (tax loss). This
prot is determined in accordance with the rules laid down in the Income Tax Act upon which
the provision for taxes payable is determined. This prot takes into account capital allowances,
stock relief, disallowable expenditure and so on.
Taxes Payable Method: It ignores deferred tax and thus the income tax expense is normally
equal to the provision for tax payable. The extent and potential tax effect of timing differences
are sometimes disclosed in notes to the nancial statements.

a)
b)
an entitys decision to terminate an employees employment before the normal retirement

date, or
an employees decision to accept voluntary redundancy in exchange for those
benets.
GLOSSARY
573
that have occurred by the balance sheet date.
Timing Differences: is items reported in the accounts in periods different from those in which
Value added is the difference between the value of the goods or services produced (i.e. sales
revenue) and the value of goods and services purchased from outsiders (i.e. the cost of broughtin material and services).
Venturer: A party to a joint venture and has joint control over that joint venture.
employment.
S T U D Y
Useful life: In the case of an operating lease either the period over which a xed asset is
expected to be used by the enterprise; or the number of production (or similar) units expected
to be obtained from the asset by the enterprise. In case of a nance lease, the useful life of the
asset is the lease term.
T E X T
S T U D Y
T E X T
574
S T
T SU
U TD
DUY
YD Y
T
S
T E
E TX
X ET
TX T
575
INDEX
S T U D Y
T E X T
576
577
INDEX
A
Accounting concepts: 450
Accounting models: 295, 323, 324
Accounting policies: 106, 130, 218, 259, 446, 447, 454, 479, 565
Accounting principles: 445, 446, 450, 458, 479, 565
Accounting prot: 151, 565
Accounting research: 474
Accounting standards: 458, 459, 479, 565
Actuarial gains and losses: 170, 190, 196
Amalgamations: 565
Amortised cost: 114, 115, 118
Assets: 8, 17, 22, 28, 33, 34, 44, 47, 52, 54, 55, 58, 61, 67, 68, 70, 77, 97, 137, 156, 169, 193,
195, 251, 252, 261, 298, 299, 305, 307, 310, 311, 313, 314, 316, 317, 318, 319, 342, 350, 351,
353, 367, 447, 448, 477, 478, 480, 488, 489, 494, 496, 502, 504, 511, 515, 516, 517, 518, 527,
528, 529, 533, 547, 557, 565, 571
Associate companies: 3, 60
B
Balance sheet: 14, 17, 22, 31, 45, 46, 50, 58, 61, 64, 72, 138, 161, 187, 301, 326, 367, 458,
528, 535, 550
Borrowing costs: 508, 565
Business combination: 7, 220
Business segment: 257, 258, 282, 565
C
Capitalisation: 344, 508
Capital maintenance: 293
Capital reduction: 331, 332, 334, 365, 366, 551, 566
Carrying amount: 89, 96, 111, 133, 521, 566
Cash ow: 62, 91, 105, 124, 125, 126, 134, 203, 245, 246, 249, 250, 255, 256, 282, 284, 447,
498, 519, 541, 542, 566, 568
Consolidated nancial statements: 5, 7, 69, 510, 566
S T U D Y
Asset: 156, 170, 317, 451, 492, 507, 539
T E X T
Amortization: 256, 287, 528
578
Consolidation: 4, 35, 39, 40, 511

Constructive obligation: 177, 566
Contingent assets: 517
Contingent liabilities: 474, 517
Control: 5, 23, 32, 33, 52, 55, 69, 510, 566
Corporation tax: 143, 144, 145, 152, 153, 156, 159, 191, 196, 566
Cost of sales adjustment: 293, 311, 312, 315, 323, 546, 547, 566
Credit risk: 105, 107, 134, 567
Currency risk: 105, 134, 566
Current purchasing power: 294, 297, 323, 325
D
Deferred tax: 144, 146, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 157, 159, 161, 191, 196, 219, 227, 250,
314, 318, 326, 475, 501, 535, 539, 546, 547, 567
S T U D Y
T E X T
Dened benet plans: 168, 173, 176, 187, 192, 567

Dened contribution plans: 168, 173, 175, 192, 567
Depreciation: 15, 18, 19, 46, 47, 50, 52, 53, 81, 83, 95, 152, 156, 157, 161, 242, 247, 250, 251,
253, 255, 284, 287, 293, 298, 299, 300, 304, 305, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 314, 315, 317,
318, 323, 326, 504, 526, 529, 530, 532, 533, 534, 535, 540, 541, 545, 546, 547, 567
Depreciation adjustment: 293, 311, 315, 323, 526, 546, 547, 567
Depreciation base: 567
Disclosure: 96, 98, 128, 129, 132, 162, 165, 172, 223, 224, 260, 263, 269, 322, 458, 472, 497,
500, 505, 507, 509, 513
E
Earnings per share: 203, 204, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 285
Employee benets: 143, 144, 166, 168, 191, 197, 221, 536, 567
Environmental auditing: 473, 479, 567
Equipment: 31, 47, 48, 53, 54, 81, 82, 83, 246, 247, 307, 308, 310, 311, 344, 345, 346, 503
Equity: 12, 23, 25, 26, 34, 35, 69, 100, 103, 108, 119, 127, 130, 134, 163, 252, 278, 279, 280,
281, 307, 310, 314, 367, 448, 478, 480, 506, 511, 512, 567
Equity instrument: 100, 108, 134, 567
Equity method: 25, 34, 69, 512, 567
Exchange difference: 40, 41, 43, 45, 46, 69, 256, 508, 568
External reconstruction: 331, 333, 365, 568
INDEX
579
F
Fair value: 7, 46, 79, 100, 107, 123, 124, 125, 186, 188, 189, 221, 487, 513, 519, 520, 521, 533,
534, 536, 568
Financial assets: 111, 113, 117, 119, 120, 121, 129, 130, 519
Financial instruments: 60, 77, 89, 104, 108, 109, 112, 117, 518
Financial statements: 446, 447, 478, 496, 543, 568
Foreign currency: 41, 92
Foreign operation: 4, 40, 69, 70, 568
Full deferral: 154, 191, 568
G
Gearing adjustment: 311, 318, 546
gearing ratio. See debt ratio
gearing ratios. See Liquidity ratios
Government assistance: 507

Group structure: 3, 69, 70, 568
H
Hedging: 122, 123
I
Impairment: 8, 18, 28, 58, 60, 77, 89, 93, 95, 97, 119, 120, 133, 137, 138, 488, 494, 503, 511,
515, 569
Income statement: 10, 14, 16, 50, 61, 118, 121, 123, 124, 127, 187, 309
Index: 315, 316, 543
Ination accounting: 293, 325
Intangible assets: 252, 517, 518
Interest cost: 169, 178, 190, 569
Interest rate risk: 105, 106, 134, 569
Inventory: 9, 14, 17, 22, 29, 31, 47, 49, 50, 52, 53, 54, 124, 227, 307, 308, 310, 311, 326, 342,
345, 349, 351, 529, 530, 531, 547
Investment property: 520
Investment ratios. See equity ratios
S T U D Y
Goodwill: 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17, 18, 22, 23, 28, 31, 32, 39, 46, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 67, 68, 72, 92,
96, 227, 255, 256, 336, 339, 341, 344, 367, 488, 516, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 540, 541, 550
T E X T
Geographical segment: 257, 258, 282, 568
580
J
Jointly controlled entities: 512
Joint control: 33, 69, 569
Joint Venture: 99, 262, 284, 512
Joint venture: 4, 33, 69, 70, 569
L
Lease: 77, 78, 79, 80, 85, 89, 133, 248, 504, 505, 569
Lease term: 79, 133, 569
Lessee: 78, 133, 504, 569
Lessor: 78, 133, 504, 569
Liabilities: 17, 29, 52, 54, 68, 87, 161, 252, 307, 310, 313, 314, 447, 448, 449, 478, 480, 481,
489, 516, 517, 528, 529, 534, 547, 557
Liability: 100, 155, 156, 157, 158, 570
S T U D Y
T E X T
Liquidation: 347, 548

Liquid risk: 105, 134, 570
M
Market risk: 105, 132
Measurement: 7, 28, 162, 163, 164, 220, 447, 448, 479, 480, 494, 515, 570
Merger: 4, 36, 38, 70
Minimum lease payment: 79, 133, 570
Monetary working capital adjustment: 293, 311, 312, 315, 316, 323, 546, 570
Multi-employer plans: 174
N
Neo-classical: 297, 323, 324
Non-cancellable lease: 78
O
Obligating event: 570
Operating capability: 323, 570
Operating lease: 80, 84, 504
INDEX
581
P
Parent: 3, 5, 69, 571
Partial deferral: 154, 191, 571
Party: 263, 264, 509
Past service cost: 170, 179, 183, 189, 190, 193, 196, 197, 536
Plant: 9, 12, 31, 41, 88, 246, 247, 327, 336, 339, 341, 342, 503, 527
Plan assets: 169, 184, 185, 506, 571
Post employment benets: 195
Price risk: 105, 134, 571
Property: 6, 14, 17, 64, 65, 96, 221, 227, 228, 246, 247, 287, 326, 475, 477, 503, 527, 529,
539
Prospectus: 571
Provisions: 146, 264, 489, 516
R
Related party: 263, 265, 266, 267, 509, 571
Related party transaction: 263, 265, 509, 571
Reportable segment: 257, 283, 571
Rights issue: 203, 282, 571
S
Segmental reports: 204, 285
Segment expenses: 258, 283, 572
Segment revenue: 258, 260, 283, 572
Shares: 20, 54, 117, 268, 274, 275, 281, 307, 310, 311, 318, 335, 347, 353, 513, 549
Social responsibility accounting: 445, 446, 470, 481
Subsidiary: 3, 5, 10, 11, 52, 69, 70, 251, 538, 539, 540, 541, 572
T
Temporary difference: 144, 146, 191, 572
Termination benets: 167, 168, 192, 195, 506, 572
Timing difference: 156, 157
S T U D Y
Qualifying asset: 571
T E X T
582
U
Useful life: 79, 573
V
Venturer: 33, 69, 512, 573
S T U D Y
T E X T
Vested employee benets: 168, 192, 197, 536, 573

Advanced Financial Reporting PDF

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advanced Financial Reporting PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advanced Financial Reporting PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ADVANCED FINANCIAL

without the prior written consent of the copyright owner.

ISBN NO: 9966-760-27-X

Fax: +254 (0) 20 607498

PART A...................................................................................................................................... vii

CHAPTER ONE .......................................................................................................................... 1

CHAPTER FOUR .................................................................................................................... 201

PART C ................................................................................................................................... 371

CHAPTER SEVEN .................................................................................................................. 373

PART B ................................................................................................................................... 199

ASSETS AND LIABILITIES (PART B) ................................................................................... 143

ANSWERS TO EXAM QUESTIONS....................................................................................... 523

ACCOUNTING FOR GROUPS

DEFINITION OF KEY TERMS

Parent: An entity that has one or more subsidiaries.

Understand the basic principles of acquisition and merger accounting.

Students should, therefore, understand these topics.

ACCOUNTING FOR GROUPS

BASIC CONSOLIDATION (IAS 27)

FAST FORWARD: A parent is required to present consolidated nancial statements in which it

Subsidiary: An entity, including an unincorporated entity such as a partnership that is controlled

Parent: An entity that has one or more subsidiaries.

Consolidated nancial statements: The nancial statements of a group presented as those of

The following are important denitions in IAS 27:

The parent is itself a wholly-owned subsidiary, or is a partially owned subsidiary of

1.1.1 The consolidation process

Elimination of inter-company indebtness as a result of inter-company transactions for

ACCOUNTING FOR GROUPS

1.1.2 Requirements of IFRS 3 Business combination

Measurement of acquired assets and liabilities

ACCOUNTING FOR GROUPS

Freehold land and buildings (net book value)

Investment in Andei Limited

Dividend: Interim paid

Motor vehicles (net book value)

Plant and machinery (net book value)

Taxation: installment tax paid

Closing inventory was Sh.24, 200,000 in Mtito and Sh.19,200,000 in Andei.

Mtito Ltd and Andei Ltd

Less closing inventory

Prot before tax

Income tax expense

Workings for intergroup sales

ACCOUNTING FOR GROUPS

Group expenses = 184700 + (5/12 X 123,600) = 236,200

Total dividend payable by Andei = 6,000

Dividend receivable = 2,400

Pre acq COC)

Post acq P&L)

Prot after tax in Andei

Less pre acq

Amount in Group P & L

Statement of retained prots:

Group share 80%)

Mtito Ltd and Andei Ltd

Land and Buildings

Plant and Machinery

Total Equity and Liabilities